005798 A00_Sys V_Command_Reference_Jul88 A00 Sys V Command Reference Jul88

005798-A00_SysV_Command_Reference_Jul88 005798-A00_SysV_Command_Reference_Jul88

User Manual: 005798-A00_SysV_Command_Reference_Jul88

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 826

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

SysV Command
Reference
0057I'I-AOO

apollo

SysV Command Reference
Order No. 005798-AOO

Apollo Computer Inc.
330 Billerica Road
Chelmsford, MA 01824

Confidential and Proprietary. Copyright © 1988 Apollo Computer, Inc., Chelmsford, Massachusetts.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the Copyright Laws of the United States. All Rights Reserved.

First Printing: July 1988
Copyright 1979, 1980, 1983, 1986 Regents of the University of California and 1979, AT&T Bell Laboratories,
Incorporated.
UNIX is a registered trademark of AT&T in the USA and other countries.
Apollo and Domain are registered trademarks of Apollo Computer Inc.
Concept is a trademark of Human Designed Systems. DEC, PDP, and VT I 00 are registered trademarks of Digital
Equipment Corporation. Datamedia is a registered trademark of Datamedia Corporation. Diabolo, ETHERNET,
and Xerox are registered trademarks of Xerox Corporation. Hazeltine is a registered trademark of Hazeltine
Corporation. IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. Imagen is a
registered trademark of Imagen Corporation. Tektronix and Tektronix 4010 are registered trademarks of
Tektronix, Inc. Teletype is a registered trademark of AT&T. VAX is a registered trademark of Digital
Equipment Corporation. Versatec is a registered trademark of Versatec.
3DGMR, Aegis, D3M, DGR, Domain/Access, Domain/Ada, Domain/Bridge, Domain/C, Domain/ComController,
Domain/CommonLISP, Domain/CORE, Domain/Debug, Domain/DFL, Domain/Dialogue, Domain/DQC,
Domain/lX, Domain/Laser-26, Domain/LISP, DomainjPAK, DomainjPCC, Domain/PCI, Domain/SNA, Domain
X.25, DPSS, DPSS/MaiI, DSEE, FPX, GMR, GPR, GSR, NLS, Network Computing Kernel, Network Computing
System, Network License Server, Open Dialogue, Open Network Toolkit, Open System Toolkit, Personal
Supercomputer, Personal Super Workstation, Personal Workstation, Series 3000, Series 4000, Series 10000, and
VCD-8 are trademarks of Apollo Computer Inc.
Apollo Computer Inc. reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this
publication without prior notice, and the reader should in all cases consult Apollo Computer Inc. to determine
whether any such changes have been made.
THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS GOVERNING THE SALE OF APOLLO COMPUTER INC. HARDWARE
PRODUCTS AND THE LICENSING OF APOLLO COMPUTER INC. SOFTWARE PROGRAMS CONSIST
SOLELY OF THOSE SET FORTH IN THE WRITTEN CONTRACTS BETWEEN APOLLO COMPUTER
INC. AND ITS CUSTOMERS. NO REPRESENTATION OR OTHER AFFIRMATION OF FACT
CONTAINED IN THIS PUBLICATION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO STATEMENTS
REGARDING CAPACITY, RESPONSE-TIME PERFORMANCE, SUITABILITY FOR USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF PRODUCTS DESCRIBED HEREIN SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE A WARRANTY BY
APOLLO COMPUTER INC. FOR ANY PURPOSE, OR GIVE RISE TO ANY LIABILITY BY APOLLO
COMPUTER INC. WHATSOEVER.
IN NO EVENT SHALL APOLLO COMPUTER INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
LOST PROFITS) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO TillS PUBLICATION OR THE INFORMATION
CONTAINED IN IT, EVEN IF APOLLO COMPUTER INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED, KNEW OR SHOULD
HAVE KNOWN OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
THE SOFTWARE PROGRAMS DESCRIBED IN TillS DOCUMENT ARE CONFIDENTIAL
INFORMATION AND PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF APOLLO COMPUTER INC. OR ITS LICENSORS.

Preface

The SysV Command Reference describes the user commands and games available
in Domain®/OS SysV. This manual is intended for users who are familiar with
System V Release 3 UNIX software and Domain/OS. It provides neither a general
overview of Domain/OS SysV nor details of the implementation of the system. We
assume that you are already familiar with the material in Using Your SysV Environment.
We have divided the SysV Command Reference into two sections:
Commands

Section 1 provides reference material on user commands.

Games

Section 6 provides reference material on games.

Each section consists of independent entries of a page or so each. The name of the
entry is in the upper comers of its pages, together with the section number, and
sometimes a letter characteristic of a class. For example, the ftp command is lC.
Each section begins with intro(N), followed by domain(N), where N is the number
of the section. Entries thereafter appear in alphabetical order.
Some entries may describe several features. In such cases, the entry may appear
only once, alphabetized under its "primary" name, the name that appears at the
upper comers of each manual page.
Entries with Domain/OS SysV (as contrasted with a simple SysV) centered at the
top of the page describe features unique to Domain/OS SysV. Each section contains an entry with the name domain that provides an overview of the unique
features in that section.
We use the convention name(N) to cite entry name in section N of this and other
manuals. References to sections other than 1 or 6 mean that name is contained in
another manual. The SysV Programmer's Reference contains Sections 2, 3, 4, and
5. Managing SysV System Software includes Sections 1M and 7.

Preface

All entries are based on a common fonnat, not all of whose parts always appear:
NAME

Gives the name of the feature and briefly states its purpose.

SYNOPSIS

Summarizes the use of the feature being described. In the case
of system calls and subroutines, this summary usually specifies
header files (by way of the appropriate #include  preprocessor statement) containing definitions needed by the call or
subroutine. This summary also usually contains a set of declarations as they might appear in a C-language function header
defining the call or subroutine.

DESCRIPTION

Describes the feature.

EXAMPLE(S)

Gives example(s) of usage, where appropriate.

FILES

Gives the filenames that are built into the feature.

SEE ALSO

Gives pointers to related infonnation.

DIAGNOSTICS

Discusses the diagnostic indications that may be produced.
Messages that are intended to be self-explanatory are not listed.

NOTES

Gives generally "helpful hints" about the use of the feature.

WARNINGS

Points out potential pitfalls.

BUGS

Gives known bugs and sometimes deficiencies.

CAVEATS

Gives details of the implementation that might affect usage.

A "Table of Contents" and a "Pennuted Index" derived from that table precede
Section 1. The Pennuted Index is a list of keywords, given in the second of three
columns, together with the context in which each keyword is found. Keywords are
either topical keywords or the names of manual entries. Entries are identified with
their section numbers shown in parentheses. This is important because there is considerable duplication of names among the sections, arising principally from components that exist only to exercise a particular system call. The right column lists
the name of the manual page on which each keyword may be found. The left
column contains useful infonnation about the keyword.

Online Access
We deliver a machine-readable version of this manual (and Sections 1M and 7) in
the files
/sysS.3/usr/catman/u _man/man [16]/name .[16]class,
and
/sysS.3/usr/catman/a _man/man[17]/name.[1 M7]class,

ii Preface

where name is that of the feature documented, [1671M] is either 1, 6, 7, or 1M
depending upon the section, and class (C for communication"G for graphics, etc.)
mayor may not appear.
If you have installed these files on your workstation, or you have links from your
workstation to one where these files are installed, you may access them by way of
the man(l) command. (To read about man, type

$ man I man
or refer to man(l) in this book).

Related Manuals
The file /install/doc/apoll%s.v. "latest software release number" _manuals lists
current titles and revisions for all available manuals.
For example, at Software Release 10 (SRIO.0) refer to the file
/instali/dociapolioios.v.10.O manuals to check that you are using the correct version of manuals. You may also want to use this file to check that you have ordered
all of the manuals that you need.
(If you are using the (AegisTM, envirorunent, you can access the same information
through the Help system by typing help manuals.)
Refer to the Domain Documentation Quick Reference (002685) and the Domain
Documentation Master Index (011242) for a complete list of related documents.
For introductory information about the Domain/OS system and details about using
the SysV environment, refer to the following documents:
• Getting Started with Domain/OS

(002348)

• Using Your SysV Environment

(011022)

• Domain Display Manager Command Reference

(011418)

For more information on programming in the Domain/OS SysVenvirorunent, refer
to the following documents:
• Domain/OS Call Reference, Volumes 1 and 2

(007196 and 0(2888)

• Domain/OS Programming Environment Reference (011010)
• Domain Binder and Librarian Reference

(004977)

• Domain C Language Refe,.ence

(002093)

Preface iii

• SysV Programmer's Reference

(005799)

• Managing SysV System Software

(01085l)

Problems, Questions, and Suggestions
We appreciate comments from the people who use our system. To make it easy for
you to communicate with us, we provide the Apollo® Product Reporting (APR)
system for comments related to hardware, software, and documentation. By using
this formal channel you make it easy for us to respond to your comments.
You can get more information about how to submit an APR by consulting the
appropriate Command Reference manual for your environment (Aegis, BSD, or
SysV). Refer to the mkapr shell command description. You can view the same
description online by typing:

$ man 1 mkapr (in the SysVenvironment)
% man I mkapr (in the BSD environment)

$ help mkapr (in the Aegis environment)
Alternatively, you may use the Reader's Response form at the back of this manual
to submit comments about the manual.

Documentation Conventions
This manual uses the following symbolic conventions:
literal values

Bold words or characters in formats and command
descriptions represent commands or keywords that you
must use literally. Bold words in text indicate the first
use of a new term. Filenames and pathnames are also
in bold.

user-supplied values

Placeholders for symbols that you must supply are
printed in italics. For example, the names chosen for
call arguments appear in italics.

sample user input

In samples, information that the user enters appears in
bold.

examples

Examples of program
typeface.

iv Preface

code

appear

in

this

Square brackets enclose optional items in formats and
command descriptions.
Braces enclose a list from which you must choose an
item in formats and command descriptions.
A vertical bar separates items in a list of choices.
Ellipses mean that the previous argument-prototype
may be repeated.
An argument beginning with a minus sign ("-") usually means that it is an option-specifying argument
used by the command itself, even if it appears in a
position where a file name could appear. Therefore, it
is unwise to have files whose names begin with "_".

---88---

This symbol indicates the end of a section.

Preface v

Contents

SysV Commands
1: Commands and Application Programs
intro( I) ............................................................................... introduction to commands
domain( I) ...•......•...••....•.....•••..••••...••• Domain/OS-specific commands and extensions
300(1) ............................... handle special functions of DASI 300 and 300s terminals
450(1) .......................................... handle special functions of the DASI 450 terminal
admin( I) .................................................................. create and administer sees files
are I) ........................................... archive and library maintainer for portable archives
asa( I ).......................................................... interpret ASA carriage control characters
ate I) ......................................................................•. execute commands at a later time
awk( I ) ....................................................... pattern scanning and processing language
banner( I ) ................................................................................................. make posters
basename( I) .••..••••.•••...••••..•.•••••.•.•..••••.•••.•..•••...•••..•••••. deliver portions of path names
batch( I) ...•..•...•....••.....•....•...••........•.....•..........•.....•. execute commands at a later time
bc( I) .............................................................. arbitrary-precision arithmetic language
bdiff( I) ............................................................................................................. big diff
bfs( I) .•.....•......•...•......•..........•.•..•.....•....•...•.....•.....•.•..•.•.•.••••..••....•••...•. big file scanner
bldt( 1) ••..••••.••.••.••••••.•••.••••••••••.••..•.••..•••••.•••••. display time operating system was built
cal( 1) ...................................................................................................... print calendar
calendar( I) .••....••••..•.••..•••••..•••.....•........•.•...•.•.•.••....•••..•.••...•••.••••....•••...•••..•.•.. reminder
cancel( I) .................................................... send/cancel requests to an LP line printer
cat( 1) ..........................................................•.........•............. concatenate and print files
cb(l) ................................................................•................•....•..•.. e program beautifier
cc( I ) ........................................................................................................... e compiler
cdC I ) .................................................................................... change working directory
cdc(1 ) ............................•.................. change the delta commentary of an sees delta
cflow( I) ...•............•.•...............••....••....•..•....••..•..•...••..•.....•.••..•••. generate e flowgraph
chacl( I ) ............................................................................... change access control list
chfn(l) .................................................................... change password file information
chgrp(l ).............................................................•....................• change owner or group
chmod(l) ................................................................................................. change mode
chown( I) ................................................................................. change owner or group
chsh( I) .......•.......•..••.......•..••....•..•..•..•..••....•.•...•••.••.• change password file information
cmp( 1) ••..•.•.••••••.•••.••.••••.•.•••••..•••.•••••.•••••...••••••••••••••.••••••.••••••••••.••••.• compare two files
col( I) ....................................................................................... filter reverse line feeds

Contents vii

comb(l) ....•...........................•...•................................................ combine sees deltas
comm( I) .......................................... select or reject lines common to two sorted files
cp( 1).............................................................................................................. copy files
cpacl( 1) ................................................................................... copy access control list
cpio( 1)............................................................................. copy file archives in and out
cpp( 1 ).•.................................•...........•.............................. the e language preprocessor
cpscr(l )..................................................................... copy the current display to a file
crddf(l ) .........•................................ create, display, or modify a device descriptor file
crontab( 1) ........................................................................................... user crontab file
crp( 1)..........................................•..................•........ create a process on a remote node
crpad(l) •..................................................•............ create a transcript pad and window
crty( 1)..............•................................................................................ create a new type
crtyobj(l) ...................................................... create a type object module for binding
csplit( 1) ................•................................................................................... context split
ctrace(l) ...................................................................................... e program debugger
cu(lc) ................................................................................. call another UNIX system
cut( 1) ........................................................ cut out selected fields of each line of a file
cvt_font(l) ............................................ convert fonts from pre-SRIO to SRIO format
cvtname( 1) .... convert pathnames between upper and lowercase and preserve colons
cvtrgy(l) ...................................... convert registry between SR9.x and SRIO formats
cxref(l) ............................................................... generate e program cross-reference
date( 1) ••....••...........•....•....••...•..••..•.••...........•...•.•.........•.....•.....••... print and set the date
dbacl(l) •.....................................•.....• Domain/Dialog based access control list editor
dbx( 1) ............................................................................................................ debugger
dc( 1) ..••.....•....................................................•...................................... desk calculator
dd(l) ........................................................................................ convert and copy a file
dde(l) .........................................•........ Domain Distributed Debugging Environment
delta(l) ............................................................ make a delta (change) to an sees file
diff( I ) .........................................•...................................... differential file comparator
diff3( 1) .............................................•.................... 3-way differential file comparison
dircmp(l) ................................................................................... directory comparison
dirname(l) ........................•......•..•.....•...........•.............. deliver portions of path names
disable( 1)............................................................................ enable/disable LP printers
dlty( 1) ...................................................................................................... delete a type
dm(l) ............................................................................. Display Manager Commands
dspst(l) ................................................................... display process status graphically
du(l) ......•.......•...........•...•....•..................................................... summarize disk usage
dump(l) .............................................................. dump selected parts of an object file
echo( 1) ................................................................................................ echo arguments
ed( 1)............•...........•...............•..................•..................................•.•............ text editor
edfont( 1).......•...................................•........................................... edit a character font
edit( 1)•.•••••••••....•••.•.••...•..•.•••...••.....•....•••.••.• text editor (variant of ex for casual users)
edmtdesc(l) ...................................................................... edit magtape descriptor file
egrep( 1) ................................ search a file for a pattern using full regular expressions
emt(l) .........................••.......................•............•................... emulate a dumb terminal
enable(l) ............................................................................ enable/disable LP printers
env( 1) .......................................................... set environment for command execution
erase(lg) ....................................•........................ graphical device routines and filters

viii Contents

esa(J) .................................................................... display address of external symbol
ex( I )............................................................................................................. text editor
expr( I) ............................................................... evaluate arguments as an expression
f77(1) ........................................................................................... Fortran 77 compiler
factor( I ) ............................................................. obtain the prime factors of a number
false(1) ......................................................................................... provide truth values
fgrep( I) ................................................................... search a file for a character string
file(1 ).............................................................................................. determine file type
find( I ) ............................................................................................................. find files
finger( I ) .................................................................. user infonnation lookup program
french_to_iso(l) ................................................................ convert files to ISO format
fsplit(1) ........................................................................ split FORTRAN or ratfor files
fst( I) ............................................................................... print fault status information
ftp(1c) ...................................................................... ARPANET file transfer program
gdev( Ig) .............................................................. graphical device routines and filters
german_to_iso(I) .............................................................. convert files to ISO format
get( I ) ............................................................................. get a version of an sees file
getopt( I )................................................................................. parse command options
getoptcvt(I) ............................................................................ parse command options
getopts( I) ............................................................................... parse command options
graph(lg) ................................................................................................. draw a graph
graphics( I g) ................................................... access graphic and numeric commands
greek(I) ........................................................................................ select terminal filter
grep( I) .................................................................................. search a file for a pattern
gutil(lg) .............................................................................................. graphic utilities
hardcopy( Igl ....................................................... graphical device routines and filters
hashcheck( I) .................................................................................. find spelling errors
hashmake( I )................................................................................... find spelling errors
help( I) ............................................................................................ ask for sees help
hostid( I) .................................................. set or print identifier of current host system
hostname( I) .................................................. set or print name of current host system
hp(l) ...................................... handle special functions of Hewlett-Packard terminals
hpc(l) ............................................................................... program counter histogram
hpd(lg) ................................................................ graphical device routines and filters
id(l )..................................................................... print user and group IDs and names
inlib( I )........................................................................... install a user-supplied library
intm( I ) ....................................................................................... install a type manager
inty(l ) .............................................................................................. install a new type
ipcrm(l) ................... remove a message queue, semaphore set, or shared memory id
ipcs(l) ........................................ report inter-process communication facilities status
iso( I ) ................................................................................. convert files to ISO format
join( I) .............................................................................. relational database operator
kbm(I) ................................................................. set/display keyboard characteristics
kil1( I) ............................................................................................ terminate a process
ksh( I) ............................................. the Korn shell command programming language
las(l) ......................................................... list objects mapped into the address space
Ibr2ar(l) ............................................... convert Ibr libraries to SRIO archive libraries
lem(I) .............................................................. ;................................. Ioad a color map

Contents ix

Id(l) ...................................................................... Iink editor for common object files
lex( I) ........................................................ generate programs for simple lexical tasks
line( I ) •..................................................................................................... read one line
lint( I) .......................................................................................... a C program checker
list( I) ......................................... produce C source listing from a common object file
llib( I ) .......................................................................................... list installed libraries
Ilkob( I ) ............................................................................................ list locked objects
In( 1)...................................................................•................... create a hard or soft link
logger( I) ...................................................................... make entries in the system log
login( I) ............................................................................................................. sign on
logname( I) ............•.............................................................................. get login name
lorder( 1) .................................................... find ordering relation for an object library
Ip(l) ............................................................ send/cancel requests to an LP line printer
Ipstat( I) ............................................................................. print LP status information
Is( I) ....................................................................................... list contents of directory
Isacl( I ) ....................................................................................... list access control list
Ity(1 )................................................................................................ list installed types
m4(1) ................................................................................................. macro processor
mail( l) ........................................................................ send mail to users or read mail
mailx( I) .......................................................... interactive message processing system
make(l) ................................... maintain, update, and regenerate groups of programs
mane I )............................................................................... print entries in this manual
mcs( 1) ...•................................................. manipulate the object file comment section
mesg(l) ................................................................................. permit or deny messages
mkapr( 1) ..................................................................... make an Apollo product report
mkapr( 1) .................................................................................. make a problem report
mkdir( I )............................................................................................. make directories
mksinit( I )................... create initialization code for STREAMS drivers and modules
mmt(l) ..................................................... typeset documents, viewgraphs, and slides
mt(l) ................................................................. magnetic tape manipulating program
mv( I) ........................................................................................................... move files
mvt(l) ...................................................... typeset documents, viewgraphs, and slides
netstat( 1) ...................................................................................... show network status
newform( 1) ................................................................. change the format of a text file
newgrp( 1)................................................................................... log in to a new group
news( 1) .............................................................................................. print news items
nice( I) ......................................................................... run a command at low priority
nl(l )............................................................................................. line numbering filter
nmO) ................................................................ print name list of common object file
nohup( I ).............................................. run a command immune to hangups and quits
nor.dan_to_iso(1) .............................................................. convert files to ISO format
obj2coff(1) ........................... convert OBI format modules to COFF format modules
ode I) ........................................................................................................... octal dump
pack( I ) ............................................................................... compress and expand files
passwd( I )................................................................ change password file information
paste( 1) ................... merge same lines of several files or subsequent lines of one file
pcat( I) ................................................................................ compress and expand files
pg(I) ................................................................................... file perusal filter for CRTs

x Contents

pre 1) .............................................................................................................. print files
prf( I) ............................. queue a file for printing by Domain/OS Aegis print spooler
prof( 1) ........................................................................................... display profile data
prs( I )............................................................................................... print an sees file
ps( 1)............................................................................................. report process status
ptx(l) ................................................................................................... permuted index
pwd( I ) ................................................................................... working directory name
ratfor( I ) ............................................................................ rational FORTRAN dialect
rbak(l) ................................................ restore or index a magnetic media backup file
rcp(lc) ................................................................................................ remote file copy
red( I ) ........................................................................................................... text editor
regcmp( I) ......................................................................... regular expression compile
remsh( I c ).................................................................................................. remote shell
rlogin( I c) ................................................................................................. remote login
rm( I) .................................................................................. remove files or directories
rmail(l) ....................................................................... send mail to users or read mail
rmdel(l) ................................................................. remove a delta from an sees file
rmdir( I) .............................................................................. remove files or directories
rootnode(I) ................................... change the node to which the root directory refers
rsh(I) ......... the standard/restricted Bourne Shell (command programming language)
ruptime( I c) ........................................................... show host status oflocal machines
rwho( I c) ............................................................... who' s logged in on local machines
rwmt(l) ........................................................................... read/write foreign magtapes
sact(1 )............................................................. print current sees file editing activity
sccs(I) .................................................................... front end for the sees subsystem
sccsdiff(l) ....................................................... compare two versions of an sees file
scrattr( I )............................................................................................. screen attributes
scrto( I )................................................................................... set/show screen timeout
sdiff(l) ...................................................................... side-by-side difference program
sed( I) ...................................................................................................... stream editor
sh(l) .......... the standard/restricted Bourne Shell (command programming langnage)
size(l) .......................................... print section sizes in bytes of common object files
sleep( I) ................................................................... suspend execution for an interval
sort( I) ....................................................................................... sort and/or merge files
spell( I) ........................................................................................... find spelling errors
spellin( I ) ........................................................................................ find spelling errors
spline( Ig) ............................................................................. interpolate smooth curve
split( I ) ........................................................................................ split a file into pieces
start_she I )........................................................................................ start a log-in shell
stat(lg) ....................................... statistical network useful with graphical commands
stcode(l) ................................................... translate status code value to text message
strinfo( 1).......................................................... prints STREAMS-related information
stripe 1) ........... strip symbol and line number information from a common object file
stty( I) ............................................................................. set the options for a terminal
suO) ...................................................................... become super-user or another user
sum( I ).......................................................... print checksum and block count of a file
swapuI( I) ................................................................................... rearrange underlining
swedish_to_iso(l) ............................................................. convert files to ISO format

Contents xi

swiss_to_iso(1) ................................................................. conven files to ISO fonnat
sync( 1) ........................................................................................... forces write to disk
systype( 1) .................................................................................. 'display version stamp
tabs( 1) ........................................................................................ set tabs on a tenninal
tail( 1)................................................................................ deliver the last pan of a file
tar( 1).................................................................................................. tape file archiver
tb( 1)......................................................................................... print process traceback
td(lg) .................................................................. graphical device routines and filters
tee( 1) •.•....••..••....•...•.•........•...•..•......•.••...•.•••.•.••...•.•...•.•..•......•..•.•..•..•.......••.. pipe fitting
tekset( Ig) ............................................................ graphical device routines and filters
telnet(lc) ........................................................ user interface to the TELNET protocol
test(l) .......................................................................... condition evaluation command
tftp(1c) .............................................................................. trivial file transfer protocol
time( 1) ............................................................................................... time a command
timex( I) ............................ time a command; repon process data and system activity
touch( 1) ............................................... update access and modification times of a file
tplot(lg) ................................................................................................ graphics filters
tpm( I) ............................................... set/display touchpad and mouse characteristics
tput( I) ............................................... initialize a tenninal or query tenninfo database
tr( 1) ............................................................................................... translate characters
tr_font( I) ............................................................ transliterate characters within a font
trconf(l) ••...••••..••.•••...•••••.. list active Streams or configure STREAMS trace modules
tnnon(l) ...................... print messages collected by trace modules on active Streams
true(l) ........................................................................................... provide truth values
ts(l) ............................................................ display the module name and time stamp
tson(l ) ................................................................................................. topological son
tty(l) ............................................................................... get the name of the tenninal
tz(l) ............................................................................ set or display system time zone
uk_to_iso(1) ...................................................................... conven files to ISO fonnat
umask( 1) .......................................................................... set file-creation mode mask
uname( 1) ............................................................. print name of current UNIX system
unget(1) .............................................................. undo a previous get of an sees file
uniq(l) ............................................................................ repon repeated lines in a file
units(l) ......................................................................................... conversion program
unpack(l) ........................................................................... compress and expand files
uucp(lc) ......................................................................... UNIX-to-UNIX system copy
uudecode(lc) ........................... encode/decode a binary file for transmission via mail
uuencode(lc) ........................... encode/decode a binary file for transmission via mail
uulog(lc) .••••••...••.••..•••••..••••••••••••••••••.•.••....•.•••...••••..•..••• UNIX-to-UNIX system copy
uuname(lc) .................................................................... UNIX-to-UNIX system copy
uupick(lc) .................................................... public UNIX-to-UNIX system file copy
uustat(lc) •..••..••....•...•.•.••.•••..•...•.••..••.••..•..•.....•••...• uucp status inquiry and job control
uuto(lc) ........................................................ public UNIX-to-UNIX system file copy
uux(lc) .................................................. UNIX-to-UNIX system command execution
val( 1) .............................................................................................. validate sees file
vc(l) ..................................................................................................... version control
vi(l) ............................................. screen-oriented (visual) display editor based on ex
vsize(l) ................................................................ set/display VT100 window settings

xii Contents

vt I OO( I )............................................................................... VT100 terminal emulator
wait(l) ............................................................................. await completion of process
wall( I ) ............................................................................................... write to all users
wbak( I) .............................................................. create a magnetic media backup file
wc( I ) .......................................................................................................... word count
what( I) .......................................................................................... identify SCCS files
who( I) ........................................................................................ who is on the system
whois( l) ................................................ DARPA Intemet usemame directory service
write(1 )........................................................................................ write to another user
xargs( I) .......................................... construct argument list(s) and execute command
xdmc( I) .•.........••.•..•........•...............•.•............ execute a OM command from the shell
yacc(I) ......................................................................... yet another compiler-compiler

6: Games
intro(6) ...................................................................................... introduction to games
domain(6) ......................................................................... Domain/OS-specific games
backgammon(6) .................................................................. the game of backgammon
banner(6) ......................................................................... print large banner on printer
battlestar( 6) ........................................................................ a tropical adventure game
bcd(6) ................................................................................... convert to antique media
bgcolor(6) ........................................................... make interesting background colors
bj(6) .......................................................................................... the game of blackjack
boggle( 6) ............................................................................... play the game of boggle
btlfortune( 6) ......................................................................... print a random comment
btlgammon(6) ..................................................................... the game of backgammon
btlhangman(6) ...................................................................................... guess the word
canfield( 6) .................................................................. the solitaire card game canfield
craps(6) ............................................................................................ the game of craps
cribbage(6) .............................................................................. the card game cribbage
dmoire(6) .................................................... Domain/Dialogue-based moire generator
factor( 6) .......................................................................................... factoring program
fish(6) ...................................................................................................... play Go Fish
flake( 6) ................................................................................. induce terminal dandruff
fortune(6) ............................................... print a random, hopefully interesting, adage
hangman( 6) .................................................. Computer version of the game hangman
hunt(6) ................................................................. a multi-player multi-terminal game
mastermind(6) .................................................................. Mastermind guessing game
maze(6) .............................................................................................. generate a maze
melt(6) ................................................................................................. melt the screen
mille(6) .......................................................................................... play Mille Bournes
monop(6) ........................................................................................... Monopoly game
moo(6) .................................................................................................. guessing game
number(6) ............................................................ convert Arabic numerals to English
primes( 6) ..................................................................................... print prime numbers
puzzle(6) .................................................................................................. puzzle game
quiz( 6) ......................................................................................... test your knowledge
rain( 6) ............................................................................... animated raindrops display
random( 6) ........................................................................... random number generator

Contents xiii

revscr( 6) ................................................................................................ reverse screen
robots( 6) .............................................................................. fight off villainous robots
sail(6) .............................................................. multi-user wooden ships and iron men
scramble(6) ................................................... tum your screen into a scramble puzzle
snake(6) ......................................................................................... display chase game
strfile(6) ............................................... create a random access file for storing strings
teachgammon( 6) ....................................................... teach the game of backgammon
trek(6) ...................................................................................................... trekkie game
m(6) ............................................................................................................. tic-tac-toe
vine(6) ........................................................................................................ grow vines
worm(6) ........................................................................ play the growing worm game
worms(6) ........................................................... animate worms on a display terminal
wump(6) ....................................................................... the game ofhunt-the-wumpus

xiv Contents

PERMUTED INDEX
functions of DASI 300 and!
special functions of DASI
ofDASI 300 and 300s/ 300,
functions of DASI 300 and
comparison difO:
of the DASI 450 tenninal
special functions of the DASI
fl7: Fonran
of a file touch: update
chael: change
cpacl: copy
Isacl: list
dbael: Domain/Dialog based
/unstr: creale a random
commands graphics:
collected by trace modules on
STREAMS trace/ trconf: list
current sees file editing
report process data and system
random, hopefully interesting,
esa: display
list objects mapped into the

sees files

admin: create and
battlestar: a tropical
file for printing by Domain/OS
sort: sort
lenninal wonns:
rain:
bed: convert to
mkapr: make an
maintainer for portable/
number: convert
language bc:
for ponable archives ar:
conven Ibr libraries to SRIO
tar: tape file
maintainer for portable
cpio: copy file
command xargs: construct
echo: echo
expr: evaluate
hc: arbitrary-precision
ftp:
expr: evaluale arguments
characters asa: inlerpret
control characters
help:
a later time
a later time
scrattr: screen
wait:
processing language
backgammon: the game of

300, 300s: handle special .............................. 300(1)
300 and 300s tenninals/handle ..................... 300( I)
300s: handle special functions ...................... 300( I)
300s tenninals/handIe special ....................... 300( I)
3-way differential file ................................... difO{l)
450: handle special functions ....................... 450(1)
450 tenninal450: handle ............................... 450(1)
77 compiler ................................................... fl7(l)
access and modification times ...................... touch(l)
access control list .......................................... chacl( I)
access control list .......................................... cpacl( I)
access control list .......................................... Isacl{l)
access control list editor ............................... dbacl{l)
access file for storing! ................................... strfile(6)
access graphic and numeric .......................... graphics(lG)
active Streams/print messages ........•............. trmon( I)
active Streams or configure .......................... trconf( I)
activitysact: print .......................................... sact( I)
activity/time a command; ............................. timex(l)
adagefortune: print a .......................•............. fortune( 6)
address of exlernal symbol ........................... esa( I)
address spacelas: ........................................... las(l)
admin: create and adminiSIer ........................ admin(l)
administer sees files ................................... admin( I)
adventure game ............................................. battlestar(6)
Aegis print spooler/queue a .......................... prf(l)
and!or merge files ......................................... sort(l)
animate wonns on a display ......................... wonns(6)
animated raindmps display .......................... rain(6)
antique media ................................................ bcd(6)
Apollo product report ................................... mkapr( I)
ar: archive and library ................................... ar( I)
Arabic numerals to English .......................... number(6)
arbitrary-precision arithmetic ....................... bc(l)
archive and library maintainer ...................... ar( I)
archive librarieslbr2ar: ................................. 1br2ar( I)
archiver ......................................................... tar(l)
archives/archive and library ......................... ar(1)
archives in and out ........................................ cpio(l)
argumentlist(s) and execule ......................... xargs( I)
arguments ..................................................... echo( I)
arguments as an expression .......................... expr( I)
arithmetic language ...................................... bc( I)
ARPANET file transfer program .................. ftp(1C)
as an expression ............................................ expr( 1)
ASA carriage control .................................... asa( I)
asa: inlerpret ASA carriage .......................... asa( I)
ask for sees help ......................................... help( 1)
al, batch: execute commands at .................... at( 1)
al, batch: execute commands at .................... batch(l)
attributes .........................................•............. scrattr( I)
await completion of process ......................... wait( 1)
awk: pattern scanning and ............................ awk(l)
backgammon ................................................. backgammon(6

Permuted Index xv

btlgammon: the game of
teacbgammon: teach the game of
backgammon
bgcolor: make interesting
or index a magnetic media
wbak: create a magnetic media
banner: print large
printer
editor dbac1: Domain/Dialog
(visual) display editor
portions of path names
portions of path names
later time at,
later time at,
adventure game
arithmetic language
cb: C program
background colors
via mail /encode/decode a
via mail/encode/decode a
a type object module for
bj: the game of
system was built
sum: print checksum and
boggle: play the game of
boggle
rsb: the standard/restricted
rsb: the standard/restricted
mille: play Mille
comment
backgammon
time operating system was
size: print section sizes in
cc:
cllow: generate
cpp: the
cb:
lint: a
cxref: generate
ctrace:
object file list: produce
dc: desk
cal: print
cu:
to an LP line printer Ip,
to an LP line printer Ip,
the solitaire card game
solitaire card game canfield

xvi Permuted Index

backgammon ................................................. btlgammon(6)
backgammon ................................................. teachgammon(6)
backgammon: the game of ............................ backgammon(6)
background colors ........................................ bgcolor(6)
backup filerbak: restore ................................ rbak(1)
backup file .................................................... wbak(1)
banner: make posters .................................... banner( I)
banner on printer ........................................... banner(6)
banner: print large banner on ........................ banner( 6)
based access control list ................................ dbac1( I)
based on ex/screen-oriented ......................... vir I)
basename, dimame: deliver .......................... basename(l)
basename, dimame: deliver .......................... dimame( I)
batch: execute commands at a ...................... at(1)
batch: execute commands at a ...................... batch( I)
battlestar: a tropical ...................................... battlestar(6)
bc: arbitrary-precision .................................. bc(1)
bcd: convert to antique media ....................... bcd(6)
bdiff: big diff ................................................ bdiff( I)
beautifier ....................................................... cb( I)
bfs: big file scanner ....................................... bfs( I)
bgcolor: make interesting ............................. bgcolor(6)
binary file for transmission ........................... uudecode(1C)
binary file for transmission ........................... uuencode(1C)
bindingcrtyobj: create ................................... crtyobj( 1)
bj: tbe game of blackjack .............................. bj(6)
blackjack ....................................................... bj(6)
bid!: display time operating .......................... bldt(1)
block: count of a file ...................................... sum(!)
boggle ........................................................... boggle( 6)
boggle: play the game of .............................. boggle(6)
Bourne Shell (command/sb, ......................... rsh( I)
Bourne Shell (command/sh, ......................... sh( I )
Bournes ......................................................... mille(6)
btlfortune: print a random ............................. btlfortune(6)
btlgammon: the game of ............................... btlgammon(6)
btlhangman: guess the word ......................... btlhangman(6)
builtbldt: display ........................................... bldt( I)
bytes of common object files ........................ size(1)
C compiler .................................................... cc( I)
C 1I0wgrapb .................................................. cllow(l)
C language preprocessor .............................. cpp(l)
C program heautifier ..................................... cb( 1)
C program checker ....................................... lint(l)
C program cross-reference ........................... cxref(l)
C program debugger ..................................... ctrace( I)
C source listing from a common .................. Iist( I)
cal: print calendar ......................................... cal(1)
calculator ...................................................... dc( I)
calendar ......................................................... cal(1)
calendar: reminder service ............................ calendar( I)
call another UNIX system ............................ cur I C)
cancel: send/cancel requests ......................... cancel( I)
cancel: send/cancel requests ......................... lP( I)
canfieldcanfield, cfscores: ............................ canfield(6)
canfield, cfscores: the ................................... canfield(6)

cfscores: the solitaire
cribbage: the
asa: interpret ASA
text editor (variant of ex for
files

commentary of an sees delta
game canfield canfield,
list
delta: make a delta
edfont: edit a
fgrep: search a file for a
kbm: set/display keyboard
set/display touchpad and mouse
interpret ASA carriage control
tr: translate
tr_font: transliterate
snake, snscore: display
lint: a e program
file sum: print
password file information
password file information
password file information
chown,
chown,
group
group
file information chfn,
file information chfn,
file information chfn,
mksinit: create initialization
stcode: translate status
convert OBI format modules to
active/ trmon: print messages
and lowercase and preserve
lem: load a
make interesting background
comb:
common to two sorted files
test: condition evaluation
time: time a
argument Iist(s) and execute
nice: run a
env: set environment for
uux: UNIX-to-UNIX system
xdmc: execute a OM
quits nohup: run a
getopt: parse
getoplS, getoptcvt: parse

card game canfieldcanfield, .......................... canfield(6)
card game cribbage ....................................... cribbage(6)
carriage control characters ........................... asa( I)
casual users)edit: .......................................... edit(l)
cat fl concatenate and print .......................... cat( I)
cb: e program beautifier ............................... cb( I)
cc: e compiler ............................................... cc(l)
cd: change working directory ....................... cd( I)
cdc: change the delta .................................... cdc(l)
cftow: genernte e ftowgrnph ......................... cftow( I)
cfscores: the solitaire card ............................ canfield(6)
chacl: change access control ......................... chacl(l)
(change) to an sees file .............................. delta(l)
charncter font ................................................ edfont( I )
character string ............................................. fgrep(l)
charncteristics ............................................... kbm( I)
characteristicstpm: ........................................ tpm( I)
charactersasa: ................................................ asa( I)
characters ...................................................... If( I)
characters within a font ................................ tcfont( I)
chase game .................................................... snake(6)
checker .......................................................... lint( I)
checksum and block count of a .................... sum(l)
chfo, chsh, passwd: change .......................... chfn(l)
chfo, chsh, passwd: change .......................... chsh( I)
chfo, chsh, passwd: change .......................... passwd(l)
chgrp: change owner or group ...................... chgrp(l)
chgrp: change owner or group ...................... chown(l)
chmod: change mode .................................... chmod(l)
chown, chgrp: change owner or ................... chgrp(l)
chown, chgrp: change owner or ................... chown(l)
chsh, passwd: change password ................... chfn(l)
chsh, passwd: change password ................... chsh( 1)
chsh, passwd: change password ................... passwd(l)
cmp: compare two files ................................. cmp( I)
code for STREAMS drivers and! ................. mksinit(i)
code value to text message ........................... stcode( I)
eOFF format modulesobj2coff: ................... obj2coff(l)
col: filter reverse line feeds .......................... col( I)
collected by trace modules on ...................... trmon( I)
colons/between upper ................................... cvtname( I)
color map ...................................................... !cm(l)
colorsbgcolor: ............................................... bgcolor(6)
comb: combine sees deltas ........................ comb(l)
combine sees deltas ................................... comb(l)
comm - select or reject lines ......................... comm(l)
command ...................................................... test(l)
command ...................................................... time( I)
commandxargs: construct ............................. xargs( I)
command at low priority .............................. nice( 1)
command execution ...................................... env(l)
command execution ...................................... uux(l C)
command from the shell ............................... xdmc(l)
command immune to hangups and ............... nohup(l)
command options .......................................... getopt( I)
command options .......................................... getoptcvt( I)

Permuted Index xvii

getopts. getoptcvt: parse
ksh: the Korn shell
/Bourne Shell
/Bourne Shell
and system/ timex: time a
dm: Display Manager
access graphic and numeric
intro: introduction to
network useful with graphical
domain: Domain/OS-specific
at. batch: execute
at. batch: execute
btlfortune: print a random
manipulate the object file
cdc: change the delta
C source listing from a
nm: print name list of
line number information from a
Id: link editor for
section sizes in bytes of
comm - select or reject lines
ipcs: report inter-process
diff: differential file
cmp:
SCCS file sccsdiff:
difO: 3-way differential file
dircmp: directory
regcmp: regular expression
cc: C
f/7: Fortran 77
yacc: yet another
wait: await
pack. pcat. unpack:
pack. pcat. unpack:
pack. pcat. unpack:
hangman hangman:
cat fl
test:
trconf: list active Streams or
execute command xargs:
Is: list
csplit:
uucp status inquiry and job
vc: version
asa: interpret ASA carriage
chad: change access
cpad: copy access
Isael: list ac",ss
DomainlDialog based access
uuits:
dd:
English number:
iso:
iso:
iso:
iso:

xviii Permuted Index

command options .......................................... getopts(l)
command programming language ................ ksh( I)
(command programming language) ............. rsh(l)
(command programming language) ............. sh(l)
command; report process data ...................... timex(l)
Commands .................................................... dm(l)
commandsgraphics: ...................................... graphics(lG)
commands ..................................................... intro(1)
commandsstat: statistical .............................. stat( IG)
commands and extensions ............................ domain( I)
commands at a later time ..............
.. ... at( I)
commands at a later time .............................. batch( I)
comment ...................................................... btlfortune(6)
comment sectionmcs: .................................. mcs( I)
commentary of an SCCS delta .................... cdc(l)
common object file/produce ......................... list( 1)
common object file ....................................... nm(1)
common object file/symbol and .................... strip( 1)
common object files ...................................... Id( I)
common object files/print ............................. size(l)
common to two sorted files ........................... comm(l)
communication facilities/ ............................. ipcs(l)
comparator .................................................... diff(l)
compare two files .......................................... cmp(l)
compare two versions of an .......................... sccsdiff( I)
comparison ................................................... dift3(l)
comparison ................................................... dircmp( I)
compile ......................................................... regcmp(l)
compiler ........................................................ cc( I)
compiler ........................................................ f/7(1)
compiler-compiler ........................................ yacc(l)
completion of process ................................... wait(l)
compress and expand files ............................ pack( I)
compress and expand files ............................ pcat(l)
compress and expand files ............................ unpack(l)
computer version of the game ...................... hangman(6)
concatenate and print files ............................ cat( I)
condition evaluation command ..................... test(l)
configure STREAMS trace/ .......................... trconf( 1)
CO!1~truct argument list(s) and ...................... xargs(l)
contents of directory ..................................... Is(1)
context split ................................................... csplit(l)
controluustat: ................................................ uustat(IC)
control ........................................................... vc(l)
control characters ........................................ asa( I)
control list ..................................................... chael(l)
control list ..................................................... cpael(l)
control list ..................................................... IsadO)
control list editordbaci: ................................. dbad(l)
conversion program ...................................... uuits( I)
convert and copy a file .................................. dd( I)
convert Arabic numerals to .......................... number(6)
convert files to ISO format ........................... french_to_iso(l)
convert files to ISO format ........................... german_to_iso(l)
convert files to ISO format ........................... iso(l)
convert files to ISO format ........................... nor.dan_to_iso(l)

iso: convert files to ISO fonnat ........................... swedish_to_iso(!)
iso: convert files to ISO format ........................... swiss_to_iso(l)
iso: convert files to ISO format ........................... uk_to_iso( I)
SRIO fOlmat cvefon!: convert fonts from pre-SRIO to .................... cvtjont(l)
archive libraries Ibr2ar: convert Ibr libraries to SRIO ......................... Ibr2ar(1)
COFF format modules obj2coff: convert OBI fonnat modules to .................... obj2coff(l)
upper and lowercase/ cvtname: convert patbnames between .......................... cvtname(l)
and SRIO formats cvtrgy: convert registry between SR9.x .................... cvtrgy(!)
bed: convert to antique media .............................. bed(6)
rcp: remote file copy .............................................................. rep( I C)
uuname: UNlX-to-UNIX system copyuucp, uulog, .......................................... uucp(l C)
uuname: UNlX-to-UNIX system copyuucp, uulog, .......................................... uulog(l C)
uuname: UNlX-to-UNIX system copyuucp, uulog, .......................................... uunanle( I C)
UNlX-to-UNlX system file copyuuto, uupick: public .............................. uupick(l C)
UNlX-to-UNlX system file copyuuto, uupick: public .............................. uuto(lC)
dd: convert and copy a file ..................................................... dd(l)
cpac!: copy access control list ................................. cpad(l)
cpio: copy file archives in and out ......................... cpio(l)
cp: copy files ....................................................... cp( I)
file cpscr: copy the current display to a ......................... cpscr(l)
wc: word count ............................................................. wc( I)
sum: print checksum and block count of a file ................................................ sum(l)
hpc: program counter histogram ......................................... hpc( I)
cp: copy files ................................................. cp( I)
list cpacl: copy access control ............................ cpad(l)
and out cpio: copy file archives in ............................. cpio(l)
preprocessor cpp: the C language ...................................... cpp(l)
display to a file cpscr: copy the current ................................. cpscr( 1)
craps: the game of craps .............................................................. craps(6)
craps: the game of craps ............................... craps(6)
modify a device descriptor/ crddf: create, display, or ............................... crddf(l)
In: create a hard or soft link ............................... In(l)
file wbak: create a magnetic media backup ................... wbak( I)
crty: create a new type .......................................... crty( 1)
node crp: create a process on a remote ......................... crp( 1)
for storing/ strfile, unstr: create a random access file ........................... strfile( 6)
window crpad: create a transcript pad and ............................ crpad( I)
for binding crtyobj: create a type object module .......................... crtyobj( I)
files admin: create and administer SCCS ......................... admin( I)
device descriptor file crddf: create, display, or modify a .......................... crddf(l)
STREAMS drivers and! mksinit: create initialization code for ......................... mksinit(l)
cribbage: the card game cribbage ........................................................ cribbage(6)
cribbage cribbage: the card game ................................ cribbage(6)
crontab: user crontab file .................................................... crontab( I)
crontab: user crontab file .............................. crontab(l)
cxref: generate C program cross-reference .............................................. cxref(l)
remote node crp: create a process on a .............................. crp( I)
and window crpad: create a transcript pad ........................ crpad( I)
pg: file perusal filter for CRTs ............................................................. pg(l)
crty: create a new type .................................. crty(l)
module for binding crtyobj: create a type object .......................... crtyobj( I)
csplit: context split ........................................ csplit(!)
ctrace: C program debugger ......................... ctrace(l)
cu: call another UNlX system ...................... cui I C)
cpscr: copy the current display to a file ................................. cpscr( 1)
set or print identifier of current host systemhostid: ............................ hostid(l)

Permuted Index xix

bostname: set or print name of
activity sact: print
uname: print name of
spline: interpolate smooth
of each line ofa file
each line ofa file cut:
pre-SR 10 to SR 10 fonnat
between upper and lowercase/
between SR9.x and SRIO/
cross-reference
flake: induce tenninal
directory service whois:
/handle special functions of
special functions of the
prof: display profile
/time a command; report process
a tennina! or query tenninfo
join: relational
date: print and set the
access control list editor

Debugging Environment
ctrace: e program
dbx:
dde: Domain Distributed
d1ty:
basename, dimame:
basename, dimame:
file tail:
delta commentary of an sees
delta: make a
delta cdc: change the
nndel: remove a
to an sees file
comb: combine sees
mesg: pennit or
display, or modify a device
edmtdesc: edit magtape
dc:
file:
create, display, or modify a
/tekset, td: graphical
/tekset, td: graphical
/tekset, td: graphical
/tekset, td: graphical
/tekset, td: graphical
/tekset, td: graphical
ratfor: rational FORTRAN
bdiff: big
comparator
comparison
sdiff: side-by-side
diff:

xx Permuted Index

current host system ....................................... hostname( I)
current sees file editing .............................. sact( 1)
current UNIX system .................................... uname(1)
curve ............................................................. spline(1G)
cut: cut out selected fields ............................. cut(1)
cut out selected fields of ............................... cut(1)
cvcfont: convert fonts from ......................... cvtjont( I)
cvtname: convert pathnames ........................ cvtname( I)
cvtrgy: convert registry ................................. cvtrgy(1)
cxref: generate e program ............................ cxref(l)
dandruff ........................................................ flake(6)
DARPA Internet usemame ........................... whois(1)
DASI 300 and 3008 tenninals ....................... 300(1)
DASI 450 tenninal450: handle ..................... 450(1)
data ............................................................... prof0 )
data and system activity ................................ timex( I)
databasetput: initialize .................................. tput(l)
database operator .......................................... join(1)
date ............................................................... date( 1)
date: print and set the date ............................ date(l)
dbacl: Domain/Dialog based ........................ dbacl(1)
dbx: debugger ............................................... dbx(1)
dc: desk calculator .... '" ................................. dc(l)
dd: convert and copy a file ............................ dd( 1)
dde: Domain Distributed .............................. dde( 1)
debugger ....................................................... ctrace( I)
debugger ....................................................... dbx(1)
Debugging Environment .............................. dde( I)
delete a type ........•........................................• d1ty
deliver portions of path names ..................... basename( I)
deliver portions of path names ..................... dimame(1)
deliver the last part ofa ................................ tail( I)
deltacdc: change the ...............•..................... cde(l)
delta (change) to an sees file ...................... deIta(l)
delta commentary of an sees ..................... cde(l)
delta from an sees file ................................ nndel(l)
delta: make a delta (change) ......................... delta( I)
deltas ............................................................. comb(1)
deny messages .............................................. mesg( 1)
descriptor file/create, .................................... cnidf(l)
descriptor file ................................................ edmtdesc(1)
desk calculator .............................................. dc( I)
detennine file type ........................................ file(l)
device descriptor filecn1df: ........................... cnidf(l)
device routines and filters ............................. erase( IG)
device routines and filters ............................. gdev( IG)
device routines and filters ............................. hanicopy(l G)
device routines and filters ............................. hpd( IG)
device routines and filters ............................. td(1G)
device routines and filters ............................. tekset(IG)
dialect ........................................................... ratfor(l)
diff ......•......................................................... bdiff( 1)
diff: differential file ...................................... diff( I)
difO: 3-way differential file ......................... difO(l)
difference program ....................................... sdiff(l)
differential file comparator ........................... diff(l)

dift3: 3-way differential file comparison ........................... diff3( 1)
dircmp: directory comparison ....................... dircmp( I)
mkdir: make directories ..................................................... mkdir( I)
rm, rmdir: remove files or directories ..................................... ,............... rm( I)
rm, rmdir: remove files or directories ..................................................... rmdir( I)
cd: change working directory ........................................................ cd( I)
Is: list contents of directory ........................................................ Is( I)
dircmp: directory comparison .................................... dircmp( I)
pwd: working directory name .............................................. pwd( I)
the node to which the root directory refers/change ................................. rootnode( I)
whois: DARPA Internet usemrune directory service ........................................... whois( I )
path nrunes basenrune, dimrune: deliver portions of ......................... basenrune( I)
path names basenrune, dimame: deliver portions of ......................... dimame( I)
printers enable, disable: enable/disable LP ............................ disable( I)
printers enable, disable: enable/disable LP ............................ enable(l)
sync: forces write to disk ................................................................ sync( I)
du: summarize disk usage ..................................................... du( I)
rain: animated raindrops display ........................................................... rain(6)
symbol esa: display address of external ........................... esa(l)
snake, snscore: display chase game ... '" ................................. snake(6)
vi: screen-oriented (visual) display editor based on ex ............................ vi(l)
dm: Display Manager Commands ....................... dm(l)
descriptor/ crddf: create, display, or modify a device .......................... crddf( 1)
graphically dspst: display process status ................................... dspst(l)
prof: display profile data ....................................... prof(l)
tz: set or display system time zone .............................. tz(1)
worms: animate worms on a display terminal ............................................ worms( 6)
time stamp ts: display the module name and ....................... ts(l)
was built bldt: display time operating system ...................... bldt(1)
cpscr. copy the current display to a file .............................................. cpscr(l)
systype: display version stamp ................................... systype(l)
Environment dde: Domain Distributed Debugging ................................. dde(l)
dlty: delete a type .......................................... dlty
xdmc: execute a DM command from the sheD ........................ xdmc(l)
dm: DiSplay Manager Commands ................ dm(l)
moire generator dmoire: Domain/Dialogue-based .................. dmoire(6)
slides mOlt, mvt: typeset documents, viewgraphs, and ......................... mmt(l)
slides mOlt, mvt: typeset documents, viewgraphs, and ......................... mvt(t)
Environment dde: Domain Distributed Debugging ................... dde(l)
commands and extensions domain: Domain/OS-specific ....................... domain(l)
games domain: Domain/OS-specific ....................... domain(6)
control list editor dbacl: Domain/Dialog based access ........................ dbacl(l)
generator dmoire: Domain/Dialogue-based moire ..................... dmoire(6)
/queue a file for printing by Domain/OS Aegis print spooler ................... prf(l)
and extensions domain: Domain/OS-specific commands ................... domain( I)
domain: Domain/OS-specific games .......................... domain( 6)
graph: draw a graph ................................................. graph( to)
/code for STREAMS drivers and modules ...................................... mksinit(l)
graphically dspst: display process statns ......................... dspst(l)
du: summarize disk usage ............................. du(l)
emt: emulate a dumb terminal ............................................... emt(l)
od: octal dump ............................................................. od(l)
an object file dump: dump selected parts of ....................... dump(l)
object file dump: dump selected parts of an ............................. dump(l)
echo: echo arguments ............................................. echo( 1)
echo: echo arguments ................................... echo( 1)

Permuted Index xxi

edfont:
edmtdesc:
ex for casual users)
sact: print current SCCS file
based access control list
ed, red: text
ex: text
ed, red: text
sed: stream
/(visual) display
Id: link
casual users) edit: text
descriptor file
pattern using full regular/
emt:
vt100: VT100 terminal
enable/disable LP printers
enable/disable LP printers
enable, disable:
enable, disable:
for/ uuencode,uudecode:
for/ uuencode,uudecode:
sces: front
convert Arabic numerals to
logger: make
man: print
command execution
Domain Distributed Debugging
execution env: set
graphical device/ gdev: hpd,
graphical device/ gdev: hpd,
graphical device/ gdev: hpd,
graphical device/ gdev: hpd,
graphical device/ gdev: hpd,
graphical device/ gdev: hpd,
hashcheck: find spelling
hashcheck: find spelling
hashcheck: find spelling
hashcheck: find spelling
external symbol
expression expr:
test: condition
display editor based on
edit: text editor (variant of
shell xdmc:
construct argument list(s) and
time at, batch:
time at, batch:
set environment for commaod
UNIX-to-UNIX system command
sleep: suspend

xxii Permuted Index

ed, red: text editor ......................................... ed( 1)
ed, red: text editor ......................................... red( 1)
edfont: edit a character font .......................... edfont(l)
edit a character font ...................................... edfont(l)
edit magtape descriptor file .......................... edmtdesc(l)
edit: text editor (variant of ............................ edit( 1)
editing activity .............................................. sact(l)
editordbacl: Domain/Dialog ......................... dbacl(l)
editor ............................................................. ed( 1)
editor ............................................................. ex(l)
editor ............................................................. red( I )
editor ............................................................. sed( I)
editor based on ex ......................................... vi(l)
editor for common object files ...................... Id(l)
editor (variant of ex for ................................ edit(l)
edmtdesc: edit magtape ................................ edmtdesc(l)
egrep: search a file for a ............................... egrep(l)
emt: emulate a dumb terminal ...................... emt(l)
emulate a dumb terminal .............................. emt(l)
emulator ........................................................ vt IOO( I)
enable, disable: ............................................. disable(l)
enable, disable: ............................................. enable(l)
enable/disable LP printers ............................ disable(l)
enable/disable LP printers ............................ enable(l)
encode/decode a binary file .......................... uudecode(I C)
encode/decode a binary file .......................... uuencode( I C)
end for the SCCS subsystem ........................ sces( I)
Englishnumher: ............................................. numher(6)
entries in the system log ............................... logger( 1)
entries in this manual .................................... man(l)
env: set environment for ............... , ............... env(l)
Environmentdde: .......................................... dde(l)
environment for command ........................... env(l)
erase, hardcopy, tekset, td: ........................... erase( lG)
erase, hardcopy, tekset, td: ........................... gdev(lG)
erase, hardcopy, tekset, td: ........................... hardcopy(lG)
erase, hardcopy, tekset, td: ........................... hpd(lG)
erase, hardcopy, tekset, td: ........................... td(lG)
erase, hardcopy, tekset, td: ........................... tekset(lG)
errors/hashmake, spellin, .............................. hashcheck( I)
errors/hashmake, spellin, .............................. hashmake(l)
errors/hashmake, spellin, .............................. spell(l)
errors/hashmake, spellin, .............................. spellin( 1)
esa: display address of .................................. esa( I)
evaluate arguments as an .............................. expr( 1)
evaluation cOlI\ll)and ..................................... test(l)
ex/screen-oriented (visual) ........................... vi( 1)
ex for casual users) ....................................... edit(l)
ex: text editor ................................................ ex( I)
execute a DM commaod from the ................ xdmc( 1)
execute commandxargs: ............................... xargs(i)
execute commands at a later ......................... at( 1)
execute commands at a later ......................... batch(i)
executionenv: ................................................ env( I)
executionuux: ............................................... uux(IC)
execution for an interval ............................... sleep(l)

pcat, unpack: compress and
pcat, unpack: compress and
pcat, unpack: compress and
expression
expr: evaluate arguments as an
regcmp: regular
a pattern using full regular
commands and
esa: display address of
cat

factors of a number
factor:
factor: obtain the prime
true,
true,
fst: print
col: filter reverse line
character string
robots:
copy the current display to a
or modify a device descriptor
crontab: user crontab
fields of each line of a
dd: convert and copy a
a delta (change) to an sees
selected parts of an object
edit magtape descriptor
get: get a version of an sees
listing from a common object
change the format of a text
name list of common object
or subsequent lines of one
prs: print an sees
index a magnetic media backup
remove a delta from an sees
two versions of an sees
from a common object
checksum and block count of a
deliver the last part of a
and modification times of a
undo a previous get of an sees
report repeated lines in a
val: validate sees
create a magnetic media backup
tar: tape
cpio: copy
mcs: manipulate the object
diff: differential
diff3: 3-way differential
rcp: remote
public UNIX-to-UNIX system
public UNIX-to-UNIX system
sact: print current sees

expand filespack, ....... ,.................................. pack( I)
expand filespack, .......................................... pcat(1)
expand filespack, .......................................... unpack(1)
expr: evaluate arguments as an ..................... expr( I)
expression ..................................................... expr( I)
expression compile ....................................... regcmp(l)
expressions/search a file for ......................... egrep( I)
extensionslDomainlOS-specific ................... domain(l)
external symbol ............................................ esa( I)
f1 concatenate and print files ........................ cat(1)
t77: Fortran 77 compiler ............................... f77(1)
factor: factoring program .............................. factor(6)
factor: obtain the prime ................................ factor( I)
factoring program ......................................... factor(6)
factors of a number ....................................... factor( I)
false: provide truth values ............................ false( I)
false: provide truth values ............................ true(l)
fault status information ................................. fst( I)
feeds .............................................................. col(l)
fgrep: search a file for a ................................ fgrep( 1)
fight off villainous robots ............................. robots(6)
filecpscr: ....................................................... cpscr( I)
filecrddf: create, display, .............................. crddf(l)
file ................................................................. crontab( I)
filecut: cut out selected ................................. cut(1)
file ................................................................. dd(l)
filedelta: make .............................................. de/ta( I)
filedump: dump ............................................. dump(l)
fileedmtdesc: ................................................. edmtdesc(l)
file .......
.. .................... get(l)
filelist: produce e source .............................. list( I)
filenewform: ................................................. newform(l)
filenm: print .................................................. nm(l)
file/lines of several files ................................ paste(l)
file ................................................................. prs(l)
filerbak: restore or ......................................... rbak( 1)
filermdel: ....................................................... rmdel( I)
filesccsdiff: compare ..................................... sccsdiff(l)
file/line number information ......................... stripe I)
filesum: print ................................................. sum(l)
filetail: ........................................................... tail(l)
filetouch: update access ................................ touch(l)
fileunget: ....................................................... unget(l)
fileuniq: ......................................................... uniq( I)
file ................................................................. val(l)
filewbak: ....................................................... wbak(l)
file archiver ........................................ ,.......... tar( I)
file archives in and out .................................. cpio(1)
file comment section ..................................... mcs( I)
file comparator ............................................. diff( I)
file comparison ............................................. diff3( 1)
file copy ........................................................ rep( I e)
file copyuuto, uupick: ................................... uupick(lC)
file copyuuto, uupick: ................................... uuto(1 C)
file: determine file type ................................. file(l)
file editing activity ........................................ saet( I)

Permuted Index xxiii

fgrep: search a
grep: search a
regular/ egrep: search a
Aegis print! prf: queue a
/unstr: create a rdlldom access
/encode/decode a binary
/encode/decode a binary
chsh, passwd: change password
chsh, passwd: change password
chsh, passwd: change password
split: split a
pg:
bls: big
fip: ARPANET
tftp: trivial
file: detennine
umask: set
create and administer SCCS
cat fl concatenate and print
cmp: compare two
lines common to two sorted
cp: copy
find: find
split FORTRAN or ratfor
link editor for common object
mv: move
unpack: compress and expand
unpack: compress and expand
pr. print
in bytes of common object
sort: sort and/or merge
unpack: compress and expand
what: identify SCCS
nn, nndir: remove
nn, nndir: remove
/merge same lines of several
iso: convert
iso: convert
iso: convert
iso: convert
iso: convert
Iso: convert
iso: convert
greek: select terminal
nl: line numbering
pg: file perusal
col:
graphical device routines and
graphical device routines and
graphical device routines and
graphical device routines and
graphical device routines and
graphical device routines and
tplot: graphics
find:

xxiv Permuted Index

file for a character string ............................... fgrep(l)
file for a pattern ............................................ grep(!)
file for a pattern using full ............................ egrep(l)
file for printing by Domain/OS ..................... prf(l)
file for storing strings .................................... strfile(6)
file for transmission via mail ........................ uudecode( I C)
file for transmission via mail ................. 0 ..... uuencode(lC)
file infonnationchfu, ..................................... chfu(l)
file infonnationchfu, ..................................... chsh( l)
file infonnationchfu, ..................................... p'lSswd(l)
file into pieces ............................................... splitt I)
file perusal filter for CRTs ............................ pg( I)
file scanner .................................................... bfs( I)
file transfer program ..................................... ftp(IC)
file transfer protocol ..................................... tftp(lC)
file type ......................................................... file( I)
file-creation mode mask ............................... umask(l)
filesadmin: .................................................... admin(l)
files ................................................................ cat(l)
files ................................................................ cmp( I)
filescomm - select or reject ........................... comm( I)
files ................................................................ cP(l)
files ................................................................ find(l)
filesfsplit: ...................................................... fsplit( I)
filesld: ........................................................... Id(l)
files ................................................................ mv(l)
filespack, peat, .............................................. pack(l)
filespack, peat, .............................................. pcat( I)
files ................................................................ pr( I)
files/print section sizes .................................. size( I)
files ................................................................ sort(l)
filespack, peat, .............................................. unpack(l)
files ................................................................ what(l)
fileS or directories ......................................... nn( I)
files or directories ......................................... nndir(l)
files or subsequent lines of/ .......................... pastel l)
files to ISO fonnat ........................................ french_to_iso(l)
files to ISO fonnat ........................................ gennan_to_iso(l)
files to ISO fonnat ........................................ iso(l)
files to ISO fonnat ........................................ nor.dan_to_iso(l)
files to ISO fonnat ........................................ swedish_to_iso(!)
files to ISO fonnat ........................................ swiss_to_iso(!)
files to ISO fonnat ........................................ uk_to_iso(!)
filter ............................................................... greek( l)
filter ............................................................... nI( I)
filter for CRTs ............................................... pg(1)
filter reverse line feeds ................................. col(l)
filters/hardcopy, tekset, td: ........................... erase(lG)
filters/hardcopy, tekset, td: ........................... gdev(lG)
filters/hardcopy, tekset, td: ........................... hardcopy(LG)
filters/hardcopy, tekset, td: ........................... hpd( 1G)
filters/hardcopy, tekset, td: ........................... td(lG)
filters/hardcopy, tekset, td: ........................... tekset(lG)
filters ............................................................. tplot(LG)
find files ........................................................ find(l)
find: find files ................................................ find(l)

object library lorder:
hashmake, speUin, hashcheck:
hashmake, spellin, hashcheck:
hashmake, spellin, hashcheck:
hashmake, spellin, hashcheck:
lookup program
fish: play Go
tee: pipe
dandruff
cflow: generate C
edfont: edit a character
characters within a
format cvt_font: convert
rwmt: read/write
fonts from pre-SR 10 to SR 10
iso: convert files to ISO
iso: convert files to ISO
iso: convert files to ISO
iso: convert files to ISO
iso: convert files to ISO
iso: convert files to ISO
iso: convert files to ISO
OBI format modules to COFF
modules obj2coff: convert OBI
newform: change the
between SR9.x aod SRIO
f/7:
ratfor: rational
fsplit: split
hopefully interesting, adage
list: produce C source listing
land line number information
rmdel: remove a delta
cvt_font: convert fonts
xdmc: execute a OM command
subsystem sccs:
ratfor files
information
program
/a file for a pattern using
300, 300s: handle special
terminals hp: handle special
terminal 450: handle special
a tropical adventure

a multi-player multi-terminal
Mastermind guessing
monop: Monopoly
moo: guessing
puzzle: puzzle
snake, snscore: display chase
trek: trekkie
worm: play the growing worm
cfscores: the solitaire card
cribbage: the card
computer version of the

find ordering relation for an .......................... lorder( I)
find spelling errorsspell,
................... hashcheck(l)
find spelling errorsspell, ............................... hashmake(l)
find spelling errorsspell, ............................... spell( I)
find spelling errorsspell, ............................... spellin(l)
finger: user information ................................ finger( I)
Fish ............................................................... fish( 6)
fish: play Go Fish
.............. fish(6)
fitting ............................................................. tee(l)
flake: induce terminal ................................... flake(6)
flow graph ...................................................... cflow( 1)
font ................................................................ edfont( 1)
fonttcfont: transliterate ................................ trjont(l)
fonts from pre-SRIO to SRIO ....................... cvelont(l)
foreign magtapes .......................................... rwmt(l)
formatcvefont: convert ................................ cVl_font(l)
format ........................................................... french_to_iso(
format ........................................................... german_to_isol
format ........................................................... iso( 1)
format ........................................................... nor.dan_to_isol
format ........................................................... swedish_to_iso
format ........................................................... swiss_to_iso( 1
format ........................................................... nk_to_iso(l)
format modules/convert ............................... obj2coff(l)
format modules to COFF format .................. obj2coff( 1)
format of a text file ....................................... newform(l)
lormats/convert registry ................................ cVlrgy( 1)
Fortran 77 compiler ...................................... f/7(l)
FORTRAN dialect ........................................ ratfor(l)
FORTRAN or ratfor files .............................. fsplit(l)
fortune: print a raodom, ................................ fortune(6)
from a common object file ............................ list( I)
from a common Object file ............................ strip(l)
from an SCCS file ......................................... rmdel( 1)
from pre-SR 10 to SR 10 format .................... cVl_font(l)
from the shell ................................................ xdmc( 1)
front end for the SCCS ................................. sccs(l)
fsplit: split FORTRAN or ............................. fsplit( 1)
fst: print fault status ...................................... fst(l)
ftp: ARPANET file transfer .......................... ftp(IC)
full regular expressions ................................. egrep(l)
functions of OASI 300 and 300s/ ................. 300(1)
functions of Hewlett-Packard ....................... hp( 1)
functions of the OASI 450 ............................ 450( 1)
gamebattlestar: .............................................. battlestart6)
gamehunt: ..................................................... hunt( 6)
gamemastermind: ......................................... mastermind(6)
game ............................................................. monop(6)
game ............................................................. moor 6)
game ............................................................. puzzle( 6)
game ............................................................. snake( 6)
game .............. ,.............................................. trek( 6)
game ............................................................. worm(6)
game canfieldcanfield, .................................. canfield( 6)
game cribbage ............................................... crihbage(6)
game hangmanhangman: .............................. hangman(6)

Permuted Index xxv

backgammon: the
btlgammon: the
teachgammon: teach the
bj: the
boggle: play the
craps: the
wump: the
domain: Domain/OS-specific
intro: introduction to
tekset, td: graphical device/
tekset, td: graphical device/
tekset, td: graphical device/
tekset, td: graphical device/
tekset, td: graphical device/
tekset, td: graphical device/
maze:
cflow:
cross-reference cxref:
lexical tasks lex:
Domain/Dialogue-ba<;ed moire
random: random numher
get:
file
logname:
unget: undo a previous
tty:
options getopts,
options getopts,
command options
command options
graph: draw a
graphics: access
gulil:
/network useful with
/erase, hardcopy, tekset, td:
/erase, hardcopy, tekset, td:
/erase, hardcopy, tekset, td:
/erase, hardcopy, tekset, td:
/erase, hardcopy, tekset, td:
/erase, hardcopy, tekset, td:
dspst: display process status
numeric commands
!plot:
pattern
chown, chgrp: change owner or
chown, chgrp: change owner or
newgrp: log in to a new
id: print user and
update, and regenerate
vine:
worm: play the
btlhangman:
mastermind: Mastermind

xX\'i Permuted Index

game of backgammon ................................... backgammon(6)
game of backgammon ................................... btlgammon(6)
game of backgammon ................................... teachgammon(6)
game of blackjack ......................................... bj(6)
game of boggle ............................................. boggle(6)
game of craps ................................................ craps( 6)
game ofhunt-the-wumpus ............................ wump(6)
games ............................................................ domain(6)
games ............................................................ intro(6)
gdev: hpd, erase, hardcopy, .......................... erase(lG)
gdev: hpd, erase, hardcopy, .......................... gdev(lG)
gdev: hpd, erase, hardcopy, .......................... hardcopy(lG)
gdev: hpd, erase, hardcopy, .......................... hpd(IG)
gdev: hpd, erase, hardcopy, .......................... td(IG)
gdev: hpd, erase, hardcopy, .......................... tekset(IG)
generate a maze ............................................ maze(6)
generate e flowgraph .................................... cflow( I)
generate e program ...................................... cxref(l)
generate programs for simple ....................... lex(l)
generatordmoire: ........................... _............... dmoire(6)
generator ....................................................... random(6)
get a version of an sees file ........................ get(l)
get: get a version of an sees ....................... get(l)
get login name .............................................. logname(l)
get of an sees file ....................................... unget(l)
get the name of the terminal ......................... tty( 1)
getopt: parse command options .................... getopt( I)
getoptcvt: parse command ............................ getoptcvt(l)
getoptcvt: parse command ............................ getopts(l)
getopts, getoptcvt: parse ............................... getoptcvt(l)
getopts, getoptcvt: parse ............................... getopts( I)
graph ............................................................. graph( lG)
graph: draw a graph ...................................... graph( IG)
graphic and numeric commands ................... graphics(lG)
graphic utilities ............................................. gutil(IG)
graphical commands ..................................... stat( IG)
graphical device routines and! ...................... erase(IG)
graphical device routines and! ...................... gdev(lG)
graphical device routines and! ...................... hardcopy( IG)
graphical device routines and! ...................... hpd(IG)
graphical device routines and! ...................... td(IG)
graphical device routines and! ...................... tekset(lG)
graphically .................................................... dspst(l)
graphics: access graphic and ........................ graphics(IG)
graphics filters .............................................. tplot(lG)
greek: select terminal filter ........................... greek( I)
grep: search a file for a ................................. grep( I)
group ............................................................. chgrp( 1)
group ............................................................. chown( I)
group ............................................................. newgrp(l)
group IDs and names .................................... id(l)
groups of programs/maintain, ....................... make(l)
grow vines .................................................... vine(6)
growing worm game ..................................... worm(6)
guess the word .............................................. btlhangman(6)
guessing game .............................................. mastermind(6)

moo: guessing game .............................................. moo(6)
gutil: graphic utilities .................................... gutil( lG)
handle special functions of ........................... 300(1)
handle special functions of ........................... hp(l)
handle special functions of ........................... 450(1)
hangmanhangman: ........................................ hangman(6)
hangman: computer version of ..................... hangman( 6)
hangups and quits ......................................... nohup(1)
hard or soft link ............................................ In(l)
hardcopy, tekset, td: ...................................... erase(1 G)
hardcopy, tekset, td: ...................................... gdev( lG)
hardcopy, tekset, td: ...................................... hardcopy(l G )
hardcopy, tekset, td: ...................................... hpd(lG)
hardcopy, tekset, td: ...................................... td(lG)
hardcopy, tekset, td: ...................................... tekset(lG)
hashcheck: lind spelling! .............................. hashcheck(l)
hashcheck: lind spelling! .............................. hashmake( I)
hashcheck: find spelling! .............................. spell( 1)hashcheck: find spelling! .............................. spellin( I)
hashmake, spellin, hashcheck: ...................... hashcheck(l)
hashmake, spellin, hashcheck: ...................... hashmake(1)
hashmake, spellin, hashcheck: ...................... spell(l)
hashmake, spellin, hashcheck: ...................... speUin(!)
help ............................................................... help(l)
help: ask for secs help ................................ help( 1)
handle special functions of Hewlett-Packard terminalshp: ...................... hp( 1)
hpc: program counter histogram ...................................................... hpc( I)
fortune: print a random, hopefully interesting, adage .......................... fortune(6)
ruptime: show host status of local machines ........................ ruptime(1C)
or print identifier of current host systemhostid: set .....
.. ........... hostid( 1)
set or print name of current host systemhosmame: ................................... hosruarne(l)
identifier of current host/ hostid: set or print ......................................... hostid(l)
current host system hosmame: set or print name of ..................... hostnarne(l)
of Hewlett-Packard terminals hp: handle special functions ......................... hp( I)
hpc: program counter histogram ................... hpc(1)
td: graphical device/ gdev: hpd, erase, hardcopy, tekset, ......................... erase( lG)
td: graphical device/ gdev: hpd, erase, hardcopy, tekset, ......................... gdev( lG)
td: graphical device/ gdev: hpd, erase, hardcopy, tekset, ......................... hardcopy(1G)
td: graphical device/ gdev: hpd, erase, hardcopy, tekset, ......................... hpd(lG)
td: graphical device/ gdev: hpd, erase, hardcopy, tekset, ......................... td(1G)
td: graphical device/ gdev: hpd, erase, hardcopy, tekset, ......................... tekset(lG)
multi-tenninal game hunt: a multi-player ...................................... hunt(6)
wump: the game of hunt-the-wumpus .......................................... wump(6)
set, or shared memory id/a message queue, semaphore .................... ipcnn(1)
and names id: print user and group IDs .......................... id(l)
system hostid: set or print identifier of current host ............................... hostid(l)
what: identify secs files ....................................... what(l)
id: print user and group IDs and names .............................................. id(1)
nohup: run a command immune to hangups and quits ....................... nohup(l)
ptx: pennuted index ............................................................. plx( I)
file rbak: restore or index a magnetic media backup ................... rbak(1)
flake: induce terminal dandruff .............................. 6ake( 6)
STREAMS/ mksinit: create initialization code for .................................... mksinit(1)
terminfo database tput: initialize a terminal or query ......................... tput( 1)
library inlib: install a user-supplied .......................... inlib(l)
uustat: uucp stams inqniry and job control ................................. uustat(1 C)

DASI 300 and 300s/ 300,300s:
Hewlett-Packard tenninals hp:
the DASI 450 tenninal 450:
computer version of the game
the game hangman
nohup: run a command immune to
In: create a
graphical/ gdev: hpd, erase,
graphical/ gdev: hpd, erase,
graphical/ gdev: hpd, erase,
graphical/ gdev: hpd, erase,
graphical/ gdev: hpd, erase,
graphical/ gdev: hpd, erase,
spell, hashmake, spellin,
spell, hashmake, spellin,
spell, hashmake, spellin,
spell, hashmake, spellin,
lind spelling errors spell,
lind spelling errors spell,
lind spelling errors spell,
lind spelling errors spell,
help: ask for SCCS

Permuted Index xxvii

inty:
intm
library inIib:
lIib: list
Ity: list
system mailx:
print a random, hopefully
bgcolor: make
protocol telnet: user
service whois: DARPA
spline:
characters asa:
facilities/ ipcs: repon
suspend execution for an
command~

intro:
intro:
semaphore set, or shared!
communication facilities/
multi-user wooden ships and
format
format
format
format
format
format
format
iso: conven files to
iso: conven files to
iso: conven files to
iso: conven files to
iso: conven files to
iso: conven files to
iso: conven files to
news: print news
operator
characteristics
kbm: set/display
quiz: test your
language ksh: the
programming language
scanning and processing
arbitrary-precision arithmetic
Korn shell command programming
Shell (command programming
Shell (command programming
cpp: the C
the address space
libraries Ibr2ar: conven
to SRIO archive libraries
object files

xxviii Permuted Index

install a new type .......................................... inty(l)
install a type manager ................................... intm( I)
install a user-supplied ................................... inlib(l)
installed libraries .......................................... lIib(l)
installed types ............................................... Ity(l)
interactive message processing .................... mailx(l)
interesting, adagefortune: ............................. fortune(6)
interesting background colors ....................... bgcolor(6)
interface to the TELNET .............................. telnet( IC)
Internet username directory .......................... whois( I)
interpolate smooth curve .............................. spline (I G)
interpret ASA carriage control ..................... asa( I)
inter-process communication ........................ ipcs(l)
intervalsleep: ................................................. sleep( I)
intm install a rype manager .......................... intm(l)
intro: introduction to ..................................... intro( 1)
intro: introduction to games .......................... intro( 6)
introduction to commands ............................ intro( I)
introduction to games ................................... intro( 6)
inty: install a new type .................................. inty(l)
ipcrm: remove a message queue, .................. ipcrm( I)
ipes: repon inter-process .............................. ipcs( I)
iron mensail: ................................................. sail(6)
iso: conven files to ISO ................................ french_to_iso(l)
iso: conven files to ISO ................................ german_to_iso(l)
iso: conven files to ISO ................................ iso( I)
iso: conven files to ISO ................................ nor.dan_to_iso(l)
iso: conven files to ISO ................................ swedish_to_iso(l)
iso: conven files to ISO ................................ swiss_to_iso(l)
iso: conven files to ISO ................................ uk_to_iso(l)
ISO format .................................................... french_to_iso(l)
ISO format .................................................... german_to_iso( I)
ISO format .................................................... iso(l)
ISO format .................................................... nor.dan_to_iso(l)
ISO format .................................................... swedish_to_iso(\)
ISO format .................................................... swiss_to_iso(l)
ISO format .................................................... uk_to_iso(l)
items .............................................................. news( 1)
join: relational database ................................ join(l)
kbm: set/display keyboard ............................ kbm(l)
keyboard characteristics .................. ,............ kbm( I)
kill: terminate a process ................................ kill(l)
knowledge ..................................................... quiz( 6)
Korn shell command programming .............. ksh(l)
ksh: the Korn shell command ....................... ksh(l)
languageawk: pattern .................................... awk(l)
languagebc: ................................................... bc( I)
languageksh: the ........................................... ksh( I)
language )/Bourne ......................................... rsh( 1)
language)/Bourne ......................................... sh(1)
language preprocessor .................................. cpp(l)
las: list objects mapped into .......................... las(l)
Ibr libraries to SRIO archive ......................... Ibr2ar(l)
Ibr2ar: conven Ibr libraries ........................... Ibr2ar(l)
lcm: load a color map ................................... icm(l)
Id: link editor for common ............................ Id(1)

simple lexical tasks
generate programs for simple
Ibr libraries to SR 10 archive
llib: list installed
libraries Ibr2ar: convert Ibr
inlib: install a user-supplied
relation for an object
portable/ ar: archive and
line: read one
col: filter reverse
strip: strip symbol and
nl:
out selected fields of each
send/cancel requests to an LP
send/cancel requests to an LP
files comm - select or reject
uniq: report repeated
of several files or subsequent
subsequent! paste: merge same
In: create a hard or soft
files Id:
chac!: change access control
cpac!: copy access control
Isael: list access control
Isael:
configure STREAMS/ !rconf:
Is:
based access control
nib:
Ity:
l!kob:
address space las:
nm:printname
from a common object file
file list: produce C source
xargs: construct argument

\em:
l!kob: list
make entries in the system
newgrp:
rwho: who's
system log
rlogin: remote
logname: get
start_sh: start a

finger: user information
for an object library
nice: run a command at
/pathnames hetween upper and

lex: generate programs for ............................ lex(l)
lexical taskslex: ............................................ lex(l)
librarieslbr2ar: convert ................................. Ibr2ar(l)
libraries.. ..... .......
.................................... llib( I)
libraries to SRIO archive .............................. Ibr2ar(l J
library ........................................................... inlib(l)
librarylorder: find ordering
........ lorder( I )
library maintainer for .................................... aJ1"IJ
line ................................................................ line( I)
line feeds ..........
col( I)
line number information from a/
.... strip( I)
line numbering filter
.... nl(l)
line of a filecut: cut ............
. cut(l)
line printerlp, cancel: ................................... cancel( 1)
line printerlp, cancel: .................................... Ip(l)
line: read one line ......................................... line(l)
lines common to two sorted .......................... comm(l)
lines in a file .................................................. uniq(l)
lines of one file/same lines ........................... paste(l)
lines of several files or .................................. paste(l)
link ............................................................... In(l)
link editor for common object ...................... Id(l)
lint: a C pro gram checker ............................. lint(l)
list ................................................................. chacl(l)
list ................................................................. cpacl( 1)
list ................................................................. Isacl( I )
list access control list .................................... Isacl( I)
list active Streams or .................................... trconf(l)
list contents of directory ............................... Is(l)
list editor/DomainjDialog ............................. dbac!( I)
list installed libraries ..................................... IlibO)
list installed types ......................................... Ity( 1)
list locked objects ......................................... I!kob(l)
list objects mapped into the .......................... la~(I)
list of common object file ............................. nm(l)
list: produce C source listing ........................ list( I)
listing from a common object ....................... list( I)
list(s) and execute command ........................ xargs(l)
llib: list installed libraries ............................. llib(l)
l!kob: list locked objects ............................... l!kob( I)
In: create a hard or soft link .......................... In( 1)
load a color map ........................................... \em( I J
locked objects ............................................... l!kob( I)
loglogger: ...................................................... logger( I)
log in to a new group .................................... newgrp( I)
logged in on local machines ......................... rwho( IC)
logger: make entries in the ........................... logger( I )
login .............................................................. riogin( I C)
login name .................................................... lognanle(l)
log-in shell .................................................... start_sh( I)
login: sign on ................................................ login( I)
logname: get login name .............................. logname(l)
lookup program ............................................ finger( I)
larder: tind ordering relation .................... :... lorder(l)
low prionty ................................................... nice( I)
lowerc'lsc and preserve colons ..................... cvtname( 1)

Permuted Index xxix

requests to an LP line/
requests to an LP line/
send/cancel requests to an
send/cancel requests to an
ilisable: enable/ilisable
disable: enable/disable
Ipstat: print
information
list

show host status of local
rwho: who's logged in on local
m4:
rbak: restore or index a
wbak: create a
program mt:
edmtdesc: edit
rwmt: read/write foreign
send mail to users or read
send mail to users or read
file for transmission via
file for tr

Allows concurrent get(l} commands for editing on the
same SIDs+ 1 of an sees file. This allows multiple concurrent updates to the same version of the sees file.
A list of releases to which deltas can no longer be made
(get -e against one of these' 'locked" releases fails). The
list has the following syntax:

::=  I , 
-::=
Ia
The character a in the list is equivalent to specifying all
releases for the named sces file.

n

1-14

Causes delta(1} to create a "null" delta in each of those
releases (if any) being skipped when a delta is made in a
new release (e.g., in making delta 5.1 after delta 2.7,
releases 3 and 4 are skipped). These null deltas serve as
"anchor points" so that branch deltas may later be
created from them. The absence of this flag causes
skipped releases to be non-existent in the sces file,
Commands

ADMIN(l)

SysV

ADMIN(l)

preventing branch deltas from being created from them
in the future.
qtext

User definable text substituted for all occurrences of the
%Q% keyword in sees file text retrieved by ge (1).

mmod

Module name of the sees file substituted for all
occurrences of the %M% keyword in sees file text
retrieved by get(l). If the m flag is not specified, the
value assigned is the name of the sees file with the
leading s. removed.

ttype

Type of module in the sees file substituted for all
occurrences of %Y% keyword in sees file text retrieved
by get(1).

vpgm

Causes delta(l) to prompt for Modification Request
(MR) numbers as the reason for creating a delta. The
optional value specifies the name of an MR number validity checking program [see deUa( 1)]. (If this flag is set
when creating an sees file, the m option must also be
used even if its value is null).

-dflag

Ilist

Commands

Causes removal (deletion) of the specified flag from an sees file.
The -d option can be specified only when processing existing
sees files. Several -d options can be supplied on a single admin
command. See the -f option for allowable flag names.
A list of releases to be "unlocked". See the -f option
for a description of the I flag and the syntax of a list.

-alogin

A login name, or numerical UNIX system group ID, to be added to
the list of users which may make deltas (changes) to the sees file.
A group ID is equivalent to specifying all login names common to
that group rD. Several a options can be used on a single admin
command line. As many logins, or numerical group IDs, as
desired may be on the list simultaneously. If the list of users is
empty, anyone can add deltas. If login or group ID is preceded by
a ! they are to be denied permission to make deltas.

-elogin

A login name, or numerical group ID, to be erased from the list of
users allowed to make deltas (changes) to the sees file. Specifying a group ID is equivalent to specifying all login names common
to that group ID. You can use several -e's on a single admin
command line.

-m[mrlistJ

The list of Modification Requests (MR) numbers is inserted into
the sees file as the reason for creating the initial delta in a manner
identical to delta(l). The v flag must be set and the MR numbers
1-15

SysV

ADMIN(l)

ADM1N(l)

are validated if the v flag has a value (the name of an MR number
validation program). Diagnostics occur if the v flag is not set or
MR validation fails.
-y[commentJ The comment text is inserted into the sees file as a comment for
the initial delta in a manner identical to that of deJta( 1). Omission
of the -y option results in a default comment line being inserted in
the fonn:

date and time created YY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS by login
The -y option is valid only if the -i and/or -n options are
specified (i.e., a new sees file is being created).

-h

Causes admin to check the structure of the sees file [see
sccsfile(5)], and to compare a newly computed check-sum (the
sum of all the characters in the sees file except those -in the first
line) with the check-sum that is stored in the first line of the sees
file. Appropriate error diagnostics are produced. This option inhibits writing on the file, so that it nullifies the effect of any other
keyletters supplied, and is, therefore, only meaningful when processing existing files.

-z

The sees file check-sum is recomputed and stored in the first line
of the sees file (see -h, above).
Note that use of this option on a truly corrupted file can prevent
future detection of the corruption.

The last component of all sees file names must be of the fonn s.file-name. New
sees files are given mode 444 [see chmod(l)]. Write pennission in the pertinent
directory is, of course, required to create a file. All writing done by admin is to a
temporary x-file, called x.file-name, [see get(l)], created with mode 444 if the
admin command is creating a new sees file, or with the same mode as the sees
file if it exists. After successful execution of admin, the sees file is removed (if
it exists), and the x-file is renamed with the name of the sees file. This ensures
that changes are made to the sees file only if no errors occurred.
It is recommended that directories containing sees files be mode 755 and that
sees files themselves be mode 444. The mode of the directories allows only the
owner to modify sees files contained in the directories. The mode of the sees
files prevents any modification at all except by sees commands.
If it should be necessary to patch an sees file for any reason, the mode may be
changed to 644 by the owner allowing use of ed(l). Care must be taken! The
edited file" should always be processed by an admin -h to check for corruption
followed by an admin -z to generate a proper check-sum. Another admin -h is
recommended to ensure the sees file is valid.

1-16

Commands

SysV

ADMIN(l)

ADMIN(l)

admin also makes use of a transient lock file (called z.fiIe-name), which is used
to prevent simultaneous updates to the sces file by different users. See get(l)
for further information.
FILES
Existed before the execution of delta; removed after completion of
delta.
p-file
Existed before the execution of delta; may exist after completion of
delta.
q-fiIe
Created during the execution of delta; removed after completion of
delta.
x-file
Created during the execution of delta; renamed to SCCS file after completion of delta.
z-file
Created during the execution of delta; removed during the execution of
delta.
d-file
Created during the execution of delta; removed after completion of
delta.
lusr/bin/bdiff Program to compute differences between the "gotten" file and the gfile.
g-file

DIAGNOSTICS
Use help(l) for explanations.
SEE ALSO
deJta(1), get(I), prs(l), sccs(1), what(1), sccsfile(4).
ed(1), help(l) in the Using Your SysV Environment.

Commands

1-17

SysV

AR(l)

AR(l)

NAME

ar - archive and library maintainer for portable archives

SYNOPSIS
ar key I"posname] afile [name] .•.

DESCRIPTION
ar maintains groups of files combined into a single archive file. Although its main use
is to create and update library files as used by the link editor, ar can be used for any
similar purpose. The magic string and the file headers used by ar consist of printable
ASCII characters. If an archive is composed of printable files, the entire archive is
printable.
When ar creates an archive, it produces headers in a format that is portable across all
machines. The portable archive format and structure is described in detail in ar(4).
The link editor uses the archive symbol table to effect multiple passes over libraries of
object files in an efficient manner. The link editor is further described in Id(l).
ar creates and maintains an archive symbol table and module name table only when
there is at least one object file in the archive. The archive symbol table is in a specially
named file which is always the first file in the archive. This file is never mentioned or
accessible. Whenever ar creates or updates the contents of such an archive, it also
rebuilds the symbol table. Domain/OS SysV ar builds a module name table and a long
name table in addition to the symbol table; these tables are stored in files that are never
mentioned or accessible.

key is an optional dash (-) followed by one character from the drqtpmx set, optionally
concatenated with one of more characters from the vuaibcls set. posname is the name
of an optional positioning character. afile is the archive file.

OPfION
A

This option mayor may not begin with a dash (-), and is used with the mxtd
keys to move, extract, list or delete by module name.

KEY CHARACfERS
d
Deletes named files from the archive file.

1-18

r

Replaces named files in the archive file. If the optional character u is used
with r, then only those files with dates of modification later than the archive
files are replaced. If an optional positioning character from the set abi is used,
then the posname argument must be present and specifies that new files are to
be placed after (a) or before (b or i) posname. Otherwise new files are placed
at the end.

q

Quickly appends named files to the end of the archive file. Optional positioning characters are invalid. Do not check whether the added members are
already in the archive. Useful for avoiding quadratic behavior when creating a
large archive piece-by-piece. Unchecked, the file can grow exponentially up
to the second degree.
Commands

SysV

AR(l)

AR(l)

Prints a table of contents of the archive file. If no names are given, table all
files. If names are given, table only those files named.
p

Prints named files in the archive.

m

Moves named files to the end of the archive. If a positioning character is
present, then the posname argument must be present and, as in r, specifies
where the files are to be moved.

x

Extracts named files. If no names are given, '11.1 files in the archive are
extracted. In neither case does x alter the archive file.

KEY ARGUMENTS

v

Gives a file-by-file description of the making of a new archive file from the old
archive and the constituent files. When used with t, give a long listing of all
information about the files. When used with x, precede each file with a name.

c

Creates afile and suppress the message produced by default when afile is
created.
Places temporary files in the local (current working) directory rather than in
the default temporary directory, TMPDlR.

s

Forces the regeneration of the archive symbol table even if ar(i) is not
invoked with a command that modifies the archive contents. Useful for restoring the archive symbol table after the strip(l) command has been used on the
archive.

NOTES

If the same file is mentioned twice in an argument list, it may be put in the archive

twice.
FILES

$TMPDlRI*

Temporary files

$TMPDIR is usually /usr/tmp but can be redefined by setting the environment variable
TMPDlR [see tempnamO in tmpnam(3S)].
SEE ALSO

ld(l), lorder(l), strip(I), tmpnam(3S), a.out(4), ar(4) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

Commands

1-19

ASA(l)

SysY

ASA(l)

NAME

asa - intetpret ASA carriage control characters
SYNOPSIS

asa [files 1
DESCRIPTION

Asa intetprets the output of FORTRAN programs that use ASA carriage control characters. It processes either the files whose names are given as arguments or the standard
input if no filenames are supplied. The first character of each line is assumed to be one
of the following control characters:
(Blank) Single newline before printing;

o

Double newline before printing;

1

New page before prirtting;

+

Ovetprint previous line.

If a line begins with anything other than the above characters, asa automatically interprets it as beginning with a ' " and produces an appropriate diagnostic on the standard
error. It never prints the first character of a line, and it always forces the first line of
each input file to start on a new page.
SEE ALSO

ratfor (1).

1-20

Commands

SysV

AT(l)

AT(!)

NAME

at, batch - execute commands at a later time
SYNOPSIS

at time [ date ] [ + increment]
at -rjob ...
at -I [job ... ]
batch
DESCRIPTION

at and batch read commands from standard input to be executed at a later time. at
allows you to specify when the commands should be executed, while jobs queued with
batch execute when system load level permits.
Standard output and standard error output are mailed to you, unless you redirect them
elsewhere. Shell environment variables, current directory, umask, and ulimit are
retained when you execute either at or batch. Open file descriptors, traps, and priority
are lost.
You can use at if your name appears in the file lusrllib/cron/at.al!ow. If that file does
not exist, the file lusr/lib/cron/at.deny determines whether or not you are allowed to
use at. If neither file exists, only root can submit a job. The allow/deny files consist of
one user name per line. These files can only be modified by the superuser.
batch submits a batch job. It is equivalent to the command at now with the exceptions
that batch goes into a differenct queue and responds earlier with error messages.
OPTIONS

The following options apply to at only:
[time] [+ increment]
Specify time when commands are to be executed. One- and two-digit numbers
indicate hours, four-digit numbers show hours and minutes. You may alternately specify the time as two numbers separated by a colon, meaning
hour:minute. You can also append an am or pm suffix; otherwise the commands assume a 24-hour clock. The suffix zulu may be used to indicate GMT.
The special names noon, midnight, now, and next are also recognized.

You can specify an optional date as either a month name followed by a day number
(and possibly a year number preceded by an optional comma), or a day of the week
(fully spelled or abbreviated to three characters). Two special "days", today and
tomorrow are recognized. If you have not provided a date, today is assumed if the
given hour is greater than the current hour and tomorrow is assumed if it is less. If the
given month is less than the current month (and no year is given), next year is assumed.
The optional increment is a number suffixed by one of the following: minutes, hours,
days, weeks, months, or years. (The singular form is also accepted.)

Commands

1-21

AT(I)

AT(I)

SyaV

-rjob

Remove jobs previously scheduled with at.

-I

[job] Report all jobs (by job number) scheduled for the invoking user.

EXAMPLES

at and batch read from standard input the commands to be executed at a later time.
sh(l) provides different ways of specifying standard input. Within your commands, it
may be useful to redirect standard output.
This sequence can be used at a terminal:
batch
sort filename >outfile
 (hold down "CIRL" and press 'D')
This sequence, which demonstrates redirecting standard error to a pipe, is useful in a
shell procedure (the sequence of output redirection specifications is significant):
batch«!
sort filename 2>&1 >outfile I mailloginid
!
To have a job reschedule itself, invoke at from within the shell procedure, by including
code similar to the following within the shell file:
echo "sh shellfile" I at 1900 thursday next week
Some examples of simple, yet valid at command lines are shown here:
at 0815am Jan 24
at 8: 15am Jan 24
at now + 1 day
at 5 pm Friday
Fll.ES

lusrlIib/cron
lusr/lib/cron/at.aIlow
lusr/lib/cron/at.deny

lustlIib/cron/queue
lusrlspool/cron/atjobs

Main cron directory
List of allowed users
List of denied users
Scheduling information
Spool area

DIAGNOSTICS

Complains about various syntax errors and times out of range.
SEE ALSO

kill(l), mail(l), nice(l), ps(l), sh(l), sort(l).
cron(lM) in Managing SysV System Software.

1-22

Commands

SysV

AWK(l)

AWK(l)

NAME

awk - pattern scanning and processing language
SYNOPSIS

awk [ -Fc ] [ prog ] [parameters] [files]
DESCRIPTION

awk scans each input file for lines that match any of a set of patterns specified in prog.
With each pattern in prog there can be an associated action that will be performed when
a line of a file matches the pattern. The set of patterns may appear literally as prog, or
in a file specified as -f file. The prog string should be enclosed in single quotes (') to
protect it from the shell.
Parameters, in the form x= ... y= ... etc., may be passed to awk.

Files are read in order; if there are no files, the standard input is read. The file name means the standard input. Each line is matched against the pattern portion of every
pattern-action statement; the associated action is performed for each matched pattern.
An input line is made up of fields separated by white space. (This default can be
changed by using FS; see below). The fields are denoted $1, $2, ... ; $0 refers to the
entire line.

A pattern-action statement has the form:
pattern { action }
A missing action means print the line; a missing pattern always matches. An action is a
sequence of statements. A statement can be one of the following:
if ( conditional ) statement [ else statement ]
while ( conditional ) statement
for ( expression ; conditional ; expression ) statement
break
continue
{ [ statement ] ... }
variable = expression
print [ expression-list ] [ >expression ]
printf format [ , expression-list ] [ >expression ]
next
# skip remaining patterns on this input line
# skip the rest of the input
exit

Statements are terminated by semicolons, new-lines, or right braces. An empty
expression-list stands for the whole line. Expressions take on string or numeric values
as appropriate, and are built using the operators +, -, *, I, %, and concatenation (indicated by a blank). The C operators ++, - , +=, -=, *=,1=, and %= are also available
in expressions. Variables may be scalars, array elements (denoted xli]) or fields. Variables are initialized to the null string. Array subscripts may be any string, not necessarily numeric; this allows for a form of associative memory. String constants are
quoted (It).
Commands

1-23

SysV

AWK(l)

AWK(l)

The print statement prints its arguments on the standard output (or on a file if >expr is
present), separated by the current output field separator, and terminated by the output
record separator. The printf statement formats its expression list according to the format [see printf(3S) in the SysV Programmer's Reference].
The built-in function length returns the length of its argument taken as a string, or of
the whole line if no argument. There are also built-in functions exp, log, sqrt, and int.
The last truncates its argument to an integer; substr(s, m, n) returns the n-character
substring of s that begins at position m. The function sprintf(jmt, expr, expr, ... ) formats the expressions according to the printf(3S) format given by fmt and returns the
resulting string.
Patterns are arbitrary Boolean combinations ( !, II , &&, and parentheses) of regular
expressions and relational expressions. Regular expressions must be surrounded by
slashes and are as in egrep (see grep(l». Isolated regular expressions in a pattern
apply to the entire line. Regular expressions may also occur in relational expressions.
A pattern may consist of two patterns separated by a comma; in this case, the action is
performed for all lines between an occurrence of the first pattern and the next
occurrence of the second.
A relational expression is one of the following:
expression matchop regular-expression
expression relop expression
where: relop is any of the six relational operators in C, and a matchop is either (for
contains) or! (for does not contain). A conditional is an aritlunetic expression, a relational expression, or a Boolean combination of these.
The special patterns BEGIN and END may be used to capture control before the first
input line is read and after the last. BEGIN must be the first pattern, END the last.
A single character c may be used to separate the fields by starting the program with:

BEGIN { FS = c }
or by using the -Fe option.
Other variable names with special meanings include NF, the number of fields in the
current record; NR, the ordinal number of the current record; FILENAME, the name of
the current input file; OFS, the output field separator (default blank); ORS, the output
record separator (default new-line); and OFMT, the output format for numbers (default
%.6g).
EXAMPLES
Print lines longer than 72 characters:
length> 72

1-24

Commands

SysV

AWK(1)

AWK(1)

Print first two fields in opposite order:
{ print $2, $1 }
Add up first column, print sum and average:
END

{ s += $1 }
{print "sum is", s, " average is", s/NR }

Print fields in reverse order:
{ for (i = NF; i > 0; -i) print $i }
Print all lines between start/stop pairs:
/start/, /stop/
Print all lines whose first field is different from previous one:
$1 != prev { print; prev = $1 }
Print file, filling in page numbers starting at 5:
/Page/ { $2 = n++; }
{ print}
command line: awk -f program n=5 input

BUGS
Input white space is not preserved on output if fields are involved.
There are no explicit conversions between numbers and strings. To force an expression
to be treated as a number add 0 to it; to force it to be treated as a string concatenate the
null string (" ") to it.
SEE ALSO

grep(l), sed(l).
lex(l), printf(3S) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

Commands

1-25

BANNER(l)

SysV

BANNER(l)

NAME

banner - make posters
SYNOPSIS

banner strings
DESCRIPTION

banner prints its arguments (each up to 10 characters long) in large letters on the standard output.
SEE ALSO

echo(l).

1-26

Commands

BASENAME(l)

SysV

BASENAME(l)

NAME

basename, dirname - deliver portions of path names
SYNOPSIS

basename string [ suffix
dirname string

1

DESCRIPTION

basename deletes any prefix ending in I and the suffix (if present in string) from string,
and prints the result on the standard output. It is normally used inside substitution
marks (' ') within shell procedures.
dirname delivers all but the last level of the path name in string.
EXAMPLES

The following example, invoked with the argument lusrlsrc/cmd/cat.c, compiles the
named file and moves the output to a file named cat in the current directory:
cc $1
mv a.out 'basename $1 '\.c"
The following example sets the shell variable NAME to lusrlsrc/cmd:
NAME='dirname lusrlsrc/cmd/cat.c'
SEE ALSO

sh(l ).

Commands

1-2

BATCH(I)

SysV

BATCH(I)

NAME
at, batch - execute commands at a later time
SYNOPSIS

at time [ date] [ + increment ]
at -rjob ...
at -I [job ... ]
batch
DESCRIPTION

at and batch read commands from standard input to be executed at a later time. at
allows you to specify when the commands should be executed, while jobs queued with
batch execute when system load level pennits.
Standard output and standard error output are mailed to you, unless you redirect them
elsewhere. Shell environment variables, current directory, umask, and ulimit are
retained when you execute either at or batch. Open file descriptors, traps, and priority
are lost.
You can use at if your name appears in the file lusr/lib/cron/at.allow. If that file does
not exist, the file lusrllib/cron/at.deny detennines whether or not you are allowed to
use at. If neither file exists, only root can submit a job. The allow/deny files consist of
one user name per line. These files can only be modified by the superuser.
batch submits a batch job. It is equivalent to the command at now with the exceptions
that batch goes into a differenct queue and responds earlier with error messages.
OPTIONS

The following options apply to at only:
[time] [+ increment]
Specify time when commands are to be executed. One- and two-digit numbers
indicate hours, four-digit numbers show hours and minutes. You may alternately specify the time as two numbers separated by a colon, meaning
hour :minute. You can also append an am or pm suffix; otherwise the commands assume a 24-hour clock. The suffix zulu may be used to indicate GMT.
The special names noon, midnight, now, and next are also recognized.

You can specify an optional date as either a month name followed by a day number
(and possibly a year number preceded by an optional comma), or a day of the week
(fully spelled or abbreviated to three characters). Two special "days", today and
tomorrow are recognized. If you have not provided a date, today is assumed if the
given hour is greater than the current hour and tomorrow is assumed if it is less. If the
given month is less than the current month (and no year is given), next year is assumed.
The optional increment is a number suffixed by one of the following: minutes, hours,
days, weeks, months, or years. (The singular fonn is also accepted.)

1-28

Commands

SysV

BATCH(l)

BATCH(l)

-rjob

Remove jobs previously scheduled with at.

-1

[job] Report all jobs (by job number) scheduled for the invoking user.

EXAMPLES

at and batch read from standard input the commands to be executed at a later time.
sh(l) provides different ways of specifying standard input. Within your commands, it
may be useful to redirect standard output.
This sequence can be used at a terminal:
batch
sort filename >outfile
CTRL/D
This sequence, which demonstrates redirecting standard error to a pipe, is useful in a
shell procedure (the sequence of output redirection specifications is significant):
batch «!
sort filename 2>&1 >outfile I mailloginid

!
To have a job reschedule itself, invoke at from within the shell procedure, by including
code similar to the following within the shell file:
echo "sh shellfile" I at 1900 thursday next week
Some examples of simple, yet valid at command lines are shown here:
at 0815am Jan 24
at 8: 15am Jan 24
at now + 1 day
at 5 pm Friday
FIT..ES
/usr/lib/cron
/usr/lib/cron/at.allow
/usr/lib/cron/at.deny
/usr/lib/cron/queue
/usr/spool/cron/atjobs

Main cron directory
List of allowed users
List of denied users
Scheduling information
Spool area

DIAGNOSTICS

Complains about various syntax errors and times out of range.
SEE ALSO

kill(l), mail(l), nice(1), ps(1), sh(1), sort(l).
cron(lM) in Managing SysV System Software.

Commands

1-2~

SysV

BC(l)

BC(l)

NAME

be - arbitrary-precision arithmetic language
SYNOPSIS
be [

-e ] [ -1 ] [file • .. ]

DESCRIPTION
be is an interactive processor for a language that resembles C but provides unlimited
precision arithmetic. It takes input from any files given, then reads the standard input.
The be(l) utility is actually a preprocessor for de(I), which it invokes automatically
unless the -e option is present. In this case the de input is sent to the standard output
instead.

1'1- ~ value of a statement that is an expression is printed unless the main operator is an
assignment. Either semicolons or new-lines may separate statements. Assignment to
scale influences the number of digits to be retained on arithmetic operations in the
manner of de(l). Assignments to ibase or obase set the input and output number radix
respectively.
The same letter may be used as an array, a function, and a simple variable simultaneously. All variables are global to the program. "Auto" variables are pushed down during function calls. When using arrays as function arguments or defining them as
automatic variables, empty square brackets must follow the array name.
PROGRAM SYNTAX
The syntax for be programs is shown below; (L means letter a-z, E means expression,
S means statement).

Comments
Enclosed in /* and */
Names
Simple variables: L
Array elements: L [E)
The words "ibase", "obase", and "scale"
Other Operands
Arbitrarily long numbers with optional sign and decimal point
(E)

sqrt(E)
length (E)
scale (E)
L(E, ... ,E)
Operators
+ ++ -

Number of significant decimal digits
Number of digits right of decimal point

* /

% - (% is remainder; - is power)
(Prefix and postfix; apply to names)

== <= >= != < >
= =+ =- =* =/=% =-

1-30

Commands

SysV

8C(1)

8C(1)

Statements
E
(S; ... ;S

I

if(E)S
while (E) S
for ( E ; E ; E ) S
null statement
break
quit
Function Definitions
define L ( L ,... , L) (
auto L, ... , L
S; ... S
return (E)
Functions in -I
sex)
c(x)
e(x)
lex)
a(x)
j(n,x)

Math Library
sine
cosine
exponential
log
arctangent
Bessel function

All function arguments are passed by value.
OPTIONS

--c

Compile only. The output is send to the standard output.

-\

Argument stands for the name of an arbitrary precision math library.

EXAMPLE
scale = 20
define e (x) (
auto a, h, c, if
a = 1
b
s

=
=

S

1
1

for(i=l; 1==1; i++){
a = a*x
b

= b*i

c = alb
if(c == 0) return(s)
s = s+c

Commands

1-31

SysV

BC(l)

BC(l)

defines a function to compute an approximate value of the exponential function
and
for(i=l; i<=10; i++) e(i)

prints approximate values of the exponential function of the first ten integers.

BUGS

The bc command does not yet recognize the logical operators, && and I I .
For statement must have all three expressions (E's).

Quit is interpreted when read, not when executed.
FILES

lusr/libllib.b

lusr/bin/dc

Mathematical library
Desk calculator proper

SEE ALSO

dc(I).

1-32

Commands

SysV

BDIFF(l)

BDIFF(l)

NAME

bdiff - big diff
SYNOPSIS

bdiff filel file2 [n] [ -s ]
DESCRIPTION

bdiff is used in a manner analogous to diff(l) to find which lines in two files must be
changed to bring the files into agreement. Its purpose is to allow processing of files
which are too large for diff.
OPTIONS

filel (file2)

The name of a file to be used. If filel (file2) is -, the standard input is
read.

n

The number of line segments. The value of n is 3500 by default. If the
optional third argument is given and it is numeric, it is used as the value
for n. This is useful in those cases in which 3500-line segments are too
large for diff, causing it to fail.

-s

Specifies that no diagnostics are to be printed by bdiff (silent option).
Note, however, that this does not suppress possible diagnostic messages
from diff(I), which bdiff calls.

bdiff ignores lines common to the beginning of both files, splits the remainder of each
file into n-line segments, and invokes diff upon corresponding segments. If both
optional arguments are specified, they must appear in the order indicated above.
The output of bdiff is exactly that of diff, with line numbers adjusted to account for the
segmenting of the files (that is, to make it look as if the files had been processed whole).
Note that because of the segmenting of the files, bdiff does not necessarily find a smallest sufficient set of file differences.
FILES

Itmp/bd?????
DIAGNOSTICS

Use help(l) for explanations.
SEE ALSO

diff( I), help( I).

Commands

1-33

SysV

BFS(I)

BFS(l)

NAME
bfs - big file scanner
SYNOPSIS

bfs [-] name
DESCRIPTION

bfs is like ed(l) except that it is read-only and processes much larger files. Files can be
up to I024K bytes and 32K lines, with up to 512 characters, including new-line, per line
(255 for 16-bit machines). bfs is usually more efficient than ed(l) for scanning a file,
since the file is not copied to a buffer. It is most useful for identifying sections of a
large file where csplit(l) can be used to divide it into more manageable pieces for editing.
Normally, the size of the file being scanned is printed, as is the size of any file written
with the w command. The optional - suppresses printing of sizes. Input is prompted
with * if P and a carriage return are typed, as in ed(I). Prompting can be turned off
again by inputting another P and carriage return. Note that messages are given in
response to errors if prompting is turned on.
All address expressions described under ed(l) are supported. In addition, regular
expressions may be surrounded with two symbols besides / and?: > indicates downward search without wrap-around, and < indicates upward search without wrap-around.
There is a slight difference in mark names: only the letters a through z may be used,
and all 26 marks are remembered.

The e, g, v, k, p, q, w, =, ! and null commands operate as described under ed(l). Commands such as - - , +++-, +++=, -12, and +4p are accepted. Note that 1,10p and 1,10
will both print the first ten lines. The f command only prints the name of the file being
scanned; there is no remembered file name. The w command is independent of output
diversion, truncation, or crunching (see the XO, xt and xc commands, below). The following additional commands are available:
xffile

Further commands are taken from the named file. When an end-of-file is
reached, an interrupt signal is received or an error occurs, reading resumes
with the file containing the xf. The xf commands may be nested to a depth
of 10.
xn

Ust the marks currently in use (marks are set by the k command).

xo [file]
Further output from the p and null commands is diverted to the named file,
which, if necessary, is created mode 666 (readable and writable by everyone), unless your umask setting (see umask(l)) dictates otherwise. If file
is missing, output is diverted to the standard output. Note that each diversion causes truncation or creation of the file.

1-34

Commands

SysV

BFS(l)

BFS(l)

: label
This positions a label in a command file. The label is terminated by newline, and blanks between the: and the start of the label are ignored. This
command may also be used to insert comments into a command file, since
labels need not be referenced.
( . , . )xb/regular expression/label
A jump (either upward or downward) is made to label if the command
succeeds. It fails under any of the following conditions:
1. Either address is not between 1 and $.
2. The second address is less than the first.
3. The regular expression does not match at least one line in the
specified range, including the first and last lines.

On success, • is set to the line matched and a jump is made to label. This
command is the only one that does not issue an error message on bad
addresses, so it may be used to test whether addresses are bad before other
commands are executed. Note that the command
xb[/label
is an unconditional jump.
The xb corrunand is allowed only if it is read from someplace other than a
terminal. If it is read from a pipe only a downward jump is possible.
xl number
Output from the p and null commands is truncated to at most number characters. The initial number is 255.
xv[digit] [spaces] [value]
The variable name is the specified digit following the xv. The commands
xv5100 or xv5 100 both assign the value 100 to the variable 5. The command xv61,100p assigns the value 1,100p to the variable 6. To reference a
variable, put a % in front of the variable name. For example, using the
above assignments for variables 5 and 6:

1,%5p
1,%5
%6
will all print the first 100 lines.
g/%5/p
would globally search for the characters 100 and print each line containing
a match. To escape the special meaning of %, a \ must precede it.
g/" A% [cds lip

Corrunands

1-3:

BFS(l)

SysV

BFS(l)

.could be used to match and list lines containing print! of characters,
decimal integers, or strings.

Another feature of the xv command is that the first line of output from a
UNIX system command can be stored into a variable. The only requirement is that the first character of value be an !. For example:
.w junk
xv5 !cat junk
!rmjunk
!echo "%5"
xV6!expr %6 + 1
would put the current line into variable S, print it, and increment the variable 6 by ('ne. To escape the special meaning of ! as the first character of
value, precede it with a \.
xv7\!date
stores the value !date into variable 7.
xbz label
xbn label
These two commands will test the last saved return code from the execution of a UNIX system command (!command) or nonzero value, respectively, to the specified label. The two examples below both search for the
next five lines containing the string size.
xv55
:1

/size/
xv5!expr %5-1
!if 0%5 != 0 exit 2
xbnl
xv45
:1
/size/
xv4!expr %4 - 1
!if 0%4 = 0 exit 2
xbzl
xc [switch]
If switch is 1, output from the p and null commands is crunched; if switch
is 0 it is not. Without an argument, xc reverses switch. Initially switch is
1-36

Commands

BFS(l)

SysV

BFS(l)

set for no crunching. Crunched output has strings of tabs and blanks
reduced to one blank and blank lines suppressed.
DIAGNOSTICS

? for errors in commands, if promFting is turned off. Self-explanatory error messages
when prompting is on.
SEE ALSO

csplit( 1), ed( I), umask(l).

Commands

1-37

Domain/OS SysV

BLDT(l)

BLDT(l)

NAME

bldt - display time operating system was built
SYNOPSIS

bldt [options] [node_id]
DESCRIPTION

bldt displays the time at which the running version of Domain/OS was built.

node)d (optional)

Display the build time of the node whose network root directory
is pathname.
Default if omitted: display build time of current node

OPTIONS
-n node_spec ...
-3

Display build time of specified node[s].
Display build time of all nodes.

EXAMPLES
$ bldt I/ward

**** Node 29C27. 4B51 **** "/ /ward"
Domain/OS kernel(3), revision 10.0, b120.1 April 15, 1988

1:02:54 pm

$ bldt -n I/june

**** Node 29C27.CBB9 **** "//june"
Domain/OS kernel(8), revision 10.0, bl17.3 February 9, 1988

8:12:37 am

$ bldt -n CBB9

**** Node 29C27.CBB9 **** "//june"
Domain/OS kernel(8), revision 10.0, bl17.3 \
February 9, 1988 8:12:37 am

1-38

Commands

SysV

CAL(l)

CAL(l)

NAME

ca I - print calendar
SYNOPSIS

cal [ [ month

1 year 1

DESCRIPTION

cal prints a calendar for a specified month and/or year. If neither is specified, cal prints
a calendar for the present month only.
Both year and month must be Arabic numbers. The range for year
is 1-9999. The range for month is 1-12.
EXAMPLES

To print a calendar for the entire year of 1988, type the following:
cal 1988
To print a calendar for December, 1988, type:
cal 12 1988
BUGS

The year always starts in January.
Note that "cal 88" refers to the year 88, not 1988.

Commands

1-39

SysV

CALENDAR(l)

CALENDAR(l)

NAME

calendar - reminder service
SYNOPSIS

calendar [ - ]
DESCRIPTION

calendar provides an individual reminder sevice by consulting the file calendar in your
login directory and printing out lines containing today's or tomorrow's date. You must
create the file before calendar can successfully run.
A typical line in your calendar file may look like this:
12/15 Departmental meeting at 3 p.m.
calendar recognizes most month-day entries (e.g., 12/15, Dec. 15, december 15), but
not day-month items (e.g., 15 December, 15/12). On weekends, "tomorrow" extends
through Monday.
When an argument is present, calendar looks in all users' login directories for a file
named calendar and sends any positive results by mail(l).
BUGS

Your calendar must be public information for you to get reminder service.
calendar's extended idea of "tomorrow" does not account for holidays.
FILES

!usr!lib!calprog to figure out today's and tomorrow's dates !etc!passwd !tmp!cal*
SEE ALSO
mail(1).

1-40

Commands

CANCEL(l)

SysV

CANCEL(l)

NAME

Ip, cancel- send/cancel requests to an LP line printer
SYNOPSIS

Ip [-c] [-eldest] [-m] [-nnumber] [-ooption] [-s] [-ttitle] [-wjiles]
cancel [ids] [printers]
DESCRIPTION

Ip arranges for the named files and associated information (collectively called a
"request") to be printed by a line printer. If no file names are mentioned, the standard
input is assumed. A dash (-) used as a file name indicates the standard input and may
be supplied on the command line in conjunction with named jiles. The order in which
jiles appear is the same order in which they will be printed.
Ip associates a unique "id" with each request and prints it on the standard output. This
id can be used later to cancel (see cancel) or find the status (see Ipstat(l» of the
request.
OPTIONS

The following options to Ip may appear in any order and may be intennixed with file
names:
-c

Makes copies ofthejile(s) to be printed immediately when Ip is invoked.
Normally,jiles will not be copied, but will be linked whenever possible.
If the -c option is not given, then you should be careful not to remove
any of the jile(s) before the request has been printed completely.
Without the -c option, any changes made to the named jiles after the
request is made, but before it is printed, will be reflected in the printed
output.

-ddest

Chooses dest as the printer or class of printers where printing will take
place. If dest is a printer, the request will be printed only on that specific
printer. If dest is a class of printers, the request will be printed on the
first available printer that is a member of the class. Under certain conditions (printer availability, file space limitation, etc.), requests for specific
destinations may not be accepted (see accept(lM) and Ipstat(l». By
default, dest is taken from the environment variable LPDEST (if it is
set). Otherwise, a default destination (if one exists) for the computer
system is used. Destination names vary between systems (see Ipstat(l».

-m

Sends mail after thejiles have been printed (seemail(I».Bydefault.no
mail is sent.

-nnumber

Prints number copies of the output (default is 1).

-ooption

Specifies a printer-dependent or class-dependent option. Several such
options may be collected by specifying -0 more than once. For more
information about what are valid options, see Models in Ipadmin(lM).

Commands

1-41

SysV

CANCEL(l)

CANCEL(l)

-s

Suppresses messages from Ip(l) such as "request id is ... ".

-ttitle

Prints title on the banner page of the output.

-w

Writes a message to your terminal after the files have been printed. If
you are not logged in, mail is sent instead.

Cancel cancels line printer requests made by Ip(l). The command line arguments can
be either request ids (as returned by Ip(l» or printer names (for a complete list of
printer names, use Ipstat(l». Specifying a request id cancels the associated request
even if it is currently printing. Specifying a printer cancels the request which is
currently printing on that printer. In either case, the cancellation of a request that is
currently printing frees the printer to print its next available request.
FILES

/usr/spool/lp/*
SEE ALSO

enable(l), Ipstat(l), mail(l).
accept(lM), Ipadmin(lM), Ipsched(lM) in the Managing SysV System Software.

1-42

Commands

SysV

CAT(l)

CAT(l)

NAME

ca t - concatenate and print files
SYNOPSIS

cat [ -u 1 [ -s 1 [ -v [-tl [-ell file ...
DESCRIPTION

cat reads each file in sequence and writes it on the standard output. If no input file is
given, or if the argument "-" is encountered, cat reads from the standard input file.
OPTIONS

-u

Produce unbuffered output. (The default is buffered output.)

-s

Ignore non-existent files.

-v

Make non-printing characters visible (except for tabs, new-lines and formfeeds). Print control characters (CTRL key and X) as '''X'', the delete character (DELETE key - octal 0177) as a caret with a question mark '''7'', and nonASCn characters (with the high bit set) as M-x. where x is the character
specified by the seven low-order bits.

-t

With the -v option, print tabs as 'I.

-e

With the -v option, print a dollar sign ($) at the end of each line (prior to the
new-line).

The -t and -e options are ignored if the -v option is not specified.
EXAMPLES

To write filel on standard output, type the following:
# cat filel
To write standard input tofilel, use this command:
#cat >filel
To write filel andfile2 to file3, type this:
# cat file 1 file2 >file3
BUGS
Command formats such as cat filet file2 >filel destroy the original data infilel. Be
careful when using shell special characters.
SEE ALSO
cp(l), pg(l), pr(I).

Commands

1-43

SysV

CB(l)

CB(l)

NAME
cb - C program beautifier
SYNOPSIS
cb [ -s

1 [ -j 1 [ -I

leng

1 [ file

...

1

DESCRIPTION
cb reads C programs from its arguments or from the standard input, and writes them on

the standard output with spacing and indentation displaying the structure of the code.
Under default options, cb preserves all user new-lines.
OPTIONS

-s

Causes code to conform to the style of Kernighan and Ritchie in The C
Programming Language.

-j

Puts split lines back together.

-Ileng

Splits lines that are longer than [eng.

BUG
Punctuation that is hidden in preprocessor statements causes indentation errors.
SEE ALSO

cc(l).
The C Programming Language. Prentice-Hall, 1978.

1-44

Commands

SysV

CC(l)

CC(l)

NAME
cc - C compiler
SYNOPSIS

cc [ options

1files

DESCRIPTION

cc is an interface to the preprocessor (cpp), the Domain C compiler, and the link editor
(ld). cc processes the supplied options and then executes the various tools with the
proper arguments. cc accepts several types of files as argument~:
Files whose names end with .c are taken to be C source programs and may be preprocessed, compiled, and link edited. The compilation process may be stopped after the
completion of any pass if the appropriate options are supplied. If the compilation process runs through the compiler then an object program is produced and is left in the file
whose name is that of the source with .0 substituted for .c. However, the .0 file is normally deleted if a single C program is compiled and then immediately link edited. Files
whose names end in .i are taken to be preprocessed C source programs and may be
compiled and link edited. Files whose names do not end in .c, or .i are handed to the
link editor.
Assembly source programs (files whose names end in .s) are not supported.
Since cc usually creates files in the current directory during the compilation process, it
is necessary to run cc in a directory in which a file can be created.
Not all standard UNIX options are available. Furthermore, some unique options are
provided by the Domain cc command. If the cc command does not recognize an option
as a preprocessor or compiler option, it assumes that it is an option for the link editor
(Id) and passes it along. The options the cc interface recognizes as preprocessor options
are: -C, -D, -H, -I, and -U. The link editor options are: -3, -I, -L, -m, -M, -0, -r,
-s, -t, -u, -V, -x and -z. Options that are recognized but ignored are: -ds, -dl, -f,
-F and -So When you use these options, you get a warning that they are not supported.
OPTIONS

-A cpu,id

Generates code for a particular class of processor. Legal values for id
are:
any
160
460
660
90
330
560
570
580
3000

Commands

Standard M68000 code
DSP160 code
DN460code
660 code
DSP90 code
DN330code
DN560code
DN570code
DN580code
DN3000code
1-45

SysV

CC(l)

4000
FPX
PEB
-A nansi

CC(l)

DN4000 code
Floating-Point Accelerator Board
Perfonnance Enhancement Board

Does not compile with ANSI rules. This option passes -ntype to the
compiler and does not define the preprocessor symbol_STDC_.

-A runtype,type

Passes type infonnation to compiler and linker.
-A systype,type
Defines the target system type (systype) for the compiled object. type can
be one of:

TYPE
any
bsd4.2
bsd4.3
sys5
sys5.3

DESCRIPTION
Version independent
Berkeley version 4.2
Berkeley version 4.3
UNIX System V
UNIX System V.3

This replaces the - T option.

-c

Suppresses the linking phase of the compilation and forces an object file
to be produced, even if only one program is compiled.

-E

Runs only cpp(l) on the named C programs, and sends the result to the
standard output.

-g

Causes the compiler to generate additional infonnation needed for using
dbx(1) or dde(l).

-H

(cpp switch) Prints out to stderr the pathname of each file included during this compilation.

~

1-46

outftle

Produces an output object file named outfile. The name of the default
file is a.out. This is a link editor option.

-0

Turns on compilation phase optimitzations.

-p

Produces code that counts the number of times each routine is called;
also, automatically calls monitor(3C). Produces a mon.out file at normal tenninal execution of the object program. An execution file is then
generated by using prof( 1).

-p

Runs only cpp(l) on the named C programs, and leaves the result on
corresponding files suffixed with.i. Passes this option to cpp( I).

-qg

Produces profiled code that allows profiling with gprof( 1). Produces a
gmon.out file at nonnal tennination of execution of the object program.
Commands

SysV

CC{l)

CC(l)

-qp

Produces profiled code where the p argument produces identical results
to the -p option (allows profiling with prof(l».

-T systype

Defines the target system type (systype) for the compiled object. systype
can be one of:
any
bsd4.2
bsd4.3
sysS
sysS.3

Version independent
Berkeley version 4.2
Berkeley version 4.3
UNIX System V
UNIX System V.3

Note this option is identical to the -A systype,type option, but may
become obsolete in a future release. We recommend using -A
systype,systype.
-V

Prints the version of the compiler and/or link editor that is invoked.

-Wc,argl,[arg2 ... )
Hands off the arguments argi to pass c where c is one of p, 0, or 1, indicating the preprocessor, compiler, or link editor, respectively. Using
-WO enables you to use Icornlce options that are not available with
Ibin/ee. For example: -WO, -pic passes -pie to the compiler.
-¥[pOISILU), dir
Specifies a new pathname, dirname, for the locations of the tools and
directories designated by the first argument.
p

o

I
S
I
L
U

Preprocessor (epp)
Compiler (ee)
Link editor (Id)
Directory containing start-up routine (/usr/Iib/ertO.o)
Default include directory searched by preprocessor (/usr/include)
First default library directory searched by link editor (/usr/lib)
Second default library directory searched by link editor (no default)

If the location of a tool is being specified, the new pathname for the tool
will be Idirname/tool. If more than one -Y option is applied to anyone
tool or directory, the last occurrence holds.

-Bstring

-t[p02al] These options will be removed in the next release. Use the - Y
option.

ee also recognizes -C, -D, -H, -I and -U and passes these options and their agruments directly to the preprocessor without using the -W option. Similarly, ee recognizes -a, -I, -L, -m, -M, 4), -r, -s, -t, -u, -V, -x, -z and passes these options and
their arguments directly to the loader. See epp(l) and Id(l).
Commands

1-47

SysV

CC(l)

CC(l)

Other agruments are taken to be C compatible object programs, typically produces by
an earlier cc run, or perhaps libraries of C compatible routines and are passed directly to
the link editor. These programs, together with the results of any compilations specified,
are link edited (in order given) to produce an executable program with name a.out
unless the -0 option of the link editor is used.
If cc is put in file preftxcc the prefix will be parsed off the command and used to call the
tools, i.e., preftxtool. For example, OLDcc will call OLDcpp, OLDcomp, OLDoptirn,
OLDas and OLDld and will link OLDcrtl.o. Therefore, one MUST be carefule when
moving cc around. The prefix will apply to the preprocessor, compiler, link editor, and
the start-up routines.

NOTES
By default, the return value from a compiled C program is completely random. The
only two guaranteed ways to return a specific value are to explicitly call exit(2) or to
leave the function rnainO with a "return eJl.pression;" construct.
FILES
file.c
file.i
file.o
a.out
LIBDlR/crtO.o
TMPDlR/*
LIBDlR/cpp
lusr/apollo/lib/cc
BINDlR/ld

C source file
Preprocessed C source file
object file
Link edited output
Start-up routine
Temporary files
Preprocessor, cpp(l)
Compiler
Link editor, Id(l)

LIB D1R is usually lusrllib
BINDIR is usually fbin
TMPDlR is usually fusrftrnp but can be redefined by setting the environment variable
TMPDlR [see tempnarnO in tmpnarn(3S)].
SEE ALSO

ld(ll, cpp(l), gencc(l),lint(l), prof(l), dbx(l), tmpnam(3S).
Domain C Language Reference
"The C Programming Language", Kernighan, B.W. and Ritchie, D.M. Prentice-Hall,
1978.

1-48

Commands

CD(l)

SysV

CD(l)

NAME

cd - change working directory
SYNOPSIS
cd [ directory ]
DESCRIPTION
If directory is not specified, cd uses the value of shell parameter $HOME as the new
working directory. If directory specifies a complete path starting with a slash (/), a
period (.), or two consectutive periods (.• ), directory becomes the new working directory. If neither case applies, cd tries to find the designated directory relative to one of
the paths specified by the $CDPATH shell variable. $CDPATH has the same syntax as,
and similar semantics to, the $PATH shell variable. cd must have execute (search) permission in directory .
Because a new process is created to execute each command, cd would be ineffecrive if
it were written as a normal command; therefore, it is recognized by, and is internal to,
the shell.
EXAMPLES
To change your working directory to the directory called mydata, type the following:
#cd mydata
To advance your working directory one level up in the naming hierarchy, use this command:
#cd .•
SEE ALSO
pwd(l), sh(l).
chdir(2) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

Commands

1-49

SysV

COC(l)

eDe(1)

NAME

cdc -change the delta commentary of an sees delta
SYNOPSIS
cdc -rSID [-m[mrlist]] [-y[comment]] files
DESCRIPTION
cdc changes the delta commentary for the SID (SeeS IDentification string) specified by
the -r option, of each named sees file.
Delta commentary is defined to be the Modification Request (MR) and comment information normally specified via the delta(1) command (-m and -y arguments).
If a directory is named, cdc behaves as though each file in the directory were specified
as a named file, except that non-sees files (last component of the path name does not
begin with s.) and unreadable files are silently ignored. If a name of - is given, the
standard input is read (see BUGS) and each line of the standard input is taken to be the

name of an sees file to be processed.
Arguments to cdc, which may appear in any order, consist of options and file names.
All options described below apply independently to each named file.
0PI10NS
-rSID

-mmrlist

Specifies the sees IDentification (SID) string of a delta for which the
delta commentary is to be changed.
Supplies a list of MR numbers to be added and/or deleted in the delta
commen_ary of the SID specified by the -r option. The sees file must
have the v flag set. A null MR list has no effect.
MR entries are added to the list of MRs in the same manner as that of
delta(I). In order to delete an MR, precede the MR number with the
character! (see EXAMPLES). If the MR to be deleted is currently in the
list of MRs, it is removed and changed into a .. comment" line. A list of
all deleted MRs is placed in the comment section of the delta commentary and preceded by a comment line stating that they were deleted.
If -m is not used and the standard input is a terminal, the prompt MRs?
is issued on the standard output before the standard input is read; if the
standard input is not a terminal, no prompt is issued. The MRs? prompt
always precedes the comments? prompt (see -y option).
MRs in a list are separated by blanks and/or tab characters. An unescaped new-line character terminates the MR list.
Note that if the v flag has a value [see admin(l)], it is taken to be the
name of a program (or shell procedure) which validates the correctness
of the MR numbers. If a non-zero exit status is returned from the MR
number validation program, cdc terminates and the delta commentary
remains unchanged.

1-50

Commands

SysV

COC(1)

CDC(l)

-y[commentJ Arbitrary text used to replace the comments already existing for the delta
specified by the -r option. The previous comments are kept and preceded by a comment line stating that they were changed. A null comment has no effect.
If -y is not specified and the standard input is a tenninal, the prompt

comments? is issued on the standard output before the standard input is
read; if the standard input is not a tenninal, no prompt is issued. An
unescaped new-line character tenninates the comment text.
EXAMPLES

cdc -r1.6 -m"bI78-12345 !bI77-54321 bI79-0000I" -ytrouble s.file
adds b178-12345 and b179-00001 to the MR list, removes bl77-54321 from the MR list,
and adds the comment trouble to delta 1.6 of s.file.
cdc -r1.6 s.file
MRs? !bI77-54321 b178-12345 bI79-00001
comments? trouble
does the same thing.
BUGS

If SCCS file names are supplied to the cdc command via the standard input (- on the
command line), then the -m and -y keyletters must also be used.
To modify the delta commentary, you must be either (1) the creator of the delta, or (2)
the owner of the SCCS file and directory.
FILES

x-file
z-file

[see delta(l)]
[see deita(l)]

DIAGNOSTICS

Use he/pel) for explanations.
SEE ALSO

admin(l), delta(l), get(l), prs(I), sccsfile(4}.
help(I) in the Using Your SysV Environment.

Commands

1-51

SysV

CFLOW(l)

CFLOW(l)

NAME

cflow - generate C flowgraph
SYNOPSIS

cflow [-r] [-ix] [-i_ ] [- is printed.
OPTIONS
In addition to the -D, -I, and -U options [which are interpreted just as they are by
cc(l) and cpp(l)], the following options are interpreted by cflow:

1-52

-r

Reverses the "caller: callee" relationship producing an inverted listing
showing the callers of each function. The listing is also sorted in lexicographical order by callee.

-ix

Includes extemal and static data symbols. The default is to include only
functions in the flowgraph.

-i

Includes names that begin with an underscore. The default is to exclude
these functions (and data if -ix is used).

-
f: intI), 
h: <>
i: int, 
g: <>

When the nesting level becomes too deep, the output of cHow can be piped to pr(l),
using the -e option, to compress the tab expansion to something less than every eight
spaces.
DIAGNOSTICS

Notifies you of bad options. Complains about multiple definitions and only believes the
first. Other messages may come from the various programs used (e.g., the Cpreprocessor).
BUGS

Files produced by lex(l) and yacc(l) cause the reordering of line number declarations
which can confuse cHow. To get proper results, feed cHow the yacc or lex input.
SEE ALSO

cc(l), cpp(l), lex(l), lint(l), nm(1), yacc(l).
pr(1) in Using Your SysV Environment.
Commands

I-53

CHACL(l)

CHACL(1)

Domain/OS SysV

NAME

chacl - change access control list
SYNOPSIS

chacl [ -odfvLR ]  file ...
chacl [ -odfvLR ] -D  file ...
chacl [ -odfvLR ] [ -u  ] [ -g  ] [ -z ] file ...
chacl [ -odfvLR ] ( -c 1 -I 1 -n ) file ...
chacl [ -vLR ] ( -8 1 -S ) file ...
DESCRIPTION

The chacl command changes the entries in an object's access control list (ACL). Use
the specification (spec) part of the command line either to set the rights for a given subject identifier (sid), or to change the inheritance mechanisms of a directory. The
specification syntax, shown below, is similar to chmod's symbolic mode form.

:
:
:
:
:
:

 1  1 [, ... ]
%.%.% 1 
[ugzo] 1a
=1+1[UP]
[prwxksl]

OPTIONS

-8

1-54

-S

The -8 (BSD) and -S (SysV) options simply set a directory to use the
appropriate semantics. Any existing ACLs are removed, and the protections on the directory are determined by the current umask(2). Owner,
group, and organization inheritance are determined using the appropriate
semantics (SysV, all from current process; BSD, owner from current
process, group from directory. Organization is marked "ignore" for
both).

-c

Force calculation of the extended entry mask. The mask represents the
maximum rights of all extended ACL entries, and is automatically calculated each time chacl is run. This option is used to undo the effects of
the chmod command, as chmod affects the mask as well as the world
required entry (%.%.%) when changing rights for "other".

-I

Set local access. With local access set, an object can be accessed only
from the node on which it is located.

-n

Set network access.

-0

Make the changes on the ACL itself for the objects specified. If the -0,
-d, or -f options are not specified, -0 is assumed These options can be
used in any combination.
Commands

CHACL(1)

Domain/OS SysV

CHACL(l)

-d

Make the changes on the initial directory ACL.

-f

Apply the changes to the initial file ACL.

-v

(verbose) List each destination as the ACL is changed.

-L

Follow any soft links encountered. and operate on the object to which
the link points. Since soft links in Domain/OS do not have ACLs.
attempting to change a soft link without the -L flag simply results in a
warning. with no change.

-R

Apply the changes recursively to any directories encountered among the
files listed. Be very careful when combining this option with the -L
option!

-D

Delete extended entries from an ACL. Required entries may not be
deleted. so ~id> must be an actual subject identifier (see below).

-u
-g

Set the owner field in an ACL.

-z

Set the organization field in an ACL.

Set the group field in an ACL.

SUBJECT IDENTIFIERS

The sid (Subject IDentifier) used in the first form (~id>.Jnewfiie

cpio -i uses the output file of cpio -0 (directed through a pipe with cat in the example),
takes out those files that match the patterns (mem%j, memo/b*), creates directories
below the current directory as needed (-d option), and places the files in the appropriate
directories. If no patterns were given, all files from "new file" would be placed in the
directory.
cat newfile

I

cpio -id mem%j memo/b*

cpio -p takes the file names piped to it and copies or links (-1 optiort) those iiles to
another directory on your machine (newdir in the example). The -d options says to
create directories as needed. The -m option says retain the modification time. (It is
important to use the -depth option of find to generate path names for cpio. This eliminates problems cpio could have trying to create files under read-only directories.)
find. -depth -print

I

cpio -pdlmv newdir

SEE ALSO

ar(1), find(l),ls(l), tar(l).
cpio(4) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

1-78

Commands

SysV

CPP(l)

CPP(l)

NAME
cpp - the C language preprocessor
SYNOPSIS

LIBDlR/cpp [option . .. J [ ifile [ ofile

JJ

DESCRIPTION

cpp is invoked as the first pass of any C compilation by the cc(l) command. Therefore,
cpp's output is designed to be in a form acceptable as input to the next pass of the C
compiler. As the C language evolves, cpp and the rest of the C compilation package
are modified to follow these changes.
cpp optionally accepts two file names as arguments. ifile and ofile are respectively the
input and output for the preprocessor. They default to standard input and standard output if not supplied.
OPTIONS

-p

Preprocesses the input without producing the line control information used by
the next pass of the C compiler.

-c

Passes along C-style comments (except those found on cpp directive lines). By
default, cpp strips out C-style comments.

-Uname

Removes any initial definition of name, where name is a reserved symbol that
is predefined by the particular preprocessor. Following is the current list of
these possibly reserved symbols. On Apollo computers, unix, apollo, and
aegis are defined.
operating system:
hardware:

unix, dmert, gcos, ibm, os, tss, aegis
interdata, pdpll, u370, u3b, u3b5, u3b2,
u3b20d, vax, apollo

UNIX system variant:

RES,RT

lint( 1):

lint

-Oname
-Oname=def
Defines name with value def as if by a #define. If no =def is given, name is
defined with value 1. The -0 option has lower precedence than the -U option.
That is, if the same name is used in both a -U option and a -0 option, the
name will be undefined regardless of the order of the options.

-T

Uses only the first eight characters to distinguish preprocessor symbols. This
option is included for backward compatibility.

-ldir

Changes the algorithm for searching for #include files whose names do not
begin with a slash (I) to look in dir before looking in the directories on the
standard list. Thus, #include files whose names are enclosed in double quotes
(" ") are searched for first in the directory of the file with the #include line,
then in directories named in -I options, and last in directories on a standard

Commands

1-79

SysV

CPP(l)

CPP(1)

list. For #include files whose names are enclosed in angle brackets
directory of the file with the #include line is not searched.
- Ydir

«», the

Uses directory dir in place of the standard list of directories when searching
for #include files.

-H

Prints, one per line on standard error, the path names of included files.

-tsys

Sets the environment variable SYSTYPE to sys while cpp is running. This
option is useful for setting the resolution of systype-dependent links. For
example, if your systype is sys5.3 and you specify -tbsd4.3, the file
lusr/include/rdmb.h resolves to Ibsd4.3/usr/include/ndmb.h instead of
IsysS.3/usr/include/ndmb.h.

Two special names are understood by cpp. The name __LINE__ is defined as the
current line number (as a decimal integer) as known by cpp, and __FILE__ is defined
as the current file name (as a C string) as known by cpp. They can be used anywhere
(including in macros) just as any other defined name.
DIRECTlVES

All cpp directive lines start with # in column 1. Any number of blanks and tabs is
allowed between the # and the directive. The directives are:
#define name token-string
Replace subsequent instances of name with token-string.
#define name( arg, ... , arg ) token-string
Notice that there can be no space between name and the (. Replace subsequent
instances of name followed by a (, a list of comma-separated sets of tokens,
and a ) followed by token-string, where each occurrence of an arg in the
token-string is replaced by the corresponding set of tokens in the cornmaseparated list. When a macro with arguments is expanded, the arguments are
placed into the expanded token-string unchanged. After the entire token-string
has been expanded, cpp re-starts its scan for names to expand at the beginning
of the newly created token-string.
#Undef name
Cause the definition of name (if any) to be forgotten from now on. No additional tokens are permitted on the directive line after name.
#ident "string"
Put string into the .comment section of an object file.
#include "filename"
#include 
Include at this point the contents of filename (which will then be run through
cpp). When the <.filename> notation is used, filename is only searched for in
the standard places. See the -I and -Y options above for more detail. No
additional tokens are permitted on the directive line after the final" or >.

1-80

Commands

SysV

CPP(l)

CPP(l)

#Iine integer-constant "filename"
Causes cpp to generate line control information for the next pass of the C compiler. Integer-constant is the line number of the next line and filename is the
file from which it comes. If "filename" is not given, the current file name is
unchanged. No additional tokens are permitted on the directive line after the
optional file name.
#endif
Ends a section of lines begun by a test directive (#if, #ifdef, or #ifndef). Each
test directive must have a matching #endif. No additional tokens are permitted
on the directive line.
#ifdef name
The following lines appear in the output only if name has been the subject of a
previous #define and not the subject of an intervening #Undef. No additional
tokens are permitted on the directive line after name.
#ifndef name
The following lines appear in the output only if name has not been the subject
of a previous #define. No additional tokens are permitted on the directive line
after name.
#if constant-expression
The following lines appear in the output only if the constant-expression evaluates to non-zero. All binary non-assignment C operators, the ?: operator, the
unary -, !, and - operators are all legal in constant-expression. Operator precedence is the same as defined by the C language. There is also a unary operator defined, which can be used in constant-expression in these two forms:
defined ( name ) or defined name. This allows the utility of #ifdef and
#ifndef in a #if directive. Only these operators, integer constants, and names
which are known by cpp should be used in constant-expression. In particular,
the sizeof operator is not available.
To test whether either of two symbols,foo andjUm, are defined, use
#if defined(foo) II defined(fum)
#elif constant-expression
An arbitrary number of #elif directives is allowed between a #if, #ifdef, or
#ifndef directive and a #else or #endif directive. The lines following #elif
appear in the output only if the preceding test directive evaluates to zero, all
intervening #elif directives evaluate to zero, and the constant-expression
evaluates to non-zero. If constant-expression evaluates to non-zero, all
succeeding #elif and #else directives will be ignored. Any constant-expression
allowed in a #if directive is allowed in a #elif directive.

Commands

1-81

SysV

CPP(l)

#else

CPP(1)

The following lines appear in the output only if the preceding test directive
evaluates to zero, and all intervening #elif directives evaluate to zero. No
additional tokens are permitted on the directive line.

The test directives and the possible #else directives can be nested. In addition, the following directives are recognized by cpp and passed to the Domain C compiler:
# apollo
# apollo_bit
# debug
# eject
# list
# module
# nolist
# systype
# backstop
# section
# inhibit
# attribute
# options
NOTES
Using cpp other than through the cc(l) command is not suggested. See m4(1) for a
general macro processor.
The unsupported -W option enables the #c1ass directive. If it encounters a #c1ass
directive, cpp exits with code 27 after finishing all other processing. This option provides support for "C with classes" .
Because the standard directory for included files may be different in different environments, use the following form of the #include directive:
#include 
rather than one with an absolute path, like:
#include "/usr/include/file.h"
cpp warns about the use of the absolute pathname.
FlLES

INCDIR

Standard directory list for #include files, usually /usr/include

LlBDIR

lusr/lib

DIAGNOSTICS

The error messages produced by cpp are intended to be self-explanatory. The file name
and line number where the error occurred are printed along with the diagnostic.
SEE ALSO

cc(l), lint(l), m4(1). Domain C Language Reference.

1-82

Commands

CPSCR(l)

Domain/OS SysV

CPSCR(l)

NAME

cpscr - copy the current display to a file
SYNOPSIS
cpscr [-inv] [-append] [-gprLbitmapll pathname
DESCRIPTION
cpscr copies the current screen image, without clearing it, to the file you specify. Use
the prf (princfile) command to print the file.
Use the DM command cpo to copy the screen without creating a new process window
or changing the current transcript pad. cpo invokes the cpscr command from the DM
without creating a pad or window. Thus, press  and type
cpo lusr/apollo/bio/cpscr pathname

You may copy small portions of a black and white screen (such as a single window)
with the DM command xi.
By default, black and white screens are copied into a GMF file. Color screens are
copied into a GPR bitmap.

pathname (required) Specify file to that the screen is copied.
OPTIONS
-inv

Invert image. Use this option to store the image in reverse video.
Black screen pixels become white and white screen pixels
become black. Do not used this option with the -gpr_bitmap
option or on color nodes.

-append

Appends a black and white screen image to an existing GMF file.
You cannot use this option with the -gpr_bitmap option or on
color nodes.

-gpr_bitmap

Use this option to copy a black and white screen into a GPR bitmap file rather than a GMF file. This option has no meaning for
color nodes since color screens are already copied into GPR bitmaps.

EXAMPLES
Invert and copy the current screen image to the specified file. Since the command line
is echoed in the shell's process transcript pad prior to execution, this command will
appear in the resulting image.
$ cpscr -iov Ilus/looky _there

Commands

1-83

CPSCR(l)

Domain/OS SysV

CPSCR(1)


Command: cpo /usr/apollo/bio/cpscr -iov //us/IookLthere
Same result as in the previos example, but the cpscr line will not appear in the plotted
output.

1-84

Commands

CRDDF(l)

Domain/OS SysV

CRDDF(l)

NAME

crddf - create, display, or modify a device descriptor file
SYNOPSIS

crddf [options ...] pathname
DESCRIPTION

crddf creates, displays, or modifies a device descriptor file (DDP). A DDF defines a
peripheral bus unit (PBU) device for which you have written a driver. See Writing Device Drivers with GP[0 Calls for details on both DDFs and PBUs.
crddf is valid only if the general purpose input/output (GPIO) software is running on
your network.
pathname (required) Specify narne of the DDF to be created, modified, or displayed.
OPTIONS

Reads further options from standard input. Signal completion
with-end.
-at

Specifies that device lives on the AT-compatible bus.

-calUibrary pathname
Specifies pathnarne of the call side of the device driver library.
This option is required.
-check

Checks the DDF to ensure that all required fields have been
specified.

-cleanupJoutine [entry_name]
Specifies the entry-point narne of the clean-up routine in the call
library. Omitting the entry narne deletes a previously existing
clean-up routine.
-csr_offset port_number
Specifies the offset into the control status register (CSR) page, in
hexadecimal format, at which the device's controVstatus registers
are located. Device drivers may use this information during controller initialization.
-csr_page iova

Specifies the hexadecimal address of the CSR page for the device
in the bus address space. The following information applies to
the particular bus structure implemented on your system:
• MuItibus: optional
• VME bus: optional. If specified, must be page-aligned and in
the range COOO-DOOO.

Commands

1-85

CRDDF(l)

Domain/OS SysV

CRDDF(l)

• AT-compatible bus: If specified, may indicate a range (for
example, -csr_page 200 21F). If the second parameter is
missing, a range of 8 consecutive bytes is assumed (for example, -csr_page 200 assumes a range of 200-207).
-debug

Sets a flag that can be used to tum on debugging logic in a driver.

-display

Displays the current contents of the DDF.

-dma_channel channel-number
Specifies to the driver the DMA channel number used by ATcompatible device. This is a Version 3 option.
-end

Ooses the updated DDF and exit.

-initiali:fJltionJoutine entry_name (required)
Specifies the entry-point name of the initialization routine in the
call library .
-interrupt_library pathname
Specifies the pathname of the interrupt side of the device driver
library.
-interruptJoutine level [entry_name] (required)
Specifies a level at which the device interrupts and the entrypoint name of an optional interrupt routine.
-major ddevice number
Specifies the DDF's major device number in range 0-31.
-minor ddevice number
Specifies the DDF's minor device number in range 0-511.
-memory_base iova Specifies the MULTIBUS address that marks the base of a
controller's local memory. If the specified iova is less than 64K
this is a Version 2 option, if iova is greater than 64K, this is a
Version 3 option.
-memory_size length
Specifies the size, in hexadecimal format, of the controller
memory. If the specified iova less than 64K, this is a Version 2
option; if greater than 64K, this is a Version 3 option.
-multiple

1-86

Specifies that the device driver supports more than one device
and cause the crddf command to check the driver entry-point
names listed in the DDF for each device to ensure that it doesn't
load multiple copies of the same driver.

Commands

CRDDF(l)

Domain/OS SysV

CRDDF(l)

-node[1] {node numberl*} (required)
Specifies the hexadecimal node ID of the node to which the device is physically connected. -nodef suppresses the check which
makes certain the node exists. You may use an asterisk (*)
instead of the node ID to indicate the local node.
-quit

Exits without modifying the original DDF.

-remddf Iinode name
Specifies a remote node on which the DDF resides.
-replace

Replaces (i.e., overwrite) an existing DDF with a new version.
To modify only selected portions of an existing DDF, use
-update.

-revision [string]

Specifies an optional revision number as an 8-character string.

-serial_number [string]
Specifies an optional serial number as a l6-character string.
-share

Specifies a DDF for a controller that can be shared among multiple processes.

-stack_size [decimal number]
Specifies the number of bytes, in decimal, to be allocated to the
interrupt stack (default is 1024).
-type type name

Specifies the DDF's type. The type must already be installed on
the node.

-unit unit number (required)
Specifies the unit number of the device (must be equal to the
lowest interrupt level on which the device interrupts).
eMULTIBUS:

Must be in range 0-5.

eVMEbus:

Must be in range 8-14.

e AT-compatible bus: Must be in range 0-15.
-update

Modifies selected portions of an existing DDF. If this option is
specified, it must precede all other options on the command line.
To replace a DDF completely, use -replace.

-user_infu [string]

Specifies up to 64 characters of optional user information (no
embedded blanks).

-vme

Specifies that device lives on VME bus. This is a Version 3
option.

-20_bit_addressing Specifies 20-bit memory address size of controller. You must use
PBU2 calls.
Commands

1-87

Domain/OS SysV

CRDDF(l)

CRDDF(l)

EXAMPLES

1.

Create a new DDF specifying only the required infonnation.
$ crddf Idev/mtO New DDF.
> -unit 3
> -node 2F
> -csr-page 1400
> -call_library /lib/mt.lib
> -initialization routine mt_$init
> -interrupt_library /lib/mt.int.lib
> -interrupt_routine 3 mt_$int
> -check
No missing fields.
> -end
$

2.

Display a DDF.
$ crddf Idev/mtO -display
ddf version:
1
device uid:
00030003 0000002F
(unit 3, node 2F)
csr page iova: 1400
call library:
/lib/mt.lib
interrupt library:
/lib/mt.int.lib
initialization entry point: mt_$init
cleanup entry point:
mt_$cleanup
interrupt stack size: 1024
interrupt routines:
level 0: [unused]
level 1: [unused]
level 2: [unused]
level 3: mt $int
level 4 : [unused]
level 5: [unused]
level 6 : [unused]
level 7: [unused]
serial number:
revision:
user info:
$

1-88

Commands

CRDDF(I)

3.

DomaiD/OS SysV

CRDDF(I)

Change the name of the interrupt routine in an existing DDF.
$ cnldf Idev/mtO -update -interrupt_routine 3 mt_$sio

4.

Replace a DDF on the node I/grip with a new version.
$ crddf -remddf IIgrip Idev/x25 > -replace
> -unit 2
> -node *
> -call_library /sys/x25/x25_driver.lib
> -interrupt_library /sys/x25/x25_driver_int.lib
> -initialization_routine x25_driver_$init
> -cleanup_routine x25_driver_$cleanup
> -interrupt_routine 2 x25_driver_$int
> -memory_base 7000
> -memory_size 1000
> -revision 7.0
> -serial number
> -user info release
> -display
> -end
$

5. Create a new DDF for a device that will be accessed through streams for the
installed type foodev:
$ crddf Idev/foodev New DDF.
> -unit 3
> -node *
> -csryage 1400
> -call_library /lib/foodev.lib
> -initialization routine foodev_$init
> -interrupt_library /lib/foodev.int.lib
> -interrupt_routine 3 mt_$int
> -type foodev
> -check
No missing fields.
> '-end
$

Commands

1-89

CRONTAB(l)

SysV

CRONTAB(l)

NAME

crontab - user crontab file
SYNOPSIS
crontab [file]
crontab -r
crontab -I
DESCRIPTION
crontab copies the specified file, or standard input if no file is specified, into a directory
that holds all users' crontabs.

You can use crontab if your name appears in the file lusr/lib/cron/cron.aIlow. If that
file does not exist, crontab checks the file lusr/lib/cron/cron.deny to determine if you
should be allowed access. If neither file exists, only root is allowed to submit a job. If
cron.allow does not exist and cron.deny exists but is empty, global usage is permitted.
The allow/deny files contain one user name per line.
A crontab file consists of lines of six fields each. The fields are separated by spaces or
tabs. The first five are integer patterns that specify the following:
minute (0--59),
hour (0--23),
day of the month (1-31),
month of the year (1-12),
day of the week (0--6 with O=Sunday).
Each of these patterns may be either an asterisk (meaning all legal values) or a list of
elements separated by commas. An element is either a number or two numbers
separated by a minus sign (meaning an inclusive range). Note that the specification of
days may be made by two fields (day of the month and day of the week). If both are
specified as a list of elements, both are adhered to. For example, 0 01,15 * 1 would run
a command on the first and fifteenth of each month, as well as on every Monday. To
specify days by only one field, the other field should be set to * (for example, 0 0 * * 1
would run a command only od Mondays).
The sixth field of a line in a crontab file is a string that is executed by the shell at the
specified times. A percent character in this field (unless escaped by \) is translated to a
new-line character. Only the first line (up to a % or end of line) of the command field is
executed by the shell. The other lines are made available to the command as standard
input.
The shell is invoked from your $HOME directory with an argO ofsh. Users who desire
to have their .profile executed must explicitly do so in the crontab file. Cron supplies a
default environment for every shell, defining HOME, LOGNAME, SHELL(=/bin/sh),
and PATH(=:/bin:/usr/bin:/usr/lbin).

1-90

Commands

SysV

CRONTAB(l)

CRONTAB(l)

If you do not redirect the standard output and standard error of your commands, any
generated output or errors is mailed to you.
OPTIONS

-r

Removes your crontab from the crontab directory.

-I

Lists the crontab file for the invoking user.

WARNING

If you inadvertently enter the crontab command with no argument(s), do not try to get
out with a CTRL/D. This causes all entries in your crontab file to be removed. Instead,
exit with a DEL.
FILES

lusrllib/cron
/usrlspool/cron/crontabs
lusr/lib/cron/log
lusrllib/cron/cron.allow
lusr/lib/cron/cron.deny

Main cron directory
Spool area
accounting Information
List of allowed users
List of denied users

SEE ALSO

sh(l).
cron(lM) in the Managing Your SysV System Software.

Commands

l-S

CRP(l)

Domain/OS SysV

CRP(l)

NAME

crp - create a process on a remote node
SYNOPSIS

crp -on node_spec [options] [command line]
DESCRIPTION

crp creates a process on a remote node.

command line (optional)
Specify command line to be executed by the remote process. If
the command string contains embedded blanks, enclose it in quotation marks.
OPTIONS

The following option, which specifies the remote node, is required:
-on node_spec

Specify the remote node on which the process is to be created.

You can specify one of the following options.
-cp (default)

Create a remote process running with standard streams connected
to the current window. The option is not valid if -cpo or -cps is
specified.

-nwp

Do not create a window-pane legend indicating that the local
window is connected to a remote process. Use with the -cp
option only.

-cpo

Create a remote process without a connection to the current window, and an identity of user.none.none. This option is not valid
if -cp or -cps is specified. To stop these processes, you must
first create a visible remote process running the shell, then issue
the sigp command to stop the background process.

-cps

Create a remote process without a connection to the current window, and an identity of user.server.none. This option is not
valid if -cp or -cpo is specified. To stop these processes, you
must first create a visible remote process running the shell, then
issue the sigp command to stop the background process.

-n name

Specify the name of the remote process. If this option is not
specified, the default is user id.node_id. This allows remote
processes to be traced to their originator.

-login name [password]
Specify the log-in sequence for the remote process on the command line. If the password is omitted, the system prompts you for
it. A null (zero-length) password is specified by the null string

1-92

Commands

CRP(l)

Domain/OS SysV

CRP(1)

Normally -login appears with -cpo However, you may use
-login with -cpo and -cps as well. If -login is specified with
either -cpo or -cps, the identity of the created process is the
same as that of the caller (as opposed to user.none.none or
user.server.none, respectively). This means that -cpo and -cps
are identical if -login is also specified.
If you use -login with -cpo or -cps, you must place both the
name and the password on the command line. No prompting is

available in this case.
-me

Specified instead of -login. If -me is specified, the created process on the remote node inherits the caller's working directory,
naming directory, horne directory text string, and SID. This is
similar to popping up another shell except that the process is running on another node. If -me is specified with either -cpo or
-cps, the identity of the created process is also that of the caller's
(as opposed to user.none.none or user.server.none, respectively). This means that -cpo and -cps are identical if -me is
also specified.

-quiet

Suppress connection/disconnection messages in the transcript
pad.

EXAMPLES

Create a process on node 532 running the shell, and login with the user ID joe.
$ crp -on 532 -login joe

Create a process on node aef running the shell, and inherit the current process state
information.
$ crp -on Oaef -me

Commands

1-9:

ClU'AD(1)

Domain/OS SysV

CRPAD(l)

NAME

crpad - create a transcript pad and window
SYNOPSIS

crpad [options] ("pathname]
DESCRIPTION

crpad creates a transcript pad, copies a file (or standard input) into that pad, and then
opens a window into the pad. This new pad is not related to the transcript pad attached
to processes running the shell; it is for viewing file contents only. This is primarily useful for displaying output being produced inside a pipeline without interrupting the flow
of control in the pipe.
You cannot edit transcript pads. If you wish to place a file in a pad for editing, use the
EDIT key or the DM command ceo
crpad -input behaves differently. This creates an edit pad and lets you create whatever text you want. When you close the edit pad (with wc or the EXIT key), that text is
copied to standard output.
pathname (optional) Specify the file to be copied into the pad. Not valid if -input is

used.
Default if omitted: copy standard input
OPTIONS

-i[nput]

Copies data from a temporary edit window to standard output.
Not valid if -tee or -pn are specified.

-pen] pathname

Specify a pathname for the pad. If you specify a pathname, the
pad is saved in that file. Note that you can also save the pad after
it is created by using the DM command pn (pad_name) ..

-tlee]

Copy output to standard output in addition to the new pad.

EXAMPLES

Create a pad that displays the file test.data.
$ crpad test.data

Display the intennediate results in a pipeline.

$ $grep 256· phone. book I crpad -tee I sort >phone.book.Iocal

1-94

Commands

CRPAD(l)

nomain/OS SysV

CRPAD(l)

Create an edit pad. When the pad is closed, sort the text edited and display it in a transcript pad.

$ crpad -input I sort I crpad

Commands

1-95

Domain/OS SysV

CRTY(l)

CRTY(l)

NAME

crty - create a new type
SYNOPSIS
crty [options] type_name
DESCRIPTION
crty creates a new type. It creates an identifier for the new type, and associates it with
the supplied type name. New types are used to identify a new kind of manager for
streams.

type_name (required) Specify the name to assign to the created type.
OPTIONS
-n node_spec

-1

Specify the node on which the type is to be created. You may
also specify the entry directory of a volume mounted for software
installation, as shown in the example below. If this option is
omitted, the type is created on the current node.
List the type name/type identifier pair that is created.

-b[inary] pathname Create the type from the specified object module (which was
created by crtyobj). This allows you to use an object module
(shipped on media like floppies, magnetic tapes, etc) to add a
new type to a system.
-u high. low

Create the type with the specified unique identifier (UID). Give
the high and low addresses for the UID as indicated.
Note:

Use this option only for system debugging.
Misuse of this option may cause programs to
behave incorrectly.

EXAMPLES
$ crty example_type-I
"example_type" 24BF9F41.l00001FB created.
$ crty example_type -0 Iltest_vol-1
"example_type" 24BFA6F8.200001FB created on volume Iitest_volo

1-96

Commands

Domain/OS SysV

CRTY(l)

CRTY(1)

In the following example, the disk has been mounted for software installation. The

disk's top level directory (cataloged as Imount_disk by the mount(IM) command)
must contain a sys directory. If it does not, you get a "type manager directory not
found" error.
$ erty example_type -n Imount_disk-\
"example_type" 24BFB71E.200001FB
created on volume //my_node/mount_disk.

SEE ALSO

dlty(l), inty(l), Ity(1), mount(1M)

Commands

1-97

CRTYOBJ(l)

CRTYOBl(l)

Domain/OS SysV

NAME

crtyobj - create a type object module for binding
SYNOPSIS
crtyobj [options] type_name [variable_name]
DESCRIPTION
crtyobj creates an object module that contains a global symbol with the type UID. This
module is bound with type managers. The variable is passed into calls to
trait_$mgr_del to declare support for the specified type.

type_name (required)

Specify the name of the type for which an object module is to
be created.

variable_name (optional)
Specify the variable name for the type UID.

Default if omitted: name the variable type_name_$uid
OPTIONS
-b bin name

Specify the output binary
type _name.bin.

file

name.

The

default is

-sect section name

Specify the section name for the data area in which the variable
is declared. The default section name is .data.

-u high. low

Specify the type UID explicitly with the high and low addresses
in the positions indicated.
NOTE:

Use this option only for system debugging.

EXAMPLES
$ crtyobj example_type example_$uid
$ bind -b example_mgr example_main.bin example_calIs. bin example_type.bin

SEE ALSO
crty(l), dlty(l), Ity(1)

1-98

Commands

CSH(l)

SysV

CSH(l)

NAME

csh - a shell (command interpreter) with C-like syntax
SYNOPSIS
csh [ -cefinstvVxX ] [ -Dname=value ] [ arg ... ]
DESCRIPTION
csh is a command-language interpreter that incorporates a history mechanism (see History Substitutions), job control facilities (see Jobs), interactive filename and usemame
completion (see Filename Completion), and a C-like syntax.
csh begins by executing commands from the .cshrc file in your home directory. If this
is a log-in shell, then it also executes commands from your .Iogin file. CRT users often
place an stty crt command in their .login files, and also invoke tset( 1) there. To be
able to use its job control facilities, users of csh must (and automatically) use the tty
driver fully described in tty(4). This tty driver allows you to generate interrupt characters from the keyboard to tell jobs to stop. See stty( 1) for details on setting options in
the tty driver.
Normally, the shell then begins reading commands from the terminal, prompting with
"% " . Upon reading a line of command input, the shell breaks it into words, places
this sequence of words on the command-history list, parses it, and then executes each
command in the line.
When a log-in shell terminates, it executes commands from the .logout file in your
home directory.
LEXICAL STRUCTURE

Usually, csh splits input lines into words at blanks and tabs. The following, however,
are exceptions to this:
•

The characters: &, I, ;, >, <, (, and ) form separate words. If doubled in &&, II, «,
», these pairs form single words. You can make these parser metacharacters part
of other words or prevent their special meaning by preceding them with a \
(backslash) character. A newline preceded by a backslash is equivalent to a blank.

•

Strings enclosed in matched pairs of quotation marks, " " or ", form parts of a
word; metacharacters in these strings, including blanks and tabs, do not form
separate words. Within pairs of ' or " characters, a newline preceded by a
backslash gives a true newline character.

•

When the shell's input is not a terminal, the # character introduces a comment that
continues to the end of the input line. To prevent this special meaning, you can precede the # by a \ or place it in quotations, using', " and ".

Commands

1-99

SysV

CSH(l)

CSH(l)

COMMANDS

A simple command is a sequence of words, the first of which specifies the command to
be executed. A simple command or a sequence of simple commands separated by I
characters forms a pipeline. The output of each command in a pipeline is connected to
the input of the next. Sequences of pipelines may be separated by ; characters, and are
then executed sequentially. A sequence of pipelines can be placed in the background
by adding an & character at the end.
Any of the above may be placed in parentheses to form a simple command (which may
be a component of a pipeline, and so on). You can also separate pipelines with II or &&
characters to indicate, as in the C language, that the second is to be executed only if the
first fails or succeeds, respectively (see Expressions).
JOBS
csh associates a job with each pipeline. It keeps a table of current jobs, printed by the
jobs command, and assigns them small integer numbers. When a job is started asynchronously with an &, csh prints a line similar to the following:
[1] 1234
This indicates that the job, which was started asynchronously, was job number 1 and
had one (top-level) process whose process ID was 1234.
To suspend a running job, you must send it a stop signal, usually with CTRL/Z. Once
csh has indicated that the job has been stopped (and has printed a prompt), you can
manipulate the state of this job. You can put it in the background with the bg command, or run some other commands and then eventually bring the job back into the
foreground with the fg command. A suspend takes effect inunediately, causing csh to
discard pending output and unread input. There is another special key, CTRLlY, which
does not generate a STOP signal until a program attempts to read(2) it. Type CTRLlY
ahead when you have prepared some commands for a job that you wish to stop after the
program has read them. CTRLlY is not supported in the Display Manager.
A job being run in the background stops if it tries to read from the terminal. Background jobs are normally allowed to produce output, but you can disable this by specifying the stty tostop command. Specifying stty tostop causes background jobs to stop
when they try to produce output just as they do when they read input.
There are several ways to refer to jobs in the shell. The % character introduces a job
name. Job number 1, for example, becomes % 1. Naming a job brings it to the foreground; thus, % 1 is a synonym for fg % I, bringing job 1 back into the foreground.
Similarly, specifying % I & resumes job 1 in the background. Jobs can also be named
by prefixes of the string typed in to start them, if the prefix is unambiguous. For example, %ex normally restarts a suspended ex(l) job, if there is only one suspended job
whose name begins with the string "ex". You can also specify %?string, to indicate a
job whose text contains string, if there is only one such job.

1-100

Commands

CSH(1)

CSH(1)

SysV

csh maintains a notion of the current and previous jobs. In output pertaining to jobs, it
marks the current job with a + and the previous job with a -. The abbreviation % +
refers to the current job, and %- refers to the previous job. For close analogy with the
syntax of the history mechanism (described below), a % % also represents the current
job.
STATUS REPORTING
csh knows immediately when the state of a process changes. It normally informs you
whenever a job becomes blocked so that no further progress is possible, but only just
before it prints a prompt. (This is so that it does not otherwise disturb your work.) However, if you set the notify shell variable, csh immediately reports status changes in
background jobs. The notify shell command also marks a single process so that its
status changes are immediately reported. By default, notify marks the current process.
Thus, you only have to type notify after starting a background job to mark it.

When you try to leave the shell while jobs are stopped, you are warned that "You have
stopped jobs." You can use the jobs command to see which jobs are stopped. A second
attempt to exit causes the suspended jobs to terminate without warning.
FILENAME COMPLETION
When the filename completion feature is enabled by setting the shell variable filec (see
set), csh interactively completes filenames and usemames from unique prefixes, when
they are input from the terminal followed by the escape character (the escape key, or
CTRL/L). For example, if the current directory looks like

DSC.OLD
DSC.NEW
bench

bin
chaosnet
class

cmd
cmtest
dev

lib
mail
mbox

xmpl.c
xmpl.o
xmpl.out

and the input is
% vi ch
csh completes the prefix "ch" to the only matching filename "chaosnet", changing the
input line to
% vi chaosnet
However, if you specify
% \i D
csh expands the input only to
% vi DSC.
and sounds the terminal bell to indicate that the expansion is incomplete, because two
filenames match the prefix "DSC".
If a partial filename is followed by the end-of-file character (usually ClRL/D), then,
instead of completing the name, csh lists all filenames matching the prefix. For example, the input
% vi D

Commands

1-101

CSH(l)

SysV

CSH(l)

causes all files beginning with "D" to be listed:
DSC.NEW DSC.OLD
while the input line remains unchanged.
You can use the same system of escape and end-of-file to expand partial usemames, if
the word to be completed (or listed) begins with the character "-". For example, typing
cd -ro
may produce the expansion
cd -root
Set the variable nobeep, to inhibit the use of the terminal bell to signal errors or multiple matches.
Normally, all files in the particular directory are candidates for name completion. Files
with certain suffixes can be excluded from consideration by setting the variable !ignore
to the list of suffixes to be ignored.
Thus, if you set !ignore by the command
% set !ignore = (.0 .out)
then typing
% vi x
results in the completion to
% vi xmpl.c
ignoring the files xmpl.o and xmpl.out. However, if the only completion possible
requires not ignoring these suffixes, they are not ignored. Also, !ignore does not affect
the listing of filenames by CTRL/D. All files are listed regardless of their suffixes.
mSTORY SUBSTITUTIONS

History substitutions place words from previous command input as portions of new
commands, making it easy to repeat commands, repeat arguments of a previous command in the current command, or fix spelling mistakes in a previous command with little typing and much confidence. History substitutions begin with the character ! and
can start anywhere in the input stream (providing that they do not nest). Precede the!
with a \ to prevent its special meaning. For convenience, a ! is passed unchanged when
it is followed by a blank, tab, newline, =, or (. History substitutions also occur when an
input line begins with a . (see below). Before being executed, input lines containing history substitution are echoed on the terminal as they could have been typed without history substitution.
csh saves input commands consisting of one or more words on the history list. The history substitutions reintroduce sequences of words from these saved commands into the
input stream. The size of the history list is controlled by the history variable. The previous command is always retained, regardless of its value. Commands are numbered
sequentially from 1.

1-102

Commands

SysV

CSH(l)

CSH(l)

For example, consider the following output from the history command:
9
10
11
12

write michael
ex write.c
cat oldwrite.c
diff *write.c

The commands are shown with their event numbers. It is not usually necessary to use
event numbers, but you can make the current event number part of the prompt by placing an ! in the prompt string.
Supposing the current event is 13, you can refer to previous events by event number, as
in !11 for event 11; relatively, as in !-2 for event 11; by a prefix of a command word, as
in !d for event 12 or !wri for event 9; or by a string contained in a word in the command, as in !?mic?, also referring to event 9.
These forms, without further modification, simply reintroduce the words of the
specified events, each separated by a single blank. As a special case, !! refer to the previous command. Thus,!! alone is essentially a redo.
To select words from an event, you can follow the event specification by a : and a
designator for the desired words. The words of an input line are numbered from 0, the
first (usually command) word being 0, the second word (first argument) being I, and so
on. The basic word designators are:

o

First (command) word

n

n 'th argument

$
%

x-y
-y

*
x*
x-

First argument, i.e. 'I'
Last argument
Word matched by (immediately preceding) ?s? search
Range of words
Abbreviates 'O-y'
Abbreviates '--$', or nothing if only 1 word in event
Abbreviates 'x-$'
Like 'x *' but omitting word '$'

The : separating the event specification from the word designator can be omitted if the
argument selector begins with a -, $, * - or %. After the optional word designator can
be placed a sequence of modifiers, each preceded by a:. The following modifiers are
defined:
h
r

e

slllr /
t
&
g

Commands

Remove a trailing patlmame component, leaving the head.
Remove a trailing' _1:XX' component, leaving the root name.
Remove all but the extension '.xu' part.
Substitute / for r
Remove all leading patlmame components, leaving the tail.
Repeat the previous substitution.
Apply the change globally, prefixing the above, e.g. 'g&'.

1-103

SysV

CSH(l)

p
q
x

CSH(l)

Print the new command but do not execute it.
Quote the substituted words, preventing further substitutions.
Like q, but break into words at blanks, tabs and newlines.

Unless preceded by a g, the modification is applied only to the first modifiable word.
With substitutions, it is an error for no word to be applicable.
The left-hand side of substitutions are not regular expressions in the sense that they are
in the editors (ed, vi, and so on) rather they are strings. You can use any character as
the delimiter in place of a I. A \ quotes the delimiter into the I and r strings. The character & on the right-hand side is replaced by the text from the left. A \ also quotes an
&. A null I uses the previous string either from an lor from a contextual scan string s
in !?s? The trailing delimiter in the substitution, as well as the trailing? in a contextual scan, can be omitted if a newline follows immediately.
You can specify a history reference without an event specification, for example, !$. In
this case, the reference is to the previous command unless a previous history reference
occurred on the same line (in which case this form repeats the previous reference).
Thus, !?fOO?A !$' gives the first and last arguments from the command matching ?foo?
A special abbreviation of a history reference occurs when the first non-blank character
of an input line is a A. This is equivalent to !:SA and provides a convenient shorthand for
substitutions on the text of the previous line. Thus, Alb Alib fixes the misspelling of lib in
the previous command. Finally, a history substitution may be surrounded with { and}
if necessary, to insulate it from the characters that follow. Thus, after Is -Id -paul you
might type !{I}a to do Is -Id -paula while !Ia looks for a command starting with la.
QUOTATIONS WIlH SINGLE AND DOUBLE QUOTES
Placing strings in single and double quotation marks prevents all or some of the remaining substitutions. Those enclosed in single quotation maiXs are prevented any further
interpretation; those in double quotation marks may be expanded as described below.
In both cases, the resulting text becomes all or part of a single word. In only one spe-

cial case (see COMMAND SUBSTITUTION below) does a double-quoted string yield
parts of more than one word; single-quoted strings never do.
ALIAS SUBSTITUTION
csh maintains a list of aliases that can be established, displayed, and modified by the
alias and una lias commands. After it scans a command line, csh parses the line into
distinct commands and checks the first word of each command, left-to-right, for an
alias. If it finds one, it rereads the text that is the alias for that command (with the history mechanism available) as though that command were the previous input line. The
resulting words replace the command and argument list. If no reference is made to the
history list, csh leaves the argument list unchanged.
For example, if the alias for Is is Is -I, the command Is lusr maps to Is -I lusr and the
argument list is undisturbed. Similarly, if the alias for lookup is grep r letc/passwd,
then lookup biII maps to grep biII letc/passwd.

1-104

Commands

CSH(l)

SysY

CSH(l)

Every time csh finds an alias, it transforms the input text and begins the aliasing process
again on the reformed input line. Prevent looping (if the first word of the new text is
the same as the old) by flagging the first word to prevent further aliasing. csh detects
other loops and returns an error.
Note that the mechanism allows aliases to introduce parser metasyntax. Thus, you can
specify alias print 'pr \!* I Ipr' to make a command that pr's its arguments to the line
printer.
YARIABLE SUBSTITUTION
csh maintains a set of variables, each having as value a list of zero or more words. csh
sets some of these variables, and merely refers to others. For instance, the argv variable
is an image of the shell's argument list, and words of its value are referred to in special
ways.
You can display and change the values of variables by using the set and unset commands. Some of the variables the shell refers to are toggles. The shell does not care
what their value is, only whether they are set. For instance, the verbose variable is a
toggle that causes command input to be echoed. Use the command line option -v to set
this variable.
Other operations treat variables numerically. The command represented by the at sign,
@, permits numeric calculations to be performed, with the result assigned to a variable.
However, variable values are always represented as (zero or more) strings. In numeric
operations, the null string is considered to be zero, and the second and subsequent
words of multiword values are ignored.
After csh has aliased and parsed the input line, and before executing each command, it
. performs variable substitution keyed by $ characters. You can prevent this expansion
by preceding the $ with a \, except within double quotation marks (It), where it always
occurs, and within single quotation marks
where it never occurs. Strings enclosed in
single quotation marks are interpreted later (see COMMAND SUBSTITUTION below),
so the dollar sign ($) substitution does not occur until later, if at all. A $ is passed
unchanged if followed by a blank, tab, or end-of-line.

n

Input/output redirections are recognized before variable expansion, and are variableexpanded separately. Otherwise, the command name and entire argument list are
expanded together. Therefore, the first (command) word to this point can generate
more than one word; the first word becomes the command name, and the rest become
arguments.
Unless you enclose the results of variable substitution in double quotation marks or
specify the :q modifier, they may eventually be command and filename substituted.
Within double quotation marks, a variable whose value consists of multiple words
expands to a portion of a single word, with the words of the variable's value separated
by blanks. When the :q modifier is applied to a substitution, the variable expands to
multiple words with each word separated by a blank and enclosed in quotation marks to
prevent later command or filename substitution.
Commands

1-105

CSH(l)

SysV

CSH(l)

The following metasequences are provided to introduce variable values into the shell
input. Except as noted, you cannot reference a variable that is not set. You can apply
the :h, :t, :r, :gh, :gt, and :gr modifiers to most of the substitutions below. Substitutions that you cannot do this with are mllIked accordingly. If braces appear in the command form, you must put the modifiers within the braces. You can apply only one
modifier beginning with a colon (;) on each expansion preceded by a dollar sign ($).

$name
${name}

$name[selector]
${name[selector]}

$#name
${#name}
$0

$number
${number}

Replace text by the words of the value of variable name, each
separated by a blank:. Braces insulate name from following characters, which would otherwise be part of it. Shell variables have
names consisting of up to 20 letters and digits starting with a
letter. The underscore character ( _ ) is considered a letter. If
name is not a shell variable, but is set in the environment, that
value is returned. However, colon (;) modifiers and the other
forms given below are not available in this case.
Select only some of the words from the value of name. The selector is subjected to $ substitution and may consist of a single
number or two numbers separated by a dash (-). The first word
of a variable's value is numbered 1. If you omit the first number
of a range, the number defaults to 1. If you omit the last member
of a range, the number defaults to $#name. The selector * selects
all words. It is not an error for a range to be empty if you omit
the second argument or it is in range.
Give the number of words in the variable. This is useful for later
use in a "[selector]".
Substitute the filename from which command input is being read.
An error occurs if the name is not known.
This sequence is equivalent to $argv[number].

$*
$?name
$?{name}

This sequence is equivalent to $argv[ *].

$?O

Substitute 1 if the current input filename is known; 0 if it is not.
This substitution cannot be modified with modifiers preceded by

$$

Substitute the decimal process number of the parent shell. This
substitution cannot be modified with modifiers preceded by a :.

Substitute the string 1 if name is set; 0 if it is not. This substitution cannot be modified with modifiers preceded by a:.

a:.

1-106

Commands

CSH(l)

SysV

$<

CSH(l)

Substitute a line from the standard input, with no further interpretation. This sequence is useful for reading from the keyboard in a
shell script. This substitution cannot be modified with modifiers
preceded by a :.

COMMAND AND FILENAME SUBSTITUTION
csh applies the remaining substitutions, command and filename substitution, selectively
to the arguments of built-in commands. This means that portions of expressions not
evaluated are not subjected to these expansions. Names for commands that are not
internal to the shell are substituted separately from the argument list. This occurs very
late, after input/output redirection is performed, and in a child of the main shell.
COMMAND SUBSTITUTION
Enclosing a command in closing quotation marks (q) indicates command substitution.
csh usually breaks the output from such a command into separate words at blanks, tabs,
and newli,nes. It discards null words, and uses the modified text to replace the original
string. Within double quotation marks, only newlines force new words; blanks and tabs
are preserved.

In any case, the single final newline does not force a new word. Note that it is thus possible for a command substitution to yield only part of a word, even if the command outputs a complete line.
FILENAME SUBSTITUTION
If a word contains any of the characters *, ?, [, {, or it begins with -, that word is a candidate for filename substitution, also known as "globbing." csh regards the word as a
pattern, replacing it with an alphabetically sorted list of filenames that match the pattern. In a list of words specifying filename substitution, at least one pattern must match
an existing filename, but each pattern need not match. Only the metacharcters *, ?, and
[ imply pattern matching. The characters - and { are like abbreviations.

In matching filenames, you must match a • at the beginning of a filename or immediately following a / explicitly. This is also true for the / itself. An * matches any string
of characters, including the null string. A ? matches any single character. The
sequence [... J matches anyone of the characters enclosed. Within such a sequence, a
pair of characters separated by a - matches any character lexically between the two.
The character - at the beginning of a filename refers to home directories. Standing
alone, it expands to your home directory (reflected in the value of the variable home).
When the - is followed by a name consisting of letters, digits, and -, csh searches for a
user with that name and substitutes his home directory. Thus, -ken might expand to
/usr/ken and -ken/chmach to /usr/ken/chmach. If the - is followed by a character
other than a letter or /, or if it appears somewhere other than at the beginning of a word,
the shell leaves it undisturbed.
The rnetanotation a{b.c.d}e is shorthand for abe ace ade. Left-to-right order is
preserved. The results of matching are sorted separately at a low level to preserve this
order (nesting is acceptable).
Thus, -source/sl/{oldls,ls}.c expands to
Commands

1-107

SysV

CSH(l)

CSH(l)

/usr/source/slfoldls.c /usr/source/sl/ls.c whether or not these files exist, without any
chance of error if the home directory for source is /usr/source. Similarly,
..I{memo,*box} might expand to ..Imemo ..Ibox ..Imbox. (Note that memo was not
sorted with the results of matching *box.) As a special case, the shell passes all single
unmatched braces or an empty pair of braces undisturbed.
INPUT/OUTPUT
To redirect the standard input and standard output of a command, use the following
syntax:
 name
>! name
>& name
>&! name

Use the file name as standard output. If the file does not exist, create it;
if the file does exist, truncate it, discarding its previous contents.
If the variable noclobber is set, the file must not exist, or it must be a
character special file (for example, a terminal or /dev/null), or an error
results. This helps prevent accidental destruction of files. The ! forms
suppress this check.
Forms involving & route the diagnostic output, as well as the standard
output, into the specified file. name is expanded in the same way as
input filenames beginning with < are.

» name
»& name
»! name
>&!> name

1-108

Use the file name as standard output, but place output at the end of the
file. If the variable noclobber is set, it is an error for the file not to exist
unless you specify one of the forms beginning with!.

Commands

SysV

CSH(l)

CSH(l)

A command receives the environment in which the shell was invoked, as modified by
the input/output parameters and the presence of the command in a pipeline. Thus,
unlike some previous shells, commands run from a file of shell commands have no
access to the text of the commands by default; rather, they receive the original standard
input of the shell. The« mechanism should be used to present in-line data. This permits shell command scripts to function as components of pipelines and allows the shell
to block-read its input. Note that the default standard input for a command run
detached is not modified to be the empty file /dev/null. Rather, the standard input
remains as the original standard input of the shell. If this is a terminal and if the process
attempts to read from the terminal, the process blocks and you are notified (see JOBS
above.)
Diagnostic output may be directed through a pipe withthe standard output. Simply use
the form 1& instead of 1to do this.
EXPRESSIONS
A number of the built-in commands take expressions that have operators similar to
those used for the C language, with the same precedence. These expressions appear in
the @, exit, if, and while commands. The following operators are available:
I I && I

A

A

& == !=

=-

r <= >= < > « » + _ * /

% ! - ( )

Here the precedence increases to the right, The following characters are, in groups, at
the same level:

<=

!=
>=

«

»

<

!>

+

*

%

The following operators compare their arguments as strings:

== !=
All others operate on numbers. The operators =- and !- are like == and != except that
the right-hand side is a pattern (containing, for example, asterisks, question marks, and
instances of [...J characters) against which the left-hand operand is matched. This
removes the need to use the switch statement in shell scripts when all you need is
pattern-matching.

Commands

1-109

CSH(l)

SysV

CSH(l)

csh considers strings beginning with a zero to be octal numbers. it interprets null or
missing arguments as zero. The results of all expressions are strings, which represent
decimal numbers. Note that no two components of an expression can appear in the
same word. You should surround them by spaces, except when they are adjacent to
components of expressions that are syntactically significant to the parser (&, I, <, >, (,

».

Also available in expressions as primitive operands are command executions enclosed
in braces «( and I), and file enquiries of the form -/ name where / is one of the following:
r
w

x
e
0

z
f
d

Read access
Write access
Execute access
Existence
Ownership
Zero size
Plain file
Directory

csh performs command and filename expansion on the specified name, and then checks
to see if it has the specified relationship to the real user. If the file does not exist, or if it
is inaccessible, all inquiries return false (0). Command executions succeed, returning
true (1), if the command exits with status 0; otherwise, they fail, returning false (0). If
you require more detailed status information, execute the command outside an expression and examine the status variable.
CONTROL FLOW
csh contains a number of commands to regulate the flow of control in command files
(shell scripts) and (in limited but useful ways) from terminal input. These commands
all operate by forcing the shell to reread or skip in its input and, due to the implementation, restrict the placement of some of the commands.

The foreach, switch, and while statements, as well as the if-then-else form of the if
statement require that the major keywords appear in a single simple command on an
input line, as shown below.
If the shell's input is not seekable, the shell buffers input whenever a loop is being read
and performs seeks in this internal buffer to accomplish the rereading implied by the
loop. (To the extent that this allows, backward gotos succeed on non-seekable inputs.)
BUILT-IN COMMANDS
Built-in commands are executed within the shell. If a built-in command occurs as any
component of a pipeline except the last, it is executed in a sub-shell.
alias

Print all aliases.

alias name
Print the alias for name.

1-110

Commands

SysV

CSH(l)

CSH(l)

alias name wordlist
Assign the specified wordlist as the alias of name. The wordlist is commandand filename-substituted. name cannot be alias or unalias.
alloc

Show the amount of dynamic memory acquired, broken down into used and
free memory. With an argument, this command shows the number of free and
used blocks in each size category. The categories start at size eight and double
at each step. This command's output may vary across system types.

bg
bg %job ...
Put the current or specified jobs into the background, continuing them if they
were stopped.
break

Resume execution after the end of the nearest enclosing foreach or while.
Execute the remaining commands on the current line. Thus you can have
multi-level breaks by writing them all on one line.

breaksw
Break from a switch. resuming after the endsw.
case label:
Specify a label in a switch statement.
cd
cd name
chdir
chdir name
Change the shell's working directory to directory name. If you do not specify
an argnment, change to the home directory of the user.
If name is not found as a subdirectory of the current directory and does not

begin with I, .I, or ..I, check each component of the variable cdpath to see if it
has a subdirectory name. Finally, if all else fails but name is a shell variable
whose value begins with I, check to see if it is a directory.
continue
Continue execution of the nearest enclosing while or foreach. Execute remaining commands on the current line.
default: Label the default case in a switch statement. This command should follow all
case labels.
dirs

Print the directory stack. The top of the stack is at the left, and the first directory in the stack is the current directory.

echo wordlist
echo -n wordlist
Write the specified words to the shell's standard output, separated by spaces,
and terminated with a newline, unless you specify the -n option.
Commands

1-111

SysV

CSH(l)

CSH(1)

else
end
endif
endsw See the description of the foreach, if, switch, and while statements below.
eval arg ...
Read the arguments as input to the shell, executing the resulting command(s)
in the context of the current shell. This occurs as in sh(l). The command is
generally used to execute commands generated as the result of command or
variable substitution, since parsing occurs before these substitutions. See
tset( I) for an example of using eval.
exec command
Execute the specified command in place of the current shell.
exit

Exit with the value of the status variable.

exit(expr)
Exit with the value of the specified expr.
fg
fg %job ...
Bring the current or specified jobs into the foreground, continuing them if they
were stopped.
foreach name (wordlist)
end

Successively set the variable name to each member of wordlist, and execute
the sequence of commands between this command and the matching end.
(Both foreach and end must appear alone on separate lines.)
Use the continue command to continue the loop prematurely. Use the break
command to tenninate it prematurely. When the shell reads this command
from the tenninal, it reads the loop once, prompting with "? " before executing any statements in the loop. If you make a mistake typing in a loop at the
tenninal, you can interrupt it.

glob wordlist
Perfonn the same function as the echo command, but do not recognize
backslash escapes, and delimit words by null characters in the output. Use this
command with programs that use the shell to filename-expand a list of words.
goloword
Perfonn filename- and command-expansion on the specified word to yield a
string of the fonn label. Cause the shell to rewind input as much as possible
and search for a line of the fonn label: (possibly preceded by blanks or tabs).
Continue execution after the specified line.

1-112

Commands

SysV

CSH(l)

CSH(l)

hashstat
Print a statistics line indicating how effective the internal hash table has been
at locating commands and avoiding instances of the exec command. An exec
is attempted for each component of the path where the hash function indicates
a possible hit, and in each component that does not begin with a slash.
history Display the history event list.
history n
Print only the n most recent events in the history event list.
history -r n
Print the most recent events first (rather than printing the oldest first).
history -h n
Print the history event list without leading numbers. Use this command to produce files suitable for sourcing with the -h option to the source built-in command.
if (expr) command
If the specified expression evaluates true, execute the single command with
arguments. Variable substitution on command happens early, at the same time
it does for the rest of the if command. The command must be a simple command, not a pipeline, a command list, or a parenthesized command list.
Input/output redirection occurs even if expr is false, in which case, command is
not executed.
if (expr) then
else if (expr2) then
else
endif

If the specified expr is true, execute the commands to the first else; otherwise if

expr2 is true, execute the commands to the second else, and so on. Any
number of else-if pairs are possible; only one endif is needed. The else part is
optional. (The words else and endif must appear at the beginning of input
lines; the if must appear alone on its input line or after an else.)
inlib lib Install a user-supplied library specified by lib in the shell process. The library
is used to resolve external references of programs (and libraries) loaded after
its installation. Note that the library is not loaded into the address space unless
it is needed to resolve an external reference. The list of inlibed libraries is
passed to all children of the current shell. Use llib(l) to examine this list.
jobs

List the active jobs.

jobs -I List the active jobs, and include process IDs.

Commands

1-113

SysV

CSH(l)

CSH(l)

kill %job
kill-sig %job ...
kill pid
kill -sig pid ...
kill -I Send either the TERM (terminate) signal or the specified signal to the jobs or
processes indicated. Provide signals by number or by names (as given in
/usr/include/signaI.h, stripped of the SIG prefix). A kill -I lists the signal
names. There is no default process for this command. If the signal being sent
is TERM (terminate) or HUP (hangup), the job or process is sent a CONT
(continue) signal as well.
limit
limit resource
limit resource maximum-use
limit -h
limit -h resource
limit -h resource maximum-use
Limits the consumption by the current process and each process it creates, to
not individually exceed maximum-use on the specified resource. If you do not
specify maximum-use, the current limit is printed; if you do not specify
resource, all limitations are given. If you specify the -h flag, the hard limits
are used instead of the current limits. The hard limits impose a ceiling on the
values of the current limits. Only the super-user can raise the hard limits, but a
user can lower or raise the current limits within the legal range.
Resources controllable currently include cpu time (the maximum number of
CPU seconds to be used by each process), filesize (the largest single file that
you can create), datasize (the maximum growth of the data+stack region via
sbrk(2) beyond the end of the program text), stack size (the maximum size of
the automatically-extended stack region), and coredumpsize (the size of the
largest core dump that will be created). NOTE: You cannot use limit to set
stacksize; the coredumpsize limit is always 0 in Domain/OS.
You can specify the maximum-use as a (floating point or integer) number followed by a scale factor. For all limits other than cputime the default scale is
'k' or 'kilobytes' (1024 bytes); you can also us a scale factor of 'm' or 'megabytes'. For cputime the default scaling is 'seconds', but you can specify 'm'
for minutes or 'h' for hours, or a time of the form 'mm:ss' giving minutes and
seconds.
For both resource names and scale factors, unambiguous prefixes of the names
suffice.
login

Terminate a log-in shell, replacing it with an instance of /bin/login. This is one
way to log out, and it is included for compatibility with sh( 1).

logout Terminate a log-in shell. This command is especially useful if ignoreeof is
set.
1-114

Commands

SysV

CSH(l)

nice

CSH(l)

Set the nice(l) scheduling priority for this shell to 4.

nice +number
Set the nice(l) priority to the given number.
nice command
Run command at nice(l) priority 4.
nice +number command
Run command at positive number nice(l) priority. The greater the number, the
lower CPU priority the process gets. The super-user can specify negative
priority by using nice -number . ... The command is always executed in a
sub-shell, and the restrictions placed on commands in simple if statements
apply.
nohup When you specify this command in a shell script, ignore hangups for the
remainder of the script.
nohup command
Run the specified command with hangups ignored. This happens to all
processes detached with &.
notify
notify %job ...
Notify the user asynchronously when the status of the current or specified jobs
changes (normally, notification is presented before a prompt). This is
automatic if the shell variable notify is set.
onintr Restore the default action of the shell on interrupts (to terminate shell scripts
or to return to the terminal command input level). In any case, if the shell is
running detached and interrupts are being ignored, all forms of onintr have no
meaning, and interrupts continue to be ignored by the shell and all invoked
commands.
onintr Ignore all interrupts.
onintr label
Execute a goto label when an interrupt is received or a child process terminates because it was interrupted.
popd

Pop the directory stack, returning to the new top directory. The elements of
the directory stack are numbered from zero, starting at the top.

popd +n
Discard the nth entry in the directory stack.
pushd

Exchange the top two elements of a directory stack.

pushd name
Change to name directory and push the old current working directory onto the
directory stack.
Commands

1-115

SysV

CSH(l)

CSH(l)

pushd +n
Rotate the nth argument of the directory stack around to be the top element
and change to it. The members of the directory stack are numbered from zero,
starting at the top.
rehash Recompute the internal hash table of the contents of the directories in the path
variable. This is needed if new commands are added to directories in the path
while you are logged in. This should be necessary only if you add commands
to one of your own directories, or if someone changes the contents of one of
the system directories.
repeat count command
Execute the specified command (subject to the same restrictions as the command in the one-line if statement above) count times. I/O redirections occur
exactly once, even if count is zero.
rootnode arg
Change the current node entry directory to arg. See rootnode( 1).
set

Show the value of all shell variables. Variables that have other than a single
word as their value appear as a parenthesized word list.

set name
Set name to the null string.
set name=word
Set name to the single word. In all cases, the value is command- and filenameexpanded.
set name[indexl=word
Set the indexth component of name to word. This component must already
exist. In all cases, the value is command- and filename-expanded.
set name=(wordlist)
Set name to the list of words in wordlist. In all cases, the value is commandand filename-expanded. You can repeat these arguments to set multiple values
in a single set command. Note, however, that variable expansion happens for
all arguments before any setting occurs.
setenv List all current environment variables.
setenv name
Set name to an empty string.
setenv name value
Set the value of the environment variable name to be value, a single string.
The most commonly used environment variables - USER, TERM, and PATH
- are automatically imported to and exported from the csh variables user,
term, and path. You do not have to use setenv for these.

1-116

Commands

SysV

CSH(l)

shift

CSH(l)

Shift the members of argv to the left, discarding argyl IJ. It is an error for the
argv variable not to be set or to have less than one word as its value.

shift variable
Shift the specified variable to the left, discarding variable[IJ.
source name
Read commands from name. You may nest source commands, but if you nest
them too deeply, the shell may run out of file descriptors. An error in a source
at any level terminates all nested source commands.
source -h name
Place commands in the history list without executing them. Normally, input
during source commands is not placed on the history list.
stop

Stop the current job that is executing in the background.

stop %job ...
Stop the specified job that is executing in the background.
suspend
Causes the shell to stop in its tracks, much as if it had been sent a stop signal
with CfRL/Z. This is most often used to stop shells started by su(l)
switch (string)
case strl:

breaksw
default:

breaksw
endsw
Each case label is successively matched, against the specified string which is
first command and filename expanded. The file metacharacters *, ? and [... J
may be used in the case labels, which are variable expanded. If none of the
labels match before a "default" label is found, then the execution begins after
the default label. Each case label and the default label must appear at the
beginning of a line. The command breaksw causes execution to continue after
the endsw. Otherwise control may fall through case labels and default labels as
in C. If no label matches and there is no default, execution continues after the
endsw.
time

Print a summary of time used by this shell and its children.

time command
If arguments are given the specified simple command is timed and a time
Commands

1-117

CSH(I)

SysY

CSH(I)

summary as described under the time variable is printed. If necessary, an
extra shell is created to print the time statistic when the command completes.
umask Display the file-creation mask (in octal).
umask value
Set the file-creation mask to the specified value. Common values for the mask
are 002 (giving all access to the group and read and execute access to others)
or 022 (giving all except write access to users in the group or others).
unalias pattern
Discard all aliases whose names match the specified pattern. Thus, unalias
removes all aliases. It is not an error for nothing to be unaliased.

*

un hash Disable the internal hash table mechanism, normally used to speed location of
executed programs.
unlimit
unlimit resource
unlimit-h
unlimit -h resource
Removes the limitation on resource. If you do not specify resource, all
resource limitations are removed. If you specify -h, the corresponding hard
limits are removed. Only the super-user can do this.
unset pattern
Remove all variables whose names match the specified pattern. Thus, unset *
removes all variables. This has noticeably distasteful side-effects. It is not an
error for nothing to be unset.
unsetenv pattern
Remove all variables whose names match the specified pattern from the
environment. Also refer to the setenv built-in shell command, above, and the
printenv(l) command.
ver [systype [ command]]
With no arguments, return the current value of the SYSTYPE environment
variable. With a systype argument, change the SYSTYPE environment variable to either bsd4.3 or sys5.3. depending on which is specified.
wait

Wait for all background jobs. If the shell is interactive, an interrupt can disrupt the wait, and the shell prints the names and job numbers of all jobs known
to be outstanding.

which

Identify which file would be executed if the command were submitted for execution. The command is submitted to normal alias and variable substitutions.

while (expr)
end

1-118

While the specified expression evaluates to nonzero, evaluate the commands
between the while and the matching end. You can use break and continue to
Commands

CSH(l)

SysV

CSH(l)

tenninate or continue the loop prematurely. (The while and end must appear
alone on their input lines.) Prompting occurs the first time through the loop, as
for the foreach statement if the input is a tenninal.

%job

Bring the specified job number into the foreground.

%job&
Continue the specified job in the background.
@

Print the values of all the shell variables.

@name=expr
Set the specified name to the value of expr. If the expression contains a >, <,
&, or I character, you must enclose at least that part in parentheses.

=expr
Assign the value of expr to the indexth argument of name. Both name and its
indexth component must already exist.

@ name[indexl

The operators *=, +=, etc., are available as in C. The space separating the
name from the assignment operator is optional. However, spaces are mandatory in separating components of expr that would otherwise be single words.
Special postfix ++ and - - operators increment and decrement name, respectively, for example, @ i++.
PREDEFINED AND ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES

The following variables have special meaning to csh. Of these, the shell sets argv, cwd,
home, path, prompt, shell, and status. Except for cwd and status, this setting occurs
only at initialization. These variables will not then be modified unless you explicitly
perfonn the modification.
csh copies the USER environment variable into the user variable; TERM into term;
and HOME into home. It then copies these back into the environment whenever the
nonnal shell variables are reset.
csh handles the PATH environment variable in a similar manner. Do not worry about
the setting for PATH other than in the file .cshrc. Inferior csh processes import the
definition of path from the environment, and re-export it if you then change it.
argv

Set to the arguments to the shell. It is from this variable that positional parameters are substituted, that is, $argv[l] replaces $1, etc.

cdpath

Give a list of alternate directories searched to find subdirectories in
chdir commands.

cwd

Give the full pathname of the current directory.

echo

Echo each command and its arguments just before the command is
executed. This variable is set when you specify the -x command
line option. For non-built-in commands all expansions occur before
echoing. Echo built-in commands before command and filename
substitution, since these substitutions are then done selectively.

Commands

1-119

SysV

CSH(l)

1-120

CSH(l)

filee

Enable filename completion.

histchars

Change the characters used in history substitution, if you specify a
string value. Use the first character of its value as the history substitution character, replacing the default character!. The second character of its value replaces the' character in quick substitutions.

history

Control the size of the history list. If you specify a numeric value, do
not discard any command that has been referenced in that many
events. The last executed command is always saved on the history
list. The shell may run out of memory if the value of history is too
large.

home

Represents the home directory of the invoker, initialized from the
environment. The filename expansion of - refers to this variable.

ignoreeof

If set, ignore the end-of-file from terminal input devices. This
prevents shells from accidentally being killed by an EOF.

mail

Represent the files where the shell checks for mail. This is done after
each command completion that results in a prompt, if a specified
interval has elapsed. The shell will tell you that you have new mail,
if the file exists with an access time not greater than its modify time.
If the first word of the value of mail is numeric, it specifies a different mail-checking interval (in seconds) than the default (10
minutes). If you specify multiple mail files, the shell tells you that
you have new mail in name, when there is mail in the file name.

noclobber

Restrict output redirection to ensure that files are not accidentally
destroyed, and that redirections done with » refer to existing files.

noglob

If set, inhibit filename expansion. Use this in shell scripts that do not
deal with filenames, or after you have obtained a list of filename,s
and further expansions are not desirable.

nonomateh

If set. it is not an error for a filename expansion not to match any
existing files; rather, the primitive pattern is returned. It is still an
error for the primitive pattern to be malformed, that is, echo [ still
gives an error.

notify

If set, notify the user asynchronously of job completions. By default,
the shell presents job completions just before printing a prompt.

path

Each word of the path variable specifies a directory in which commands are to be sought for execution. A null word specifies the
current directory. If there is no path variable, esh executes only full
pathnames. The default search path in Domain/OS SysV is (.
lusr/ucb Ibin lusr/bin lusr/apollo/bin). However, this may vary
from system to system. For the super-user, the default search path is
(/ete Ibin /usr/bin /usr/apollo/bin), which may also vary. A shell
Commands

SysV

CSH(l)

CSH(l)

that is given neither the -c nor the -t option normally hashes the
contents of the directories in the path variable after reading .cshrc,
and each time the path variable is reset. If new commands are added
to these directories while the shell is active, it may be necessary to
give the rehash comand, or the new commands may not be found.
prompt

The string printed on the csh command line, before the shell reads
commands from an interactive terminal input. If! appears in the
string, replace it by the current event number (unless a preceding
backslash is given). The default prompt is "% "; for the super-user,
the default prompt is .. #" .

savehist

Give a numeric value to control the number of history list entries
saved in -I. history at log-out time. Save any command that has been
referenced in that many events. During start-up, the shell sources
-I. history into the history list, enabling history to be saved across
log-ins. If the value of savehist is too large, the shell is slow during
start-up.

shell

Represent the file in which the shell resides. This is used in forking
shells to interpret files that have execute bits set, but are not executable by the system. (See the description of Non-Built-in Command
Execution, below.) This variable is initialized to the (systemdependent) home of the shell.

status

Give the status returned by the last command. If it terminated abnormally, add 0200 to the status. Built-in commands that fail return exit
status 1. All other built-in commands set status O.

time

Control automatic timing of commands, if a numeric value is supplied. If set, print the user, system, a utilization percentage, and real
times for any command that takes more than this many CPU seconds,
when the command terminates. A utilization percentage is the ratio
of user time plus system time to real time.

verbose

Print the words of each command after history substitution. 1bis
variable is set by the -v command-line option to csh.

NON-BUILT-IN COMMAND EXECUTION

When a command to be executed is found to be something other than a built-in command, csh attempts to execute it via execve(2). Each word in the variable path names a
directory from which the shell attempts to execute the command. If you do not specify
either a -c or a -t option, the shell hashes the names in these directories into an internal
table so that it tries an exec in a directory only if the command potentially resides there.
This greatly speeds command location when a lot of directories are present in the search
path. For each directory component of path that does not begin with a I, the shell concatenates with the given command name to form a pathname of a file that it then
attempts to execute. The shell also does this if the internal hash table mechanism is
Commands

1-121

SysV

CSH(l)

CSH(l)

turned off (via unhash), or a -c or -t command-line option is specified in csh.
Commands in parentheses are always executed in a sub-shell. Thus, (cd; pwd) ; pwd
prints the home directory, leaving you where you were (printing this after the home
directory). On the other hand, cd ; pwd leaves you in the home directory. Commands
in parentheses are most often used to prevent chdir from affecting the current shell.
If a file has execute permissions but is not an executable binary to the system, csh
assumes it to be a file containing shell commands, and spawns a new shell to read it.
If there is an alias for shell, the words of the alias are prefixed to the argument list to

form the shell command. The first word of the alias should be the full pathname of the
shell (for example, $shell). Note that this is a special, late-occurring, case of alias substitution, and it only allows words to be prefixed to the argument list without
modification.
COMMAND LINE OPTIONS

-b

This flag forces a break from option processing, causing any further shell arguments to be treated as non-option arguments. The remaining arguments are not
interpreted as shell options. You can use the -b to pass options to a shell script
without confusion or possible subterfuge. The shell will not run a set-user 1D
script without this option.

-c

Commands are read from the (single) following argument, which must be
present. Any remaining arguments are placed in argv.

-Oname==value
Set the parameter name to value, then pass it to the shell's environment. This
option is useful for tailoring the environment of a shell invoked from a program
that isn't a shell (such as the DM). For example, if your key definition sets the-O
variable as follows: kd cp /bin/csh -ONEWPAO=true ke, the .cshrc script can
use the value of the NEWPAD variable to execute additional commands or perform special processing. You can specify a number of -0 options.

1-122

-e

The shell exits if any invoked command terminates abnormally or yields a
nonzero exit status.

-f

The shell starts faster, because it neither searches for nor executes commands
from the file .cshrc in the invoker's home directory.

-i

The shell is interactive and prompts for its top-level input, even if it appears not
to be a terminal. Shells are interactive without this option if their inputs and outputs are terminals.

-n

Parse commands, but do not execute them. This aids in syntactic checking of
shell scripts.

-s

Take command input from the standard input.

-t

Read and execute a single line of input. Use a backslash (\) to escape the newline
at the end of this line and continue onto another line.
Commands

CSH(l)

SysV

CSH(l)

-v

Set the verbose variable, causing command input to be echoed after history substitution.

-x

Set the echo variable, so that commands are echoed immediately before execution.

-V

Set the verbose variable even before .cshrc is executed.

-X

Set the echo variable even before .cshrc is executed.

ARGUMENT LIST PROCESSING

If argument 0 to the shell starts with a dash (-), this is a log-in shell. If arguments
remain after command-line options are processed, but you did not specify one of the -c,
-i, -S, or -t options, the first argument is taken as the name of a file of commands to be
executed. The shell opens this file, and saves its name for possible resubstitution by $0.
Since many systems use either the standard version 6 or version 7 shells whose shell
scripts are not compatible with this shell, csh executes a standard shell if the first character of a script is not a pound sign (#), that is, if the script does not start with a comment. Remaining arguments initialize the argv variable.
SIGNAL HANDLING

csh normally ignores quit signals. Jobs running detached, either by &, or the bg or
% ••• & commands, are immune to signals generated from the keyboard, including hangups. Other signals have the values the shell inherited from its parent. Use onintr. to
control the shell's handling of interrupts and terminate signals in shell scripts. Log-in
shells catch the TERM (terminate) signal. Otherwise, this signal is passed on to children from the state in the shell's parent. In no case are interrupts allowed when a log-in
shell is reading the file .logout.
LIMITATIONS

Words can be no longer than 1024 characters. The system limits argument lists t(l
10240 characters. The number of arguments to a command that involves filename
expansion is limited to one-sixth the number of characters allowed in an argument list.
Command substitutions may substitute no more characters than are allowed in an argu·
ment list. To detect looping, the shell restricts the number of alias substitutions on ,
single line to 20.
BUGS

When a command is restarted from a stop, the shell prints the directory it started in i:
this is different from the current directory; this can be misleading (that is, wrong) as th(
job may have changed directories internally.
Shell built-in functions are not stoppable/restartable. Command sequences of the forn
'a ; b ; c' are also not handled gracefully when stopping is attempted. If you suspem
'b', the shell immediately executes 'c'. This is especially noticeable if this expansiOi
results from an alias. It suffices to enclose the sequence of commands in parentheses t,
force it to a subshell, for example, '( a ; b ; c )'.

Commands

1-12

SysY

CSH(l)

CSH(l)

Control over tty output after processes are started is primitive; perhaps this will inspire
someone to work on a good virtual terminal interface. In a virtual terminal interface
much more interesting things could be done with output control.
Alias substitution is most often used to clumsily simulate shell procedures; you should
use shell procedures rather than aliases.
Commands within loops, prompted for by"?", are not placed in the history list. Control structure should be parsed rather than being recognized as built-in commands. This
would allow control commands to be placed anywhere, to be combined with I, and to be
used with & and ; metasyntax.
It should be possible to use the : modifiers on the output of command substitutions. All
and more than one: modifier should be allowed on $ substitutions.
The way the filec facility is implemented is ugly and expensive.
FILES

-I.cshrc
-/.login
-I. logout

Ibin/sh
Itmp/sh*
letc/passwd

Read at beginning of execution by each shell.
Read by log-in shell, after .cshrc at login.
Read by log-in shell, at logout.
Standard shell, for shell scripts not starting with a '#'.
Temporary file for '«'.
Source of home directories for '-name'.

SEE ALSO

sh(I), access(2), execve(2), fork(2), pipe(2), umask(2), wait(2), tty(4), a.out(5),
environ(7) ;
Using Your SysV Environment.

1-124

Commands

CSPLIT(l)

SysV

CSPLIT(l)

NAME

csplit - context split
SYNOPSIS

csplit [-s] [-k] [-f prefix] file argl [ ... argn]
DESCRIPTION

csplit reads file and separates it into n+ 1 sections, defined by the arguments argl . ..
argn. By default the sections are placed in xxOO ... xxn (n may not be greater than
99). These sections get the following pieces of file:

00:
01:

From the start of file up to (but not including) the line referenced by
argl.
From the line referenced byargl up to the line referenced by arg2.

n+ I:

From the line referenced by argn to the end of file.

If the file argument is a - then standard input is used.
OPTIONS

-s

Suppresses the printing of all character counts. csplit normally prints the
character counts for each file created.

-k

Leaves previously created files intact. csplit normally removes created
files if an error occurs.

-f prefix

If the -f Names created files prejixOO ... prefixn. The default is xxOO

... xxn.
file (argl ... argn )
I rexp I

A file is to be created for the section from the current line
up to (but not including) the line containing the regular
expression rexp. The current line becomes the line containing rexp. This argument may be followed by an
optional + or - some number of lines (e.g., IPage/-5).

%rexp%

This argument is the same as /rexp /, except that no file is
created for the section.

{nno

A file is to be created from the current line up to (but not
including) lnno. The current line becomes {nno.

Commands

l-l~

SysV

CSPLIT(l)

{num}

CSPLIT(l)

Repeat argument. This argument may follow any of the
above arguments. If it follows a rexp type argument, that
argument is applied num more times. If it follows lnno,
the file is split every lnno lines ( num times) from that
point. Enclose all rexp type arguments that contain
blanks or other characters meaningful to the shell in the
appropriate quotes. Regular expressions may not contain
embedded new-lines. csplit does not affect the original
file; it is your responsibility to remove it.

EXAMPLES

csplit -f cobol file '/procedure division!' /parS.! /parl6.!
This example creates four files, cobolOO ... cobol03. After editing the "split" files,
they can be recombined as follows:
cat coboI0[0-3] > file
Note that this example overwrites the original file.
csplit -k file 100 {99}
This example would split the file at every 100 lines, up to 10,000 lines. The -k option
causes the created files to be retained if there are less than 10,000 lines; however, an
error message would still be printed.
csplit -k prog.c '%main(%' '(j/+l' {20}
Assuming that prog.c follows the nonnal C coding convention of ending routines with
a } at the beginning of the line, this example will create a file containing each separate
C routine (up to 21) in prog.c.
DIAGNOSTICS

Self-explanatory except for:
arg - out of range

which means that the given argument did not reference a line between the current position and the end of the file.
SEE ALSO

ed(I), sh(I).
regexp(5) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

1-126

Commands

CTRACE(l)

SysV

CTRACE(l)

NAME

ctrace - C program debugger
SYNOPSIS

ctrace [options] [file]
DESCRIPTION

ctrace allows you to follow the execution of a C program, statement-by-statement. The
effect is similar to executing a shell procedure with the -x option. ctrace reads the C
program infile (or from standard input if you do not specify file), inserts statements to
print the text of each executable statement and the values of all variables referenced or
modified, and writes the modified program to the standard output. You must put the
output of ctrace into a temporary file because the cc(1) command does not allow the
use of a pipe. You then compile and execute this file.
As each statement in the program executes it will be listed at the terminal, followed by
the name and value of any variables referenced or modified in the statement, followed
by any output from the statement. Loops in the trace output are detected and tracing is
stopped until the loop is exited or a different sequence of statements within the loop is
executed. A warning message is printed every 1000 times through the loop to help you
detect infinite loops. The trace output goes to the standard output so you can put it into
a file for examination with an editor or the bfs(1) or tail(l) commands.
OPTIONS

-f functions

Traces only these functions.

-v functions

Traces all but these functions.

You may want to add to the default formats for printing variables. Long and pointer
variables are always printed as signed integers. Pointers to character arrays are also
printed as strings if appropriate. Char, short, and int variables are also printed as signed
integers and, if appropriate, as characters. Double variables are printed as floating point
numbers in scientific notation. String arguments to the string(3C) functions and return
values from fgets(3S), gets(3S), and sprintf(3S) are printed as strings.
ADDITIONAL VARIABLE OPTIONS

You can request that variables be printed in additional formats, if appropriate, with
these options:
-0

Octal

-x
-u

Hexadecimal

-e

Floating point

Unsigned

SPECIAL CIRCUMSTANCE OPTIONS

These options are used only in special circumstances:
-I n

Commands

Checks n consecutively executed statements for looping trace output,
instead of the default of 20. Use 0 to get all the trace output from loops.
1-127

CTRACE(l)

CTRACE(l)

SysY

-s

Suppresses redundant trace output from simple assignment statements
and string copy function calls. This option can hide a bug caused by use
of the = operator in place of the == operator.

-tn

Traces n variables per statement instead of the default of 10 (the maximum number is 20). The Diagnostics section explains when to use this

-p

Runs the C preprocessor on the input before tracing it. You can also use
the -D, -I, and -U cpp(l) options. These options are used to tailor the
run-time trace package when the traced program will run in a non-UNIX
System environment:

-b

Uses only basic functions in the trace code, that is, those in ctype(3C),
printf(3S), and string(3C). These are usually available even in crosscompilers for microprocessors. In particular, this option is needed when
the traced program runs under an operating system that does not have
signal(2), fflush(3S), longjmp(3C), or setjmp(3C).

-p string

Changes the trace print function from the default of 'printf('. For example, 'fprintf(stderr,' would send the trace to the standard error output.

-rf

Uses file f in place of the runtime.c trace function package. This lets you
change the entire print function, instead of just the name and leading
arguments (see the -p option).

option.

EXAMPLE
If the file Ic.c contains this C program:

1 #include 
2 maine)
/* count lines in input */
3 (
4

5
6
7

8
9

10

int c, nl;
nl = 0;
while «c = getchar (»
if (c = '\n')
++nl;
printf("%d\n", nl);

! = EOF)

11

and you enter these commands and test data:
cc Ic.c
a.out
1
(CTRL/d)

1-128

Commands

SysV

CTRACE(l)

CTRACE(l)

the program will be compiled and executed. The output of the program will be the
number 2, which is not correct because there is only one line in the test data. The error
in this program is common, but subtle. If you invoke ctrace with these commands:
ctrace Ic.c >temp.c
cc temp.c
a.out
the output will be:
2 main ()
6
nl

=

0;

1* nl
7

while

0

*1

((c = getchar ())

! = EOF)

The program is now waiting for input. If you enter the same test data as before, the output will be:

1* c == 49 or '1' *1
8

if

(c = , \n' )

1* c == 10 or '\n' *1
9
7

while

((c

=

++nl;
1* nl == 1 *1
getchar ()) ! = EOF)

1* c == 10 or '\n' *1
8

if

=

(c

'\n')

1* c == 10 or '\n' *1
9
7

while

((c

=

++nl;
1* nl == 2 *1
get char ()) ! = EOF)

If you now enter an end of file character (CTRL/d) the final output will be:

l*c==-l*1
10

printf("%d\n",
1* nl == 2 */2
return

nl);

Note that the program output printed at the end of the trace line for the nl variable.
Also note the return comment added by ctrace at the end of the trace output. This
shows the implicit return at the terminating brace in the function.
The trace output shows that variable c is assigned the value' I ' in line 7, but in line 8 it
has the value '\n'. Once your attention is drawn to this if statement, you will probably
Commands

1-129

SysY

CI'RACE(l)

CTRACE(l)

realize that you used the assignment operator (=) in place of the equality operator (==).
You can easily miss this error during code reading.
EXECUTION-TIME TRACE CONTROL

The default operation for ctrace is to trace the entire program file, unless you use the -f
or -v options to trace specific functions. This does not give you statement-by-statement
control of the tracing, nor does it let you tum the tracing off and on when executing the
traced program.
You can do both of these by adding ctroffO and ctronO function calls to your program
to tum the tracing off and on, respectively, at execution time. Thus, you can code arbitrarily complex criteria for trace control with if statements, and you can even conditionally include this code because ctrace defines the CTRACE preprocessor variable. For
example:

ififdef CTRACE
if

(c

, !' && i
ctron () ;

> 1000)

ifendif

You can tum the trace off and on by setting static variable tr3t_ to 0 and 1, respectively. This is useful if you are using a debugger that cannot call these functions
directly.
DIAGNOSTICS

This section contains diagnostic messages from both ctrace and cc(1), since the traced
code often gets some cc warning messages. You can get cc error messages in some rare
cases, all of which can be avoided.
ctface Diagnostics
warning: some variables are not traced in this statement
Only 10 variables are traced in a statement to prevent the C compiler "out of
tree space; simplify expression" error. Use the -t option to increase this
number.
warning: statement too long to trace
This statement is over 400 characters long. Make sure that you are using tabs
to indent your code, not spaces.
cannot handle preprocessor code, use -P option
This is usually caused by #ifdef/#endif preprocessor statements in the middle
of a C statement, or by a semicolon at the end of a #define preprocessor statement.
'if ... else if sequence too long
Split the sequence by removing an else from the middle.
possible syntax error, try -P option

1-130

Commands

SysV

CTRACE(l)

CTRACE(l)

Use the -P option to preprocess the ctrace input, along with any appropriate
-D, -I, and -U preprocessor options. If you still get the error message, check
the Wamings section below.
cc Diagnostics
warning: illegal combination of pointer and integer
warning: statement not reached
warning: sizeofreturns 0
Ignore these messages.
compiler takes size offunction
See the ctrace "possible syntax error" message above.
yacc stack overflow
See the etrace "'if '" else if sequence too long" message above.
out of tree space; simplify expression
Use the -t option to reduce the number of traced variables per statement from
the default of 10. Ignore the "ctrace: too many variables to trace" wamings
you will now get.
redeclaration of signal
Either correct this declaration of signal(2), or remove it and #include
.
WARNINGS
You will get a etraee syntax error if you omit the semicolon at the end of the last element declaration in a structure or union, just before the right brace (}). This is optional
in some C compilers. Defining a function with the same name as a system function
may cause a syntax error if the number of arguments is changed. Just use a different
name.
ctraee assumes that BADMAG is a preprocessor macro, and that EOF and NULL are
#defined constants. Declaring any of these to be variables, e.g., "int EOF;", will cause a
syntax error.
BUGS
ctraee does not know about the components of aggregates like structures, unions, and
arrays. It cannot choose a format to print all the components of an aggregate when an
assignment is made to the entire aggregate. ctrace may choose to print the address of
an aggregate or use the wrong format (e.g., 3.149050e-311 for a structure with two
integer members) when printing the value of an aggregate.
Pointer values are always treated as pointers to character strings.
The loop trace output elitnination is done separately for each file of a multi-file program. This can result in functions called from a loop still being traced, or the elitnination of trace output from one function in a file until another in the same file is called.
FILES
lusr/lib/ctrace/runtime.c

Commands

Run-titne trace package

1-131

CTRACE(l)

SysV

CTRACE(l)

SEE ALSO
signal(2), ctype(3C), fclose(3S), printf(3S), setjrnp(3C), string(3C).
bfs(I), tail(l) in the Using Your SysV Environment.

1-132

Conunands

CU(lC)

CU(lC)

SysV

NAME

cu - call another UNIX system
SYNOPSIS
cu [-sspeed] [-Iline] [-h] [-t] [-d] [-0 I -e] [-n] telno
cu [ -s speed ] [ -h ] [-d ] [ -{) I -e ] -I line
cu [-h] [-d] [-{) I -e] systemname
DESCRIPTION
cu calls up another UNIX system, a terminal, or possibly a non-UNIX system. It
manages an interactive conversation with possible Ascn file transfers.

After making the connection, cu runs as two processes: the transmit process reads data
from the standard input and, except for lines beginning with a tilde
passes it to the
remote system; the receive process accepts data from the remote system and, except for
lines beginning with a tilde
passes it to the standard output. Normally, an automatic
DC3/DC1 protocol is used to control input from the remote so the buffer is not overrun.
Lines beginning with a tilde C) have special meanings. Both the transmit and the
receive processes are described in the sections below.

n,

n,

When cu is used on system X to connect to system Y and subsequently used on system
Y to connect to system Z, commands on system Y can be executed by using a double
tilde C). Executing a tilde command reminds the user of the local system uname. For
example, uname(l) can be executed on Z, X, and Y as follows:
uname
Z
-[X]!uname
X
--[Y]!uname
Y
In general, a tilde C) causes the command to be executed on the original machine; a
double tilde C) causes the command to be executed on the next machine in the chain.

The SysV version of cu supports the Vadic 212 Autodialer.
OPTIONS

-sspeed

Specifies the transmission speed (300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600); The
default value is "Any" speed which will depend on the order of the lines
in the lusr/lib/uucplDevices file. Most moderns are either 300 or 1200
baud. Directly connected lines may be set to a speed higher than 1200
baud.

-Iline

Specifies a device name to use as the communication line. Can be used
to override searching for the first available line having the right speed.
When this option is used without the -s option, the speed of a line is
taken from the lusr/lib/uucp/Devices file. With the -s option, the

Commands

1-133

SysV

CU(lC)

CU(lC)

Devices file is searched for the requested speed for the requested line. If
possible, the connection is made at the requested speed; otherwise, an
error message is printed and the call is not made. The specified device is
generally a directly connected asynchronous line (e.g., Idev/ttyab) in
which case a telephone number (telno) is not required. The specified
device need not be in the Idev directory. If the specified device is associated with an auto dialer, a telephone number must be provided. Use of
this option with systemname rather than telno will not give the desired
result (see systemname below).

-h

Emulates local echo, supporting calls to other computer systems that
expect terminals to be set to half-duplex mode.

-t

Sets appropriate mapping of carriage-return to carriage-retum-line-feed
pairs. Used when dialing an ASCII terminal set to auto answer.

-d

Prints diagnostic traces.
Generates even parity for data sent to the remote system.

-0

Generates odd parity for data sent to the remote system.

-0

Prompts you to provide the telephone number to be dialed rather than
taking it from the command line (for added security).

SPECIAL ARGUMENTS

telno

When using an automatic dialer, felno is the telephone number
with equal signs for secondary dial tone or minus signs placed
appropriately, for delays of 4 seconds.

systemname

System name is a uucp system name that may be used rather than
a phone number. Cu obtains an appropriate direct line or phone
number from lusr/lib/uucp/Systems. Cu tries each phone
number or direct line for systemname in the Systems file until a
connection is made or all the entries are tried. Note: the systemname option should not be used in conjunction with the -I and -s
options, as cu will connect to the first available line for the system name specified, ignoring the requested line and speed.

TRANSMIT PROCESS

The transmit process interprets the following:
Terminate the conversation.
Escape to an interactive shell on the local system.

-!cmd ...

Run cmd on the local system, via the -c option to the sh(l)
command.
Run cmd locally and send its output to the remote system.

1-134

Commands

SysV

CU(lC)

CU(lC)

Change the directory on the local system. NOTE: A -!cd
causes the command to be ron by a sub-Shell, which was probably not what was intended.
-%take from [ to ]

Copy file from (on the remote system) to file to on the local
system. H to is omitted, the from argument is used in both
places.

-%put from [ to ]

Copy file from (on the local system) to file to on the remote
system. H to is omitted, the from argument is used in both
places.
For both - % take and put commands, as each block of the file
is transferred, consecutive single digits are printed to the terminal.

-- line

Send the line - line to the remote system.

-%break

Transmit a BREAK to the remote system (this option can also
be specified as -%b).

-%debug

Toggle the ·d debugging option on or off (this option can also
be specified as -%d).

-,
-%nostop

Print the values of the termio structure variables for the user's
terminal (useful for debugging).
Print the values of the termio structure variables for the remote
communication line (useful for debugging).
Toggle between DC3/DCl input control protocol and no input
control. This is useful when the remote system is one which
does not respond properly to the DC3 and DCl characters.

RECEIVE PROCESS
The receive process normally copies data from the remote system to its standard output.
Internally the program accomplishes this by initiating an output diversion to a file when
a line from the remote begins with -.
Data from the remote is diverted (or appended, if» is used) to file on the local system.
The trailing -> marks the end of the diversion.
Using -%put requires stty(l) and cat(l) on the remote side. It also requires that the
current erase and kill characters on the remote system be identical to the current ones
on the local system. Backslashes are inserted at appropriate places. There is an
artificial slowing of transmission during the - % put operation, so that loss of data is
unlikely.
Using -%take requires echo(l) and cat(l) on the remote system. The stty tabs mode
should also be set on the remote system, if tabs are to be copied without expansion.

Commands

1-135

SysV

CU(lC)

CU(lC)

EXAMPLES

To dial a system whose number is 9 201555 1212 using 1200 baud (where you expect a
dialtone after the 9), use the following command:

# eu -s1200 9=12015551212
If the speed is not specified, "Any" is the default value.
To log in to a system connected by a direct line, type this (where XX is a valid TIY
number):

# eu -I Idev/ttyXX
or
#eu -I ttyXX
To dial a system with the specific line and a specific speed, type this (where XX is a
valid TIY number):

# eu -s1200 -I Idev/ttyXX
To dial a system using a specific line associated with an auto dialer, execute the following command (where XX is a line number):

# eu -I eulXX 9=12015551212
To use a system name, use this command (where YYYZZZ is the name of the system):
#eu YYYZZZ
BUGS
If you eu to a DOMAIN node whose default start-up shell is leom/sh (as opposed to
Ibin/sh or Ibin/esh), you should either: 1) change your command search rules (i.e., do a
esr -a Ibin lusr/bin ...
inside the AEGIS Shell) so that the eu transmit process can properly locate SysV commands, or 2) have the remote start-up AEGIS Shell invoke a SysV Shell (i.e., Ibinlsh) so
that the eu receive process can properly parse the request (since the tilde character has a
special meaning in the AEGIS Shell).
eu buffers input internally.
The eu command does not do any integrity checking on data it transfers. Data fields
with special eu characters may not be transmitted properly. Depending on the interconnection hardware, it may be necessary to use a -. to terminate the conversion even if
stty 0 has been used. Non-printing characters are not dependably transmitted using
either the -%put or -%take commands. eu between an IMBRI and a pemil modem
will not return a login prompt immediately upon connection. A carriage return will
return the prompt.
1-136

Commands

SysV

CU(lC)

CU(1C)

FILES

/usr/Iib/uucp/Systems
/usr/lib/uucp/Devices
/usr/spool/locks/LCK.. (tty-device)
DIAGNOSTICS
Exit code is zero for normal exit, one otherwise.
SEE ALSO
cat (1), echo (1), stty (1), uname (1), uucp (1C).

Commands

1-137

SysV

CUT(l)

CUT(l)

NAME

cut - cut out selected fields of each line of a file
SYNOPSIS

cut -clist [file ..• ]
cut -flist [-dchar] [-s] [file .•. ]
DESCRIPTION

Use cut to cut out columns from a table or fields from each line of a file; in data base
parlance, it implements the projection of a relation. The fields as specified by list can
be fixed length, i.e., character positions as on a punched card (-c option) or the length
can vary from line to line and be marked with a field delimiter character like tab (-f
option). cut can be used as a filter; if no files are given, the standard input is used. In
addition, a file name of "-" explicitly refers to standard input.
OPTIONS

list

Creates a comma-separated list of integer field numbers (in increasing
order), with optional- to indicate ranges [e.g., 1,4,7; 1-3,8; -5,10 (short
for 1-5,10); or 3- (short for third through last field)].

-elist

-e (no space) Specifies character positions (e.g., -e1-72 would pass the
first 72 characters of each line).

-flist

Lists fields assumed to be separated in the file by a delimiter character
(see -d ); e.g., -fl,7 copies the first and seventh field only. Lines with
no field delimiters will be passed through intact (useful for table subheadings), unless -s is specified.

-dchar

Delimits the field (-f option only). Default is tab. Space or other characters with special meaning to the shell must be quoted.

-s

Suppresses lines with no delimiter characters in case of -f option.
Unless specified, lines with no delimiters will be passed through
untouched.

Either the -e or -f option must be specified.
Use grep(l) to make horizontal "cuts" (by context) through a file, or paste(l) to put
files together column-wise (i.e., horizontally). To reorder columns in a table, use cut
and paste.
EXAMPLES

Mapping of user IDs to names:
cut -d: -fJ,S /etc/passwd
Setting name to current login name:
name='who am i I cut -fl-d"

1-138

II'

Commands

CUT(l)

SysV

CUT(l)

DIAGNOSTICS

ERROR: line too long
A line can have no more than 1023 characters or fields, or there is no
new-line character.
ERROR: bad list for c / f option
Missing -c or -f option or incorrectly specified list. No error occurs
if a line has fewer fields than the list calls for.
ERROR: no fields

The list is empty.
ERROR: no delimeter
Missing char on -d option.
ERROR: cannot handle multiple adjacent backspaces
Adjacent backspaces cannot be processed correctly.
WARNING: cannot open 
Either filename cannot be read or does not exist. If multiple
filenames are present, processing continues.
SEE ALSO

grep(l), paste(I).

Commands

1-139

Domain/OS SysV

NAME
cvtJont - convert fonts from pre-SRlO to SR10 format
SYNOPSIS

cvtJont destination sourcel [source2]
DESCRIPTION

The cvt font command creates a new font file formatted for SRlO. If one source name
is given, it is converted and placed in the destination file. If two source names are
given, then the characters in the second source font are concatenated with the characters
in the first font, converted, then placed in the destination font file.
The source font(s) must be in pre-SR10 format. Since all pre-SR10 fonts have space
pre-allocated for 128 characters, the new font can contain up to 256 characters.
If the destination font file already exists, or if cvtJont fails to find either source file, an
error is printed, and the command terminates without changing any fonts.
EXAMPLES

The following example takes the vt100s font from /sys/dm/fonts and formats it for
SRlO in the file vt 100s in the working directory:
$ cvtJont vt100s /sys/dmlfonts/vtlOOs

The following example takes the courier 10 and courierlO.a font files from
/sys/dm/fonts, concatenates them, and formats them for SRlO in the file courierlO in
the working directory:
$ cvtJont courierlO /sys/dmlfonts/courierlO /sys/dmlfonts/courierlO.a

SEE ALSO

tr_font(!)

1-140

Commands

CVTNAME(l)

Domain/OS SysV

CVTNAME(l)

NAME

cvtname - convert patbnames between upper and lowercase and preserve colons
SYNOPSIS

cvtname [options]
DESCRIPTION

Prior to SR10, the colon (:) was used as an escape character for the pwpose of storing
mixed-case names. For example, the filename "Readme" was stored as ":readme".
Domain/OS programs mapped ":r" and interpreted it as "R". In pre-SRlO Aegis-only
environments, colons used in patbnames were treated as literal characters, since Aegis
was not case sensitive.
Colon-character constructs in pathnames from pre-SRlO file systems are converted to
the appropriate uppercase letter (or special character) automatically when they are
copied to SR10 systems. The cvtname command allows you to selectively undo that
process and thereby restore literal colons to patbnames. cvtname also allows you to
convert pathnames to all uppercase or all lowercase. The tool operates on entire pathnames. That is, you cannot convert one capital letter in an SRlO patbname back to a
"colon-character" sequence without converting them all.
Regardless of the mode specified, cvtname queries you before converting each pathname, unless you specify -nq, in which case the changes are applied to all objects
subordinate to the patbname specified.
OPTIONS

Without options, cvtname converts capital letters back to colon-character sequences.
-m pathname

Convert capital letters in the names of all objects in pathname
back to colon-character sequences. If -Ii is also specified, potential changes are listed but no changes are made. If -nq is
present, the changes are done automatically and all modified
names are listed. (The default is -m without -nq)

-Ipathname

Convert pathname and subordinate object names to all lowercase.
If -Ii is also specified, potential changes are listed but no changes
are made. If -nq is present, the changes are done automatically
and all modified names are listed.

-upathname

Convert pathname and subordinate object names to all uppercase.
If -Ii is also specified, potential changes are listed but no changes
are made. If -nq is present, the changes are done automatically
and all modified names are listed.

EXAMPLES

The following example allows you to convert the capital letters or colon-character constructs in pathnames in the directory leduc, querying you before making any changes.
Output is shown under the command line. The left-hand column shows unconverted
name; right shows converted. Type y to convert, n to keep old name.
Commands

1-141

CVTNAME(l)

$ cvtname Iledu
/ledu/:C
/ledu/CAT
/ledu/CAT converted to

Domaiil/OS SysV

CVTNAME(l)

/ledu/:::c n
/ledu/:c:a:t y
/ledu/:c:a:t

The following example allows you to selectively convert pathnames in led" to uppercase.
$ cvtname -upper Iledu
/ledu
/LEDU n
/ledu/:c
/ledu/:C n
/ledu/:c:a:t
/ledu/:C:A:T n
/ledu/ACL_FROM_WHOVILLE
/ledu/acl_from_whoville
/ledu/acl_from_whoville converted to /ledu/ACL_FROM_WHOVILLE
/ledu/backup.pas
/ledu/BACKUP.PAS n
/ledu/ffl
/ledu/FFl y
/ledu/ffl converted to
/ledu/FFl
/ledu/TD/backup_history
/ledu/TD/BACKUP HISTORY

\-142

y

n

Commands

CVTRGY(l)

Domain/OS SysY

CVTRGY(l)

NAME

cvtrgy - convert registry between SR9.x and SRlO fonnats
SYNOPSIS
cvtrgy [-from9tolO I -fromlOto9 [ -favor_etc] ] -readonly I
-owner pgo I -first I -nq I -from sourceJgy -to destJgy
DESCRIPTION
The cvtrgy command allows the system administrator to generate an SRIO fonnat
registry database from SR9.7 registry files, or generates SR9.7 registry files with data
from the SRlO registry. The tool operates on SR9.7 nodes only. Both the rgyd and
IIbd servers must be running on the SRlO node, except when the -first option is used.
Run cvtrgy the first time when you add SRIO nodes to your network, and periodically
thereafter to keep the pre-SRlO and SRlO registry infonnation synchronized.
You must specify either -from9tolO or -fromlOto9. By default, cvtrgy creates a
read-only registry of the destination type. That is, c,trgy -from9tolO creates a readonly SRlO fonnat master registry, while cvtrgy -fromlOto9 creates a read-only SR9.x
fonnat master registry. You can then propagate the infonnation to replica registries in
the appropriate way.
Whenever the conversion from SRlO to SR9 occurs, if the registry files exist at the destination node specified in the command line, the tool quits without updating. This
means that before running cvtrgy -from 1Oto9, you should rename (or move) the SR9.x
registry database on the destination node.
The cvtrgy tool assigns UNIX identifiers automatically during the conversion process if
you prefer. However, if your pre-SRIO node runs Domain/OS, you should preserve the
identifiers associated with accounts in your current (pre-SRlO) /etc/passwd and
/etc/group files. In nonnal operation, cvtrgy looks for the /etc/passwd and /etc/group
files and assigns identifiers from them, if they exist. Therefore, you should run cvtrgy
on a 9.7 node that either contains your master /etc/passwd and /etc/group files or has a
link to them.
If cvtrgy doesn't find the /etc/passwd and /etc/group files and an /etc directory exists,

it queries you before assigning new UNIX identifiers, unless the -nq (no query) flag is
turned on, in which case cytrgy exits with an error.
In order to add or change accounts and other registry data, you must edit the writable
registry with the tool appropriate to the registry's fonnat (Le., with edrgy on SRlO,
edacct and edppo on SR9.x) on a node running the same software release as the fonnat
of the writable registry. Thus, if your SR9.x registries were writable, you'd have to' edit
them using edacct and edppo, from a node running SR9.7. Once your SRlO registry is
the writable one, use edrgy.

The cvtrgy tool resides in the /install/tools/cvtrgy after an SRlO installation and must
be copied to an SR9.7 node before you run it. After running cytrgy, you must also run
the crpasswd command on an SR9.x node to update the /etc/passwd and /etc/group
files. The SRIO directory /install/tools contains a new version of crpasswd which you
Commands

1-143

CVTRGY(l)

Domain/OS SysV

CVTRGY(l)

should copy to all SR9.7 nodes that need to run crpasswd. (You can rename or replace
the old version of crpasswd.) See the SRlO Transition Guide for further details on running cvtrgy.
OPTIONS

-from9tolO

Convert SR9.x registry files to SRIO registry format

-fromlOt09

Convert SRIO registry data to SR9.7 format and place in SR9.7
registry files

-from sourceJgy

Specify source for registry data to be converted. For
-from9tolO,
must
be
in
the
form
//node_name/registry/rgLsite. For -fromlOt09, must be
//node_name. Either or both registry sites may be remote from
the node running cvtrgy.

-to destJgy

Specify destination for converted registry data. For -from9to lo,
must be in the form //node name/registry/rgy site. For
-fromlOt09, must be //node_name. Either or both r~gistry sites
may be remote from the node running cvtrgy.

-owner pgo

Specify SRlO registry owner, in the SID form p.g.o, where all
pgo names and the pgo account already exist in the SR9.7 registry. pgo is a string of the form pers.group.org. You must specify
with every invocation of -from9tolO. This option is meaningful
only with the -from9tolO option.

-first

Specify that this is the first invocation of cvtrgy. In this case
only, cvtrgy runs without rgyd and IIbd servers running. Use
only once. Only meaningful with -from9tolO.

-readonly

Make SR9.7 registries read-only, permanently. Only meaningful
with -from9tolO. Can only be run in this mode once; after running, cannot use -from9tolO again.

-nq

No query. Silent mode. Don't query before assigning new
UNIX identifiers (cvtrgy quits). Don't query for owner (cvtrgy
quits).

-favor_etc

If you've edited UNIX IDs (numbers) in the SR9.7 /etc/passwd
or /etc/group after you've already run cvtrgy at least once, you
should propagate the new numbers to the SRlO registry. Running cvtrgy with this option, in the -from9tolO direction, propagates the new UNIX IDs to the SRIO registry. After running
cvtrgy with this option, you must also run /etc/syncids on all
SRIO disks. Only meaningful with -from9tolO.

CONVERTING FROM SR9.7 TO SRlO

You must be root to run cvtrgy. Use the following command line. The node namel is
the SR9.7 node.

1-144

Commands

CVfRGY(l)

Domain/OS SysV

CVTRGY(l)

$ evtrgy -from9tolO -from Iinode_namellregistry/rgy_site
-to IInode_name2 -owner pgo -first

CONVERTING FROM SRlO TO SR9.7

The person who runs the tool must be logged in as root or locksmith. Use the following
command line. The node namel is the SRlO node.
$ evtrgy -fromlOt09 -from IInode_ namel -to IInode_ name2/registry/rgLsite

EXAMPLE

The following is a sample transcript from a cvtrgy session that converts SR9.x registry
data files to an SRIO format registry database. This is the first time cvtrgy has been run
on the network. A single collision is shown to illustrate ntrgy's warning message format; you may see more wamings at your site.
$ evtrgy -from9tolO -from IIdog/registry/rgLsitel -to lIeat -first -owner %.sys_ admin. %

Phase 1 - opening registry files:
Phase 2 - modifying SR9 registry files:
Converted person file saved in registry
//dog/registry/rgy_sitel
Converted project file saved in registry
//dog/registry/rgy_sitel
Converted org file saved in registry
//dog/registry/rgy_sitel
Phase 3 - converting person file:
?(cvtrgy) Warning - unix id collision:
person bin_sr9 reassigned from 3 to 10002
Converted person file saved in registry
//dog/registry/rgy_sitel

Commands

1-145

CVTRGY(1)

Domain/OS SysV

CVTRGY(l)

Phase 4 - converting project file:
?(cvtrgy) Warning - unix id collision:
project backup reassigned from 1001 to 3
Converted project file saved in registry
//dog/registry/rgy_sitel
Phase 5 - converting org file:
Converted org file saved in registry
//dog/registry/rgy_sitel
Phase 6 - converting accounts:
Phase 7 - adding default accounts:
Converted account file saved in registry
//dog/registry/rgy_sitel
Phase 8 - closing the sr9 registry files:
Phase 9 - writing conversions to srlO registry:
Conversion completed successfully:

SEE ALSO
passwd(4), group(4)

1-146

Commands

SysV

CXREF(l)

CXREF(l)

NAME

cxref - generate C program cross-reference
SYNOPSIS

cxref [ options] files
DESCRIPTION

cxref analyzes a collection of C files and attempts to build a cross-reference table.
cxref uses a special version of cpp to include #define'd information in its symbol table.
It produces a listing on standard output of all symbols (auto, static, and global) in each
file separately, or, with the -c option, in combination. Each symbol contains an asterisk
(*) before the declaring reference.
In addition to the -D, -I and -U options [which are interpreted just as they are by cc(l)

and cpp(l)], the following options are interpreted by cxref.
OPTIONS

-c

Prints a combined cross-reference of all input files.

-w

Formats output no wider than  (decimal) columns. Defaults to 80
if  is not specified or is less than 51.

-0

fIle

Directs output to file.

-s

Operate silently; do not print input file names.

-t

Lists format for 80-column width.

LLlBDIR

usually /usr/lib

FILES

LLlBDlRjxcpp special version of the C preprocessor.
DIAGNOSTICS

Error messages are unusually cryptic, but usually mean that you cannot compile these
files.
BUGS

cxref considers a formal argument in a #define macro definition to be a declaration of
that symbol. For example, a program that #includes ctype.h, contains many declarations of the variable c.
SEE ALSO

cc(l), cpp(l).

Commands

1-147

SysV

DATE(l)

DATE(l)

NAME

date - print and set the date
SYNOPSIS
date [ mmddhhmm[yy]]1 +/ormat ]
DESCRIPTION
If no argument is given, or if the argument begins with +, the current date and time are
printed. Otherwise, the current date is set. The first mm is the month number; dd is the
day number in the month; hh is the hour number (24 hour system); the second mm is
the minute number; yy is the last 2 digits of the year number and is optional. For example:
date
10080045

sets the date to Oct 8, 12:45 AM. The current year is the default if no year is mentioned. The system operates in GMT. date takes care of the conversion to and from
local standard and daylight time. Only the superuser can change the date.
If an argument begins with +, the output of date is under the control of the user. All
output fields are of fixed size (zero padded if necessary). Each field descriptor is preceded by % and is replaced in the output by its corresponding value. A single % is
encoded by % %. All other characters are copied to the output without change. The
string is always terminated with a new-line character.
Field Descriptors:
n
Insert a new-line character
t
Insert a tab character
m
Month of year - 01 to 12
d
Dayofmonth-Ol t031
y
Last 2 digits of year - 00 to 99
D
Date as mm/dd/yy
H
Hour - 00 to 23
M
Minute - 00 to 59
S
Second - 00 to 59
T
Time as HH:MM:SS
Day of year - 00 I to 366
w
Day of week - Sunday =0
a
Abbreviated weekday - Sun to Sat
h
Abbreviated month - Jan to Dec
r
Time in AM/PM Notation

1-148

Commands

SysV

DATE(1)

DATE(I)

EXAMPLE

The following input:
date '+DATE: %m/%d/%y%nTlME: %H:%M:%S'
would have generated as output:
DATE: 08/01/76
TIME: 14:45:05
DIAGNOSTICS

no permission You are not the super-user and you try to change the date.
bad conversion
The date set is syntactically incorrect.
bad format character
The field descriptor is not recognizable.

Commands

1-149

DBACL(l)

Domain/OS SysV

DBACL(l)

NAME

dbacl- Oomain/Dialog™-based access control list editor
SYNOPSIS

dbacl [file ]
DESCRIPTION

dbacl provides an interactive menu-based editor for manipulating Access Control Lists
(ACLs). It is primarily designed with novice or occasional ACL users in mind.
chacl(I), cpacl(I), and Isacl(l) are better suited to complicated actions on large
numbers of ACLs.
To use dbacl, press the left mouse key (or the Fl key) to select items on the screen such
as buttons or ACL entries. The bar at the top of the screen contains a "Quit" button, and
names of menus. By pressing the mouse key over one of the menu names, yuu are
presented with a pop-up menu with commands. Pull down and release the key over the
name of a command to select it.
If a command appears in grayed-out text, it is not currently selectable. For example,

before selecting "Cut" from the "Entry" menu, you must select an entry to cut, by clicking on it with the mouse.
You can use the right mouse key (or the F3 key) as a short cut for selecting an entry and
choosing the "Change Entry" command.
If a button has a double outline, you can select it by pressing the RETURN key any-

where in its window. Likewise, the ESC key nearly always cancels the current command.
SEE ALSO

chacl(I), cpacl(I),lsacl(I), acl(5), salacl(1M)

1-150

Commands

SysV

DBX(l)

DBX(l)

NAME

dbx - debugger
SYNOPSIS

dbx [ -r ] [ -i ] [ -I dir ] [ -no_sre ] [ -noJrame ] [ -e file] [ objfile ]
DESCRIPTION

dbx is a tool for source level debugging and execution of programs under SysV. The
objfile is an object file produced by a compiler with the appropriate flag (usually -g)

specified to produce symbol information in the object file. The machine level facilities
of dbx can be used on any program.
The object file contains a symbol table that includes the name of the all the source files
translated by the compiler to create it. These files are available for perusal while using
the debugger.
If the file .dbxinit exists in the current directory then the debugger commands in it are
executed. ,B dbx also checks for a .dbxinit in your home directory if there isn't one in
the current directory.
dbx creates a separate transcript pad for debugger interactions unless the -no_frame
option is specified. dbx also creates a window to display source code unless -no_sre is
specified.
OPTIONS

-r

Executes objfile irrunediately. If it terminates successfully dbx exits.
Otherwise the reason for termination will be reported and the user
offered the option of entering the debugger or letting the program fault.
dbx reads from Idevltty when -r is specified and standard input is not a
terminal. Unless -r is specified, dbx just prompts and waits for a command.

-i

Forces dbx to act as though standard input is a terminal.

-I dir

Adds dir to the list of directories that are searched when looking for a
source file. Normally dbx looks for source files in the current directory
and in the directory where objfile is located. The directory search path
can also be set with the use command.

-efite

Executes the dbx commands in the file before reading from standard
input.

-no src

Disables source display.

-no frame

Does not create a separate debugger transcript pad.

Execution and Tracing Commands
run [args] [ filename]
rerun [args] [ filename]
Start executing objfile, passing args as command line arguments; < or> can be
Commands

1-151

DBX(l)

SysV

DBX(l)

used to redirect input or output in the usual manner. When rerun is used
without any arguments the previous argument list is passed to the program;
otherwise it is identical to run. If objfile has been written since the last time
the symbolic information was read in, dbx will read in the new information.
trace [in procedure/function] [if condition]
trace source-line-number [if condition]
trace procedure/function [in procedure/function] [if condition]
trace expression at source-line-number [if condition]
trace variable [in procedure/function] [if condition]
Have tracing information printed when the program is executed. A number is
associated with the command that is used to tum the tracing off (see the delete
command).
The first argument describes what is to be traced. If it is a source-line-number,
then the line is printed immediately prior to being executed. Source line
numbers in a file other than the current one must be preceded by the name of
the file in quotes and a colon, e.g. "mumble.p": 17.
If the argument is a procedure or function name then every time it is called,
information is printed telling what routine called it, from what source line it
was called, and what parameters were passed to it. In addition, its return is
noted, and if it's a function then the value it is returning is also printed.
If the argument is an expression with an at clause then the value of the expression is printed whenever the identified source line is reached.
If the argument is a variable then the name and value of the variable is printed
whenever it changes. Execution is substantially slower during this form of
tracing.
If no argument is specified then all source lines are printed before they are exe-

cuted. Execution is substantially slower during this form of tracing.
The clause "in procedure/function" restricts tracing information to be printed
only while executing inside the given procedure or function.
Condition is a boolean expression and is evaluated prior to printing the tracing
information; if it is false then the information is not printed.

1-152

Commands

SysV

DBX(l)

DBX(l)

stop if condition
stop at source-line-number [if condition]
stop in procedure/function [if condition]
stop variable [if condition]
Stop execution when the given line is reached, procedure or function called,
variable changed, or condition true.
status [> filename]
Print out the currently active trace and stop commands.
delete command-number ...
The traces or stops corresponding to the given numbers are removed. The
numbers associated with traces and stops are printed by the status command.
catch number
catch signal-name
ignore number
ignore signal-name
Start or stop trapping a signal before it is sent to the program. This is useful
when a program being debugged handles signals such as interrupts. A signal
may be specified by number or by a name (e.g., SIGINT). Signal names are
case insensitive and the "SIG" prefix is optional. By default all signals are
trapped except SIGCONT, SIGCHlLD, SIGALRM and SIGKILL.
cont integer
cont signal-name
Continue execution from where it stopped. If a signal is specified, the process
continues as though it received the signal. Otherwise, the process is continued
as though it had not been stopped. Execution cannot be continued if the process has "finished", that is, called the standard procedure "exit".
step

Execute one source line.

next

Execute up to the next source line. The difference between this and step is
that if the line contains a call to a procedure or function the step command will
stop at the beginning of that block, while the next command will not.

return [procedure]
Continue until a return to procedure is executed, or until the current procedure
returns if none is specified.
call procedure(parameters)
Execute the object code associated with the named procedure or function.

Commands

1-153

DBX(l)

SysV

DBX(l)

Printing Variables and Expressions
Names are resolved first using the static scope of the current function, then using the
dynamic scope if the name is not defined in the static scope. If static and dynamic
searches do not yield a result, an arbitrary symbol is chosen and the message
''[using qualified name]" is printed. The name resolution procedure may be overridden
by qualifying an identifier with a block name, e.g., "module.variable". For C, source
files are treated as modules named by the file name without" .c".
Expressions are specified with an approximately common subset of C and Pascal (or
equivalently Modula-2) syntax. Indirection can be denoted using either a prefix "*" or a
postfix "." and array expressions are subscripted by brackets (" [n. The field reference
operator (".") can be used with pointers as well as records, making the C operator "->"
unnecessary (although it is supported).
Types of expressions are checked; the type of an expression may be overridden by
using "type-name(expression)". When there is no corresponding named type the special
constructs "&type-name" and "$$tag-name" can be used to represent a pointer to a
named type or C structure tag.
assign variable = expression
Assign the value of the expression to the variable.
dump [procedure] [> filename]
Print the names and values of variables in the given procedure, or the current
one if none is specified. If the procedure given is ".", then the all active variables are dumped.
print expression [, expression ... ]
Print out the values of the expressions.
whatis name
Print the declaration of the given name, which may be qualified with block
names as above.
which identifier
Print the full qualification of the given identifer, i.e. the outer blocks that the
identifier is associated with.
up [count]
down [count]
Move the current function, which is used for resolving names, up or down the
stack count levels. The default count is 1.
where

Print out a list of the active procedures and function.

whereis identifier
Print the full qualification of all the symbols whose name matches the given
identifier. The order in which the symbols are printed is not meaningful.

1-154

Commands

SysV

DBX(l)

DBX(l)

Accessing Source Files

/regular expression[/]
?regular expression[?]
Search forward or backward in the current source file for the given pattern.

edit !filename]
edit procedure/function-name
Invoke an editor on filename or the current source file if none is specified. If a
procedure or function name is specified, the editor is invoked on the file that
contains it. Which editor is invoked by default depends on the installation.
The default can be overridden by setting the environment variable EDITOR to
the name of the desired editor.
file !filename]
Change the current source file name to filename. If none is specified then the
current source file name is printed.
func [procedure/function]
Change the current function. If none is specified then print the current function. Changing the current function implicitly changes the current source file
to the one that contains the function; it also changes the current scope used for
name resolution.

list [source-line-number [, source-line-number]]
list procedure/function
List the lines in the current source file from the first line number to the second
inclusive. If no lines are specified, the next 10 lines are listed. If the name of
a procedure or function is given lines n-k to n+k are listed where n is the first
statement in the procedure or function and k is small.
use directory-list
Set the list of directories to be searched when looking for source files. The
directory-list is used if the specified file cannot be found, or if the file is found
but the modified time does not match the time in the object module. If a file is
found using directory-list, or if the file's modified time is different then the
source display banner will display the filename being displayed as well as the
stored filename in parentheses.

Commands

1-15:

SysV

DBX(l)

DBX(l)

Command Aliases and Variables
alias name name
alias name "string"
alias name (parameters) "string"
When commands are processed, dbx first checks to see if the word is an alias
for either a command or a string. If it is an alias, then dbx treats the input as
though the cOiTesponding string (with values substituted for any parameters)
had been entered. For example, to define an alias "rr" for the command
"rerun", one can say
alias rr rerun
To define an alias called "b" that sets a stop at a particular line one can say
alias b(x) "stop at x"
Subsequently, the command "b(12)" will expand to "stop at 12".
set name [= expression]
The set command defines values for debugger variables. The names of these
variables cannot conflict with names in the program being debugged, and are
expanded to the corresponding expression within other commands. The following variables have a special meaning:
$hexchars
$hexints
$hexoffsets
$hexstrings
When set, dbx prints out out characters, integers, offsets from registers, or
character pointers respectively in hexadecimal.
$listwindow
The value of this variable specifies the number of lines to list around a function
or when the list command is given without any parameters. This value is also
used when displaying source in the source window. The current line is positioned so that as much of the listwindow as possible is visible. Its default
value is 10.
$unsafecall
$unsafeassign
When "$unsafecall" is set, strict type checking is turned off for arguments to
subroutine or function calls (e.g. in the call statement). When "$unsafeassign"
is set, strict type checking between the two sides of an assign statement is
1-156

Commands

DBX(l)

SysV

DBX(l)

turned off. These variables should be used only with great care, because they
severely limit dbx's usefulness for detecting errors.
unalias name
Remove the alias with the given name.
unset name
Delete the debugger variable associated with name.
Machine Level Commands
tracei [address] [if cond]
tracei [variable] [at address] [if coM]
stopi [if cond]
stop at address [if cond]
Tum on tracing or set a stop using a machine instruction address.
stepi
nedi

Single step as in step or next, but do a single instruction rather than source
line.

address ,address/ [mode]
address / [count] [mode]

Print the contents of memory starting at the first address and continuing up to
the second address or until count items are printed. If the address is ".", the
address following the one printed most recently is used. The mode specifies
how memory is to be printed; if it is omitted the previous mode specified is
used. The initial mode is "X". The following modes are supported:
i
d
D
o

o

x
X
b
c
s
f
g

Print the machine instruction
Print a short word in decimal
Print a long word in decimal
Print a short word in octal
Print a long word in octal
Print a short word in hexadecimal
Print a long word in hexadecimal
Print a byte in octal
Print a byte as a character
Print a string of characters terminated by a null byte
Print a single precision real number
Print a double precision real number

Symbolic addresses are specified by preceding the name with an "&". Registers are
denoted by $00-$07, for the data registers, and $AO-$A7, for the address registers. FOI
convenience, $OB, $SB, $SP, and $PC are also available. Addresses may be
Commands

1-157

SysV

DBX(l)

DBX(l)

expressions made up of other addresses and the operators "+", "-", and indirection
(unary "*").
Miscellaneous Commands
help

Print out a synopsis of dbx commands.

quit

Exit dbx.

sh command-line
Pass the command line to the shell for execution. The SHELL environment
variable determines which shell is used.
source filename
Read dbx commands from the given filename.
NOTES
Assignments to structures with bit fields does not work, and assigning through a pointer
variable may cause dbx to have a stack underflow and abort.
Some problems remain with the support for individual languages. Fortran problems
include: inability to assign to logical, logical *2, complex and double complex variables; inability to represent parameter constants which are not type integer or real;
peculiar representation for the values of dummy procedures (the value shown for a
dummy procedure is actually the first few bytes of the procedure text; to find the location of the procedure, use "&" to take the address of the variable).
FILES

a.out
.dbxinit

Object file
Initial commands

SEE ALSO

cc(l)

1-158

Commands

SysV

DC(l)

DC(l)

NAME
de - desk calculator
SYNOPSIS
de [ file ]
DESCRIPTION
de is an arbitrary precision aritlunetic package. Ordinarily it operates on decimal
integers, but one may specify an input base, output base, and a number of fractional
digits to be maintained. (See bc(1), a preprocessor for de that provides infix notation
and a C-like syntax that implements functions. be also provides reasonable control
structures for programs.) The overall structure of de is a stacking (reverse Polish) calculator. If an argument is given, input is taken from that file until its end, then from the
standard input.
OPTIONS
number

+ -/

* %'

The value of the number is pushed on the stack. A number is an unbroken string of the digits 0-9. It may be preceded by an underscore C) to
input a negative number. Numbers may contain decimal points.
The top two values on the stack are added (+), subtracted (-), multiplied
(*), divided (/), remaindered (%), or exponentiated C). The two entries
are popped off the stack; the result is pushed on the stack in their place.
Any fractional part of an exponent is ignored.

sx

The top of the stack is popped and stored into a register named x, where
x may be any character. If the s is capitalized, x is treated as a stack and
the value is pushed on it.

Ix

The value in register x is pushed on the stack. The register x is not
altered. All registers start with zero value. If the I is capitalized, register
x is treated as a stack and its top value is popped onto the main stack.

d

The top value on the stack is duplicated.

p

The top value on the stack is printed. The top value remains unchanged.

P

Interprets the top of the stack as an ASCII string, removes it, and prints it.

f

All values on the stack are printed.

q

Exits the program. If executing a string, the recursion level is popped by
two.

Q

Exits the program. The top value on the stack is popped and the string
execution level is popped by that value.

x

Treats the top element of the stack as a character string and executes it as
a string of de commands.

x

Replaces the number on the top of the stack with its scale factor.

Commands

1-159

DC(I)

SysV

[ .•. ]
x =x

The top two elements of the stack are popped and compared. Register x
is evaluated if they obey the stated relation.
Replaces the top element on the stack by its square root. Any existing
fractional part of the argument is taken into account, but otherwise the
scale factor is ignored.
Interprets the rest of the line as a UNIX system command.

e

All values on the stack are popped.
The top value on the stack is popped and used as the number radix for
further input. I Pushes the input base on the top of the stack.

o

The top value on the stack is popped and used as the number radix for
further output.

o

Pushes the output base on the top of the stack.

k

The top of the stack is popped, and that value is used as a non-negative
scale factor: the appropriate number of places are printed on output, and
maintained during multiplication, division, and exponentiation. The
interaction of scale factor, input base, and output base will be reasonable
if all are changed together.

z

The stack level is pushed onto the stack.

z

Replaces the number on the top of the stack with its length.

?

A line of input is taken from the input source (usually the terminal) and

executed.

,.

are used by be(l) for array operations.

EXAMPLE

This example prints the first ten values of n!:
[lal +dsa*plalO>y]sy
Osal
lyx
DIAGNOSTICS
x is unimplemented
x is an octal number.

stack empty
Not enough elements on the stack to do what was asked.
auto/space
The free list is exhausted (too many digits).
Out 0/ headers
Too many numbers being kept around.

1-160

Commands

SysV

nC(l)

DC(l)

Out of pushdown
Too many items on the stack.
Nesting Depth
Too many levels of nested execution.
SEE ALSO

bc(l).

Commands

1-161

SysV

00(1)

00(1)

NAME

dd - convert and copy a file
SYNOPSIS

dd [ option=value ] ...
DESCRIPTION

dd copies the specified input file to the specified output with possible conversions. By
default, it uses the standard input and output. You may specify the input and output
block size. After completion, dd reports the number of whole and partial input and output blocks.
OPTIONSNALUE PAIRS

ibs=n

Inputs block size n bytes; 512 is the default.

obs::n

Outputs block size; 512 is the default.

bs::n

Sets both input and output block size, superseding ibs and obs.

cbs::n

Conversion buffer size; used only if conv=ascii or conv=ebcdic is
specified. In the former case, cbs characters are placed into the conversion buffer, converted to ASCII, and trimmed of any trailing blanks.
Newlines are then added before sending the line to the output. In the
latter case, ASCII characters are read into the conversion buffer, converted to EBCDIC, and blanks are added to make up an output block of
size cbs.

skip::n

Skips n input blocks before starting copy.

seek::n

Seeks n blocks from the beginning of the output file before copying.

count::n

Copies only n input blocks.

Converts EBCDIC to ASCII.
conv=ascii
ebcdic Converts ASCII to EBCDIC.
ibm
Maps ASCII to EBCDIC in a slightly different way than the above case.
lease Maps alphabetics to lowercase.
ucase Maps alphabetics to uppercase.
swab Swaps every pair of bytes.
noerror
Does not stop processing on an error.
sync
Pads every input block to ibs.
Represents several comma-separated conversions.
Where sizes are specified, a number of bytes is expected. A number may end with k, b,
or w to specify multiplication by 1024,512, or 2, respectively; a pair of numbers may
be separated by x to indicate a product.
The ASCIIIEBCDIC conversion tables are taken from the 256-character standard of the
CACM (November, 1968). The ibm conversion, while less accepted as a standard,
corresponds better to certain IBM print train conventions.
1-162

Commands

DD(l)

SysV

DD(l)

EXAMPLE
To read an EBCDIC tape blocked with ten 80-byte EBCDIC card images per block into
the ASCII file x, use the following:
# dd if=/dev/rmtO of=x ibs=800 cbs=80
BUGS
SysV does not support some raw I/O devices typically used with dd.
Newlines are inserted only on conversion to ASCII. Padding is done only on conversion to EBCDIC. These should be separate options.
DIAGNOSTICS
f+p blocks in(out)

Numbers of full and partial blocks read(written).

SEE ALSO
cp (1).

Commands

1-163

DDE(l)

Domain/OS SysY

DDE(l)

NAME
dde - Domain Distributed Debugging Envirorunent
SYNOPSIS

dde [-do "cmd_list'1
[ [-on target_machine] [-target_type target_type]
{ [-input pathname] [-output pathname [-ao]]
[-errors pathname [-ae]] program_invocation
I -attach process_id } ]
DESCRIPTION

The dde command invokes the Domain Distributed Debugging Envirorunent, the standard debugger for the Domain/OS operating system at SRlO. For complete information
about this debugger and its commands, consult the Domain Distributed Debugging
Environment Reference (011024) or invoke the debugger's own help command for
online assistance.
OPTIONS

-do "cmd list"

Execute cmd_list (a list of debugger commands) before executing
any startup files or debugging the program. The sample option
specification -do "property layout -notarget" illustrates a common
use of this option (to inhibit the creation of a separate window for
the target program).

-on target_machine Debug the program or process on the specified target machine,
where target_machine is a node name or node rD.
-target_type target_type
Specify the type of target machine; target_type must be "m68k"
for SRI0.
-in put pathname

Read target program input from pathname.

-output pathname [-ao]
Direct target program output to pathname. With -ao, append output to pathname.
-errors pathname [-ae]
Direct target program error output to pathname. With -ae,
append error output to pathname. To redirect error output and
standard output to the same file, use the same pathname on both
options or use "&1" as an argument to the -errors option.
program_invocation Invoke program_invocation (the pathname of an executable
image, plus any arguments) for debugging. This specification
must be last on the dde command line.

1-164

Commands

DDE(l)

Domain/OS SysV

-attach process_id

Commands

DDE(l)

Attach to a running process identified by the UNIX pid
process_id. Use the /bin/ps or /com/pst -un commands to get
the pid of a process.

1-165

DELTA(l)

SysV

DELTA(l)

NAME

delta - make a delta (change) to an sees file
SYNOPSIS
delta [-rSID] [-s] [-n] [-gUst] [-m[mrlistll [-y[commentll [-p] files
DESCRIPTION
delta pennanently introduces into the named sees file changes that were made to the
file retrieved by get(l) (called the g-file, or generated file).

delta makes a delta to each named sees file. If a directory is named, delta behaves as
though each file in the directory were specified as a named file, except that non-sees
files (last component of the path name does not begin with s.) and unreadable files are
silently ignored. If a name of - is given, the standard input is read (see WARNINGS);
each line of the standard input is taken to be the name of an sees file to be processed.
delta can issue prompts on the standard output depending on certain options and flags
[see admin(l)] that may be present in the sees file (see -m and -y options below).
OPTIONS

Option arguments apply independently to each named file.

-rSID

Uniquely identifies which delta is to be made to the sees file. It is only
necessary to use this option if two or more outstanding gets for editing
(get -e) on the same sees file were done by the same person (login
name). The SID value specified with the -r option can be either the SID
specified on the get command line or the SID to be made as reported by
the get command [see get(l)]. A diagnostic results if the specified SID is
ambiguous, or, if necessary and omitted on the command line.

-s

Suppresses the issue, on the standard output, of the created delta's SID,
as well as the number of lines inserted, deleted and unchanged in the
sees file.

-n

Specifies retention of the edited g-file (nonnally removed at completion
of delta processing).

-glist

Creates a list (see get( 1) for the definition of list) of deltas which are to
be ignored when the file is accessed at the change level (SID).

-m[mrlistJ

If the sees file has the v flag set [see admin(l)] then a Modification
Request (MR) number must be supplied as the reason for creating the
new delta.
If -m is not used and the standard input is a tenninal, the prompt MRs?
is issued on the standard output before the standard input is read; if the
standard input is not a tenninal, no prompt is issued. The MRs? prompt
always precedes the comments? prompt (see -y option).
MRs in a list are separated by blanks and/or tab characters. An unescaped new-line character tenninates the MR list.

1-166

Commands

DELTA(l)

SysV

DELTA(l)

Note that if the v flag has a value [see admin(1)], it is taken to be the
name of a program (or shell procedure) which will validate the correctness of the MR numbers. If a non-zero exit status i~ returned from the
MR number validation program, delta terminates. (It is assumed that the
MR numbers were not all valid.)
-y[commentJ Arbitrary text used to describe the reason for making the delta. A null
string is considered a valid comment.
If -y is not specified and the standard input is a terminal, the prompt
comments? is issued on the standard output before the standard input is
read; if the standard input is not a terminal, no prompt is issued. An
unescaped new-line character terminates the comment text.
-p

Causes delta to print (on the standard output) the sees file differences
before and after the delta is applied in a diff(l} format.

BUGS
Lines beginning with an SOH ASCII character (binary 001) cannot be placed in the
file unless the SOH is escaped. This character has special meaning to sees [see
sccsfile(4) (5)] and will cause an error.

sees

Avoid using a get of many sees files, followed by a delta of those files, when the get
generates a large amount of data. Instead, use multiple get/delta sequences.
If the standard input (-) is specified on the delta command line, -m (if necessary) and
-y must also be present. Omission of these options causes an error.

Comments are limited to text strings of at most 512 characters.
FILES
g-file

Existed before the execution of delta; removed after completion of
delta.
Existed before the execution of delta; may exist after completion of
p-file
delta.
q-fiIe
Created during the execution of delta; removed after completion of
delta.
Created during the execution of delta; renamed to sees file after comx-file
pletion of delta.
z-file
Created during the execution of delta; removed during execution of
delta.
d-file
Created during the execution of delta; removed after completion of
delta.
/usr/bin/bdiff Program to compute differences between the "gotten" file and the
g-file.
DIAGNOSTICS
Use help( 1) for explanations.

Commands

1-167

DELTA(l)

SysV

DELTA(l)

SEE ALSO
admin(1), cdc(1), get(1), prs(1), nndel(1), sccs(l), sccsfile(4).
bdiff(1), he1p(1) in Using Your SysV Environment.

1-168

Commands

SysV

DIFF(l)

DIFF(l)

NAME
diff - differential file comparator
SYNOPSIS

diff [ -etbh

1 file1 file2

DESCRIPTION

diff tells what lines must be changed in two files to bring them into agreement. If file1
(jile2) is -. the standard input is used. If file1 (jile2) is a directory. then a file in that
directory with the name file2 (jile1) is used. The normal output contains lines of these
forms:

nl a n3,n4
nl,n2 d n3
nl,n2 c n3,n4
These lines resemble ed commands used to convert file 1 into file2. The numbers after
the letters pertain to file2. In fact. by using a instead of d and reading backward. you
can see how to convertfile2 into file1. As in ed. identical pairs. where nl =n2 or n3 =
n4. are abbreviated as a single number.
Following each of these lines come all the lines that are affected in the first file flagged
by <. then all the lines that are affected in the second file flagged by>.
OPTIONS

-b

Causes trailing blanks (spaces and tabs) to be ignored and other strings of
blanks to compare equal.

-e

Produces a script of a, c. and d commands for the editor ed. which recreates
file2 fromfile1 .

-f

Produces a similar script. not useful with ed. in the opposite order. In connection with -e. the following shell program may help maintain multiple versions
of a file. Only an ancestral file ($1) and a chain of version-to-version ed
scripts ($2.$3 .... ) made by A "latest version" appears on the standard output.
(shift; cat $*; echo 'l.$p') I ed - $1
Except in rare circumstances, diff finds a smallest sufficient set of file differences.

-h

Does a fast. half-hearted job. It works only when changed stretches are short
and well separated. but does work on files of unlimited length. Options -e and
-f are unavailable with -h.

BUGS

Editing scripts produced under the -e or -f option are naive about creating lines consisting of a single period (.).

Commands

1-169

SysV

DIFF(l)

DIFF(l)

WARNINGS

Missing newline at end offile X
indicates that the last line of file X did not have a new-line. If the lines are different,
they will be flagged and output; although the output will seem to indicate they are the
same.
FILES
Itmp/d?????

lusr/Iib/diffb for-h
DIAGNOSTICS

Exit status is 0 for no differences, I for some differences, 2 for trouble.
SEE ALSO

bdiff(l), cmp(l), comm(l), ed(l).

1-170

Commands

DIFF3(1)

SysV

DIFF3(1)

NAME

diff3 - 3-way differential file comparison
SYNOPSIS

diff3 [ -ex3 ] file1 file2 file 3
DESCRIPTION

diff3 compares three versions of a file, and publishes disagreeing ranges of text flagged
with these codes:
all three files differ

===1

filel is different

===2

file2 is different

===3

file3 is different

The type of change suffered in converting a given range of a given file to some other is
indicated in one of these ways:

I: nl

Text is to be appended after line number nl in file I, where
1=1,2,or3.

a

l:nl,n2c

Text is to be changed in the range line nl to line n2. If nl

=n2, the range may be abbreviated to nl .

The original contents of the range follows inunediately after a c indication. When the
contents of two files are identical, the contents of the lower-numbered file is suppressed.
OPTIONS

--e

Publishes a script for the editor ed that incorporates into filel all changes
between file2 and file3. That is, the changes that normally would be
flagged == and ===3.

-x(-3)

Produces a script to incorporate only changes flagged == (==3).
The following command applies the resulting script to file 1 .
(cat script; echo 'I,$p') I ed - filel

FILES

Itmp/d3*
lusr/lib/diff3prog
BUGS

Text lines that consist of a single. will defeat --e.
Files longer than 64K bytes will not work.
SEE ALSO

diff(l).

Commands

1-171

DIRCMP(l)

SysV

DIRCMP(l)

NAME

dircmp - directory comparison
SYNOPSIS

dircmp [ -d 1 [ -s 1 [ -wn 1 dirl dir2
DESCRIPTION

dircmp examines dirl and dir2 and generates various tabulated information about the
contents of the directories. It generates lists of files that are unique to each directory for
all the options. If no option is entered, a list is output indicating whether the file names
common to both directories have the Same contents.
OPTIONS

-d

Compares the contents of files with the same name in both directories
and outputs a list telling what must be changed in the two files to bring
them into agreement. The list format is described in diff( l).

-s

Suppresses messages about identical files.

-wn

Changes the width of the output line to n characters. The default width
is 72.

SEE ALSO

cmp(l), diff(l).

1-172

Commands

DIRNAME(l)

SysV

DIRNAME(l)

NAME
basename, dirname - deliver portions of path names
SYNOPSIS

basename string [ suffix ]
dirname string
DESCRIPTION

basename deletes any prefix ending in I and the suffix (if present in string) from string,
and prints the result on the standard output. It is normally used inside substitution
marks (' ') within shell procedures.
dirname delivers all but the last level of the path name in string.
EXAMPLES

The following example, invoked with the argument lusrlsrclcmd/cat.c, compiles the
named file and moves the output to a file named cat in the current directory:
cc $1
mv a.out 'basename $1 '\.c"
The following example sets the shell variable NAME to lusrlsrclcmd:
NAME='dirname lusrlsrc/cmdlcat.c'
SEE ALSO

sh(I).

Commands

1-173

DISABLE(I)

SysV

DISABLB(I)

NAME

eliable, disable - enable/disable LP printers
SYNOPSIS
enable printers
disable [-c) [-r[reason)) printers
DESCRIPTION
enable activates the named printers, enabling them to print requests taken by Ip(i).
Use Ipstat(l) to find the status of printers.

disable deactivates the named printers, disabling them from printing requests taken by
Ip(I). By default, any requests that are currently printing on the designated printers are
reprinted in their entirety either on the same printer or on another member of the same
class. Use Ipstat(l) to find the status of printers.
OPTIONS FOR DISABLE ONLY
-c
Cancels any requests that are currently printing on any of the designated
printers.
-r[ reason]

Associates a reason with the deactivation of the printers. This reason
applies to all printers mentioned up to the next -r option. If the -r
option is not present or the -r option is given without a reason, a default
reason is used. Reason is reported by Ipstat(l).

FILES

/usr/spool/lp/*
SEE ALSO
Ip(l),lpstat(I).

1-174

Commands

DLTY(l)

Domain/OS SysV

DLTY(l)

NAME
dlty - delete a type
SYNOPSIS

dlty [options] type_name
DESCRlPTION

dlty deletes a type and any installed type manager.
type_name (required) Specify the name of the type to be deleted.
OPTIONS

Specify the node on which the type is to be deleted. You may
also specify the entry directory of a volume mounted for software
updates, as shown in the example below. If you omit the -n
node-spec the type is deleted on the current node.
-I

List the type nameltype identifier pair that is deleted.

EXAMPLES
$ dlty example_type -I
"example_type" 24BF9F4l.l00001FB deleted.
$ dlty example_type -n Iltest_vol -I
"example_type" 24BFA6F8.200001FB
deleted from volume Iitest_vol.

In the following example, the disk has been mounted for software updates. The disk's

top level directory (cataloged as Imount_disk by the letc/mount(IM) command) must
contain a "sys" directory. If it does not, you get a "types file not found" error.
$ mtvol w Imount_disk
$ dlty example_type -n Imount_disk-I

"example_type" 24BFB71E.200001FB deleted
from volume //my_node/mount_disk.

SEE ALSO

crty(l), inty(l), lty(l), mount(lM)

Commands

1-175

DM(l)

Domain/OS SysV

DM(l)

NAME
DM conunands - Display Manager conunands
DESCRIPTION
Following is a list of DM conunands sorted by function.
CURSOR CONTROL COMMANDS:
al
Move cursor left I character position.
ar

Move cursor right 1 character position.

ad

Move cursor down I line.

au

Move cursor up one line.

as x y

Set scale factors for arrow keys, in raster units.

curs [-onl-offJ
Enable/disable cursor positioning via m.
tI

Move cursor to the left edge of the pad.

tr

Move cursor to the end of the line.

tt

Move cursor to top edge of the window.
tb Move cursor to the last line in the window.

twb {-II-rl-tl-b I

Move cursor to the specified window border.
th

Move cursor right to the next horizontal tab stop.

thl

Move cursor left to the next horizontal tab stop.
ts nl n2 ... [-r] Set tab stops in columns nl, n2, etc., optionally repeating
the last interval.

tdm

Move cursor to the Display Manager's input window.

t1w

Move cursor to the previous window.

tn

Move cursor to the next window on the display.

tni

Move cursor to next unobscured icon on the display.

ti

Move cursor to the next window in which input is enabled.

PROCESS CREATION COMMANDS:
cp [-il-c char] pathname [-n process_name] [args ... ll
Create a new process, input and transcript pads, and associated windows;
the process executes pathname; -i makes the window an icon; -c
specifies the icon character; -n names the process.

1-176

Conunands

DM(l)

Domain/OS SysV

DM(l)

cpo pathname [-n process_name [args ... ]]
Create a process and execute pathname; do not create pads or windows.
cps pathname [-n process_name [args ... ]]
Like cpo, except assign the process the SID 'user.server.none'.
PROCESS CONTROL COMMANDS:

dq [-sl-bl-c nn]
Cause a quit fault, which normally terminates program execution; -s
also stops the process; -b blasts the process, -{: generates an arbitrary
asynchronous fault with the specified hex status code.
ds

Suspend execution of the process.

de

Continue execution of a suspended process.

WINDOWjPAD CREATION COMMANDS:

ce pathname Create an edit pad and associated window.
cv pathname Create a view, that is, a read only edit pad.
cc

Create a copy of an existing window.

WINDOW CONTROL COMMANDS:

wg

Grow or shrink a window.

wge

Grow or shrink a window with feedback.

wm

Move a window.

wme

Move a window with feedback.

wp [window_namelgroup_name] [-tl-b]
Push (named) window (or window group) to bottom of pile if unobscured, else pop to top. -t and -b will force a window to the bottom or
to the top.
we [-f] [-q] [-a] [-s]
Close (delete) a window. Use -a to automatically close and delete a window after a "Z and -s to reverse auto-close mode.
wa [-on I-off] Toggle auto-hold mode.
ws [-on I-off] Toggle window-at-a-time scroll mode.
wh [-onl-off]
Toggle hold mode.
wdf [n]

Set the n'th default window creation boundaries.

PAD CONTROL COMMANDS:

pb

Commands

Move the bottom of the pad into window.

1-177

Domain/OS SysV

DM(l)

DM(l)

pt

Move the top of the pad into window.

pp [-]n

Move the pad forward [backward] n pages (n may be decimal fraction).

pv [-]n

Move the pad forward [backward] n lines (n may be decimal fraction).

ph [-]n

Move the pad n character positions horizontally (n may be decimal fraction).

pn pathname Save the pad under pathname (transcript pads only).
WINDOW GROUP AND ICON COMMANDS:
icon [entry_name] [-i] [-w] [-c 'char']
Make a window or group of windows into an icon(s).
wi [entry_name] [-i] [-w]
Make a window or group of windows invisible.
wgra group_name [entry_name]
Add a window to a group of windows.
wgrr group_name [entry_name]
Remove a window from a group of windows.
cpb group_name
Display a list of the windows in a group.
idf

Set icon positioning vector.

PAD EDITING COMMANDS:
Set modes:
ro [-on I-oft] Change pad from write to read-only mode or vice versa.
ei [-onl-oft] Change from insert to overstrike mode or vice versa.
Insert text:
es 'string'

Insert' string' at the current cursor position.

en

Insert a new line character.

er nn

Send raw hexadecimal data byte nn to user program.

eef

Insert a stream end-of-file indicator.

Delete text:
ed
ee

Delete the character at the cursor position.
Delete the character immediately preceding the cursor.

Cut and Paste:
xc [-r] [-fpathname I name]
Copy text into a paste buffer or file.
xd [-r] [-f pathname I name]
Copy text into a paste buffer or file and delete text.

1-178

Commands

Domain/OS SysY

DM(l)

DM(l)

xp [-r] [-f pathname I name]
Insert contents of paste buffer or file into pad.

xi [-f pathname]
Copy display image to graphics map file for above cut and paste commands: use -r for a rectangular cut. use -f to specify a file name.
Search:
/regular exp/ Search forward in the pad for a string which matches the regular expression; for help on regular expressions, type help patterns.
\regular exp\ Search backward in the pad for a string which matches the regular
expression.
//or\\

Repeat last search forward or backward.

sq

Abort search.

sc [-onl-oft1 Enable/disable case sensitivity for searches.
Substitute:
s/re/replace/

Substitute the replacement text for all strings in the range which match
the regular expression .

so/re/replace/ Substitute the replacement text for the first string in each line in the
range which matches the regular expression.
Miscellaneous:
undo

Undo file changes in an input pad or an edit pad; successive undos will
undo further back in history.

pw

Write edit pad to new file, but don't close pad or delete window.

echo [-r]

If a grow/move is in progress, then end feedback. Else begin text
highlighting feedback if the cursor is on text.

abrt

Abort text or window feedback, abort a search, or clear mark stack.

case [-ul-ll-s]
Change the case of the letters in a marked text range.
-s
Switch to inverse case (default)
-u
Change to upper case
-I
Change to lower case
KEY DEFINITION COMMANDS:

kd key [[def] ke]
Set or display a DM key definition.
kbdn

Commands

Declare keyboard type; n must be '3' if your node has a Domain Programmable Keyboard (with numeric keypad); n must be '2' if your node
has a Low Profile Keyboard; n must be ' , if your node has an 880 keyboard; this command is only valid during node boot.

1-179

DM(\)

Domain/OS SysV

& 'prompt'

DM(\)

Write the optional prompt string in the input pad, then read a line of
input

DISPLAY MANAGEMENT COMMANDS:
Login/Logout:
I pers [group [org]]
Login (valid only when logged out); the '1' is optional when preceded by
the "login:" prompt.
10

H1

Logout (valid only when logged in)

ex

Exit DM to boot shell.

shut [-f]

Shutdown the system

Place/Clear Marks:
dr

Place a mark (for window control or cut and paste).

gm

Go to mark.

ems

Clear mark stack.

rm

Push last mark back on the stack.

Miscellaneous:
Display line, column number, and x,y pixel values of current cursor position.
aa

Acknowledge DM alarm.

ap

Acknowledge DM alarm and pop the associated window.

bl [-il-e] [I_char] [rJhar]
Check and/or balance delimiting characters.
env var [value]
Set or display an environment variable; setting an environment variable
is only valid during login startup.
bge [-on I-off]
Tum on or off the gray scale background color (monochrome monitor).
inv [-onl-off] Invert the screen to black on white, or vice-versa (monochrome monitor).
mono [-ool-off]
Enable/disable monochrome mode (color monitor).
msg'string'

1-180

Display a message in the DM output window.

Commands

DM(l)

Domain/OS SysV

rs

Refresh the entire screen.

rw [-rJ

Refresh current window; -r option reenables window.

DM(l)

fl pathname [-iJ

Load a font to be used in later pads; -i indicates an icon font.
cmdf pathname
Execute DM script.

Commands

1-181

DSPST(l)

Domain/OS SysV

DSPST(l)

NAME

dspst - display process status graphically
SYNOPSIS
dspst [-r n] [-p] [-Ll] [-os] [-m]
[-io] [-a] [-n node_spec]
[-large I-small]
DESCRIPTION
dspst displays process statistics in a graphical, bar-chart fashion within the current pro-

cess window. The chart is updated periodically (see -r below). The default action of
this command is to display the brief Domain/OS process list, all user processes and all
I/O information in a font size automatically selected based on window size.
While dspst is running, the following keys are interpreted as follows:
All Keyboards:

CRTL{f
CRTL/B
RETURN
CRTL/N
CRTL/Y
Boxed up arrow
Boxed down arrow
Shifted up arrow
Shifted down arrow
EXIT or ABORT

SAVE
OPTIONS
-rn

Move to top
Move to bottom
Exit
Exit
Exit and save current image
Scroll backward 1/2 window
Scroll forward 1/2 window
Scroll backward 1 line
Scroll forward 1 line
Exit
Exit and save current image
Specify that the display should be repeatedly updated every n
seconds. If this option is omitted, the display is updated every 4
seconds.

-p
-11

Show process infonnation.

-os (default)

Show brief Domain/OS and full user-process infonnation.

-m

Show missing CPU time.

-io (default)

Show I/O statistics.

Show Domain/OS and user-process infonnation.

Show all information (same as -11 -io -m).
Specify remote node whose process statistics are to be listed.

1-182

Commands

DSPST(l)

Domain/OS SysV

-large (default)

Force use of large font for display.

-small

Force use of small font for display.

DSPST(l)

EXAMPLES

1.

Display Domain/OS, user process, and I/O status.
$ dspst

2.

Display Domain/OS, user process, and I/O status for the node named Ilfred using
the large font.
$ dspst -n Ilfred -large

Commands

1-183

SysY

DU(l)

DU(l)

NAME

du - summarize disk usage
SYNOPSIS

du [ -ars ] [ names]
DESCRIPTION

du prints the number of blocks (1024 bytes per block) contained in all files and directories specified by the names argument. The block count includes the indirect blocks of
the file. A file with two or more links is only counted once. If the names argument is
missing, a period (.) is used.
OPTIONS

-a

Generates an entry for each file.

-r

Generates messages about such things as directories that cannot be read
and files that cannot be opened. du is normally silent about these things.

-s

Prints only the grand total of blocks for each of the specified names.

BUGS
Absence of the -a or -s options causes an entry to be generated for each directory only.
If the -a option is not used, nondirectories given as arguments are not listed.
If too many distinct linked files exist, du counts the excess files more than once.
Files with holes in them will get an incorrect block count.

1-184

Commands

SysV

DUMP(l)

DUMP(l)

NAME

dump - dump selected parts of an object file
SYNOPSIS

dump [options

1 files

DESCRIPTION

The dump command dumps selected parts of each of its object file arguments.
dump accepts both object files and archives of object files. It processes each file argument according to one or more of the following options.
OPTIONS

-a

Dumps the archive header of each member of each archive file argument.

-c

Dumps the string table.

-f

Dumps each file header.

-g

Dumps the global symbols in the symbol table of an archive.

-h

Dumps section headers.

-I

Dumps line number information.

-L

Interprets and prints the contents of the .lib sections.

-0

Dumps each optional header.

-r

Dumps relocation information.

-s

Dumps section contents.

-t

Dumps symbol table entries.

-z name
Dumps line number entries for the named function.
-Aa

Dumps the longname table and module table of an archive.

-Ai

Interprets and prints the contents of the .inlib section.

-Am

Interprets and prints the .mir section records.

-Ar

Interprets and prints the .rwdi section records.

-AR

Interprets and prints the contents of the .rwdi section.

-As

Interprest and prints the .sri section records.

-AS

Interprets and prints section contents.

MODIFIERS
The following modifiers are used in conjunction with the options listed above to modify
their capabilities.
-d number Dumps the section number, number, or the range of sections starting at
number and ending at the number specified by +d.
Commands

1-185

DUMP(1)

SysV

DUMP(I)

+d number Dumps sections in the range either beginning with first section or beginning with section specified by -d.
-0

name

Dumps information pertaining only to the named entity. This modifier
applies to -h, -s, -r, -I, and-t.

-p

Suppresses printing of the headers.

-t index

Dumps only the indexed symbol table entry. The -t used in conjunction
with +t, specifies a range of symbol table entries.

+t index

Dumps the symbol table entries in the range ending with the indexed
entry. The range begins at the first symbol table entry or at the entry
specified by the -t option.

-u

Underlines the name of the file for emphasis.

-v

Dumps information in symbolic representation rather than numeric (e.g.,
C_STATIC instead of OX02). This modifier can be used with all the above
options except -s and -0 options of dump.

-z name ,number
Dumps line number entry or range of line numbers starting at number for
the named function.
+z number Dumps line numbers starting at either function name or number specified
by -z, up to number specified by +z.
Blanks separating an option and its modifier are optional. The comma separating the
name from the number modifying the -z option may be replaced by a blank.
dump attempts to format the information it dumps in a meaningful way, printing certain information in character, hex, octal or decimal representation as appropriate.
SEE ALSO

a.out(4), ar(4).

1-186

Commands

SysV

ECHO(l)

ECHO(l)

NAME

echo - echo arguments
SYNOPSIS

echo [ arg ] ...
DESCRIPTION

echo writes its arguments separated by blanks and tenninated by a new-line on the standard output. It also understands C-like escape conventions; beware of conflicts with the
shell's use of \;

\b
\c
\f
\n

\r
\t
\v
\\
\On

Backspace
Print line without new-line
Formfeed
Newline
Carriage return
Tab
Vertical tab
Backslash
Where n is the S-bit character whose ASCII code is the 1-, 2- or 3digit octal number representing that character.

echo is useful for producing diagnostics in command files and for sending known data
into a pipe.
CAVEATS
When representing an S-bit character by using the escape convention \On, the n must
always be preceded by the digit zero (0).
For example, typing; echo 'WARNING:\OT will print the phrase WARNING: and
sound the "bell" on your tenninal. The use of single (or double) quotes (or two
backslashes) is required to protect the "'" that precedes the "07".
For the octal equivalents of each character, see ascii(5), in the SysV Programmer's
Reference.
SEE ALSO

sh(l).

Commands

I-IS'

ED(l)

SysV

ED(l)

NAME
ed, red - text editor
SYNOPSIS

ed [ -s ] [ -p string ] [file]
red [ -s ] [ -p string ] [file]
DESCRIPTION

ed is the standard text editor. If the file argument is given, ed simulates an e command
(see below) on the named file; that is, the file is read into ed's buffer so that it can be
edited.
ed operates on a copy of the file it is editing; changes made to the copy have no effect
on the file until a w (write) command is given. The copy of the text being edited
resides in a temporary file called the buffer. There is only one buffer.
red is a restricted version of ed. It only allows editing of files in the current directory.
It prohibits executing shell commands using the !shell command. Attempts to bypass
these restrictions result in an error message (restricted she/I).
Both ed and red support the fspec(4) formatting capability. After including a format
specification as the first line of file and invoking ed with your terminal in sUy -tabs or
stty tab3 mode (see stty(l», specified tab stops are automatically used when scanning
file. For example, if the first line of a file contained:
<:t5,10,15 s72:>
tab stops would be set at columns 5, 10, and 15, and a maximum line length of 72
would be imposed. NOTE: while inputing text, tab characters when typed are expanded
to every eighth column as is the default.
OPTIONS

-s

Suppresses the printing of character counts bye, r, and w commands, of
diagnostics from e and q commands, and of the ! prompt after a
!shell command. Also, see the WARNING section at the end of this
manual page.

-p

Allows you to specify a prompt string. Commands to ed have a simple
and regular structure: zero, one, or two addresses followed by a singlecharacter command, possibly followed by parameters to that command.
These addresses specify one or more lines in the buffer. Every command that requires addresses has default addresses, so that the addresses
can very often be omitted.

In general, only one command may appear on a line. Certain commands allow the
input of text. This text is placed in the appropriate place in the buffer. While ed is
accepting text, it is said to be in input mode. In this mode,

1-188

Commands

ED(l)

SysV

ED(l)

no commands are recognized; all input is merely collected. Input mode is left by typing a period (.) alone at the beginning of a line, followed immediately by a carriage
return.
ed supports a limited form of regular expression notation; regular expressions are used
in addresses to specify lines and in some commands (s, for example) to specify portions
of a line that are to be substituted. A regular expression (RE) specifies a set of character
strings. A member of this set of strings is said to be matched by the RE.
REGULAR EXPRESSIONS
The following one-character REs match a single character:

•

An ordinary character (not one of those discussed below) is a one-character RE that
matches itself.

•

A backslash (\) followed by any special character is a one-character RE that
matches the special character itself. The special characters are:

" *, [, and \ (period, asterisk, left square bracket, and backslash, respectively),
which are always special, except when they appear within square brackets.
~ (caret or circumflex), which is special at the beginning of an entire RE, or
immediately follows the left of a pair of square brackets.

$ (dollar sign), which is special at the end of an entire RE.
The character used to bound (i.e., delimit) an entire RE, which is special for that
RE (for example, see how slash (I) is used in the g command, below.)

•

A period (.) is a one-character RE that matches any character except new-line.

•

A non-empty string of characters enclosed in square brackets ([ ]) is a one-character
RE that matches anyone character in that string. If, however, the first character of
the string is a circumflex (~), the one-character RE matches any character except
new-line and the remaining characters in the string. The ~ has this special meaning
only if it occurs first in the string. The minus (-) may be used to indicate a range of
consecutive ASCII characters; for example, [0-9] is equivalent to [0123456789].
The - loses this special meaning if it occurs first (after an initial ~, if any) or last in
the string. The right square bracket (]) does not terminate such a string when it is
the first character within it (after an initial ~, if any); e.g., []a-f] matches either a
right square bracket (1) or one of the letters a through f inclusive. The four characters listed in 1. 2.a above stand for themselves within such a string of characters.

The following rules may be used to construct RE s from one-character REs:
•

A one-character RE is a RE that matches whatever the one-character RE matches.

•

A one-character RE followed by an asterisk (*) is a RE that matches zero or more
occurrences of the one-character RE. If there is any choice, the longest leftrnosl
string that permits a match is chosen.

Commands

l-18~

SysV

EO(l)

EO(1)

•

A one-character RE followed by \{m\}, \{m,\}, or \{m,n\} is a RE that matches a
range of occurrences of the one-character RE. The values of m and n must be nonnegative integers less than 256; \{ m \} matches exactly m occurrences; \{ m, \}
matches at least m occurrences; \{m,n\} matches any number of occurrences
between m and n inclusive. Whenever a choice exists, the RE matches as many
occurrences as possible.

•

The concatenation of REs is a RE that matches the concatenation of the strings
matched by each component of the RE.

•

A RE enclosed between the character sequences \( and \) is a RE that matches whatever the unadorned RE matches.

•

The expression \n matches the same string of characters as was matched by an
expression enclosed between \( and \) the sub-expression specified is that beginning
with the n-th occurrence of \( counting from the left. For example, the expression
~\(.*\)\1$ matches a line consisting of two repeated appearances of the same string.

Finally, an entire RE may be constrained to match only an initial segment or final segment of a line (or both).
•

A circumflex ( ~ ) at the beginning of an entire RE constrains that RE to match an initial segment of a line.

•

A dollar sign ($) at the end of an entire RE constrains that RE to match afinal segment of a line.

The construction

~entire RE$

constrains the entire RE to match the entire line.

The null RE (e.g., II) is equivalent to the last RE encountered. See also the last paragraph before FILES below.
To understand addressing in ed it is necessary to know that at any time there is a
current line. Generally speaking, the current line is the last line affected by a command; the exact effect on the current line is discussed under the description of each
command. Addresses are constructed as follows:
The character. addresses the current line.
The character $ addresses the last line of the buffer.
A decimal number n addresses the n -th line of the buffer.

'x addresses the line marked with the mark name character x, which must be a
lower-case letter. Lines are marked with the k command described below.
A RE enclosed by slashes (I) addresses the first line found by searching fO/ward
from the line following the current line toward the end of the buffer and stopping
at the first line containing a string matching the RE. If necessary, the search wraps
around to the beginning of the buffer and continues up to and including the
current line, so that the entire buffer is searched. See also the last paragraph
before FILES below.

1-190

Commands

SysV

ED(1)

ED(!)

A RE enclosed in question marks (?) addresses the first line found by searching

backward from the line preceding the current line toward the beginning of the
buffer and stopping at the first line containing a string matching the RE. If necessary, the search wraps around to the end of the buffer and continues up to and
including the current line. See also the last paragraph before FILES below.
An address followed by a plus sign ( + ) or a minus sign (-) followed by a decimal
number specifies that address plus (respectively minus) the indicated number of
lines. The plus sign may be omitted.

If an address begins with + or -, the addition or subtraction is taken with respect
to the current line; e.g, -5 is understood to mean .-5.
If an address ends with + or -, then 1 is added to or subtracted from the address,
respectively. As a consequence of this rule and the rule immediately above, the
address - refers to the line preceding the current line. (To maintain compatibility
with earlier versions of the editor, the character ~ in addresses is entirely
equivalent to -.) Moreover, trailing + and - characters have a cumulative effect,
so - refers to the current line less 2.

For convenience, a comma (,) stands for the address pair 1,$, while a semicolon
(;) stands for the pair. ,$.
COMMANDS
Commands may require zero, one, or two addresses. Commands that require no
addresses regard the presence of an address as an error. Commands that accept one or
two addresses assume default addresses when an insufficient number of addresses is
given; if more addresses are given than such a command requires, the last one(s) are
used.
Typically, addresses are separated from each other by a comma (,). They may also be
separated by a semicolon (;). In the latter case, the current line (.) is set to the first
address, and only then is the second address calculated. This feature can be used to
determine the starting line for forward and backward searches. The second address of
any two-address sequence must correspond to a line that follows, in the buffer, the line
corresponding to the first address.
In the following list of ed commands, the default addresses are shown in parentheses.
The parentheses are not part of the address; they show that the given addresses are the
default.

It is generally illegal for more than one command to appear on a line. However, any
command (except e,f, r, or w) may be suffixed by I, n, or p in which case the current
line is either listed, numbered or printed, respectively, as discussed below under the I,
n, and p commands.
(. )a



Commands

1-191

SysV

ED(J)

ED(J)

The append command reads the given text and appends it after the addressed
line; . is left at the last inserted line, or, if there were none, at the addressed
line. Address 0 is legal for this command: it causes the "appended" text to be
placed at the beginning of the buffer. The maximum number of characters that
may be entered from a terminal is 256 per line (including the new-line character).
(. )c


The change command deletes the addressed lines, then accepts input text that
replaces these lines; . is left at the last line input, or, if there were none, at the
first line that was not deleted.
(. ,.)d

The delete command deletes the addressed lines from the buffer. The line
after the last line deleted becomes the current line; if the lines deleted were originally at the end of the buffer, the new last line becomes the current line.
efile

The edit command causes the entire contents of the buffer to be deleted, and
then the named file to be read in; . is set to the last line of the buffer. If no file
name is given, the currently-remembered file name, if any, is used (see the f
command). The number of characters read is typed; file is remembered for
possible use as a default file name in subsequent e, r, and w commands. If file
is replaced by !, the rest of the line is taken to be a shell (sh (1) command
whose output is to be read. Such a shell command is not remembered as the
current file name. See also DIAGNOSTICS below.
Efile

The Edit command is like e, except that the editor does not check to see if any
changes have been made to the buffer since the last w command.
f file
Iffile is given, the file-name command changes the currently-remembered file
name to file; otherwise, it prints the currently-remembered file name.

(1,$)giREicommand list
In the global command, the first step is to mark every line that matches the
given RE. Then, for every such line, the given command list is executed with.
initially set to that line. A single command or the first of a list of commands
appears on the same line as the global command. All lines of a multi-line list
except the last line must be ended with a \; a, i, and c commands and associated input are permitted. The. terminating input mode may be omitted if it
would be the last line of the command list. An empty command list is
equivalent to the p command. The g, G, v, and V commands are not permitted in the command list. See also BUGS and the last paragraph before FILES
below.

1-192

Commands

SysV

ED(l)

ED(l)

(1,$ )GIREI
In the interactive Global command, the first step is to mark every line that
matches the given RE. Then, for every such line, that line is printed, • is
changed to that line, and anyone command (other than one of the a, c, i, g, G,
v, and V commands) may be input and is executed. After the execution of that
command, the next marked line is printed, and so on; a new-line acts as a null
command; an & causes the re-execution of the most recent command executed
within the current invocation of G. Note that the commands input as part of
the execution of the G command may address and affect any lines in the
buffer. The G command can be terminated by an interrupt signal (ASCII DEL
or BREAK).
h

The help command gives a short error message that explains the reason for the
most recent? diagnostic.

H
The Help command causes ed to enter a mode in which error messages are
printed for all subsequent ? diagnostics. It will also explain the previous ? if
there was one. The H command alternately tums this mode on and off; it is
initially off.
(. )i


The insert command inserts the given text before the addressed line; . is left at
the last inserted line, or, if there were none, at the addressed line. This command differs from the a command only in the placement of the input text.
Address 0 is not legal for this command. The maximum number of characters
that may be entered from a terminal is 256 per line (including the new-line
character).
(.,.+l)j

The join command joins contiguous lines by removing the appropriate newline characters. If exactly one address is given, this command does nothing.
(.)kx

The mark command marks the addressed line with name x, which must be a
lower-case letter. The address IX then addresses this line; • is unchanged.
(.,. )1

The list command prints the addressed lines in an unambiguous way: a few
non-printing characters (e.g., tab. backspace) are represented by visually
mnemonic overstrikes. All other non-printing characters are printed in octal,
and long lines are folded. An I command may be appended to any other command other than e .t, r, or w.
(.,.)ma

The move command repositions the addressed line(s) after the line addressed
Commands

1-193

SysV

ED(1)

ED(l)

by Q. Address 0 is legal for Q and causes the addressed line(s) to be moved to
the beginning of the file. It is an error if address Q falls within the range of
moved lines; • is left at "the last line moved.
(.,.)n

The number command prints the addressed lines, preceding each line by its
line number and a tab character; • is left at the last line printed. The n command may be appended to any other command other than e ,!, r, or w.
(.,.)p

The print command prints the addressed lines; • is left at the last line printed.
The p command may be appended to any other command other than e ,!, r, or
w. For example, dp deletes the current line and prints the new current line.

p
The editor will prompt with a * for all subsequent commands. The P command alternately turns this mode on and off; it is initially off.
q
The quit command causes ed to exit. No automatic write of a file is done;
however, see DIAGNOSTICS, below.

Q
The editor exits without checking if changes have been made in the buffer
since the last w command.
($)r file

The read command reads in the given file after the addressed line. If no file
name is given, the currently-remembered file name, if any, is used (see e and!
commands). The currently-remembered file name is not changed unless file is
the very first file name mentioned since ed was invoked. Address 0 is legal for
r and causes the file to be read at the beginning of the buffer. If the read is
successful, the number of characters read is typed; • is set to the last line read
in. If file is replaced by !, the rest of the line is taken to be a shell (sh (I» command whose output is to be read. For example, "$r !Is" appends current directory to the end of the file being edited. Such a shell command is not remembered as the current file name.

(.,. )s/RElreplacementl
(.,. )s/RElreplacement/g
(.,.)s/RElreplacement/n

or
or
n=I-512
The substitute command searches each addressed line for an occurrence of the
specified RE. In each line in which a match is found, all (non-overlapped)
matched strings are replaced by the replacement if the global replacement
indicator g appears after the command. If the global indicator does not appear,
only the first occurrence of the matched string is replaced. If a number n
appears after the command, only the n th occurrence of the matched string on
each addressed line is replaced. It is an error for the substitution to fail on all

1-194

Commands

SysV

ED{l)

ED{l)

addressed lines. Any character other than space or new-line may be used
instead of I to delimit the RE and the replacement; • is left at the last line on
which a substitution occurred. See also the last paragraph before FILES
below.
An ampersand (&) appearing in the replacement is replaced by the string
matching the RE on the current line. The special meaning of & in this context
may be suppressed by preceding it by \. As a more general feature, the characters \n, where n is a digit, are replaced by the text matched by the n-th regular
subexpression of the specified RE enclosed between \( and \). When nested
parenthesized subexpressions are present, n is determined by counting
occurrences of \( starting from the left. When the character % is the only
character in the replacement, the replacement used in the most recent substitute command is used as the replacement in the current substitute command.
The % loses its special meaning when it is in a replacement string of more
than one character or is preceded by a \.
A line may be split by substituting a new-line character into it. The new-line
in the replacement must be escaped by preceding it by \. Such substitution
cannot be done as part of a g or v command list.

(. ,. )ta
This command acts just like the m command, except that a copy of the
addressed lines is placed after address a (which may be 0); . is left at the last
line of the copy.
u

The undo command nullifies the effect of the most recent command that
modified anything in the buffer, namely the most recent a, c, d, g, i, j, m, r, s,
t, V, G, or V command.

(1, $ )vlRElcommand list
This command is the same as the global command g except that the command
list is executed with. initially set to every line that does not match the RE.
(1,$)VIREI

This command is the same as the interactive global command G except that
the lines that are marked during the first step are those that do not match the
RE.
(1, $)w file

The write command writes the addressed lines into the named file. If the file
does not exist, it is created with mode 666 (readable and writable by everyone), unless your umask setting (see umask(l» dictates otherwise. The
currently-remembered file name is not changed unless file is the very first file
name mentioned since ed was invoked. If no file name is given, the
currently-remembered file name, if any, is used (see e and! commands); • is
unchanged. If the command is successful, the number of characters written is
Commands

1-195

SysV

EO(I)

EO(I)

typed. Iffile is replaced by!, the rest of the line is taken to be a shell (sh(l»
command whose standard input is the addressed lines. Such a shellcommand
is not remembered as the current file name.
($)=

The line number of the addressed line is typed; • is unchanged by this command.
!shell command
The remainder of the line after the! is sent to the UNIX system shell (sh(I» to
be interpreted as a command. Within the text of that command, the unescaped
character % is replaced with the remembered file name; if a ! appears as the
first character of the shell command, it is replaced with the text of the previous
shell command. Thus, !! will repeat the last shell command. If any expansion
is performed, the expanded line is echoed; . is unchanged.

( .+ 1 )
An address alone on a line causes the addressed line to be printed. A new-line

alone is equivalent to .+ 1p; it is useful for stepping forward through the buffer.
If an interrupt signal (ASCII OEL or BREAK) is sent, ed prints a ? and returns to its
command level.
Some size limitations: 512 characters per line, 256 characters per global command list,
and 64 characters per file name. The limit on the number of lines depends on the
amount of user memory: each line takes 1 word.
When reading a file, ed discards ASCII NUL characters. Files (e.g., a.out) that contain
characters not in the ASCII set (bit 8 on) cannot be edited by ed.
If a file is not terminated by a new-line character, ed adds one and outputs a message
explaining what it did.
If the closing delimiter of a RE or of a replacement string (e.g., I) would be the last
character before a new-line, that delimiter may be omitted, in which case the addressed
line is printed. The following pairs of commands are equivalent:
s/sIls2
s/sIls2/p
g/sl
g/sIlp
?sl
?sl?
WARNINGS
The - option, although supported in this release for upward compatibility, will no
longer be supported in the next major release of the system. Convert shell scripts that
use the - option to use the -s option, instead.
BUGS
A ! command cannot be subject to a g or a v command.
The ! command and the ! escape from the e, r, and w commands cannot be used if the
editor is invoked from a restricted shell (see sh( 1».
The sequence \0 in a RE does not match a new-line character.

1-196

Commands

ED(l)

SysV

ED(l)

Characters are masked to 7 bits on input.
If the editor input is coming from a command file (e.g., ed file < ed-cmd-file), the editor

will exit at the first failure.
FILES

/usr/tmp
$TMPDlR

If this environmental variable is not null, its value is used in place of

Default directory for temporary work file.

ed.hup

/usr/tmp as the directory name for the temporary work file.
Work is saved here if the terminal is hung up.

DIAGNOSTICS

?
? file

Command error.
An inaccessible file.

(use the help command for detailed explanations).
If changes have been made in the buffer since the last w command that wrote the entire
buffer, ed wams the user if an attempt is made to destroyed's buffer via the e or q
commands. It prints? and allows one to continue editing. A second e or q command

at this point will take effect. The -s command-line option inhibits this feature.
SEE ALSO

edit(l), ex(l), grep(l), sed(l), sh(l), stty(l), umask(l), vi(1).
fspec(4), regexp(5) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

Commands

1-197

EDFONT(l}

Domain/OS SysV

EDFONT(l)

NAME

edfont - edit a character font
SYNOPSIS

edfont [file I -v1
DESCRIPTION

edfont is an interactive program with both menu-driven and command-line interfaces.
It allows you to create, edit, and view character font files. You can specify the font file
with the file parameter, or use the "Open Font" entry in the "File" menu. If the -v
option is used, edfont will print its version number and exit.
Generally, you must press the left mouse button  to activate commands in the
menu-driven interface. When you must enter a string (for example, when you designate
which font you want to open) and there is a "Done" field on the menu, enter the string,
point to "Done" and press  to activate. If "Done" does not appear when you
must enter a string, simply type the string and press  to activate the command.
When using the menu-driven interface, you may notice that you cannot always select
every menu choice. For example, you can't select "Open Font" if you already have
one open, and likewise it's invalid to try to close a font when no font is open. When
commands are invalid, as in these cases, their places on the menus are grayed out so
that they can't be selected.
edfont lets you select a character (glyph) in a variety of ways. The utility interprets
input this way:
•

Any three-character string whose first character is a lowercase c has its final two
characters interpreted as a compose sequence (e.g., ca' for lowercase a with a
circumflex accent)

•

Any string that begins with Ox is interpreted as a hexadecimal code (e.g., Ox41 for
uppercase A)

•

Any string that begins with 0 (zero) is interpreted as octal (e.g., 0101 for A)

•

Any string that begins with a digit other than zero is considered to be decimal (e.g.,
65 for A)

•

Any other string is considered to be an ASCII character (e.g., A for A)

For more information on compose sequences, see your system's User's Guide. For a
list of decimal, octal, and hexadecimal values for the characters in Apollo's default
character set, as well as a list of the compose sequences, see the files in the /usr/pub
directory.
When you invoke edfont, it sets default values for several variables. You can change
those defaults using either the appropriate command in the menu-driven interface or set
in the command-driven interface. For more information on these interfaces see the section on command interfaces, below.

1-198

Commands

EDFONT(l)

Domain/OS SysV

EDFONT(l)

The following table lists variables, their types, default values (if any), and purpose.
Variablerrype

Default

Description

fontpath/string

:/sys/drn/fonts

fontservers/string

/usr/apollo/lib/edfont

fill/string
fontorigin/coord

outline
none

fontsize/coord

none

fontspacing/coord

none

glyphoffset/coord

none

glyphsize/coord

none

glyphwidth/coord

none

List of directories, separated by colons,
in which edfont should search for fonts
The search path for the font servers
directory
The name of the current fill pattern
The coordinate value that tells the
number of pixels below and to the left
of the font origin
The width and height of the font bounding box
The horizontal and vertical font spacing
(leading)
The offset of the current glyph from the
font origin
The width and height of the bitmap for
the current glyph
The number of pixels from the right
edge of the current glyph to the left
edge of the next glyph
The current mask
(raster operation)

mask/string

src ' dst

edfont handles fonts created using Apollo's current and pre-SRI0 formats, as well as
Adobe BDF fonts.
Menu Interface
Note: You can get additional information about any item on the display by pressing the
HELP key at the cursor position where you need help. This pops a help box. To return
to the original display, move the cursor out of the help box.
Font

When you position the cursor here and press , edfont displays a
menu with the following choices:
Open Font
Close Font
Select Glyph
Font Params
Glyph Params
Quit

Commands

1-199

EDFONT(l)

Domain/OS SysV

EDFONT(l)

Use these choices to open and close the font you want to edit, select an individual
glyph (character) to edit, and examine or change the font's parameters or a single
glyph's parameters.
Tools If you press , you will see the following choices:
Grid
Metrics
By default, both are turned on. If you tum off Grid, you no longer will see the pixelby-pixel bitmap grid in the edit window. If you turn off Metrics, the glyph fills the edit
window.
Metrics shows these three attributes of your glyph and font:
•

Origin and baseline (fine dotted line)

•

Glyph-bounding box (long dashed line)

•

Font-bounding box (short dashed line)

Commands If you press , you will see the following choices:
Undo

Undo remembers your last 10 changes to the current glyph. Undo
does not work on parameter changes, however.

Run Commands

You can set up a file of commands and direct edfont to execute
that file. For more information on the commands you can use, see
the description of the command interface, below.

Copy Glyph

Copies a glyph from elsewhere in your font or from another font.

Delete Glyph

This deletes a glyph.

Rotate Glyph
Draw

1-200

This rotates a glyph by the number of degrees you specify.
When you position the cursor here and press , you will see the following choices:
Pixel

Manipulate individual pixels

Freehand

Draw freehand

Line

Draw lines

Box

Draw boxes

Circle

Draw circles

Cut

Select and delete a pixel or range of pixels

Copy

Select and copy a pixel or range of pixels

Commands

EDFONT(l)

Domain/OS SysV

EDFONT(l)

Paste

Paste in a pixel or range of pixels that you have previously cut or copied

Zoom

Zoom in on a selected portion of the glyph

Note that after you Cut or Copy, edfont automatically changes the Draw
mode to Paste. You can manually change it to something else if you
prefer.

Fill

When you position the cursor here and press , you will see the following choices:
Outline this is the default
25% gray
50% gray
75% gray
black
bricks
chex
/stripes right-leaning stripes
\stripes left-leaning stripes
istripes vertical stripes
-stripes horizontal stripes
tri
waves
The way edfont fills an entity such as a circle or box depends on which
fill you choose. If you choose 50% gray, for example, and then create a
box, edfont turns on half of the pixels inside the box to create a 50%
gray effect. If you choose 75% or 25% gray, edfont turns on proportionally more or fewer pixels to get the desired effect.

Mask

When you position the cursor here and press , you will see the following choices (where "src" means source, "dst" means destination,
and the other characters are logical operators):

Menu Choices

Logical Operation

clear

Assign zero to all new destination values

src & dst

Assign source AND destination to new destination

src & -dst

Assign source AND complement of destination to new destination

src

Assign source values to new destination

-src & dst

Assign complement of source AND destination to new destination

Commands

1-201

EDFONT(l)

Domain/OS SysV

EDFONT(l)

Assign all destination values to new destination

dst
src dst

Assign source EXCLUSIVE OR destination to new destination
(default)

src I dst

Assign source OR destination to new destination

-(src I dst)

Assign complement of source AND complement of destination to
new destination

src == dst

Assign source EQUNALENCE destination to new destination

A

Assign complement of destination to new destination
src I-dst

Assign source OR complement of destination to new destination
Assign complement of source to new destination

-src I dst

Assign complement of source OR destination to new destination

-(src & dst)

Assign complement of source OR complement of destination to
new destination

set

Assign 1 to all new destination values

Setting the mask value turns pixels on. That is, if you select a pixel or range of pixels
with this mask, all the pixels tum black, regardless of whether they already were black.
The mask clear turns a pixel or range of pixels off (white), regardless of the pixel's initial value.
The default mask src ' dst toggles pixels. That is, if they already were black, they
become white, and vice versa. However, if you are drawing in Freehand mode, this
mask toggles the first pixel you cross and then sets the rest of the pixels you cross to
that first pixel's value.
When you have a font open, the menu-driven interface also includes two boxes on the
right side of the display labeled "«<" and "»>". The two are for displaying the previous and next glyph, respectively, in the current font. Move the cursor over either box
and press  to activate.
Command Interface
In addition to edfont's menu-driven interface, you can use the following commands in
the input pad at the bottom of the edfont window, or embed them in edfont scripts.

1-202

Commands (Arguments)

Description

!shell-command

Run a shell command in the edfont window.

box xl yl x2 y2

Draw a box that is bounded by (xl,y]) and
(x2,y2).

circle x y r

Draw a circle which has its center at (x,y)
and a radius of r.
Commands

EDFONT(l)

Domain/OS SysV

EDFONT(l)

close [-savel-nosaveJ

Close the font. If you specify -save,
edfont saves your changes, while if you
specify -nl)save, edfont ignores them.

copy glyphcode [fontfile J

Copy the specified glyph to the current
glyph. If you specify a fontftle, edfont
copies the glyph from that font; otherwise,
it copies the glyph from the current font.

delete

Delete the current glyph.

grid on I off

Tum the bitmap grid on or off.

help [command)

Get a list of available commands, or get
help on the specified command.

line xl yl x2 y2

Draw a line that begins at (xl,yl) and ends
at (x2,y2).

metrics on I off

Tum the font metrics display on or off.

next

Go to the next glyph in the current font.

openfontfile

Open the specified fontfile.

pixelxy

Draw a pixel at (x,y).

previous

Go to the previous glyph in the current
font.

quit [-savel-nosaveJ

Exit edfont, closing the current font (if one
is open). See close for information on
-save and -nosave.

Commands (Arguments)

Description

rotate degrees

Rotate the current glyph by the specified
number of degrees.

select glyphcode

Go to the specified glyph. For information
on entering a glyph or glyphcode see the
Description section above.

set var=value

Set var to the specified value. var can be
one of the edfont's parameters, as
described in the Description section above.

source filename

Execute the command-script filename.

undo

Undo the last bitmap operation.

unzoom

Zoom out one level.

zoom xl yl x2 y2

Zoom in so that the view is filled with the
box bounded by (xl, yl) and (x2,y2).

Commands

1-203

SysV

EDlT(l)

EDlT(1)

NAME
edit - text editor (variant of ex for casual users)
SYNOPSIS

edit [-r] name ...
DESCRIPTION

edit is a variant of the text editor ex recommended for new or casual users who wish to
use a command-oriented editor.
OPTION
-r

Recovers file after an editor or system crash. The following brief introduction should help you get started with edit. If you are using a CRT terminal you may want to learn about the display editor vi.

To edit the contents of an existing file you begin with the command "edit name" to the
shell. edit makes a copy of the file which you can then edit, and tells you how many
lines and characters are in the file. To create a new file, just make up a name for the file
and try to run edit on it; you will cause an error diagnostic, but do not worry.
edit prompts for commands with the character ':', which you should see after starting
the editor. If you are editing an existing file, then you will have some lines in edit's
buffer (its name for the copy of the file you are editing). Most commands to edit use its
"current line" if you do not tell them which line to use. Thus if you say print (which
can be abbreviated p) and hit carriage return (as you should after all edit commands)
this current line will be printed. If you delete (d) the current line, edit prints the new
current line. When you start editing, edit makes the last line of the file the current line.
If you delete this last line, then the new last line becomes the current one. In general,
after a delete, the next line in the file becomes the current line. (Deleting the last line is
a special case.)
If you start with an empty file or wish to add some new lines, then the append (a) com-

mand can be used. After you give this command (typing a carriage return after the
word append) edit will read lines from your terminal until you give a line consisting of
just a ".", placing these lines after the current line. The last line you type then
becomes the current line. The command insert (i) is like append but places the lines
you give before, rather than after, the current line.
edit numbers the lines in the buffer, with the first line having number 1. If you give the
command" 1" then edit types this first line. If you then give the command delete edit
deletes the first line, line 2 will become line I, and edit prints the current line (the new
line 1) so you can see where you are. In general, the current line is always the last line
affected by a command.
You can make a change to some text within the current line by using the substitute (s)
command. Use s/old/newl where old is replaced by the old characters you want to get
rid of and new is the new characters you want to replace it with.

1-204

Commands

SysV

EDIT(l)

EDIT(l)

The command file (0 tells you how many lines there are in the buffer you are editing
and will say "[Modified]" if you have changed it. After modifying a file you can put
the buffer text back to replace the file by giving a write (w) command. You can then
leave the editor by issuing a quit (q) command. If you run edit on a file, but do not
change it, it is not necessary (but does no harm) to write the file back. If you try to quit
from edit after modifying the buffer without writing it out, you are warned that there
has been "No write since last change" and edit awaits another command. If you wish
not to write the buffer out then you can issue another quit command. The buffer is
then irretrievably discarded, and you return to the shell.
By using the delete and append commands, and giving line numbers to see lines in the
file you can make any changes you desire. You should learn at least a few more things,
however, if you are to use edit more than a few times.
The change (c) command changes the current line to a sequence of lines you supply (as
in append you give lines up to a line consisting of only a ". "). You can tell change to
change more than one line by giving the line numbers of the lines you want to change,
i.e., "3,5change". You can print lines this way too. Thus "1,23p" prints the first 23
lines of the file.
The undo (u) command reverses the effect of the last command you gave which
changed the buffer. Thus if you give a substitute command which does not do what
you want, you can say undo and the old contents of the line will be restored. You can
also undo an undo command so that you can continue to change your mind. edit gives
you a warning message when commands you do affect more than one line of the buffer.
If the amount of change seems unreasonable, you should consider doing an undo and
looking to see what happened. If you decide that the change is ok, then you can undo
again to get it back. Note that commands such as write and quit cannot be undone.
To look at the next line in the buffer you can just hit carriage return. To look at a
number of lines hit 'D (control key and, while it is held down D key, then let up both)
rather than carriage return. This will show you a half screen of lines on a CRT or 12
lines on a hardcopy terminal. You can look at the text around where you are by giving
the command' 'z.". The current line will then be the last line printed; you can get back
to the line where you were before the "z." command by saying "\*(rq'. The z command can also be given other following characters "z-" prints a screen of text (or 24
lines) ending where you are; "z+" prints the next screenful. If you want less than a
screenful of lines, type in "z.12" to get 12 lines total. This method of giving counts
works in general; thus you can delete 5 lines starting with the current line with the command "delete 5" .
To find things in the file, you can use line numbers if you happen to know them; since
the line numbers change when you insert and delete lines this is somewhat unreliable.
You can search backwards and forwards in the file for strings by giving commands of
the form /text/ to search forward for text or ?text? to search backward for text. If a
search reaches the end of the file without finding the text it wraps, end around, and continues to search back to the line where you are. A useful feature here is a search of the
Commands

1-205

SysV

EDIT(l)

EDIT(l)

fonn rtext/ which searches for text at the beginning of a line. Similarly /text$/
searches for text at the end of a line. You can leave off the trailing / or ? in these commands.
The current line has a symbolic name ..... ; this is most useful in a range of lines as in
".,$print" which prints the rest of the lines in the file. To get to the last line in the file
you can refer to it by its symbolic name "$". Thus the command "$ delete" or "$d"
deletes the last line in the file, no matter which line was the current line before. Arithmetic with line references is also possible. Thus the line "$-5" is the fifth before the
last, and ".+20" is 20 lines after the present.
You can find out which line you are at by doing ".=". This is useful if you wish to
move or copy a section of text within a file or between files. Find out the first and last
line numbers you wish to copy or move (say 10 to 20). For a move you can then say
"10,20delete a" which deletes these lines from the file and places them in a buffer
named a.edit and has 26 such buffers named a through z. You can later get these lines
back by doing "put a" to put the contents of buffer a after the current line. If you want
to move or copy these lines between files you can give an edit (e) corturtand after copying the lines, following it with the name of the other file you wish to edit, i.e., "edit
chapter2". By changing delete to yank above you can get a pattern for copying lines.
If the text you wish to move or copy is all within one file then you can just say
"1O,2Omove $" for example. It is not necessary to use named buffers in this case (but
you can if you wish).
SEE ALSO

ed(l), ex(1), vi(l).

1-206

Commands

EDMTDESC(l)

Domain/OS SysV

EDMTDESC(l)

NAME
edmtdesc - edit magtape descriptor file
SYNOPSIS

edmtdesc {options) pathname
DESCRIPTION

edmtdesc allows you to create, list, and modify the magnetic tape descriptor object.
The descriptor file provides information to the streams manager so that it can handle
subsequent tape operations.

pathname (required) Specify name of magtape descriptor file to be created, listed, or
edited.
OPTIONS

At least one of the following options must be specified.

-c

Create a new magtape descriptor object with the name given in
the pathname argument.

-I [var ... J

List the values of the variable(s) specified. If no variables are
named, the entire magtape descriptor is listed.

-s {var value) ...

Set the variable(s) indicated to the specified value(s). At least
one variable/value pair is required if -s is specified. Multiple
variable/value pairs are permitted, separated by blanks.

Variables
The variables known to edmtdesc are listed below, along with their types and default
values. The variable types are: integer (int), Boolean (y/n), character string of n letters
(c [n]), and date (in format yy/mm/dd.hh:mm).
Name

Type

Default

Definition

dev

c[l]

m

u
lab

int
yin

0
yes

reo

yin

no

clv

yin

yes

Device type ('m' for magtape, 'c' for cartridge)
Magtape unit number (normally 0)
'Yes' if magtape is ANSI labeled, 'no' if
unlabeled
'Yes' to reopen previously used volume,
'no' to open new volume ( 'yes' suppresses
rewind)
'Yes' closes volume when file is closed,
'no' leaves volume open

Commands

1-207

EDMIDESC(l)

Domain/OS SysV

Name
spos

Type
yin

Default
no

vid
vacc
own
f

c[6]
c[l]
c[14]
int*

-auto

rf

c[l]

D

bl
ascnl

int
int
yin

2048
2048
yes

fsect
fid
fsid
gen
genv
cdate
edate
facc
sysc
sysu
boff

int
c[17]
c[6]
int
int
date
date
c[l]
c[xx]
c[xx]
int

rl

-auto
I

-auto
-auto

0

EDMIDESC(l)

Definition
'Yes' saves volume position when volume is
closed (for reopen), 'no' rewinds volume
when closed
Volume identifier (labeled volumes)
Volume accessibility (labeled volumes)
Volume owner (labeled volumes)
file sequence number: integer or "cur" for
current file, or "end" for new file at end of
labeled volume
record format -- "f' for fixed length, "d" for
variable length, "s" for spanned, "u" for
undefined
block length, in bytes
(maximum) record length, in bytes
'Yes' for ASCII newline handling (strip
newlines on write, supply them on read),
'no' for no newline handling
File section number (labeled volumes)
File identifier (labeled volumes)
File set identifier (labeled volumes)
Generation of file (labeled volumes)
Generation version of file (labeled volumes)
Creation date of file (labeled volumes)
Expiration date of file (labeled volumes)
File accessibility (labeled volumes)
System code (labeled volumes)
System use (labeled volumes)
Buffer offset (labeled volumes, should be 0)

For cartridge tape (dev c), you must change the block length (bl) and the record length
(rl) to be 512 or less and the record format to be fixed ("rf f').
EXAMPLES
Edit file set_tape; set the tape unit number to I; declare tape as ANSI labeled.
$ edmtdesc set_tape -s u 1 lab yes

Create descriptor file ct for cartridge tape, blocking 4 records of maximum length 128
to each block.
$ edmtdesc ct -c -s dev c bl 512 rl 128 rf f

1-208

Commands

SysV

EGREP(1)

EGREP(l)

NAME

egrep - search a file for a pattern using full regular expressions
SYNOPSIS

egrep [options] full regular expression [file ... ]
DESCRIPTION

egrep (expression grep) searches files for a pattern of characters and prints all lines that
contain that pattern. egrep uses full regular expressions (expressions that have string
values that use the full set of alphanumeric and special characters) to match the patterns. It uses a fast deterministic algorithm that sometimes needs exponential space.
egrep accepts full regular expressions as in edell, except for \( and \), with the addition
of:
•

A full regular expression followed by + that matches one or more occurrences of
the full regular expression.

•

A full regular expression followed by ? that matches 0 or 1 occurrences of the full
regular expression.

•

Full regular expressions separated by I or by a new-line that match strings that are
matched by any of the expressions.

•

Afull regular expression that may be enclosed in parentheses ( ) for grouping.

Be careful using the characters $, *, [,', I , (,), and \ infull regular expression, because
they are also meaningful to the shell. It is safest to enclose the entire full regular
expression in single quotes ' ... '.
The order of precedence of operators is [], then *? +, then concatenation, then
new-line.

I

and

If no files are specified, egrep assumes standard input. Normally, each line found is
copied to the standard output. The file name is printed before each line found if there is
more than one input file.
OPTIONS

-b

Precedes each line by the block number on which it was found. This can
be useful in locating block numbers by context (first block is 0).

-c

Prints only a count of the lines that contain the pattern.

-i

Ignores upper/lower case distinction during comparisons.

-I

Prints the names of files with matching lines once, separated by newlines. Does not repeat the names of files when the pattern is found more
than once.

-n

Precedes each line by its line number in the file (first line is 1).

-v

Prints all lines except those that contain the pattern.

Commands

1-209

EGREP(l)

SysV

EGREP(1)

-e special_expression
Searches for a special expression (full regular expression that begins
witha-).

-fjile

Takes the list ofjull regular expressions fromfile.

BUGS
Ideally there should be only one grep command, but there is not a single algorithm that
spans a wide enough range of space-time tradeoffs. Lines are limited to BUFSIZ characters; longer lines are truncated. BUFSIZ is defined in lusr/include/stdio.h.
DIAGNOSTICS
Exit status is 0 if any matches are found, 1 if none, 2 for syntax errors or inaccessible
files (even if matches were found).
SEE ALSO

ed(l), fgrep(1), grep(I), sed(I), sh(I).

1-210

Commands

EMT(l)

Domain/OS SysV

EMT(l)

NAME

emt - emulate a dumb tenninal
SYNOPSIS

emt [pathnamel
DESCRIPTION

emt allows your node to emulate an ASCII tenninal connected to another computer.
This asynchronous connection exists through a stream opened on one of the node's SIO
lines. emt also permits ASCII file transfer between your node and the remote host.
pathname (optional) Specify file containing emt commands.
Default if omitted: read commands from standard input
emt begins execution in local mode, and displays the following prompt:
emb

To enter remote mode, press Fl. (The emt command dl no longer exists.) In remote
mode, your terminal operates as if it were physically connected to the remote computer
("host"). You can log on and enter remote host commands.
To return to local mode, press Fl again.
INPUT/OUTPUT STREAMS

emt uses the four standard streams: standard input, standard output, error input, and
error output, as follows:
•

emt commands are read from an emt command file or from standard input. The
command filename may be specified on the command line or using the emt run
command. Up to four levels of command files may be nested. When EOF is
reached in a command file, commands are read from the previous file or from standard input. If EOF is reached on standard input, emt exits.

•

Keystrokes to be sent to the host computer are read from standard input only.

•

The emt command responses and all messages from the host are written to standard
output.

•

Error messages from Aegis system calls are written to error output. Optional monitoring (monit) may also be written to error output (or to a named file).

You may use redirection of standard input, command-line specification of a command
file or the emt run command to automate emt usage and use emt in shdl scripts. emt
behaves slightly differently with regard to host transmissions, depending on which of
these techniques you use and you may select the method that best suits your purpose.
When input is redirected to standard input (,emt  xmit file A

emt displays the following message:
Ready to transmit file fileA

Next, press Fl. emt enters remote mode, and transmits fileA to the remote host.
If you type:
emt> rev fileB

emt displays this message:
Ready to receive file fileB.

Next, enter remote mode by pressing Fl. Use a remote host command to display the
infonnation that you want fileB to receive. emt automatically writes this and all subsequent host transmissions into fileB. To stop the rev, pre:;s F2.
TRANSMISSION CONVENTIONS

Use the emt eommand interm to specify the line terminator used by the host. If you do
not know what the host uses as a linll terminator, experiment by changing interm. Use
the emt command outterm to specify the line terminator to be transmitted to the host.
emt allows you to open only one Domain file at a time. If emt receives a xmit or rev
command while another Domain file is active, it closes the open Domain file, and executes the new command.
During remote mode, emt waits on both the keyboard and SIO line for characters to
process, and monitors the data for characters of special interest to emt.
You can specify which keyboard characters emt should interpret by placing the keyboard in raw or cooked mode. In raw mode, emt passes all keyboard input (except the
function keys, keys L1 through L12, and keys Rl through R4), directly to the host.
Cooked mode lets you use many of the Display Manager's features for editing the input
pad. emt places your keyboard in cooked mode by default.

Commands

1-213

Domain/OS SysY

EMT(l)

EMT(l)

COMMANDS
The following commands are available while running emf:
Command

Description

Fl

Switch between local and remote modes.

F2

Interrupt a file transfer and close the file.

F3

Tum tee on or off. tee on causes emt to display file transmission records
on the screen. You can use this feature to monitor file transfers, and
decide if and when you should stop or interrupt a transfer. The default is
tee on.

F8

Send a break to the host.

CTRLlF7

Display function key definitions.

These function keys may be simulated by typing the emt ESC character followed by the
function key number (that is, -1 for Fl). When emt is used from the VT100 emulator,
use shift Fl instead of F2, and CTRL Fl instead of F3.
Command

Description

ae

Abort on error.

asconly I notasconly
Sift out most non-printing ASCII codes. Eliminates triangles, allows BS,
CR, ESC, FF, LF, TAB. The default is notasc.
break [nJ

Set the break duration value to n milliseconds. The default is 200. If set
to 0, the F8 (break) key does nothing.

close

Deactivate an rcv file. See the rcv command for related information.

code [xx I none]
Set the host-command-code to the hexadecimal number xx. The default
is none.
cooked

1-214

Place the keyboard in cooked mode. This enables many DM features for
editing the input pad, and provides an escape sequence for sending control characters to the remote host. To send the host a CTRL character,
precede the character with a tilde C). The sequence -_ transmits a delete
character. To send the host a single tilde character, type -.

Commands

Domain/OS SysV

EMT(I)

EMT(I)

The emt default is cooked mode. Cooked mode always echos keystrokes, so it does not require a full duplex connection to the host. (See
the raw command for related information.)
Note: The cooked and raw commands refer only to the transcript pad
and keyboard input. The SIO line itself is always in raw mode.
emtesc [chrlnone]
Set the emt escape character to chr. Use none to disable the escape
character. Default is - for "cooked" mode, none for "raw" mode.
The following three commands are usefnl when standard input is redirected to a file of
emt commands:

f1

Enter remote mode (Simulate function key Fl).

f2

Terminate file transfer (Simulate function key f2).

f3

Toggle tee mode

hangup

Cause modem to break connection with the remote host.

help [tetl]

Display information about emt commands or about tcll commands.

(Simulate function key F3).

line {I 121 3 Ipathname I
Select the SIO line. Pathname must specify an SIO device descriptor (for
example,/dev/si02). The default SIO line is I (/dev/siol).
Display the current SIO line, all emt switch settings and the receive
filename, if any.
monit [pathname]
Write every character received over the SIO line to pathname. If a
filename is not specified, the previous specification or error output is
used.
nomonit

Stop monitoring.

quit

End the emt session.

raw [-echol-noecho] [-If I-no If]
Place the keyboard in "raw" mode. This sends keyboard input directly to
the remote host, interpreting only function keys. The -echo option echos
keystrokes on standard output; you should use it when the host is in
half-duplex mode. The default is -noecho. The -If option converts carriage return (CR) to line feed (LF) for lines echoed. The default is
-nolf. (See the cooked command for related information.) Note: The
-echo and -If options are purely local functions that enable you to read
what you type. They do not in any way change host/node transmissions.

Commands

1-215

EMT(l)

Domain/OS SysV

EMT(l)

rev [-r] [-keysl-nokeys] [pathname]
Prepare the Domain file specified to receive remote host transmissions.
If pathname already exists, emt appends the transmission to it, unless
you specify -r. The receive begins when you enter remote mode Fl. If
you omit the pathname, emt uses the previous name, if any. The -keys
option writes keystrokes to the file along with received data. The default
is -nokeys.
emt allows you to interrupt an rev command at any time by pressing F2.
emt remains in whatever mode it was in, but keeps the rcv file active.
When you are ready to continue receiving host transmissions, you may
type rcv again (in local mode) without a filename, and emt uses the
same rev file.
If you omit filename and no rev file is active, emt issues an error message. If you specify a new rev file while another rev file is active, rev
closes the active file, and prepares the new file to receive the transmission.

Use the close command to deactivate an rev file.
tetl {tctl commands}
If you are running under Aegis, pass this command line to the shell command teU to configure the SIO line. If this SIO line is not the default
line, then you must use the -line command. The speed and syne commands have been superseded by this direct invocation of tetl. If only
UNIX is installed, use sUy to perform this action. If both UNIX and
Aegis are installed, you can use either tet! or sUy.
stty

See tetl.

interm {erllflerlflvaxl 'hex'}
Select the input line terminator. The default is erlf.
outterm {crllflerlfl 'hex'}
Select the output line terminator. The default is er. emt transmits the
selected hexadecimal value as the terminator for each line.
xmit pathname
Prepare to transmit the Domain file specified to the remote host. If you
omit pathname, or if you specify a file that does not exist, emt issues an
error message. When you issue this command, emt remains in local
mode. emt transmits the file when you press Fl.

1-216

Commands

EMT(I)

Domain/OS SysV

EMT(I)

When emt completes the transfer, it closes the file and returns to the
previous mode. emt does not send an end-of-file (EOF) signal to the
remote host. If the host requires an EOF, enter remote mode and
transmit it manually.
emt can also receive commands from the host. If the host transmits the
sequence
host-command-code (emt command string) line-terminator

emt interprets the string as an emt command. Use the emt command
code to define [host-command-code].

Commands

Line Terminators

emt Response

crlf

Converts sequence to a line feed, ignoring any
null characters that may separate the pair.

cr

Converts sequence to a line feed and ignores LFs.

If

Interprets it as a line feed, and ignores CRs.

vax

Interprets both CR and CR-LF as tertninators and
converts them to line feed.

'hex'

Converts the given hexadecimal value to LF.

1-217

ENABLE(l)

SysV

ENABLE(l)

NAME

enable, disable - enable/disable LP printers
SYNOPSIS

enable printers
disable [-c] [-r[reason]] printers
DESCRIPTION

enable activates the named printers, enabling them to print requests taken by Ip(l).
Use Ipstat(l) to find the status of printers.
disable deactivates the named printers, disabling them from printing requests taken by
Ip(l). By default, any requests that are currently printing on the designated printers are
reprinted in their entirety either on the same printer or on another member of the same
class. Use Ipstat(l) to find the status of printers.
OPTIONS FOR DISABLE ONLY
4:

Cancels any requests that are currently printing on any of the designated
printers.

-r[ reason]

Associates a reason with the deactivation of the printers. This reason
applies to all printers mentioned up to the next -r option. If the -r
option is not present or the -r option is given without a reason, a default
reason is used. Reason is reported by Ipstat(l).

FILES

lusrispool/lp/*
SEE ALSO

Ip(l),lpstat(1).

1-218

Commands

SysV

ENV(l)

ENV(l)

NAME

env - set environment for command execution
SYNOPSIS

env [-] [ name=value ] '"

[command args ]

DESCRIPTION

env obtains the current environment, modifies it according to its arguments, then executes the command with the modified environment. Arguments of the form
name=va[ue are merged into the inherited environment before the command is executed. The - flag causes the inherited environment to be ignored completely, so that
the command is executed with exactly the environment specified by the arguments.
If no command is specified, the resulting environment is printed, one name-value pair
per line.
SEE ALSO

sh(l).
exec(2), profile(4), environ(S) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

Commands

1-219

ERASE(lG)

SysV

ERASE(lG)

NAME
gdev: hpd, erase, hardcopy, tekset, td - graphical device routines and filters
SYNOPSIS
hpd [ - options] [GPS file . ..]
erase
hardcopy
tekset
td [-ernn] [GPS file . ..]
DESCRIPTION
All of the commands described below reside in /usr/bin/graf (see graphics(IG)).
hpd

Translate a GPS (graphical primitive string; see gps(4» to instructions for
the Hewlett-Packard 7221A Graphics Plotter. A viewing window is computed from the maximum and minimum points in file unless the -u or -r
option is provided. If no file is given, the standard input is assumed.
hpd Options
cn

1-220

Select character set n, n between 0 and 5.

pn

Select pen numbered n, n between I and 4 inclusive.

rn

Window on GPS region n, n between 1 and 25 inclusive.

sn

Slant characters n degrees clockwise from the vertical.

u

Window on the entire GPS universe.

xdn

Set x displacement of the viewport's lower left corner to n inches.

xvn

Set width of viewport to n inches.

ydn

Set y displacement of the viewport's lower left corner to n inches.

yvn

Set height of viewport to n inches.

erase

Send characters to a Tektronix 4010 series storage terminal to erase the
screen.

hardcopy

When issued at a Tektronix display terminal with a hard copy unit, hardcopy generates a screen copy on the unit.

tekset

Send characters to a Tektronix terminal to clear the display screen, set the
display mode to alpha, and set characters to the smallest font.

Commands

ERASE(lG)

td

SysV

ERASE(lG)

Translate a GPS to scope code for a Tektronix 4010 series storage tenninal.
A viewing window is computed from the maximum and minimum points in
file unless the -u or -r option is provided. If no file is given, the standard
input is assumed.
td Options

e

Do not erase screen before initiating display.

rn

Display GPS region n, n between 1 and 25 inclusive.

u

Display the entire GPS universe.

SEE ALSO
graphics(1G).
gps(4) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

Commands

1-22

ESA(l)

Domain/OS SysV

ESA(l)

NAME

esa - display address of external symbol
SYNOPSIS

esa symbol_name
DESCRIPTION

esa displays the address of an external symbol in an installed library. This command is
primarily intended for system-level debugging.

symbol_name (required) Specify the symbol whose address you wish to display. esa is
case sensitive with respect to the symbol name. Lowercase
must be used to refer to symbols defiried in FORTRAN and
Pascal programs. Mixed case may be used, as needed, for
symbols defined in C programs.
EXAMPLES
This command displays the address of gpr_ $init. This symbol resides within the GPR

library, which was installed at system start-up time.
$ esa gpr_$init
A1580C
$

1-222

Commands

SysV

EX(l)

EX(l)

NAME

ex - text editor
SYNOPSIS

ex [ -

1 [ -v 1 [ -t tag 1 [ -r

] [ -R

1 [ +command 1 name ...

DESCRIPTION

ex is the root of a family of editors that includes ex and vi. ex is a superset of ed, with
the most notable extension being a display editing capability. Display based editing is
the focus of vi.
If you have a CRT terminal, you may wish to use a display based editor; in this case see
vi(l), which is a command that focuses on the display editing portion of ex.
For ed Users
If you have used ed you will find that ex has a number of new features useful on CRT
terminals. Intelligent terminals and high-speed terminals are very pleasant to use with
vi. Generally, the editor uses far more of the capabilities ofterminals than ed does, and
uses the terminal capability data base and the type of the terminal you are using from
the variable TERM in the environment to determine how to drive your terminal
efficiently. The editor makes use of features such as insert and delete character and line
in its visual command (which can be abbreviated vi) and which is the central mode of
editing when using vi(l).
ex contains a number of new features for easily viewing the text of the file. The z command gives easy access to windows of text. Pressing CTRL/D causes the editor to
scroll a half-window of text and is more useful for quickly stepping through a file than
just pressing return. Of course, the screen-oriented visual mode gives constant access
to editing context.
ex gives you more help when you make mistakes. undo (u) allows you to reverse any
single change. ex gives you a lot of feedback, normally printing changed lines, and
indicating when more than a few lines are affected by a command so that it is easy to
detect when a command has affected more lines than it should have.
The editor also prevents overwriting existing files unless you edited them so that you do
not accidentally clobber with a write a file other than the one you are editing. If the
system (or editor) crashes, or you accidentally hang up the telephone, you can use the
editor recover command to retrieve your work. This gets you back to within a few
lines of where you left off.
ex has several features for dealing with more than one file at a time. You can give it a
list of files on the command line and use the next (n) command to deal with each ir
tum. The next command can also be given a list of file names, or a pattern as used by
the shell to specify a new set of files to be dealt with. In general, file names in the edi·
tor may be formed with full shell metasyntax. The metacharacter '%' is also available
in forming file names and is replaced by the name of the current file.

Commands

1-22:

SysV

EX(!)

EX(!)

For moving text between files and within a file the editor has a group of buffers, named

a through z. You can place text in these named buffers and carry it over when you edit
another file.
There is a command & in ex that repeats the last substitute command. In addition,
there is a confinned substitute command. You give a range of substitutions to be done
and the editor interactively asks whether each substitution is desired.

It is possible to ignore case of letters in searches and substitutions. ex aiso allows regu. .
lar expressions which match words to be constructed. This is convenient, for example,
in searching for the word "edit" if your document also contains the word "editor."
INVOCATION OPTIONS
Suppresses all interactive-user feedback. Useful in processing editor
scripts.
-v

Invokes vi.

-t tagfl

Edits the file containing the tag and positions the editor at its definition.

-r file

Recovers file after an editor or system crash. If file is not specified a list
of all saved files is printed.

-R

Readonly mode set, prevents accidentally overwriting the file.

+command

Begins editing by executing the specified editor search or positioning
command.

The name argument indicates files to be edited.
COMMAND NAMES AND ABBREVIATIONS
abbrev
ab
next
n
append
a
number
nu
args
ar
preserve
pre
p
change
e
print
pu
copy
eo
put
delete
d
quit
q
re
edit
e
read
f
recover
ree
file
global
g
rewind
rew
se
insert
set
join
shell
sh
source
list
so
stop
map
stop
mark
rna
substitute
s
move
unabbrev
una
rn

1-224

undo
unmap
version
visual
write
xit
yank
window
escape
Ishift
print next
resubst
rshift
scroll

u
unrnap
ve
vi
w
x
ya

z
<
CR

&
>

'D

Commands

EX(l)

SysV

EX(l)

COMMAND ADDRESSES

n

$
+
+n
%

/pat
?pat

line n
current
last
next
previous
n forward

x-n
x,y
'x

next with pat
previous with pat
n before x
xthroughy
marked with x
previous context

1,$

STATES

Command

Normal and initial state. Input prompted for by:.
Your kill character cancels partial command.
Entered by a, i, or c. Arbitrary text may be
entered. Insert is normally terminated by a line having
only. on it, or abnormally with an interrupt.
Entered by vi, terminates with Q or A\.

Insert

Visual
INITIALIZING OPTIONS

EXINIT
$HOME/.exrc
.I.exrc
set x
set nox
set x=val
set
set all
set x?

Place set's here in environment var.
Editor initialization file
Editor initialization file
Enable option
Disable option
Give value val
Show changed options
Show all options
Show value of option x

MOST USEFUL OPTIONS

autoindent
autowrite
ignorecase
list
magic
number
paragraphs
redraw
scroll
sections
shiftwidth
showmatch
showmode
slowopen
window
wrapscan
wrapmargin
Commands

ai
aw
ic

nu
para

sect
sw
sm
smd
slow Stop updates during insert
ws
wm

Supply indent
Write before changing files
In scanning
Print 'I for tab, $ at end
. [ * special in patterns
Number lines
Macro names which start ...
Simulate smart terminal
Command mode lines
Macro names '"
For < >, and input 'D
To) and} as typed
Show insert mode in vi
Visual mode lines
Around end of buffer?
Automatic line splitting

1-225

SysV

EX(l)

EX(l)

SCANNING PATTERN FORMATION
Beginning of line
End ofline
$
• Any character
Beginning of word
\<
End of word
\>
[str]
Any char in str
... not in Sfr
r1' Sir]
[x-y]
... between x and y
Any number of preceding
Vi ex

*

BUGS
The undo command causes all marks to be lost on lines changed and then restored if
the marked lines were changed.
undo never clears the buffer modified condition.
The z command prints a number of logical rather than physical lines. More than a
screen full of output may result if long lines are present.
File input/output errors do not print a name if the command line '-' option is used.
There is no easy way to do a single scan ignoring case.
The editor does not warn if text is placed in named buffers and not used before exiting
the editor.
Null characters are discarded in input files and cannot appear in resultant files.
FILES

lusr/lib/ex? ?strings
lusr/lib/ex? ?recover
lusr/li b/ex?? preserve
lusrlIibM*
$HOME/.exrc
.I.exrc
Itmp/Exnnnnn
Itmp/Rxnnnnn
lusr/preservel login

Error messages
Recover command
Preserve command
Describes capabilities of tenninals
Editor startup file
Editor startup file
Editor temporary
Named buffer temporary
Preservation directory
(where login is the user's login)

SEE ALSO

awk(l), ed(l), edit(l), grep(l), sed(l), vi(l).
curses(3X), term(4), terminfo(4) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

1-226

Commands

SysV

EXPR(l)

EXPR(l)

NAME

expr - evaluate arguments as an expression
SYNOPSIS

expr arguments
DESCRIPTION

The arguments are taken as an expression. After evaluation, the result is written on the
standard output. Terms of the expression must be separated by blanks. Characters special to the shell must be escaped. Note that 0 is returned to indicate a zero value, rather
than the null string. Strings containing blanks or other special characters should be
quoted. Integer-valued arguments may be preceded by a unary minus sign. Internally,
integers are treated as 32-bit, 2s complement numbers.
The operators and keywords are listed below. Characters that need to be escaped are
preceded by \. The list is in order of increasing precedence, with equal precedence
operators grouped within { } symbols.
expr \1 expr
Returns the first expr if it is neither null nor 0, otherwise returns the second
expr.
expr \& expr
Returns the first expr if neither expr is null or 0,
otherwise returns O.
expr { =, \>, \>=, \<, \<=, != ) expr
Returns the result of an integer comparison if both arguments are integers, otherwise returns the result of a lexical comparison.
expr { +, - ) expr
Addition or subtraction of integer-valued arguments.
expr { \*, I, % ) expr
Multiplication, division, or remainder of the integer-valued arguments.
expr: expr
The matching operator : compares the first argument with the second argument
which must be a regular expression. Regular expression syntax is the same as
that of ed(1), except that all patterns are "anchored" (i.e., begin with 0) and,
therefore, is not a special character, in that context. Normally, the matching
operator returns the number of characters matched (0 on failure). Alternatively,
the \( .•• \) pattern symbols can be used to return a portion of the first argument.
0

Commands

1-227

SysV

EXPR(l)

EXPR(l)

EXAMPLES

To add 1 to the shell variable a:
a=,expr $a + I,
To return the last segment of a path name (i.e., file). Watch out for I alone as an argument: expr takes it as the division operator (see BUGS below).
, For $a equal to either" lusr/abc/fiJe" or just" file" ,
expr $a : '.*1\('*\)' \1 $a
To retum the number of characters in $VAR:
expr $VAR :

'.*'

BUGS

After argument processing by the shell, expr cannot tell the difference between an
operator and an operand except by the value. If $a is an =, the command:
expr $a - ,-,
looks like:
expr - - as the arguments are passed to expr (and they are all be taken as the = operator). The
following works:
expr X$a = X=
DIAGNOSTICS

As a side effect of expression evaluation, expr returns the following exit values:
o
If the expression is neither null nor 0
1
If the expression is null or 0
2
For invalid expressions.
syntax error
Operator/operand error.
non-numeric argument
Arithmetic was attempted on such a string.
SEE ALSO

ed(l), sh(l).

1-228

Commands

SysV

F77(1)

F77(l)

NAME

r77 - Fortran 77 compiler
SYNOPSIS

f77 [ options ] files
DESCRIPTION

f77 is the UNIX Fortran 77 compiler; it accepts several types of file arguments: Arguments whose names end with .f are taken to be Fortran 77 source programs; they are
compiled, and each object program is left in the curtent directory in a file whose name
is that of the source, with .0 substituted for .f. Arguments whose names end with .r are
taken to be RATFOR source programs. These are first transfortned by the appropriate
preprocessor, then compiled by f77, producing .0 files. Arguments whose names end
with .c are taken to be C source programs and are compiled, producing .0 files. Arguments whose names end with .e or .s ( EFL and assembly source programs) are not supported.
OPTIONS

The following options have the same meaning as in cc(l) (see Jd(l) for link editor
options):
Suppresses link editing and produce .0 files for each source file.

-0

Causes optimized code to be generated.

--Qoutput

Names the final output file output, instead of a.out.

-g

Generates additional infortnation needed for the use of dbx(l).

The following options are peculiar to f77:

-C

Generates code for run-time subscript range checking.

-1[24]

Changes the default size of integer variables (only valid on machines where
the "nortnal" integer size is not equal to the size of a single precision real).
-12 causes all integers to be 2-byte quantities. The default, -14, causes all
integers to be 4-byte quantities. (The -Is option is not supported.)

-v

Prints the version number of the compiler, and the name of each pass as it executes.

-w

Suppresses all waming messages. (-w66 is not supported).

-F

Applies the RATFOR preprocessor to relevant files, puts the result in files
whose names have their suffix changed to .f. (No.o files are created.)

-m

Applies the M4 preprocessor to each RATFOR source file before transfortning
it with the ratfor(l) processor.

-R

The remaining characters in the argument are used as a RATFOR flag argument
whenever processing a .r file.

The following options are not supported in the SysV version of f77: -S, -f, -onetrip,
-I, -66, -U, -u, and -E.
Commands

1-229

F77(1)

SysV

F77(1)

Other arguments are taken to be either link-editor option arguments or t77-compilable
object programs (typically produced by an earlier run), or libraries of t77-compilable
routines. These programs, together with the results of any compilations specified, are
linked (in the order given) to produce an executable program with the default name

a.out.
FILES

file.[frc]
file.o
a.out
lusrlIiblIibF77.a
lusrlIiblIibI77.a
lusr/apollollib/ftn

Input file
Object file
Linked output
Intrinsic function library
Fortran I/O library
Compiler

The following files are not supported:

.Ifort[pid]. ?
lusr/lib/t77passl
lusr/lib/t77pass2
IIib/c2

Temporary
Compiler
Pass 2
Optional optimizer

DIAGNOSTICS
The diagnostics produced by t77 itself are intended to be self-explanatory. Occasional
messages may be produced by the link editor,ld(I).
SEE ALSO
asa(l), cc(l), fsplit(I),ld(l), m4(1), prof(I), ratfor(I), dbx(l).

1-230

Commands

SysV

FACTOR(I)

FACTOR(I)

NAME

factor - obtain the prime factors of a number
SYNOPSIS

factor [ integer 1
DESCRIPTION

When you use factor without an argument, it waits for you to give it an integer. After
you give it a positive integer less than or equal to 10 14 , it factors the integer, prints its
prime factors the proper number of times, and then waits for another integer. factor
exits if it encounters a zero or any non-numeric character.
If you invoke factor with an argument, it factors the integer as described above, and
then it exits.
The maximum time to factor an integer is proportional to
when n is prime or the square of a prime.
DIAGNOSTICS
Ouch

Commands

-vn.

factor takes this time

For input out of range or for garbage input.

1-231

FALSE(l)

SysY

FALSE(l)

NAME

true, false - provide truth values
SYNOPSIS

true
false
DESCRIPTION

true does nothing, successfully. false does nothing, unsuccessfully. They are typically
used in input to sh( 1) such as:
while true
do
command

done
DIAGNOSTICS

true has exit status zero; false has exit status nonzero.
SEE ALSO

sh(1).

1-232

Commands

SysV

FGREP(l)

FGREP(l)

NAME

fgrep - search a file for a character string
SYNOPSIS

fgrep [options] string [file ... ]
DESCRIPTION

fgrep (fast grep) seaches files for a character string and prints all lines that contain that
string. fgrep is different from grep(l) and egrep(l) because it searches for a string,
instead of searching for a pattern that matches an expression. It uses a fast and compact
algorithm.
The characters $, *, [, " I , (, ), and \ are interpreted literally by fgrep, that is, fgrep
does not recognize full regular expressions like egrep does. Since these characters
have special meaning to the shell, it is safest to enclose the entire string in single quotes
I

I

If no files are specified, fgrep assumes standard input. Normally, each line found is
copied to the standard output. The file name is printed before each line found if there is
more than one input file.
OPTIONS

-b

Precedes each line by the block number on which it was found. Useful
in locating block numbers by context (first block is 0).

--c

Prints only a count of the lines that contain the pattern.

-i

Ignores upper/lower case distinction during comparisons.

-I

Prints the names of files with matching lines once, separated by newlines. Does not repeat the names of files when the pattern is found more
than once.

-n
-v
-x

Precedes each line by its line number in the file (first line is 1).
Prints all lines except those that contain the pattern.
Prints only lines matched entirely.

--e special_string

Searches for a special string (string begins with a -).
-f file

Takes the list of strings fromjile.

BUGS
Ideally there should be only one fgrep command, but there is not a single algorithm that
spans a wide enough range of space-time tradeoffs. Lines are limited to BUFSIZ characters; longer lines are truncated. BUFSIZ is defined in lusr/include/stdio.h.

Commands

1-233

FGREP(l)

SysV

FGREP(l)

DIAGNOSTICS

Exit status is 0 if any matches are found, 1 if none, 2 for syntax errors or inaccessible
files (even if matches were found).
SEE ALSO

ed(1), egrep(I), grep(l), sed(1), sh(l).

1-234

Commands

SysV

Fll..E(l)

FILE(l)

NAME
file - detennine file type
SYNOPSIS

file [ -e ] [ -f !file ] [ -m mfile ] arg ...
DESCRIPTION

The file command performs a series of tests on each argument in an attempt to classify
it. If an argument appears to be ASCn, file examines the first 512 bytes and tries to
guess its language. If an argument is an executable a.out, file prints the version stamp,
if it is greater than zero.
The file command uses the file /etc/magic to identify files that have some sort of
"magic number", that is, any file containing a numeric or string constant that indicates
its type. Commentary at the beginning of Jete/magic explains its format.
OPTIONS

Check the magic file for format errors. This validation is not normally
carried out, for efficiency reasons. No file typing is done under-c.
-f!file

Take the next argument to be a file containing the names of the files to
be examined.

-m mfile

Use an alternate magic file, mfile.

Fll..ES

/etc/magic
SEE ALSO

filehdr(4)

Commands

1-235

SysV

FIND(l)

FIND(l)

NAME

find - find files
SYNOPSIS

find path-name-list expression
DESCRIPTION

find recursively descends the directory hierarchy for each pathname in the path-namelist, seeking files that match a Boolean expression written in the primaries given below.
The Sys V implementation of find does not follow symbolic links.
EXPRESSIONS

(In the descriptions below, the argument n is used as a decimal integer where +n means
more than n, -n means less than n, and n means exactly n).
-name file

True iffile matches the current filename. Normal shell argument
syntax may be used if escaped, but watch out for [, ? and *.

-perm anum

True if the file permission flags exactly match the octal number
anum. If anum is prefixed by a minus sign, only the bits that are
set in anum are compared with the file permission flags, and the
expression evaluates true if they match. Information about file
permissions is found in ehmod(l).

-type c

True if the type of the file is c, where c is b (block special file), C
(character special file), d (directory), p (FIFO, or named pipe), f
(plain file), or I (softlink).

-links n

True if the file has n links.

-user uname

True if the file belongs to the user uname. If uname is numeric
and does not appear as a log-in name in the /ete/passwd file, it is
taken as a user ID.

-group gname

True if the file belongs to the group gname. If gname is numeric
and does not appear in the jete/group file, it is taken as a group

-size n[e)

True if the file is n blocks long (1024 bytes per block). If n is
followed by a e, the size is in characters.

-atime n

True if the file has been accessed in n days. The access time of
directories in path-name-list is changed by find itself.

ID.

1-236

-mtimen

True if the file has been modified in n days.

-ctime n

True if the file has been changed in n days.

-exec cmd

True if the executed cmd returns a zero value as exit status. The
end of cmd must be punctuated by an escaped semicolon. A
command argument {} is replaced by the current pathname.

Commands

FIND(l)

SysV

FIND(l)

-ok cmd

Like -exec, except this prints the generated command line with a
question mark first, and executes only if you respond by typing y.

-print

Always true; print the current pathname.

-epio device

Always true; write the current file on device in cpio(4) format
(5l20-byte records).

-newer file

True if the current file has been modified more recently than the
argument file.

-depth

Always true; descend the directory hierarchy so that all entries in
a directory are acted on before the directory itself. Can be useful
when find is used with cpio(l) to transfer files contained in
directories without write permission.

-mount

Always true; restricts the search to the file system containing the
directory specified, or if no directory was specified, the current
directory.

-local

True if the file physically resides on the local system. Note: This
expression has no effect on Apollo systems.

( expression)

True if a parenthetical expression is true (parentheses are special
to the shell and must be escaped).

OPERATORS

The primaries listed above may be combined using the following operators (in order of
decreasing precedence):
1)

The negation of a primary (! is the unary not operator).

2)

Concatenation of primaries (the and operation is implied by the juxtaposition of
two primaries).

3)

Alternation of primaries (-0 is the or operator).

EXAMPLE

To remove all files named a.out or *.0 that have not been accessed for a week:

# find I \( -name a.out -0 -name '*.0' \) -atime +7 -exec rm {} \;
FILES

letc/passwd
letc/group
BUGS

find I I.depth always fails with the message:
find: stat failed:

: No such file or directoLY

SEE ALSO

chmod (1), epio (1), sh (1), test (1), stat (2), umask (2), epio (4).
Commands

1-237

SysV

FINGER(l)

FINGER(l)

NAME

finger - user infonnation lookup program
SYNOPSIS

finger [ options] name ...
DESCRIPTION

By default finger lists the log-in name, full name, tenninal name and write status (as a
•• *" before the tenninal name if write pennission is denied), idle time, log-in time, and
office location and phone number (if they are known) for each current user. (Idle time
is minutes if it is a single integer, hours and minutes if a ":" is present, or days and
hours if a "d" is present.)
A longer fonnat also exists and is used by finger whenever you specify a list of
people's names. Account names as well as users' first and last names are accepted.
This fonnat is multiline, and includes all the infonnation described above as well as the
user's home directory and log-in shell, any plan which the person has placed in the file
.plan in his home directory, and the project he is working on from the file .project, also
in the home directory.
finger can be used to look up users on a remote machine. Specify the user as
•• user@host". If you omit the usemame, finge r provides the standard fonnat listing on
the remote machine.
OPTIONS

-m

Match arguments only on usemame.

-1

Force long output fonnat.

-p

Suppress printing of the .plan files

-s

Force short output fonnat.

FILES

letc/utmp
letc/passwd
lusr/adrn/lastlog
-I.plan
-I.project

who file
For users names, offices, ...
Last log-in times
Plans
Projects

NOTES

finger perfonns poorly in large registries, unless you use the -m option.
BUGS
finger prints only the first line of the .project file.
The encoding of the gcos field is UCB dependent.
You cannot pass arguments to the remote machine, as finger uses an internet standard
port.

1-238

Commands

FINGER(l)

SysV

FINGER(l)

A user infonnation database is in the works and will radically alter the way the infonnation that finger uses is stored. finger will require extensive modification when this is
implemented.
Domain/OS does not support /usr/adm/lastlog.
SEE ALSO

chfn(l), who(l)

Commands

1-239

Domain/OS SysV

NAME
french_to_iso - convert files to ISO format
SYNOPSIS
french_to _iso

inputJrle outputJrle

DESCRIPTION
These utilities convert files written with the overloaded 7-bit national fonts to the Internation Standards Organization (ISO) 8-bit format. The overloaded fonts include any
with a specific language suffix (for example, f7xI3.french, or din_f7xll.german). If
you created and/or edited a file using one of the national fonts, that file is a candidate
for conversion.
You are not required to convert files, but probably will want to because
1.

The overloaded fonts replace certain ASCII characters with national ones, have that
subset of ASCn characters and the national characters in one file. The 8-bit fonts
available as of SRlO include all the ASCII characters and the national characters.

2.

The 8-bit fonts also include a wider range of national characters, so you can enter
any character in any western European language. This was not always possible
with the overloaded fonts. For example, there was not enough space in the overloaded font to include all the French characters, but they all exist in the 8-bit fonts.

There are two parameters to the conversion utilities. You must provide the name of the
file you want to convert (inputJrle) and your outputJrle. If outputJrle already exists,
the utilities abort.
The default location for the utilities is /usr/apollo/bin.
FILES
/usr/apollo/bin/french_to)so

Converts overloaded French to ISO format

/usr/apollo/bin/german _to _iso

Converts overloaded German to ISO format

/usr/apollo/bin/nor.dan_to_iso

Converts overloaded Norwegian/Danish to ISO format

/usr/apollo/bin/swedish _to _iso

Converts overloaded Swedish/Finnish to ISO format

/usr/apollo/bin/swiss_to _iso

Converts overloaded Swiss to ISO format

/usr/apollo/bin/uk_to _iso

Converts overloaded U.K. English to ISO format

DIAGNOSTICS
All messages are generally self-explanatory.

1-240

Commands

SysV

FSPLIT(l)

FSPLIT(l)

NAME

fsplit - split FORTRAN or ratfor files
SYNOPSIS

fsplit options flies
DESCRIPTION

The fsplit command splits the namedflle(s) into separate files, with one procedure per
file. A procedure includes block data, function, main, program, and subroutine program segments. Normally, procedure X is put in file X.f or X.r, depending on the
language option chosen. The following exceptions apply: main is put in the file
MAIN.[fr], and unnamed blockdata segments in the files blockdataN.[fr] (where N is a
unique integer value for each file).
OPTIONS

-f

Uses FORTRAN source program files as input.

-r

Uses ratfor(l) source program files as input.

-s

Strips FORTRAN input lines to 72 or fewer characters with trailing
blanks removed.

SEE ALSO

csplit (1), ratfor (1), split (1).

Commands

1-241

FST(I)

FST(I)

Domain/OS SysV

NAME

fst - print fault status information
SYNOPSIS

fst [ [-s] [-r]

I [-a]

] [-u n]

DESCRIPTION

fst prints information about the most recent fault that occurred in the process. The
information always includes the fault status, the program counter (PC) at which the
fault occurred, and a textual description of the error as reported by the system call
error_$print. fst is intended for system-level debugging.
If you are using a Peripheral Bus Unit (PBU) device, you can get fault information by
using the -u option (see below).

fst is obsolete and is valid only when running in INPROCESS compatibility mode with
the in process variable set and all commands running in-process. Use the command tb
-full instead of fst.
OPTIONS

-r

Print the contents of the CPU general registers when the fault occurred.

-s

Print the supervisor PC, entry control block (ECB), and status register (SR) if
the fault occurred in supervisor mode. This option is ignored if the fault
occurred in user mode.

-a

Print all available fault information. (Prints the same information as both -s
and-r.)

-u n

Print the same information as both -s and -r for faults caused by the PBU
interrupt handler for unit n.

EXAMPLES
$ fst-a

Fault Diagnostic Information
Fault Status
00120010:
process quit (from as I fault handler)
User Fault PC = 000157FC
00-07: 00120010 00000000 00000002 FFFFFFFE 00000008 00000006 \
00000182 00000004
AO-A7: 0020A452 00E2F22E 0020A3D4 0020A450 00E2F174 0000C92C \
002746B4 002746AC
Supervisor ECB
00000000
Supervisor SR
0000
Supervisor PC
00000000

1-242

Commands

SysV

FTP(lC)

FTP(lC)

NAME

ftp - ARPANET file transfer program
SYNOPSIS

rtp [ -v ] [ -d ] [ -i ] [ -n ] [ -g ] [ host ]
DESCRIPTION

rtp is the user interface to the ARPANET standard File Transfer Protocol (FTP). The
program allows you to transfer files to and from a remote network site.
You can specify the client host with which ftp is to communicate on the command line.
If you do, ftp inunediately attempts to establish a connection to an FTP server on that
host; otherwise, ftp enters its command interpreter and awaits instructions from you.
When ftp is awaiting commands from you, it displays the prompt "ftp>".
OPTIONS

You can specify options on the command line, or to the command interpreter.

-v

(verbose on) Forces ftp to show all responses from the remote server, as
well as report on data transfer statistics.

-n

Restrains ftp from attempting "auto-login" on initial connection. If
auto-login is enabled, ftp checks the .netrc (see below) file in your home
directory for an entry describing an account on the remote machine. If
no entry exists, ftp prompts for the remote machine log-in name (the
default is the user identity on the local machine), and, if necessary,
prompts for a password and an account with which to log in.

-i

Turns off interactive prompting during multiple file transfers.

-d

Enables debugging.

-g

Disables filename globbing.

COMMANDS
! [command [ args ] ]
Invoke an interactive shell on the local machine. If you specify arguments, ftp takes the first to be a command to execute directly, with the
rest of the arguments as its arguments.

$ macro-name [ args ]
Execute the macro macro-name that was defined with the macdef command. Arguments are passed to the macro unglobbed.
account [passwd ]
Supply a supplemental password required by a remote system for access
to resources once a login has been successfully completed. If you do not
specify an argument, rtp prompts you for an account password in a nonechoing input mode.
append local-file [ remote-file]
Append a local file to a file on the remote machine. If you do not specify
Commands

1-243

SysV

FrP(lC)

FrP(lC)

remote-file, ftp uses the local filename, after applying the changes
required by any ntrans or nmap setting, to name the remote file. ftp
uses the current settings for type, form, mode, and structure.

ascii

Set the file transfer type to network ASCII. This is the default type.

bell

Arrange that a bell be sounded after each file transfer command is completed.

binary

Set the file transfer type to support binary image transfer.

bye

Terminate the FTP session with the remote server and exit ftp. An endof-file also tenninates the session and exits.

case

Toggle remote computer filename case-mapping during mget commands. When case is on (the default is off), remote computer filenames
with all letters in uppercase are written in the local directory with the
letters mapped to lowercase.

cd remote-directory
Change the working directory on the remote machine to remotedirectory.
cdup

Change the remote-machine working directory to the parent of the
current remote-machine working directory.

close

Tenninate the FTP session with the remote server, and return to the command interpreter. Any defined macros are erased.

cr

Toggle carriage-return stripping during ASCII-type file retrieval.
Records are denoted by a carriage-retum/linefeed sequence during
ASCII-type file transfer. When cr is on (the default), carriage returns are
stripped from this sequence to conform with the UNIX single-line feed
record delimiter. Records on non-UNIX remote systems may contain
single linefeeds; when an ASCII-type transfer is made, you can distinguish these linefeeds from a record delimiter only when cr is off.

delete remote-file
Delete the file remote-jile on the remote machine.
debug [ debug-value 1
Toggle debugging mode. If you specify an optional debug-value, ftp
uses it to set the debugging level. When debugging is on, ftp prints each
command sent to the remote machine, preceded by the string "-->".
dir [ remote-directory 1[ local-file 1
Print a listing of the directory contents in the directory, remotedirectory, and, optionally, place the output in local-file. If you do not
specify a directory, ftp uses the current working directory on the remote
machine. If you do not specify a local file, or local-file is -, ftp sends
output to the tenninal.

1-244

Commands

SysY

FJ'P(1C)

disconnect

FJ'P(1C)

A synonym for close.

form/onnat Set the file transfer form t%rmat. The default and only supported format is file.

get remote-file [ local-file]
Retrieve the remote-file and store it on the local machine. If you do nt
specify the local filename, ftp gives it the same name it has on the
remote machine, subject to alteration by the current case, ntrans, and
nmap settings. ftp uses the current settings for type, form, mode, and
structure while transferring the file.
glob

Toggle filename expansion for mdelete, mget and mput. If you tum
globbing off with glob, ftp takes the filename arguments literally and
does not expand them. Globbing for mput is done as in csh(l). For
mdelete and mget, each remote filename is expanded separately on the
remote machine and the lists are not merged. Expansion of a directory
name is likely to be different from expansion of an ordinary filename:
the exact result depends on the foreign operating system and FrP server,
You can preview the results by executing 'mlsremote-files-'. Note:
mget and mput are not meant to transfer entire directory subtrees of
files. You can do that by transferring a tar(1) archive of the subtree (in
binary mode).

hash

Toggle hash-sign (#) printing for each data block transferred. The size
of a data block is 1024 bytes.

help [ command ]
Print an informative message about the meaning of command. If you do
not specify an argument, ftp prints a list of the known commands.
Icd [ directory ]
Change the working directory on the local machine. If you do not
specify a directory, ftp uses your home directory.
Is [ remote-directory ] [ local-file]
Print an abbreviated listing of the contents of a directory on the remote
machine. If you do not specify remote-directory , ftp uses the current
working directory. If you do not specify a local file, or if local-file is -,
ftp sends the output to the terminal.
macdef macro-name
Define a macro. Subsequent lines are stored as the macro macro-name;
a null line (consecutive newline characters in a file or carriage returns
from the terminal) terminates macro input mode. There is a limit of 16
macros and 4096 total characters in all defined macros. Macros remain
defined until you execute a close command. The macro processor interprets '$' and '\' as special characters. A '$' followed by a number (or
numbers) is replaced by the corresponding argument on the macroCommands

1-245

FI'P(1C)

SysV

FI'P(1C)

invocation command line. A '$' followed by an 'i' signals that macro
processor that the executing macro is to be looped. On the first pass '$i'
is replaced by the first argument on the macro-invocation command line,
on the second pass it is replaced by the second argument, and so on. A
'\' followed by any character is replaced by that character. Use the '\' to
prevent special treatment of the '$'.
mdelete [ remote-files ]
Delete the remote-files on the remote machine.
mdir remote-files local-file
This command works like dir, except that you can specify multiple
remote files. If interactive prompting is on, ftp prompts you to verify
that the last argument is indeed the target local file for receiving mdir
output.
mget remote-files
Expand the remote-files on the remote machine and execute a get for
each filename thus produced. See glob for details on the filename
expansion. Resulting filenames are then processed according to case,
ntrans, and nmap settings. Files are transferred into the local working
directory, which you can change with 'led directory'; You can create
new local directories with '! mkdir directory'.
mkdir directory-name
Make a directory on the remote machine.
mls remote-files local-file
This command is like Is, except that you can specify multiple remote
files. If interactive prompting is on, ftp prompts you to verify that the
last argument is indeed the target local file for receiving mls output.
mode [ mode-name]
Set the file transfer mode to mode-name. The default and only supported mode-name is stream.
mput local-files
Expand wildcards in the list of local files given as arguments and execute a put for each file in the resulting list. See glob for details of
filename expansion. Resulting filenames are then processed according to
ntrans and nmap settings.
nmap [ inpattern outpattern ]
Set or unset the filename-mapping mechanism. If you do not specify an
argument, the filename-mapping mechanism is unset. If you specify an
argument, nmap maps remote filenames during mput commands and
put commands issued without a specified remote-target filename. and
maps local filenames during mget commands and get commands issued
without a specified local-target filename. This command is useful when

1-246

Commands

SysV

FfP(lC)

FfP(1C)

you are connecting to a non-UNIX remote computer with different filenaming conventions or practices.
The mapping follows the pattern set by inpattern and outpattern . Inpattern is a template for incoming filenames (which may have already been
processed according to the ntrans and case settings). Include the
sequences '$1'. '$2' •...• '$9' in inpattern. if you want variable templating. Use '\' to prevent this special treatment of the '$' character. nmap
treats all other characters literally. and uses them to determine the nmap
inpattern variable values. For example. given inpattern $1.$2 and the
remote filename "mydata.data". $1 has the value "mydata". and $2 has
the value "data".
The outpattern determines the resulting mapped filename. The
sequences '$1'. '$2' •....• '$9' are replaced by any value resulting from
the inpattern template. The sequence '$0' is replaced by the original
filename. Additionally. the sequence ·[seqI.seq2]' is replaced by seqi if
seqi is not a null string; otherwise it is replaced by seq2. For example.
the command nmap $1.$2.$3 [$1,$2].[$2,file] yields the output filename
myfile.data for input filenames my file. data and myfile.data.old.
myfile.file for the input filename myfile; and myfile.myfile for the input
filename .myfile. You can include spaces in outpattern. as in the example: nmap $1 Ised "s/ *$//" > $1 . Use the '\' character to prevent special treatment of the '$'. '['. T. and',' characters.
ntrans [ inehars [ outehars ]]
Set or unset the filename-character-translation mechanism. If you do not
specify an argument. the filename-character-translation mechanism is
unset. If you specify an argument. ntrans translates characters in remote
filenames during mput commands and put commands issued without a
specified remote-target filename. and translates characters in local
filenames during mget commands and get commands issued without a
specified local-target filename.
This command is useful when you are connecting to a non-UNIX remote
computer with different file-naming conventions or practices. ntrans
replaces characters in a filename matching a character in inehars with
the corresponding character in olttehars. If the character' s position in
inehars is longer than the length of ol/tehars. ntrans deletes the character from the filename.
open host [port]
Establish a connection to the specified host FfP server. You can specify
an optional port number. in which case rtp attempts to contact an FfP
server at that port. If the auto-login option is on (default). rtp also
Commands

1-247

SysV

FTP(1C)

FTP(lC)

attempts to automatically log you in to the FI'P server (see below).
prompt

Toggle interactive prompting. Interactive prompting occurs during multiple file transfers to allow you to selectively retrieve or store files. If
prompting is turned off (default is on), any mget or mput transfers all
files, and any mdelete deletes all files.

proxy ftp-command
Execute an ftp command on a secondary control connection. This command allows you to connect simultaneously to two remote FI'P servers
for transferring files between them. The first proxy command should be
an open, to establish the secondary control connection. Enter the command proxy ? to see other ftp commands executable on the secondary
connection. The following commands behave differently when prefaced
by proxy: open does not define new macros during the auto-login process, close does not erase existing macro definitions, get and mget
transfer files from the host on the primary control connection to the host
on the secondary control connection, and put, mput, and append
transfer files from the host on the secondary control connection to the
host on the primary control connection. Third-party file transfers depend
upon support of the FI'P protocol PASV command by the server on the
secondary control connection.
put local-file [ remote-file 1
Store a local file on the remote machine. If you do not specify remotefile, put uses the local filename after processing according to any ntrans
or nmap settings in naming the remote file. ftp uses the current settings
for type, form, mode, and structure.
pwd

Print the name of the current working directory on the remote machine.

quit

This is a synonym for bye.

quote argl arg2 ...
This command sends the arguments you specify, verbatim, to the remote
FI'P server.
recv remote-file [ local-file 1
This is a synonym for get.
remote help [ command-name 1
Request help from the remote FI'P server. If a command-name is
specified it is supplied to the server as well.
rename [from 1[to 1
Rename the file from on the remote machine, to the file to.
reset

1-248

Clear the reply queue. This command resynchronizes command/reply
sequencing with the remote FI'P server. Resynchronization may be
necessary following a violation of the FI'P protocol by the remote server.
Commands

SysV

FfP(lC)

FfP(lC)

rmdir directory-name
Delete the specified directory on the remote machine.
runique

Toggle storing of files on the local system with unique filenames. If a
file already exists with a name equal to the target local filename for a get
or mget command, runique appends a.l to the name. If the resulting
name matches another existing file, runique appends a .2 to the original
name. If this process continues up to .99, runique prints an error message. ftp does not execute the transfer, and reports the generated unique
filename. Note that runique does not affect local files generated from a
shell command (see below). The default value is off.

send local-file [ remote-file 1
This is a synonym for put.
sendport

Toggle the use of PORT commands. By default, ftp attempts to use a
PORT command when establishing a connection for each data transfer.
The use of PORT commands can prevent delays when you perform multiple file transfers. If the PORT command fails, ftp uses the default data
port. When the use of PORT commands is disabled,ftp does not attempt
to use PORT commands for each data transfer. This is useful for certain
FrP implementations that ignore PORT commands but indicate,
incorrectly, that they are accepted.

status

Show the current status of ftp.

struct [ struct-name 1
Set the file transfer structure to struct-name; either stream or record.
By default, struct uses stream structure.
sunique

Toggle storing of files on remote machine under unique filenames. The
remote FrP server must support the FrP protocol STOU command for
successful completion. The remote server reports unique names. The
default value is off.

tenex

Set the file transfer type to that needed to talk to TENEX machines.

trace

Toggle packet tracing.

type [type-name 1
Set the file transfer type to type-name; one of ascii, binary, image, or
tenex. If you do not specify a type, type prints the current type. The
default type is ascii (network ASCII).
user user-name [password 1[account 1
Identify yourself to the remote FrP server. If the password is not
specified and the server requires it, ftp will prompt the user for it (after
disabling local echo). If the FrP server requires an account field and
you do not specify it, ftp prompts for it. If you specify an account field,
ftp relays an account command to the remote server after the log-in
Commands

1-249

SysV

FfP(lC)

FfP(lC)

sequence is completed, if the remote server did not require it for logging
in. Unless you invoke ftp with "auto-login" disabled, ftp executes this
process automatically, on initial connection to the FrP server.
Toggle verbose mode. In verbose mode, ftp displays all responses from
the FrP server and also reports statistics regarding the efficiency of a file
transfer, when the transfer completes. By default, verbose is on.

verbose

? [command]
This is a synonym for help.
You can enclose command arguments that have embedded spaces in quotation (")
marks.
ABORTING A FILE TRANSFER

Use the terminal interrupt key (usually CTRL/C) to abort a file transfer. ftp immediately stops sending transfers. You can stop receiving transfers by sending a FrP protocol ABOR command to the remote server and discarding any further data received. The
speed at which this is accomplished depends on the remote server's support for ABOR
processing. If the remote server does not support the ABOR command, an "ftp>"
prompt does not appear until the remote server has completed sending the requested
file.
The terminal interrupt key sequence is ignored when ftp has completed any local processing and is awaiting a reply from the remote server. A long delay in this mode may
result from the ABOR processing described above, or from unexpected behavior by the
remote server, including violations of the FrP protocol. If the delay results from unexpected remote server behavior, you mustkill the local ftp program by hand.
FILE-NAMING CONVENTIONS

ftp processes files that you specify as arguments according to the following rules:

1-250

1)

If you specify the filename as a dash (-), ftp uses stdin (for reading) or stdout
(for writing).

2)

If the first character of the filename is "I", ftp interprets the remainder of the
argument as a shell command, then forks a shell, using popen(3) with the
argument you specify, and reads (writes) from stdout (stdin). If the shell
command includes spaces, you must enclose the argument in quotation marks;
for example, "" lis -It" ". A particularly useful example of this mechanism is
"dir Imore".

3)

Failing the above checks, if globbing is enabled, ftp expands local filenames
according to the rules used in the csh(l); see the glob command for a comparison. If ftp expects a single local file (for example, put), it uses only the
first filename generated by the" globbing" operation.

Commands

SysV

FfP(lC)

FfP(lC)

4)

For mget commands and get commands with unspecified local filenames, the
local filename is the remote filename, that a case, ntrans, or nmap setting can
change. The remote server can then change the resulting filename, if runique
is on.

5)

For mput commands and put commands with unspecified remote filenames,
the remote filename is the local filename, that a ntrans or nmap setting can
change. he remote server can then change the resulting filename, if sunique is
on.

FILE TRANSFER PARAMETERS

The FrP specification specifies many parameters that may affect a file transfer. The
type can be one of ascii, image (binary), ebcdic, and local byte size. ftp supports the
ascii and image types of file transfer, plus local byte size 8 for tenex mode transfers.
ftp supports only the default values for the remaining file transfer parameters: mode,
form, and struct.
THE .netre FILE
The .netrc file contains log-in and initialization information used by the auto-login process. It resides in your home directory ..netrc recognizes the following tokens; you can
separate them by spaces, tabs, or newlines:
machine name

Identify a remote machine name. The auto-login process
searches the .netrc file for a machine token that matches the
remote machine specified on the ftp command line or as an open
command argument. Once a match is made, the subsequent
.netrc tokens are processed, stopping when the end-of-file is
reached or another machine token is encountered.

login name

Identify a user on the remote machine. If this token is present,
the auto-login process initiates a login using the specified name.

password string

Supply a password. If this token is present, the auto-login process supplies the string if the remote server requires a password
as part of the log-in process. Note that if this token is present in
the .netrc file, ftp aborts the auto-login process if the .netrc is
readable by anyone besides the user.

account string

Supply an additional account password. If this token is present.
the auto-login process supplies the string if the remote servel
requires an additional account password, or the auto-login pro·
cess initiates an ACCT command if it does not.

Commands

1-25:

SysV

FfP(IC)

macdef name

FfP(lC)

Define a macro. This token functions like the ftp macdef command functions. A macro is defined with the specified name; its
contents begin with the next .net rc line and continue until a null
line (consecutive new-line characters) is encountered. If a macro
named init is defined, ftp automatically executes it as the last
step in the auto-login process.

BUGS
Correct execution of many conunands depends upon proper behavior by the remote
server.
An error in the treatment of carriage returns in the 4.2BSD UNIX ASCII-mode transfer

code has been corrected. This correction may result in incorrect transfers of binary files
to and from 4.2BSD servers using the ASCII type. Avoid this problem by using the
binary image type.

1-252

Conunands

GDEV(lG)

SysV

GDEV(lG)

NAME
gdev: hpd, erase, hardcopy, tekset, td - graphical device routines and filters
SYNOPSIS
hpd [ - options] [GPS file . .. ]
erase
hardcopy
tekset
td [-ernn] [GPS file . .. ]
DESCRIPTION
All of the commands described below reside in /usr/bin/graf (see graphics(lG».
hpd

Translate a GPS (graphical primitive string; see gps(4» to instructions for
the Hewlett-Packard 7221A Graphics Plotter. A viewing window is computed from the maximum and minimum points in file unless the -u or -r
option is provided. If no file is given, the standard input is assumed.
hpd Options
cn

Select character set n, n between 0 and 5.

pn

Select pen numbered n, n between 1 and 4 inclusive.

rn

Window on GPS region n, n between 1 and 25 inclusive.

sn

Slant characters n degrees clockwise from the vertical.

u

Window on the entire GPS universe.

xdn Set x displacement of the viewport's lower left comer to n inches.
xvn

Set width of viewport to n inches.

ydn

Set y displacement of the viewport's lower left comer to n inches.

yvn

Set height of viewport to n inches.

erase

Send characters to a Tektronix 4010 series storage terminal to erase the
screen.

hardcopy

When issued at a Tektronix display terminal with a hard copy unit, hard·
copy generates a screen copy on the unit.

tekset

Send characters to a Tektronix terminal to clear the display screen, set thl
display mode to alpha, and set characters to the smallest font.

Commands

1-25

SysV

GDEV(lG)

td

GDEV(lG)

Translate a GPS to scope code for a Tektronix 4010 series storage tenninal.
A viewing window is computed from the maximum and minimum points in
file unless the -u or -r option is provided. If no file is given, the standard
input is assumed.
td Options
e

Do not erase screen before initiating display.

rn

Display GPS region n, n between I and 25 inclusive.

u

Display the entire GPS universe.

SEE ALSO

graphics( I G).
gps(4) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

1-254

Commands

Domain/OS SysV

NAME

german_to_iso - convert files to ISO fonnat
SYNOPSIS

german_to_iso inputJzle outputJzle
DESCRIPTION

These utilities convert files written with the overloaded 7-bit national fonts to the Internation Standards Organization (ISO) 8-bit fonnat. The overloaded fonts include any
with a specific language suffix (for example, f7x13.french, or din_f7xll.german). If
you created and/or edited a file using one of the national fonts, that file is a candidate
for conversion.
You are not required to convert files, but probably will want to because

1.

The overloaded fonts replace certain ASCII characters with national ones, have that
subset of ASCII characters and the national characters in one file. The 8-bit fonts
available as of SRIO include all the ASCII characters and the national characters.

2.

The 8-bit fonts also include a wider range of national characters, so you can enter
any character in any western European language. This was not always possible
with the overloaded fonts. For example, there was not enough space in the overloaded font to include all the French characters, but they all exist in the 8-bit fonts.

There are two parameters to the conversion utilities. You must provide the name of the
file you want to convert (inputJzle) and your outputJzle. If outputJzle already exists,
the utilities abort.
The default location for the utilities is /usr/apollo/bin.
FILES

/usr/apollo/bin/french_to_iso

Converts overloaded French to ISO format

/usr/apollo/bin/german _ to_iso

Converts overloaded Gennan to ISO fonnat

/usr/apollo/bin/nor.dan_to_iso

Converts overloaded Norwegian/Danish to ISO format

/usr/apollo/bin/swedish_to_iso

Converts overloaded Swedish/Finnish to ISO format

/usr/apollo/bin/swiss_to_iso

Converts overloaded Swiss to ISO fonnat

/usr/apollo/bin/uk_ to _iso

Converts overloaded U.K. English to ISO fonnat

DIAGNOSTICS

All messages are generally self-explanatory.

Commands

1-25~

SysV

GET(l)

GET(l)

NAME
get - get a version of an sees file
SYNOPSIS

get [-rSID] [-ccutoff] [-ilist] [-xlist] [-wstring] [-aseq-no.] [-k] [-e] [-l[pJ] [-p]
[-m] [-n] [-s] [-b] [-g] [-t] file . ..
DESCRIPTION

get generates an ASCII text file from each named sees file according to the
specifications given by its options, which begin with -. You can specify options in any
order, but all options apply to all named sees files. If a directory is named, get behaves
as though each file in the directory were specified as a named file, except that non-SeeS
files (last component of the path name does not begin with s.) and unreadable files are
silently ignored. If a name of - is given, the standard input is read; each line of the
standard input is taken to be the name of an sees file to be processed. Again, nonsees files and unreadable files are silently ignored.
The generated text is nonnally written into a file called the g-fiIe whose name is
derived from the sees filename by simply removing the leading s.; (see also FILES,
below).
Each of the options is explained below as though only one sees file is to be processed,
but the effects of any option applies independently to each named file.
OPTIONS

-rSID

The ees IDentification string (SID) of the version (delta) of an sees file
to be retrieved. Table 1 shows, for the most useful cases, what version
of an sees file is retrieved (as well as the SID of the version to be eventually created by deJta(l) if the -e option is also used), as a function of
the SID specified.

-ccutoff

Cutoff date-time, in the fonn IT[MM[DD[HH[MM[SSlllll No changes
(deltas) to the sees file which were created after the specified cutoff
date-time are included in the generated ASCII text file. Units omitted
from the date-time default to their maximum possible values; that is,
-c7502 is equivalent to -c750228235959. Any number of non-numeric
characters may separate the various 2-digit pieces of the cutoff date-time.
This feature allows you to specify a cutoff date in the fonn: "-c77/2/2
9:22:25". Note this implies that you can use the %E% and %U%
identification keywords (see below) for nested gets within, say the input
to a send(lC) command:

-ilist

Forces a list of deltas to be included in the creation of the generated file.

-!get "-c%E% %U%" s.fiIe

The list has the following syntax:

1-256

Commands

GET(l)

SysV

GET(l)

 ::=  I , 
 ::= SID I SID - SID
SID, the sees Identification of a delta, can be in any fonn shown in the
"SID Specified" column of Table 1.

-xlist

Forces a list of deltas to be excluded in the creation of the generated file.
See the -i option for the list fonnat.

--e

Indicates the get is for the purpose of editing or making a change (delta)
to the sees file with the subsequent use of deJta(I). The --e option used
in a get for a particular version (SID) of the sees file prevents further
gets from editing on the same SID until the delta is executed or the j
(joint edit) flag is set in the sees file (see admin(l». Concurrent use of
get -e for different SIDs is always allowed.
If the g-file generated by get with an -e option is accidentally ruined in
the process of editing it, you can regenerate it by re-executing the get
command with the -k option in place of the --e option.

sees file

protection specified by the ceiling, floor, and authorized user
list stored in the sees file (see admin(l» are enforced when the --e
option is used.

-b

Used with the --e option to indicate that the new delta should have an
SID in a new branch as shown in Table 1. This option is ignored if the b
flag is not present in the file (see admin(l» or if the retrieved delta is not
a leaf delta. (A leaf delta is one that has no successors on the sees file
tree.)
Note: You can always create a branch delta from a non-leaf delta. Partial SIDs are interpreted as shown in the "SID Retrieved" column of
Table 1.

-k

Suppresses replacement of identification keywords (see below) in the
retrieved text by their value. The -k option is implied by the --e option.

-I[p]

Causes a delta summary to be written into an I-file. If -Ip is used then
an I-file is not created; the delta summary is written on the standard output instead. See FILES for the fonnat of the I-file.

-p

Causes the text retrieved from the sees file to be written on the standard
output. No g-file is created. All output which nonnally goes to the
standard output goes to file descriptor 2 instead, unless the -s option is
used, in which case it disappears.

-s

Suppresses all output nonnally written on the standard output. However, fatal error messages (which always go to file descriptor 2) remain
unaffected.

Conunands

1-257

SysV

GET(l)

GET(l)

-m

Causes each text line retrieved from the sees file to be preceded by the
SID of the delta that inserted the text line in the sees file. The format is:
SID, followed by a horizontal tab, followed by the text line.

-n

Causes each generated text line to be preceded with the %M%
identification keyword value (see below). The format is: %M% value,
followed by a horizontal tab, followed by the text line. When both the
-m and -n options are used, the format is: %M% value, followed by a
horizontal tab, followed by the -m option generated format.

-g

Suppresses the actual retrieval of text from the sees file. It is primarily
used to generate an I-file, or to verify the existence of a particular SID.

-t

Accesses the most recently created delta in a given release (e.g., -rl), or
release and level (e.g., -r1.2).

-w string

Substitutes string for all occurrences of %W% when getting the file.

-aseq-no.

The delta sequence number of the sees file delta (version) to be
retrieved (see sccsfile(5». This option is used by the comb(l) command; it is not a generally useful option. If both the -r and -a options
are specified, only -a is used. Take care when using -a in conjunction
with -e, as the SID of the delta to be created may not be what you
expect. -r can be used with -a and -e to control the naming of the SID
of the delta to be created.

For each file processed, get responds (on the standard output) with the SID being
accessed and with the number of lines retrieved from the sees file.
If -e is used, the SID of the delta to be made appears after the SID accessed and before
the number of lines generated. If there is more than one named file or if a directory or
standard input is named, each filename is printed (preceded by a new-line) before it is
processed. If -i is used included deltas are listed following the notation "Included"; if
-x is used, excluded deltas are listed following the notation "Excluded".

1-258

Commands

GET(l)

SysV

GET(l)

TABLE 1. Detennination of sees Identification String
SID*
Specified
none:l:
none:l:
R
R
R
R

-b Option
Usedt

Other
Conditions

no
yes
no
no
yes
yes

R defaults to mR
R defaults to mR

mR.mL
mR.mL

SID of Delta
to be Created
mR.(mL+l)
mR.mL.(mB+l).l

R>mR
R=mR
R>mR
R=mR
R R
and R exists

mR.mL
mR.mL
mR.mL
mR.mL

RI***
mR.(mL+l)
mR.mL.(mB+I).1
mR.mL.(mB+l).1

hR.mL**

hR.mL.(mB+l).l

RmL

R.mL.(mB+l).1

No trunk succ.
No trunk succ.
Trunk succ.
in release ~ R
No branch succ.
No branch succ.

R.L
R.L

R.(L+l)
R.L.(mB+l).l

R.L

R.L.(mB+l).1

R.L.B.mS
R.L.B.mS

No branch succ.
No branch succ.
Branch succ.

R.L.B.S
R.L.B.S
R.L.B.S

R.L.B.(mS+l)
R.L.(mB+l).1
R.L.B.(S+I)
R.L.(mB+l).l
R.L.(mB+l).1

R
R
no
yes

R.L
RL
RL

no
yes
no
yes

RL.B
R.L.B
R.L.B.S
R.L.B.S
R.L.B.S

SID
Retrieved

"R", "L", °B", and US" are the "release", "level", "branch", and
"sequence" components of the SID, respectively; "m" means "maximum".
Thus, for example, "R.mL" means "the maximum level number within release
R"; "R.L.(mB+l).I" means "the first sequence number on the new branch (i.e.,
maximum branch number plus one) of level L within release R". Note that if the
SID specified is of the fonn "R.L", "RL.B", or "RL.B.S", each of the
specified components must exist.
** "hR" is the highest existing release that is lower than the specified, nonexistent,
release R.
*** This is used to force creation of the first delta in a new release.
Successor.
#
t
The -b option is effective only if the b flag (see admin(1» is present in the file.
An entry of - means "irrelevant".
:I:
This case applies if the d (default SID) flag is not present in the file. If the d flag is
present in the file, then the SID obtained from the d flag is interpreted as if it had
been specified on the command line. Thus, one of the other cases in this table
applies.
*

Commands

1-259

SysV

GET(l)

GET(l)

IDENTIFICATION KEYWORDS

Identifying infonnation is inserted into the text retrieved from the sees file by replacing identification keywords with their value wherever they occur. The following keywords may be used in the text stored in an sees file:
Keyword Value
%M%
Module name: either the value of the m flag in the file (see admin(l», or if
absent, the name of the sees file with the leading s. removed.
%1%
sees identification (SID) (%R%.%L%.%B%.%S%) of the retrieved text.
%R%
Release.
%L%
Level.
%8%
Branch.
%S%
Sequence.
%D%
Current date (YY/MM/DD).
%H%
Current date (MM/DD/yY).
Current time (HH:MM:SS).
%T%
%E%
Date newest applied delta was created (YY/MM/DD).
%G%
Date newest applied delta was created (MM/DD/YY).
%U%
Time newest applied delta was created (HH:MM:SS).
Module type: value of the t flag in the sees file (see admin(l».
%Y%
%F%
sees filename.
Fully qualified sees filename.
%P%
%Q%
The value of the q flag in the file (see admin(l).
%C%
Current line number. This keyword is intended for identifying messages
output by the program such as "this should not have happened" type errors.
It is not intended to be used on every line to provide sequence numbers.
%Z%
The 4-character string @(#) recognizable by what(l).
%W%
A shorthand notation for constructing what(l) strings for UNIX system program files. %W% =%Z%%M%%I%
%A%
Another shorthand notation for constructing what(l) strings for non-UNIX
system program files.
%A% = %Z%%Y% %M% %I%%Z%
Several auxiliary files may be created by get. These files are known generically as the
g-file, I-file, p-file, and z-file. The letter before the hyphen is called the tag. An auxiliary filename is fonned from the sees filename: the last component of all sees
filenames must be of the fonn s.module-name, the auxiliary files are named by replacing the leading s with the tag. The g-file is an exception to this scheme: g-file is
named by removing the s. prefix. For example, s.xyz.c, the auxiliary filenames would
be xyz.c, l.xyz.c, p.xyz.c, and z.xyz.c, respectively.
The g-file, which contains the generated text, is created in the current directory (unless
the f3-p option is used). A g-file is created in all cases, whether or not any lines of text
were generated by the get. It is owned by the real user. If -k is used or implied its
mode is 644; otherwise its mode is 444. Only the real user need have write pennission
in the current directory.

1-260

Commands

SysV

GET(l)

GET(l)

The I-file contains a table showing which deltas were applied in generating the
retrieved text. The I-file is created in the current directory if the -I option is used; its
mode is 444 and it is owned by the real user. Only the real user need have write permission in the current directory.
Lines in the I-file have the following format:
a.
b.

c.

d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.

A blank character if the delta was applied;
* otherwise.
A blank character if the delta was applied or was not applied and
ignored;
* if the delta was not applied and was not ignored.
A code indicating a "special" reason why the delta was or was not
applied:
"I": Included.
"X": Excluded.
"C": Cut off (by a -c keyletter).
Blank.
sees identification (SID).
Tab character.
Date and time (in the form YY/MMIDD HH:MM:SS) of creation.
Blank.
Login name of person who created delta.

The comments and MR data follow on subsequent lines, indented one horizontal tab character. A blank line terminates each entry.
The p-file is used to pass information resulting from a get with an -e option along to
delta. Its contents are also used to prevent a subsequent execution of get with an -e
option for the same SID until delta is executed or the joint edit flag, j, (see admin(I» is
set in the sees file. The p-file is created in the directory containing the sees file and
the effective user must have write permission in that directory. Its mode is 644 and it is
owned by the effective user. The format of the p-file is: the gotten SID, followed by a
blank, followed by the SID that the new delta will have when it is made, followed by a
blank, followed by the login name of the real user, followed by a blank, followed by the
date-time the get was executed, followed by a blank and the -i argument if it was
present, followed by a blank and the -x argument if it was present, followed by a newline. There can be an arbitrary number of lines in the p-file at any time; no two lines
can have the same new delta SID.
The z-file serves as a lock-out mechanism against simultaneous updates. Its contents
are the binary (2 bytes) process ID of the command (i.e., get) that created it. The z-file
is created in the directory containing the sees file for the duration of get. The same
protection restrictions as those for the p-file apply for the z-file. The z-file is created
mode 444.

Commands

1-261

SysV

GET(l)

GET(l)

BUGS
If the effective user has write pennission (either explicitly or implicitly) in the directory
containing the sees files, but the real user does not, then only one file may be named
when the -e option is used.
Fll..ES

g-file
p-file
q-fiIe
x-file
z-file
d-file

lusr/bin/bdiff

Existed before the execution of delta; removed after completion
of delta.
Existed before the execution of delta; may exist after completion
of delta.
Created during the execution of delta; removed after completion
of delta.
Created during the execution of delta; renamed to sees file after
completion of delta.
Created during the executio~ of delta; removed during the execution of delta.
Created during the execution of delta; removed after completion
of delta.
Program to compute differences between the "gotten" file and
the g-file.

DIAGNOSTICS

Use help(l) for explanations.
SEE ALSO

admin(l), delta(l), he1p(I), prs(I), sccs(1), what(l).

1-262

Commands

GETOPT(l)

SysV

GETOPT(l)

NAME
getopt - parse command options
SYNOPSIS
set -

,getopt optstring $*,

DESCRIPTION
getopt breaks up options in command lines for easy parsing by shell procedures and
checks for legal options. optstring is a string of recognized option letters (see
getopt(3C»; if a letter is followed by a colon, the option is expected to have an argument which mayor may not be separated from it by white space.
The special option - is used to delimit the end of the options. If it is used explicitly,
getopt recognizes it; otherwise, getopt generates it; in either case, getopt places it at
the end of the options.
The positional parameters ($1 $2 ... ) of the shell are reset so that each option is preceded by a - and is in its own positional parameter; each option argument is also parsed
into its own positional parameter.
You should begin using the new command getopts(l) in place of getopt. getopt will
not be supported in the next major release. For more information, see the WARNINGS
section.
EXAMPLE
The following code fragment shows how one might process the arguments for a command that can take the options a or b, as well as the option 0, which requires an argument:
set -- .getopt abo: $*,
[ $? != 0 1
then
echo $USAGE
exit 2
fi
for i in $*
do
case $i in
-a I -b)
FLAG=$i; shift;;
-0)
OARG=$2; shift 2;;
--)
shift; break;;
esac
done
if

This code will accept any of the following as equivalent:
cmd -aoarg file file
cmd -a -0 arg file file

Commands

1-263

GETOPT(l)

SysV

GETOPT(l)

cmd -oarg -a file file
cmd -a -oarg -- file file

WARNINGS
getopt does not support the part of Rule 8 of the conunand syntax standard (see
intro(l» that pennits groups of option-arguments following an option to be separated
by white space and quoted. For example,
cmd -a -b

-0

"xxx

Z

yy" file

is not handled correctly). To correct this deficiency, use the new conunand getopts in
place of getopt.

getopt will not be supported in the next major release. For this release a conversion
tool has been provided, getoptcvt(l). For more information about getopts and
getoptcvt, see the getopts manual page.
IT an option that takes an option-argument is followed by a value that is the same as one
of the options listed in optstring, referring to the earlier EXAMPLE section, but using
the following conunand line:
cmd

-0

-a file

get opt always treats -a as an option-argument to -0; it never recognizes -a as an
option. In this case, the for loop in the example shifts past the file argument.
DIAGNOSTICS
getopt prints an error message on the standard error when it encounters an option letter
not included in optstring.
SEE ALSO
getopts(l), getoptcvt(l), sh(l).
getopt(3C) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

1-264

Conunands

GETOPTCVT(l)

SysV

GETOPTCVT(l)

NAME

getopts, getoptcvt - parse command options
SYNOPSIS
get opts optstring name [arg ...J"
/usrllib/getoptcvt [-b] file
DESCRIPTION
getopts parses positional parameters for shell procedures and checks for legal options.
It supports all applicable rules of the command syntax standard (see Rules 3-10,
intro(l». It should be used in place of the getopt(l) command. (See the WARNINGsection.)
optstring must contain the option letters recognized by the command using getopts; if a
letter is followed by a colon, the option is expected to have an argument, or group of
arguments, which must be separated from it by white space.

Each time it is invoked, getopts placea the next option in the shell variable name and
the index of the next argument to be processed in the shell variable OPTIND. Whenever the shell or a shell procedure is invoked, OPTIND is initialized to 1.
When an option requires an option-argument, getopts places it in the shell variable
OPTARG.
If an illegal option is encountered, ? is placed in name.

When getopts reaches the end of options, it exits with a non-zero exit status. The special option "-" can be used to delimit the end of the options.
By default, getopts parses positional parameters. If extra arguments (arg ... ) are given
on the getopts command line, getopts parses them instead.
/usr/lib/getoptcvt reads the shell script in file, converts it to use getopts instead of
getopt, and writes the results on the standard output.
So all new commands adhere to the command syntax standard described in intro, they
should use getopts or getopt(3C) to parse positional parameters and check for legal
options (see the WARNING section.)
OPTIONS
-b

Commands

Results of running /usrllib/getoptcvt are portable to earlier releases of the
UNIX system. /usr/lib/getoptcvt modifies the shell script infile so that when
the resulting shell script is executed, it determines at run time whether to
invoke getopts or getopt.

1-265

GETOPTCVT(l)

SysV

GETOPTCVT(l)

EXAMPLE

The following fragment of a shell program shows how one might process the arguments
for a command that can take the options a or b, as well as the option 0, which requires
an option-argument:
while
do

getopts
case $c
a I b)
0)

\ ?)

abo:

c

in
FLAG=$C; ;
OARG=$OPTARG; ;
echo $USAGE
exit 2;;

esac
done
shift

,expr

$OPTIND

-

L

This code will accept any of the following as equivalent:
cmd
cmd
cmd
cmd
cmd

-a -b -0 "xxx Z YY" file
-a -b -0 "xxx Z YY" file
-ab -0 xxx,z,YY file
-ab -0 "xxx z YY" file
-0 xxx,z,YY -b -a file

WARNING

Although the following command syntax rule (see intro) relaxations are permitted
under the current implementation, they should not be used because they may not be
supported in future releases of the system. As in the EXAMPLE section, a and b are
options, and the option 0 requires an option-argument:
cmd -aboxxx file

Rule 5 violation: options with option-arguments must not be grouped with other
options.
cmd -ab -oxxx file

Rule 6 violation: there must be white space after an option that takes an optionargument.
Changing the value of the shell variable OPTlND or parsing different sets of arguments
may lead to unexpected results.
DIAGNOSTICS
getopts prints an error message on the standard error when it encounters an option letter
not included in optstring.

1-266

Commands

GETOPTCVT(l)

SysV

GETOPTCVT(l)

SEE ALSO

intro(1), sh( 1).
getopts(3C) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

Commands

1-267

GETOPTS(l)

SysV

GETOPTS(l)

NAME
getopts, getoptcvt - parse command options
SYNOPSIS
getopts optstring name [arg ...J
/usr/lib/getoptcH [-bJ file
DESCRIPTION
getopts parses positional parameters for shell procedures and checks for legal options.
It supports all applicable rules of the command syntax standard (see Rules 3-10,
intro(l». It should be used in place of the getopt(l) command. (See the WARNINGsection.)
optstring must contain the option letters recognized by the command using getopts; if a
letter is followed by a colon, the option is expected to have an argument, or group of
arguments, which must be separated from it by white space.

Each time it is invoked, getopts placea the next option in the shell variable name and
the index of the next argument to be processed in the shell variable OPTIND. Whenever the shell or a shell procedure is invoked, OPTIND is initialized to l.
When an option requires an option-argument, getopts places it in the shell variable
OPTARG.
If an illegal option is encountered, ? is placed in name.

When getopts reaches the end of options, it exits with a non-zero exit status. The special option "-" can be used to delimit the end of the options.
By default, getopts parses positional parameters. If extra arguments (arg .. .) are given
on the getopts command line, getopts parses them instead.
/usrllib/getoptcvt reads the shell script in file, converts it to use getopts instead of
getopt, and writes the results on the standard output.
So all new commands adhere to the command syntax standard described in intro, they
should use getopts or getopt(3C) to parse positional parameters and check for legal
options (see the WARNINGsection.)
OPTIONS
-b

Results of running /usr/lib/getoptc"t are portable to earlier releases of the
UNIX system. /usr/lib/getoptcvt modifies the shell script infile so that when
the resulting shell script is executed, it determines at run time whether to
invoke getopts(l) or getopt( 1).

EXAMPLE

The following fragment of a shell program shows how one might process the arguments
for a command that can take the options a or b, as well as the option 0, which requires
an option-argument:

1-268

Commands

GETOPTS(l)

SysV

while
do

getopts
case $c
a I b)
0)
\ ?)

abo:

GETOPTS(1)

c

in
FLAG=$C; ;
OARG=$OPTARG;;
echo $USAGE
exit 2;;

esac
done
shift

,expr

$OPTIND

-

1,

This code will accept any of the following as equivalent:
cmd
cmd
cmd
cmd
cmd

-a -b -0 "xxx Z YY" file
-a -b - 0 "xxx Z YY" file
-ab -0 xxx,z,YY file
-ab - 0 "xxx z yyrl file
-0 xxx, z, YY -b -a file

WARNING

Although the following command syntax rule (see intro) relaxations are pennitted
under the current implementation, they should not be used because they may not be
supported in future releases of the system. As in the EXAMPLE section above, a and b
are options, and the option 0 requires an option-argument:
cmd -aboxxx file

Rule 5 violation: options with option-arguments must not be grouped with other
options.
cmd -ab -oxxx file

Rule 6 violation: there must be white space after an option that takes an optionargument.
Changing the value of the shell variable OPTIND or parsing different sets of arguments
may lead to unexpected results.
DIAGNOSTICS
getopts prints an error message on the standard error when it encounters an option letter
not included in optstring.
SEE ALSO
intro( I), sh(1).
getopts(3C) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.
Commands

1-269

GRAPH(1G)

SysV

GRAPH(1G)

NAME

graph - draw a graph
SYNOPSIS

graph [ options]
DESCRIPTION

graph with no options takes pairs of numbers from the standard input as abscissas and
ordinates of a graph. Successive points are connected by straight lines. The graph is
encoded on the standard output for display by the tplot( 1G) filters.
If the coordinates of a point are followed by a non-numeric string, that string is printed

as a label beginning on the point. Labels can be surrounded with quotes" , in which
case they may be empty or contain blanks and numbers; labels never contain new lines.
A legend indicating grid range is produced with a grid unless -s is present. If a

specified lower limit exceeds the upper limit, the axis is reversed.
OPTIONS

The following options are recognized, each as a separate argument:

1-270

-a

Supplies abscissas automatically (they are missing from the input); spacing is given by the next argument (default I). A second optional argument is the starting point for automatic abscissas (default 0 or lower
limit given by -x).

-b

Breaks (disconnects) the graph after each label in the input.

-c
-g

Character string given by next argument is default label for each point.
Next argument is grid style, 0 no grid, 1 frame with ticks, 2 full grid
(default).

-I

Next argument is label for graph.

-m

Next argument is mode (style) of connecting lines: 0 disconnected,
connected (default). Some devices give distinguishable line styles for
other small integers (e.g., the Tektronix 4014: 2=dotted, 3=dash-dot,
4=short-dash,5=long-dash).

-s

Saves screen, does not erase before plotting.

-x [I]

If I is present, x axis is logarithmic. Next 1 (or 2) arguments are lower
(and upper) x limits. Third argument, if present, is grid spacing on x
axis. Normally these quantities are determined automatically.

-y [I]

Similarly for y.

-h
-w

Next argument is fraction of space for height.

-r

Next argument is fraction of space to move right before plotting.

Similarly for width.

Commands

SysV

GRAPH(lG)

GRAPH(lG)

-u

Similarly to move up before plotting.

-t

Transposes horizontal and vertical axes. (-x now applies to the vertical
axis.)

BUGS
graph stores all points internally and drops those for which there is no room.
Segments that run out of bounds are dropped, not windowed.
Logarithmic axes may not be reversed.
SEE ALSO

graphics(lG), spline(IG), tplot(lG).

Commands

1-271

SysV

GRAPH(lG)

GRAPH(lG)

NAME
graphics - access graphic and numeric commands
SYNOPSIS
graphics [ -r ]
DESCRIPTION
graphics prefixes the path name lusr/bin/grafto the current $PATH value, changes the
primary shell prompt to " and executes a new shell. The directory lusr/bin/graf contains all of the graphics subsystem commands.
The fonnat for a graphics command is COmmiJnd name argument(s). An argument can
be afilename or an option string. Afilename is the name of any UNIX system file except
those beginning with -. The filename - is the name for the standard input. An option
string consists of - followed by one or more option(s). An option consists of a
keyletter possibly followed by a value. Options may be separated by commas.
The graphic commands consist of: Commands that manipulate and plot numeric data
(see stat(IG». Commands that generate tables of contents (see toc(IG». Commands
that interact with graphic devices (see gdev(IG» and ged(IG». A collection of graphic
utility commands (see gutil(IG».
You can generate a list of the graphics commands by typing whatis in the graphics
environment.
OPTION
-r

Creates a restricted environment for access to the graphical commands.
That is, $PATH is set to:
:/usr/bin/graf:/rbin:/usr/rbin:/bin:/usr/bin
and the restricted shell, rsh, is invoked. To restore the environment that
existed prior to issuing the graphics command, type EOT (CfRLjD on
most tenninals). To logoff from the graphics environment, type quit.

SEE ALSO
gdev(IG), gutil(lG), stat(IG), toc(1G).
gps(4) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

1-272

Commands

SysV

GREEK(I)

GREEK(I)

NAME

greek - select terminal filter
SYNOPSIS
greek [ -Tterminall
DESCRIPTION
greek is a filter that reinterprets the extended character set, as well as the reverse and
half-line motions, of a 128-character Teletype Model 37 terminal for certain other terminals. Special characters are simulated by overstriking, if necessary and possible. If
the argument is omitted, greek attempts to use the environment variable $TERM (see
environ(5». Currently, the following terminals are recognized:
300
300-12
300s
300s-12
450
450-12
1620
1620-12
2621
2640
2645
4014
hp
tek

DASI300.
DASI 300 in 12-pitch.
DASI300s.
DASI 300s in 12-pitch.
DASI450.
DASI 450 in 12-pitch.
Diablo 1620 (alias DASI 450).
Diablo 1620 (alias DASI 450) in 12-pitch.
Hewlett-Packard 2621, 2640, and 2645.
Hewlett-Packard 2621, 2640, and 2645.
Hewlett-Packard 2621, 2640, and 2645.
Tektronix 4014.
Hewlett-Packard 2621, 2640, and 2645.
Tektronix 4014.

FILES
/usr/bin/300
/usr/bin/300s
/usr/bin/4014
/usr/bin/450
/usr/bin/hp
SEE ALSO
300(1),4014(1),450(1), hp(I), eqn(l), mm(I), nroff(I). tplot(lG).
environ(5), greek(5), term(5) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

Commands

1-273

SysV

GREP(l)

GREP(l)

NAME

grep - search a file for a pattern
SYNOPSIS

grep [options] limited regular expression Vile ..•]
DESCRIPTION

grep searches files for a pattern and prints all lines that contain that pattern. grep uses
limited regular expressions (expressions that have string values that use a subset of the
possible alphanumeric and special characters) like those used with ed(l) to match the
patterns. It uses a compact non-detenninistic algorithm.
Be careful using the characters $, *, [, ., I , (, ), and \ in the limited regular expression
because they are also meaningful to the shell. It is safest to enclose the entire limited
regular expression in single quotes ' ... '.
If no files are specified, grep assumes standard input. Normally, each line found is
copied to standard output. The file name is printed before each line found if there is
more than one input file.
OPTIONS

-b

Precedes each line by the block number on which it was found. Useful
in locating block numbers by context (first block is 0).

-c

Prints only a count of the lines that contain the pattern.

-i

Ignores upper/lower case distinction during comparisons.

-1

Prints the names of files with matching lines once, separated by newlines. Does not repeat the names of files when the pattern is found more
than once.

-n

Precedes each line by its line number in the file (first line is I).

-s

Suppresses error messages about nonexistent or unreadable files.

-v

Prints all lines except those that contain the pattern.

BUGS
Lines are limited to BUFSIZ characters; longer lines are truncated. BUFSIZ is defined in
lusr/include/stdio.h.
If there is a line with embedded nulls, grep only matches up to the first null; if that
matches, it prints the entire line.
DIAGNOSTICS

Exit status is 0 if any matches are found, 1 if none, 2 for syntax errors or inaccessible
files (even if matches were found).
SEE ALSO

ed(I), egrep(I), fgrep(I), sed(I), sh(l).

1-274

Commands

SysV

GUTll..(lG)

GUTll..(lG)

NAME

gutil - graphic utilities
SYNOPSIS
command-name [options] [files]
DESCRIPTION
Below is a list of miscellaneous device-independent utility commands found in
/usr/bin/graf. If no files are given, input is from the standard input. All output is to the
standard output. Graphic data is stored in GPS format; see gps(4).
bel

Sends bel character to terminal.

cvrtopt [=sstring fstring istring tstring] [args]
Converts options. Reformats args (usually the command line arguments of
a calling shell procedure) to facilitate processing by shell procedures. An
arg is either a file name (a string not beginning with a -, or a - by itself) or
an option string (a string of options beginning with a -). Output is of the
form:

-option -option . .. file name(s)

All options appear singularly and preceding any filenames. Options that
take values (e.g., -rl.l) or are two letters long must be described through
options to cvrtopt.
cvrtopt is usually used with set in the following manner as the first line of
a shell procedure:
set - .cvrtopt =[options] $@.
Options to cvrtopt are:
sstring

String accepts string values.

fstring

String accepts floating point numbers as values.

istring

String accepts integers as values.

tstring

String is a two-letter option name that takes no value.

String is a one- or two-letter option name.

gd [GPSjiles] - GPS dump
Prints a human-readable listing of GPS.

Commands

1-275

GUTIL(lG)

SysV

GUTIL(lG)

gtop [-rnu] [GPSjiles]
GPS to plot(4) filter. Transforms a GPS into plot(4) commands displayable by plot filters. GPS objects are translated if they fall within the window that circumscribes the first file unless an option is given. Options to
gtop are:

rn

Translates objects in GPS region n.

u

Translates all objects in the GPS universe.

pd [plot(5)files]
plot(4) dump. Prints a human-readable listing of plot(4) format graphic
commands.
ptog [plot(5)jiles]
plot(4) to GPS filter. Transforms plo(4) commands into a GPS.
quit

Terminates session.

remcom [files]
Remove comments. Copies its input to its output with comments removed.
Comments are as defined in C (Le., /* comment */).
whatis [-0] [names]
Brief online documentation. Prints a brief description of each name given.
If no name is given, then the current list of description names is printed.
The command whatis\* prints out every description. Using the -0 option
causes only command options to be printed.

yoofile

Pipe fitting primitive. Deposits the output of a pipeline into a file used in
the pipeline. Without yoo, this is not usually successful as it causes a read
and write on the same file simultaneously.

SEE ALSO

graphics(1 G).
gps(4), plot(4) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

1-276

Commands

SysV

HARDCOPY(lG)

HARDCOPY(lG)

NAME

gdev: hpd, erase, hardcopy, tekset, td - graphical device routines and filters
SYNOPSIS

hpd [ - options] [GPS file . .. ]
erase
hardcopy
tekset
td [-ernn] [GPS file . .. ]
DESCRIPTION

All of the commands described below reside in /usr/bin/graf (see graphics(1G».
hpd

Translate a GPS (graphical primitive string; see gps(4» to instructions for
the Hewlett-Packard 7221A Graphics Plotter. A viewing window is computed from the maximum and minimum points in file unless the -u or -r
option is provided. If no file is given, the standard input is assumed.
hpd Options
cn

Select character set n, n between 0 and 5.

pn

Select pen numbered n, n between 1 and 4 inclusive.

rn

Window on GPS region n, n between 1 and 25 inclusive.

sn

Slant characters n degrees clockwise from the vertical.

u

Window on the entire GPS universe.

xdn Set x displacement of the viewport's lower left comer to n inches.
xvn

Set width of viewport to n inches.

ydn

Set y displacement of the viewport's lower left comer to n inches.

yvn

Set height of viewport to n inches.

erase

Send characters to a Tektronix 4010 series storage terminal to erase the
screen.

hardcopy

When issued at a Tektronix display terminal with a hard copy unit, hardcopy generates a screen copy on the unit.

tekset

Send characters to a Tektronix terminal to clear the display screen, set the
display mode to alpha, and set characters to the smallest font.

Commands

1-277

SysV

HARDCOPY(lG)

td

HARDCOPY(lG)

Translate a GPS to scope code for a Tektronix 4010 series storage tenninal.
A viewing window is computed from the maximum and minimum points in
file unless the -u or -r option is provided. If no file is given, the standard
input is assumed.
td Options

e

Do not erase screen before initiating display.

rn

Display GPS region n, n between 1 and 25 inclusive.

u

Display the entire GPS universe.

SEE ALSO

graphics(IG).
gps(4) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

1-278

Commands

HASHCHECK(l)

SysV

HASHCHECK(l)

NAME
spell, hashmake, spellin, hashcheck - find spelling errors
SYNOPSIS
spell [ -v ] [ -b ] [ -x ] [ -I ] [ +localJr1e ] [files ]
/usr/lib/spell/hashmake
/usr/lib/spell/spellin n
/usr/lib/spelllhashcheck spelling_list
DESCRIPTION
spell collects words from the named files and looks them up in a spelling list. Words
that neither occur among nor are derivable (by applying certain inflections, prefixes,
and/or suffixes) from words in the spelling list are printed on the standard output. If no
files are named, words are collected from the standard input.
spell ignores most troff(l), tbl(l), and eqn(l) constructions.
By default, spell follows chains of included files (.so and .nx troff(l) requests), unless
the names of such included files begin with /usr/lib. Under the -I option, spell will follow the chains of all included files.
The spelling list is based on many sources, and while more haphazard than an ordinary
dictionary, is also more effective with respect to proper names and popular technical
words. Coverage of the specialized vocabularies of biology, medicine, and chemistry is
light.
Pertinent auxiliary files may be specified by name arguments, indicated below with
their default settings (see FILES). Copies of all output are accumulated in the history
file. The stop list filters out misspellings (e.g., thier=thy-y+ier) that would otherwise
pass.
Three routines help maintain and check the hash lists used by spell:
hashmake

Reads a list of words from the standard input and writes the corresponding nine-digit hash code on the standard output.

spellin

Reads n hash codes from the standard input and writes a compressed
spelling list on the standard output.

hashcheck

Reads a compressed spelling_list and recreates the nine-digit hash codes
for all the words in it; it writes these codes on the standard output.

OPTIONS
The following options apply to spell:

-v

Prints all words not literally in the spelling list, and indicate plausible
derivations from the words in the spelling list.

-b

Checks British spelling. Besides preferring centre, colour, programme,
speciality, travelled, etc., this option insists upon -ise in words like standardise, Fowler and the OED to the contrary notwithstanding.

Commands

1-279

SysV

HASHCHECK(l)

HASHCHECK(l)

-x

Prints every plausible stem with = for each word.

+localJile

Removes words found in loca(jile are removed from spell's output.
LocalJele is the name of a user-provided file that contains a sorted list of
words, one per line. With this option, the user can specify a set of words
that are correct spellings (in addition to spell's own spelling list) for
each job.

FILES

D_SPELL=/usr/lib/spell/hlist[ab]
Hashed spelling lists, American & British
S_SPELL=/usr/lib/spell/hstop
Hashed stop list
H _SPELL=/usrlIib/spell/spellhist
History file
/usr/lib/spell/spellprog
Program
BUGS
The spelling list's coverage is uneven; new installations will probably wish to monitor
the output for several months to gather local additions; typically, these are kept in a
separate local file that is added to the hashed spelling_list via spellin.
SEE ALSO

sed(I), sort(l), tee(I).

1-280

Commands

SysV

HASHMAKE(l)

HASHMAKE(l)

NAME
spell, hash make, spellin, hashcheck - find spelling errors
SYNOPSIS

spell [ -v ] [ -b ] [ -x ] [ -I ] [ +loca(file ] [files]
/usr/lib/spelllhashmake
/usr/lib/spell/spellin n
/usr/lib/spell/hashcheck spelling_list
DESCRIPTION

spell collects words from the named files and looks them up in a spelling list. Words
that neither occur among nor are derivable (by applying certain inflections, prefixes,
and/or suffixes) from words in the spelling list are printed on the standard output. If no
files are named, words are collected from the standard input.
spell ignores most troff(l), tbl(l), and eqn(l) constructions.
By default, spell follows chains of included files (.so and .nx troff(l) requests), unless
the names of such included files begin with /usr/lib. Under the -I option, spell will follow the chains of all included files.
The spelling list is based on many sources, and while more haphazard than an ordinary
dictionary, is also more effective with respect to proper names and popular technical
words. Coverage of the specialized vocabularies of biology, medicine, and chemistry is
light.
Pertinent auxiliary files may be specified by name arguments, indicated below with
their default settings (see FILES). Copies of all output are accumulated in the history
file. The stop list filters out misspellings (e.g., thier=thy-y+ier) that would otherwise
pass.
Three routines help maintain and check the hash lists used by spell:
hash make

Reads a list of words from the standard input and writes the corresponding nine-digit hash code on the standard output.

spellin

Reads n hash codes from the standard input and writes a compressed
spelling list on the standard output.

hashcheck

Reads a compressed spelling_list and recreates the nine-digit hash codes
for all the words in it; it writes these codes on the standard output.

OPTIONS

The following options apply to spell:

-v

Prints all words not literally in the spelling list, and indicate plausible
derivations from the words in the spelling list.

-b

Checks British spelling. Besides preferring centre, colour, programme,
speciality, travelled, etc., this option insists upon -ise in words like standardise, Fowler and the OED to the contrary notwithstanding.

Commands

1-281

HASHMAKE(l)

SysV

HASHMAKE(l)

-x

Prints every plausible stem with = for each word.

+localJile

Removes words found in local...flle are removed from spell's output.
Local...fzle is the name of a user-provided file that contains a sorted list of
words, one per line. With this option, the user can specify a set of words
that are correct spellings (in addition to spell's own spelling list) for
each job.

FILES

D_SPELL=/usrllib/spell/hlist[ab1
Hashed spelling lists, American & British

S_SPELL=/usrllib/spell/hstop
Hashed stop list

H_SPELL=/usrllib/spell/spellhist
History file

/usrllib/spell/spellprog
Program
BUGS

The spelling list's coverage is uneven; new installations will probably wish to monitor
the output for several months to gather local additions; typically, these are kept in a
separate local file that is added to the hashed spelling_list via spellin.
SEE ALSO

sed(1), sort(!), tee(!).

!-282

Commands

SysV

HELP(l)

HELP(l)

NAME

help - ask for SCCS help
SYNOPSIS

help [ arguments]
DESCRIPTION

help finds infonnation to explain the use of, or a particular message from, an
command.

sees

Arguments can be either message numbers (which nonnally appear in parentheses following messages), command names, or one of the following types:
type 1

Begins with non-numerics, ends in numerics. The nonnumeric prefix is usually an abbreviation for the program or set
of routines that produced the message. For example, ge3
means message 3 from the get(l) command.

type 2

Does not contain numerics. That is, it appears as a command
name such as the name get.

type 3

Is all numeric. For example, 26.

FILES
/usr/lib/help

Directory containing files of message text

/usr/lib/help/helploc

File containing locations of help files not in /usr/lib/helll

Commands

1-28

SysV

HOSTID(l)

HOSTID(l)

NAME
hostid - set or print identifier of current host system
SYNOPSIS

hostid [ identifier

1

DESCRIPTION

The hostid command prints the identifier of the current host in hexadecimal. This
numeric value is expected to be unique across all hosts and is commonly set to the
host's Internet address. The super-user can set the host ID by giving a hexadecimal
argument or the hostname; this is usually done in the start-up script letc/rc.local.

1-284

Commands

HOSTNAME(l)

SysV

HOSTNAME(l)

NAME
hostname - set or print name of current host system
SYNOPSIS

hostname [ name-oj-host ]
DESCRIPTION

The hostname command prints the name of the current host. The super-user can set the
host name by giving an argument; this is usually done in the start-up script letc/rc.Iocal.

Commands

1-28!

SysV

HP(I)

HP(I)

NAME
hp - handle special functions of Hewlett-Packard terminals

SYNOPSIS
hp [-e) [-m ]
DESCRIPTION
hp supports sp<"cial functions of the Hewlett-Packard 2640 series of terminals, with the

primary purpose of producing accurate representations of most nroff output. A typical
usage is as follows:
nroff -hfiles ... hp
Regardless of the hardware options on your terminal, hp tries to do sensible things with
underlining and reverse linefeeds. If the terminal has the "display enhancements"
feature, subscripts and superscripts Can be indicated in distinct ways. If it has the
"mathematical-symbol" feature, Greek and other special characters can be displayed.
OPTIONS

-e

Assumes that your terminal has the "display enhancements" feature, and
so makes maximum use of the added display modes. Overstruck characters are shown underlined. Superscripts are shown half-bright, and subscripts in half-bright, underlined mode. If this option is omitted, hp
assumes that your terminal lacks the "display enhancements" feature. In
this case, all overstruck characters, subscripts, and superscripts are
displayed in inverse video.

-m

Requests minimization of output by removal of new lines. Any contiguous sequence of 3 or more newlines is converted into a sequence of only
2 newlines; i.e., any number of successive blank lines produces only a
single blank output line. This allows you to retain more actual text on
the screen.

With regard to Greek and other special characters, hp provides the same set as does
300(1), except that "not" is approximated by a right arrow, and only the top half of the
integral sign is shown.
NOTES

The exit codes are 0 for normal termination, 2 for all errors.
BUGS
An "overstriking sequence" is defined as a printing character, followed by a backspace,
followed by another printing character. In such sequences, if either printing character is
an underscore, the other printing character is shown underlined or in inverse video; otherwise, only the first printing character is shown (again, underlined or in Inverse
Video). Nothing special is done if a backspace is adjacent to an ASCII control character. Sequences of control characters (e.g., reverse linefeeds, backspaces) can make text
"disappear"; in particular, tables generated by tbl(l) that contain vertical lines will
often be missing the lines of text that contain the "foot" of a vertical line, unless the
1-286

Commands

SysV

HP(l)

HP(l)

input to hp is piped through coJ(l).
Although some terminals do provide numerical superscript characters, no attempt is
made to display them.
DIAGNOSTICS

line too long

The representation of a line exceeds 1,024 characters.

SEE ALSO

300(1), coJ(l), eqn(l), greek(1). nroff(1), tbl(l).

Commands

1-287

HPC(l)

HPC(l)

Domain/OS SysY

NAME

hpc - program counter histogram
SYNOPSIS

hpc [-low xl [-high xl
[-from procedure]
[-to procedure]
[-proc procedure]
[-limit nl [-rate n]
[-nhdr] [-mapl
[-brief] pathname
[args ... l
DESCRIPTION

hpc (histogram_program_counter), part of Domain/PAK (Domain Performance
Analysis Kit), looks at the performance of programs at the PC level.
hpc produces a histogram of the program counter (PC) during program execution, thus
helping you locate the most compute-bound portions of your program.
While your program is executing, hpc samples the PC at regular intervals, gathering a
set of data points. Each data point records the region in which the program was executing the location of the PC when the sample was taken.
hpc divides your program into 256 equally sized regions called "buckets." The size of
the region depends on the size of your program or the range you select. The smaller the
region, the better the resolution of the analysis.
When execution of your program has ended, hpc displays statistics and a histogram
(bar graph) of the PC. Each bar corresponds to an area of program memory. The
length of the bar indicates how much time the program spent executing in the
corresponding area. hpc tells you which procedures and line numbers each bar
represents.
While hpc and your program are executing, a serial line is not available for output.
pathname (required)

Specify the name of the program to be evaluated.

args (optional)

Specify any arguments to be passed to the program pathname. These are not processed by hpc, but passed
directly to your program.
Default if omitted: no arguments passed

1-288

Commands

HPC(l)

Domain/OS SysV

HPC(l)

OPTIONS
If no options are specified, a histogram is produced for the entire program, with 500

samples taken per second.
-low x

Specify lowest address x to be included in the histogram. x must
be a hexadecimal value. If this option is omitted, the histogram
starts at the beginning of the program or procedure (see -from
below).

-high x

Specify highest address x to be included in the histogram. x must
be a hexadecimal value. If this option is omitted, the histogram
continues to the end of the program or procedure (see -to below).

-from procedure

Specify the beginning of a procedure as the lowest address to be
included in the histogram. If both -from and -low are omitted,
the histogram starts at the beginning of the program. Note the the
procedure name is case-insensitive.

-to procedure

Specify the end of a procedure as the highest address to be
included in the histogram. If both -to and -high are omitted, the
histogram stops at the end of the program. Note the the procedure
name is case-insensitive.

-proc procedure

Specify a single procedure to be included in the histogram. Note
the the procedure name is case-insensitive.
By limiting the range of addresses in the histogram with -low,
-high, -from, -to, and -proc, you can study a specific part of
your program, such as an I/O routine.

-limitn

Limit the displayed histogram bars to those that represent more
than n% of the monitored program execution. The default value
for n is 1. Use -limit 0 to show all histogram entries.

-rate n

Specify how many times n hpc samples the program counter per
second. n must be a decimal number in the range 5 to 2000. The
default is 500 samples per second. A higher rate results in a
more accurate histogram, but tends to slow program execution.

-nhdr

Generate the histogram without the header information. Using
this option makes filtering the output easier.

-map

Generate a list of the names and starting and ending locations of
the procedures in the program. This list is reduced if -from, -to,
-high, or -low are used to restrict monitoring to specific procedures or memory addresses. The output from this option can
be quite verbose for large programs.

Commands

1-289

Domain/OS SysV

HPC(l)

-brief

HPC(l)

Produce a compact bar chart by showing only the name of the
first procedure. or procedure fragment. contained in the bucket
represented by each bar. By default. dpat shows the names of all
procedures or procedure fragments contained in the bucket. This
option also suppresses source-line information.

SEE ALSO

dpat( 1). dspst( 1)

1-290

Commands

HPD(1G)

SysV

HPD(1G)

NAME

gdev: hpd, erase, hardcopy, tekset, td - graphical device routines and filters
SYNOPSIS
hpd [ - options] [GPS file . .. ]
erase
hardcopy
tekset
td [-ernn] [GPS file . .. ]
DESCRIPTION
All of the commands described below reside in /usr/bin/graf (see graphics(IG)).
hpd

Translate a GPS (graphical primitive string; see gps(4» to instructions for
the Hewlett-Packard 7221A Graphics Plotter. A viewing window is computed from the maximum and minimum points in file unless the -u or -r
option is provided. If no file is given, the standard input is assumed.
hpd Options
cn

Select character set n, n between 0 and 5.

pn

Select pen numbered n, n between 1 and 4 inclusive.

rn

Window on GPS region n, n between 1 and 25 inclusive.

sn

Slant characters n degrees clockwise from the vertical.

u

Window on the entire GPS universe.

xdn Set x displacement of the viewport's lower left comer to n inches.
xvn

Set width of viewport to n inches.

ydn

Set y displacement of the viewport's lower left comer to n inches.

yvn

Set height of viewport to n inches.

erase

Send characters to a Tektronix 4010 series storage terminal to erase the
screen.

hardcopy

When issued at a Tektronix display tenninal with a hard copy unit, hardcopy generates a screen copy on the unit.

tekset

Send characters to a Tektronix terminal to clear the display screen, set the
display mode to alpha, and set characters to the smallest font.

Commands

1-291

SysV

HPD(lG)

td

HPD(lG)

Translate a GPS to scope code for a Tektronix 4010 series storage terminal.
A viewing window is computed from the maximum and minimum points in
file unless the -u or -r option is provided. If no file is given, the standard
input is assumed.
td Options

e

Do not erase screen before initiating display.

rn

Display GPS region n, n between 1 and 25 inclusive.

u

Display the entire GPS universe.

SEE ALSO

graphics(1 G).
gps(4) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

1-292

Commands

SysV

ID(l)

ID(l)

NAME
id - print user and group IDs and names
SYNOPSIS

id
DESCRIPTION

id writes a message on the standard output, giving the user and group IDs and the
corresponding names of the invoking process. If the effective and real IDs do not
match, both are printed.
SEE ALSO

logname (I), getuid (2).

Commands

1-293

INLm(l)

Domain/OS SysV

INLIB(l)

NAME

inli b - install a user-supplied library
SYNOPSIS
inlib pathname ...
DESCRlPTION
inlib installs a library at the current shell level; it remains installed until the shell that
installed it exits. See the note below for information on loading a library that is used by
all processes. The newly installed library will be used to resolve external references of
programs (and libraries) loaded after its installation. (Thus, previously loaded libraries
and programs will not be affected.)
Note that only those global references that are marked by the binder become visible,
and that the default action of the binder is to leave globals unmarked. Therefore, you
should take care to mark all appropriate globals when you bind your library.

inlib is an internal shell command. You can create a library that is installed automatically in every process. This library resides in the file llib/userlib.private. The procedure text in this library will be shared among all processes.
This library must be present at node start-up time in order to be installed. After copying
your library to llib/userlib.private, you must shut down the node and start it up again
in order to use the library. Changes to the library also require rebooting the node to
load the new routines.
Global names in /Iib/userlib.private must not duplicate names used in Domain
libraries.

pathname (required) Specify name of library file(s) to be installed. Multiple pathnames and wildcarding are permitted.

1-294

Commands

Domain/OS SysV

INTM(l)

INTM(l)

NAME
intm - install a type manager
SYNOPSIS
intm [options] type_name [mgryathname]
DESCRIPTION
intm installs a type manager for the type_name. The manager is copied into the type
manager directory from mgryathname. If mgryathname is omitted, the file named
type_name in the current directory is used. The intm command does not accept wildcards.

type_name (required) Specify the type for which the manager is to be installed.
mgryathname (optional)
Specify the pathname of the manager object file to install for this
type.
Default if omitted: object file is named type_name
OPTIONS
-n node_spec Specify the node on which the type manager is to be installed. If this
option is omitted, the type manager is installed on the current node.
-I

List the results of the operation.

-r

Replace an existing type manager if it exists.

EXAMPLES
$ intm example_type Imydir/my_example_mgr.bin

$ intm example_type Imydir/old_example_mgr.bin -n Ilremote_vol -I
"/mydir/old_example_mgr.bin" installed as the manager for
type example_type on volume //remote_vol.

SEE ALSO
inty(l)

Commands

1-295

1NTY(1)

Domain/OS SysV

1NTY(1)

NAME

iDly - install a new type
SYNOPSIS

iDly [options] type_name source_volume [-0 node_spec]
DESCRIPTION

iDly installs a type from one node to another. It installs both the type name and type
manager on the target node (given by the -0 option).

type_name (required) Specify the name of the type to be installed.
source_volume (required)
Specify the pathname of the source volume from which to copy
the type name and type manager.
OPTIONS
-0

node_spec Specify the node on which the type is to be installed. You may also
specify the entry directory of a volume mounted for software installation, as shown in the example below. If this option is omitted, the type is
installed on the current node.

-I

List the results of the installation.

-r

Replace any existing type name/manager pair.

EXAMPLES
$ inty example_type IItest_vol
Type "example_type" installed.

$ inty example_type IImy_vol-n IItest_vol-1
Type "example_type" installed on volume / /test_vol.
SEE ALSO

crty( I), dlty( I },lty(1), intm( I)

1-296

Commands

IPCRM(l)

SysV

IPCRM(l)

NAME
ipcrm - remove a message queue, semaphore set, or shared memory id
SYNOPSIS

ipcrm [options]
DESCRIPTION

ipcrm removes one or more specified messages, a semaphore, or shared memory
identifiers.
OPTIONS

-q msqid

Removes the message queue identifier msqid from the system and destroys the message queue and data structure associated with it.

-m shmid

Removes the shared memory identifier shmid from the system. The
shared memory segment and data structure associated with it are destroyed after the last detach.

-s semid

Removes the semaphore identifier semid from the system and destroys
the set of semaphores and data structure associated with it.

-Q msgkey

Removes the message queue identifier, created with key msgkey, from
the system and destroys the message queue and data structure associated
with it.

-M shmkey

Removes the shared memory identifier, created with key shmkey, from
the system. The shared memory segment and data structure associated
with it are destroyed after the last detach.

-S semkey

Removes the semaphore identifier, created with key semkey, from the
system and destroys the set of semaphores and data structure associated
with it.

Details of the removes are described in msgctl(2), shmctl(2), and semctl(2). Find
identifiers and keys by using ipcs(1).
SEE ALSO

ipcs(1).
msgctl(2), msgget(2), msgop(2), semctl(2), semget(2), semop(2), shmctl(2), shmget(2),
shmop(2) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

Commands

1-297

IPCS(l)

SysV

IPCS(l)

NAME

ipcs - report inter-process communication facilities status
SYNOPSIS

ipcs [ options ]
DESCRIPTION

ipcs prints certain infonnation about active inter-process communication facilities.
Without options, infonnation is printed in short fonnat for message queues, shared
memory, and semaphores that are currently active in the system.
OPTIONS

-q

Prints infonnation about active message queues.

-m

Prints infonnation about active shared memory segments.
Prints information about active semaphores.

If -q, -m, or -s are specified, information about only those indicated is printed. If
none of these three are specified, infonnation about all three is printed subject to these
options:

1-298

-b

Prints biggest allowable size infonnation. (Maximum number of bytes
in messages on queue for message queues, size of segments for shared
memory, and number of semaphores in each set for semaphores.) See
below for meaning of columns in a listing.

-c

Prints creator's login name and group name.

-0

Prints infonnation on outstanding usage. (Number of messages on queue
and total number of bytes in messages on queue for message queues and
number of processes attached to shared memory segments.)

-p

Prints process number infonnation. (Process ID of last process to send a
message and process ID of last process to receive a message on message
queues and process ID of creating process and process ID of last process
to attach or detach on shared memory segments.)

-t

Prints time infonnation. (Time of the last control operation that changed
the access permissions for all facilities. Time of last msgsnd and last
msgrcv on message queues, last shmat and last shmdt on shared memory,
last semop(2) on semaphores.)

-a

Uses all print options. (This is a shorthand notation for -b, -c,
and -t.)

-0,

-p,

Commands

SysV

IPCS(l)

IPCS(l)

The column headings and the meaning of the columns in an ipcs list are given below;
the letters in parentheses indicate the options that cause the corresponding heading to
appear; all means that the heading always appears. Note that these options only determine what information is provided for each facility; they do not determine which facilities are listed.
COLUMNS
T

(all)

ID
KEY

(all)
(all)

MODE

(all)

Type of the facility:
q
message queue;
m
shared memory segment;
s
semaphore.
The identifier for the facility entry.
The key used as an argument to msgget, semget, or shmget to create
the facility entry. (Note: The key of a shared memory segment is
changed to IPC_PRIVATE when the segment has been removed
until all processes attached to the segment detach it.)
The facility access modes and flags: The mode consists of 11 characters that are interpreted as follows:
The first two characters are:
R if a process is waiting on a msgrcv;
S if a process is waiting on a msgsnd;
D if the associated shared memory segment has been
removed. It will disappear when the last process
attached to the segment detaches it;
C if the associated shared memory segment is to be
cleared when the first attach is executed;
if the corresponding special flag is not set.

The next 9 characters are interpreted as three sets of three bits each.
The first set refers to the owner's permissions; the next to permissions of others in the user-group of the facility entry; and the last to
all others. Within each set, the first character indicates permission
to read, the second character indicates permission to write or alter
the facility entry, and the last character is currently unused.
The permissions are indicated as follows:
if read permission is granted;
if write permission is granted;
a
if alter permission is granted;
if the indicated permission is not granted.
The login name of the owner of the facility entry.
The group name of the group of the owner of the facility entry.
The login name of the creator of the facility entry.
The group name of the group of the creator of the facility entry.
r

w

OWNER (all)
GROUP (all)
CREATOR(a,c)
CGROUP (a,c)

Commands

1-299

SysV

IPCS(l)

CBYTES (a,o)
QNUM

(a,o)

QBYTES (a,b)
LSPID

(a,p)

LRPID

(a,p)

STIME
RTIME
CTIME
NATTCH

(a,t)
(a,t)
(a,t)
(a,o)

SEGSZ
CPID
LPID

(a,b)
(a,p)
(a,p)

ATIME

(a,t)

DTIME

(a,t)

NSEMS

(a,b)

OTIME

(a,t)

IPCS(l)

The number of bytes in messages currently outstanding on the associated message queue.
The number of messages currently outstanding on the associated
message queue.
The maximum number of bytes allowed in messages outstanding on
the associated message queue.
The process ID of the last process to send a message to the associatedqueue.
The process ID of the last process to receive a message from the
associated queue.
The time the last message was sent to the associated queue.
The time the last message was received from the associated queue.
The time when the associated entry was created or changed.
The number of processes attached to the associated shared memory
segment.
The size of the associated shared memory segment.
The process ID of the creator of the shared memory entry.
The process ID of the last process to attach or detach the shared
memory segment.
The time the last attach was completed to the associated shared
memory segment.
The time the last detach was completed on the associated shared
memory segment.
The number of semaphores in the set associated with the semaphore
entry.
The time the last semaphore operation was completed on the set
associated with the semaphore entry.

FILES

/unix
/etc/passwd
/etc/group

System namelist
User names
Group names

SEE ALSO

msgop(2), semop(2), shmop(2) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

1-300

Commands

ISO(l)

Domain/OS SysV

ISO(l)

NAME

iso - convert files to ISO format
SYNOPSIS

french_to_iso
german to iso
nor.dan to iso
swedish_to_iso
swiss to iso
uk_to_iso

inputJile
inputJile
inputJile
inputJile
inputJile
inputJile

outputJile
outputJile
outputJile
outputJile
outputJile
outputJile

DESCRIPTION

These utilities convert files written with the overloaded 7-bit national fonts to the Internation Standards Organization (ISO) 8-bit format. The overloaded fonts include any
with a specific language suffix (for example, t7xl3.french, or din_t7xll.german). If
you created and/or edited a file using one of the national fonts, that file is a candidate
for conversion.
You are not required to convert files, but probably will want to because
1.

The overloaded fonts replace certain ASCn characters with national ones, have that
subset of ASCl[ characters and the national characters in one file. The 8-bit fonts
available as of SRlO include all the ASCll characters and the national characters.

2.

The 8-bit fonts also include a wider range of national characters, so you can enter
any character in any western European language. This was not always possible
with the overloaded fonts. For example, there was not enough space in the overloaded font to include all the French characters, but they all exist in the 8-bit fonts.

There are two parameters to the conversion utilities. You must provide the name of the
file you want to convert (inputJile) and your outputJile. If outputJile already exists,
the utilities abort.
The default location for the utilities is /usr/apollo/bin.

Commands

1-301

ISO(I)

ISO(1)

DomaiD/OS SysV

FILES

/usr/apollo/bin/french_to_iso

Converts overloaded French to ISO fonnat

/usr/apollo/bin/german_to_iso

Converts overloaded Gennan to ISO fonnat

/usr/apollo/bin/nor.dan_to_iso

Converts overloaded Norwegian/Danish to ISO format

/usr/apollo/bin/swedish_to_iso

Converts overloaded SwedishIFinnish to ISO format

/usr/apollo/bin/swiss_ toJso

Converts overloaded Swiss to iSO fonnat

/usr/apollo/bin/uk_to_iso

Converts overloaded U.K. English to ISO fonnat

DIAGNOSTICS

All messages are generally self-explanatory.

1-302

Commands

SysV

JOIN(l)

JOIN(1)

NAME

join - relational database operator
SYNOPSIS
join [ options ) filel file2
DESCRIPTION
join fonns, on the standard output, a join of the two relations specified by the lines of
filel andfile2. Tifilel is -, the standard input is used.
Filel and file2 must be sorted in increasing ASCII collating sequence on the fields on
which they are to be joined, nonnally the first in each line [see sort(l»).
There is one line in the output for each pair of lines in filel and file2 that have identical
join fields. The output line nonnally consists of the common field, then the rest of the
line fromfile1, then the rest of the line fromfile2.
The default input field separators are blank, tab, or new-line. In this case, multiple
separators count as one field separator, and leading separators are ignored. The default
output field separator is a blank.
Some of the options below use the argument n. This argument should be a 1 or a 2
referring to either file1 or file2, respectively.
OPTIONS
-an

-es
-jnm
-0

list

-tc

Produces a line for each unpairable line in file n, where n is 1 or 2, in
addition to the nonnal output.
Replaces empty output fields by string s.
Joins on the mth field of file n. Ti n is missing, use the mth field in each
file. Fields are numbered starting with 1.
Each output line comprises the fields specified in list, each element of
which has the fonn n.m, where n is a file number and m is a field
number. The common field is not printed unless specifically requested.
Uses character c as a separator (tab character). Every appearance of c in
a line is significant. The character c is used as the field separator for
both input and output.

EXAMPLE

The following command line joins the password file and the group file, matching on the
numeric group ID, and outputting the login name, the group name and the login directory. It is assumed that the files have been sorted in ASCII collating sequence on the
group ID fields.
join -j I " -j2 3 -0 1.1 2.1 1.6 -t: /etc/passwd /etc/group

Commands

1-303

SysV

JOIN(l)

JOIN(l)

BUGS
With default field sepatation, the collating sequence is that of sort -b; with -t, the
sequence is that of a plain sort.
The conventions of join, sort, comm, uniq and aWk(l) ate wildly incongruous.
Filenames that ate numeric may cause conflict when the -0 option is used right before
listing filenames.
SEE ALSO

awk(l), comm(l), sort(l), uniq(l).

1-304

Commands

Domain/OS SysV

KBM(l)

KBM(l)

NAME

kbm - set/display keyboard characteristics
SYNOPSIS

kbm [-c argsl H argsl [-s argsl
DESCRIPTION

kbm allows you to set the characteristics for the keyboard. Settable characteristics are
the compose key(s), and the long and short shift key(s) on the Domain multinational
keyboard. The compose key is used to compose characters of the latin-l character set
that do not have corresponding keys on the keyboard. Long and short shift are used to
toggle the alternate key labels on the multinational keyboards.
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, kbm displays the current keyboard type and characteristics.

--c args

Set compose keys to those specified by list args.

-I args

Set long shift keys to those specified by list args.

-s args

Set short shift keys to those specified by list args.

A key list is a list of function key names separated by commas. The following keys are
allowable:

Key Name

Positions

ll-lf
rl-r6
fO-f9
npO-np9, npa-npg, npp
tab,
bs
ar,al

Left function keys
Right function keys
Center function keys
Numeric pad
TAB
BACKSPACE
ALT keys (multinational keyboard only)

Shifted keys are specified by appending an "s" to the key name, control keys by appending a "c", the up transition by appending an "u"; for example ar, ars, arc, am .
To disable a function specify a key name of "none".

Commands

1-305

KBM(I)

Domain/OS SysV

KBM(I)

EXAMPLES

Display current characteristics
$kbm
keyboard:
compose:
long_alt:
short alt:

3
fS
als,ars
al,ar

Set long shift keys to shifted ar and shifted al; short shift keys to al and ar.
$ kbm -1 als,ars -s aI,ar

Disable the compose function.
$ kbm--c:none

1-306

Commands

SysV

KILL(l)

KILL(l)

NAME

kill - tenninate a process
SYNOPSIS

kill [ - signo 1 PIO ...
DESCRIPTION

kill sends signal 15 (tenninate) to the specified processes. This kills processes that do
not catch or ignore the signal. The process number (PIO) of each asynchronous process
started with & is reported by the shell (unless more than one process is started in a pipeline, in which case the number of the last process in the pipeline is reported). Process
numbers can also be found by using ps(1).
The details of the kill are described in kill(2). For example, if process number 0 is
specified, all processes in the process group are signaled.
The killed process must belong to the current user unless he is the super-user.
If a signal number preceded by - is given as first argument, that signal is sent instead of
tenninate (see signal(2». In particular kill -9 is a sure kill.
SEE ALSO

ps(1), sh(l).
kill(2), signal(2) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

Commands

1-307

KSH(l)

SysV

KSH(1)

NAME

ksh - the Korn shell command progranuning language
SYNOPSIS

ksh [ -aefhikmnoprstuvx ] [
[arg .. . ]
.

-0

option] .•. [ -c string] [ -D name=val ... ]

DESCRIPTION
ksh is a command progranuning language that executes commands read from a terminal or a file. See Invocation below for the meaning of arguments to the shell. rksh
(the restricted version of this shell) is not supported by SysV.
Definitions
A metacharacter is one of the following characters:
; & ( )

I

< > new-line space tab

A blank is a tab or a space. An identifier is a sequence of letters, digits, or underscores
starting with a letter or underscore. Identifiers are used as names for aliases, functions ,
and named parameters. A word is a sequence of characters separated by one or more
non-quoted metacharacters.
Commands
A simple-command is a sequence of blank separated words which may be preceded by
a parameter assignment list. (See Environment below). The first word specifies the
name of the command to be executed. Except as specified below, the remaining words
are passed as arguments to the invoked command. The command name is passed as
argument 0 (see exec(2». The value of a simple-command is its exit status if it terminates normally, or (octal) 200+status if it terminates abnormally (see signal(2) for a
list of status values).
A pipeline is a sequence of one or more commands separated by I . The standard output
of each command but the last is connected by a pipe(2) to the standard input of the next
command. Each command is run as a separate process; the shell waits for the last command to terminate. The exit status of a pipeline is the exit status of the last command.
A list is a sequence of one or more pipelines separated by;, &, &&, or II , and optionally terminated by;, &, or I &. Of these five symbols, ;, &, and I & have equal precedence, which is lower than that of && and II . The symbols && and II also have
equal precedence. A semicolon (;) causes sequential execution of the preceding pipeline; an ampersand (&) causes asynchronous execution of the preceding pipeline (i.e.,
the shell does not wait for that pipeline to finish). The symbol I & causes asynchronous
execution of the preceding command or pipeline with a two-way pipe established to the
parent shell. The standard input and output of the spawned command can be written to
and read from by the parent shell using the -p option of the special commands read
and print described later. Only one such command can be active at any given time.
The symbol && (I I ) causes the list following it to be executed only if the preceding
pipeline returns a zero (non-zero) value. An arbitrary number of new-lines may appear
in a list. instead of semicolons, to delimit commands.

1-308

Commands

SysV

KSH(l)

KSH(l)

A command is either a simple-command or one of the following. Unless otherwise
stated, the value returned by a command is that of the last simple-command executed in
the command.
for identifier in word . .. do list done
Each time a for command is executed, identifier is set to the next word taken
from the in word list. If in word ... is omitted, then the for command executes the do list once for each positional parameter that is set (see Parameter
Substitution below). Execution ends when there are no more words in the list.
select identifier in word . .. do list done
A select command prints on standard error (file descriptor 2), the set of words,
each preceded by a number. If in word ... is omitted, then the positional
parameters are used instead (see Parameter Substitution below). The PS3
prompt is printed and a line is read from the standard input. If this line consists of the number of one of the listed words, then the value of the parameter
identifier is set to the word corresponding to this number. If this line is empty
the selection list is printed again. Otherwise the value of the parameter
identifier is set to null. The contents of the line read from standard input is
saved in the parameter REPLY. The list is executed for each selection until a
break or end-oj-file is encountered.
case word in pattern I pattern ... ) list;; ... esac
A case command executes the list associated with the first pattern that
matches word. The form of the patterns is the same as that used for file-name
generation (see File Name Generation below).
if list then list elif list then list ... else list fi
The list following if is executed and, if it returns a zero exit status, the list following the first then is executed. Otherwise, the list following elif is executed
and, if its value is zero, the list following the next then is executed. Failing
that, the else list is executed. If no else list or then list is executed, then the if
command returns a zero exit status.
while list do list done
until list do list done
A while command repeatedly executes the while list and, if the exit status of
the last command in the list is zero, executes the do list; otherwise the loop
terminates. If no commands in the do list are executed, then the while command returns a zero exit status; until may be used in place of while to negate
the loop termination test.
(list)

Execute list in a separate environment. Note, that if two adjacent open
parentheses are needed for nesting, a space must be inserted to avoid arithmetic evaluation as described below. A parenthesized list used as a command
argument denotes process substitution as described below.
Commands

1-309

SysY

KSH(l)

KSH(l)

{ list;}
list is simply executed. Note that { is a keyword and requires a blank in order
to be recognized.
function identifier {list ;}
identifier 0 { list ;}
Define a function which is referenced by identifier. The body of the function
is the list of commands between { and }. (See Functions below).
time pipeline
The pipeline is executed and the elapsed time as well as the user and system
time are printed on standard error.
The following keywords are only recognized as the first word of a command and when
not quoted:
if then else elif Ii case esac for while until do done { } function select time
Comments
A word beginning with # causes that word and all the following characters up to a
new-line to be ignored.
Aliasing
The first word of each command is replaced by the text of an alias if an alias for this
word has been defined. The first character of an alias name can be any non-special
printable character, but the rest of the characters must be the same as for a valid
identifier. The replacement string can contain any valid shell script including the metacharacters listed above. The first word of each command of the replaced text will not
be tested for additional aliases. If the last character of the alias value is a blank then the
word following the alias will also be checked for alias substitution. Aliases can be used
to redefine special builtin commands but cannot be used to redefine the keywords listed
above. Aliases can be created, listed, and exported with the alias command and can be
removed with the unalias command. Exported aliases remain in effect for sub-shells
but must be reinitialized for separate invocations of the shell (See Invocation below).

Aliasing is performed when scripts are read, not while they are executed. Therefore,
for an alias to take effect the alias command has to be executed before the command
which references the alias is read.
Aliases are frequently used as a short hand for full path names. An option to the aliasing facility allows the value of the alias to be automatically set to the full pathname of
the corresponding command. These aliases are called tracked aliases. The value of a
tracked alias is defined the first time the corresponding command is looked up and
becomes undefined each time the PATH variable is reset. These aliases remain tracked
so that the next subsequent reference will redefine the value. Several tracked aliases are
compiled into the shell. The -h option of the set command makes each command name
which is a valid alias name into a tracked alias.

1-310

Commands

SysV

KSH(l)

KSH(l)

The following exported aliases are compiled into the shell but can be unset or
redefined:
false='let 0'
functions='typeset -f
history='fc -I'
integer='typeset -i'
nohup='nohup'
r='fc -e-'
true=':'
type='whence -v'
hash='alias -t'
Tilde Substitution
After alias substitution is performed, each word is checked to see if it begins with an
unquoted -. If it does, then the word up to a / is checked to see if it matches a user
name in the /etc/passwd file. If a match is found, the - and the matched login name is
replaced by the login directory of the matched user. This is called a tilde substitution.
If no match is found, the original text is left unchanged. A - by itself, or in front of a /,
is replaced by the value of the HOME parameter. A - followed by a + or - is replaced
by the value of the parameter PWD and OLDPWD respectively.
In addition, the value of each keyword parameter is checked to see if it begins with a or if a - appears after a :. In either of these cases a tilde substitution is attempted.

Command Substitution
The standard output from a command enclosed in parenthesis preceded by a dollar sign
( $0 ) or a pair of grave accents (, , ) may be used as part or all of a word; trailing newlines are removed. In the second (archaic) form, the string between the quotes is processed for special quoting characters before the command is executed. (See Quoting
below). The command substitution $(cat file) can be replaced by the equivalent but
faster $(  ".
PS3
Selection prompt string used within a select loop, by default" #? ".
SHELL The patbname of the shell is kept in the environment. This value
should be unset for shells running in Apollo transcript pads.
TMOUT
If set to a value greater than zero, the shell will tenninate if a command is not entered within the prescribed number of seconds aftel
issuing the PSI prompt. (Note that the shell can be compiled with I
maximum bound for this value which cannot be exceeded.)
VISUAL
If the value of this variable ends in emacs, gmacs, or vi then the
corresponding option (see Special Conunand set below) will be
turned on.
The shell gives default values to PATH, PSI, PS2, MAILCHECK, TMOUT and IFS
while HOME, SHELL ENV and MAIL are not set at all by the shell (although HOME i,
set by login(l». On some systems MAIL and SHELL are also set by login(l».

Conunands

1-31

SysV

KSH(l)

KSH(l)

Blank Interpretation
After parameter and command substitution, the results of substitutions are scanned for
the field separator characters ( those found in IFS ) and split into distinct arguments
where such characters are found. Explicit null arguments (" II or ) are retained. Implicit null arguments (those resulting from parameters that have no values) are removed.
File Name Generation
Following substitution, each command word is scanned for the characters *, ?, and
unless the -f option has been set. If one of these characters appears then the word is
regarded as a pattern. The word is replaced with alphabetically sorted file names that
match the pattern. If no file name is found that matches the pattern, then the word is
left unchanged. When a pattern is used for file name generation, the character. at the
start of a file name or immediately following a /, as well as the character / itself, must
be matched explicitly. In other instances of pattern matching the / and. are not treated
specially.

*
?

Matches any string, including the null string.
Matches any single character.
Matches anyone of the enclosed characters. A pair of characters
separated by - matches any character lexically between the pair,
inclusive. If the first character following the opening "[ " is a "! "
then any character not enclosed is matched. A - can be included in
the character set by putting it as the first or last character.

Quoting
Each of the metacharacters listed above (See Definitions above) has a special meaning
to the shell and causes termination of a word unless quoted. A character may be quoted
(i.e., made to stand for itself) by preceding it with a \. The pair \new-Iine is ignored.
All characters enclosed between a pair of single quote marks ("), are quoted. A single
quote cannot appear within single quotes. Inside double quote marks (" "), parameter
and command substitution occurs and \ quotes the characters \, " ", and $. The meaning of $* and $@ is identical when not quoted or when used as a parameter assignment
value or as a file name. However, when used as a command argument, "$*" is
equivalent to II $ld $2d ... " , where d is the first character of the IFS parameter, whereas
"$@" is equivalent to "$1" "$2" .... Inside grave quote marks C) \ quotes the characters \, " and $. If the grave quotes occur within double quotes then \ also quotes the
character " .
,1*
The special meaning of keywords or aliases can be removed by quoting any character
of the keyword. The recognition of function names or special command names listed
below cannot be altered by quoting them.

1-316

Commands

KSH(1)

KSH(l)

SysV

Arithmetic Evaluation
An ability to perfonn integer arithmetic is provided with the special command let.
Evaluations are perfonned using long arithmetic. Constants are of the fonn base#n
where base is a decimal number between two and thirty-six representing the arithmetic
base and n is a number in that base. If base is omitted then base 10 is used.
An internal integer representation of a named parameter Can be specified with the -i
option of the typeset special command. When this attribute is selected the first assignment to the parameter detennines the arithmetic base to be used when parameter substitution occurs.
Since many of the arithmetic operators require quoting, an alternative fonn of the let
command is provided. For any command which begins with a all the characters until
a matching » are treated as a quoted expression. More precisely, « ... is equivalent
to let" ... ".

«,

»

Prompting
When used interactively, the shell prompts with the value of PSI before reading a command. If at any time a new-line is typed and further input is needed to complete a command, then the secondary prompt (i.e., the value of PS2) is issued.
Input/Output
Before a command is executed, its input and output may be redirected using a special
notation interpreted by the shell. The following may appear anywhere in a simplecommand or may precede or follow a command and are not passed on to the invoked
command. Command and parameter substitution occurs before word or digit is used
except as noted below. File name generation occurs only if the pattern matches a single
file and blank interpretation is not perfonned.

word

Use file word as standard output (file descriptor 1). If the file does not
exist then it is created; otherwise, it is truncated to zero length.

»word

Use file word as standard output. If the file exists then output is
appended to it (by first seeking to the end-of-file); otherwise, the file is
created.

«-word

The shell input is read up to a line that is the same as word, or to an
end-of-file. No parameter substitution, command substitution or file
name generation is perfonned on word. The resulting document,
called a here-document, becomes the standard input. If any character
of word is quoted, then no interpretation is placed upon the characters
of the document; otherwise, parameter and command substitution
occurs, \new-line is ignored, and \ must be used to quote the characters \, $, " and the first character of word. If - is appended to «, then
all leading tabs are stripped from word and from the document.

Commands

1-317

SysV

KSH(l)

KSH(l)

<&digit

The standard input is duplicated from file descriptor digit (see
dup(2». Similarly for the standard output using >& digit.

<&-

The standard input is closed. Similarly for the standard output using
>&-.

If one of the above is preceded by a digit, then the file descriptor number referred to is
that specified by the digit (instead of the default 0 or 1). For example:
... 2>&1

means file descriptor 2 is to be opened for writing as a duplicate of file descriptor 1.
The order in which redirections are specified is significant. The shell evaluates each
redirection in tenns of the (file descriptor, file) association at the time of evaluation.
For example:
... 1>/name 2>&1

first associates file descriptor 1 with file fname. It then associates file descriptor 2 with
the file associated with file descriptor I (i.e. /name). If the order of redirections were
reversed, file descriptor 2 would be associated with the tenninal (assuming file descriptor 1 had been) and then file descriptor 1 would be associated with file fname .
If a command is followed by & and job control is not active, then the default standard
input for the command is the empty file Idev/null. Otherwise, the environment for the
execution of a command contains the file descriptors of the invoking shell as modified
by input/output specifications.

Environment
The environment (see environ(7» is a list of name-value pairs that is passed to an executed program in the same way as a nonnal argument list. The names must be
identifiers and the values are character strings. The shell interacts with the environment
in several ways. On invocation, the shell scans the environment and creates a parameter for each name found, giving it the corresponding value and marking it export. Executed commands inherit the environment. If the user modifies the values of these
parameters or creates new ones, using the export or typeset -x commands they become
part of the environment. The environment seen by any executed command is thus composed of any name-value pairs originally inherited by the shell, whose values may be
modified by the current shell, plus any additions which must be noted in export or
typeset -x commands.
The environment for any simple-command or function may be augmented by prefixing
it with one or more parameter assignments. A parameter assignment argument is a
word of the fonn identifier= value. Thus:
TERM=450 cmd args
(export TERM; TERM=450; cmd args)

and

are equivalent (as far as the above execution of cmd is concerned).

1-318

Commands

SysV

KSH(l)

KSH(l)

If the -k flag is set, all parameter assignment arguments are placed in the environment,
even if they occur after the command name. The following first prints a=b c and then

c:
echo a=b c
set -k
echo a=b c
Functions
The function keyword, described in the Commands section above, is used to define
shell functions. Shell functions are read in and stored internally. Alias names are
resolved when the function is read. Functions are executed like commands with the
arguments passed as positional parameters. (See Execution below).
Functions execute in the same process as the caller and share all files, traps ( other than
EXIT and ERR) and present working directory with the caller. A trap set on EXIT
inside a function is executed after the function completes. Ordinarily, variables are
shared between the calling program and the function. However, the typeset special
command used within a function defines local variables whose scope includes the
current function and all functions it calls.
The special command return is used to return from function calls. Errors within functions return control to the caller.
Function identifiers can be listed with the -f option of the ty peset special command.
The text of functions will also be listed. Function can be undefined with the -f option
of the unset special command.
Ordinarily, functions are unset when the shell executes a shell script. The -xf option of
the typeset command allows a function to be exported to scripts that are executed
without a separate invocation of the shell. Functions that need to be defined across
separate invocations of the shell should be placed in the ENV file.
Jobs
If the monitor option of the set command is turned on, an interactive shell associates a
job with each pipeline. It keeps a table of current jobs, printed by the jobs command,
and assigns them small integer numbers. When a job is started asynchronously with &,
the shell prints a line which looks like:
[1] 1234
indicating that the job which was started asynchronously was job number I and had one
(top-level) process, whose process id was 1234.
This paragraph and the next require features that are not in all versions of UNIX and
may not apply. If you are running a job and wish to do something else you can press
CTRLlZ (control-Z) which sends a STOP signal to the current job. The shell will then
normally indicate that the job has been 'Stopped', and print another prompt. You can
then manipulate the state of this job, putting it in the background with the bg command,
or run some other commands and then eventually bring the job back into the foreground
Commands

1-315

KSH(l)

SysV

KSH(l)

with the foreground command fg. A 'z takes effect immediately and is like an interrupt
in that pending output and unread input are discarded when it is typed.
A job being run in the background will stop if it tries to read from the terminal. Background jobs are normally allowed to produce output, but this can be disabled by giving
the command "stty tostop". If you set this tty option, then background jobs will stop
when they try to produce output like they do when they try to read input.
There are several ways to refer to jobs in the shell. The character % introduces a job
name. If you wish to refer to job number 1, you can name it as % 1 . Jobs can also be
named by prefixes of the string typed in to kill or restart them. Thus, on systems that
support job control, 'fg %ed' would normally restart a suspended ed(l) job, if there
were a suspended job whose name began with the string 'ed'.
The shell maintains a notion of the current and previous jobs. In output pertaining to
jobs, the current job is marked with a + and the previous job with a -. The abbreviation
% + refers to the current job and %- refers to the previous job. % % is also a synonym
for the current job.
This shell leams immediately whenever a process changes state. It nortnally informs
you whenever a job becomes blocked so that no further progress is possible, but only
just before it prints a prompt. This is done so that it does not otherwise disturb your
work.
When you try to leave the shell while jobs are running or stopped, you will be wamed
that 'You have stopped(running) jobs.' You may use the jobs command to see what
they are. If you do this or immediately try to exit again, the shell will not warn you a
second time, and the stopped jobs will be terminated.
Signals
The INT and QUIT signals for an invoked command are ignored if the command is followed by & and job monitor option is not active. Otherwise, signals have the values
inherited by the shell from its parent (but see also the trap command below).
Execution
Each time a command is executed, the above substitutions are carried out. If the command name matches one of the Special Commands listed below, it is executed within
the current shell process. Next, the command name is checked to see if it matches one
of the user defined functions. If it does, the positional parameters are saved and then
reset to the arguments of the function call. When the function completes or issues a
return, the positional parameter list is restored and any trap set on EXIT within the
function is executed. The value of a function is the value of the last command executed. A function is also executed in the current shell process. If a command name is
not a special command or a user definedjitnction, a process is created and an attempt is
made to execute the command via exec(2).
The shell parameter PATH defines the search path for the directory containing the command. Alternative directory names are separated by a colon (:). The default path is
fbin:fusrfbin: (specifying fbin, fusrfbin, and the current directory in that order). The

1-320

Commands

KSH(I)

SysV

KSH(t)

current directory can be specified by two or more adjacent colons, or by a colon at the
beginning or end of the path list. If the command name contains a / then the search
path is not used. Otherwise, each directory in the path is searched for an executable
file. If the file has execute permission but is not a directory or an a.out file, it is
assumed to be a file containing shell commands. A sub-shell is spawned to read it. All
non-exported aliases, functions, and named parameters are removed in this case. If the
shell command file doesn't have read permission, or if the setuid and/or setgid bits are
set on the file, then the shell executes an agent whose job it is to set up the permissions
and execute the shell with the shell command file passed down as an open file. A
parenthesized command is also executed in a sub-shell without removing non-exported
quantities.
Command Re-entry
The text of the last HISTSIZE (default 128) commands entered from a terminal device
is saved in a history file. The file $HOME/.sh_history is used if the HISTFILE variable
is not set or is not writable. A shell can access the commands of all interactive shells
which use the same named HISTFILE. The special command fc is used to list or edit a
portion of this file. The portion of the file to be edited or listed can be selected by
number or by giving the first character or characters of the command. A single command or range of commands can be specified. If you do not specify an editor program
as an argument to fc then the value of the parameter FCEDIT is used. If FCEDIT is not
defined then /bin/ed is used. The edited command(s) is printed and re-executed upon
leaving the editor. The editor name - is used to skip the editing phase and to re-execute
the command. In this case a substitution parameter of the form old=new can be used to
modify the command before execution. For example, if r is aliased to 'fc -e -' then
typing 'r bad=good c' will re-execute the most recent command which starts with the
letter c, replacing the first occurrence of the string bad with the string good.
In-line Editing Options
Normally, each command line entered from a terminal device is simply typed followed
by a new-line ('RETURN' or 'LINE FEED'). If either the emacs, gmacs, or vi option
is active, the user can edit the command line. To be in either of these edit modes set the
corresponding option. An editing option is automatically selected each time the
VISUAL or EDITOR variable is assigned a value ending in either of these option
names.
The editing features require that the user's terminal accept 'RETURN' as carriage
return without line feed and that a space (' ') must overwrite the current character on
the screen. ADM terminal users should set the "space - advance" switch to 'space'.
Hewlett-Packard series 2621 terminal users should set the straps to 'bcGHxZ etX'.
The editing modes implement a concept where the user is looking through a window at
the current line. The window width is the value of COLUMNS if it is defined, otherwise
80. If the line is longer than the window width minus two, a mark is displayed at the

Commands

1-321

KSH(l)

KSH(l)

SysV.

end of the window to notify the user. As the cursor moves and reaches the window
*) if the
boundaries the window will be centered about the cursor. The mark is a >
line extends on the right (left, both) side(s) of the window.

«,

The in-line editing options are not useful in Apollo transcript pads. The command input
pane associated with transcript pads allows full command line editing. Setting
VISUAL or EDITOR in Apollo transcript pads causes the pad to flip in and out of raw
mode.
In-Line editing is very useful on dialup UP terminals or in a VT100 window where no
other editing is available.
Emacs Editing Mode
This mode is entered by enabling either the emacs or gmacs option. The only difference between these two modes is the way they handle 'T. To edit, the user moves the
cursor to the point needing correction and then inserts or deletes characters or words as
needed. All the editing commands are control characters or escape sequences. The
notation for control characters is caret ( , ) followed by the character. For example, 'F
is the notation for control F. This is entered by pressing 'f' while holding down the
'CTRL' (control) key. The 'SHIFT' key is not pressed. (The notation '? indicates the
DEL (delete) key.)
The notation for escape sequences is M· followed by a character. For example, M·f
(pronounced Meta f) is entered by depressing ESC (ascii 033) followed by 'f'. (M.F
would be the notation for ESC followed by 'SHIFT' (capital) 'F'.)
All edit commands operate from any place on the line (not just at the beginning). Neither the "RETURN" nor the "UNE FEED" key is entered after edit commands except
when noted.
'F
M·f

'8
M·b

'A
'E
']char

'X'X
erase

'D
M·d
M·'H
M·h
M·'?

1-322

Move cursor forward (right) one character.
Move cursor forward one word. (The editor's idea of a word is a string of
characters consisting of only letters, digits and underscores.)
Move cursor backward (left) one character.
Move cursor backward one word.
Move cursor to start of line.
Move cursor to end of line.
Move cursor to character char on current line.
Interchange the cursor and mark.
(User defined erase character as defined by the stty command, usually °H
or #.) Delete previous character.
Delete current character.
Delete current word.
(Meta-backspace) Delete previous word.
Delete previous word.
(Meta-DEL) Delete previous word (if your interrupt character is '? (DEL,
the default) then this command will not work).
Commands

KSH(l)

SysV

'T
'C
M-c

M-I

'K

'W
M-p
kill

'Y
'L

'@
M-

'J

'M
eot

M-<
M->
'N
'Rstring

'0
M-digits

M-letter

M-.

Conunands

KSH(l)

Transpose current character with next character in emacs mode. Transpose
two previous characters in gmacs mode.
Capitalize current character.
Capitalize current word.
Change the current word to lower case.
Kill from the cursor to the end of the line. If given a parameter of zero
then kill from the start of line to the cursor.
Kill from the cursor to the mark.
Push the region from the cursor to the mark on the stack.
(User defined kill character as defined by the stty conunand, usually 'G or
@.) Kill the entire current line. If two kill characters are entered in succession, all kill characters from then on cause a line feed (useful when using
paper terminals).
Restore last item removed from line. (Yank item back to the line.)
Line feed and print current line.
(Null character) Set mark.
(Meta space) Set mark.
(New line) Execute the current line.
(Return) Execute the current line.
End-of-file character, normally '0, will tenninate the shell if the current
line is null.
Fetch previous conunand. Each time 'P is entered the previous .command
back in time is accessed.
Fetch the least recent (oldest) history line.
Fetch the most recent (youngest) history line.
Fetch next conunand. Each time 'N is entered the next conunand forward
in time is accessed.
Reverse search history for a previous conunand line containing string. If a
parameter of zero is given, the search is forward. String is terminated by a
"RETURN" or "NEW LINE". If string is omitted, then the next command
line containing the most recent string is accessed. In this case a parameter
of zero reverses the direction of the search.
Operate - Execute the current line and fetch the next line relative to current
line from the history file.
(Escape) Define numeric parameter, the digits are taken as a parameter to
the next conunand. The conunands that accept a parameter are ., 'F, '8,
erase, '0, 'K, AR, 'P, 'N, M-., M-_, M-b, M-c, lVI-d, lVI-f, lVI-h and M-'H.
Soft-key - Your alias list is searched for an alias by the name _letter and if
an alias of this name is defined, its value will be inserted on the input
queue. The letter must not be one of the above meta-functions.
The last word of the previous command is inserted on the line. If preceded
by a numeric parameter, the value of this parameter determines which word
to insert rather than the last word.

1-323

SysV

KSH(l)

MM-*

M-ESC
M-=
'U

\

'V

KSH(l)

Same as M-..
Attempt file name generation on the current word. An asterisk is appended
if the word doesn't contain any special pattern characters.
Same as M-*.
List files matching current word pattern if an asterisk were appended.
Multiply parameter of next command by 4.
Escape next character. Editing characters, the user's erase, kill and interrupt (normally'?) characters may be entered in a command line or in a
search string if preceded by a \. The \ removes the next character's editing
features (if any).
Display version of the shell.

Vi Editing Mode
There are two typing modes. Initially, when you enter a command you are in the input
mode. To edit, the user enters control mode by typing ESC ( 033 ) and moves the cursor to the point needing correction and then inserts or deletes characters or words as
needed. Most control commands accept an optional repeat count prior to the conunand.
When in vi mode on most systems, canonical processing is initially enabled and the
conunand will be echoed again if the speed is 1200 baud or greater and it contains any
control characters or less than one second has elapsed since the prompt was printed.
The ESC character terminates canonical processing for the remainder of the command
and the user can than modify the command line. This scheme has the advantages of
canonical processing with the type-ahead echoing of raw mode. If the option viraw is
also set, the terminal will always have canonical processing disabled. This mode is
implicit for systems that do not support two alternate end of line delimiters, and may be
helpful for certain terminals.
Input Edit Commands
By default the editor is in input mode.
erase
(User defined erase character as defined by the stty conunand, usually 'H or #.) Delete previous character.
Delete the previous blank separated word.
Terminate the shell.
Escape next character. Editing characters, the user's erase or kill
characters may be entered in a command line or in a search string
if preceded by a ·V. The'V removes the next character's editing
features (if any).
Escape the next erase or kill character.
Motion Edit Commands
These commands will move the cursor.
[countll
Cursor forward (right) one character.
[countlw Cursor forward one alpha-numeric word.
[countlW Cursor to the beginning of the next word that follows a blank.
[countle
Cursor to end of word.

1-324

Conunands

KSH(l)

SysV

KSH(l)

[count]E
[count]h
[count]b
[count]B
[count]fc
[count]Fc
[count]tc
[count]Tc

Cursor to end of the current blank delimited word.
Cursor backward (left) one character.
Cursor backward one word.
Cursor to preceding blank separated word.
Find the next character c in the current line.
Find the previous character c in the current line.
Equivalent to f followed by h.
Equivalent to F followed by I.
Repeats the last single character find command, f, F, t, or T.
Reverses the last single character find command.
Cursor to start of line.
Cursor to first non-blank character in line.
$
Cursor to end of line.
Search Edit Commands
These commands access your command history.
[count]k
Fetch previous command. Each time k is entered the previous
command back in time is accessed.
[count]Equivalent to k.
[countli
Fetch next command. Each time j is entered the next command
forward in time is accessed.
[count]+
Equivalent to j.
[count]G
The command number count is fetched. The default is the least
recent history command.
/string
Search backward through history for a previous command containing string. String is tenninated by a "RETURN" or
"NEW LINE". If string is null the previous string will be used.
?string
Same as / except that search will be in the forward direction.
n
Search for next match of the last pattern to / or ? commands.
Search for next match of the last pattern to / or ?, but in reverse
N
direction. Search history for the string entered by the previous /
command.
Text Modification Edit Commands
These commands will modify the line.
a
Enter input mode and enter text after the current character.
A
Append text to the end of the line. Equivalent to $a.

o

[ count]cmotion
c[count]motion

C
S

Commands

Delete current character through the cltaracter that motion would
move the cursor to and enter input mode. If motion is c, the entire
line will be deleted and input mode entered.
Delete the current character through the end of line and enter input
mode. Equivalent to c$.
Equivalent to cc.

1-325

SysV

KSH(l)

D

KSH(l)

Delete the current character through the end of line. Equivalent to
d$.

[count]dmotion
d[count]motion

Delete current character through the character that motion would
move to. If motion is d , the entire line will be deleted.
Enter input mode and inserr text before the current character.
Insert text before the beginning of the line. Equivalent to the two
character sequence 'i.
Place the previous text modification before the cursor.
[count]p
Place the previous text modification after the cursor.
[count]p
R
Enter input mode and replace characters on the screen with characters you type overlay fashion.
Replace the current character with c.
rc
[count]x
Delete current character.
[count] X Delete preceding character.
[count].
Repeat the previous text modification command.
Invert the case of the current character and advance the cursor.
[countL
Causes the count word of the previous command to be appended
and input mode entered. The last word is used if count is omitted.
Causes an * to be appended to the current word and file name gen*
eration attempted. If no match is found, it rings the bell. Otherwise, the word is replaced by the matching pattern and input mode
is entered.
Other Edit Commands
Miscellaneous commands.
[count]ymotion
y[count]motion

Y
u
U
[count]v

1-326

Yank current character through character that motion would move
the cursor to and puts them into the delete buffer. The text and
cursor are unchanged.
Yanks from current position to end of line. Equivalent to y$.
Undo the last text modifying command.
Undo all the text modifying commands performed on the line.
Returns the command fc -e ${VISUAL:-${EDITOR:-\i}} count
in the input buffer. If count is omitted, then the current line is
used.
Line feed and print current line. Has effect only in control mode.
(New line) Execute the current line, regardless of mode.
(Return) Execute the current line. regardless of mode.
Sends the line after inserting a # in front of the line and after each
new-line. Useful for causing the current line to be inserted in the
history without being executed.

Commands

KSH(l)

SysV

@letter

KSH(1)

List the file names that match the current word if an asterisk were
appended it.
Your alias list is searched for an alias by the name _letter and if an
alias of this name is defined, its value will be inserted on the input
queue for processing.

Special Commands
The following simple-commands are executed in the shell process. Input/Output
redirection is pennitted. Unless otherwise indicated, the output is written on file
descriptor 1. Commands that are preceded by one or two t are treated specially in the
following ways:
1.
Parameter assignment lists preceding the command remain in effect when the
command completes.
2.
They are executed in a separate process when used within command substitution.
3.
Errors in commands preceded by tt cause the script that contains them to
abort.

t: arg ...
The command only expands parameters. A zero exit code is returned.

tt .file arg ..•
Read and execute commands from file and return. The commands are executed in the current shell environment. The search path specified by PATH is
used to find the directory containing file. If any arguments arg are given, they
become the positional parameters. Otherwise the positional parameters are
unchanged.

alias -tx name =value ...
Alias with no arguments prints the list of aliases in the form name=value on
standard output. An alias is defined for each name whose value is given. A
trailing space in value causes the next word to be checked for alias substitution. The -t flag is used to set and list tracked aliases. The value of a tracked
alias is the full pathname corresponding to the given name. The value
becomes undefined when the value of PATH is reset but the aliases remained
tracked. Without the -t flag, for each name in the argument list for which no
value is given, the name and value of the alias is printed. The -x flag is used
to set or print exported aliases. An exported alias is defined across sub-shell
environments. Alias returns true unless a name is given for which no alias has
been defined.
bg %job
This command is only built-in on systems that support job control. Puts the
specified job into the background. The current job is put in the background if
job is not specified.

Commands

1-327

SysV

KSH(l)

KSH(l)

break n
Exit from the enclosing for while until or select loop, if any. If n is specified
then break n levels.
continue n
Resume the next iteration of the enclosing for while until or select loop. If n
is specified then resume at the n -th enclosing loop.

t cd
t cd

arg
old new
This command can be in either of two forms. In the first form it changes the
current directory to arg. If arg is - the directory is changed to the previous
directory. The shell parameter HOME is the default argo The parameter PWD
is set to the current directory. The shell parameter CDPATH defines the search
path for the directory containing arg. Alternative directory names are
separated by a colon (:). The default path is  (specifying the current
directory). Note that the current directory is specified by a null pathname,
which can appear immediately after the equal sign or between the colon delimiters anywhere else in the path list. If arg begins with a I then the search path
is not used. Otherwise, each directory in the path is searched for arg. The
second form of cd substitutes the string new for the string old in the current
directory name, PWD and tries to change to this new directory. The cd command may not be executed by rksh.

echo arg ...
See echo(l) for usage and description.

tt eva I

arg ...
The arguments are read as input to the shell and the resulting command(s) executed.

tt exec

arg ...
If arg is given, the command specified by the arguments is executed in place
of this shell without creating a new process. Input/output arguments may
appear and affect the current process. If no arguments are given the effect of
this command is to modify file descriptors as prescribed by the input/output
redirection list. In this case, any file descriptor numbers greater than 2 that are
opened with this mechanism are closed when invoking another program.

exit n

Causes the shell to exit with the exit status specified by n. If n is omitted then
the exit status is that of the last command executed. An end-of-file will also
cause the shell to exit except for a shell which has the ignoreeof option (See
set below) turned on.

tt export

name ...
The given names are marked for automatic export to the environment of
subsequently-executed commands.

1-328

Commands

KSH(l)

SysV

KSH(l)

tt fc -e ename -nlr first last
tt fc -e - old=new command
In the first form, a range of commands from first to last is selected from the
last HISTSIZE commands that were typed at the terminal. The arguments first
and last may be specified as a number or as a string. A string is used to locate
the most recent command starting with the given string. A negative number is
used as an offset to the current command number. If the flag -I, is selected,
the commands are listed on standard output. Otherwise, the editor program
ename is invoked on a file containing these keyboard commands. If ename is
not supplied, then the value of the parameter FCEDIT (default /bin/ed) is used
as the editor. When editing is complete, the edited command(s) is executed. If
last is not specified then it will be set to first. If first is not specified the
default is the previous command for editing and -16 for listing. The flag -r
reverses the order of the commands and the flag -n suppresses command
numbers when listing. In the second form the command is re-executed after
the substitution old=new is performed.
fg %job
This command is only built-in on systems that support job control. If job is
specified it brings it to the foreground. Otherwise, the current job is brought
into the foreground.
inlib pathname
Install a user-supplied library specified by pathname in the current (shell) process. The library is used to resolve external references of programs (and
libraries) loaded after its installation. Note that the library is not loaded into
the address space unless it is needed to resolve an external reference. The list
of inlibed libraries is passed to all children of the current shell. Use iii b( 1) to
examine this list.
jobs -I Lists the active jobs; given the -I options lists process id' s in addition to the
normal information.
kill -sig process ...
Sends either the TERM (terminate) signal or the specified signal to the
specified jobs or processes. Signals are either given by number or by names
(as given in /usr/include/signal.h, stripped of the prefix "SIG"). The signal
numbers and names are listed by 'kill -I'. If the signal being sent is TERM
(terminate) or HUP (hangup), then the job or process will be sent a CONT
(continue) signal if it is stopped. The argument process can be either a process
id or ajob.

let arg ...
Each arg is an arithmetic expression to be evaluated. All calculations are done
as long integers and no check for overflow is performed. Expressions consist
of constants, named parameters, and operators.

Commands

1-329

SysV

KSH(l)

KSH(l)

The following set of operators, listed in order of decreasing precedence, have
been implemented:
unary minus
logical negation
*I %
multiplication, division, remainder
+ addition, subtraction
<= >= < >

comparison

-- !=
equality inequality
arithmetic replacement
Sub-expressions in parentheses () are evaluated first and can be used to override the above precedence rules. The evaluation within a precedence group is
from right to left for the =operator and from left to right for the others.
A parameter name must be a valid identifier. When a parameter is encountered, the value associated with the parameter name is substituted and expression evaluation resumes. Up to nine levels of recursion are permitted.
The return code is 0 if the value of the last expression is non-zero, and 1 otherwise.

tt newgrp

arg ...
Equivalent to exec newgrp arg ....

print -Rnprsun arg . ..
The shell output mechanism. With no flags or with flag -, the arguments are
printed on standard output as described by echo(1). In raw mode, -R or -r,
the escape conventions of echo are ignored. The -R option will print all subsequent arguments and options other than -no The -p option causes the arguments to be written onto the pipe of the process spawned with I & instead of
standard output. The -s option causes the arguments to be written onto the
history file instead of standard output. The -u flag can be used to specify a
one digit file descriptor unit number n on which the output will be placed. The
default is 1. If the flag -n is used, no new-line is added to the output.
pwd

Equivalent to print -r - $PWD

read -prsu n name?prompt name ...
The shell input mechanism. One line is read and is broken up into words using
the characters in IFS as separators. In raw mode, -r, a \ at the end of a line
does not signify line continuation. The first word is assigned to the first name,
the second word to the second name, etc., with leftover words assigned to the
last name. The -p option causes the input line to be taken from the input pipe
of a process spawned by the shell using I &. If the -s flag is present, the input
will be saved as a command in the history file. The flag -u can be used to
1-330

Commands

SysV

KSH(l)

KSH(l)

specify a one digit file descriptor unit to read from. The file descriptor can be
opened with the exec special command. The default value of n is O. If name
is omitted then REPLY is used as the default name. The return code is 0
unless an end-of-file is encountered. An end-of-file with the -p option causes
cleanup for this process so that another can be spawned. If the first argument
contains a ?, the remainder of this word is used as a prompt when the shell is
interactive. If the given file descriptor is open for writing and is a tenninal
device then the prompt is placed on this unit. Otherwise the prompt is issued
on file descriptor 2. The return code is 0 unless an end-of-file is encountered.

tt readonly

name ...
The given names are marked readonly and these names cannot be changed by
subsequent assignment.

tt return

n

Causes a shell function to return to the invoking script with the return status
specified by n. If n is omitted then the return status is that of the last command executed. If return is invoked while not in afunction or a . script, then
it is the same as an exit.
rootnode [arg]
Change the current node entry directory to arg.
set -aefhkmnostuvx -0 option. .. arg ...
The flags for this command have meaning as follows:
-a
All subsequent parameters that are defined are automatically
exported.
-e
If the shell is non-interactive and if a command fails, execute the
ERR trap, if set, and exit immediately. This mode is disabled while
reading profiles.
-f
Disables file name generation.
-h
Each command whose name is an identifier becomes a tracked alias
when first encountered.
-k
All parameter assignment arguments are placed in the environment
for a command, not just those that precede the command name.
-m
Background jobs will run in a separate process group and a line will
print upon completion. The exit status of background jobs is
reported in a completion message. On systems with job control, this
flag is turned on automatically for interactive shells.
-n
Read commands but do not execute them. Ignored for interactive
shells.
-0
The following argument can be one of the following option names:
allexport
Same as -a.
errexit Same as -e.

Commands

1-331

SysV

KSH(1)

KSH(l)

bgnice
emacs

-p

-s
-t

-u
-v
-x

All background jobs are run at a lower priority.
Puts you in an emacs style in-line editor for command
entry.
gmacs Puts you in a gmacs style in-line editor for command entry.
ignoreeof
The shell will not exit on end-of-file. The command exit
must be used.
keyword Same as -k.
markdirs
All directory names resulting from file name generation
have a trailing I appended.
monitor Same as -m.
noexec Same as -no
noglob Same as -f.
nounset Same as -u.
protected
Same as -po
verbose Same as -v.
trackall Same as -h.
vi
Puts you in insert mode of a vi style in-line editor until you
hit escape character 033. This puts you in move mode. A
return sends the line.
viraw
Each character is processed as it is typed in vi mode.
xtrace Same as -x.
If no option name is supplied then the current option settings are printed.
Resets the PATH variable to the default value, disables processing of
the $HOME/.profile file and uses the file letclsuid_profile instead of
the ENV file. This mode is automatically enabled whenever the
effective uid (gid) is not equal to the real uid (gid).
Sort the positional parameters.
Exit after reading and executing one command.
Treat unset parameters as an error when substituting.
Print shell input lines as they are read.
Print commands and their arguments as they are executed.
Turns off -x and -v flags and stops examining arguments for flags.
Do not change any of the flags; useful in setting $1 to a value beginning with -. If no arguments follow this flag then the positional
parameters are unset.

Using + rather than - causes these flags to be turned off. These flags can also
be used upon invocation of the shell. The current set of flags may be found in
$-. The remaining arguments are positional parameters and are assigned, in
order, to $1 $2 . . .. If no arguments are given, then the values of all names are
printed on the standard output.

1-332

Commands

SysV

KSH(l)

KSH(l)

t shift n
The positional parameters from $n+ 1 ... are renamed $1 ... ,default nisI.
The parameter n can be any arithmetic expression that evaluates to a nonnegative number less than or equal to $#.
test expr
Evaluate conditional expression expr. See test(l) for usage and description.
The arithmetic comparison operators are not restricted to integers. They allow
any arithmetic expression. Four additional primitive expressions are allowed:
-L file True if file is a symbolic link.
filel -nt file2
True if file 1 is newer than file2 .
file 1 -ot file2
True iffile1 is older thanfile2.
filel -ef file2
True if filel has the same device and i-node number as file2.
times

Print the accumulated user and system times for the shell and for processes run
from the shell.

trap arg sig ...
arg is a command to be read and executed when the shell receives signal(s)
sig. (Note that arg is scanned once when the trap is set and once when the
trap is taken.) Each sig can be given as a number or as the name of the signal.
Trap commands are executed in order of signal number. Any attempt to set a
trap on a signal that was ignored on entry to the current shell is ineffective. If
arg is omitted or is -, then all trap(s) sig are reset to their original values. If
arg is the null string then this signal is ignored by the shell and by the commands it invokes. If sig is ERR then arg will be executed whenever a command has a non-zero exit code. This trap is not inherited by functions. If sig
is 0 or EXIT and the trap statement is executed inside the body of a function,
then the command arg is executed after the function completes. If sig is 0 or
EXIT for a trap set outside any function then the command arg is executed on
exit from the shell. The trap command with no arguments prints a list of commands associated with each signal number.

tt typeset

-HLRZfilprtuxn name =value
When invoked inside a function, a new instance of the parameter name is
created. The parameter value and type are restored when the function completes. The following list of attributes may be specified:
-H
This flag provides UNIX to host-name file mapping on non-UNIX
machines.

Commands

1-333

SysV

KSH(l)

-L

-R

-Z

-f

-i

-I

-p
-r
-t

-u

-x

KSH(l)

Left justify and remove leading blanks from value. If n is non-zero it
defines the width of the field, otherwise it is determined by the width
of the value of first assignment. When the parameter is assigned to, it
is filled on the right with blanks or truncated, if necessary, to fit into
the field. Leading zeros are removed if the -Z flag is also set. The
-R flag is turned off.
Right justify and fill with leading blanks. If n is non-zero it defines
the width of the field, otherwise it is determined by the width of the
value of first assignment. The field is left filled with blanks or truncated from the end if the parameter is reassigned. The L flag is turned
off.
Right justify and fill with leading zeros if the first non-blank character
is a digit and the -L flag has not been set. If n is non-zero it defines
the width of the field, otherwise it is detennined by the width of the
value of first assignment.
The names refer to function names rather than parameter names. No
assignments can be made and the only other valid flags are -t, which
turns on execution tracing for this function and -x, to allow the function to remain in effect across shell procedures executed in the same
process environment.
Parameter is an integer. This makes arithmetic faster. If n is nonzero it defines the output arithmetic base, otherwise the first assignment determines the output base.
All upper-case characters converted to lower-case. The upper-case
flag, -u is turned off.
The output of this command, if any, is written onto the two-way pipe
The given names are marked readonly and these names cannot be
changed by subsequent assignment.
Tags the named parameters. Tags are user definable and have no special meaning to the shell.
All lower-case characters are converted to upper-case characters. The
lower-case flag, -I is turned off.
The given names are marked for automatic export to the environment
of subsequently-executed commands.

Using + rather than - causes these flags to be turned off. If no name arguments are given but flags are specified, a list of names (and optionally the
values) of the parameters which have these flags set is printed. (Using +
rather than - keeps the values to be printed.) If no names and flags are given,
the names and attributes of all parameters are printed.

ulimit -acdfmpst n
-a
Lists all of the current resource limits (BSD only).
-d
imposes a size limit of n kbytes on the size of the data area (BSD
only).
1-334

Commands

SysV

KSH(l)

-f

-m
-p
-s
-t

KSH(l)

imposes a size limit of n 512 byte blocks on files written by
processes (files of any size may be read).
imposes a soft limit of n kbytes on the size of physical memory
only).
changes the pipe size to n (UNIX/RT only).
imposes a size limit of n kbytes on the size of the stack area
only).
imposes a time limit of n seconds to be used by each process
only).

child
(BSD

(BSD
(BSD

If no option is given, -f is assumed. If n is not given the current limit is
printed.
umask nnn
The user file-creation mask is set to nnn (see umask(2». If nlln is omitted, the
current value of the mask is printed.
unalias name ...
The parameters given by the list of names are removed from the alias list.
unset -f name ...
The parameters given by the list of name s are unassigned, i. e., their values
and attributes are erased. Readonly variables cannot be unset. If the flag, -f,
is set, then the names refer to function names.
ver [systype[commandl]
With no arguments, return the current value of the SYSTYPE environment
variable that specifies the version of UNIX commands being executed by the
shell. With a systype argument, change the SYSTYPE environment variable to
either bsd~.3 or s)"s5.3, depending on which is specified.
wait n Wait for the specified child process and report its termination status. If n is
not given then all currently active child processes are waited for. The return
code from this command is that of the process waited for.
whence -v name ...
For each name, indicate how it would be interpreted if used as a command
name. The flag -v produces a more verbose report.
Invocation.
If the shell is invoked by exec(2), and the first character of argument zero ($0) is -, then
the shell is assumed to be a logill shell and commands are read from jete/profile and
then from either .profile in the current directory or $HOME/.profile, if either file exists.
Next, commands are read from the file named by performing parameter substitution on
the value of the environment parameter ENV if the file exists. If the -s flag is not
present and arg is, then a path search is performed on the first arg to determine the
name of the script to execute. The script arg must have read permission and any setuid
and getgid settings will be ignored. Commands are then read as described below; the
following flags are interpreted by the shell when it is invoked:
Commands

1-335

KSH(l)

SysV

KSH(l)

-c string
-s

If the -c flag is present then commands are read from string.
If the -s flag is present or if no arguments remain then commands are
read from the standard input. Shell output, except for the output of the
Special commands listed above, is written to file descriptor 2.
-i
If the -i flag is present or if the shell input and output are attached to a
terminal (as told by ioctl (2» then this shell is interactive. In this case
TERM is ignored (so that kill 0 does not kill an interactive shell) and
INTR is caught and ignored (so that wait is interruptible). In all cases,
QUIT is ignored by the shell.
-r
If the -r flag is present the shell is a restricted shell.
-Oname=value
You can use the -0 option to specify a parameter name that will be set
to value and then passed into the shell's environment. This SysV option
is useful for tailoring the environment of a shell invoked from a program
that is not another shell (such as the Display Manager). If the ENV
parameter is given in this way, the startup script it specifies will be run.
Note that any number of -0 options can be specified.
The remaining flags and arguments are described under the set command above.
rksh Only
Note: SysV does not support rksh. rksh is used to set up login names and execution
environments whose capabilities are more controlled than those of the standard shell.
The actions of rksh are identical to those of ksh, except that the following are disallowed:
changing directory (see cd(1 »,
setting the value of SHELL, ENV, or PATH,
specifying path or command names containing I,
redirecting output (> and »).
The restrictions above are enforced after .profile and the ENV files are interpreted.
When a command to be executed is found to be a shell procedure, rksh invokes ksh to
execute it. Thus, it is possible to provide to the end-user shell procedures that have
access to the full power of the standard shell, while imposing a limited menu of commands; this scheme assumes that the end-user does not have write and execute permissions in the same directory.
The net effect of these rules is that the writer of the .profile has complete control over
user actions, by performing guaranteed setup actions and leaving the user in an
appropriate directory (probably not the login directory).
The system administrator often sets up a directory of commands (i.e., lusr/rhin) that
can be safely invoked by rksh Some systems also provide a restricted editor red.

1-336

Commands

SysV

KSH(I)

KSH(I)

EXIT STATUS

Errors detected by the shell, such as syntax errors, cause the shell to return a non-zero
exit status. Otherwise, the shell returns the exit status of the last command executed
(see also the exit command above). If the shell is being used non-interactively then
execution of the shell file is abandoned. Runtime errors detected by the shell are
reported by printing the command or function name and the error condition. If the line
number that the error occurred on is greater than one, then the line number is also
printed in square brackets ([]) after the command or function name.
CAVEATS

If a command which is a tracked alias is executed, and then a command with the same
name is installed in a directory in the search path before the directory where the original
command was found, the shell will continue to exee the original command. Use the-t
option of the alias command to correct this situation.
Some very old shell scripts contain a ' as a synonym for the pipe character I .
If a command is piped into a shell command, then all variables set in the shell command are lost when the command completes.
Using the fe built-in command within a compound command will cause the whole command to disappear from the history file.
The built-in command . file reads the whole file before any commands are executed.
Therefore, alias and unalias commands in the file will not apply to any functions
defined in the file.
FILES
/ete/passwd
/ete/profile
/etc/suid profile
$HOMEfprofile
/tmp/sh*
/dev/null
SEE ALSO

cat(l), cd(l), echo(l), emacs(l), env(l), gmacs(l), newgrp(l), test(l), umask(l), vi(l),
dup(2), exec(2), fork(2), ioctl(2), Iseek(2), pipe(2), signal(2), umask(2), ulirnit(2),
wait(2), rand(3), a.out(5), profile(5), environ(7).

Commands

1-337

LAS{l)

LAS{l)

Domain/OS SysV

NAME

las -list objects mapped into the address space
SYNOPSIS

las [options]
DESCRIPTION

las produces a list of objects mapped into the address space. Information printed
includes the virtual address range, the starting address within the object, and its pathname if available (in that order).
This command is most useful for system-level debugging.
OPTIONS

H no options are specified, las lists the address space of the current process.
List all address space, including that occupied by Aegis.

-all

-f[rom] address

Begin listing at the hexadecimal address specified.

-t[o] address

End listing at the hexadecimal address specified.

EXAMPLES

1.
$ las
VA Range
8000
18000
30000
38000
50000
58000
68000

-

ADOOO ABOOO cOOOO E8000
F8000
100000
128000
150000
158000
160000
170000
188000

1-338

-

17FFF
2FFFF
37FFF
4FFFF
57FFF
67FFF
9FFFF
A7FFF
BFFFF
E7FFF
F7FFF
FFFFF
127FFF
14FFFF
157FFF
15FFFF
16FFFF
187FFF
19FFFF

Obj Start
0
0
0
0
0
10000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
20000
0
0

Pathname
/sys/node_data/global_data
/lib/pmlib
/lib/syslib.peb
/lib/kslib
/lib/trait_type_lib
/sys/node_data/global_data
/lib/streams
/lib/vfmt_streams
/lib/error
/lib/swtlib
/lib/ftnlib
/lib/pbulib
/lib/gprlib
/lib/clib
/lib/lisp_initlib
/sys/node_data/global_rws
/sys/node_data/global_data
/lib/shlib
/lib/tfp

Commands

LAS(l)

Domain/OS SysY

lAOOOO
lCOOOO
IDOOOO
200000
2BOOOO
2B8000
2COOOO
2C8000
2DOOOO
BCOOOO
BDOOOO

-

IBFFFF
lC7FFF
ID7FFF
2AFFFF
2B7FFF
2BFFFF
2C7FFF
2CFFFF
2F7FFF
BCFFFF
BDFFFF

o
o
30000

o
o
o
o
o
BOOOO

o
o

LAS(l)

/lib/dialoglib
/sys/node_data/ipc_data
/sys/node_data/global_data
-- temporary file -/sys/node_data/dm_mbx
/com/sh
-- temporary file
/com/las
-- temporary file
/help_area/worksite
/ jtj

2944 KB mapped.
2.
$ las -from 188000

VA Range
188000
lAOOOO
lCOOOO
lDOOOO
200000
2BOOOO
2B8000
2COOOO
2C8000
2DOOOO
BCOOOO
BDOOOO

-

19FFFF
lBFFFF
lC7FFF
lD7FFF
2AFFFF
2B7FFF
2BFFFF
2C7FFF
2CFFFF
2F7FFF
BCFFFF
BDFFFF

Obj Start
0
0
0
30000
0
0
0
0
0
BOOOO
0
0

Pathname
/lib/tfp
/lib/dialoglib
/sys/node_data/ipc_data
/sys/node_data/global_data
-- temporary file - /sys/node_data/dm_mbx
/com/sh
- - temporary file
/com/las
-- temporary file
/help_area/worksite
/ jt j

1408 KB mapped.

Commands

1-339

LAS(l)

LAS(l)

Domain/OS SysV

3.
$ las -f 188000 -t 200000

VA Range
188000 -

lAGOOO lCOOOO IDOOOO -

19FFFF
IBFFFF
lC7FFF
ID7FFF

Obj Start

Pathname

o
o
o

I lib Itfp

30000

llibl dialoglib
Isys/node_data/ipc_data
Isys/node_data/global_data

288 KB mapped.

1-340

Commands

LBR2AR(1)

Domain/OS SysY

LBR2AR(1)

NAME

Ibr2ar - convert lbr libraries to SR10 archive libraries
SYNOPSIS

Ibr2ar [-y dirnamej lbrfile arfile
DESCRIPTION

The Ibr2ar command converts pre-SRlO lbr library files containing object modules in
OBJ format to SRI0 ar library archive files containing object modules in COFF fonnat.
The Ibr2ar command extracts each object module from the lbrfile, executes the
obj2coff converter to convert them to COFF, and creates a library archive (arfi/e) containing the converted object modules. Note that both the library fonnat and the fonnat
of the individual object modules are changed.
OPTIONS

-ydirname

This option allows you to specify a new pathnarne, dirname, for the location of obj2coff. The new pathname for
obj2coff is dirname/obj2coff. The default pathname for
obj2coff is lusr/apollo/bin.

FILES

lusr/apollo/bin/obj2coff

obj 2coff converter

/tmp/obj/*

Temporary files

Itmp/coffl *

Temporary files

SEE ALSO

obj2coff(l), ar(l).

Commands

1-341

Domain/OS SysV

LCM(l)

LCM(l)

NAME
lem - load a color map
SYNOPSIS

Icrn [-p pathname]
DESCRIPTION

Icm loads a color map from a file that specifies a set of color map entries. Each entry
establishes an association between an index and a color value. When the OM is initially loaded, it sets the node's color map from the file in /sys/dm/color_map.
If no pathname is given, Icrn loads the color map from /sys/dm/eolor_map. In this
case, all 16 colors (that is, color entries for color slots 0-15) are reloaded. If you
specify a,pathname, lern reads the given file and tries to load the colors associated with
the indexes.
NOTE

If there are direct mode graphics programs running that have changed the color values
for color slots 0-15, the execution changes the colors in these windows as well as resetting the OM's colors.
OPTIONS

-p pathname Specify the file that contains the color values for red, green, and blue.
The fonnat of this file should be identical to the OM's color map file,
/sys/dm/eolor_map. For more infonnation about the fonnat of this file,
please refer to the manual Programming with Domain Graphics Primitives.
EXAMPLES

Load the OM's color map found in the file /sys/dm/eolor_map.
$lcrn
Load the color map specified in the file my_eolorrnap.
$ lcm -p my_colormap

1-342

Conunands

SysV

LD(l)

LD(l)

NAME

Id -link editor for common object files
SYNOPSIS

Id [options] filename
DESCRIPTION

Id combines several object files into one, performs relocation, resolves external symbols, and supports symbol table information for symbolic debugging. In the simplest
case, the names of several object programs are given, and Id combines the objects, producing an object module that can either be executed or, if the -r option is specified,
used as input for a subsequent Id run. Id' s output is left in a.out. By default this file is
executable if no errors occurred during the load. If any input file (jilename) is not an
object file, Id assumes it is either an archive library or a text file containing link editor
directives.
If any argument is a library, it is searched once at the point it is encountered in the argument list. Only those routines defining an unresolved external reference are loaded.
The library (archive) symbol table (see ar (4)) is searched sequentially with as many
passes as are necessary to resolve external references which can be satisfied by library
members. Thus, the ordering of library members is functionally unimportant, unless
there exist multiple library members defining the same external symbol.
OPTIONS

-a

Creates an absolute file. This is the default if the -r option is not used.
Used with the -r option, -a allocates memory for common symbols.

-e epsym

Sets the default entry point address for the output file to be that of the
symbol epsym.

-f fill

Sets the default fill pattern for "holes" within an output section as well
as initialized bss sections. The argument fill is a two-byte constant.

-b:

Searches a library libx .a, where x is up to nine characters. A library is
searched when its name is encountered, so the placement of a -I is
significant. By default, libraries are located in LIBDlR or LLIBDIR.

-L dir

Changes the algorithm of searching for libx.a to look in dir before looking in LIBDIR and LLIBDlR. This option is effective only if it precedes the -I option on the command line.

-m

Produces a map or listing of the input/output sections on the standard
output.

-M

Outputs a message for each multiply-defined external definition.

Commands

1-343

SysV

LD(l)

1-344

LD(l)

-ooutfile

Produces an output object file by the name outfile. The name of the
default object file is a.out.

-r

Retains relocation entries in the output object file. Relocation entries
must be saved if the output file is to become an input file in a subsequent
ld run. The link editor does not notice unresolved references, and the
output file is not executable unless -a is also specified.

-s

Strips line number entries and symbol table information from the output
object file.

-t

Turns off the warning about multiply-defined symbols that are not the
same size.

-u symname

Enters symname as an undefined symbol in the symbol table. This is
useful for loading entirely from a library, since initially the symbol table
is empty and an unresolved reference is needed to force the loading of
the first routine. The placement of this option on the Id line is significant;
it must be placed before the library which will define the symbol.

-V

Outputs a message giving information about the version of Id being
used.

-VS num

Uses num as a decimal version stamp identifying the a.out file that is
produced. The version stamp is stored in the optional header.

-x

Does not preserve local symbols in the output symbol table; enters external and static symbols only. This option saves some space in the output
file.

-Y{LUj,dir

Changes the default directory used for finding libraries. If L is specified,
the first default directory Id searches, LIBDIR, is replaced by dir. If U
is specified, and Id has been built with a second default directory, LLIBDlR, then that directory is replaced by dir. If Id was built with only one
default directory and U is specified, a warning is printed and the option
is ignored.

-T systype

Defines the target system type (systype) for the compiled object. Same
as -A sys[type],sys.

Commands

LD(I)

SysV

LO(I)

Domain/OS SysV EXTENSIONS
The Domain/OS SysV version of Id, includes support for features which are not available on System V. Domain Id includes support for the following extensions: Static
Resource Information records (.sri), Module Information records (.mir), and control of
global variable visibility.
Each of the following options must be preceded by the -A switch.
-A sys[type],sys

Sets the environment variable SYSTYPE to sys while Id is running. If
sys is any, SYSTYPE is not reset. A Static Resource Information (SRI)
record for systype is produced. This option is useful to set the resolution
of systype-dependent links; e.g., if your systype is bsd4.3, and you
-A
systype,sysS.3,
lusr/lib/libm.a
resolves
to
specify:
IsysS.3/usr/lib/libm.a, instead of Ibsd4.3/usrllib/libm.a.
-A run[type],sys

Determines the system call semantics of the object module. For example, if you specify ·A systype,any, and specify -A runtype,bsd4.3, the
executable resolves pathnames according to your current SYSTYPE
value, but always uses bsd4.3 system call semantics.
-A stacksize,hexnum

Produces a stacksize (SRI) with the specified value; hexnum is a one to
eight digit hexadecimal number, optionally preceded by Ox or OX.
-A exp[unge],syml,sym2

Removes the defined global symbol from the symbol table. No subsequent link runs (using Id or bind) will be able to resolve to this symbol.
The symbol will not be entered into the KGT if this object is installed,
nor will it be visible if this object is part of an archive.
-A a\lexp[unge] [-A keep[sym],syml,sym2]

Expunges all defined symbols except those specified. If this option
appears multiple times, all symbols specified will be kept in the symbol
table.
-A looks[ection],secl ,sec2

Makes the named section available for sharing with a public section in
an installed library,
-A all\ooks[ection]

Makes all sections available for sharing with their counterpart public
sections in an installed library.

Commands

1-345

SysV

LD(l)

LD(l)

-A marks[ection],sec1 ,sec2
Makes the specified section names (sec1 ,sec2) public. Affects only
those object files that ate destined to be installed as an installed library.
-A allmarks[ection]
Makes all sections public. Mfects only those object files that are destined to be installed as an installed library.
-A nolooks[ection],sec1 ,sec2
Makes the named sections (sec,sec2) unavailable for shating.
-A allnolooks[ection]

Makes all data named sections unavailable for shating.
-A nomarks[ection],sec1 ,sec2
Makes the named sections private.
-A allnomarks[ection]

Makes all sections private.
-A inlib,pathnamei ,pathname2
Specifies the pathnames of the libraries to be installed at load time.
-A noinlib,pathname1 ,pathname2
Deletes the named libraries from the list of libraries to be installed at
load time.
-A load high Creates an Static Resource Infonnation (SRI) record to instruct the

loader to load the object at the "high" end of memory for positionindependent code.
-A module,name

Specifies the object module name of the output binary file. This name
will be stored in an object file Module Infonnation Record (MIR). The
default name of the object module is the name of the first object module
read.
-A nosys[tem]

Does not make system globals visible (turns off the check in the KGT
(Known Global Table) and installed libraries).
-A allres[olved]

Exits with an error status if unresolved references exist. This is the
default.
-A noallres[olved]

Tenninates successfully even if unresolved references exist (providing
there ate no other errors during linking). This option is useful when running Id from shell scripts or other drivers, such as Ibin/cc, or Ibin/make.

1-346

Commands

SysV

LO(I)

LD(I)

CAVEATS

Through its options and input ditectives, the common link editor provides great flexibility; however, you must assume some added responsibilities. Input ditectives and
options should ensure the following properties for programs:
•

C defines a zero pointer as null. A pointer to which zero has been assigned must not
point to any object. To satisfy this, you must not place any object at vittual address
zero in the program's address space.

•

When the link editor is called through cc (1), a startup routine is linked with your
program. This routine calls exitO after execution of the main program. If you call
the link editor ditectly, you must ensure that the program always calls exitO rather
than falling through the end of the entry routine (see exit(2».

The symbols etext, edata, and end (see end(3C» are reserved and are defined by the
link editor. Your program may not redefine them.
If the link editor does not recognize an input file as an object file or an archive file, it
assumes that it contains link editor ditectives and attempts to parse it. This occasionally produces an error message complaining about "syntax errors".
Arithmetic expressions can only have one forward-referenced symbol per expression.
FILES

LIBDIR/libx.a
LLIBDlR/libx.a
a.out
LIBDIR
LLIBDlR

Libraries
Libraries
Output file
Usually /lib
Usually lusr/lib

SEE ALSO

ar(l), cc(l), end(3), ar(5), a.out(5), systype(lM)

Commands

l-34i

SysV

LEX(l)

LEX(l)

NAME
lex - generate programs for simple lexical tasks
SYNOPSIS

lex [ -retvn J [file J .,.
DESCRIPTION

lex generates programs to be used in simple lexical analysis of text.
The input files (standard input default) contain strings and expressions to be searched
for, and C text to be executed when strings are found.
The file lex.yy.e is generated. When loaded with the library, this file copies the input to
the output except when a string specified in the file is found; then the corresponding
program text is executed. The actual string matched is left in yytext, an external character array. Matching is done in order of the strings in the file. Strings can contain
square brackets to indicate character classes, as in [abx-zJ to indicate a, b, x, y, and z;
and the operators *, +, and? mean respectively any non-negative number of, any positive number of, and either zero or one occurrence of, the previous character or character
class. The character. is the class of all ASCII characters except newline. Parentheses
for grouping and vertical bar for alternation are also supported.
The notation r{d ,e} in a rule indicates between d and e instances of regular expression
r. It has higher precedence than I, but lower than *, ?, +, and concatenation. Thus
[a-zA-ZJ+ matches a string of letters. The character' at the beginning of an expression permits a successful match only immediately after a newline, and the character $ at
the end of an expression requires a trailing newline. The character / in an expression
indicates trailing context; only the part of the expression up to the slash is returned in
yytext, but the remainder of the expression must follow in the input stream. An operator character can be used as an ordinary symbol if it is used within double quotes (n), or
preceded by a backs lash ( \).
Three subroutines defined as macros are expected: inputO to read a character;
unput(c) to replace a character read; and output(c) to place an output character. They
are defined in terms of the standard streams, but you can override them. The program
generated is named yylex(), and the library contains a main function (mainOl that calis
it. The action REJECT on the right side of the rule causes this match to be rejected and
the next suitable match executed; the function yymore() accumulates additional characters into the same yytext; and the function yyless(p) pushes back the portion of the
string matched beginning at p, which should be between yytext and yytext+yyleng. The
macros input and output use files yyin and yyout to read from and write to, defaulted to
stdin and stdout, respectively.

1-348

Commands

SysV

LEX(1)

LEX(1)

Any line beginning with a blank: is assumed to contain only C text and is copied; if it
precedes double percent characters (%%) it is copied into the external definition area of
the lex.yy.c file. All rules should follow a % %, as in YACC. Lines preceding % %
which begin with a non-blank: character define the string on the left to be the remainder
of the line; it can be called out later by surrounding it with {}. Note that curly brackets
do not imply parentheses; only string substitution is done.
External names generated by lex all begin with the prefix yy or YY.
Certain table sizes for the resulting finite state machine can be set in the definitions section:
%p n

number of positions is n (default 2500)

%n n

number of states is n (500)

%e n

number of parse tree nodes is n (1000)

%a n

number of transitions is n (2000)

%k n

number of packed character classes is n (1000)

%0 n

size of output array is n (3000)

The use of one or more of the above automatically implies the -v option, unless the -n
option is used.
OPTIONS
-r

Indicates RA1FOR actions.

-c

Indicates C actions. This is the default.

-t

Causes the lex.yy.c program to be written instead to standard output.

-v

Provides a one-line summary of staristics.

-n

Does not print out the -v summary.

Multiple files are treated as a single file. If no files are specified, standard input is used.

Commands

1-349

LEX(l)

LEX(l)

SysV

EXAMPLE
D

[0-9]

%%
if
[a-z]+
O{D}+
{D}+
"++"

"+"
"/*"

printf("IF statement\n");
printf("tag, value %s\n",yytext);
printf("octal number %s\n",yytext);
printf("decimal number %s\n",yytext);
printf("unary op\n");
printf ("binary op\n");
skipcommnts () ;

%%
skipcommnts ()
(

for (;;)
while (input ()

!= '*')

if (input () != 'I')
unput(yytext[yyleng-l]);
else
return;

BUGS
The -r option is not yet fully operational.
SEE ALSO

yacc(I).
Domain/OS Programming Environment Reference.

1-350

Conunands

LINE(l)

SysV

LINE(l)

NAME

line - read one line
SYNOPSIS

line
DESCRIPTION

line copies one line (up to a newline) from the standard input and writes it on the standard output. It returns an exit code of 1 on EOF and always prints at least a newline. It
is often used within shell files to read from the user's terminal.
SEE ALSO

sh(l).
read(2) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

Commands

1-351

SysV

LINT(l)

LINT(l)

NAME
lint - a C program checker
SYNOPSIS

lint [ option] ... file ...
DESCRIPTION

lint attempts to detect features of C program files that are likely to be bugs, nonportable, or wasteful. It also checks type usage more strictly than the compilers.
Among the things that ate currently detected ate:
•

Unreachable statement

•

Loops not entered at the top

•

Automatic vatiables declated and not used

•

Logical expressions whose value is constant

•

Functions that return values in some places and not in others

•

Functions called with varying numbers or types of atguments

•

Functions whose values ate not used or whose values ate used but none returned.

Arguments whose names end with .c ate taken to be C source files. Arguments whose
names end with .In ate taken to be the result of an eatlier invocation of lint with either
the -c or the -0 option used. The.ln files ate analogous to .0 (object) files that ate produced by the cc( 1) command when given a .c file as input. Files with other suffixes are
wamed about and ignored.
lint takes all the .c, .In, and IIib·Ix.In (specified by -Ix) files and processes them in their
command line order. By default, lint appends the standatd C lint library (lIib·lc.ln) to
the end of the list of files. However, if the -p option is used, the portable C lint library
(lIib-port.In) is appended instead. When the -c option is not used, the second pass of
lint checks this list of files for mutual compatibility. When the -c option is used, the
.In and the IIib·lx .In files ate ignored.
Any number of lint options can be used, in any order, intermixed with file-name atguments.
OPTIONS

Options to Suppress Complaints

1-352

-a

Suppresses complaints about assignments of long values to vatiables that
ate not long.

-b

Suppresses complaints about break statements that cannot be reached.
(Programs produced by lex or yacc often result in many such complaints).

-h

Does not apply heuristic tests that attempt to intuit bugs, improve style,
and reduce waste.
Commands

SysV

LINT(l)

LINT(l)

-u

Suppresses complaints about functions and external variables used and
not defined, or defined and not used. (This option is suitable for running
lint on a subset of files of a larger program).

-v

Suppresses complaints about unused arguments in functions.

-x

Does not report variables referred to by external declarations but never
used.

Options That Alter lint's Behavior
-b:

Includes additional lint library IIib-lx.ln. For example, you can include
a lint version of the math library IIib-lm.ln by inserting -1m on the command line. This argument does not suppress the default use of IIib-lc.ln.
These lint libraries must be in the assumed directory. This option can be
used to reference local lint libraries and is useful in the development of
multi-file projects.

-n

Does not check compatibility against either the standard or the portable
lint library.

-p

Attempts to check portability to other dialects (mM and GeOS) of C.
Along with stricter checking, this option causes all non-external names
to be truncated to eight characters and all external names to be truncated
to six characters and one case.

-c

Causes lint to produce a .In file for every .c file on the command line.
These .In files are the product of lint's first pass only, and are not
checked for inter-function compatibility.

-() lib

Causes lint to create a lint library with the name IIib-llib.ln. The-c
option nullifies any use of the -() option. The lin t library produced is the
input given to lint's second pass. The -() option simply causes this file
to be saved in the named lint library. To produce a IIib-llib.ln without
extraneous messages, use the -x option. The -v option is useful if the
source file(s) for the lint library are just external interfaces (for example,
the way the file IIib-lc is written). These option settings are also available through the use of "lint comments" (see below).

The -0, -U, and -1 options of cpp(l) and the -g and -0 options of cc(l) are also
recognized as separate arguments. The -g and -0 options are ignored, but, by recognizing these options, lint's behavior is closer to that of the cc(l) command. Other
options are warned about and ignored. The pre-processor symbol "lint" is defined to
allow certain questionable code to be altered or removed for lint. Therefore, the symbol "lint" should be thought of as a reserved word for all code that is planned to be
checked by lint.

Commands

1-353

SysV

LINT(I)

LINT(l)

Certain conventional conunents in the C source change the behavior of lint:
/*NOTREACHED*/

At appropriate points stops conunents about unreachable code. (This
conunent is typically placed just after calls to functions like exit(2».
/*VARARGSn*/

Suppresses the usual checking for variable numbers of arguments in
the following function declaration. The data types of the first n arguments are checked; a missing n is taken to be O.
/*ARGSUSED*/

Turns on the -v option for the next function.
/*LINTLIBRARY*/

At the beginning of a file shuts off complaints about unused functions
and function arguments in this file. This is equivalent to using the -v
and -x options.
lint produces its first output on a per-source-file basis. Complaints regarding included
files are collected and printed after all source files have been processed. Finally, if the
-c option is not used, information gathered from all input files is collected and checked
for consistency. At this point, if it is not clear whether a complaint stems from a given
source file or from one of its included files, the source file name is printed followed by a
question mark.
The behavior of the -c and the -0 options allows for incremental use of lint on a set of
C source files. Generally, one invokes lint once for each source file with the -c option.
Each of these invocations produces a .In file which corresponds to the .c file, and prints
all messages that are about just that source file. After all the source files have been
separately run through lint, it is invoked once more (without the -c option), listing all
the .In files with the needed -Ix options. This prints all the inter-file inconsistencies.
This scheme works well with make(l); it allows make to lint only the source files that
have been modified since the last time the set of source files were linted.
BUGS

exit(2), setjmp(3C), and other functions that do not return are not understood; this
causes various lies.
FlLES
The directory where the lint libraries specified by the -Ix option
must exist, usually lusr/lib
LLIBDlR/lint[12j
First and second passes
LLIBDlR/llib-lc.ln Declarations for C Library functions (binary format; source is in
LLIBDlR/llib-lc )
LLIBDlR/llib-port.ln Declarations for portable functions (binary format; source is in
LLIBDlR/llib-port )
LLIBDlR/llib-lm.ln Declarations for Math Library functions (binary format; source
is in LLIBDlR/llib-lm )
LLIBDlR

1-354

Conunands

SysV

LINT(l)

TMPDIR/*lint*
TMPDIR

LINT(l)

Temporaries
Usually /usr/tmp but can be redefined by setting the environment variable TMPDIR (see tempnam() in tmpnam(3S».

SEE ALSO

cc(l), cpp(l), make(l).

Commands

1-355

SysV

LIST(l)

LIST(l)

NAME

list - produce C source listing from a common object file
SYNOPSIS

list [

-v 1 [-h]

[ -F function] source-file . .. [ object-file]

DESCRIPTION

list produces a C source listing with line number information attached. If multiple C
source files were used to create the object file, list accepts multiple file names. The
object file is taken to be the last non-C source file argument. If no object file is
specified, the default object file, a.out, is used.
Line numbers are printed for each line marked as breakpoint inserted by the compiler
(generally, each executable C statement that begins a new line of source). Line
numbering begins again for each function. Line number 1 is always the line containing
the left brace ( {) that begins the function body. Line numbers are also supplied for
inner block redec1arations of local variables so that they can be distinguished by the
symbolic debugger.
OPTIONS

-V

Prints, on standard error, the version number of the list command executing.

-h

Suppresses heading output.

-Ffunction

Lists only the named function. The -F option can be specified multiple
times on the command line.

CAVEATS

Object files given to list must have been compiled with the -g option of cc( 1).
Since list does not use the C preprocessor, it may be unable to recognize function
definitions whose syntax has been distorted by the use of C preprocessor macro substitutions.
DIAGNOSTICS

list produces the error message "list: name: cannot open" if fUlme cannot be read. If
the source file names do not end in .c , the message is "list: name: invalid C source
name". An invalid object file causes the message "list: name: bad magic" to be produced. If some or all of the symbolic debugging information is missing, one of the following messages is printed: "list: name: symbols have been stripped, cannot proceed",
"list: name: cannot read line numbers", and "list: name: not in symbol table". The
following messages are produced when list has become confused by #ifdef's in the
source file: "list: name: cannot find function in symbol table", "list: name: out of
sync: too many I", and "list: name: unexpected end-of-file". The error message "list:
name: missing or inappropriate line numbers" means that either symbol debugging
information is missing, or list has been confused by C preprocessor statements.
SEE ALSO

cc(l),ld(l).

1-356

Commands

LLlB(l)

Domain/OS SysV

LLIB(l)

NAME

iii b - list installed libraries
SYNOPSIS

IIib [ -a ]
DESCRIPTION

The IIib command lists those libraries which have been installed in the current process
via the build-in inlib shell. These libraries are used to resolve unknown references
when loading a program. To find out if a symbol is known and will be used in resolving an unknown reference, use esa.
OPTIONS

-a

Also list those libraries which are known globally to every process. These
libraries are installed at boot time using the configuration information in
/etc/sys.conf.

SEE ALSO

she 1), csh(1), ksh( 1)

Commands

1-357

LLKOB(l)

LLKOB(l)

Domain/OS SysV

NAME
IIkob - list locked objects

SYNOPSIS
IIkob [options]
DESCRIPTION
IIkob lists the locked objects resident on volumes mounted on this node, and objects

resident in other nodes that are locked by processes running locally.
The listing for each object includes the locking constraints imposed on the object (for
example, n-readers XOR I-writer), the specific lock mode being used (for example,
read, write, read-intending-write), the network node 1D of the node at which the object
is located, the node 1D of the node in which the locking process is active, and the name
(if it is available) of the object itself.
OPTIONS
-r[emote]

-c[ount]

Specify list of only those objects that either reside on this node and are
locked by another node, or reside on another node and are locked by this
node (that is, those objects whose locks are in some way remote).
List only a one-line summary of the number of objects locked.

EXAMPLES
$lIkob

USE
W
R
W
R

W

CONSTRAINT
nR
nR
nR
nR
nR

xor
xor
xor
xor
xor

-

lW
lW
lW
lW
lW

HOME
NODE
21
21
21
21
21

LOCKING
NODE
21
21
21
21
21

FILE
/sys/dm/pclb
/sys/dm/fonts/std
--Temporary File---Uncataloged Permanent File---Display Manager Pad--

$lIkob -c
locked: 102 -- 100 local, 2 remote; 100 locally locked, 2 remotely

1-358

Commands

SysV

LN(l)

LN(l)

NAME
In - create a hard or soft link
SYNOPSIS
In name [ target 1
In -s name target
In name ... directory
DESCRIPTION
In creates both hard and soft links. A link is a directory entry that refers to a file. You

can have several links, in one or more directories, to the same file. Changes to a file are
effective whether or not the file is referenced through a link.
A hard link is indistinguishable from the original directory entry. Hard links may not
span file systems and may not refer to directories.
A soft (or symbolic) link contains a pathname. Symbolic links may span file systems
and may refer to directories.
An open(2) operation on a link opens the referenced file. A stat(2) on a soft link is
equivalent to a stat on the file that the link points to. Use Istat(2) to obtain infonnation
about the link itself. The readlink(2) call is useful for reading the contents of a soft
link.

Given one or two arguments, In creates a link to an existing file name. If target is
given, the link has that name. The target argument may also be a directory in which to
place the link. If target is not a directory, the link is placed in the current directory.
When the -s option is used, In requires that a target be specified. If target exists, In -s
will fail. If only the directory is specified, the link is made to the last component of
name.
Given more than two arguments, In makes links to all the named files in the named
directory. The links made will have the same name as the files being linked to.
OPTIONS
-f

-s

Forces creation of the link if pennitted by access modes (hard links
only).
Creates soft (symbolic) links.

NOTE

By default, In generates a hard link.
SEE ALSO

cp(l), mV(I), nn(1), link(2), readlink(2), Istat(2), stat(2).

Commands

1-359

LOGGER(l)

SysV

LOGGER(l)

NAME

logger - make entries in the system log
SYNOPSIS
logger [ -t tag] [ -p pri ] [ -i ] [ -f file] [ message ... ]
DESCRIPTION
logger provides a program interface to the syslog(3) system log module.
You can give logger a message on the command line, which is logged immediately, or
logger can read a file and log each line.
OPTIONS
-t tag

Mark every line in the log with the specified tag.

-ppri

Enter the message with the specified priority. You can specify the priority numerically or as a "facility.level" pair. For example, -p
local3.info logs the message(s) as informational level in the local3 facility. The default is "user.notice."

-i

Log the process ID of the logger process with each line.

-fjile

Log the specified file.

message

The message to log; if you do not specify one, logger logs the -f file or
standard input.

EXAMPLES
$ logger System rebooted

$ logger -p localO.notice -t HOSTIDM -f Idev/idmc

SEE ALSO
syslog(3), syslogd(IM)

1-360

Commands

LOGIN(l)

SysV

LOGIN(l)

NAME

login - sign on
SYNOPSIS

login [ -p

1 [ username 1 [ env-var

...

1

DESCRIPTION

The login command is used when a user initially signs on, or it may be used at any time
to change from one user to another. The latter case is the one summarized above and
described here. See Getting Started with Domain/OS for information on initially logging in.
If login is invoked without an argument, it prompts you for a username, and, if
appropriate, a password. Echoing is turned off (if possible) while you type the password, so it will not appear on the written record of the session.
At some installations, an option may be invoked that requires you to enter a second
"dialup" password. This only occurs for dial-up connections, and is prompted by the
message "dialup password: ". Both passwords are required for a successful login.
After a successful login, accounting files are updated and the operating environment is
set from the -I.environ file if it exists, or from letc/environ if-I.environ doesn't exist.
If your environment is BSD, you are informed of the existence of mail (see maH(l».
For all environments, the message of the day (fetc/motd) is printed. Both are
suppressed if you have a .hushlogin file in your home directory; this is mostly used to
make life easier for non-human users, such as uucp(IC).
The login command initializes the user and group IDs and the working directory, and
modifies the environment as follows (see environ(7».
The basic SysV environment is initialized to:
HOME=your-log-in-directory
LOGNAME=your-log-in-name
MAIL=/usr/mail/your-log-in-name
NODEID=your-node's-hexadecimal-id
NODETYPE=yollr-node's-model-nllmber
ORGANIZATION=yollr-organization-name
P A TH=:/bin :/usr/bin:/usr/a polio/bin
PROJECT=your-project-name
SHELL=last-field-of-passwd-entry
SYSTYPE=sysS.3
TERM=yollr-terminal-type
TZ=timezone-specification
USER=your-log-in-name

Commands

1-361

SysV

LOGIN(l)

LOGIN(l)

The basic BSO environment is initialized to:

HOME=your-log-in-directory
LOGNAME=your-log-in-name
MAIL=lusrlspooIlmail/your-log-in-name
NOOEID=your-node's-hexadecirnal-id
NODETYPE=your-node's-model-number
ORGANIZATION=your-organization-name
PA1H=:/usr/ucb:/bin:/usr/bin:/usr/apollo/bin

PROJECT=your-project-name
SHELL=last-field-of-passwd-entry
SYSTYPE=bsd4.3

TERM=your-terminal-type
TZ=timezone-specijication
USER=your-log-in-name
The -p argument causes the remainder of the environment to be preserved, otherwise
any previous environment is discarded.
The environment can be expanded or modified by supplying additional arguments to
login, either at execution time or when login requests your log-in name. Arguments can
or ==yyy. Arguments without an equal sign are placed in the
take either the form
environment as
Ln==
where n is a number starting at 0 and is incremented each time a new variable name is
required. Variables containing = are placed in the environment without modification.
If they already appear in the environment, then they replace the older value, with two
exceptions. The variables PATH and SHELL cannot be changed. Both login and getty
understand simple single-character quoting conventions. Typing a backslash in front of
a character quotes it and allows the inclusion of such things as spaces and tabs.

=

After setting up the environment, login executes a command interpreter (for example, a
shell) as specified in the last field of your letc/passwd file entry. If this field in
letc/passwd is empty, the default command interpreter is Ibin/sh for the BSO and SysV
environments, and Icornlsh for the Aegis environment. See csh(l), ksh{l), and sh(l)
for a description of the shell's startup behavior. Argument 0 of the command interpreter
is the name of the command interpreter with a leading dash ("-").
NOTES

If the file letc/nologin exists, login prints the contents of this file on your terminal and
exits. This is used by shutdown(8) to stop you from logging in when the system is
about to go down.

login is recognized by sh(l) and csh(l) and executed directly (without forking).
An undocumented option, -r is used by the remote login server, rlogind(lM) to force

login to enter into an initial connection protocol. -h is used by telnetd{lM) and other
servers to list the host from which the connection was received.

1-362

Commands

SysY

LOGIN(I)

LOGIN(I)

SECURITY
Sites wishing additional security protection on dial-up lines may want to use these security features, letc/d_users and letc/d_passwd. letc/d_users is simply a file containing a
list of users authorized to log in on this node.
Ietcl d _passwd is a file containing lines of the following format:
Ibin/sh:encrypted-password

where encrypted-password is the dial-in password for the specified shell as returned by
crypt(3). If an entry for the user's log-in shell is not found in this file, the password for
Ibin/sh is used.
FILES
letc/utmp
letc/wtmp
lusr/mail/your-name
letc/motd
letc/passwd
.hushlogin

Accounting
Accounting
Mailbox for user your-name
Message of the day
Password file
Makes login quieter

DIAGNOSTICS

"Login incorrect," U semame or password cannot be matched.
"No Shell", "cannot open password file", "no directory": consult a UNIX system
programming counselor.
BUGS

login( 1) is not currently used for logging into the Display Manager or the Server Process Manager, although the procedure used by those programs is similar.
The System Y Release 3 facility for using a "*" in the shell field of the letc/passwd file
is not supported by Domain/OS.
SEE ALSO
mail(l), newgrp(l), sh(l), su(IM).
passwd(4), profile(4), environ(5) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

Commands

1-363

LOGNAME(1)

SysV

LOGNAME(l)

NAME
logname - get login name
SYNOPSIS

logname
DESCRIPTION

logname returns the contents of the environment variable $LOGNAME, which is set
when a user logs into the system.
FILES

/ etc/ profile
SEE ALSO

env(l),login(l).
logname(3X), environ(5) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

1-364

Commands

SysV

LORDER(l)

LORDER(l)

NAME
lorder - find ordering relation for an object library
SYNOPSIS

lorder file .•.
DESCRIPTION

Input is one or more object or library archive files (see ar(l». Standard output is a list
of pairs of object file or archive member names, meaning that the first file of the pair
refers to external identifiers defined in the second. Output may be processed by tsort(l)
to find an ordering of a library suitable for one-pass access by Id(l). Note that the link
editor Id(l) is capable of multiple passes over an archive in the portable archive format
[see ar(4)] and does not require that lorder(l) be used when building an archive. Using
10rder(l) may, however, allow for a slightly more efficient access of the archive during
the link edit process.
The following example builds a new library from existing .0 files.
ar -cr library 'Iorder *.0 tsort'
FILES

TMPDlR/*symref
TMPDlR/*symdef

Temporary files
Temporary files

TMPDIR is usually lusr/tmp but can be redefined by setting the environment variable
TMPDlR (see tempnamO in tmpnam(3S».

CAVEAT
(order accepts as input any object or archive file, regardless of its suffix, provided there
is more than one input file. If there is but a single input file, its suffix must be .0.
SEE ALSO

ar(l), Id(l), tsort(l), ar(4).

Commands

1-365

LP(l)

SysV

LP(l)

NAME

Ip, cancel - send/cancel requests to an LP line printer
SYNOPSIS

Ip [--c] [-ddest] [-m] [-nnumber] [-ooption] [-s] [-tritle] [-wfiles]
cancel [ids] [printers]
DESCRIPTION

Ip arranges for the named files and associated information (collectively called a
"request") to be printed by a line printer. If no file names are mentioned, the standard
input is assumed. A dash (-) used as a file name indicates the standard input and may
be supplied on the command line in conjunction with namedfiles. The order in which
files appear is the same order in which they will be printed.
Ip associates a unique "id" with each request and prints it on the standard output. This
id can be used later to cancel (see cancel) or find the status (see Ipstat(l» of the
request.
OPTIONS

The following options to Ip may appear in any order and may be intermixed with file
names:

1-366

--c

Makes copies ofthefile(s) to be printed immediately when Ip is invoked.
Normally, files will not be copied, but will be linked whenever possible.
If the --c option is not given, then you should be careful not to remove
any of the filers) before the request has been printed completely.
Without the --c option, any changes made to the named files after the
request is made, but before it is printed, will be reflected in the printed
output.

-ddest

Chooses dest as the printer or class of printers where printing will take
place. If dest is a printer, the request will be printed only on that specific
printer. If dest is a class of printers, the request will be printed on the
first available printer that is a member of the class. Under certain conditions (printer availability, file space limitation, etc.), requests for specific
destinations may not be accepted (see accept(IM) and Ipstat(l». By
default, dest is taken from the environment variable LPDEST (if it is
set). Otherwise, a default destination (if one exists) for the computer
system is used. Destination names vary between systems (see Ipstat(l».

-m

Sends mail after the files have been printed (seemail(l».Bydefault.no
mail is sent.

-nnumber

Prints number copies of the output (default is 1).

-ooption

Specifies a printer-dependent or class-dependent option. Several such
options may be collected by specifying -0 more than once. For more
information about what are valid options, see Models in Ipadmin(lM).

Commands

SysV

LP(l)

LP(l)

-s

Suppresses messages from Ip(l) such as "request id is ... ".

-ttitle

Prints title on the banner page of the output.

-w

Writes a message to your terminal after the files have been printed. If
you are not logged in, mail is sent instead.

Cancel cancels line printer requests made by Ip(l). The command line arguments can
be either request ids (as returned by Ip(1» or printer names (for a complete list of
printer names, use Ipstat(1». Specifying a request id cancels the associated request
even if it is currently printing. Specifying a printer cancels the request which is
currently printing on that printer. In either case, the cancellation of a request that is
currently printing frees the printer to print its next available request.
FlLES

lusrispooi/lp/*
SEE ALSO

enable(l),lpstat(1), mail(1).
accept(IM),lpadmin(IM),lpsched(IM) in the Managing SysV System Software.

Commands

1-367

SysV

LPSTAT(l)

LPSTAT(l)

NAME

Ipstat - print LP status infonnation
SYNOPSIS

Ipstat [ options ]
DESCRIPTION

Ipstat prints infonnation about the current status of the LP spooling system.
If no options are given, Ipstat prints the status of all requests made to Ip(l). Anyarguments that are not options are assumed to be request ids (as returned by /p). Ipstat
prints the status of such requests. Options can appear in any order and may be repeated
and intennixed with other arguments. Some options can be followed by an optional list
that can be in one of two fonns:

•

A list of items separated from one another by a comma

•

A list of items enclosed in double quotes and separated from one another by a
comma and/or one or more spaces. For example:
Ipstat -u"userl, user2, user3"

The omission of a tist following these options causes all infonnation relevant to the
option to be printed, for example:
Ipstat -0
prints the status of all output requests.
OPTIONS

1-368

-a [tist]

Prints acceptance status (with respect to /p) of destinations for requests.
List is a list of intennixed printer names and class names.

-c[list]

Prints class names and their members. List is a list of class names.

-d

Prints the system default destination for /p.

-o[tist]

Prints the status of output requests. List is a list of intennixed printer
names, class names, and request ids.

-p[list]

Prints the status of printers. List is a list of printer names.

-r

Prints the status of the LP request scheduler

-s

Prints a status summary, including the system default destination, a list
of class names and their members, and a list of printers and their associated devices.

-t

Prints all status infonnation.

-u[list]

Prints status of output requests fvr users. List is a list of login names.

-v [list]

Prints the names of printers and the path names of the devices associated
with them. List is a list of printer names.

Commands

LPSTAT(l)

SysV

LPSTAT(l)

FlLES

lusrispooi/lp/*
SEE ALSO

enable(l),lp(l).

Commands

1-369

SysV

LS(l)

LS(l)

NAME

Is - list contents of directory
SYNOPSIS

Is [ -RSadCxmlnogrtucpFbqisff ] [ names]
DESCRIPTION

For each directory argument, Is lists the contents of the directory. For each file argument, Is repeats its name and any other information requested. By default, it sorts the
output alphabetically. If you specify no argument, Is lists the current directory. If you
give several arguments, Is first sorts the arguments appropriately, but prints file arguments before directories and their contents.
Is produces lists in three major formats. By default, it lists one entry per line. It can
also generate a multi-column format, as well as stream output format in which files are
listed across the page, separated by commas.
OPTIONS

-R

Recursively list subdirectories encountered. This option follows soft
links unless the -S option is also used.

-S

Shows link text rather than the object to which the link has been made.

-a

List all entries. Usually, entries whose names begin with a period (.) are
not listed.

-d

If an argument is a directory, list only its name (not its contents). Often

-C

Produce multi-column output with entries sorted down the columns.

-x

Produce multi-column output with entries sorted across rather than down
the page. (-S is ignored.)

-m

Produce stream output format.

-I

List in long format, giving mode, number of links, owner, group, size in
bytes, and time of last modification for each file. If the file is a special
file, the size field contains the major and minor device numbers, rather
than a size. The mode printed under the -I option consists of 10 characters, interpreted as follows:

used with -I to get the status of a directory.

The first character is:
d
b
c
p

Directory
Block special file
Character special file
Fifo (also called a "named pipe") special file
Ordinary file

The next nine characters are interpreted as three sets of three bits each.
1-370

Commands

SysV

LS(l)

LS(l)

The first set refers to the owner's permissions; the next to permissions of
others in the user group of the file; and the last to all others. Within each
set, the three characters indicate permission to read, to write, and to execute the file as a program, respectively. For a directory, execute permission is interpreted as permission to search the directory for a specified
file.
The permissions are indicated as follows:
r
w
x

File is readable
File is writable
File is executable
Indicated permission is not Granted
Mandatory locking will occur during access (the setgroup-ID bit is on and the group execution bit is off)
s
The set-user-ID or set-group-ID bit is on, and the
corresponding user or group execution bit is also on
S
Undefined bit-state (the set-user-ID bit is on and the user
execution bit is off)
The 1000 (octal) bit, or sticky bit, is on (see chmod(l»,
and execution is on
T The 1000 bit is turned on, and execution is off (undefined
bit-state)
For user and group permissions, the third position (the execute permission) is sometimes occupied by a character other than x or -. An s or S
may occupy this position, indicating the state of the set-user-ID or setgroup-ID bit. The ability to assume the same ID as the user during execution is, for example, used during login when you begin as root but
need to assume the identity of the user stated at "login." The group
execute permission may be given as I, indicating that mandatory file and
record locking will occur. This permission describes a file's ability to
allow other files to lock its reading or writing permissions during access.
For others permissions, the third position may be occupied by t or T,
indicating the state of the sticky bit and execution permissions.

-n

Same as -I, except that the owner's UlD and group's GID numbers are
printed, rather than the associated character strings.
Same as -I, except that the group is not printed.

-g

Same as -I, except that the owner is not printed.

-r

Reverse the order of sort to get reverse alphabetic or oldest first as
appropriate.

-t

Sort by time modified (latest first) instead of by name.

Corrunands

\-371

SysV

LS(l)

-u

LS(l)

Use time of last access instead of last modification for sorting (with the
-t option) or printing (with the -I option).

-c

Use time of last modification of the i-node (file created, mode changed,
etc.) for sorting (-t) or printing (-I).

-p

Put a slash ( / ) after each filename if that file is a directory.

-F

Put a slash ( / ) after each filename if that file is a directory and put an
asterisk (*) after each filename if that file is executable. If used with -S,
softlinks will appear with an @ symbol.

-b

Force nongraphic characters to be printed in the octal 'add notation.

-q

Force nongraphic characters in filenames to be printed as question marks
(?).

-i

For each file, print the i-number in the first column of the report.

-s

Give size in blocks, including indirect blocks, for each entry. Block size
is considered to be 1024. Print a total count of blocks when the sizes of
the files in a directory are listed.

-f

Force each argument to be interpreted as a directory and list the name
found in each slot. Tum off -I, -t, -s, and -r, and turn on -a; the order
is the order in which entries appear in the directory.

-T

Used with the -I option, - T shows the "Apollo rype" of each file.

EXAMPLES

The first set of examples refers to permissions.
To describe a file that is readable, writable, and executable by the user and readable by
the group and others:
-rwxr-r-

To describe a file that is readable, writable, and executable by the user, readable and
executable by the group and others, and allows its user-ID to be assumed, during execution, by the user presently executing it:
-rwsr-xr-x

To describe a file that is readable and writable only by the user and the group and can
be locked during access:
-rw-rwl-

1-372

Commands

LS(l)

SysV

LS(l)

The following examples describe the output from Is.
Is-I
(the long list) prints its output as follows:
-rwxrwxrwx

1 smith

dey

10876

May 16 9:42 part2

Reading from right to left, you see that the current directory holds one file, named
"part2". Next, the last time that file's contents were modified was 9:42 A.M. on May
16. The file is moderately sized, containing 10,876 characters, or bytes. The owner of
the file, or the user, belongs to the group "dev" (perhaps indicating development), and
his or her login name is "smith." The number, in this case "I," indicates the number
oflinks to file "part2". Finally, the row ofletters beginning with a dash (-) tells you
that user, group, and others have permissions to read, write, execute' ·part2. " The execute (x) symbol here occupies the third position of the three-character sequence. A - in
the third position would have indicated a denial of execution permissions.
Is -aisn
prints its output as follows:
923765600

16 -rwxrwxrwx

1 20123

38

16329

Sep 3 14:34

This command lists all entries (a), including those whose names begin with a period (.).
The output shows the i-number (the memory address of the i-node associated with the
file) printed in the left-hand column (i); the size (in blocks) of the files, printed in the
column to the right of the i-numbers (s); finally, the report is displayed in the numeric
version of the long list, printing the urn (instead of user name) and GID (instead of
group name) numbers associated with the files.
NOTES
In a Remote File Sharing environment, you may not have the permissions that the output of the Is -I command leads you to believe.

BUGS
Unprintable characters in filenames may confuse the columnar output options.
FILES
/etefpasswd
fete/group
fusrflibfterminfo!?f*
SEE ALSO
chmod (1), find (1).

Commands

To get user IDs for Is -I and Is -i)
To get group IDs for Is -I and Is -g
To get terminal information

1-373

LSACL(l)

Domain/OS SysV

LSACL(l)

NAME

Isael - list access control list
SYNOPSIS
lsael [ -odfsvnmlaLR ] file . . .
DESCRIPTION
If you do not specify an option, Isael shows the access control list (ACL) associated
with the files and directories specified. It lists entries one per line in the following format:
%.%.%

prwxk

where %. %. % represents a subject identifier (SID) in person.group.organization fonn,
and prwxk represents a set of rights. If one of the letters prwxk appears, the associated
right is present, if a - appears, it isn't. See ael(7) for more infonnation about access
rights. If you specify more than one file, the ACL is preceded by the filename.
OPTIONS

1-374

-0

Lists the ACL associated with the specified objects. This is default if
you do not specify an option.

-d

Shows how new sub-directories created in the specified directory will
inherit their protections. (This output is also known as the initial directory ACL.)

-f

Shows how new files created in the specified directory will inherit their
protections. (This output is also known as the initial file ACL.)

-s

Lists any sub-system infonnation. Protected sub-systems are an Aegis
analogue to setuid programs, and you should use the commands available in the Aegis environment to manipulate them. This option is provided so that UNIX users can be aware of files that use the feature.

-v

Selects verbose output. In this mode, each ACL (object, initial file and
initial directory) is preceded by a label.

-m

Shows the rights mask for extended ACL entries. By default, this information is not shown.

-n

Shows the node/network access rights.

-I

Shows a long listing, equivalent to selecting all the above options.

-a

Shows all bits in the rights field, rather than showing [ignore] and
[umask]. See chael(l) for a description of these bits.

-L

Directs Isael to follow any soft links encountered, and operate on the
object to which the link points. Since soft links in Domain/OS do not
have ACLs, attempting to change or display the ACL on a link without
the -L flag simply results in a warning.

Commands

LSACL(1)

-R

Domain/OS SysV

LSACL(l)

Recursively lists the ACLs of any directories specified on the command
line.

Only directories have additional fields relating to inheritance of protections for new
sub-directories and files. If you specify a non-directory with either the -d or -f option,
lsacl ignores them for that object.
SEE ALSO

chacJ(J), cpacJ(J), dbacJ(J), chmod(J), chgrp(J), chown(l), Is(1), salacJ(JM) umask(2)
acJ(5)

Commands

1-375

LTY(l)

LTY(l)

Domain/OS SysV

NAME

Ity - list installed types
SYNOPSIS

Jty [options]
DESCRIPTION

Jty lists the types currently installed on a volume. It can also be used to list the contents
of internal caches for debugging purposes.
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, Ity lists types installed on the boot volume.
-n node_spec

Specify the node whose type names are to be listed. You may also
specify the entry directory of a volume mounted for software installation, as shown in the example below.

-u

Display type UIDs as well as type names.

-glob

Display contents of global type name cache instead of the type file
(for debugging only).

-priv

Display the contents of the private (per-user) type name cache
instead of the type file (for debugging only).

EXAMPLES
$lty
Local type file

area
lheap
pipe

bitmap
mbx
rec

boot
mt
sch

casehm
nil
sio

ddf
null
uasc

evetype
obj
und

hdru
objlib

ipad
pad

In the following example, the disk has been mounted for software installation. The

disk's top level directory (cataloged as Imounted_disk by the mount(lM) command)
must contain a sys directory. If it does not, you get a "types file not found" error.

$ letc/mount Imounted_disk
$ Ity -n Imounted_disk
Type file for "//my_node/mounted_disk"

area
lheap
pipe

bitmap
mbx
rec

boot
mt
sch

casehm
nil
sio

ddf
null
uasc

evetype
obj
und

hdru
objlib

ipad
pad

SEE ALSO

crty(l), dlty(l), inty(l), mount(IM)

1-376

Commands

SysV

M4(1)

M4(1)

NAME
m4 - macro processor

SYNOPSIS
m4 [ options ] [files ]
DESCRIPTION
m4 is a macro processor intended as a front end for Ratfor, C, and other languages.
Each of the argument files is processed in order; if there are no files, or if a file name is

-, the standard input is read. The processed text is written on the standard output.
OPTIONS

Operates interactively. Interrupts are ignored and the output is unbuffered.

-s

Enables line sync output for the C preprocessor (#line ... )

-Bint

Changes the size of the push-back and argument collection buffers from
the default of 4,096.

-Hint

Changes the size of the symbol table hash array from the default of 199.
The size should be prime.

-Sint

Changes the size of the call stack from the default of 100 slots. Macros
take three slots, and non-macro arguments take one.

-Tint

Changes the size of the token buffer from the default of 512 bytes.

To be effective, these must appear before any file names and before -D or -U:
-Dname [=val]
Defines name to valor to null in val's absence.
-Uname
Undefines name.
Macro calls have the form:
name(arg1,arg2, ... , argn)
The left parenthesis ( must immediately follow the name of the macro. If the name of a
defined macro is not followed by a (, it is deemed to be a call of that macro with no
arguments. Potential macro names consist of alphabetic letters, digits, and underscore
_, where the first character is not a digit.
Leading unquoted blanks, tabs, and new-lines are ignored while collecting arguments.
Left and right single quotes are used to quote strings. The value of a quoted string is
the string stripped of the quotes.
When a macro name is recognized, its arguments are collected by searching for a
matching right parenthesis. If fewer arguments are supplied than are in the macro
definition, the trailing arguments are taken to be null. Macro evaluation proceeds normally during the collection of the arguments, and any commas or right parentheses
which happen to mm up within the value of a nested call are as effective as those in the
Commands

1-377

SysV

M4(l)

M4(l)

original input text. After argument collection, the value of the macro is pushed back
onto the input stream and rescanned.
BUll.T-IN MACROS
m4 makes available the following built-in macros. They may be redefined, but once
this is done the original meaning is lost. Their values are null unless otherwise stated.
defme

Installs the second argument as the value of the macro whose name is the
first argument. Each occurrence of $n in the replacement text, where n
is a digit, is replaced by the n-th argument. Argument 0 is the name of
the macro; missing arguments are replaced by the null string; $# is
replaced by the number of arguments; $* is replaced by a list of all the
arguments separated by commas; $@ is like $*, but each argument is
quoted (with the current quotes).

undefme

Removes the definition of the macro named in its argument.

defn

Returns the quoted definition of its argument(s). It is useful for renaming macros, especially built-ins.

pushdef

Like define, but saves any previous definition.

popdef

Removes current definition of its argument(s), exposing the previous
one, if any.

ifdef

If the first argument is defined, the value is the second argument, otherwise the third. If there is no third argument, the value is null. The word
unix is predefined on UNIX system versions of m4.

shift

Returns all but its first argument. The other arguments are quoted and
pushed back with commas in between. The quoting nullifies the effect
of the extra scan that will subsequently be perfonned.

changequote Changes quote symbols to the first and second arguments. The symbols
may be up to five characters long. Clumgequote without arguments
restores the original values (i.e." ,).

1-378

changecom

Changes left and right comment !llarkers from the default # and newline. With no arguments, the comment mechanism is effectively disabled. With one argument, the left marker becomes the argument and
the right marker becomes new-line. With two arguments, both markers
are affected. Comment markers may be up to five characters long.

divert

m4 maintains 10 output streams, numbered 0-9. The final output is the
concatenation of the streams in numerical order; initially stream 0 is the
current stream. The divert macro changes the current output stream to
its (digit-string) argument. Output diverted to a stream other than 0
through 9 is discarded.

undivert

Causes immediate output of text from diversions named as arguments, or
all diversions if no argument. Text may be undiverted into another
Commands

SysV

M4(1)

M4(l)

diversion. Undiverting discards the diverted text.
divnum

Returns the value ofthe current output stream.

dnl

Reads and discards characters up to and including the next new-line.

ifelse

Contains three or more arguments. If the first argument is the same
string as the second, then the value is the third argument. If not, and if
there are more than four arguments, the process is repeated with arguments 4, 5, 6 and 7. Otherwise, the value is either the fourth string, or, if
it is not present, null.

incr

Returns the value of its argument incremented by 1. The value of the
argument is calculated by interpreting an initial digit-string as a decimal
number.

decr

Returns the value of its argument decremented by I.

eval

Evaluates its argument as an arithmetic expression, using 32-bit arithmetic. Operators include +, -, *, I, %,' (exponentiation), bitwise &, I,
" and -; relationals; parentheses. Octal and hex numbers may be
specified as in C. The second argument specifies the radix for the result;
the default is 10. The third argument may be used to specify the
minimum number of digits in the result.

len

Returns the number of characters in its argument.

index

Returns the position in its first argument where the second argument
begins (zero origin), or -1 if the second argument does not occur.

substr

Returns a substring of its first argument. The second argument is a zero
origin number selecting the first character; the third argument indicates
the length of the substring. A missing third argument is taken to be large
enough to extend to the end of the first string.

translit

Transliterates the characters in its first argument from the set given by
the second argument to the set given by the third. No abbreviations are
permitted.

include

Returns the contents of the file named in the argument.

sinclude

Is identical to include, except that it says nothing if the file is inaccessi·
ble.

syscmd

Executes the UNIX system command given in the first argument. Nc
value is returned.

sysval

Is the return code from the last call to syscrnd.

maketemp

Fills in a string ofXXXXX in its argument with the current process ID.

m4exit

causes immediate exit from m4. Argument 1, if given, is the exit code
the default is O.

Commands

1-37'

SysV

M4(1)

M4(1)

m4wrap

Argument 1 is pushed back at final EOF; example: m4wrap(, cleanup( ) ,)

errprint

prints its argument on the diagnostic output file.

dumpdef

Prints current names and definitions, for the named items, or for all if no
arguments are given.

traceon

With no arguments, turns on tracing for all macros (including built-ins).
Otherwise, turns on tracing for named macros.

traceoff

Turns off trace globally and for any macros specified. Macros
specifically traced by traceon can be untraced only by specific calls to
traceoff·

SEE ALSO
cc(l), cpp(l).

1-380

Commands

SysV

MAIL(I)

MAIL(1)

NAME

mail, rmail- send mail to users or read mail
SYNOPSIS

Sending mail:
mail [ --oswt 1 persons
rmail [ -oswt ] persons
Reading mail:
mail [ -ehpqr ] [ -f file] [ -F persons]
DESCRIPTION

Sending mail:
A person is usually a user name recognized by login(l). When persons are named,

mail assumes a message is being sent (except in the case of the -F option). It reads
from the standard input up to an end-of-file (C1RL/D), or until it reads a line consisting
of just a period. When either of those signals is received, mail adds the letter to the
mailfile for each person. A letter is a message preceded by a postmark. The message
is preceded by the sender's name and a postmark. A postmark consists of one or more
'From' lines fol1owed by a blank line (unless the -s argument was used).
If a letter is found to be undeliverable, it is returned to the sender with diagnostics that
indicate the location and nature of the failure. If mail is interrupted during input, the
file dead.letter is saved to allow editing and resending. The dead.letter file is
recreated every time it is needed, erasing any previous contents.

The rmail command only permits the sending of mail; uucp(lC) uses rmail as a security precaution.
If the local system has the Basic Networking Utilities installed, mail may be sent to a
recipient on a remote system. Prefix person by the system name and exclamation point.
A series of system names separated by exclamation points can be used to direct a letter
through an extended network.
Reading Mail:
The mail program, unless otherwise influenced by command-line arguments, prints a
user's mail messages in last-in, first-out order. For each message, the user is prompted
with a question mark (?), and a line is read from the standard input. The fol1owing
commands are available to determine the disposition of the message:
, +, or n

Go on to next message.

d, or dp

Delete message and go on to next message.

d#

Delete message number #. Do not go on to next message.

dq

Delete message and quit mail.

Commands

1-381

MAlL(l}

SysV

MAIL(l}

h

Display a window of headers around current message.

h#

Display header of message number #.

ha

Display headers of all messages in the user's mailfile.

hd

Display headers of messages scheduled for deletion.

p

Print current message again.
Print previous message.

a

Print message that arrived during the mail session.

#

Print message number #.

r [users]

Reply to the sender, and other user(s), then delete the message.

s [files]

Save message in the named files (mbox is default).

y

Same as save.

urI]

Undelete message number # (default is last read).

w [files]

Save message, without its top-most header, in the named
files (mbo" is default).

m [persons]

Mail the message to the named persons.

q, or ctl-d

Put undeleted mail back in the mailfile and quit mail.

x

Put all mail back in the mailfile unchanged and exit mail.

!command

Escape to the shell to do command.

?

Print a command summary.

When a user logs in, the presence of mail, if any, is indicated. Also, notification is made
if new mail arrives while using mail.
The mailfile may be manipulated in two ways to alter the function of mail. The other
permissions of the file may be read-write, read-only, or neither read nor write to allow
different levels of privacy. If changed to other than the default, the file will be
pre&el'Ved even when empty to perpetuate the desired permissions. The file may also
contain the first line:
Forward to person
which will cause all mail sent to the owner of the mailfile to be forwarded to person. A
"Forwarded by ... " message is added to the header. This is especially useful in a multimachine environment to forward all of a person's mail to a single machine, and to keep
the recipient informed if the mail. has been forwarded. Installation and removal of forwarding is done with the -F option.
To forward all of one's mail to systema!user enter the following:

1-382

Commandll

SysV

MAIL(l)

MAIL(l)

mail-Fsystema!user
To forward to more than one user, enter this command line:
mail -F" user 1,systema!user2,systema!systemb!user3"
Note that when more than one user is specified, the whole list should be enclosed in
double quotes so that it may all be interpreted as the operand of the -F option. The list
can be up to 1024 bytes; either commas or white space can be used to separate users.
To remove forwarding, enter the following:
mail-F ""
The pair of double quotes is mandatory to set a NULL argument for the -F option.
In order for forwarding to work properly, the mailfile should have "mail" as group 10
and the group permission should be read-write.

OPTIONS
Sending mail:
--0

Suppresses the address optimization facility.

-s

Suppresses the addition of a  at the top of the letter being sent. See
WARNINGS below.

-w

Causes a letter to be sent to a remote user without waiting for the completion
of the remote transfer program.

-t

Causes a To: line to be added to the letter, showing the intended recipients.

Reading mail:

-e

Causes mail not to be printed. An exit value of 0 is returned if the user has
mail; otherwise, an exit value of I is returned.

-h

Causes a window of headers to be displayed rather than the latest message.
The display is followed by the '?' prompt.

-p

Causes all messages to be printed without prompting for disposition.

-q

Causes mail to terminate after interrupts. Normally an interrupt causes only
the termination of the message being printed.

-r

Causes messages to be printed in first-in, first-out order.

-fftle

Causes BI mail to use file (e.g., mbox) instead of the default mailfile.

-Fpersons
Entered into an empty mailbox, causes all incoming mail to be forwarded to
persons.
WARNING

The "Forward to person" feature may result in a loop, if sysl!userb forwards to
sys2!userb and sys2!userb forwards to sysl!userb. The symptom is a message saying
"unbounded... saved mail in dead.1etter."
Commands

1-383

SysV

MAlL(1)

MAlL(1)

The -s option should be used with caution. It allows the text of a message to be interpreted as part of the postmark of the letter, possibly causing confusion to other mail
programs. To allow compatibility with mailx(l), if the first line of the message is "Subject: •.. ", the addition of a  is suppressed whether or not the -8 option is used.
BUGS

Conditions sometimes result in a failure to remove a lock file.
After an interrupt, the next message may not be printed; printing may be forced by typing a p.
FILES

letc/passwd
lusr/mail/user
$HOME/mbox
$MAIL
Itmp/ma*
lusr/mail/*.Iock
dead.letter

to identify sender and locate persons
incoming mail for user; i.e., the mail file
saved mail
variable containing path name of mail file
temporary file
lock for mail directory
unmailable text

SEE ALSO

login(l), mailx(l), write(l).
Managing SysV System Software.

1-384

Commands

MAILX(l)

SysV

MAILX(l)

NAME
maiIx - interactive message processing system
SYNOPSIS
mailx

[options] [name ... ]

DESCRIPTION
The command maiIx provides a comfortable, flexible environment for sending and
receiving messages electronically. When reading mail, mailx provides commands to
facilitate saving, deleting, and responding to messages. When sending mail, mailx
allows editing, reviewing and other modification of the message as it is entered.
Many of the remote features of mailx will only work if the Basic Networking Utilities
are installed on your system.
Incoming mail is stored in a standard file for each user, called the mailbox for that user.
When maiIx is called to read messages, the mailbox is the default place to find them.
As messages are read, they are marked to be moved to a secondary file for storage,
unless specific action is taken, so that the messages need not be seen again. This secondary file is called the mbox and is normally located in the user's HOME directory (see
"MBOX" (ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES) for a description of this file). Messages can
be saved in other secondary files named by the user. Messages remain in a secondary
file until forcibly removed.
The user can access a secondary file by using the -f option of the maiIx command.
Messages in the secondary file can then be read or otherwise processed using the same
COMMANDS as in the primary mailbox. This gives rise within these pages to the
notion of a current mailbox.
On the command line, options start with a dash (-) and any other arguments are taken
to be destinations (recipients). If no recipients are specified, maiIx will attempt to read
messages from the mailbox.
When reading mail, mailx is in command mode. A header summary of the first several
messages is displayed, followed by a prompt indicating maiIx can accept regular commands (see COMMANDS below). When sending mail, mailx is in input mode. If no
subject is specified on the command line, a prompt for the subject is printed. As the
message is typed, maiIx will read the message and store it in a temporary file. Commands may be entered by beginning a line with the tilde n escape character followed
by a single command letter and optional arguments. See TILDE ESCAPES for a summary of these commands.
At any time, the behavior of maiIx is governed by a set of environment variables.
These are flags and valued parameters which are set and cleared via the set and unset
commands. See ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES below for a summary of these parameters.

Commands

1-385

SysV

MAILX(l)

MAU.x(l)

Recipients listed on the command line may be of three types: login names, shell commands, or alias groups. Login names may be any network address, including mixed
network addressing. If mail is found to to undeliverable, an attempt is made to return it
to the sender's mailbox. If the recipient name begins with a pipe symbol ( I ), the rest of
the name is taken to be a shell command to pipe the message through. This provides an
automatic interface with any program that reads the standard input, such as Ip(l) for
recording outgoing mail on paper. Alias groups are set by the alias command (see
COMMANDS below) and are lists of recipients of any type.
Regular commands are of the form
[ command] [ msglist] [arguments]
If no command is specified in command mode, print is assumed. In input mode, com-

mands are recognized by the escape character, and lines not treated as commands are
taken as input for the message.
Each message is assigned a sequential number, and there is at any time the notion of a
current message, marked by a right angle bracket (» in the header summary. Many
commands take an optional list of messages (msglist) to operate on. The default for
msglist is the current message. A msglist is a list of message identifiers separated by
spaces, which may include:
n

$

*

n-m
user
/string
:c

Message number n.
The current message.
The first undeleted message.
The last message.
All messages.
An inclusive range of message numbers.
All messages from user.
All messages with string in the subject line (case ignored).
All messages of type c, where c is one of:
d
Deleted messages
n
New messages
o
Old messages
r
Read messages
u
Unread messages
Note that the context of the command determines whether this type of
message specification makes sense.

Other arguments are usually arbitrary strings whose usage depends on the command
involved. File names, where expected, are expanded via the normal shell conventions
(see sh(l». Special characters are recognized by certain commands and are documented with the commands below.

1-386

Commands

MAILX(l)

SysV

MAILX(l)

At start-up time, mailx tries to execute commands from the optional system-wide file
(/usr/lib/mailx/mailx.rc) to initialize certain patameters, then from a private start-up
file ($HOME/.mailre) for personalized variables. With the exceptions noted below,
reguIat commands ate legal inside start-up files. The most common use of a start-up
file is to set up initial display options and alias lists. The following commands ate not
legal in the start-up file: !, Copy, edit, followup, Followup, hold, mail, preserve, reply,
Reply, shell, and visual. An error in the start-up file causes the remaining lines in the
file to be ignored. The .mailre file is optional, and must be constructed locally.
OPTIONS

-e

Test for presence of mail. The mailx command prints nothing and exits
with a successful return code if there is mail to read.

-f Iftlenamel Read messages from filename instead of mailbox. If no filename is
specified, the mbox is used.

-F

Record the message in a file named after the first recipient. Overrides
the "record" vatiable, if set (see ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES).

-h number

The number of network "hops" made so fat. This is provided for network softwate to avoid infinite delivery loops. (See addsopt under
ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES)

-H

Print header summary only.

-i

Ignore interrupts. See also "ignore" (ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES).

-n

Do not initialize from the system default mailx.rc file.

-N

Do not print initial header summary.

-r address

Pass address to network delivery software. All tilde commands ate disabled. (See addsopt under ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES)

-s subject

Set the Subject header field to subject.

-u user

Read user's mailbox. This is only effective if user's mailbox is not read
protected.

-U

Convert uuep-style addresses to internet standatds. Overrides the
"conv" environment vatiable. (See addsopt under ENVIRONMENT
VARIABLES)

COMMANDS
The following is a complete list of mailx commands:
Escape to the shell. See "SHELL" (ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES).
# comment
Null command (comment). This may be useful in .maitrc files.
Print the current message number.
Commands

1-387

SysV

MAILX(l)

MAILX(l)

?
Prints a sununary of conunands.
group alias name ...
Declare an alias for the given names. The names will be substituted
when alias is used as a recipient. Useful in the .mailrc file.
Declares a list of alternate names for your login. When responding to a
message, these names are removed from the list of recipients for the
response. With no arguments, alternates prints the current list of alternate names. See also "allnet" (ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES).
cd [directory J
chdir [directory J
Change directory. If directory is not specified, $HOME is used.
copy [msglist] filename
Copy messages to the file without marking the messages as saved. Otherwise equivalent to the save conunand.
Save the specified messages in a file whose name is derived from the
author of the message to be saved, without marking the messages as
saved. Otherwise equivalent to the Save conunand.
Delete messages from the mailbox. If "autoprint" is set, the next message after the last one deleted is printed (see ENVIRONMENT V ARIABLES).

ignore [header-field ...J
Suppresses printing of the specified header fields when displaying messages on the screen. Examples of header fields to ignore are "status" and
"cc." The fields are included when the message is saved. The Print and
Type conunands override this conunand.
dp [msglist]
dt [msglist]

Delete the specified messages from the mailbox and print the next message after the last one deleted. Roughly equivalent to a delete conunand
followed by a print conunand.
echo string ...
Echo the given strings (like echo(l).
edit [msg listJ
Edit the given messages. The messages are placed in a temporary file
and the "EDITOR" variable is used to get the name of the editor (see
ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES). Default editor is ed(l).
exit

1-388

Conunands

SysV

MAll..X(l)

MAll..X(1)

xit
Exit from mailx, without changing the mailbox. No messages are saved
in the mbox (see also quit).
file [filename]
folder [filename]
Quit from the current file of messages and read in the specified file.
Several special characters are recognized when used as file names, with
the following substitutions:
%
%user
#
&

Current mailbox.
mailbox for user.
Previous file.
Current mbox.

Default file is the current mailbox.
folders
Print the names of the files in the directory set by the "folder" variable
(see ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES).
Respond to a message, recording the response in a file whose name is
derived from the author of the message. Overrides the "record" variable,
if set. See also the Followup, Save, and Copy commands and "outfolder" (ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES).
Respond to the first message in the msglist, sending the message to the
author of each message in the msglist. The subject line is taken from the
first message and the response is recorded in a file whose name is
derived from the author of the first message. See also the followup,
Save, and Copy commands and "outfolder" (ENVIRONMENT V ARlABLES).

from [msglist]
Prints the header summary for the specified messages.
alias alias name ...
Declare an alias for the given names. The names will be substituted
when alias is used as a recipient. Useful in the .mailrc file.
Prints the page of headers which includes the message specified. The
"screen" variable sets the number of headers per page (see ENVIRONMENTVARIAl3LES). See also the z command.
help
PrintsO a summary of commands.
Commands

1-389

SysV

MAILX(l)

MAILX(l)

hold [msglist]
preserve [msglist]
Holds the specified messages in the mailbox.
if sir
mail-commands

else
mail-commands

endif
Conditional execution, where s will execute following mail-commands,
up to an else or endif, if the program is in send mode, and r causes the
mail-commands to be executed only in receive mode. Useful in the
.maitrc file.
discard header-field ...
Suppresses printing of the specified header fields when displaying messages on the screen. Examples of header fields to ignore are "status" and
"cc." All fields are included when the message is saved. The Print and
Type commands override this command.
list
Prints all commands available. No explanation is given.
mail name ...
Mail a message to the specified users.
Mail name
Mail a message to the specified user and record a copy of it in a file
named after that user.
Arrange for the given messages to end up in the standard mbox save file
when mailx terminates normally. See "MBOX" (ENVIRONMENT
VARIABLES) for a description of this file. See also the exit and quit
commands.
Go to next message matching message. A msglist may be specified, but
in this case the first valid message in the list is the only one used. This is
useful for jumping to the next message from a specific user, since the
name would be taken as a command in the absence of a real command.
See the discussion of msglists above for a description of possible message specifications.

I [msglist] [shell-command]
Pipe the message through the given shell-command. The message is
treated as if it were read. If no arguments are given, the current message
is piped through the command specified by the value of the "cmd"

1-390

Commands

SysV

MAILX(l)

MAILX(l)

variable. If the "page" variable is set, a fonn feed character is inserted
after each message (see ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES).
hold [msglist]
Preserve the specified messages in the mailbox.
Type [msglist]
Print the specified messages on the screen, including all header fields.
Overrides suppression of fields by the ignore command.
print [msglist]
type [msglist]
Print the specified messages. If" crt" is set, the messages longer than the
number of lines specified by the "crt" variable are paged through the
command specified by the "PAGER" variable. The default command is
pg( I) (see ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES).
quit
Exit from mailx, storing messages that were read in mbox and unread
messages in the mailbox. Messages that have been explicitly saved in a
file are deleted.
Respond [msglist]
Send a response to the author of each message in the msglist. The subject line is taken from the first message. If "record" is set to a file name,
the response is saved at the end of that file (see ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES).

respond [message]
Reply to the specified message, including all other recipients of the message. If "record" is set to a file name, the response is saved at the end of
that file (see ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES).
Save [msglist]
Save the specified messages in a file whose name is derived from the
author of the first message. The name of the file is taken to be the
author's name with all network addressing stripped off. See also the
Copy, followup, and Followup commands and "outfolder" (ENVIRONMENTVARIABLES).

save [msglist] filename
Save the specified messages in the given file. The file is created if it
does not exist. The message is deleted from the mailbox when mailx terminates unless "keepsave" is set (see also ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
and the exit and quit commands).
set

Commands

1-391

SysV

MAILX(l)

MAILX(l)

set name
set name=string
set name=number
Define a variable called name. The variable may be given a null, string,
or numeric value. Set by itself prints all defined variables and their
values. See ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES for detailed descriptions of
the mailx variables.
shell
Invoke an interactive shell (see also "SHELL" (ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES».
size [msglist]
Print the size in characters of the specified messages.
Read commands from the given file and return to command mode.
top [msglist]
Print the top few lines of the specified messages. If the "toplines" variable is set, it is taken as the number of lines to print (see ENVIRONMENTVARIABLES). The default is 5.
Touch the specified messages. If any message in msglist is not
specifically saved in a file, it will be placed in the mbox upon normal
termination. See exit and quit.
Print [msglist]
Print the specified messages on the screen, including all header fields.
Overrides suppression of fields by the ignore command.
type [msglist]

print [msglist]
Print the specified messages. If "crt" is set, the messages longer than the
number of lines specified by the "crt" variable are paged through the
command specified by the "PAGER" variable. The default command is
pg( 1) (see ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES).
Restore the specified deleted messages. Will only restore messages
deleted in the current mail session. If "autoprint" is set, the last message
of those restored is printed (see ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES).
unset name ...
Causes the specified variables to be erased. If the variable was imported
from the execution environment (i.e., a shell variable) then it cannot be
erased.
version
Prints the current version and release date.

1-392

Commands

SysV

MAILX(l)

MAILX(l)

Edit the given messages with a screen editor. The messages are placed
in a temporary file and the "VISUAL" variable is used to get the name of
the editor (see ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES).
Write the given messages on the specified file, minus the header and
trailing blank line. Otherwise equivalent to the save command.
xit
exit
Exit from mailx, without changing the mailbox. No messages are saved
in the mbox (see also quit).
z[+ 1-]

Scroll the header display forward or backward one screen-full. The
number of headers displayed is set by the "screen" variable (see
ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES).
TILDE ESCAPES

The following commands may be entered only from input mode, by beginning a line
with the tilde escape character n. See "escape" (ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES) for
changing this special character.

-! shell-command
Escape to the shell.

Simulate end of file (tenninate message input).
-: mail-command
Perform the command-level request. Valid only when sending a message
while reading mail.
mail-command
Perform the command-level request. Valid only when sending a message
while reading mail.

Print a summary of tilde escapes.

Insert the autograph string "Sign" into the message (see ENVIRONMENT
VARIABLES).

a
Insert the autograph string "sign" into the message (see ENVIRONJ.\,IENT V ARlABLES).

Commands

1-393

SysV

MAILX(l)

MAILX(l)

-bname ...
Add the names to the blind carbon copy (Bcc) list.
cname ...
Add the names to the carbon copy (Cc) list.

Read in the dead.letter file. See "DEAD" (ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES) for a
description of this file.

e
Invoke the editor on the partial message. See also "EDITOR" (ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES).
- f [msg!ist]
Forward the specified messages. The messages are inserted into the message,
without alteration.

Prompt for Subject line and To, Cc, and Bcc lists. If the field is displayed with
an initial value, it may be edited as if you had just typed it.
-j

string

Insert the value of the named variable into the text of the message. For example, -A is equivalent to '-j Sign.'
-m [msg!ist]
Insert the specified messages into the letter, shifting the new text to the right
one tab stop. Valid only when sending a message while reading mail.
p

Print the message being entered.
q

Quit from input mode by simulating an interrupt. If the body of the message is
not null, the partial message is saved in dead. letter. See "DEAD" (ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES) for a description of this file.

-r filename
Read in the specified file.
-< filename
Read in the specified file.

1-394

Commands

SysV

MAll..X(l)

MAll..X(l)

< !shell-command

Read in the specified file. If the argument begins with an exclamation point
(!), the rest of the string is taken as an arbitrary shell command and is executed, with the standard output inserted into the message.

s string ...
Set the subject line to string.
-t name ...

Add the given names to the To list.
v

Invoke a preferred screen editor on the partial message. See also "VISUAL"
(ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES).
-wfilename
Write the partial message onto the given file, without the header.

x
Exit as with -q except the message is not saved in dead. letter.

-I shell-command
Pipe the body of the message through the given shell-command. If the shellcommand returns a successful exit status, the output of the command replaces
the message.
ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
The following are environment variables taken from the execution environment and are
not alterable within mailx.
HOME =directory
The user's base of operations.
MAILRC=filename
The name of the start-up file. Default is $HOMEj.mailrc.

The following variables are internal mailx variables. They may be imported from the
execution environment or set via the set command at any time. The unset command
may be used to erase variables.
addsopt
Enabled by default. If fbinfmail is not being used as the deliverer, noaddsopt
should be specified. (See WARNINGS below)
Commands

1-395

MAILX(l)

SysV

MAILX(l)

aUnet
All network names whose last component (login name) match are treated as
identical. This causes the msglist message specifications to behave similarly.
Default is noaUnet. See also the altemates command and the "metoo" variable.
append
Upon termination, append messages to the end of the mbox file instead of
prepending them. Default is noappend.
askcc
Prompt for the Cc list after message is entered. Default is noaskcc.
asksub
Prompt for subject if it is not specified on the command line with the -s
option. Enabled by default.
autoprint
Enable automatic printing of messages after delete and undelete commands.
Default is noautoprint.
bang
Enable the special-casing of exclamation points (!) in shell escape command
lines as in vi( I). Default is nobang.
cmd=shell-comrrumd
Set the default command for the pipe command. No default value.
conv=conversion
Convert uucp addresses to the specified address style. The only valid conversion now is internet, which requires a mail delivery program conforming to the
RFC822 standard for electronic mail addressing. Conversion is disabled by
defanlt. See also "sendmail" and the -U command line option.
crt=number
Pipe messages having more than number lines through the command specified
by the value of the "PAGER" variable (pg(l) by default). Disabled by default.
DEAD=filename
The name of the file in which to save partial letters in case of untimely interrupt. Default is $HOME/dead.letter.

1-396

Commands

SysV

MAILX(l)

MAILX(1)

debug
Enable verbose diagnostics for debugging. Messages are not delivered.
Default is nodebug.
dot
Take a period on a line by itself during input from a terminal as end-of-file.
Default is nodot.
EDITOR=shell-command
The command to run when the edit or -e command is used. Default is ed(I).

escape=c
Substitute c for the - escape character. Takes effect with next message sent.
folder=directory

The directory for saving standard mail files. User-specified file names beginning with a plus (+) are expanded by preceding the file name with this directory name to obtain the real file name. If directory does not start with a slash
(j), $HOME is prepended to it. In order to use the plus (+) construct on a
mailx command line, "folder" must be an exported sh environment variable.
There is no default for the "folder" variable. See also "outfolder" below.
header
Enable printing of the header summary when entering mailx. Enabled by
default.
hold
Preserve all messages that are read in the mailbox instead of putting them in
the standard mbox save file. Default is nohold.
ignore
Ignore interrupts while entering messages. Handy for noisy dial-up lines.
Default is noignore.
ignoreeof
Ignore end-of-file during message input. Input must be terminated by a period
(.) on a line by itself or by the -. command. Default is noignoreeof. See also
"dot" above.
keep
When the mailbox is empty, truncate it to zero length instead of removing it.
Disabled by default.

Commands

1-397

SysV

MAILX(l)

MAILX(l)

keepsave
Keep messages that have been saved in other files in the mailbox instead of
deleting them. Default is nokeepsave.
MBOX=jilename

The name of the file to save messages which have been read. The xit command overrides this function, as does saving the message explicitly in another
file. Default is $HOME/mbox.
metoo
If yout login appears as a recipient, do not delete it from the list. Default is
nometoo.
LISTER=shell-command

The command (and options) to use when listing the contents of the "folder"
directory. The default is ls( 1).
one hop
When responding to a message that was originally sent to several recipients,
the other recipient addresses are normally forced to be relative to the originating author's machine for the response. This flag disables alteration of the recipients' addresses, improving efficiency in a network where all machines can
send directly to all other machines (Le., one hop away).
outfolder
Causes the files used to record outgoing messages to be located in the directory
specified by the "folder" variable unless the path name is absolute. Default is
nooutfolder. See "folder" above and the Save, Copy, followUp, and Followup
commands.
page
Used with the pipe command to insert a form feed after each message sent
through the pipe. Default is nopage.
PAGER=shell-command

The command to use as a filter for paginating output. This can also be used to
specify the options to be used. Default is pg(l).
prompt=string

Set the command mode prompt to string. Default is "1 ".
quiet
Refrain from printing the opening message and version when entering mailx.
Default is noquiet.

1-398

ColIlllllinds

MAILX(l)

SysV

MAILX(l)

record=filename
Record all outgoing mail in filename. Disabled by default. See also "outfolder" above.
save
Enable saving of messages in dead. letter on interrupt or delivery error. See
"DEAD" for a description of this file. Enabled by default.

screen=number
Sets the number of lines in a screen-full of headers for the headers command.
sendmail=shell-command
Alternate command for delivering messages. Default is mail(l).
sendwait
Wait for background mailer to finish before returning. Default is nosendwait.

SHELL=shell-commalld
The name of a preferred command interpreter. Default is sh(l).
showto
When displaying the header summary and the message is from you, print the
recipient'S name instead of the author's name.
sign=strillg
The variable inserted into the text of a message when the -a (autograph) command is given. No default (see also -i (TILDE ESCAPES».
Sign=strillg
The variable inserted into the text of a message when the -A command is
given. No default (see also -i (TILDE ESCAPES)).

toplines=llumber
The number oflines of header to print with the top command. Default is 5.
VISUAL=shell-commalld
The name of a preferred screen editor. Default is \'i(l).

Commands

1-399

MAILX(l)

SysV

MAILX(l)

FILES

$HOME/.mailrc
Personal start-up file
$HOM/mbox
Secondary storage file
Post office directory
lusr/maill *
lusrllib/rnailxlmailx.help*Help message files
lusrllib/mailxlmailx.rc Optional global start-up file
Itmp/R[ernqsx]*
Temporary files
WARNINGS

The -h, -r and -U options can be used only if mailx is built with a delivery program
other than /bin/mail.
BUGS

Where shell-command is shown as valid, arguments are not always allowed. Experimentation is recommended.
Internal variables imported from the execution environment cannot be unset.
The full internet addressing is not fully supported by mailx. The new standards need
some time to settle down.,
Attempts to send a message having a line consisting only of a "." are treated as the
end of the message by mail(l) (the standard mail delivery program).
SEE ALSO

Is(I), mail(l), pg(I).

1-400

Commands

SysV

MAKE(l)

MAKE(l)

NAME

make - maintain, update, and regenerate groups of programs
SYNOPSIS
~H~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DESCRIPTION

make allows the programmer to maintain, update, and regenerate groups of computer
programs.
make executes commands in makefile to update one or more target fUJmes. Name is
typically a program. If no -f option is present, makefiIe, MakefiIe, and the Source
Code Control System (SCCS) files, s.makefiIe, and s.MakefiIe are tried in order. If you
use a dash (-) in place of makefile , the standard input is taken. More than one makefile argument pair may appear.
Make updates a target only if its dependents are newer than the target (unless the -u
option is used to force an unconditional update). All prerequisite files of a target are
added recursively to the list of targets. Missing files are considered out-of-date.
Makefile contains a sequence of entries that specify dependencies. The first line of an
entry is a blank-separated, non-null list of targets, then a colon (:), then a (possibly null)
list of prerequisite files or dependencies. Text following a semicolon (;) and all following lines that begin with a tab are shell commands to be executed to update the target.
The first non-empty line that does not begin with a tab or a pound sign (#) begins a new
dependency or macro definition. Shell commands may be continued across lines with
the  sequence. Everything printed by make (except the initial
tab) is passed directly to the shell as is. Thus,
echo a\
b
produces
ab

like the shell does.
Sharp (#) and newline surround comments.
The following makefile says that pgm depends on two files a.o and b.o, and that they in
tum depend on their corresponding source files (a.c and b.c) and a common file incl.h:
pgm: a.o b.o
cc a.o b.o -0 pgm
a.o: incl.h a.c
cc -c a. c
b.o: incl.h b.c
cc -c b.c

Commands

1-401

SysV

MAKE(l)

MAKE(l)

Command lines are executed one at a time, each by its own shell. The SHELL
environment variable can be used to specify which shell make should use to execute
commands. The default is Ibin/sh. The first one or two characters in a command can
be the following: -, @, -@, or @-. If @ is present, printing of the command is
suppressed. If - is present, make ignores an error. A line is printed when it is executed
unless the -s option is present, or the entry .SILENT: is in makefile , or unless the initial
character sequence contains a @. The -n option specifies printing without execution;
however, if the command line has the string $(MAKE) in it, the line is always executed
(see discussion of the MAKEFLAGS macro under Environment). The -t (touch) option
updates the modified date of a file without executing any commands.
Commands returning non-zero status normally terminate make. If the -i option is
present, or the entry .IGNORE: appears in makefile , or the initial character sequence of
the command contains -. the error is ignored. If the -k option is present, work is abandoned on the current entry, but continues on other branches that do not depend on that
entry.
The -b option allows old makefiles (those written for the old version of make) to run
without errors.
Interrupt and quit cause the target to be deleted unless the target is a dependent of the
special name .PRECIOUS.
OPTIONS
-f makefile Description file name. makefile is assumed to be the name of a description

file.

1-402

-p

Prints out the complete set of macro definitions and target descriptions.

-i

Ignorse error codes returned by invoked commands. This mode is entered
if the fake target name .IGNORE appears in the description file.

-k

Abandons work on the current entry if it fails, but continues on other
branches that do not depend on that entry.

-s

Silent mode. Does not print command lines before executing. This mode
is also entered if the fake target name .SILENT appears in the description
file.

-r

Does not use the built-in rules.

-n

No execute mode. Prints commands, but does not execute them. Even
lines beginning with an @ are printed.

-b

Compatibility mode for old make files.

-e

Environment variables override assignments within make files.

-u

Forces an unconditional update.

-t

Touches the target files (causing them to be up-to-date) rather than issue
the usual commands.
Commands

MAKE(l)

-q

SysY

MAKE(l)

Question. The make command returns a zero or non-zero status code
depending on whether the target file is or is not up-to-date.

SPECIAL NAMES

.DEFAULT

If a file must be made but there are no explicit commands or relevant
built-in rules, the commands associated with the name .DEFAULT
are used if it exists.

.PRECIOUS

Dependents of this target will not be removed when quit or interrupt
are hit.

.SILENT

Same effect as the -s option .

.IGNORE

Same effect as the -i option.

ENVIRONMENT

Make reads the environment, assuming all variables to be macro definitions and processing them as such. The environment variables are processed before any make file
and after the internal rules; thus, macro assignments in a make file override environment
variables. The -e option causes the environment to override the macro assignments in
a makefile. Suffixes and their associated rules in the make file will override any identical suffixes in the built-in rules.
The MAKEFLAGS environment variable is processed by make as containing any legal
input option (except -f and -p) defined for the command line. Upon invocation, make
"invents" the variable if it is not in the environment, puts the current options into it,
and passes it on to invocations of commands. Thus, MAKEFLAGS always contains the
current input options. This proves very useful for "super-makes." In fact, as noted
above, when the -n option is used, the command $(MAKE) is executed anyway; hence,
one can perform a make -n recursively on a whole software system to see what would
have been executed. This is because the -n is put in MAKE FLAGS and passed to
further invocations of $(MAKE). This is one way of debugging all of the makefiles for
a software project without actually doing anything.
INCLUDE FILES
If the string include appears as the first seven letters of a line in a makefile, and is fol-

lowed by a blank or a tab, the rest of the line is assumed to be a file name and will be
read by the current invocation, after substituting for any macros.
MACROS

Entries of the form stringl = string2 are macro definitions. String2 is defined as all
characters up to a comment character or an unescaped newline. Subsequent appearances of $(stringl [:substl =[subst2]]) are replaced by string2. The parentheses are
optional if a single character macro name is used and there is no substitute sequence.
The optional :substl =subst2 is a substitute sequence. If it is specified, all nonoverlapping occurrences of substl in the named macro are replaced by subst2. Strings
(for the purposes of this type of substitution) are delimited by blanks, tabs, newline
characters, and beginnings of lines. An example of the use of the substitute sequence is
shown under Libraries.

Commands

1-403

SysV

MAKE(l)

MAIm(1)

INTERNAL MACROS

There are five internally maintained macros which are useful for writing rules for building targets.

$*

The macro $* stands for the file name part of the current dependent with the
suffix deleted. It is evaluated only for inference rules.

$@

The $@ macro stands for the full target name of the current target. It is evaluated
only for explicitly named dependencies.

$<

The $< macro is only evaluated for inference rules or the .DEFAULT rule. It is
the module which is out-of-date with respect to the target (i.e., the "manufactured" dependent file name). Thlis, in the .c.o ruie, the $< macro would evaluate
to the .c file. An example for making optimized .0 files from .c files is:
.c.o:
cc -c -0 $*.c
or:
.c.o:
cc -c -0 $<

$?

The $? macro is evaluated when explicit rules from the makefile are evaluated. It
is the list of prerequisites that are out-of-date with respect to the target; essentially, those modules which must be rebuilt.

$ % The $ % macro is only evaluated when the target is an archive library member of
the form lib(fiLe.o). In this case, $@ evaluates to lib and $% evaluates to the
library member,fiLe.o.
Four of the five macros can have alternative forms. When an upper case 0 or F is
appended to any of the four macros, the meaning is changed to "directory part" for 0
and "file part" for F. Thus, $(@O) refers to the directory part of the string $@. If
there is no directory part, .! is generated. The only macro excluded from this alternative
form is $?
PRESET VARIABLES

The currently defined preset variables are:

ACC = Icomlcc
ACFLAGS = -opt
AS=as
ASFLAGS=
BINO = Icomlbind
BINOFLAGS=
CC = Ibinlcc
CFLAGS = -0
F77FLAGS=
FFLAGS = -opt
1-404

Commands

SysV

MAKE(l)

MAKE(l)

FTN = fln
GET =get
GFLAGS=
LD = /bin/ld
LDFLAGS=
LEX = lex
LFLAGS=
MAKE = make
MAKEFLAGS = b
PAS = /com/pas
PFLAGS = -opt
RF = rf

SHELL = /bin/sh
YACC = yacc
YFLAGS=
$=$
SUFFIXES
Certain names (for instance, those ending with .0) have inferable prerequisites such as
.c, .S, etc. If no update commands for such a file appear in makefile, and if an inferable
prerequisite exists, that prerequisite is compiled to make the target. In this case, make
has inference rules that allow files to be built from other files by examining the suffixes
and determining an appropriate inference rule to use. The current default single suffix
rules are:
.sh:

cp $< $@; chmod 0777 $@
.f

&(F77) $(F77FLAGS) $(LDFLAGS) $< -0 $*
.pas:
$(PAS) $@ $(PFLAGS)
mvf $@.bin $@ -r

.c:
$(CC) $(CFLAGS) $(LDFLAGS) $*.c -0 $*

Commands

1-405

SysV

MAKE(l)

MAKE(l)

The current default double suffix rules are:

markfile.o: markfile
A=@;echo "static char _sccsidD =\042'grep $$A'(#)' markfile'\042;'\
> markfile.c
$(CC) marlcfile
rm -fmarkfile.c
.c.a:
$(CC) -c $(CFLAGS) $<
$(AR) $(ARFLAGS) $@ $*.0
rm-f$*.o

.I.c:
$(LEX) $(LfLAGS) $<
my lex.yy.c $@

.y.c:
$(YACC) $(YFLAGS) $<
my y.tab.c $@

.1.0:

$(LEX) $(LFLAGS) $<
$(CC) $(CFLAGS) -c lex.yy.c
rmlex.yy.c
my lex.yy.o $@
.y.o:
$(YACC) $(YFLAGS) $<
$(CC) $(CFLAGS) -c y.tab.c
rmy.tab.c
my y.tab.o $@
.s.o:
$(AS) $(ASFLAGS) -0 $@ $<
.c.o:
$(CC) $(CFLAGS) -c $<

1-406

Commands

SysV

MAKE(1)

MAKE(l)

The internal rules for make are contained in the source file rules.c for the make program. These rules can be locally modified. To print the rules compiled into the make
on any machine in a form suitable for recompilation, use the following command:
# make -fp - 2>/dev/null 

Entering the command 'help' will display the available commands. Here is the list of
commands for reference:
Command

Description

help [mkaprJ

List Commands. To display the help file, use the mkapr option.

change

Change APR Information Fields.

edit

Edit the detailed Problem Description.

view

View the current APR.

print

Print the current APR.

send

Send the current APR.

exit

Save current customer information changes (if any) and exit.

cancel

Exit without saving customer information changes.

You need only enter as much of any command as is necessary to uniquely identify it.
For example, you need only type ch for the change command.
Detailed descriptions of commands
change
Allow user to provide the necessary information prior to submitting an
APR. There are 2 kinds of input here. First, information that is
extracted from the system the user is on. Second, information that the
user must input. Most field defaults (including system extractable data)
will be overridable by the user. The date field is the only nonCommands

1-415

Domain/OS SysV

MKAPR(l)

MKAPR(l)

overridable field. A file exists between sessions which currently stores
customer contact, name, address, and telephone information. This file is
created upon the first invocation of the mkapr tool, is stored in the
current working directory and is called .aprinit. Upon subsequent invocations of the mkapr tool, the customer information is used as the
default for these fields.
Within the change command, the prompt becomes mkapr ..change>
Current input is then displayed by field. The user is asked to enter the
field # to change, then asked to enter the changed value (entering
 effectively will abort the current change field # request
leaving the field unchanged). The cycle is then repeated. Replying 'h'
or 'help' at this point will display the following help message for the
change command:
Change Command

Description

help [mkaprJ

List commands. To display the help file, use
the mkapr option.

dis play fields

Display all fields and their respective values.

change field n

Request to change the value of field # n.
Pressing the RETURN key at the prompt
enter new value ==>

will leave the value unchanged.
exit

1-416

Exit the change command.

edit

An appropriate editor will be invoked according to available system services. The user should enter a detailed problem description and save and
exit the editor in the appropriate manner. You will then be returned to
the mkapr> prompt.

view

The current mkapr information will be displayed to the user in an
appropriate manner according to available system services.

print

The current mkapr information will be printed to the default printer
according to available system services.

send

The current mkapr information will be sent to Apollo Computer in an
appropriate manner according to available system services.

exit

If any changes to customer information occurred during this session,
save all customer information to the non-system

cancel

Exit mkapr. Do not save changes to customer information from this
session.
Commands

MKAPR(l)

Domain/OS SysV

MKAPR(l)

INITIAL FIELD VALUES
The fields of an Apollo Problem Report that are collectively known as customer information Fields are initialized from a file read when mkapr starts up. These fields contain such information as the name of the customer contact, the name (company name)
of the customer, and the customer's address and telephone number. The initialization
file has the name .aprinit and the mkapr program will search for it. The search order
for the initialization file is:

1.

Look in the current working directory

2.

Look in the home directory as given by the shell variable HOME

3.

Look in the system directory jete/apr

It is not an error for no initialization file to exist; mkapr wi11leave the customer information fields blank. The fields ean be edited and the initialization file will be updated
when mkapr exits.
The file /ete/apr/.aprinit is a special case; mkapr will not write to this file. The system administrator (or other privileged account) must create the directory jete/apr with
appropriate access permissions, then run mkapr to create a local copy of the file
.aprinit and copy or move the file to the directory.
The initialization file is an ASCn text file that may be created and modified using any
of the text editors available to you. The body of the .aprinit file created by mkapr is
reproduced here:
# Comment lines begin with '#'
# Non-comment lines have the following form:
# FIELD_NAME: FIELD_VALUE: IGNORED
# The field name must not be changed.
# The ':' character delimits fields.
# The field value may be changed; it must not contain ':'.
# unless the field value is quoted by either' , or " " pairs.
# Anything after the second ':' is thrown away.
#
customer30ntact : A. Random User: 14
customer_name: Apollo Computer, Inc. : 21
customer_addrl : CHF 02 RD: 9
customer3ddr2 : 330 Billerica Road: 18
customer_addr3 : Chelmsford, MA 01824: 21
customer_addr4 : USA: 3
customer_phone: 1-508-256-6600 x7739 : 20
maiCpath: 'apollo!apr_cs_admin:' : 22
#

Commands

1-417

MKAPR(l)

Domain/OS SysV

MKAPR(l)

NOTES
Since mkapr assumes that the site mail facility (probably sendmail) knows how to get
from your site to Apollo, you must edit the mail_path field value in .aprinit to give
mkapr the correct path. Be sure that your mail facility is setup correctly. See your site
administrator for help.
Run lusr/ucb/newaliases at least once before attempting to use mkapr's send function.
Offsite mailing may not be allowed by your site. If so, you must make other arrangements to get mail to Apollo. See your site administrator for help.
Fll.ES
lusr/apollo/bin/mkapr

The executable object

lusr/man/cat l/mkapr.l

This manual page (UNIX)

/sys/help/mkapr.hlp

This help file (AEGIS)
Initial field values (search order):

1-418

.aprinit

(1st) (updated)

$HOME/.aprinit

(2nd) (updated)

/etc/apr/.aprinit

(last) (read only)

/tmp/apr.*

Temporary files:

apr.*.v

Product report view file

apr.*.p

Product report print file

apr.*.s

Product report send file

apr.*.c

Product report send command file

apr.*.e

Problem description edit file

Commands

SysV

MKDIR(l)

MKDIR(l)

NAME

mkdir - make directories
SYNOPSIS
mkdir [-m mode] [-p] dirname ...
DESCRIPTION
mkdir creates specified directories in mode 777 (all access permissions granted). It

automatically makes standard entries of dot (.) and dot-dot ( .. ) for its parent.
The owner ID and group ID of the new directories are set to the process's real user ID
and group ID, respectively.
OPTIONS

-m mode

Allows you to specify the mode to be used for new directories. Choices
for modes can be found in chmod(l).

-p dirname

Creates dirname by creating all the non-existing parent directories first.

EXAMPLE

To create the subdirectory structure Itr/jd/jan, type the following:
mkdir -p Itr/jdljan
BUGS

mkdir requires write permission in the parent directory.

umask(1) may alter the mode of specified directories normally created with mode 777.
DIAGNOSTICS
The mkdir command returns exit code 0 if all directories given in the command line
were successfully made; otherwise, it prints a diagnostic and returns non-zero. An error

code is stored in errno .
SEE ALSO

sh (1), rm (1), umask (1), intro (2), mkdir(2).

Commands

1-419

MKSINIT(I)

SysY

MKSINIT(I)

NAME
mksinit - create initialization code for STREAMS drivers and modules
SYNOPSIS
mksinit [-C number ... ] masterJzle ...
DESCRIPTION
mksinit is a tool to create the Apollo-implementation-dependent initialization code for
STREAMS drivers and modules. The input to mksinit is a set of master files. The output of mksinit is an init.e file in the current directory, which must be compiled and
linked with the module(s) and/or driver(s). The entry point of the module must be the
mksinit routine in init.e. The following is a sample module build:
mksinit master.d/sample*
Ibin/ee -e init.e
Ibin/ld -e mksinit init.o other module objects
OPTIONS
-C numbers

Provides the number of controllers for the master files processed. Each
number corresponds in the order specified to one of the master files.

SEE ALSO
master(4)

1-420

Commands

SysV

MMT(l)

MMT(1)

NAME

mmt, mvt - typeset documents, viewgraphs, and slides
SYNOPSIS
mmt [options] [files]
DESCRIPTION
Although very similar to mm(I), these two commands typeset their input via troff(l),
as opposed to fonnatting it via nroff(I). The mmt command uses the MM macro package for its operations. The mvt command uses the Macro Package for View Graphs and
Slides. Preprocessing through tbl(l) and eqn(l) is available for both. The proper pipelines and the required arguments and flags for troff(l) and the appropriate macro packages are generated, depending on the options selected.

Arguments or flags other than those given below are passed to troff(1) or to the macro
package, as appropriate. Such options can occur in any order, but they must appear
before the files argument. If no arguments are given, mmt prints a list of its options.
OPTIONS

-e

Invokes eqn(l) and causes it to read the /usr/pub/eqnchar file. See
eqnchar(5) for details concerning this file.

-t

Invokes tbl(I).

-Tdest

Creates output for troff(l) device dest.

-DilO

Directs the output to the local hnagen Imprint-l0 laser printer.

-a

Invokes the -a option oftroff(I).

-y

Uses the noncompacted version of the macros. This is the default.

-z

Invokes no output filter to process or redirect the output oftroff(1).

BUGS

If you specify simply a dash (-), -e option, and/or -t option along with the -olist
option of troff(I), a harmless "broken pipe" diagnostic may result. This usually happens under these conditions if the last page of the document is not specified in list.
DIAGNOSTICS

m{mvJt: no input file
None of the arguments is a readable file and the command is not used as a
filter.
SEE ALSO
env (I), eqn (I), mm (I), nroff (I), tbl (I), traff (I), environ (5), mm (5), mv (5).

Commands

1-421

SysV

MT(l)

MT(l)

NAME

mt - magnetic tape manipulating program
SYNOPSIS

mt [ -f tapename 1 command [ count 1
DESCRIPTION

mt gives commands to a magnetic tape drive. If you do not specify a tape name, mt
uses the environment variable TAPE; if TAPE does not exist, it uses the device
Idev/rmt12. Note that tapename must reference a raw (not block) tape device. By
default mt performs the requested operation once. Specify count if you want to perform
operations more than once.
COMMANDS

The available commands are listed below. You need to specify only as many characters
as are required to uniquely identify a command.

eof, weof

Write count end-of-file marks at the current position on the tape.

fsf

Forward space count files.

fsr

Forward space count records.

bsf

Backspace count files.

bsr

Backspace count records.

rewind

Rewinds the tape. Ignore count.

omine, rewom
Rewinds the tape and place the tape unit offline. Ignore count.
status

Prints status information about the tape unit.

DIAGNOSTICS

mt returns a 0 exit status when the operation(s) are successful; 1 if the command is
unrecognized; and 2 if an operation fails.
FILES

Idev/rmt*

Raw magnetic tape interface

SEE ALSO

mtio(7), dd(l), ioctl(2), environ(5)

1-422

Commands

SysV

MV(l)

MV(l)

NAME
mv - move files
SYNOPSIS

mv [ -[] filel [file2 ... ] target
mv dirl dir2
DESCRIPTION

Mv moves file(s) to a specified target. Under no circumstances can any of the files
being manipulated be the same as the target, so take care when using shell metacharacters. If target is a directory, then the filets) are moved to that directory. If target is a
file, its old contents are replaced by the contents offile.
If mv determines that the mode of target forbids writing, it prints the mode, asks for a
response, and reads the standard input for one line. If that line begins with y, the operation occurs if it is permissible; if not, mv exits. If the standard input is not a terminal,
or if the -f (force) option is used, the mv is performed, if permitted, with no questions

asked.
If filel is a directory, the directory rename occurs only if the two directories have the
same parent; filel is renamed target. If filel is a file and target is a link to another file
with links, the other links remain and target becomes a new file. If target is not a file,
mv creates a new file with the same mode as filel. The owner and group of target are
those of the user. If target is a file, moving a file into target does not change target's
mode, owner, or group. The cp(l) command sets the last modification time of target,
(and last access time, if target did not exist). If target is a link to a file, all links remain
and the file is changed.
OPTIONS
-f

Forces the operation if it is permissable. Does not ask for confirmation.

SEE ALSO

chmod (I), cp (I), cpio (I), rm (I).

Commands

1-423

SysV

MVT(l)

MVT(1)

NAME

mmt, mvt - typeset documents, viewgraphs, and slides
SYNOPSIS
mmt [options] (files]
DESCRIPTION

Although very similar to mm(l), these two commands typeset their input via troff(l),
as opposed to formatting it via nroff(l). The mmt command uses the MM macro package for its operations. The mvt command uses the Macro Package for View Graphs and
Slides. Preprocessing through tbl(l) and eqn(1) is available for both. The proper pipelines and the required arguments and flags for troff(l) and the appropriate macro packages are generated, depending on the options selected.
Arguments or flags other than those given below are passed to troff(l) or to the macro
package, as appropriate. Such options can occur in any order, but they must appear
before the files argument. If no arguments are given, mmt prints a list of its options.
OPTIONS

-e

Invokes eqn(l) and cause it to read the /usr/pub/eqnchar file. See
eqnchar(5) for details concerning this file.

-t

Invokes tbl(1).

-Tdest

Creates output for troff(1) device dest.

-DilO

Directs the output to the local Imagen Imprint-lO laser printer.

-a
-y
-z

Invokes the -a option of troff(I).
Uses the noncompacted version of the macros. This is the default.
Invokes no output filter to process or redirect the output of troff( 1).

BUGS
If you specify simply a dash (-), -e option, and/or -t option along with the -olist
option of troff(I), a harmless "broken pipe" diagnostic may result. This usually happens under these conditions if the last page of the document is not specified in list.
DIAGNOSTICS

m[mv]t: no inputJile
None of the arguments is a readable file and the command is not used as a
filter.
SEE ALSO

env (1), eqn (1), mm (1), nroff (1), tbl (1), troff (1), environ (5), mm (5), mv (5).

1-424

Commands

NETSTAT(l)

NETSTAT(l)

SysV

NAME

nets tat - show network status
SYNOPSIS

netstat [ -Aang 1 [ -f addressJamily 1
netstat [ -himnrstT 1 [ -f addressJamily
netstat [ -n 1 [ -I interface 1 interval

1

DESCRIPTION

The nets tat command symbolically displays the contents of various network-related
data structures. You can specify one of a number of output formats. The first form of
the command displays a list of active sockets for each protocol. The second form
presents the contents of one of the other network data structures according to the option
selected. The third form, with an interval specified, continuously displays the information regarding packet traffic on the configured network interfaces.
The default display, for active sockets, shows the local and remote addresses, send and
receive queue sizes (in bytes), protocol, and the internal state of the protocol. Address
formats are of the form host.port or network.port if a socket's address specifies a network but no specific host address. It displays the host and network addresses, when
known, symbolically, according to the databases fete/hosts and fete/networks, respectively. If a symbolic narne for an address is unknown, or if you specify the -n option,
netstat displays the address numerically, according to the address family. For more
information regarding the Internet "dot format," refer to inet(3N). netstat displays
unspecified, or "wildcard", addresses and ports an asterisk (*).
The interface display provides a table of cumulative statistics regarding packets
transferred, errors, and collisions. It also shows the network addresses of the interface
and the maximum transmission unit (mtu).
The routing table display indicates the available routes and their status. Each route consists of a destination host or network and a gateway to use in forwarding packets.
The flags field shows the following:
•

The state of the route (U if "up")

•

Whether the route is to a gateway (G)

•

Whether the route was created dynamically by a redirect (D)

•

Whether the route has priority (P)

•

Whether the route is a static (S) route added with route

•

Whether the route has been marked for deletion (X).

Direct routes are created for each interface attached to the local host; the gateway field
for such entries shows the address of the outgoing interface. The refent field gives the
current number of active uses of the route. Connection oriented protocols normally
hold on to a single route for the duration of a connection while connectionless protocols
Commands

1-425

NETSTAT(l)

SysY

NETSTAT(l)

obtain a route while sending to the same destination. The use field provides a count of
the number of packets sent using that route. The interface entry indicates the network
interface utilized for the route.
When you invoke netstat with an interval argument, it displays a running count of
statistics related to network interfaces. This display consists of a column for the primary interface (the first interface found during auto-configuration) and a column summarizing information for all interfaces. Use the -I option to replace the primary interface with another interface. The first line of each screen of information contains a summary since the system was last rebooted. Subsequent output lines show values accumulated over the preceding interval.
OPTIONS

-A

With the default display, shows the address of any protocol-control
blocks associated with sockets; used for debugging.

-a

With the default display, shows the state of all sockets; normally sockets
used by server processes are not shown.

-g

With the default display, shows the first gateway used.

-h

Shows the state of the IMP host table. Status flags show the gateway
entry (G), in use (U), a temporary entry (T).

-i

Shows the state of interfaces that were auto-configured (netstat does not
show interfaces statically configured into a system, but not located at
boot time).

-I interface

Shows information only about this interface; used with an interval as
described below.

-m

Shows statistics recorded by the memory-management routines (the network manages a private pool of memory buffers).

-n

Shows network addresses as numbers (normally netstat interprets
addresses and attempts to display them symbolically). You can use this
option with any of the display formats.

-s

Shows per-protocol and routing statistics.

-r

Shows the routing tables.

-t

When used with the -i option, shows timer column.

-T

Shows all possible status information.

-f addressJamily
Limits statistics or address-control-block reports to those of the specified
address family. The following address families are recognized: inet, for
AF_INET; ns, for AF_NS; and unix, for AF_UNIX.

1-426

Corrunands

NETSTAT{I)

SysV

NETSTAT{I)

BUGS
The notion of errors is ill-defined. Collisions mean something else for the IMP.
SEE ALSO
hosts(4), networks(4). protocols(4). services( 4), trpt( 1M)

Commands

1-427

NEWFORM(l)

SysV

NEWFORM(l)

NAME

newform - change the fonnat of a text file
SYNOPSIS

newform [-s] [-i tabspec] [-0 tabspec] [-b n] [-e n] [ -p n] [-a n] [-f] [-c char]
[-I n] (files]
DESCRIPTION

newform reads lines from the named files, or the standard input if no input file is
named, and reproduces the lines on the standard output. Lines are refonnatted in accordance with command line options in effect. Except for -s, command line options may
appear in any order, may be repeated, and may be intermingled with the optional files.
Command line options are processed in the order specified. This means that option
sequences like "-e15 -160" will yield results different from "-160 -e15". Options
are applied to allfiles on the command line.
OPTIONS
-s

Shears off leading characters on each line up to the first tab and places up
to eight of the sheared characters at the end of the line. If more than eight
characters (not counting the first tab) are sheared, the eighth character is
replaced by a * and any characters to the right of it are discarded. The first
tab is always discarded.
An error message and program exit will occur if this option is used on a file
without a tab on each line. The characters sheared off are saved internally
until all other options specified are applied to that line. The characters are
then added at the end of the processed line.

For example, to convert a file with leading digits, one or more tabs, and
text on each line, to a file beginning with the text, all tabs after the first
expanded to spaces, padded with spaces out to column 72 (or truncated to
column 72), and the leading digits placed starting at column 73, the command would be: newform -s -i -I -a -e filename
-itabspec

Input tab specification: expands tabs to spaces, according to the tab
specifications given. Tabspec recognizes all tab specification fonns
described in tabs( 1). In addition, if you specify a simple dash (-) for the
value of tabspec , newform assumes that the tab specification is to be found
in the first line read from the standard input (see fspec(4». If no tabspec is
given, tabspec defaults to -8. A tabspec of -0 expects no tabs; if any are
found, they are treated as -1.

-otabspec Output tab specification: replaces spaces by tabs, according to the tab
specifications given. The tab specifications are the same as for -itabspec.
If no tabspec is given, tabspec defaults to -8. A tabspec of -0 means that
no spaces will be converted to tabs on output.

-bn

1-428

Truncate n characters from the beginning of the line when the line length is
greater than the effective line length (see -In). Default is to truncate the
Commands

NEWFORM(l)

SysV

NEWFORM(l)

number of characters necessary to obtain the effective line length. The
default value is used when -b with no n is used. This option can be used to
delete the sequence numbers from a COBOL program as follows:
newform -II -b7 filename

--en

Same as -bn except that characters are truncated from the end of the line.

-pn

Prefix n characters (see -cchar) to the beginning of a line when the line
length is less than the effective line length. Default is to prefix the number
of characters necessary to obtain the effective line length.

-an

Same as -pn except characters are appended to the end of a line.

-f

Write the tab specification format line on the standard output before any
other lines are output. The tab specification format line which is printed
will correspond to the format specified in the last --0 option. If no --0
option is specified, the line which is printed will contain the default
specification of -8.

-cchar

Change the prefix/append character to char. Default character for char is a
space.

-In

Set the effective line length to n characters. If n is not entered, -I defaults
to 72. The default line length without the -I option is 80 characters. Note
that tabs and backspaces are considered to be one character (use -i to
expand tabs to spaces). The -II option must be used to set the effective
line length shorter than any existing line in the file so that the -b option is
activated.

BUGS

The newform command normally only keeps track of physical characters; however, for
the -i and --0 options, newform will keep track of backspaces in order to line up tabs in
the appropriate logical columns.
The newform command will not prompt the user if a tabspee is to be read from the
standard input (by use of - i - or -0-).
If the -f option is used, and the last --0 option specified was - 0 - , and was preceded by
either a - 0 - or a -i-, the tab specification format line will be incorrect.
DIAGNOSTICS
All diagnostics are fatal.

usage: ...
not -s format
can't openjile
internal line too long
tabspec in error

Commands

newform was called with a bad option.
There was no tab on one line.
Self-explanatory .
A line exceeds 512 characters after being expanded in the
internal work buffer.
A tab specification is incorrectly formatted, or specified tab
stops are not ascending.

1-429

NEWFORM(I)

SysV

NEWFORM(I)

tabspec indirection illegal A tabspec read from a file (or standard input) may not contain a tabspec referencing another file (or standard input).

o- normal execution
1 - for any error
SEE ALSO

csplit(l), tabs(l), fspec(4).

1-430

Commands

SysY

NEWGRP(l)

NEWGRP(1)

NAME

newgrp -log in to a new group
SYNOPSIS

newgrp [ -

1 [ group 1

DESCRIPTION

The newgrp command changes your group identification. Although you remain logged
in during the process, and your current directory is unchanged, newgrp sets new real
and effective group IDs. The shell then performs calculations of access permissions to
files with respect to these new IDs. You are always given a new shell to replace the
current shell, regardless of whether newgrp terminates successfully or due to an error
condition (e.g., unknown group).
Exported variables retain their values after you invoke newgrp. All unexported variables, however, are either reset to their default value or set to null. Unless you or the
system itself exports system variables (e.g., PSI, PS2, PATH, MAIL, HOME), they are
reset to default values. For example, suppose you have a primary prompt string (PSI)
other than the default, a pound sign (#), and you have not exported PSl. After invoking
newgrp, successfully or not, your PSI variable is set to the default prompt string, the
pound sign (#). Use the shell command, export, to export variables so that they retain
their assigned value when invoking new shells. See sh(l) for more information.
With no arguments, newgrp changes the group identification back to the group
specified in the your password file entry. If the first argument to newgrp is a dash (-),
the environment changes to one that you would normally expect if you logged in again.
The newgrp command lets you change to any group of which you are a member. The
/etc/group file contains a list of all groups and the group's members. You are a member
of all groups for which you have an account. For example, if you have the following
three re gistry accounts,
user l.project l.org
user l.project2.org
user l.projecU.org
you are listed three times in the /etc/group file. You may not be listed in the group
entry for your default group.
The /etc/passwd file contains your default group. Even though this may not appear in
the /etc/group file, this group is always available as an option to the newgrp command.
BUGS
SysY does not allow group passwords.

Commands

1-431

NEWGRP(l)

SysV

NEWGRP(l)

FILES

/etc/group System's group file
/etc/passwd System's password file
SEE ALSO

login(l), shell, group(4), passwd(4), environ(5).

1-432

Commands

SysV

NEWS(l)

NEWS(l)

NAME

news - print news items
SYNOPSIS

news [ -a ] [ -n ] [ -s ] [ items]
DESCRIPTION

The news program is used to keep the user informed of current events. By convention,
these events are described by files in the directory, lusr/news.
When invoked without arguments, news prints the contents of all current files in
lusr/news, most recent first, with each preceded by an appropriate header. The news
program stores the "currency" time as the modification date of a file named
.news_time in the user's home directory (the identity of this directory is determined by
the environment variable SHOME); only files more recent than this currency time are
considered "current."
Arguments other than the options listed below are assumed to be specific news items
that are to be printed.
IT delete is typed during the printing of a news item, printing stops and the next item is

started. Another delete within one second of the first causes the program to terminate.
OPTIONS

-a

Prints all items, regardless of currency. In this case, the stored time is not
changed.

-n

Reports the names of the current items without printing their contents, and
without changing the stored time.

-s

Reports how many current items exist, without printing their names or contents, and without changing the stored time. It is useful to include such an
invocation of news in one's .profile file, or in the system's letc/profile.

FILES
letc/profile
lusr/newsl*
$HOME/.news_time
SEE ALSO

profile(4), environ(5}.

Commands

1-433

SysV

NICE(l)

NICE(l)

NAME

nice - run a command at low priority
SYNOPSIS
nice [- increment] command [arguments]
DESCRIPTION
The nice command executes command with a lower CPU scheduling priority. If the
increment argument (in the range 1-19) is given, it is used; if not, an increment of 10 is
assumed.
The super-user may run commands with priority higher than normal by using a negative
increment, e.g., -10.
BUGS
An increment larger than 19 is equivalent to 19.
DIAGNOSTICS
The nice program returns the exit status of the subject command.
SEE ALSO
nohup(1), nice(2).

1-434

Commands

SysV

NL(l)

NL(l)

NAME

nl - line numbering filter
SYNOPSIS

nl [-h type] [-b type] [-f type] [-v start#] [-i incr] [-p] [-I num] [-s sep] [-w
width] [-n format] [-d delim] file
DESCRIPTION

The nl command reads lines from the named file or the standard input if no file is
named and reproduces the lines on the standard output. Lines are numbered on the left
in accordance with the command options in effect.
The nl command views the text it reads in terms of logical pages. Line numbering is
reset at the start of each logical page. A logical page consists of a header, a body, and a
footer section. Empty sections are valid. Different line numbering options are independently available for header, body, and footer (e.g., no numbering of header and footer
lines while numbering blank lines only in the body), The start of logical page sections
are signaled by input lines containing nothing but the following delimiter character(s):

Line contents

Start of

\:\:\:

Header

\:\:

Body

\:

Footer

Unless optioned otherwise, nl assumes the text being read is in a single logical page
body. Command options may appear in any order and may be intermingled with an
optional filename. Only one file may be named.
OPTIONS

-btype

Specifies which logical page body lines are to be numbered. Recognized
types and their meaning are:

-htype

Same as -btype except for header. Default type for logical page header is
n (no lines numbered).
a
t

Number all lines
Number lines with printable text only
n

pstring

Number only lines that contain the regular expression
specified in string.

Default type for logical page body is t (text lines numbered).
-ftype

Commands

Same as -btype except for footer. Default for logical page footer is n (no
lines numbered).

1-435

SysV

NL(l)

NL(1)

-vstart#

Start# is the initial value used to number logical page lines. Default is 1.

-iincr

Incr is the increment value used to number logical page lines. Default is 1.

-p

Do not restart numbering at logical page delimiters.

-Inurn

Num is the number of blank: lines to be considered as one. For example,
-12 results in only the second adjacent blank: being numbered (if the

-ssep

Sep is the character(s) used in separating the line number and the
corresponding text line. Default sep is a tab.

-wwidth

Width is the number of characters to be used for the line number. Default
width is 6.

-nformat

Format is the line numbering format. Recognized values are: In, left
justified, leading zeroes suppressed; rn, right justified, leading zeroes
supressed; rz, right justified, leading zeroes kept. Default format is rn
(right justified).

- nfile
WARNINGS

In the case of the following command, nohup applies only to command]:

nohup command]; command2
The command
nohup (commandl; command2)
is syntactically incorrect.
SEE ALSO

chmod(l), nice(l), sh(l), signal(2).

Commands

1-439

Domain/OS SysV

NAME
nor .dan to iso - convert files to ISO fonnat
SYNOPSIS

nor.dan_to_iso inputJrle outputJrle
DESCRIPTION

These utilities convert files written with the overloaded 7-bit national fonts to the Internation Standards Organization (ISO) 8-bit fonnat. The overloaded fonts include any
with a specific language suffix (for example, f7xI3.french, or din_f7xl1.german). If
you created and/or edited a file using one of the national fonts, that file is a candidate
for conversion.
You are not required to convert files, but probably will want to because
1.

The overloaded fonts replace certain ASCII characters with national ones, have that
subset of ASCII characters and the national characters in one file. The 8-bit fonts
available as of SRI 0 include all the ASCII characters and the national characters.

2.

The 8-bit fonts also include a wider range of national characters, so you can enter
any character in any western European language. This was not always possible
with the overloaded fonts. For example, there was not enough space in the overloaded font to include all the French characters, but they all exist in the 8-bit fonts.

There are two parameters to the conversion utilities. You must provide the name of the
file you want to convert (inputJrle) and your outputJrle. If outputJrle already exists,
the utilities abort.
The default location for the utilities is /usr/apollo/bin.
FILES

/usr/apollo/bin/french _to _iso

Converts overloaded French to ISO fonnat

/usr/apollo/bin/german_to_iso

Converts overloaded Gennan to ISO fonnat

/usr/apollo/bin/nor.dan_to_iso

Converts overloaded Norwegian/Danish to ISO format

/usr/apollo/bin/swedish_to_iso

Converts overloaded SwedishIFinnish to ISO format

/usr/apollo/bin/swiss_ to _iso

Converts overloaded Swiss to ISO fonnat

/usr/apollo/bin/uk_to _iso

Converts overloaded U.K. English to ISO fonnat

DIAGNOSTICS

All messages are generally self-explanatory.

1-440

Commands

OBJ2COFF(1)

Domain/OS SysV

OBJ2COFF(1)

NAME

obj2coff - convert OBI fonnat modules to COFF fonnat modules
SYNOPSIS

obj2coff objmodule coffmodule
DESCRIPTION

The obj2cotT command converts SR9.5 or later object fonnat modules to SRlO COFF
fonnat modules. Either individual modules, or complete bound programs may be converted.
This command cannot be used to convert object module libraries, see Ibr2ar(l) for that
purpose.
BUGS

If obj2coff encounters an object module stamped with an SR8 systype (sys3, bsd4.1, or
any SR8), it converts it to COFF but does not change the systype, and issues a warning:

module is stamped with obsolete systype 'systype_name'
Some UNIX system calls may behave differently between sys3 and sys5, or between
bsd4.1 and bsd4.2, so users are cautioned to examine their programs carefully for any
effects caused by changes in system call semantics.
For object fonnat files, streams 2 and 3 are used for error input and error output, respectively. No error input stream is automatically assigned for COFF format files; stream 2
is assigned to error output. Thus an object file which has been converted to COFF format may not work if it attempts to read error input. Moreover, if it writes to error output, the error "operation attempted on unopened stream" will occur.
SEE ALSO

Ibr2ar(l)

Commands

1-441

SysV

00(1)

00(1)

NAME

od - octal dump
SYNOPSIS
od [ -bcdosx ] [file ] [ [ + ] offset [ . ][ b ] ]
DESCRIPTION

Od dumps file in one or more selected formats. If none of the options below are
specified, file is intetpreted in octal by default.
The file argument specifies which file is to be dumped. If no file argument is specified,
the standard input is used.
The offset argument specifies the offset in the file where dumping is to commence. This
argument is normally intetpreted as octal bytes. If a period (.) is appended, the offset is
intetpreted in decimal. If b is appended, the offset is intetpreted in blocks of 512 bytes.
If the file argument is omitted, the offset argument must be preceded by a plus sign (+).
Dumping continues until end-of-file.
OPTIONS

1-442

-b

Intetpret bytes in octal.

-c

Intetpret bytes in ASCII. Certain nongraphic characters appear as C
escapes: null=\o, backspace=\b, formfeed=\f, newline='n, retum=\r,
tab=\t; others appear as three-digit octal numbers.

-d

Intetpret words in unsigned decimal.

-0

Intetpret words in octal.

-s

Intetpret 16-bit words in signed decimal.

-x

Intetpret words in hexadecimal.

Commands

PACK(1)

SysV

PACK(t)

NAME

pack, pcat, unpack - compress and expand files
SYNOPSIS

pack[-] [-f] name ...
peat name ...
unpack name ...
DESCRIPTION

Pack attempts to store the specified files in a compressed form. Wherever possible and
useful, it replaces each input file name by a packed file name.z with the same access
modes, access and modified dates, and owner as those of name.
If pack is successful, it removes name. Packed files can be restored to their original
form using unpack or pcat.
Pack uses Huffman (minimum redundancy) codes on a byte-by-byte basis.
The amount of compression obtained depends on the size of the input file and the character frequency distribution. Because a decoding tree forms the first part of each .z file,
it is usually not worthwhile to pack files smaller than three blocks, unless the character
frequency distribution is very skewed, which may occur with printer plots or pictures.
Typically, text files are reduced to 60-75 percent of their original size. Load modules,
which use a larger character set and have a more uniform distribution of characters,
show little compression, the packed versions being about 90 percent of the original size.
Pack returns a value equaling the number of files not compressed.
No packing occurs if one or more of the following conditions exists:
File appears to be already packed.
Filename has more than 12 characters.
File has links.
File is a directory.
File cannot be opened.
No disk storage blocks will be saved by packing.
A file called name.z already exists.
.z file cannot be created.
An I/O error occurred during processing.
The last segment of the filename must contain no more than 12 characters to allow
space for the appended .z extension. Directories cannot be compressed.
Pcat does for packed files what cat(l) does for ordinary files, except that pcat cannol
be used as a filter. The specified files are unpacked and written to the standard output
To view a packed file named name.z use:
peat name.z
or just:
peat name
Commands

PACK(l)

SysV

PACK(l)

To make an unpacked copy, say nnn, of a packed file named name.z (without destroying name.z ) use the command:
pcat name> nnn
Pcat returns the number of files it was unable to unpack, but will fail if one of the following conditions exist:
Filename (exclusive of the .z) has more than 12 characters.
File cannot be opened.
File does not appear to be the output of pack.
Unpack expands files created by pack. For each file name specified in the command, a
search is made for a file called name.z (or just name, if name ends in .z). If this file
appears to be a packed file, it is replaced by its expanded version. The new file has the
.z suffix stripped from its name. It also has the same access modes, access and
modification dates, and owner as those of the packed file.
Unpack returns a value that is the number of files it was unable to unpack. It will fail
for the same reasons as those listed for pcat, as well as for the following additional reasons:
a file with the" unpacked" name already exists
the unpacked file cannot be created.
OPTIONS

(Note that these options are only for use with pack.)
Set an internal flag that causes the number of times each byte is used, its
relative frequency, and the code for the byte to be printed on the standard output. Additional occurrences of - in place of name cause the
internal flag to be set and reset.
-f

Force packing of name. Useful for causing an entire directory to be
packed even if some of the files will not benefit.

NOTES TO SysV USERS

The Apollo version of the pack command creates packed files that have an Apollo file
type of "uasc". The original file type information is not carried over to the packed file.
The unpack command checks the magic number of the unpacked file. If it matches one
of the Apollo object types or archive type, the file type of the unpacked file is changed
from "uasc" to "obj". If the file type of the original file is other than "uasc" or one
of the "obj" types checked for by unpack, the file type must be manually changed
after the file is unpacked.
SEE ALSO

cat (1).

1-444

Commands

PASSWD(l)

SysV

PASSWD(l)

NAME

chfn, chsh, passwd - change password file infonnation
SYNOPSIS

passwd [ -s ] [ -f] [ name ]
chsh shell
chfn
DESCRIPTION

The passwd command changes or installs a password, log-in shell (-s option), or
GECOS infonnation field (-f option) associated with the user name (your own name by
default).
chsh changes a log-in shell, and is equivalent to passwd -so
chfn changes the GECOS infonnation field, and is equivalent to passwd -f.
When altering a password, passwd prompts for the current password and then for the
new one; you must supply both. You must type the new password twice to forestall
mistakes.
New passwords must be at least four characters long if they use a sufficiently rich
alphabet, and at least six characters long if monocase. These rules are relaxed if you
are insistent enough.
Only the owner of the name or the super-user can change a password; owners must
prove they know the old password.
When altering a log-in shell, (using passwd -s or chsh) the program displays the
current log-in shell and then prompts for the new one. The new log-in shell must be
one of the approved shells listed in /etc/shells unless you are the super-user. If
/etc/shells does not exist, the only shells that can be specified are /bin/sh, /bin/csh,
/bin/ksh, and /comlsh.
The super-user can change anyone's log-in shell; nonnal users can only change their
own log-in shell(s).
When altering the GECOS infonnation field, (using passwd -f or chfn), the program
displays the current infonnation, broken into fields, as interpreted by the finger(l) program (among others) and prompts for new values. These fields can include a user's
"real life" name, office room number, office phone number, and home phone number.
Each prompt includes a default value, which is enclosed between brackets. The default
value is accepted simply by typing a carriage return. To enter a blank: field, the word
"none" can be typed. Phone numbers can be entered with or without hyphens. It is a
good idea to run finger after changing the GECOS infonnation to make sure everything
is set up properly.
The super-user can change anyone's GECOS infonnation; nonnal users can only
change their own.

Commands

1-445

SysV

PASSWD(l)

PASSWD(l)

EXAMPLE

Below is a sample run:
% passwd-f
Name [Biff Studsworth II]:
Room number (Exs: 597E or 197C) []: S21E
Office Phone (Ex: 1632) []: 1863
Horne Phone (Ex: 987532) [5771546]: none

NOTES
On Domain/OS systems, the letc/passwd file is a typed file, which is automatically generated by the registry daemon. The registry administrator can make the person information in the registry read-only, in which case normal users cannot change the "Name"
field.
FILES

letc/passwd

letc/shells

The file containing all of this information
The list of approved shells

SEE ALSO

login(I}, finger(I}, passwd(4}, crypt(3C), edrgy(lM);
Using YourSysV Environment

1-446

Commands

PASTE(l)

SysV

PASTE(l)

NAME

paste - merge same lines of several files or subsequent lines of one file
SYNOPSIS

paste filel file2 ...
paste -d list file 1 file2 ...
paste -s [-d list1 filel file2 ...
DESCRIPTION
In the first two forms, paste concatenates corresponding lines of the given input files

filel, file2, etc. It treats each file as a column or columns of a table and pastes them
together horizontally (parallel merging). If you will, it is the counterpart of cat(l)
which concatenates vertically, i.e., one file after the other. In the last form above, paste
replaces the function of an older command with the same name by combining subsequent lines of the input file (serial merging). In all cases, lines are glued together with
the tab character, or with characters from an optionally specified list. Output is to the
standard output, so it can be used as the start of a pipe, or as a filter, if a simple dash (-)
is used in place of a filename.
0PI10NS

-d list Replace the default tab character by one or more altemate characters, specified
in list. (see below). The list is used circularly, i.e., when exhausted, it is
reused. In parallel merging (i.e., no -s option), the lines from the last file are
always terminated with a new-line character, not from the list. The list may
contain the special escape sequences: \n (newline), \t (tab), \\ (backslash), and
\0 (empty string, not a null character). Quoting may be necessary, if characters
have special meaning to the shell (e.g., to get one backslash, use -d "\\\\"
If list is not specified, the newline characters of each but the last file (or last
line in case of the -s option) are replaced with a tab character.

-s

Merge subsequent lines rather than one from each input file. Use tab for concatenation, unless a list is specified with -d option. Regardless of the list, the
very last character of the file is forced to be a newline.
May be used in place of any filename, to read a line from the standard input.
(There is no prompting).

EXAMPLES

To list a directory in one column:
Is I paste -d" To list a directory in four columns:
lsi paste--To combine pairs oflines into lines:
paste -s -d"\ t\ nIt file

Commands

1-44i

PASTE(l)

SysV

PASTE(l)

DIAGNOSTICS
line too long Output lines are restricted to 511 characters.
too many files Except in the case of the -s option, no more than 12 input files may be
specified.

SEE ALSO
cut(l), grep(I), pr(l).

1-448

Commands

SysV

PCAT(l)

PCAT(l)

NAME

pack, pcat, unpack - compress and expand files
SYNOPSIS

pack [ -

1 [ -f 1 name

...

pcat name ...
unpack name ...
DESCRIPTION

Pack attempts to store the specified files in a compressed form. Wherever possible and
useful, it replaces each input file name by a packed file name.z with the same access
modes, access and modified dates, and owner as those of name.
If pack is successful, it removes name. Packed files can be restored to their original
form using unpack or pcat.
Pack uses Huffman (minimum redundancy) codes on a byte-by-byte basis.
The amount of compression obtained depends on the size of the input file and the character frequency distribution. Because a decoding tree forms the first part of each .Z file,
it is usually not worthwhile to pack files smaller than three blocks, unless the character
frequency distribution is very skewed, which may occur with printer plots or pictures.
Typically, text files are reduced to 60-75 percent of their original size. Load modules,
which use a larger character set and have a more uniform distribution of characters,
show little compression, the packed versions being about 90 percent of the original size.
Pack returns a value equaling the number of files not compressed.
No packing occurs if one or more of the following conditions exists:
the file appears to be already packed
the filename has more than 12 characters
the file has links
the file is a directory
the file cannot be opened
no disk storage blocks will be saved by packing
a file called name.z already exists
the .z file cannot be created
an I/O error occurred during processing.
The last segment of the filename must contain no more than 12 characters to allow
space for the appended .z extension. Directories cannot be compressed.
Pcat does for packed files what cat(l) does for ordinary files, except that pcat cannot
be used as a filter. The specified files are unpacked and written to the standard output.
To view a packed file named name.z use:
pcat name.z
or just:
peat name
Commands

1-449

PCAT(l)

SysV

PCAT(l)

To make an unpacked copy, say nnn, of a packed file named name.z (without destroying name.z ) use the command:
pcat name> nnn
Pcat returns the number of files it was unable to unpack, but will fail if one of the following conditions exist:
the filename (exclusive of the .z ) has more than 12 characters
the file cannot be opened
the file does not appear to be the output of pack.
Unpack expands files created by pack. For each file name specified in the command, a
search is made for a file called name.z (or just name, if name ends in .z). If this file
appears to be a packed file, it is replaced by its expanded version. The new file has the
.z suffix stripped from its name. It also has the same access modes, access and
modification dates, and owner as those of the packed file.
Unpack returns a value that is the number of files it was unable to unpack. It will fail
for the same reasons as those listed for pcat, as well as for the following additional reasons:
a file with the "unpacked" name already exists
the unpacked file cannot be created.
OPTIONS

(Note that these options are only for use with pack.)
Sets an internal flag that causes the number of times each byte is used, its
relative frequency, and the code for the byte to be printed on the standard output. Additional occurrences of - in place of name cause the
internal flag to be set and reset.
-f

Forces packing of name. Useful for causing an entire directory to be
packed even if some of the files will not benefit.

NOTES TO SysV USERS

The Apollo version of the pack command creates packed files that have an Apollo file
type of "uasc". The original file type information is not carried over to the packed file.
The unpack command checks the magic number of the unpacked file. If it matches one
of the Apollo object types or archive type, the file type of the unpacked file is changed
from "uasc" to "obj". If the file type of the original file is other than "uasc" or one
of the "obj" types checked for by unpack. the file type must be manually changed
after the file is unpacked.
SEE ALSO

cat (1).

1-450

Commands

SysV

PG(1)

PG(1)

NAME
pg - file perusal filter for CRTs
SYNOPSIS

pg [-number] [-p string] [-cefns] [+linenumber] [+/pattern/] ffiles ...]
DESCRIPTION

The pg program is a filter which allows the examination of files one screenful at a time
on a CRT. If you use a simple dash (-) and/or NULL arguments in place of a filename,
pg reads from the standard input. Each screenful is followed by a prompt. If you hit a
carriage return, pg displays another page; other possibilities are enumerated below.
This command is different from previous paginators in that it allows you to back up and
review something that has already passed. The method for doing this is explained
below.
In order to determine terminal attributes, pg scans the terminfo(4) database for the ter-

minal type specified by the environment variable TERM. If TERM is not defined, the
terminal type dumb is assumed.
The responses that may be typed when pg pauses can be divided into three categories:
those causing further perusal, those that search, and those that modify the perusal
environment.
Commands which cause further perusal normally take a preceding address, an optionally signed number indicating the point from which further text should be displayed.
This address is interpreted in either pages or lines depending on the command. A
signed address specifies a point relative to the current page or line, and an unsigned
address specifies an address relative to the beginning of the file. Each command has a
default address that is used if none is provided.
Perusal Commands
(+I) or 
Displays one page. The address is specified in pages.
(+1) I

With a relative address,simulates scrolling the screen, forward or backward, the number of lines specified. With an absolute address, prints a
screenful beginning at the specified line.

(+1) d or"D

Simulates scrolling half a screen forward or backward.

Perusal Commands That Take No Address
.0r"L
Redisplays the current page of text.

$

Displays the last windowful in the file. Use with caution when the input
is a pipe.

Commands for Searching Text Patterns
The following commands are available for searching for text patterns in the text. The
regular expressions described in ed(l) are available. They must always be terminated
by a , even if the -n option is specified.
Commands

1-451

SysV

PG(l)

i/patternl

PG(l)

Searches forward for the ith (default i=l) occurrence of pattern.
Searching begins immediately after the current page and continues to the
end of the current file, without wrap-around.

i'pattern
i'!pattern ?
Searches backwards fnr the ith (default i=l) occurrence of pattern. Searching
begins immediately before the current page and continues to the beginning of
the current file, without wrap-around. The circumflex
notation is useful for
Adds 100 tenninals which will not properly handle the question mark (?).

n

After searching, pg will normally display the line found at the top of the screen. This
can be modified by appending m or b to the search command to leave the line found in
the middle or at the bottom of the window from now on. The suffix t can be used to
restore the original situation.
Commands That Modify the Environment of
in
Begins perusing the ith next file in the command line. The i is an
unsigned number, default value is 1.
iP

Begins perusing the i th previous file in the command line.
unsigned number, default is ·1.

is an

iw

Displays another window of text. If i is present, set the window size to i.

sfilename

Saves the input in the named file. Only the current file being perused is
saved. The white space between the s and filename is optional. This
command must always be terminated by a , even if the -n
option is specified.

h

Helps by displaying an abbreviated summary of available commands.

qorQ

Quitspg.

!command

Passes command to the shell, whose name is taken from the SHELL
environment variable. If this is not available, the default shell is used.
This command must always be terminated by a , even if the
-n option is specified.

At any time when output is being sent to the terminal, you can hit the quit key (normally CTRL-\) or the interrupt (break) key. This causes pg to stop sending output, and
display the prompt. The user may then enter one of the above commands in the normal
manner. Unfortunately, some output is lost when this is done, due to the fact that any
characters waiting in the tenninal's output queue are flushed when the quit signal
occurs.
If the standard output is not a tenninal, then pg acts just like cat(I), except that a header
is printed before each file (if there is more than one).

1-452

Commands

SysV

PG(I)

PG(I)

OPTIONS

-number

Uses number to specify the size (in lines) of the window that pg is to use
instead of the default. (On a tenninal containing 24 lines, the default
window size is 23).

-pstring

Uses string as the prompt. If the prompt string contains a "%d", the
first occurrence of "%d" in the prompt will be replaced by the current
page number when the prompt is issued. The default prompt string is a
colon (:).

-c

Homes the cursor and clear the screen before displaying each page. This
option is ignored if clear_screen is not defined for this tenninal type in
the terminfo(4) database.

-e

Refrains from pausing at the end of each file.

-f

Inhibits the splitting of lines. (Normally, pg splits lines longer than
screen width, but some character sequences in the text being displayed
(e.g., escape sequences for underlining) generate undesirable results.)

-n

Causes an automatic end of command as soon as a command letter is
entered. (Normally, commands must be terminated by a 
character. )

-s

Prints all messages and prompts in standout mode (usually inverse
video).

+linenumber Starts up at linenumber.

+Ipatternl

Starts up at the first line containing the regular expression pattern.

EXAMPLE
A sample usage of pg in reading system news would be
news I pg -p (Page %d):
NOTES

While waiting for terminal input, pg responds to BREAK, DEL, and • by terminating
execution. Between prompts, however, these signals interrupt pg's current task and
place the user in prompt mode. These should be used with caution when input is being
read from a pipe, since an interrupt is likely to terminate the other commands in the
pipeline.
Users of Berkeley's more(l) will find that the z and f commands are available, and that
the tenninal t, " or? may be omitted from the searching commands.

BUGS
If tenninal tabs are not set every eight positions, undesirable results may occur.

When using pg as a filter with another command that changes the terminal
terminal settings may not be restored correctly.

Commands

I/O options,

1-453

SysV

PG(l)

PG(l)

FILES

lusrlIib/terminfol?l*
Itmp/pg*

Tenninal infonnation database
Temporary file when input is from a pipe

SEE ALSO

ed(l), grep(l). tenninfo(4).

1-454

Commands

PR(l)

SysV

PR(l)

NAME
p r - print files
SYNOPSIS
pr [ [-column] [-wwidth] [-a]] [-eck] [-ick] [-drtfp] [+page] [-nck]
[-ooffset] [-I length] [-sseparator] [-h header] [file ... ]

pr [ [-m] [-wwidth] ] [-eck] [-ick] [-drtfp] [+page] [-nck]
[-ooffset] [-Ilength] [-sseparator] [-h header] filel file2 ...
DESCRIPTION
The pr command formats and prints the contents of a file. If you specify a simple dash
(-) in place of file, or if you specify no files, pr assumes standard input. It prints the

named files on standard output.
By default, the listing is separated into pages, each headed by the page number, a date
and time, and the name of the file. Page length is 66 lines which includes 10 lines of
header and trailer output. The header is composed of 2 blank lines, 1 line of text (can
be altered with -h), and 2 blank lines; the trailer is 5 blank lines. For single column
output, line width may not be set and is unlimited. For multicolumn output, line width
may be set and the default is 72 columns. Diagnostic reports (failed options) are
reported at the end of standard output associated with a terminal, rather than interspersed in the output. Pages are separated by series of line feeds rather than form feed
characters.
By default, columns are of equal width, separated by at least one space; lines which do
not fit are truncated. If the -s option is used, lines are not truncated and columns are
separated by the separator character.
Either -column or -m should be used to produce multi-column output. The -a option
should only be used with -column and not -m.
OPTIONS

+page

Begin printing with page numbered page (default is 1).

-column

Print column columns of output (default is 1). Output appears as if-e
and -i are turned on for multi-column output. May not use with -m.

-3

Print multi-column output across the page one line per column. The
value of columns must be greater than one. If a line is too long to fit in a
column, it is truncated.

-m

Merge and print all files simultaneously, one per column. The maximum
number of files that may be specifed is eight. If a line is too long to fit in
a column, it is truncated. May not use with -column.

Commands

1-455

SysV

PR(l)

-d

-eck

PR(l)

Double-space the output. Blank lines that result from double-spacing are
dropped when they occur at the top of a page.
Expand input tabs to character positions k +I, 2*k +I, 3 *k + I, etc. If k is

o or is omitted, default tab settings at every eighth position are assumed.

Tab characters in the input are expanded into the appropriate number of
spaces. If c (any non-digit character) is given, it is treated as the input
tab character (default for c is the tab character).
-ick

In output, replace white space wherever possible by inserting tabs to

character positions k+ 1, 2*k+ I, 3*k+ I, etc. If k is 0 or is omitted,
default tab settings at every eighth position are assumed. If c (any nondigit character) is given, it is treated as the output tab character (default
for c is the tab character).

1-456

-nck

Provide k-digit line numbering (default for k is 5). The number occupies
the first k+ I character positions of each column of single column output
or each line of -m output. If c (any non-digit character) is given, it is
appended to the line number to separate it from whatever follows
(default for c is a tab).

-wwidth

Set the width of a line to width character positions (default is 72). This
is effective only for multi-column output (-There is no line limit for single column output.

-ooffset

Offset each line by offset character positions (default is 0). The number
of character positions per line is the sum of the width and offset.

-Ilength

Set the length of a page to length lines (default is 66). The -10 argument
is reset to -166. When the value of length is 10 or less, -t appears to be
in effect since headers and trailers are suppressed. By default, output
contains 5 lines of header and 5 lines of trailer leaving 56 lines for usersupplied text. When -Ilength is used and length exceeds 10, then
length-1O lines are left per page for user supplied text. When length is
10 or less, header and trailer output is omitted to make room for user
supplied text.

Commands

SysV

PR(l)

-h header

PR(I)

Use header as the text line of the header to be printed instead of the file
name. -h is ignored when -t is specified or -Ilength is specified and the
value of length is 10 or less. (-h is the only pr option requiring space
between the option and argument.)
Pause before beginning each page if the output is directed to a terminal

-p

(pr will ring the bell at the terminal and wait for a carriage return).
-f

Use single form-feed character for new pages (default is to use a
sequence of line-feeds). Pause before beginning the first page if the
standard output is associated with a terminal.

-r

Print no diagnostic reports on files that will not open.

-t

Print neither the five-line identifying header nor the five-line trailer normally supplied for each page. Quit printing after the last line of each file
without spacing to the end of the page. Use of -t overrides the -h
option.

-sseparator

Separate columns by the single character separator instead of by the
appropriate number of spaces (default for separator is a tab). Prevents
truncation oflines on multicolumn output unless -w is specified.

EXAMPLES

To print filel and file2 as a double-spaced, three-column listing headed by "file list",
type the following:

pr -3dh "file list" filel file2
To copy filel to file2, expanding tabs to columns 10, 19,28,37, ... use this command
line:

pr -e9 -t file2
To print file I and file2 simultaneously in a two-column listing with no header or trailer
where both columns have line numbers, type this:

pr -t -n filel

I pr

FILES

Idev/tty*
to delay messages enabling them to print at the bottom of files rather than
interspersed throughout printed output.
SEE ALSO

cat(l), pg(l).

Commands

1-457

PRF(l)

Domain/OS SysV

PRF(l)

NAME

prf - queue a file for printing by Domain/OS Aegis print spooler
SYNOPSIS

prf [options] pathname ...
DESCRIPTION

The prf command queues a file for printing. The file must be an ASCII stream (that is,
text) file, a graphics map file (GMF), or a GPR bitmap object. After successfully queuing a file, prf displays a message containing the full patbname of the file that you
queued.
You can execute prf once for each file that you want to print (specifying all the necessary options every time), or you can enter prf's interactive mode and hand files to the
program continuously. See the examples for a sample interactive session.
Files queued by prf are physically printed by prsvr, the print server, running as a background task under control of prmgr, the print manager.
When you invoke prf, it first sets all options to their default states. Next, it looks for the
print options file called user_ data/startup.prf unless you invoke prf with the -ndb
option. If prf locates the option file, it executes the options contained in the file to
configure the current session. Finally, it processes all options on the command line.
pathname (optional) Specify the file to be printed. Multiple pathnames and patbname
wildcarding are permitted.

Default if omitted: read standard input
OPTIONS

The following options can appear on the shell command line or in prf interactive mode.
In addition, you can place one or more options in a prf option file so that they are exe-

cuted automatically whenever you invoke prf.
Many of the options have default values that are specified in the prsvr configuration file
established for each printer in the network by the system administrator. If you omit
these options, your file is printed using the values specified in the prsvr configuration
file. For example, omission of the -banner option could cause your file to be printed
with a banner page if the prsvrconfiguration file specifies one.
If no options are specified, the file is printed using ASCII carriage control, with pagination enabled, on the default printer as established by the system administrator.

1-458

Commands

PRF(l)

Domain/OS SysV

PRF(l)

Options Applying to All File Types
-inter[activej
Enter interactive mode.
-sea[rch_dirj {onloff}
Searches through all the directories of all the active processes on
your node for the file(s) to be printed. This option is most useful
in interactive mode, when the working directory of the prf process may be different from the working directory of the file to be
printed.
The default is off.
-cop[iesj n

Prints multiple copies of the file, where n is the requested number
of copies. If -cop[iesj is specified, n is required. The default is
one copy.

-pr[interjname

Specifies the name of the printer that should print the file. This
option is useful only if more than one printer is in use on the network, or if a printer has been assigned a nonstandard name with
the printer_name configuration directive in the prsvr command.
If you omit this option, prf uses the default printer name, p. Note
that p is also the default printer name used by the print server.

-s[itej spool_node_name
Uses this option only if you are queuing jobs to a pre-SRIO print
server connected to a spool directory (/sys/print) that is different
from the one specified by your node. By default, SRID printers
find the spool node for you.
-nc[opyj

Prints the specified file from its location in the user-specified
directory, bypassing /sys/print/spooler. If you select this option,
prf defaults to the no-delete (-nd) option. If you specify the
delete (-d) option, the file is deleted at the completion of the
print request. If you use this option (with or without the delete
option), do not open and alter the print file before the print job is
completed.

-d[eletej (default)

Deletes the print file at the completion of the print job.

-nd[eletej

Does not delete the print file when the print server is finished
printing it. This becomes default if -nc is specified.

-user[usernamej

Specifies the user name that appears on the banner page of the
printed file. The alann facility of prf also uses this name to determine who should be notified when printing is complete (see -sig
below). This means that this name must be a valid log-in name
(unless you don't care about sending an alann).
The default is the curtent log-in name.

Commands

1-459

Domain/OS SysV

PRF(l)

PRF(l)

-sig[naIJ {alarmloff} Requests an alann server signal when the file has finished printing.
The default is off.
-ban[nerJ [onloff]

Enables/disables banner page. If the banner setting in the prsvr
configuration file is off, no banner is printed.
The default is on.

-configUile] [pathname]
Specifies a file containing further prf options. one per line. Do
not use prefixed hyphens (-) with the option names in the
configuration file. If pathname is omitted, prf executes the prf
option file /user _data/startup_prf.
-ndb

Suppresses processing of the prf option file.

-trans[parent] [onloff]
off specifies that the file being printed is passed directly to the
printer driver routine with no processing by the print server. The
default is on.
-fiIterLchain] string
Specifies a filter string that will be used by the print server to process the job. This option overrides the default processing done by
the print server. It is most often used to invoke filters that have
been added to the print server. The format of the string is "filter!
I filter2", where filterl and filter2 are composed of strings of the
form "type1$type2" and "type2$type3". Note that the output
type of filter n must equal the input type of filter n+ 1 .
-paper_size (albllegalla3la4la51 b4lb5}
Selects the paper size. You must specify one of the following size
codes:
Code

Size in inches (mm)

a
b
legal
a3
a4
as
b4
b5

8.50 x 11.00
11.00 x 17.00
8.50 x 14.00
11.69 x 16.54 (297mm x 420mm)
8.27 x 11.69 (210mm x 297mm)
5.38 x 8.27 (137mm x 21Omm)
9.84 x 13.90 (257mm x 364mm)
5.93 x 9.89 (182mm x 257mm)

TILDE ESCAPES.if 0=0 .m c. 38636-0-13
1-460

Commands

Domain/OS SysV

PRF(l)

PRF(l)

This option is available only for the DomainlLaser-26 and
APPLE LaserWriter* printers. Because prf assumes that the
correct paper is in the printer's paper tray, you should check the
paper tray before printing. The default paper size is specified in
the prsvr configuration file.
Options Applying to Text Files Only
-margins [onloff]
Enables/disables margins generated by prf.
The default is on.
-topn

Specifies top page margin, in inches. The default is a value
specified in the prsvr configuration file.

-bot[tom] n

Specifies bottom page margin, in inches. The default is a value
specified in the prsvr configuration file.

-right n

Specifies right margin, in inches. The default is 0 inches.

-left n

Specifies left margin, in inches. The default is 0 inches.

-headers [onloff]

Enables/disables page headers and footers generated by prf. The
default is on.

-headLstring] I-string / c-string /r-string
Specifies contents of left, center, and right components of the
page header generated by prf. Components can be empty strings.
The following special characters return the values indicated when
they appear in the header strings:
Character
@

#

Return Value

=Escape character
= current Page number with 1 leading and 1 trailing space

%
&

*

= Current date
= Filename
= Filename's last time, date modified

=Insert a space in text string (literal
spaces are not allowed)

TILDE ESCAPES.if 0=0 .m c. 38842-0-15

Example: -head !/Page#/% produces a header with the filename
in the left component, the string "Page" followed by the current
page number in the center component, and the current date in the
right component. The default header is a string specified in the
prsvr configuration file.
Commands

1-461

PRF(l)

Domain/OS SysV

PRF(l)

-footLstringll-string / c-string / r-string
Specifies contents of page footers. The format is the same as for
-head above. There is no default footer.
-ftn [onloff]

Enables/disables FORTRAN carriage control. -ftn on causes the
print server to use FORTRAN forms control even if the file does
not have the FORTRAN carriage-control flag. Use of this option
causes prf to interpret the first character of each line as a FORTRAN carriage control character (and not print it). This can be
unfortunate if the file has ASCII carriage control, so be careful.
-ftn off causes the print server to print the contents of column
one rather than trying to interpret it as FORTRAN forms control.
If this option is specified without on or off, on is assumed.
The default is off.

-wrap [onloff]

Enables/disables automatic line wrapping. When enabled, prf
wraps lines that exceed the right margin. When disabled, prf
truncates lines that exceed the right margin. If this option is
specified without on or off, on is assumed.
The default is off.

-col[umnsl {tI2}

Specifies single-or double-column printing.
The default state is single column.

-Ipin

Specifies the line-spacing factor. n is an integer indicating the
number of lines per inch.
The default is six lines per inch.

Options for Variable Font and Pitch
-pitch n
Sets the printer pitch (characters/inch). The following pitch settings are available on the printers indicated.
Printer

Pitch

Printronix *
Spinwriter*
IMAGEN*
GENICOM*
Versatec *
LaserWriter*
Laser-26

10
12
8.5,10,12, 15, 17.1
10,12, 13.1, 16.7
12
1 to 100
1 to 100

TILDE ESCAPES.if 0=0 .nr c. 39004-0-l2
1-462

Commands

PRF(l)

Domain/OS SysY

-point n

PRF(l)

Sets the point size for the font to be used. This is a real number
that specifies size in points. A point equals 1n2 inch.

-weight {Iightlmediumlbold}
Sets the weight of the font to be used.
The default is medium.
-Iq [onloff]

Specifies that the document is to be printed in letter quality (on)
or in draft (off) mode. With no argument, on is assumed when
this option is invoked. If the option is not invoked, draft mode is
the default.

Options Applying to Plot Files
-res[olution] n
Specifies output plot resolution in dots per inch. If you specify a
resolution not available on the particular printer, prsvr prints the
file at the closest available resolution.
The default resolution is specified in the prsvr configuration file.
-whiter_space] n

Specifies the amount of white space (in inches) to appear
between multiple plots in one file.
The default is three inches.

-bwLrev] [onJoff]

Enables/disables black and white reversal for bitmaps. If no argument is specified, on is assumed. If the option is not invoked,
black/white reversal is disabled.

-magn[ification] n

Specifies bitmap magnification value. n is an integer in the range
-1 to 16. The values have the following meanings:
-1

Selects auto-scaling to magnify the bitmap to fill the
available page space.

o

Selects one-to-one scaling between the display and the
printer for OMF bitmaps. (For OPR bitmaps, this
translates to magnification 1.)

1-16

Selects the magnification indicated by value. Where 1
equals I-to-1, 2 equals 2x, etc.
Default if omitted: n is 0

Commands

1-463

PRF(l)

Domain/OS SysV

PRF(l)

Options Applying to PostScript* Printers
The following options apply only for files sent to printers that contain the PostScript
interpreter, such as the Domain/Laser-26 and APPLE LaserWriter* printers.
-post[scriptl [onloff]
Enables/disables PostScript interpretation .. When enabled, the
data is passed through the PostScript interpreter. When disabled,
the data is printed as text, plot, or transparent data. If the option
is not invoked, PostScript interpretation is disabled.
The default is on.
-orient[ationl {port[raitliland[scape]}
Selects the page orientation. portrait specifies that the text or xaxis of the bitmap is printed parallel to the short edge of the
paper. landscape specifies that the text or x-axis of the bitmap is
printed parallel to the long edge of the paper and perpendicular to
the short leading edge.
The default is portrait.
Infonnation Request Options
-check [-pr printer_name 1
Checks for the existence of the specified printer. If the printer
does not exist or is unavailable, an error message is returned.
-list_printers

Lists the names and status of all printers currently attached to the
network.

-list sites

Lists the names of all print managers currently in the network.

-sig_printer printer_name {-abortl-sus[pendllcont[inue)}
Signals the printer to abort, suspend, or continue an active print
job.
-prelO

Allows you to queue print requests to a pre-SR 10 print server.

COMMANDS
Once prf has been invoked in interactive mode (see -inter above), it accepts the following interactive commands at the "prf> " prompt (in addition to the options already
discussed).
p[ rint 1 [printJile yathname 1 [options1
Queue the specified file for printing.
q[uitl

1-464

Quit interactive mode and return to the shell.

Commands

PRF(1)

Domain/OS SysV

PRF(l)

sh[ell]

Create a shell command line. This command allows you to issue
shell commands without leaving prf interactive mode. When
you finish entering shell commands, type CfRL{Z. This returns
you to prf interactive mode. Your previous prf option settings
remain undisturbed by the intervening shell commands.

init[ialize1

Reset prf parameters to their default values.

r[eadl [printer]

List queue entries for the specified printer. If printer is omitted,
the contents of the queue (determined by the current setting of
-pr) are listed.

wd [pathname 1

Execute the shell command wd (workinlLdirectory) to set or
display the working directory.

get option

Display the value of the prf option specified. Use this command
to show the settings of the various prfparameters.

can[ceJ] Uob_id]

Cancel printing of the specified file at the current printer. Note
that you must specify the job ID assigned by prmgr when the file
is queued. Use the read command to display the names and job
IDs of currently queued files. This command affects jobs in the
print queue; it does not cancel a job being printed. To halt a job
being printed, use -pr_sig with abort specified.

EXAMPLES

The following example, queues the file named mary for printing and forces FORTRAN
carriage retums:
$ prf mary -fln
"//nodel/my_dir/mary" queued for printing.
$

The following example queues the file named filex to the printer queue on the node
named Iitape:
$ prf filex -s litape
"/ /nodel/my_dir/test_file .pas" queued for printing at site / /tap.
$

This example shows the types of commands that might appear in the default prf
configuration file luser_ data/startup.prf:
pr ge
site //rye
foot %/my_ file/ &

Commands

1-465

PRF(l)

Domain/OS SysV

PRF(l)

The following example shows a sample interactive session:
$ prf-inter
prf> get pr
pr = p
prf> -prcx
prf> getpr
pr = ex
prf> -pitch 20
prf> print test_file.pas
"//nodel/my_dir/test_file.pas" queued for printing.
prf> q
$

This example illustrated running prf from an icon. To run prf interactively in a process
devoted to it, insert the following command in the start-up file that you use to start the
DM:
cp -i -c 'P' IcomJprf -inter -n print_file
The above command creates a prf process and turns its window into an icon using the
print icon character in (/sys/dmJfonts/icons). Issue the DM command icon to change
the icon window into its full-size fonnat.
NOTES
APPLE and LaserWriter are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
Printronix is a trademark of Printronix, Inc.
Spinwriter is a registered trademark of NEC, Inc.
IMAGEN is a registered trademark of IMAGEN Corp.
GENICOM is a registered trademark of GENDICOM Corp.
Versatec is a trademark of Versatec, Inc.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc.

1-466

Commands

PROF(l}

SysV

PROF(l}

NAME

prof - display profile data
SYNOPSIS

prof [-tean] [-ox] [-g] [-z] [-h] [-s] [-m mdata]" fprog]
DESCRIPTION

The prof command interprets a profile file produced by the monitor(3C} function. The
symbol table in the object file prog (a.out by default) is read and correlated with a
profile file (mon.out by default). For each external text symbol the percentage of time
spent executing between the address of that symbol and the address of the next is
printed, together with the number of times that function was called and the average
number of milliseconds per call.
The mutually exclusive options t, e, a, and n determine the type of sorting of the output
lines. The mutually exclusive options 0 and x specify the printing of the address of
each symbol monitored. All other options may be used in any combination.
A program creates a profile file if it has been loaded with the -p option of ee(l}. This
option to the ee command arranges for calls to monitor(3C) at the beginning and end
of execution. It is the call to monitor at the end of execution that causes a profile file
to be written. The number of calls to a function is tallied if the -p option was used
when the file containing the function was compiled.
The name of the file created by a profiled program is controlled by the environment
variable PROFDIR. IfPROFDIR does not exist, "mon.out" is produced in the directory
string,
that is current when the program terminates. If PROFDIR
"string/pid.progname" is produced, where progname consists of argv[O] with any path
prefix removed, and pid is the program's process id. If PROFDIR is the null string, no
profiling output is produced.
A single function may be split into subfunctions for profiling by means of the MARK
macro [see prof(5}].
OPTIONS

-t

Sort by decreasing percentage of total time (default).

--c

Sort by decreasing number of calls.

-a

Sort by increasing symbol address.

-n

Sort lexically by symbol name.

-0

Print each symbol address (in octal) along with the symbol name.

-x
-g
-z

Include non-global symbols (static functions).

Commands

Print each symbol address (in hexadecimal) along with the symbol name.
Include all symbols in the profile range [see monitor(3C)], even if associated with zero number of calls and zero time.

1-467

SysV

PROF(l)

PROF(l)

-h

Suppress the heading normally printed on the report. (This is useful if
the report is to be processed further.)

-s

Print a sununary of several of the monitoring parameters and statistics on
the standard error output.

-m mdata

Use file mdata instead of mon.out as the input profile file.

FILES

mon.out For profile
a.out
For namelist
WARNINGS
The times reported in successive identical runs may show variances of 20% or more,
because of varying cache-hit ratios due to sharing of the cache with other processes.
Even if a program seems to be the only one using the machine, hidden background or
asynchronous processes may blur the data. In rare cases, the clock ticks initiating
recording of the program counter may "beat" with loops in a program, grossly distorting measurements.
Call counts are always recorded precisely.
The times for static functions are attributed to the preceding external text symbol if the
-g option is not used. However, the call counts for the preceding function are still
correct, i.e., the static function call counts are not added in with the call counts of the
external function.
CAVEATS
Only programs that call exit(2) or return from main will cause a profile file to be produced, unless a final call to monitor is explicitly coded.
The use of the -p option to ec(1) to invoke profiling imposes a limit of 600 functions
that may have call counters established during program execution. For more counters
you must call monitor(3C) directly. If this limit is exceeded, other data will be
overwritten and the mon.out file will be corrupted. The number of call counters used
will be reported automatically by the prof command whenever the number exceeds 5/6
of the maximum.
SEE ALSO

cc(l), exit(2), profil(2), monitor(3C), prof(5).

1-468

Conunands

SysV

PRS(l)

PRS(l)

NAME

prs - print an SCCS file
SYNOPSIS

prs [ -d[dataspecJ] [ -r[SIDJ] [-e] [-I] [ -c[date-time]] [-a] file ...
DESCRIPTION

prs prints, on the standard output, part or all of an sees (Source Code Control System)
file in a user-supplied format. If you name a directory, prs behaves as though each file
in the directory is specified as a named file, except that it silently ignores non-SeeS and
unreadable files. If a dash (-) is given in place of a filename, prs reads the standard
input, taking each line to be the name of an sees file or directory to be processed.
Options to prs may appear in any order. Each argument applies independently to each
named file.
OPTIONS

-d[dataspec]

Specify the output data specification. The dataspec is a string consisting of sees file data keywords interspersed with optional usersupplied text.

-r[SID]

Specify the sees Identification (SID) string of the delta for which
information is desired. If you do not specify an SID, then prs
assumes the SID to be that of the most recently created delta.

-e

Request information for all deltas created earlier than and including
the delta designated via the -r keyletter or the date given by the -c
option.

-I

Request information for all deltas created later than and including
the delta designated via the -r keyletter or the date given by the -c
option.

-c[date-time]

Specify date-time as cutoff for requesting information. This cutoff
date-time appears in the following form:
YY[MM[DD[HH[MM[SSlllll
Units omitted from the date-time default to their maximum possible
values; that is, -c8502 is equivalent to -c850228235959. Any
number of non-numeric characters may separate the various twodigit pieces of the cutoff date in the following form:
-c85/2/29:22:25.

-a

Request printing of information for both removed (delta type = R)
and existing (delta type = D) deltas. Refer to rmdel(l) for more
information. If you do not specify the -a keyletter, prs provides
information only on existing deltas.

Commands

1-469

PRS(l)

PRS(l)

SysV

DATA KEYWORDS
Data keywords specify those parts of an sees file to be retrieved and output. All parts
of an sees file have an associated data keyword. Refer to sccsfile(4) for more information about the structure of these file types. There is no limit on the number of times a
data keyword may appear in a dataspec.
prs prints the user-supplied text, and appropriate values (extracted from the sees file)
substituted for the recognized data keywords in the order of appearance in the dataspec.
The format of a data keyword value is either "Simple" (S), in which keyword substitution is direct, or "Multiline" (M), in which keyword substitution is followed by a carriage return. User-supplied text is any text other than recognized data keywords.
A tab is specified by \t, and a carriage return/newline is speCified by \no The default
data keywords are: ":Dt:\t:DL:\nMRs:\n:MR:COMMENTS:\n:C:"

Keyword
:Dt:
:DL:
:Li:
:Ld:
:Lu:
:DT:

:1:
:R:
:L:
:B:
:S:
:D:
:Dy:
:Dm:
:Dd:
:T:
:Th:
:m:
:Ts:
:P:
:DS:
:DP:
:01:
:00:
:Dx:

1-470

Data Item

SCCS Files Data Keywords
File Section

Delta information
Delta line statistics
Lines inserted by Delta
Lines deleted by Delta
Lines unchanged by Delta
Delta type
SCCS ID string (SID)
Release number
Level number
Branch number
Sequence number
Date Delta created
Year Delta created
Month Delta created
Day Delta created
Time Delta created
Hour Delta created
Minutes Delta created
Seconds Delta created
Programmer who created Delta
Delta sequence number
Predecessor Delta seq-no.
Seq-no. of deltas incl., excl., ignored
Deltas included (seq #)
Deltas excluded (seq #)

Delta Table

Value

Format

See below*
:Li:/:Ld:/:Lu:

S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S

nnnnn
nnnnn
nnnnn

D orR
:R:.:L:.:B:.:S:

nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
:Dy:/:Dm:/:Dd:
no
no
no

:Th:::Tm:::Ts:
no
no
no

logname

nnnn
nnnn
:Dn:/:Ox:/:Dg:
:DS::OS: ...
:DS::DS: ...

Commands

PRS(l)

SysV

Keyword
:Dg:
:MR:
:C:
:UN:
:FL:
:Y:
:MF:
:MP:
:KF:
:BF:
:J:
:LK:
:Q:
:M:
:FB:
:CB:
:Ds:
:ND:
:FD:
:BD:
:GB:
:W:
:A:
:Z:
:F:
:PN:

Data Item

PRS(l)

SCCS Files Data Keywords (Contd.)
File Section

Value

Formal

:DS: :DS: ...
text
text
text
User Names
text
Flags
text
yes or no
text
yes or no
yes or no
yes or no
:R: ...
text
text
:R:
:R:
:I:
yes or no
Conunents
text
Body
text
text
:Z::M:\t:l:
N/A
:Z::Y: :M: :I::Z:
N/A
@(#)
N/A
text
N/A
text
N/A

Deltas ignored (seq #)
MR numbers for delta
Conunents for delta
User names
Flag list
Module type flag
MR validation flag
MR validation pgm name
Keyword error/waming flag
Branch flag
Joint edit flag
Locked releases
User defined keyword
Module name
Floor boundary
Ceiling boundary
Default SID
Null delta flag
File descriptive text
Body
Gotten body
A form ofwhat(l) string
A form ofwhat(l) string
what(1) string delimiter
SCCS file name
SCCS file path name

S
M
M
M
M
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
M
M
M
S
S
S
S
S

* :Dt: = :DT: :I: :D: :T: :P: :DS: :DP:
EXAMPLES
% prs -d"Users and/or user IDs for :F: are:OUN:" s.file

Users and/or user

IDS

for s.file are:

xyz

131
abc
% prs -d"Newest delta for pgm :M:: :1: Created :D: By :P:" -r s.ftle
Newest delta for pgm main.c: 3.7 Created 85/12/1 By cas

Conunands

1-471

PRS(l)

SysV

PRS(l)

A simple command line without options, such as prs s.file, may produce the following
on the standard output, for each delta table entry of the "0" type:
D 1.1 85/12/1 00:00:00 cas 1 000000/00000/00000
MRS:

b178-12345
b179-54321
COMMENTS:

this is the comment line for s.file initial delta
%

FILES

/tmp/pr?????
DIAGNOSTICS

Use help(l) for explanations.
SEE ALSO

admin(l), delta(l), get(l), help(l), sccs(I), sccsfile(4);
Using Your SysV Environment.

1-472

Commands

SysV

PS(l)

PS(l)

NAME

ps - report process status
SYNOPSIS

ps [options1
DESCRIPTION

The ps command prints information about active processes. Without options, infonnation is printed about processes associated with the controlling terminal. The output is a
list consisting of the process ID, terminal identifier, cumulative execution time, and the
command name. Otherwise, the information that is displayed is controlled by the selection of options.
All options accept names or lists as arguments. Arguments can be either separated from
one another by commas or enclosed in double quotes and separated from one another
by commas or spaces. Values for proC/ist and grplist must be numeric.
Under the -f option, ps tries to determine the command name and arguments given
when the process was created by examining the user block. Failing this, the command
name is printed, as it would have appeared without the -f option, in square brackets.
The column headings and the meaning of the columns in a ps list are given below; the
letters f and 1 indicate the option (full or long, respectively) that causes the corresponding heading to appear; all means that the heading always appears. Note that these rwo
options determine only what information is provided for a process; they do not determine which processes will be listed.
F

(I)

Flags (hexadecimal and additive) associated with the process

S

(I)

The state of the process:

UID

(f,l)

The user ID number of the process owner (the login name is
printed under the -f option).

PID

(all)

The process ID of the process (this datum is necessary in order to
kill a process).

PPID

(f,l)

The process ID of the parent process.

C

(f,l)

Processor utilization for scheduling.

PRI

(I)

The priority of the process (higher numbers mean lower priority).

NI

(I)

Nice value, used in priority computation.

ADDR

(I)

The memory address of the process.

SZ

(I)

The size (in pages or clicks) of the swappable process's image in
main memory.

WCHAN(I)

The address of an event for which the process is sleeping, or in
SXBRK state, (if blank, the process is running).

Commands

1-473

PS(l)

SysV

STIME (f)

PS(l)

The starting time of the process, given in hours, minutes, and
seconds. (A process begun more than twenty-four hours before
the ps inquiry is executed is given in months and days.)

TTY

(all)

The controlling terminal for the process (the message, ?, is printed
when there is no controlling terminal).

TIME

(all)

The cumulative execution time for the process.

COMMAND(all)

The command name (the full command name and its arguments
are printed under the -f option).

A process that has exited and has a parent, but has not yet been waited for by the parent,
is marked .

OPTIONS
The options are given in descending order according to volume and range of information provided:

-e
-d

1-474

Print information about every process now running.
Print information about all processes except process group
leaders.

-a

Print information about all processes most frequently requested:
all those except process group leaders and processes not associated with a terminal.

-f

Generate a full list. (See below for significance of columns in a
full list.)

-I

Generate a long list. (See below.)

-t termlist

List only process data associated with the terminal given in termlist. Terminal identifiers may be specified in one of two forms:
the device's file name (e.g., tty04) or, if the device's file name
starts with tty, just the digit identifier (e.g., 04).

-p proC/ist

List only process data whvse process ID numbers are given in
proC/ist.

-u uidlist

List only process data whose user ID number or login name is
given in uidlist. In the listing, the numerical user ID will be
printed unless you give the -f option, which prints the login
name.

-g grplist

List only process data whose process group leader's ID number(s)
appears in grplist. (A group leader is a process whose process ID
number is identical to its process group ID number. A login shell
is a common example of a process group leader.)

Commands

SysV

PS(l)

PS(l)

NOTE

You can perfonn a ps on a remote node. To do this, use the following syntax:
/bin/ps [optionsl-n [nodenamel
FILES

idev
idevitty*
ietcipasswd

UID infonnation supplier

WARNING

Things can change while ps is running; the snap-shot it gives is only true for a splitsecond, and it may not be accurate by the time you see it. Some data printed for
defunct processes is irrelevant.
If no termlist, proclist, uidlist, or grplist is specified, ps checks stdin, stdout, and stderr

in that order, looking for the controlling terminal and attempts to report on processes
associated with the controlling tenninal. In this situation, if stdin, stdout, and stderr are
all redirected, ps does not find a controlling terminal, and there is no report.
On a heavily loaded system, ps can report an Iseek(2) error and exit. The ps program
can seek to an invalid user area address; having gotten the address of a process' user
area, ps cannot seek to that address before the process exits and the address becomes
invalid.
Specifying ps -ef may not result in the reporting of the actual start of a tty login session; instead, an earlier time, when a getty was last respawned on the tty line, may be
reported.
SEE ALSO
kill(l), nice(l), getty(IM).

Commands

1-47:

SysV

PTX(l)

PTX(l)

NAME
ptx - pennuted index
SYNOPSIS

ptx [ options ] [ input [ output ] ]
DESCRIPTION

The ptx command generates the file output that can be processed with a text fonnatter
to produce a pennuted index of file input (standard input and output default). First, it
does the pennutation, generating one line for each keyword in an input line; then it
rotates the keyword to the front and sorts the pennuted file; and finally, it rotates the
sorted lines so the keyword comes at the middle of each line.
The output from ptx appears in the following fonn:
.xx "tail" "before keyword" "keyword and after" "head"
The .xx shown above is assumed to be an nroffO) or troff(l) macro that you provide.
The before keyword and keyword and after fields incorporate as much of the line as
will fit around the keyword when it is printed. Tail and head, at least one of which is
always the empty string, are wrapped-around pieces small enough to fit in the unused
space at the opposite end of the line.
OPTIONS
-f

Fold upper- and lowercase letters for sorting.

-t

Prepare the output for the phototypesetter.

-wn

Use n as the length ofthe output line. The default line length is 72 characters for nroffO) and 100 for troff(l).

-gn

Use n as the number of characters to reserve for each gap among the four
parts of the line as finally printed. The default gap is three characters.

-0

only

-i ignore

Use as keywords only the words given in the only file.
Do not use as keywords any words given in the ignore file. If the -i and
options are missing, use lusrllibleign as the ignore file.

-0

-b break

Use the characters in the break file to separate words. Tab, newline, and
space characters are always used as break characters.

-r

Take any leading nonblank characters of each input line to be a reference
identifier (as to a page or chapter), separate from the text of the line.
Attach that identifier as a fifth field on each output line.

BUGS
Line length counts do not account for overstriking or proportional spacing.
Because ptx uses tildes internally, lines containing them do not print correctly.
FILES

Ibin/sort
lusr/lib/eign

1-476

Commands

SysV

PWD(l)

PWD(l)

NAME

pwd - working directory name
SYNOPSIS

pwd
DESCRIPTION

The pwd command prints the pathname of the working (current) directory.
DIAGNOSTICS

Cannot open .. and Read error in ..
Indicate possible file system trouble and should be referred to a UNIX
system administrator.
SEE ALSO

cd(I).

Commands

1-477

RATFOR(l)

• RATFOR(l)

SysV

NAME

ratfor - rational FORTRAN dialect
SYNOPSIS
ratfor [ options ] [files ]
DESCRIPTION
The ratfor command converts: rational dialect of FORTRAN into ordinary FORTRAN.
It provides control flow constructs essentially identical to those in C, as well as
simplified syntax to make programs easier to read and write. These constructs are
described below:
statement grouping:
{ statement; statement; statement)
decision-making:
if (condition) statement [ else statement]
switch (integer value) {
case integer:
statement
[default: ]

statement

loops:
while (condition) statement
for (expression; condition; expression) statement
do limits statement
repeat statement [ until (condition) ]
break
next

free form input:
multiple statementslline; automatic continuation
comments:
# this is a comment.
translation of relationals:
>, >=, etc., become .GT., .GE., etc.
return expression to caller from function:
return (expression)
derme:
define name replacement
include:
include file

1-478

Commands

RATFOR(l)

SysV

RATFOR(l)

OPTIONS

-h

Turn quoted strings into 27H constructs.

-c

Copy comments to the output and attempt to format it neatly.

-6x

Make the continuation character x and place it in column six. Normally,
continuation lines are marked with an ampersand (&) in column one.

Commands

1-479

RBAK(l)

Domain/OS SysV

RBAK(l)

NAME
rbak - restore or index a magnetic media backup file
SYNOPSIS
rbak {-f filenol-fid id} [-dev I m[unit] I f let]
[-inti-index] [-slal-nsla] [-anys] [-reo] [-pr pn]
[-erl-rl-msl-md] [-force] [-du] HI-Idl-Ifl-II]
[-retenl-nreten] [-rewind] [-daell-sael]
[-from filename] [-pdt] [-stdin] {{-alilpn}
[-as diskynJ} ...
DESCRIPTION
rbak restores objects from the backup input media written by wbak (write_backup).
The backup input media can be one of magnetic media, file or standard input.
Use wbak and rbak to back up disks and to transfer information between separate
Domain installations. (Use the rwmt (read_write_magtape) command to transfer information to and from non-Domain installations.)
rbak operates in either index or interchange mode. To restore objects to disk, use interchange mode (-int). To list object names on standard output, without restoring any
information to disk, use index mode (-index).
pathname (optional) Specify name of the object to be indexed or restored to disk.
This may be a directory, file, or link. If the object is being
restored, the new disk object has the same name. If you wish the
disk file to be saved under a different name, use -as (below).
Multiple pathnames are permitted; however, wildcarding is not
supported.
Default if omitted: must use -all
OPTIONS
Backup File Identifiers
One of the following options is required.
-ffile_no
-fcur

Reads the back up file with the file number specified. You
assigned this number with wbak.
Begins reading at current position on the back up medium.
Reads the back up filename specified. You assigned this name
using wbak.

1-480

-int (default)

Selects interchange mode. Backup files are restored to disk.

-index

Selects index mode. Backup filenames are listed on standard output; no information is restored to disk.
Commands

RBAK(I)

Catalog Control
-all

Domain/OS SysV

RBAK(I)

Restores or indexes all the objects in the back up file specified.
This option is required if you do not use the pathname argument
to indicate a particular object to be indexed or restored.

-as pathnamel

Restores the object specified and assign a different disk pathname
pathnamel. This option is valid only when used with the pathname argument on the rbak command line.

-er (default)

Specifies create mode. rbak does not restore objects if their
names already exist on disk. It prints an error message if a name
exists on both disk and backup media, and continues.

-r

Specifies replace mode. rbak deletes the existing disk object,
and replaces it with the object read from backup media.

-force

Forces object deletion if you have owner rights, even if you don't
have delete rights.

-
tab stops would be set at columns 5, 10, and 15, and a maximum line length of 72
would be imposed. NOTE: while inputing text, tab characters when typed are expanded
to every eighth column as is the default.
OPTIONS

-s

Suppresses the printing of character counts bye, r, and w commands, of
diagnostics from e and q commands, and of the ! prompt after a
!shell com/1Ulnd. Also, see the WARNING section at the end of this
manual page.

-p

Allows you to specify a prompt string. Commands to ed have a simple
and regular structure: zero, one, or two addresses followed by a singlecharacter command, possibly followed by parameters to that command.
These addresses specify one or more lines in the buffer. Every command that requires addresses has default addresses, so that the addresses
can very often be omitted.

In general, only one command may appear on a line. Certain commands allow the
input of text. This text is placed in the appropriate place in the buffer. While ed is
accepting text, it is said to be in input mode. In this mode,

Commands

1-485

RED(l)

SysV

RED(l)

no commands are recognized; all input is merely collected. Input mode is left by typing a period (.) alone at the beginning of a line, followed immediately by a carriage
return.
ed supports a limited form of regular expression notation; regular expressions are used
in addresses to specify lines and in some commands (s, for example) to specify portions
of a line that are to be substituted. A regular expression (RE) specifies a set of character
strings. A member of this set of strings is said to be matched by the RE.
REGULAR EXPRESSIONS
The following one-character REs match a single character:

•

An ordinary character (not one of those discussed below) is a one-character RE that
matches itself.

•

A backslash (\) followed by any special character is a one-character RE that
matches the special character itself. The special characters are:

" *, [, and \ (period, asterisk, left square bracket, and backslash, respectively),
which are always special, except when they appear within square brackets.
~ (caret or circumflex), which is special at the beginning of an entire RE, or
immediately follows the left of a pair of square brackets.

$ (dollar sign), which is special at the end of an entire RE.
The character used to bound (i.e., delimit) an entire RE, which is special for that
RE (for example, see how slash (I) is used in the g command, below.)

•

A period (.) is a one-character RE that matches any character except new-line.

•

A non-empty string of characters enclosed in square brackets ([ ]) is a one-character
RE that matches anyone character in that string. If, however, the first character of
the string is a circumflex (~), the one-character RE matches any character except
new-line and the remaining characters in the string. The A has this special meaning
only if it occurs first in the string. The minus (-) may be used to indicate a range of
consecutive AseD characters; for example, [0-9] is equivalent to [0123456789].
The - loses this special meaning if it occurs first (after an initial ~, if any) or last in
the string. The right square bracket (]) does not terminate such a string when it is
the first character within it (after an initial A, if any); e.g., []a-f] matches either a
right square bracket (]) or one of the letters a through f inclusive. The four characters listed in 1.2.a above stand for themselves within such a string of characters.

The following rules may be used to

1-486

co~struct RE s

from one-character REs:

•

A one-character RE is a RE that matches whatever the one-character RE matches.

•

A one-character RE followed by an asterisk (*) is a RE that matches zero or more
occurrences of the one-character RE. If there is any choice, the longest leftmost
string that permits a match is chosen.

Commands

RED(I)

SysV

RED(I)

•

A one-character RE followed by \{m\}, \{m,\}, or \{m,n\} is a RE that matches a
range of occurrences of the one-character RE. The values of m and n must be nonnegative integers less than 256; \{ m \} matches exactly m occurrences; \{ m, \}
matches at least m occurrences; \{m,n\} matches any number of occurrences
between m and n inclusive. Whenever a choice exists, the RE matches as many
occurrences as possible.

•

The concatenation of REs is a RE that matches the concatenation of the strings
matched by each component of the RE.

•

A RE enclosed between the character sequences \( and \) is a RE that matches whatever the unadorned RE matches.

•

The expression \n matches the same string of characters as was matched by an
expression enclosed between \( and \) the sub-expression specified is that beginning
with the n-th occurrence of \( counting from the left. For example, the expression
\(.*\)\ 1$ matches a line consisting of two repeated appearances of the same string.
A

Finally, an entire RE may be constrained to match only an initial segment or final segment of a line (or both).
•

A circumflex (A) at the beginning of an entire RE constrains that RE to match an initial segment of a line.

•

A dollar sign ($) at the end of an entire RE constrains that RE to match a final segment of a line.

The construction entire RE $ constrains the entire RE to match the entire line.
A

The null RE (e.g., II) is equivalent to the last RE encountered. See also the last paragraph before FILES below.
To understand addressing in ed it is necessary to know that at any time there is a
current line. Generally speaking, the current line is the last line affected by a command; the exact effect on the current line is discussed under the description of each
command. Addresses are constructed as follows:
The character. addresses the current line.
The character $ addresses the last line of the buffer.
A decimal number n addresses the n -th line of the buffer.

'x addresses the line marked with the mark name character x, which must be a
lower-case letter. Lines are marked with the k command described below.
A RE enclosed by slashes (I) addresses the first line found by searching forward
from the line following the current line toward the end of the buffer and stopping
at the first line containing a string matching the RE. If necessary, the search wraps
around to the beginning of the buffer and continues up to and including the
current line, so that the entire buffer is searched. See also the last paragraph
before FILES below.
Commands

1-487

SysV

RED(l)

RED(l)

A RE enclosed in question marks (?) addresses the first line found by searching
backward from the line preceding the current line toward the beginning of the
buffer and stopping at the first line containing a string matching the RE. If necessary, the search wraps around to the end of the buffer and continues up to and
including the current line. See also the last paragraph before FILES below.
An address followed by a plus sign ( + ) or a minus sign (-) followed by a decimal

number specifies that address plus (respectively minus) the indicated number of
lines. The plus sign may be omitted.
If an address begins with + or -, the addition or subtraction is taken with respect
to the current line; e.g, -5 is understood to mean .-5.
If an address ends with + or -, then I is added to or subtracted from the address,
respectively. As a consequence of this rule and the rule immediately above, the
address - refers to the line preceding the current line. (To maintain compatibility
in addresses is entirely
with earlier versions of the editor, the character
equivalent to -.) Moreover, trailing + and - characters have a cumulative effect,
so - refers to the current line less 2.
A

For convenience, a comma (,) stands for the address pair 1,$, while a semicolon
( ;) stands for the pair., $.
COMMANDS
Commands may require zero, one, or two addresses. Commands that require no
addresses regard the presence of an address as an error. Commands that accept one or
two addresses assume default addresses when an insufficient number of addresses is
given; if more addresses are given than such a command requires, the last one(s) are
used.
Typically, addresses are separated from each other by a comma (,). They may also be
separated by a semicolon (;). In the latter case, the current line (.) is set to the first
address, and only then is the second address calculated. This feature can be used to
determine the starting line for forward and backward searches. The second address of
any two-address sequence must correspond to a line that follows, in the buffer, the line
corresponding to the first address.
In the following list of ed commands, the default addresses are shown in parentheses.

The parentheses are not part of the address; they show that the given addresses are the
default.
It is generally illegal for more than one command to appear on a line. However, any
command (except e,f, r, or w) may be suffixed by I, n, or p in which case the current
line is either listed, numbered or printed, respectively, as discussed below under the I,
n, andp commands.
(. )a



1-488

Commands

SysV

RED(I)

RED(I)

The append command reads the given text and appends it after the addressed
line; . is left at the last inserted line, or, if there were none, at the addressed
line. Address 0 is legal for this command: it causes the "appended" text to be
placed at the beginning of the buffer. The maximum number of characters that
may be entered from a terminal is 256 per line (including the new-line character).
(. )c


The change command deletes the addressed lines, then accepts input text that
replaces these lines; . is left at the last line input, or, if there were none, at the
first line that was not deleted.
(.,. )d

The delete command deletes the addressed lines from the buffer. The line
after the last line deleted becomes the current line; if the lines deleted were originally at the end of the buffer, the new last line becomes the current line.
efile

The edit command causes the entire contents of the buffer to be deleted, and
then the named file to be read in; • is set to the last line of the buffer. If no file
name is given, the currently-remembered file name, if any, is used (see the f
command). The number of characters read is typed; file is remembered for
possible use as a default file name in subsequent e, r, and w commands. If file
is replaced by!, the rest of the line is taken to be a shell (sh(l» command
whose output is to be read. Such a shell command is not remembered as the
current file name. See also DIAGNOSTICS below.
Efile

The Edit command is like e, except that the editor does not check to see if any
changes have been made to the buffer since the last w command.
ffile
Iffile is given, thefile-name command changes the currently-remembered file
name to file; otherwise, it prints the currently-remembered file name.

(1, $ )g/RElcommand list
In the global command, the first step is to mark every line that matches the
given RE. Then, for every such line, the given command list is executed with.
initially set to that line. A single command or the first of a list of commands
appears on the same line as the global command. All lines of a multi-line list
except the last line must be ended with a \; a, i, and c commands and associated input are permitted. The. terminating input mode may be omitted if it
would be the last line of the command list. An empty command list is
equivalent to the p command. The g, G, v, and V commands are not permitted in the command list. See also BUGS and the last paragraph before FILES
below.

Commands

1-489

SysV

RED(l)

RED(1)

(l,$)GIREI
In the interactive Global command, the first step is to mark every line that

matches the given RE. Then, for every such line, that line is printed, . is
changed to that line, and anyone command (other than one of the a, c, i, g, G,
v, and V commands) may be input and is executed. After the execution of that
command, the next marked line is printed, and so on; a new-line acts as a null
command; an & causes the re-execution of the most recent command executed
within the current invocation of G. Note that the commands input as part of
the execution of the G command may address and affect any lines in the
buffer. The G command can be terminated by an interrupt signal (ASCII DEL
or BREAK).
h

The help command gives a short error message that explains the reason for the
most recent? diagnostic.
H

The Help command causes ed to enter a mode in which error messages are
printed for all subsequent ? diagnostics. It will also explain the previous ? if
there was one. The H command alternately turns this mode on and off; it is
initially off.
(. )i


The insert command inserts the given text before the addressed line; . is left at
the last inserted line, or, if there were none, at the addressed line. This command differs from the a command only in the placement of the input text.
Address 0 is not legal for this command. The maximum number of characters
that may be entered from a terminal is 256 per line (including the new-line
character).
(., .+1 )j

The join command joins contiguous lines by removing the appropriate newline characters. If exactly one address is given, this command does nothing.
(. )kx

The mark command marks the addressed line with name x, which must be a
lower-case letter. The address'x then addresses this line; . is unchanged.
(.,. )1

The list command prints the addressed lines in an unambiguous way: a few
non-printing characters (e.g., tab, backspace) are represented by visually
mnemonic overstrikes. All other non-printing characters are printed in octal,
and long lines are folded. An I command may be appended to any other command other than e,J, r, or w.
(.,.)ma

The move command repositions the addressed line(s) after the line addressed
1-490

Commands

SysV

RED(1)

RED(I)

bya. Address 0 is legal for a and causes the addressed line(s) to be moved to
the beginning of the file. It is an error if address a falls within the range of
moved lines; . is left at the last line moved.
(.,. )n

The number command prints the addressed lines, preceding each line by its
line number and a tab character; . is left at the last line printed. The n command may be appended to any other command other than e ,f, r, or w.
(.,. )p

The print command prints the addressed lines; . is left at the last line printed.
The p command may be appended to any other command other than e ,f, r, or
w. For example, dp deletes the current line and prints the new current line.
p
The editor will prompt with a * for all subsequent commands. The P command alternately turns this mode on and off; it is initially off.
q

The quit command causes ed to exit. No automatic write of a file is done;
however, see DIAGNOSTICS, below.

Q
The editor exits without checking if changes have been made in the buffer
since the last w command.
($)r file

The read command reads in the given file after the addressed line. If no file
name is given, the currently-remembered file name, if any, is used (see e andf
commands). The currently-remembered file name is not changed unless file is
the very first file name mentioned since ed was invoked. Address 0 is legal for
r and causes the file to be read at the beginning of the buffer. If the read is
successful, the number of characters read is typed; • is set to the last line read
in. If file is replaced by !, the rest of the line is taken to be a shell (sh (1» command whose output is to be read. For example, "$r !Is" appends current directory to the end of the file being edited. Such a shell command is not remembered as the current file name.
or
or
n = 1-512
The substitute command searches each addressed line for an occurrence of the
specified RE. In each line in which a match is found, all (non-overlapped)
matched strings are replaced by the replacement if the global replacement
indicator g appears after the command. If the global indicator does not appear,
only the first occurrence of the matched string is replaced. If a number n
appears after the command, only the nth occurrence of the matched string on
each addressed line is replaced. It is an error for the substitution to fail on all

(.,. )slRElreplacementl
(.,. )s/RElreplacementlg
(.,. lslRElreplacementln

Commands

1-491

RED(1)

SysV

REO(l)

addressed lines. Any character other than space or new-line may be used
instead of I to delimit the RE and the replacement; . is left at the last line on
which a substitution occurred. See also the last paragraph before FILES
below.
An ampersand (&) appearing in the replacement is replaced by the string
matching the RE on the current line. The special meaning of & in this context
may be suppressed by preceding it by \. As a more general feature, the characters \n, where n is a digit, are replaced by the text matched by the n-th regular
subexpression of the specified RE enclosed between \( and \). When nested
parenthesized subexpressions are present, n is determined by counting
occurrences of \( starting from the left. When the character % is the only
character in the replacement, the replacement used in the most recent substitute command is used as the replacement in the current substitute command.
The % loses its special meaning when it is in a replacement string of more
than one character or is preceded by a \.

A line may be split by substituting a new-line character into it. The new-line
in the replacement must be escaped by preceding it by \. Such substitution
cannot be done as part of a g or v command list.
(.,. )ta

This command acts just like the m command, except that a copy of the
addressed lines is placed after address a (which may be 0); . is left at the last
line of the copy.
u

The undo command nullifies the effect of the most recent command that
modified anything in the buffer, namely the most recent a, c, d, g, i, j, m, r, s,
t, v, G, orV command.
(1, $ )vlRElcommand list
This command is the same as the global command g except that the command
list is executed with. initially set to every line that does not match the RE.
(l,$)VIREI
This command is the same as the interactive global command G except that
the lines that are marked during the first step are those that do not match the
RE.
(l ,$)w file

The write command writes the addressed lines into the named file. If the file
does not exist, it is created with mode 666 (readable and writable by everyone), unless your umask setting (see umask(l» dictates otherwise. The
currently-remembered file name is not changed unless file is the very first file
name mentioned since ed was invoked. If no file name is given, the
currently-remembered file name, if any, is used (see e and! commands); . is
unchanged. If the command is successful, the number of characters written is

1-492

Commands

RED(l)

SysV

REO(l)

typed. If file is replaced by !, the rest of the line is taken to be a shell (sh (1»
command whose standard input is the addressed lines. Such a shellcommand
is not remembered as the current file name.
($)=

The line number of the addressed line is typed; • is unchanged by this command.

!shell command
The remainder of the line after the! is sentto the UNIX system shell (sh(l» to
be interpreted as a command. Within the text of that command, the unescaped
character % is replaced with the remembered file name; if a ! appears as the
first character of the shell command, it is replaced with the text of the previous
shell command. Thus,!! will repeat the last shell command. If any expansion
is performed, the expanded line is echoed; . is unchanged.
( .+ 1 )
An address alone on a line causes the addressed line to be printed. A new-line
alone is equivalent to .+lp; it is useful for stepping forward through the buffer.
If an interrupt signal (ASCII DEL or BREAK) is sent, ed prints a ? and returns to its
command level.

Some size limitations: 512 characters per line, 256 characters per global command list,
and 64 characters per file name. The limit on the number of lines depends on the
amount of user memory: each line takes 1 word.
When reading a file, ed discards ASCII NUL characters. Files (e.g., a.out) that contain
characters not in the ASCII set (bit 8 on) cannot be edited by ed.
If a file is not terminated by a new-line character, ed adds one and outputs a message
explaining what it did.
If the closing delimiter of a RE or of a replacement string (e.g., /) would be the last
character before a new-line, that delimiter may be omitted, in which case the addressed
line is printed. The following pairs of commands are equivalent:
s/sl/s2
s/sl/s21p
glsl
g/sllp
?sl
?sl?
WARNINGS
The - option, although supported in this release for upward compatibility, will no
longer be supported in the next major release of the system. Convert shell scripts that
use the - option to use the -s option, instead.
BUGS
A ! command cannot be subject to a g or a v command.
The ! command and the ! escape from the e, r, and w commands cannot be used if the
editor is invoked from a restricted shell (see sh(l».
The sequence \n in aRE does not match a new-line character.

Commands

1-493

SysV

RED(I)

RED(I)

Characters are masked to 7 bits on input.
If the editor input is coming from a command file (e.g., ed file < ed-cmd-file), the editor

will exit at the first failure.
FILES

lusr/tmp default directory for temporary work file.
$TMPDIR if this environmental variable is not null, its value is used in place of
lusr/tmp as the directory name for the temporary work file.
ed.hup
work is saved here if the terminal is hung up.
DIAGNOSTICS

?
?file

for command errors.
for an inaccessible file.
(use the help and Help commands for detailed explanations).

If changes have been made in the buffer since the last w command that wrote the entire
buffer, ed warns the user if an attempt is made to destroyed's buffer via the e or q

commands. It prints ? and allows one to continue editing. A second e or q command
at this point will take effect. The -s command-line option inhibits this feature.
SEE ALSO

edit(l), ex(l), grep(l), sed(l), sh(l), stty(l), wnask(l), vi(l).
fspec(4), regexp(5) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

1-494

Commands

SysV

REGCMP(l)

REGCMP(1)

NAME

regcmp - regular expression compile
SYNOPSIS

regcmp [ - ] files
DESCRIPTION

The regcmp command perfonns a function similar to regcmp(3X) and, in most cases,
precludes the need for calling regcmp(3X) from C programs. This saves on both execution time and program size. The regcmp command compiles the regular expressions
in file and places the output in file.i. If a simple dash (-) is used in place of a filename,
regcmp directs the output to file .c. The fonnat of entries infile is a name (C variable),
followed by one or more blanks, followed by a regular expression enclosed in double
quotes. The output of regcmp is C source code. Compiled regular expressions are
represented as extern char vectors. All file.i files may thus be included in C programs,
or file .c files may be compiled and later loaded. In the C program that uses the regcmp
output, regex(abc ,line) will apply the regular expression named abc to line. Diagnostics are self-explanatory.
EXAMPLES

name n([A-Za-z][A-Za-z0-9-1*)$On
tel no n\({O,I}([2-9][Ol][I-9])$0\){O,I} *n
n ([2-9][0-9){2})$I[ _]{O,l}n
n([0-9]{4})$2 n
In the C program that uses the regcmp output,

regex(telno, line, area, exch, rest)
will apply the regular expression named felno to line.
SEE ALSO

regcmp(3X).

Commands

1-495

SysV

REMSH(lC)

REMSH(lC)

NAME

remsh - remote shell
SYNOPSIS

remsh host [ -I username ] [ -n ] command
host [ -I username ] [ -n ] command
DESCRIPTION

remsh connects to the specified host, and executes the specified command. remsh
copies its standard input to the remote command, the standard output of the remote
command to its standard output, and the standard error of the remote command to its
standard error. Interrupt, quit and tenninate signals are propagated to the remote command; remsh nonnally terminates when the remote command does.
The remote usemame used is the same as your local usemame, unless you specify a different remote name with the -I option.
If you omit command, then instead of executing a single command, you will be logged
in on the remote host using rlogin(lC).

Shell metacharacters which are not quoted are interpreted on the local machine, while
quoted metacharacters are interpreted on the remote machine.
Host names are given in the file /etc/hosts. Each host has one standard name (the first
name given in the file), which is rather long and unambiguous, and optionally one or
more nicknames. The host names for local machines are also commands in the directory /usr/hosts; if you put this directory in your search path, then the remsh can be
omitted.
OPTIONS

-I username

Specify a remote username different from your local usemame. This
remote name must be equivalent (in the sense of rlogin(lC» to the originating account; no provision is made for specifying a password with a
command.

-n

Redirect the input of remsh to /dev/null.

EXAMPLES

The following command appends the remote file remotefile to the localfile localfile.
remsh otherhost cat remotefile » localfile
The command below appends remotefile to otherremotefile.
remsh otherhost cat remotefile "»" otherremotefile

BUGS
If you are using csh( 1) and put a remsh( 1C) in the background without redirecting its
input away from the terminal, it will block even if no reads are posted by the remote
command. If no input is desired you should redirect the input of remsh to !dev/null
using the -n option.

1-496

Commands

REMSH(lC)

SysV

REMSH(lC)

You cannot run an interactive command (such as rogue(6) or vi(l»; use rlogin(lC).
Stop signals stop the local remsh process only; this is arguably wrong, but currently
hard to fix for reasons too complicated to explain here.
FILES

/etc/hosts
/usr/hosts/*
SEE ALSO

rlogin(lC)

Commands

1-497

SysV

RLOGIN(lC)

RLOGIN(lC)

NAME

rlogin - remote login
SYNOPSIS

rlogin rhost [ -e c ] [ -8 ] [-L ] [ -I username ]
rhost [ --ec ] [ -8 ] [-L ] [ -I username ]
DESCRIPTION

rlogin connects your teoninal on the current local host system lhost to the remote host
system rhost.
Each host has a file, letc/hosts.equiv, that contains a list of rhosts with which it shares
account names. (The host names must be the standard names as described in
remsh(IC).) When you execute rlogin as the same user on an equivalent host, you
don't need to provide a password. Each user may also have a private equivalence list in
a file .rhosts in his or her log-in directory. Each line in this file should contain an rhost
and a username separated by a space, giving additional cases where logins without
passwords are to be permitted. If the originating user is not equivalent to the remote
user, then a login and password will be prompted for on the remote machine as in
login(l). To avoid some security problems, the .rhosts file must be owned by either the
remote user or root.
The remote teoninal type is the same as your local terminal type (as given in your
environment TERM variable). The terminal or window size is also copied to the
remote system if the server supports the option, and changes in size are reflected as
well. All echoing takes place at the remote site, so that (except for delays) the rlogin is
transparent. Flow control via CTRL/S and CTRL/Q and flushing of input and output on
interrupts are handled properly.
To disconnect from the remote host, use a tilde followed by a period C,). The tilde is
the escape character. Similarly, to suspend the rlogin session, use CfRLIZ, the
suspend character). By using CTRL/Y (the delayed-suspend character), you can
suspend the send portion of the rlogin, but allow output from the remote system. Use
the --e option to specify a different escape character.
OPTIONS

--ec

Specify c as the escape character to use. There is no space separating --e
and the argument character.

-8

Allows an eight-bit input data path at all times; otherwise parity bits are
stripped except when the remote side's stop and start characters are other
than CfRL/S and CfRL/Q.

-L

Allows the rlogin session to be run in litout mode.

-I username Specify a different username. This is necessary when the originating
user is not equivalent to the remote user.

1-498

Commands

RLOGIN(lC)

SysV

RLOGIN(lC)

FILES

/usr/hosts/*

For rhost version of the command

BUGS
More of the environment should be propagated.
SEE ALSO

remsh(IC)

Commands

1-499

SysV

RM(l)

RM(l)

NAME

rm, rmdir - remove files or directories
SYNOPSIS

rm [-f] [-i] file ...
rm -r [-f] [-i] dirname ... [file ... ]
rmdir [-p] [-s] dirname .. .
DESCRIPTION

The rm command removes the entries for one or more files from a directory. If an
entry was the last link to the file, the file is destroyed. Removal of a file requires write
permission in its directory, but neither read nor write permission on the file itself.
If a file has no write permission and the standard input is a terminal, the full set of permissions (in octal) for the file are printed followed by a question mark. This is a prompt
for confirmation. If the answer begins with y (for yes), the file is deleted, otherwise the
file remains.
Note that if the standard input is not a terminal, the command will operate as if the -f
option is in effect.
The rmdir command removes the named directories, which must be empty.
OPTIONS

The following options apply to the rm command:
-f

Remove all files (whether write-protected or not) in a directory without prompting the user. In a write-protected directory, however, files are never removed
(whatever their permissions are), but no messages are displayed. If the removal of
a write-protected directory was attempted, this option cannot suppress an error
message.

-r

Recursively remove any directories and subdirectories in the argument list. The
directory will be emptied of files and removed. Normally, you are prompted for
removal of any write-protected files that the directory contains. The writeprotected files are removed without prompting, however, if the -f option is used,
or if the standard input is not a terminal and the -i option is not used.
If the removal of a non-empty, write-protected directory was attempted, the command will always fail (even if the -f option is used), resulting in an error message.

-i

1-500

With this option, confirmation of removal of any write-protected file occurs
interactively. It overrides the -f option and remains in effect even if the standard
input is not a terminal.

Commands

RM(l)

SysV

RM(l)

The following options apply to the rmdir command:
-p

Remove the directory dirname and its parent directories which become empty as
a result. Print a message on standard output telling whetber the whole path is
removed or part of the path remains for some reason.

-s

Suppress the message printed on standard error when -p is in effect.

DIAGNOSTICS
All messages are generally self-explanatory.

It is forbidden to remove the files "." and ".. " in order to avoid the consequences of
inadvertently doing something like the following:
rm-r.*
Both rm and rmdir return exit codes of 0 if all the specified directories are removed
successfully. Otherwise, they return a non-zero exit code.
SEE ALSO
unIink(2), rtndir(2).

Commands

1-501

SysV

RMAIL(l)

RMAIL(l)

NAME

mail, rmail - send mail to users or read mail
SYNOPSIS

Sending mail:
mail [ --oswt ] persons
rmail [ -oswt ] persons
Reading mail:
mail [ -ehpqr ] [ -f file] [ -F persons]
DESCRIPTION

Sending mail:
A person is usually a user name recognized by login(l). When persons are named,
mail assumes a message is being sent (except in the case of the -F option). It reads
from the standard input up to an end-of-file (C1RLID), or until it reads a line consisting
of just a period. When either of those signals is received, mail adds the letter to the
mailfile for each person. A letter is a message preceded by a postmark. The message
is preceded by the sender's name and a postmark. A postmark consists of one or more
'From' lines followed by a blank line (unless the -s argument was used).
If a letter is found to be undeliverable, it is returned to the sender with diagnostics that
indicate the location and nature of the failure. If mail is interrupted during input, the

file dead.letter is saved to allow editing and resending. The dead.letter file is
recreated every time it is needed, erasing any previous contents.
The rmail command only permits the sending of mail; uucp(lC) uses rmail as a security precaution.
If the local system has the Basic Networking Utilities installed, mail may be sent to a

recipient on a remote system. Prefix person by the system name and exclamation point.
A series of system names separated by exclamation points can be used to direct a letter
through an extended network.
Reading Mail:
The mail program, unless otherwise influenced by command-line arguments, prints a
user's mail messages in last-in, first-out order. For each message, the user is prompted
with a question mark (?), and a line is read from the standard input. The following
commands are available to determine the disposition of the message:
, +, or n
Go on to next message.

1-502

d,ordp

Deletes message and go on to next message.

d#

Deletes message number #. Do not go on to next message.

dq

Deletes message and quit mail.
Commands

SysV

RMAIL(l)

h

Displays a window of headers around current message.

h#

Displays header of message number #.

ha

Displays headers of all messages in the user's mailfile.

hd

Displays headers of messages scheduled for deletion.

p

Prints current message again.

RMAIL(l)

Prints previous message.
Prints message that arrived during the mail session.

a
#

Prints message number #.

1
s [files 1

Replys to the sender, and other user( s), then deletes the message.

r [users

Saves message in the named files (mbox is default).

y

Same as save.

u[#]

Undeletes message number # (default is last read).

w [files 1

Saves message, without its top-most header, in the named files (mbox is
default).

m [persons 1 Mails the message to the named persons.
q, or ctl-d

Puts undeleted mail back in the mailfile and quits mail.

x

Puts all mail back in the mailfile unchanged and exits mail.

!command

Escapes to the shell to do command.

?

Prints a command summary.

When a user logs in, the presence of mail, if any, is indicated. Also, notification is made
if new mail arrives while using mail.
The mailfile may be manipulated in two ways to alter the function of mail. The other
permissions of the file may be read-write, read-only, or neither read nor write to allow
different levels of privacy. If changed to other than the default, the file will be
preserved even when empty to perpetuate the desired permissions. The file may also
contain the first line:
Forward to person
which will cause all mail sent to the owner of the mailfile to be forwarded to person. A
"Forwarded by ... " message is added to the header. This is especially useful in a multimachine environment to forward all of a person's mail to a single machine, and to keep
the recipient informed if the mail has been forwarded. Installation and removal of forwarding is done with the -F option.
To forward all of one's mail to systema!user enter the following:
mail-Fsystema!user

Commands

1-503

SysV

RMAIL(l)

RMAIL(l)

To forward to more than one user, enter this command line:

mail-F"userl,systema!user2,systema!systemb!user3"
Note that when more than one user is specified, the whole list should be enclosed in
double quotes so that it may all be inteIpreted as the operand of the -F option. The list
can be up to 1024 bytes; either commas or white space can be used to separate users.
To remove forwarding, enter the following:

mail-F""
The pair of double quotes is mandatory to set a NULL argument for the -F option.
In order for forwarding to work properly, the mailfile should have "mail" as group ID

and the group permission should be read-write.
OPTIONS

Sending mail:
-0

Suppresses the address optimization facility.

-s

Suppresses the addition of a  at the top of the letter being sent.
See WARNINGS below.

-w

Causes a letter to be sent to a remote user without waiting for the completion of the remote transfer program.

-t

Causes a To: line to be added to the letter, showing the intended recipients.

Reading mail:

1-504

-e

Causes mail not to be printed. An exit value of 0 is returned if the user
has mail; otherwise, an exit value of 1 is returned.

-h

Causes a window of headers to be displayed rather than the latest message. The display is followed by the '?' prompt.

-p

Causes all messages to be printed without prompting for disposition.

-q

Causes mail to terminate after interrupts. Normally an interrupt causes
only the termination of the message being printed.

-r

Causes messages to be printed in first-in, first-out order.

-fjile

Causes BI mail to use file (e.g., mbox) instead of the default mailfile.

-Fpersons

Entered into an empty mailbox, causes all incoming mail to be forwarded to persons.

Commands

SysV

RMAIL(l)

RMAIL(l)

WARNING

The "Forward to person" feature may result in a loop, if sysl!userb forwards to
sys2!userb and sys2!userb forwards to sysl!userb. The symptom is a message saying
"unbounded... saved mail in dead.letter."
The -s option should be used with caution. It allows the text of a message to be interpreted as part of the postmark of the letter, possibly causing confusion to other mail
programs. To allow compatibility with mailx(l), if the first line of the message is "Subject: ... ", the addition of a  is suppressed whether or not the -s option is used.
BUGS
Conditions sometimes result in a failure to remove a lock file.
After an interrupt, the next message may not be printed; printing may be forced by typing a p.
FILES

letc/passwd
lusr/mailluser
$HOME/mbox
$MAIL
Itmp/ma*
lusr/mail/*.Iock
dead.letter

To identify sender and locate persons
Incoming mail for user; i.e., the mailfile
Saved mail
Variable containing path name of mailfile
Temporary file
Lock for mail directory
Unmailable text

SEE ALSO

10gin(1), mailx(l), write(l).
Managing SysV System Software.

Commands

1-50~

RMDEL(l)

SysV

RMDEL(l)

NAME

rmdel - remove a delta from an sees file
SYNOPSIS
rmdel -rSID files
DESCRIPTION
The rmdel commnd removes the delta specified by the SID from each named sees file.

The delta to be removed must be the newest (most recent) delta in its branch in the delta
chain of each named sees file. In addition, the SID specified must not be that of a version being edited for the purpose of making a delta (i. e., if a p-file (see get(l)) exists
for the named sees file, the SID specified must not appear in any entry of the p-file).
The -r option is used for specifying the SID (SCCS IDentification) level of the delta to
be removed.
If a directory is named, rmdel behaves as though each file in the directory were

specified as a named file, except that non-sees files (last component of the path name
does not begin with s.) and unreadable files are silently ignored. If you specify a simple dash (-) in place of a filename, the standard input is read. Each line of the standard
input is taken to be the name of an sees file to be processed; non-sees files and
unreadable files are silently ignored.
Simply stated, the rules for using rmdel are as follows: (I) if you make a delta you can
remove it, or (2) if you own the file and directory you can remove a delta.
FILES

x.fiIe
z.fiIe

(see delta(l»
(see deUa(l»

DIAGNOSTICS
Use help (1) for explanations.
SEE ALSO

delta(l), get(I), help(l), prs(l), sccsfile(4).

1-506

Commands

SysV

RMDIR(l)

RMDIR(1:

NAME

rm, rmdir - remove files or directories
SYNOPSIS

rm [-f] H] file ...
rm -r [-f] [-i] dirname ... [file ... ]
rmdir [-p] [-s] dirname .. .
DESCRIPTION

The rm command removes the entries for one or more files from a directory. If  ".

IFS

Internal field separators, normally space, tab, and newline.

SHACCT
If this parameter is set to the name of a file writable by the user, the
shell will write an accounting record in the file for each shell procedure executed.
Commands

1-513

SysV

RSH(l)

RSH(l)

SHELL When the shell is invoked, it scans the environment (see "Environment" below) for this name. If it is found and 'rsh' is the file name
part of its value, the shell becomes a restricted shell.
The shell gives default values to PATH, PSI, PS2, MAILCHECK and IFS. HOME and
MAIL are set by login(l).
Blank Interpretation
After parameter and command substitution, the results of substitution are scanned for
internal field separator characters (those found in IFS) and split into distinct arguments
where such characters are found. Explicit null arguments ("" or ,,) are retained.
Implicit null arguments (those resulting from parameters that have no values) are
removed.
Input/Output
A command's input and output may be redirected using a special notation interpreted
by the shell. The following may appear anywhere in a simple-command or may precede
or follow a command and are not passed on as arguments to the invoked command.
Note that parameter and command substitution occurs before word or digit is used.
word
»word
«[ - ]word

<&digit

1-514

Use file word as standard input (file descriptor 0).
Use file word as standard output (file descriptor 1). If the file does not
exist it is created; otherwise, it is truncated to zero length.
Use file word as standard output. If the file exists output is appended
to it (by first seeking to the end-of-file); otherwise, the file is created.
After parameter and command substitution is done on word, the shell
input is read up to the first line that literally matches the resulting
word, or to an end-of-file. If, however, - is appended to «:
1) leading tabs are stripped from word before the shell input is read
(but after parameter and command substitution is done on word),
2) leading tabs are stripped from the shell input as it is read and
before each line is compared with word, and
3) shell input is read up to the first line that literally matches the
resulting word, or to an end-of-file.
If any character of word is quoted (see "Quoting," later), no additional
processing is done to the shell input. If no characters of word are
quoted:
1) parameter and command substitution occurs,
2) (escaped) \newline is ignored, and
3) \ must be used to quote the characters \, $, and , .
The resulting document becomes the standard input.
Use the file associated with file descriptor digit as standard input.
Similarly for the standard output using >&digit.
Commands

SysV

RSH(l)

<&-

RSH(l)

The standard input is closed. Similarly for the standard output using
>&-.

If any of the above is preceded by a digit, the file descriptor which will be associated

with the file is that specified by the digit (instead of the default 0 or l). For example:
... 2>&1

associates file descriptor 2 with the file currently associated with file descriptor 1.
The order in which redirections are specified is significant. The shell evaluates redirections left-to-right. For example:
... b=2>&1

=.

first associates file descriptor 1 with file
It associates file descriptor 2 with the file
associated with file descriptor 1 (i.e., xxx). If the order of redirections were reversed,
file descriptor 2 would be associated with the terminal (assuming file descriptor 1 had
been) and file descriptor 1 would be associated with file

=.

Using the terminology introduced on the first page, under' 'Commands," if a command
is composed of several simple commands, redirection will be evaluated for the entire
command before it is evaluated for each simple command. That is, the shell evaluates
redirection for the entire list, then each pipeline within the list, then each command
within each pipeline, then each list within each command.
If a command is followed by & the default standard input for the command is the empty

file Idev/null. Otherwise, the environment for the execution of a command contains the
file descriptors of the invoking shell as modified by input/output specifications.
Redirection of output is not allowed in the restricted shell.
File Name Generation
Before a command is executed, each command word is scanned for the characters *, ?,
and [. If one of these characters appears the word is regarded as a pattern. The word is
replaced with alphabetically sorted file names that match the pattern. If no file name is
found that matches the pattern, the word is left unchanged. The character . at the start
of a file name or immediately following ai, as well as the character I itself, must be
matched explicitly.

*
?

Matches any string, including the null string.
Matches any single character.

[ ... 1 Matches anyone of the enclosed characters. A pair of characters
separated by - matches any character lexically between the pair,
inclusive. If the first character following the opening" [ " is a "!"
any character not enclosed is matched.
Quoting
The following characters have a special meaning to the shell and cause termination of a
word unless quoted:

Commands

1-515

SysV

RSH(I)

; & ( )

I

RSH(I)

'< > newline space tab

A character may be quoted (i.e., made to stand for itself) by preceding it with a
backslash (\) or inserting it between a pair of quote marks ( , , or " "). During processin..;, the shell may quote certain characters to prevent them from taking on a special
meaning. Backslashes used to quote a single character are removed from the word
before the command is executed. The pair \newline is removed from a word before
command and parameter substitution.
All characters enclosed between a pair of single quote marks (, '), except a single
quote, are quoted by the shell. Backslash has no special meaning inside a pair of single
quotes. A single quote may be quoted inside a pair of double quote marks (for example, " ''').
Inside a pair of double quote marks (" If), parameter and command substitution occurs
and the shell quotes the results to avoid blank interpretation and file name generation.
If $* is within a pair of double quotes, the positional parameters are substituted and
quoted, separated by quoted spaces ("$1 $2 ... "); however, if $@ is within a pair of
double quotes, the positional parameters are substituted and quoted, separated by
unquoted spaces ("$1" "$2" ... ). \ quotes the characters \, " ", and $. The pair
\newline is removed before parameter and command substitution. If a backslash precedes characters other than \, " ", $, and newline, then the backslash itself is quoted by
the shell.
Prompting
When used interactively, the shell prompts with the value of PSI before reading a command. If at any time a newline is typed and further input is needed to complete a command, the secondary prompt (i.e., the value of PS2) is issued.
Envirorunent
The environment (see environ(5» is a list of name-value pairs that is passed to an executed program in the same way as a normal argument list. The shell interacts with the
envirorunent in several ways. On invocation, the shell scans the environment and
creates a parameter for each name found, giving it the corresponding value. If the user
modifies the value of any of these parameters or creates new parameters, none of these
affects the environment unless the export command is used to bind the shell's parameter to the environment (see also set -a). A parameter may be removed from the
environment with the unset command. The environment seen by any executed command is thus composed of any unmodified name-value pairs originally inherited by the
shell, minus any pairs removed by unset, plus any modifications or additions, all of
which must be noted in export commands.
The environment for any simple-command may be augmented by prefixing it with one
or more assignments to parameters. Thus:
TERM=450 cmd
(export TERM; TERM=450; cmd)

1-516

and

Commands

SysV

RSH(l)

RSH(1)

are equivalent (as far as the execution of cmd is concerned).
If the -k flag is set, all keyword arguments are placed in the environment, even if they
occur after the command name. The following first prints a=b c and c:
echo a=b c
set -k
echo a=b c
Signals
The INTERRUPT and QUIT signals for an invoked command are ignored if the command is followed by &; otherwise signals have the values inherited by the shell from its
parent, with the exception of signalll (but see also the trap command below).
Execution
Each time a command is executed, the above substitutions are carried out. If the command name matches one of the Special Commands listed below, it is executed in the
shell process. If the command name does not match a Special Command, but matches
the name of a defined function, the function is executed in the shell process (note how
this differs from the execution of shell procedures). The positional parameters $1, $2,
. . .. are set to the arguments of the function. If the command name matches neither a
Special Command nor the name of a defined function, a new process is created and an
attempt is made to execute the command via exec(2).
The shell parameter PATH defines the search path for the directory containing the command. Alternative directory names are separated by a colon (:). The default path is
:/bin:/usr/bin (specifying the current directory, /bin, and /usr/bin, in that order). Note
that the current directory is specified by a null path name, which can appear immediately after the equal sign, between two colon delimiters anywhere in the path list, or at
the end of the path list. If the command name contains a / the search path is not used;
such commands will not be executed by the restricted shell. Otherwise, each directory
in the path is searched for an executable file. If the file has execute permission but is
not an a.out file, it is assumed to be a file containing shell commands. A sub-shell is
spawned to read it. A parenthesized command is also executed in a sub-shell.
The location in the search path where a command was found is remembered by the shell
(to help avoid unnecessary execs later). If the command was found in a relative directory, its location must be re-determined whenever the current directory changes. The
shell forgets all remembered locations whenever the PATH variable is changed or the
hash -r command is executed (see below).
Special Commands
Input/output redirection is now permitted for these commands. File descriptor 1 is the
default output location.
. file

Commands

No effect; the command does nothing. A zero exit code is returned .
Read and execute commands from file and return. The search path specified
by PATH is used to find the directory containing file.
1-517

RSH(I)

SysV

RSH(I)

break [ n 1
Exit from the enclosing for or while loop, if any. If n is specified break: n levels.
continue [ n 1
Resume the next iteration of the enclosing for or while loop. If n is specified
resume at the n-th enclosing loop.
cd [ arg 1
Change the current directory to arg. The shell parameter HOME is the default
arg. The shell parameter CDPATH defines the search path for the directory
containing argo Alternative directory names are separated by a colon (:). The
default path is  (specifying the current directory). Note that the current
directory is specified by a null path name, which can appear immediately after
the equal sign or between the colon delimiters anywhere else in the path list.
If arg begins with a I the search path is not used. Otherwise, each directory in
the path is searched for arg. The cd command may not be executed by rsh.
echo [ arg ... 1
Echo arguments. See echo(1) for usage and description.
eval [ arg ... 1
The arguments are read as input to the shell and the resulting command(s) executed.
exec [ arg ... 1
The command specified by the arguments is executed in place of this shell
without creating a new process. Input/output arguments may appear and, if no
other arguments are given, cause the shell input/output to be modified.
exit [ n 1
Causes a shell to exit with the exit status specified by n. If n is omitted the
exit status is that of the last command executed (an end-of-file will also cause
the shell to exit.)
export [ name ... 1
The given names are marked for automatic export to the environment of
subsequently-executed commands. If no arguments are given, variable names
that have been marked for export during the current shell's execution are
listed. (Variable names exported from a parent shell are listed only if they
have been exported again during the current shell's execution.) Function
names are not exported.
getopts Use in shell scripts to support command syntax standards (see intro(l»; it
parses positional parameters and checks for legal options. See getopts (1) for
usage and description.
hash [ -r 1 [ name ... 1
For each name, the location in the search path of the command specified by
name is determined and remembered by the shell. The -r option causes the
shell to forget all remembered locations. If no arguments are given,

1-518

Commands

SysV

RSH(l)

RSH(l)

infonnation about remembered commands is presented. Hits is the number of
times a command has been invoked by the shell process. Cost is a measure of
the work required to locate a command in the search path. If a command is
found in a "relative" directory in the search path, after changing to that directory, the stored location of that command is recalculated. Commands for
which this will be done are indicated by an asterisk (*) adjacent to the hits
infonnation. Cost will be incremented when the recalculation is done.
newgrp [ arg ... 1
Equivalent to exec newgrp arg .... See newgrp(l) for usage and description.
pwd
Print the current working directory. See pwd(l) for usage and description.
read [ name . .. 1
One line is read from the standard input and, using the internal field separator,
IFS (nonnally space or tab), to delimit word boundaries, the first word is
assigned to the first name, the second word to the second name, etc., with leftover words assigned to the last name. Lines can be continued using \newline.
Characters other than newline can be quoted by preceding them with a
backslash. These backslashes are removed before words are assigned to
names, and no interpretation is done on the character that follows the
backslash. The return code is 0 unless an end-of-file is encountered.
readonly [ name ... 1
The given names are marked readonly and the values of the these names may
not be changed by subsequent assignment. If no arguments are given, a list of
all readonly names is printed.
return [ n 1
Causes a function to exit with the return value specified by n. If n is omitted,
the return status is that of the last command executed.
set [ -aefhkntuvx [ arg ... 1 1

Commands

-a

Mark variables which are modified or created for export.

-e

Exit immediately if a command exits with a non-zero exit status.

-f

Disable file name generation

-h

Locate and remember function commands as functions are defined
(function commands are nonnally located when the function is executed).

-k

All keyword arguments are placed in the environment for a command,
not just those that precede the command name.

-n
-t

Read commands but do not execute them.
Exit after reading and executing one command.

-u

Treat unset variables as an error when substituting.

-v

Print shell input lines as they are read.

1-519

SysV

RSH(t)

RSH(t)

-x

Print commands and their arguments as they are executed.
Do not change any of the flags; useful in setting $1 to-.
Using + rather than - causes these flags to be turned off. These flags can also
be used upon invocation of the shell. The current set of flags may be found in
$-. The remaining arguments are positional parameters and are assigned, in
order, to $1, $2, .... If no arguments are given the values of all names are
printed.
shift [ n ]
The positional parameters from $n+l ... are renamed $1 .... If n is not
given, it is assumed to be 1.
test
Evaluate conditional expressions. See test(l) for usage and description.
times
Print the accumulated user and system times for processes run from the shell.
trap [ arg ] [ n ] ...
The command arg is to be read and executed when the shell receives signal(s)
n. (Note that arg is scanned once when the trap is set and once when the trap
is taken.) Trap commands are executed in order of signal number. Any
attempt to set a trap on a signal that was ignored on entry to the current shell is
ineffective. An attempt to trap on signal 11 (memory fault) produces an error.
If arg is absent all trap(s) n are reset to their original values. If arg is the null
string this signal is ignored by the shell and by the commands it invokes. If n
is 0 the command arg is executed on exit from the shell. The trap command
with no arguments prints a list of commands associated with each signal
number.
type [ name ... ]
For each name, indicate how it would be interpreted if used as a command
name.
ulimit [ n ]
Impose a size limit of n blocks on files written by the shell and its child
processes (files of any size may be read). If n is omitted, the current limit is
printed. You may lower your own ulimit, but only a super-user (see su(IM»
can raise a ulimit.
umask [ nnn ]
The user file-creation mask is set to nnn (see umask(1». If nnn is omitted, the
current value of the mask is printed.
unset [ name . " ]
For each name, remove the corresponding variable or function. The variables
PATH, PSt, PS2, MAILCHECK and IFS cannot be unset.
wait [ n ]
Wait for your background process whose process id is n and report its

1-520

Commands

SysV

RSH(l)

RSH(l)

termination status. If n is omitted, all your shell's currently active background
processes are waited for and the return code will be zero.
Invocation
If the shell is invoked through exec(2) and the first character of argument zero is -,
commands are initially read from /etc/profile and from $HOME/.profile, if such files
exist. Thereafter, commands are read as described below, which is also the case when
the shell is invoked as /bin/sh. The flags below are interpreted by the shell on invocation only; Note that unless the -c or -s flag is specified, the first argument is assumed to
be the name of a file containing commands, and the remaining arguments are passed as
positional parameters to that command file:

-c string

If the -c flag is present commands are read from string.

-s

If the -s flag is present or if no arguments remain commands are read from

the standard input. Any remaining arguments specify the positional parameters. Shell output (except for Special Commands) is written to file
descriptor 2.
-i

If the -i flag is present or if the shell input and output are attached to a terminal, this shell is interactive. In this case TERMINATE is ignored (so that

kill 0 does not kill an interactive shell) and INTERRUPT is caught and
ignored (so that wait is interruptible). In all cases, QUIT is ignored by the
shell.
-r

If the -r flag is present the shell is a restricted shell.

-Dname=value
Use the -D option to specify a parameter name, that will be set to value,
then passed into the shell's enviroument. This SysV option is useful for
tailoring the environment of a shell invoked from a program that is not
another shell (such as the Display Manager). If you set the ENV parameter
using this option, the startup script it specifies will be run. Any number of
-D options can be specified.

The remaining flags and arguments are described under the set command above.
rsh Only
rsh is used to set up login names and execution environments whose capabilities are
more controlled than those of the standard shell. The actions of rsh are identical to
those of sh, except that the following are disallowed:
changing directory (see cd(l»,
setting the value of$PATH,
specifying path or command names containing /,
redirecting output (> and »).
The restrictions above are enforced after .profile is interpreted.
A restricted shell can be invoked in one of the following ways: (1) rsh is the file name
part of the last entry in the /etc/passwd file (see passwd(4»; (2) the environment
Commands

1-521

SysV

RSH(l)

RSH(l)

variable SHELL exists and rsh is the file name part of its value; (3) the shell is invoked
and rsh is the file name part of argument 0; (4) the shell is invoke with the -r option.
When a command to be executed is found to
execute it. Thus, it is possible to provide to
access to the full power of the standard shell,
mands; this scheme assumes that the end-user
sions in the same directory.

be a shell procedure, rsh invokes sh to
the end-user shell procedures that have
while imposing a limited menu of comdoes not have write and execute permis-

The net effect of these rules is that the writer of the .profile (see profile(4» has complete control over user actions by performing guaranteed setup actions and leaving the
user in an appropriate directory (probably not the login directory).
The system administrator often sets up a directory of commands (i.e., lusr/rbin) that
can be safely invoked by a restricted shell. Some systems also provide a restricted editor, red.
EXIT STATUS

Errors detected by the shell, such as syntax errors, cause the shell to return a non-zero
exit status. If the shell is being used non-interactively execution of the shell file is
abandoned. Otherwise, the shell returns the exit status of the last command executed
(see also the exit command above).
CAVEATS

Words used for filenames in input/output redirection are not interpreted for filename
generation (see "File Name Generation," above). For example, cat filel >a* will
create a file named a *.
Because commands in pipelines are run as separate processes, variables set in a pipeline
have no effect on the parent shell.
If you get the error message cannot fork, too many processes, try using the wait (I)
command to clean up your background processes. If this doesn't help, the system process table is probably full or you have too many active foreground processes. (There is
a limit to the number of process ids associated with your login, and to the number the
system can keep track of.)

BUGS
If a command is executed, and a command with the same name is installed in a directory in the search path before the directory where the original command was found, the
shell will continue to exec the original command. Use the hash command to correct
this situation.
If you move the current directory or one above it, pwd may not give the correct
response. Use the cd command with a full path name to correct this situation.
Not all the processes of a 3- or more-stage pipeline are children of the shell, and thus
cannot be waited for.

1-522

Commands

SysV

RSH(l)

RSH(l)

For wait n, if n is not an active process id, all your shell's currently active background
processes are waited for and the return code will be zero.
FILES

/etc/profile
$HOME/.profile
/tmp/sh*
/dev/null
SEE ALSO

cd(l), echo(l), env(l), getopts(l), intro(1), login(l), newgrp(l), pwd(l), test(l),
umask(l), wait(l).
dup(2), exec(2), fork(2), pipe(2), profile(4), signal(2), ulimit(2) in the SysV
Programmer's Reference.

Commands

1-523

SysV

RUPTIME(lC)

RUPTIME(lC)

NAME

ruptime - show host status of local machines
SYNOPSIS

ruptime [ -a ] [ -r ] [ -t ] [ -u ]
DESCRIPTION

The ruptime command gives a status line for each machine on the local network; these
are formed from packets broadcast by each host on the network once a minute.
Machines for which no status report has been received for 11 minutes are shown as
being down. Users idle an hour or more are not counted unless the -a flag is given.
Normally, the listing is sorted by host name.
OPTIONS

-a

Count the users who've been idle for an hour or more.

-r

Reverse the sort order.

-t

Sort the listing by uptime.

-u

Sort the listing by number of users.

FILES

/usr/spool/rwho/whod.* data files
SEE ALSO

rwho(lC)

1-524

Commands

SysV

RWHO(lC)

RWHO(lC)

NAME
rw ho - who's logged in on local machines
SYNOPSIS

rwho [-a]
DESCRIPTION

The rwho command produces output similar to who, but for all machines on the local
network. If no report has been received from a machine for five minutes, rwho
assumes the machine is down, and does not report users last known to be logged into
that machine.
If a user hasn't typed to the system for a minute or more, rwho reports this idle time. If
a user hasn't typed to the system for an hour or more, the user is omitted from the output of rwho, unless you specified the -a flag.

BUGS
The rwho command is unwieldy when the number of machines on the local net is large.
FILES

/usr/spool/rwho/whod.*

Information about other machines.

SEE ALSO

ruptime(IC), rwhod(lM),
Managing SysV System Software.

Commands

1-525

RWMT(l)

Domain/OS SysV

RWMT(l)

NAME

rwmt - read/write foreign magtapes
SYNOPSIS

rwmt [option] ... [-p] {-rl-wl-il-II [pathname] ...
DESCRIPTION

rwmt reads tapes from non-Domain installations and writes tapes that can be read by
non-Domain installations. rwmt can read and write unlabeled tapes, as well as ANSI
level 1-4 labeled tapes.
pathname (optional) Specify the name of file to be read from or written to tape. This
argument is valid only with the -r and -w mode-control options
(below). Multiple pathnames are permitted. Wildcarding is permitted for write (-w) operations only.
Default if omitted: read pathnames from standard input
OPTIONS

Mode control
You must specify one of the following mode-control options. If you omit this option,
rwmt prompts you for it. The -p option tells rwmt to prompt for all necessary options.
-I[abel]

Write ANSI X3.27-1978 volume label on a tape. This option
causes rwmt to write an ANSI volume label and dummy file on
the magtape volume. You may specify an optional owner and
volume ID, which are stored in the volume label. (see -vid and
-own below. This is the way to initialize a labeled tape; if any
information existed on the tape, it is erased by this labeling
operation.
If you are labeling a tape, you can also use the following two

options.

-i[ndex]

1-526

-vid vol id

Specifies a 1-6 character volume ID for use
when labeling a volume. This option is valid
only when used with the -I mode-control
option (above). The default volume ID is ' ,
(blank).

-own owner id

Specifies a 1-14 character owner ID for use
when labeling a volume. This option is valid
only when used with the -I mode-control
option (above). The default owner Ii:> is ' ,
(blank).

Lists objects on an ANSI-labeled physical tape volume. -index
produces a listing of all files or file sections on an ANSI-labeled
Commands

RWMT(l)

Domain/OS SysV

RWMT(I)

physical tape volume. The contents of the physical volume
(VOLl) label and all file header labels are written to standard
output.
-w[rite)

Specifies one or more disk files (pathname argument) to be written to tape. The default format is ANSI labeled, ASCII,
fixed-length records of SO bytes each, and SO-byte blocks. If
desired, any of these parameters can be changed using the
options described below. If more than one pathname is specified,
the disk files are written to sequential tape files. Tapes written by
rwmt are always in accordance with ANSI level 4 format.
Before writing a labeled file, the tape volume itself must be
labeled with the -label mode-control option (above).

-r[ead)

Specifies one or more tape files to be read from tape and stored
on disk. read reads one or more tape files and writes them to disk
using the specified pathnames (pathname argument). The default
tape file format is the same as that for the write option. If the
tape is labeled under ANSI level 2, 3, or 4, the file format (block
length, record length, and record format) is read from the tape. If
the tape is unlabeled, or labeled with ANSI levell, you must
specify the tape format using the options below. If more than
one pathname is specified, adjacent tape files are read and stored
under the specified pathnames.

Label Control

-ansi (default)

Specifies that the tape is labeled in conformance to ANSI
X3.27-197S, level I, 2, 3, or4.

-unlab

Specifies that the tape is unlabeled. Data spanning physical
volumes is not supported on unlabeled tapes.

-asc (default)

Specifies that all tape file contents are in ASCII characters.

-ebc

Specifies that all tape file contents (except labels) are in EBCDIC
characters.

-raw

Specifies that all tape file data is to be treated in raw form.

-npar (default)

Specifies no disturbance of parity bits when reading or writing
data.

-par

Specifies that parity bits should be forced off when reading data
from tape and forced on when writing data to tape.

-rl reclen

Specifies the maximum length, in bytes, of a record in the tape
file. This option is valid only when used with either the -r or the
-w mode-control options (above). It is unnecessary when reading
an ANSI level 2, 3, or 4 file. The default record length is SO
bytes.

Commands

1-527

RWMT(l)

Domain/OS SysV

RWMT(l)

-bl blocklen

Specifies the length, in bytes, of a physical tape block. This
option is valid only when used with either the -r or the -w
mode-control options (above). It is unnecessary when reading an
ANSI level 2, 3, or 4 file. The default block length is 80 bytes.

-bf blockfac

Specifies a blocking factor - the number of records to store into
or read from a physical tape block. This is an alternative to the
-bl option, since the record length multiplied by the blocking
factor yields the block length. This option is valid only when
used with either the -r or -w mode-control options (above).
Using this option is meaningful only if your tape has
fixed-length records. This option is unnecessary when reading
an ANSI level 2, 3, or 4 file. The default blocking factor is 1.

-rfformat

Specifies record fonnat. Valid values for format are f
(fixed-length records and blocks); d (variable-length records
(this is ANSI 'D' fonnat»; s (spanned records); or u (undefined
record fonnat). The default fonnat is f. Note that if you are writing a cartridge tape, only 512 byte blocks may be written; d, s,
and u fonnats are not supported.

Tape File Identifiers
-tid file _id

-f [position]

Specifies a 1-17 character file ID to be written in the file header
label for use when writing a file to a labeled volume. This
option is valid only when used with the -w mode-control option
(above). If this option is omitted, the name of the file being written is used.
Specifies the file position for -r or -w operations. Valid values
for position are cur, end, or a nonzero integer value. A position
of cur selects the current tape position; the tape must have been
previously read or written by rwmt and its position must not
have been disturbed. This option is valid only when used with
either the -r or the -w mode-control options (above).
A position of end selects the end of the tape file set. This option
is valid only when used with the -w mode-control option, and
causes rwmt to append the specified disk file (pathname argument) to the very end of the tape file set.
A position specified by a nonzero integer value selects the file at
that absolute position in the tape volume. This option is valid
only when used with either the -r or -w mode-control options
(above). If multiple pathname arguments are supplied, the value
of position is incremented by one after each file has been read or
written.

1-528

Commands

RWMT(l)

RWMT(l)

Domain/OS SysV

The default value for position is 1.
Backup Device Conttol
-dev d[unitj

Specifies device type and unit number. d must be eitber m (for
reel-to-reel magnetic tape), ct (for cartridge tape), or f (for
floppy), depending on which drive is being used. unit is an
integer (0-3). Both are required for reel-to-reel tapes (that is,
-dev m2). A unit number is not required for floppy disks and cartridge tapes (that is, -dey 0. If this option is omitted, rbak
assumes device mO.

-nobs

Specifies that byte swapping should not be done in software.
This operation is valid for magnetic tapes only. On the multibus
data gets byte swapped. rwmt does byte swapping in software so
that the tape gets written out in the correct machine order. wbak
and rbak do not do byte swapping in software, as a result the two
swaps done by the multibus cancel out. This option is useful in
writing to a magnetic tape an intermediate file to which wbak
output has been directed. Byte swapping should not be done by
rwmt if the intermediate file written by wbak is now written raw
to the magnetic tape using rwmt.

-reten

Retensions the cartridge tape (unwind to the end, then rewind).
This can be helpful if you have encountered cartridge-tape reading errors. Retensioning requires about 1.5 minutes to complete.

-nreten (default)

Does not retension the cartridge tape.

Miscellaneous Conttol Options
-sbin
Causes all stream files written to contain the binary attribute
(normally, output stream files contain the AScn attribute).
Causes rwmt to prompt for all unspecified parameters.

-p

EXAMPLES
Initialize a tape with the given owner and volume ID.
$ rwmt -Iabel-own "R and D" -vid "demo"
List the files on the tape.
$ rwmt

-index

Volume label:
Volume ID: "DEMO

Commands

"

Owner ID: "R AND D

Access:

n

n

1-529

RWMT(l)

File/Section
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
1
5

RWMT(l)

Domain/OS SysV

File ID
CMF_EXAMPLE
CMT_EXAMPLE
CPBOOT_EXAMPLE
CPF_EXAMPLE
CPT_EXAMPLE

Cr Date
83/02/17
83/02/17
83/02/17
83/02/17
83/02/17

Acc

RF

RL

D
D
D
D
D

200
200
200
200
200

BL
. 2048
2048
2048
2048
2048

End of file set.
$

Copy tape file 3 to a disk file named cpboot_example.tape.
$ rwmt -r cpboot_example.tape -f 3
4 records read from tape file
ftcpboot_example.tape ft .
$

3 into

rwmt permits a tape file to be read in "raw" mode. In this mode, each block read from the tape
is written into one record in a stream file, unmodified by the program. To read a file in "raw"
mode, you should specify the maximum record size using the -rl argument. If you do not, the
default value of 80 bytes is used, and any records longer than that are truncated. Also,
undefined record format should be used. For example
$ rwmt -r -f l-rf U -i"aW ..d 512 rawfiJe

reads tape file number 1 into rawfile, with a maximum record length of 512 bytes.
Files may be written in the same manner:
$ rwmt -w -f l-rf U -raw -rl 512 rawfile

The file /!backup/tmpl is written out to the magnetic tape in "raw" mode. The record length is
specified to be 8k and no byte swapping is done in software. This is useful for writing out an
intermediate file to which wbak has written its output. Note that all tapes written by rwmt
must have a ANSI standard volume label for rbak to be able to read the tape
rwmt -w -f 1 -raw -rl 8192 -nobs //backup/tmp1 -ansi

If rwmt writes a file with -nobs option, you should use -nobs option to read it using rwmt.
SEE ALSO

rbak(l), wbak(l)

1-530

Commands

SAeT(I)

SysV

SACT(I)

NAME

sact - print current sees file editing activity
SYNOPSIS
sact files
DESCRIPTION
The sact command informs you of any impending deltas to a named sees file. This
situation occurs when get(l) with the -e option has been previously executed without a
subsequent execution of delta(l). If a directory is named on the command line, sact
behaves as though each file in the directory were specified as a named file, except that
non-SeeS files and umeadable files are silently ignored. If you specify a simple dash
(-) in place of a filename, sact reads the standard input, taking each line as the name of
an sees file to be processed. The output for each named file consists of five fields
separated by spaces:
Field 1

Specifies the SID of a delta that currently exists in the sees file to
which changes will be made to make the new delta.

Field 2

Specifies the SID for the new delta to be created.

Field 3

Contains the logname of the user who will make the delta (i.e.,
executed a get for editing).

Field 4

Contains the date that get -e was executed.

Field 5

Contains the time that get -e was executed.

DIAGNOSTICS
Use help(l) for explanations.
SEE ALSO
delta(1), get(I), unget(I).

Commands

1-531

SeeS(l)

SysV

SeeS(l)

NAME

sees - front end for the sees subsystem
SYNOPSIS
sees [ -r ] [ -dpath ] [ -ppath ] command [jlags ] [ arg ... ]
DESCRIPTION
The sees command is a front end to the Source Code Control System (SeeS) programs
that helps them mesh more cleanly with the rest of UNIX. It also includes the capability to run •• set user 10" to another user to provide additional protection.

Basically, sees runs the command with the specifiedjlags and args. Each argument is
normally modified to be prefixed with secs/s.
Flags to be interpreted by the sees program must appear before the command argument.
Flags to be passed to the actual sees program must come after the command argument.
These flags are specific to the command and are discussed in the documentation for that
command. The SEE ALSO section lists the standard sees commands that are documented in section one of this manual. For more information about the standard sees
commands, see the documentation for that command.
Besides the usual sees commands, several pseudo commands can be issued. These
pseudo commands are described in the following list.

1-532

edit

Equivalent to get -e

delget

Perform a delta on the named files and then get new versions. The new
versions will have 10 keywords expanded, and will not be editable. The
-m, -p, -r, -s, and -y flags will be passed to delta, and the -b, -c, -e,
-i, -k, -I, -s, and -x flags will be passed to get.

deledit

Equivalent to delget except that the get phase includes the -e flag. This
option is useful for making a checkpoint of your current editing phase.
The same flags will be passed to delta as described above, and all the
flags listed for get above, except -e and -k, are passed to edit.

create

Creates an sees file, taking the initial contents from the file of the same
name. Any flags to admin are accepted. If the creation is successful,
the files are renamed with a comma on the front. These should be
removed when you are convinced that the sees files have been created
successfully.

Commands

SeeS(I)

SysV

SeeS(I)

fix

Must be followed by a -r flag. This command essentially removes the named
delta, but leaves you with a copy of the delta with the changes that were in it.
It is useful for fixing small compiler bugs, etc. Since it doesn't leave audit
trails, it should be used carefully.

clean

This routine removes everything from the current directory that can be
recreated from SCCS files. It will not remove any files being edited. If the -b
flag is given, branches are ignored in the determination of whether they are
being edited; this is dangerous if you are keeping the branches in the same
directory.

unedit This is the opposite of an edit or a get -e. It should be used with extreme caution, since any changes you made since the get will be irretrievably lost.
info

Gives a listing of all files being edited. If the -b flag is given, branches (i.e.,
SID's with two or fewer components) are ignored. If the -u flag is given (with
an optional argument) then only files being edited by you (or the named user)
are listed.

check

Like info except that nothing is printed if nothing is being edited, and a nonzero exit status is returned if anything is being edited. The intent is to have
this included in an "install" entry in a makefile to insure that everything is
included into the sees file before a version is installed.

tell

Gives a newline-separated list of the files being edited on the standard output.
Takes the -b and -u flags like info and check.

diffs

Gives a difflisting between the current version of the program(s) you have out
for editing and the versions in sees format. The -r, -c, -i, -x, and -t flags
are passed to get; the -I, -s, --e, -f, -h, and -b options are passed to diff. The
-C flag is passed to diff as -c.

print

This command prints out verbose- information about the named files.

OPTIONS
-r

Runs sccs as the real user rather than as whatever effective user sccs is
"set user ID" to.

-d

Gives a root directory for the sees files. The default is the current
directory.

-p

Defines the pathnarne of the directory in which the sees files will be
found; sees is the default.

The -p flag differs from the -d flag in that the -d argument is prepended to the entire
pathname and the -p argument is inserted before the final component of the pathname.

Commands

1-533

SysV

SCCS(l)

SCCS(l)

For example:
sees -d/x -py get alb
will convert to:
get Ixla/y/s.b
The intent here is to create aliases such as:
alias syssecs sees ·dlusrlsre
which will be used as:
syssees get emdlwho.e
If the environment variable PROJECT is set, its value is used to determine the -d flag.
If it begins with a slash, it is taken directly; otherwise, the home directory of a user of
that name is examined for a subdirectory sre or source. If such a directory is found, it
is used.

Certain commands (such as admin) cannot be run "set user ID" by all users, since this
would allow anyone to change the authorizations. These commands are always run as
the real user.
EXAMPLES

To get a file for editing, edit it, and produce a new delta:
sees get -e file.e
ex file.e
sees delta file.e
To get a file from another directory:
sees -p/usrlsre/secsls. get ee.e
or
sees get lusrlsrclsecs/s.ee.e
To make a delta of a large number of files in the current directory:
sees delta *.e
To get a list of files being edited that are not on branches:
sees info-b
To delta everything being edited by you:
sees delta' sees tell -u'

1-534

Commands

SeeS(l)

SysV

SeeS(l)

In a make tile, to get source tiles from an sees tile if it does not already exist:

SRCS = 
$(SRCS):
sees get $(REL) $@
NOTES

It should be able to take directory arguments on pseudo commands like the sees commands do.
SEE ALSO

admin(l), comb(l), delta(l), get(l), help(l), rmdel(l), sact(l), sccsdiff(l), what(l);
Domain/OS Programming Environment Reference

Commands

1-535

SCCSDIFF(l)

SysV

SCCSDIFF(l)

NAME

sccsdiff - compare two versions of an sces file
SYNOPSIS
sccsdiff -r SID1 -r SID2 [-p] [-s n] files
DESCRIPTION
The sccsdiff command compares two versions of an SCCS file and generates the differences between the two versions. Any number of SCCS files may be specified, but arguments apply to all files.
OPTIONS
-rSID?

Use SID1 or SID2 to specify the deltas of an secs file that are to be compared. Versions are passed to bdiff(l) in the order given.

-p

Pipe output for each file through pre 1).

-sn

Specify n as the file segment size that bdiff will pass to diff(l). This is
useful when diff fails due to a high system load.

FILES
Itmp/get?'????

DIAGNOSTICS
file: No differences

Temporary files
The two versions are the same.

Use help(l) for explanations.
SEE ALSO
get(1), bdiff(l), help(l), prell.

1-536

Commands

SysV

SCRATIR(l)

SCRATIR(l)

NAME

scrattr - screen attributes
SYNOPSIS

scrattr [ -avcpxy ]
DESCRIPTION

Without any options, scrattr lists the X and Y dimensions of the display in pixels.
Screen attributes are always listed in the same order: X coordinates, Y coordinates,
number of planes, number of primary colors. This order is independant of the order in
which the options are specified.
OPTIONS

-a

Display all attributes.

-v

Print a verbose description of each field, with the attributes on separate lines.
(Without the -v option, attributes appear on the same line separated by tabs.)
If any options other than -v are specified, only that combination of attributes
will be displayed, and always in the canonical order given above.

--c

Display the number of primary colors on the display.

-p

Display the number of bit planes on the display.

-x

Display the X dimension of the display in pixels.

-y

Display the Y dimension of the display in pixels.

SEE ALSO

stty(l), tabs(!), tset(!), tty(l)

Commands

1-537

SCRTO(l)

Domain/OS SysV

SCRTO(l)

NAME

scrto - set/show screen timeout
SYNOPSIS

scrto [-none] [n]
DESCRIPTION

scrto sets or displays the number of minutes the system waits before it shuts off the
display screen. It begins counting minutes after the last input event or window
configuration change.
By default, the system waits 15 minutes before it shuts off the display. Domain/OS
turns the display back on whenever it receives an input event from the keyboard or
mouse or whenever the DM creates, pops, moves, or resizes a window.

n (optional)

Set the number of Domain/OS minutes for to wait before it shuts off the
display.
Default if omitted: display current timeout setting

OPTIONS

-none

Disables automatic timeout; never tum off the display.

EXAMPLES

Shows initial setting.
$ scrto
The screen timeout is set to 15 minutes
$

Sets delay to 10 min.
$ scrto 10
$

1-538

Commands

SDIFF(l)

SysV

SDIFF(l)

NAME

sdiff - side-by-side difference program
SYNOPSIS

sdiff [options ... J file1 file2
DESCRIPTION

The sdiff command uses the output of diff(l) to produce a side-by-side listing of twe
files indicating those lines that are different. Each line of the two files is printed with:
blank gutter between them if the lines are identical, a less-than sign «) in the gutter iJ
the line only exists infile1, a greater-than sign (» in the gutter if the line only exists ir
file2, and a pipe character (I) for lines that are different.
For example:
x

y

a
b

c

a
<
<

d

d

>

c

OPTIONS
-w n

Uses the next argument, n, as the width of the output line. The defaul
line length is 130 characters.

-I

Only prints the left side of any lines that are identical.

-s
-0

Does not print identical lines.
output

Uses the next argument, output, as the name of a third file that is create.
as a user-controlled merging of file1 and file2. Identical lines of file,
and file2 are copied to output. Sets of differences, as produced b
diff(l), are printed; where a set of differences share a common gutte
character. After printing each set of differences, sdiff prompts you wit
a percent character (%) and waits for one of the following user-type
commands:
Appends the left column to the output file

r

Appensd the right column to the output file

s

Turns on silent mode; do not print identical lines
Turns off silent mode

Commands

1-5~

SDIFF(l)

SysV

e I

Calls the editor with the left column

e r

Calls the editor with the right column

SDIFF(l)

e b

Calls the editor with the concatenation ofteft and right

e

Calls the editor with a zero length file

q

Exits from the program

On exit from the editor, the resulting tile is concatenated on the end of the
output tile.
SEE ALSO

diff(l), ed(l).

1-540

Commands

SED(l)

SysV

SED(l)

NAME
sed - stream editor
SYNOPSIS

sed [ -n

1 [ -e script 1 [ -f sfile 1 [files]

DESCRIPTION

The sed command copies the named files (standard input default) to the standard output, edited according to a script of commands.
A script consists of editing commands, one per line, of the following form:
[ address [ , address ] ] function [ arguments ]
In normal operation, sed cyclically copies a line of input into a pattern space (unless
there is something left after a D command), applies in sequence all commands whose
addresses select that pattern space, and at the end of the script copies the pattern space
to the standard output (except under -n) and deletes the pattern space.

Some of the commands use a hold space to save all or part of the pattern space for subsequent retrieval.

An address is either a decimal number that counts input lines cumulatively across files,
a $ that addresses the last line of input, or a context address, i.e., a/regular expression/
in the style of ed( I) modified thus:
•

In a context address, the construction \?regular expression?, where? is any character, is identical to /regular expression!. Note that in the context address
\xabc\xdefx, the second x stands for itself, so that the regular expression is abcxdef.

•

The escape sequence \n matches a newline embedded in the pattern space.

•

A period. matches any character except the terminal newline of the pattern space.

•

A command line with no addresses selects every pattern space.

•

A command line with one address selects each pattern space that matches the
address.

•

A command line with two addresses selects the inclusive range from the first patten
space that matches the first address through the next pattern space that matches the
second. (If the second address is a number less than or equal to the line number firs
selected, only one line is selected.) Thereafter the process is repeated, lookinl
again for the first address.

Editing commands can be applied only to non-selected pattern spaces by use of thl
negation function! (See the Functions section below).
OPTIONS
~script

Edit according to script. If there is just one -e option and no -f options, th
flag -e may be omitted.

Commands

1-54

SysV

SED(l)

SED(l)

-f sfile Take the script from file sfile; these options accumulate.
-n

Suppress the default output.

FUNCTIONS
In the following list of functions the maximum number of permissible addresses for
each function is indicated in parentheses.
The text argument consists of one or more lines, all but the last of which end with \ to
hide the newline. Backslashes in text are treated like backslashes in the replacement
string of an s command, and may be used to protect initial blanks and tabs against the
stripping that is done on every script line. The rfile or wfile argument must terminate
the command line and must be preceded by exactly one blank. Each wfile is created
before processing begins. There can be at most 10 distinct wfile arguments.

1-542

(l)a\ text

Append. Place text on the output before reading the next input
line.

(2) b label

Branch to the: command bearing the label. If label is empty,
branch to the end of the script.

(2)c\ text

Change. Delete the pattern space. With 0 or 1 address or at the
end of a 2-address range, place text on the output. Start the next
cycle.

(2)d

Delete the pattern space. Start the next cycle.

(2)D

Delete the initial segment of the pattern space through the first
newline. Start the next cycle.

(2)g

Replace the contents of the pattern space by the contents of the
hold space.

(2)G

Append the contents of the hold space to the pattern space.

(2) h

Replace the contents of the hold space by the contents of the pattern space.

(2)H

Append the contents of the pattern space to the hold space.

(l)i\text

Insert. Place text on the standard output.

(2)1

List the pattern space on the standard output in an \lnarnbiguous
form. Non-printing characters are spelled in two-digit ASCII and
long lines are folded.

(2)n

Copy the pattern space to the standard output. Replace the pattern space with the next line of input.

(2)N

Append the next line of input to the pattern space with an embedded newline. (The current line number changes.)

(2) p

Print. Copy the pattern space to the standard output.

Commands

SysV

SED(I)

S£o(I)

(2)P

Copy the initial segment of the pattern space through the first
newline to the standard output.

(l)q

Quit. Branch to the end of the script. Do not start a new cycle.

(2) r rfile

Read the contents of rfile. Place them on the output before reading the next input line.

(2) s/regular expression/replacement/flags
Substitute the replacement string for instances of the regular
expression in the pattern space. Any character may be used
instead of t. For a fuller description see ed(l). Flags is zero or
more of:

n

n= 1 - 512. Substitute for just the n th
occurrence of the regular expression.

g

Global. Substitute for all nonoverlapping
instances of the regular expression rather than
just the first one.

p

Print the pattern space if a replacement was
made.

w wfile Write. Append the pattern space to wfile if a
replacement was made.
(2)t label

Test. Branch to the colon (:) conunand bearing the label if any
substitutions have been made since the most recent reading of an
input line or execution of a t. If label is empty, branch to the end
of the script.

(2) w wfile

Write. Append the pattern space to wfile.

(2) x

Exchange the contents of the pattern and hold spaces.

(2) y/stringl /string2/ Transfonn. Replace all occurrences of characters in stringl with

the corresponding character in string2. The lengths of string]
and string2 must be equal.
(2)! function

Don't. Apply the function (or group, if function is a left brace

(D only to lines not selected by the addressees).
(0): label

This conunand does nothing; it bears a label for b and t commands to branch to.

(1)=

Place the current line number on the standard output as a line.

(2){

Execute the following conunands through a matching right brace
(}) only when the pattern space is selected.

(0)

An empty conunand is ignored.

Conunands

1-543

SED(l)

SysV

(0)#

SED(l)

If a pound sign (#) appears as the first character on the first line
of a script file, then that entire line is treated as a comment, with
one exception. If the character after the pound sign is an 'n',
then the default output will be suppressed. The rest of the line
after #n is also ignored. A script file must contain at least one
non-comment line.

SEE ALSO

awk(l), ed(l), grep(l).

1-544

Commands

SysV

SH(l)

SH(l)

NAME
sh - the Bourne shell command language
SYNOPSIS

sh [ -ceiknrstuvx ] [ -Dname=value ... ] [ arg ] ...
DESCRIPTION

sh is a command programming language that executes commands read from a terminal
or a file. A simple command is a sequence of nonblank words separated by blanks. A
blank is a tab or a space. The first word specifies the name of the command to be executed. Except as specified below, the remaining words are passed as arguments to the
invoked command. The command name is passed as argument 0; refer to execve(2) for
further details. The value of a simple command is its exit status if it terminates normally, or 200+status if it terminates abnormally. See sigvec(2) for a list of status
values.
A pipeline is a sequence of one or more commands separated by I. The standard output
of each command but the last is connected by a pipe(2) to the standard input of the next
command. Each command is run as a separate process; the shell waits for the last command to terminate.
A list is a sequence of one or more pipelines separated by;, &, && or II and optionally
terminated by ; or &. ; and & have equal precedence which is lower than that of &&
and II, && and II also have equal precedence. A semicolon causes sequential execution; an ampersand causes the preceding pipeline to be executed without waiting for it
to finish. The symbol && (II) causes the list following to be executed only if the
preceding pipeline returns a zero (non zero) value. Newlines may appear in a list,
instead of semicolons, to delimit commands.
A command is either a simple-command or one of the following. The value returned by
a command is that of the last simple-command executed in the command.
COMMANDS

for name [in word ... ] do list done
Set name to the next word in the for word list each time a for command is executed. If in word ... is omitted, in $@ is assumed. Execution ends when there
are no more words in the list.
case word in [pattern [ I pattern] ... ) list ;;] ... esac
Execute the list associated with the first pattern that matches word. The form
of the pattems is the same as that used for filename generation.
if list then list [elif list then list] ... [else list] fi
Execute the list following if, and if it returns zero, execute the list following
then. Otherwise, execute the list following elif, and if its value is zero, execute the list following then. Failing that, execute the else list.

Commands

1-545

SH(I)

SysV

SH(I)

while list [ do list] done
Repeatedly execute the while list, and if its value is zero, execute the do list;
otherwise, tenninate the loop. The value returned by a while command is that
of the last executed command in the do list. To negate the loop termination
test, use until in place of while.
( list)

Execute list in a sub-shell.

{ list}

Simply execute list.

sh recognizes the following words only when they are the first word of a command, and
only when they are not quoted:
if then else elif fi case in esac for while until do done { }
COMMAND SUBSTITUTION

Use the standard output from a command, enclosed in a pair of back quotes C'), as part
or all of a word. Trailing newlines are removed.
PARAMETER SUBSTITUTION

A parameter is a sequence of letters, digits, or underscores (a name), a digit, or any of
the following characters: * @ # ? - $ !. The character $ is used to introduce substitutable parameters. Positional parameters may be assigned values by set. Variables may
be set by writing
name=va[ue [name=value] ..
$ {parameter}
Substitute the value, if any, of the parameter. The braces are required only
when parameter is followed by a letter, digit, or underscore that is not to be
interpreted as part of its name. If parameter is a digit, it is a positional parameter. If parameter is * or @ then all the positional parameters, starting with $1,
are substituted separated by spaces. $0 is set from argument zero when the
shell is invoked.

$ {parameter-word}
If parameter is set, substitute its value; otherwise, substitute word.

$ {parameter =word}
If parameter is not set, set it to word; then, substitute the value of the parameter. You may not assign positional parameters in this manner.
$ {parameter? word}
If parameter is set, substitute its value; otherwise, print word and exit from the
shell. If word is omitted, a standard message is printed.

$ {parameter+word}
If parameter is set, substitute word; otherwise, substitute nothing.
In the above, sh does not evaluate word unless it is to be used as the substituted string.
Thus, for example, echo ${d-'pwd'} only executes pwd if d is unset.

1-546

Commands

SysV

SH(I)

SH(I)

The following parameters are automatically set by the shell:

#
?
$

Number of positional parameters in decimal.
Options supplied to the shell on invocation or by set.
Value returned by the last executed command in decimal.
Process number of this shell.
Process number of the last background command invoked.

The following parameters are used but not set by the shell:
HOME Default argument (home directory) for the cd command.
PATH The search path for commands (see EXECUTION).
ENV
If this parameter is set, the shell performs parameter substitution on
the value to generate the pathname of the startup script containing
commands that the shell executes every time a new shell is invoked.
No error results if the file specified by the ENV parameter doesn't
exist or can't be read.
MAIL If this variable is set to the name of a mail file, the shell informs you
of the arrival of mail in the specified file.
PSI
Primary prompt string; this is a dollar sign ($) by default.
PS2
Secondary prompt string; this is a greater-than sign (» by default.
IFS
Internal field separators; these usually include space, tab, and newline. IFS is ignored if sh is running as root or if the effective user id
differs from the real user id.
BLANK INTERPRETAnON
After parameter and command substitution, sh scans the subsequent results for internal
field separator characters (those found in $IFS), and then splits its output into distinct
arguments where such characters are found. Explicit null arguments (It" or ") are
retained. Implicit null arguments (those resulting from parameters that have no values)
are removed.
FILENAME GENERATION
Following substitution, sh scans each command word for the characters *, ? and [. If
one of these characters appears, the word is regarded as a pattern. The word is replaced
with alphabetically sorted filenames that match the pattern. If no filename is found that
matches the pattern, the word is left unchanged. The character . at the start of a
filename or immediately following a I, and the character I, must be matched explicitly.

*

?
[ ... J

Commands

Matches any string, including the null string.
Matches any single character.
Matches anyone of the characters enclosed. A pair of characters separated by
- matches any character lexically between the pair.

1-547

SH(l)

SysV

SHe!)

QUOTING

The following characters have a special meaning to the shell and cause termination of a
word unless quoted:
; & ( )

I

< > newline space tab

You may quote a character by preceding it with a \ sh ignores a \newline. All characters enclosed between a pair of single quotation marks C '), except a single quote, are
quoted. Parameter and command substitution occurs inside double quotes (""). A \
quotes the following characters: \ ' " and $.

A "$*" is equivalent to "$1 $2 ... ", while "$@" is equivalent to "$1" "$2" ....
PROMPTING

When used interactively, sh prompts with the value of PSI before reading a command.
If, at any time, you type a newline and need further input to complete a command, sh
issues the secondary prompt ($PS2).
INPUT/OUTPUT

Before you execute a command, you may redirect its output by using a special notation
interpreted by the shell. The following may appear anywhere in a simple command or
may precede or follow a command, and are not passed on to the invoked command.
Substitution occurs before word or digit is used.
 word

Use file word as standard output (file descriptor 1). If the file does .not exist,
create it; otherwise, truncate it to zero length.

»word Use file word as standard output. If the file exists, append output (by seeking
to the end); otherwise, create the file.
«word Read the shell input up to a line the same as word or end-of-file. Make the
resulting document the standard input. If any character of word is quoted,
place no interpretation upon the characters of the document. Otherwise, do
parameter and command substitution, ignore \newline and use \ to quote the
following characters: \ $ , and the first character of word.
<& digit

Duplicate the standard input from file descriptor digit. This works similarly for
the standard output using>. Refer to dup(2) for further details.
<&-

Close the standard input. Perform the same function on the standard output,
using >.

If one of the above is preceded by a digit, the file descriptor created is that specified by
the digit (instead of the default 0 or 1). For example,

... 2>&1
creates file descriptor 2 to be a duplicate of file descriptor 1.

1-548

Commands

SH(l)

SysV

SH(l)

If a command is followed by & the default standard input for the command is the empty
file (/dev/null). Otherwise, the environment for the execution of a command contains
the file descriptors of the invoking shell as modified by input/output specifications.
ENVIRONMENT
The environment is a list of name-value pairs that is passed to an executed program in
the same way as a normal argument list. Refer to execve(2) and environ(7). The shell
interacts with the environment in several ways. On invocation, the shell scans the
environment and creates a parameter for each name found, giving it the corresponding
value. Executed commands inherit the same environment. If you modify the values of
these parameters, or create new ones, the environment is unaffected, unless you use the
export command to bind the shell's parameter to the environment. The environment
seen by any executed command is thus composed of any unmodified name-value pairs
originally inherited by the shell, plus any modifications or additions, all of which must
be noted in export commands.

You may augment the environment for any simple command by prefixing it with one or
more assignments to parameters. Thus, the following two lines are equivalent:
TERM=450 cmd args
(export TERM; TERM=450; cmd args)
SIGNALS
sh ignores the INTERRUPT and QUIT signals for an invoked command if the command is followed by &. Otherwise, signals have the values inherited by the shell from
its parent (see also trap).

EXECUTION
Each time a command is executed, the above substitutions are carried out. Except for
the special commands listed below, a new process is created, and an attempt is made to
execute the command via an execve(2).

The $PATH shell parameter defines the search path for the directory containing the
command. Each alternative directory name is separated by a colon (:). The default
path is lusr/ucb:/bin:/usr/bin:/usr/apollo/bin. If the command name contains a I, sh
does not use the search path. Otherwise, sh searches each directory in the path for an
executable file. If the file has execute permission but is not an a.out file, it is assumed
to be a file containing shell commands. A sub-shell (Le., a separate process) is spawned
to read it. A command in parentheses is also executed in a sub-shell.
SPEClAL COMMANDS
The following commands are executed in the shell process, and except where specified,
no input/output redirection is permitted for such commands.

#

For non-interactive shells, treat everything following the # as a comment, i.e.,
ignore the rest of the line. For interactive shells, the # has no special effect.
No effect; the command does nothing.

Commands

1-549

SysV

SH(l)

. file

SH(l)

Read and execute commands from file and return. Use the search path $PATH
to find the directory containing file.

break [n]
Exit from the enclosing for or while loop, if any. If n is specified, break n levels.
continue [n]
Resume the next iteration of the enclosing for or while loop. If n is specified,
resume at the nth enclosing loop.
cd [arg]
Change the current directory to arg. The $HOME shell parameter is the
default arg.
eval [arg ... ]
Read the arguments as input to the shell and execute the resulting command(s).
exec [arg ... ]
Execute the command specified by the arguments in place of this shell without
creating a new process. You may supply input/output arguments, and if you
give no other type of arguments, sh modifies the input/output.
exit [n] If the shell is not interactive, exit with the exit status specified by n. If you
omit n, the exit status is that of the last command executed. (An end-of-file
will also exit from the shell.)
export [name ... ]
Mark the given names for automatic export to the environment of
subsequendy-executed commands. If no arguments are given, print a list of
exportable names.
login [arg ... ]
Equivalent to an exec login arg ... command.
read name ...
Read one line from the standard input. Assign successive words of the input to
the variables name in order, with leftover words to the last variable. The
return code is 0 unless the end-of-file is encountered.
readonly [name ... ]
Mark the given names as read-only. You cannot change the values of these
names by subsequent assignment. If no arguments are given, print a list of all
read-only names.
rootnode [arg ]
Change the current node entry directory to arg.
set [ -ekntuvx [arg ... ]]
-e
Exit immediately if a command fails (on some systems, this switch
works only on shells that are not interactive).

1-550

Commands

SysY

SH(l)

-k

SH(l)

Place all keyword arguments in the environment for a command, not
just those that precede the command name. The following, used in the
shell, prints a=b c and c:
echoa=b c
set -k
echo a=b c

-n

Read commands but do not execute them.

-t

Exit after reading and executing one command.

-u

Treat unset variables as an error when substituting.

-v

Print shell input lines as they are read.

-x

Print commands and their arguments as they are executed.
Tum off the -x and -v options.

You can also use these options when you first invoke the shell. The current set
may be found in $- .
Remaining arguments are positional parameters. The shell assigns them, in
order, to $1, $2, etc. If no arguments are given, it prints the values of all
names.
shift

The positional parameters from $2 ... are renamed $1 ...

times

Print the accumulated user and system times for processes run from the shell.

trap [arg] [n] ...
Read and execute arg upon receipt of signal(s) n. (Scan arg once when the trap
is set and once when the trap is taken.) Execute trap commands in order of
signal number. If arg is absent, reset all trap(s) n to their original values. If
arg is the nul! string, the shell and invoked commands ignore this signal. If n
is 0, execute the command arg on exit from the shell. Otherwise, execute the
command upon receipt of signal n as numbered in sigvec(2). With no arguments, trap prints a list of commands associated with each signal number.
umask [nnn]
Set the user file creation mask to the octal value nnn. See umask(2) for details.
If nnn is omitted, print the current value of the mask.

vcr [systype[commandl]
With no arguments, return the current value of the SYSTYPE environment
variable that specifies the version of UNIX commands being executed by the
shell. With a systype argument, change the SYSTYPE environment variable to
either bsd4.3 or sys5.3. depending on which is specified.

Commands

1-551

SysV

SH(l)

SH(l)

wait [n]
Wait for the specified process and report its termination status. If n is not
given, wait for all currently active child processes. The return code from this
command is that ofthe process being awaited.

inlib pathname
Install a user-supplied library specified by pathname in the current (shell) process. The library is used to resolve external references of programs (and
libraries) loaded after its installation. Note that the library is not loaded into
the address space unless it is needed to resolve an external reference. The list
of inlibed libraries is passed to all children of the current shell. Use IIib(l) to
examine this list.
COMMAND LINE OPTIONS
If the first character of argument zero is -, sh reads commands from $HOME/.profile , if
such a file exists. It then reads commands as described below. The following options
are interpreted by the shell when it is invoked.
-c string

Read commands from string.

-s

Read commands from the standard input. Write shell output to file
descriptor 2. (Note that the same activity occurs if no arguments remain.)

-i

Make the shell interactive. (Note that this also occurs if the shell input
and output are attached to a terminal, as told by gtty.) Ignore the terminate signal SIGTERM, so that kill 0 does not kill the interactive shell.
Catch and ignore the interrupt signal SIGINT, so that wait is interruptible.
In all cases, ignore SIGQUIT.

-Oname=value
Use the -0 option to specify a parameter name, that will be set to value,
then passed into the shell's environment. This Domain/OS SysV option is
useful for tailoring the environment of a shell invoked from a program
that is not another shell (such as the Display Manager). If you set the
ENV parameter using this option, the startup script it specifies will be run.
For example, if you define your  key as follows: cp Ibin/sh
-OENV=-I.shrc.pad, the -I.shrc.pad script can contain commands to perform special processing for the pad and the shell. You can specify more
than one -0 option.

The remaining flags and arguments are described under the set command.
FILES
$HOMEI. profile

/tmp/sh*
/dev/null

1-552

Commands

SysV

SH(l)

SH(l)

DIAGNOSTICS
Errors detected by the shell, such as those that occur in syntax, cause sh to return a
nonzero exit status. If the shell is not being used interactively, then execution of the
shell file is abandoned. Otherwise, the exit status of the last command executed is
returned. Refer to exit under SPECIAL COMMANDS for more information.
BUGS
If« is used to provide standard input to an asynchronous process invoked by &, the
shell gets confused about naming the input document. It creates a garbage file called
/tmp/sh * and complains about not being able to find the file by another name.
SEE ALSO
csh(I), ksh(l), rootnode(I), test(I), execve(2), environ(7)

Commands

1-553

SIZE(l)

SysV

SIZE(l)

NAME
size - print section sizes in bytes of common object files
SYNOPSIS
size [-n] [-f] [-0] [-x] [-V] files
DESCRIPTION
size produces section size information in bytes for each loaded section in the common
object files. The size of the text, data, and bss (uninitialized data) sections is printed, as
well as the sum of the sizes of these sections. If an archive file is input to the size command the information for all archive members is displayed.
OPTIONS

-n

Includes NOLOAD sections in the size.

-f

Produces full output, that is, it prints the size of every loaded section,
followed by the section name in parentheses.

-0

Prints numbers in octal, rather than decimal.

-x

Prints numbers in hexadecimal, rather than decimal.

-V

Supplies version information.

CAVEAT
Since the size of bss sections is not known until link-edit time, the size command will
not give the true total size of pre-linked objects.
DIAGNOSTICS
size: name: cannot open
if name cannot be read.

size: name: bad magic
if name is not an appropriate common object file.
SEE ALSO
cc(l), Id(1), a.out(4), ar(4).

1-554

Commands

SLEEP(l)

SysV

SLEEP(l)

NAME

sleep - suspend execution for an interval
SYNOPSIS

sleep time
DESCRIPTION

sleepfl suspends execution for time seconds. It is used to execute a command after a
certain amount of time, as in:
(sleep 105; command)&
or to execute a command every so often, as in:
while true
do
comrrumd

sleep 37
done

SEE ALSO

alarm(2), sleep(3C) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

Commands

1-555

SORT(l)

SysV

SORT(l)

NAME

sort - sort and/or merge files
SYNOPSIS

sort [-emu] [-ooutput] [-ykmem] [-zrecsz] [-dfiMnr] [-btx] [+posl [-pos2]]
[files]
DESCRIPTION

sort sorts lines of all the named files together and writes the result on the standard output. The standard input is read if - is used as a file name or no input files are named.
Comparisons are based on one or more sort keys extracted from each line of input. By
default, there is one sort key, the entire input line, and ordering is lexicographic by
bytes in machine collating sequence.
OPTIONS

Options that alter default behavior:

-c

Checks that the input file is sorted according to the ordering rules; gives
no output unless the file is out of sort.

-m
-u

Merges only, the input files are already sorted.

-ooutput

The argument given is the name of an output file to use instead of the
standard output. This file may be the same as one of the inputs. There
may be optional blanks between -0 and output.

-ykmem

The amount of main memory used by the sort has a large impact on its
performance. Sorting a small file in a large amount of memory is a
waste. If this option is omitted, sort begins using a system default
memory size, and continues to use more space as needed. If this option
is presented with a value, kmem, sort will start using that number of
kilobytes of memory, unless the administrative minimum or maximum is
violated, in which case the corresponding extremum will be used. Thus,
-yO is guaranteed to start with minimum memory. By convention, -y
(with no argument) starts with maximum memory.

-zrecsz

The size of the longest line read is recorded in the sort phase so buffers
can be allocated during the merge phase. If the sort phase is omitted via
the -e or -m options, a popular system default size will be used. Lines
longer than the buffer size will cause sort to terminate abnormally. Supplying the actual number of byte~ in the longest line to be merged (or
some larger value) will prevent abnormal termination.

Unique: suppresses all but one in each set oflines having equal keys.

Options that override default ordering rules:
-d

1-556

"Dictionary" order: only letters, digits and blanks (spaces and tabs) are
significant in comparisons.

Commands

SysV

SORT(l)

SORT(l)

-f

Folds lower case letters into upper case.

-i

Ignores characters outside the ASCII range 040-0176 in non-numeric
comparisons.

-M

Compares as months. The first three non-blank characters of the field
are folded to upper case and compared so that "JAN" < "FEB" < ... <
"DEC". Invalid fields compare low to "JAN". The -M option implies
the -b option (see below).

-n

An initial numeric string, consisting of optional blanks, optional minus

sign, and zero or more digits with optional decimal point, is sorted by
arithmetic value. The -n option implies the -b option (see below).
Note that the -b option is only effective when restricted sort key
specifications are in effect.
-r

Reverses the sense of comparisons.

Options that alter the treatment of field separators:

-b

Ignores leading blanks when determining the starting and ending positions of a restricted sort key. If the -b option is specified before the first
+posl argument, it will be applied to all +posl arguments. Otherwise,
the b flag may be attached independently to each +posl or -pos2 argument (see below).

-tx

Uses x as the field separator character; x is not considered to be part of a
field (although it may be included in a sort key). Each occurrence of x is
significant (for example, xx delimits an empty field).

When ordering options appear before restricted sort key specifications, the requested
ordering rules are applied globally to all sort keys. When attached to a specific sort key
(described below), the specified ordering options override all global ordering options
for that key.
The notation +posl -pos2 restricts a sort key to one beginning at posl and ending just
before pos2. The characters at position posl and just before pos2 are included in the
sort key (provided that pos2 does not precede posl). A missing -pos2 means the end of
the line.
Specifying pos] and pos2 involves the notion of a field, a minimal sequence of characters followed by a field separator or a new-line. By default, the first blank (space or tab)
of a sequence of blanks acts as the field separator. All blanks in a sequence of blanks
are considered to be part of the next field; for example, all blanks at the beginning of a
line are considered to be part of the first field.
Pos] and pos2 each have the form m.n optionally followed by one or more of the flags
bdfinr. A starting position specified by +m.n is interpreted to mean the n+ 1st character
in the m+ 1st field. A missing .n means .0, indicating the first character of the m+ 1st
field. If the b flag is in effect n is counted from the first non-blank in the m + 1st field;
+m.Ob refers to the first non-blank character in the m+lst field.
Commands

1-557

SORT(l)

SysV

SORT(l)

A last position specified by -m.n is interpreted to mean the nth character (including
separators) after the last character of the m th field. A missing .n means .0, indicating
the last character of the m th field. If the b flag is in effect n is counted from the last
leading blank: in the m+lst field; -m.l b refers to the first non-blank: in the m+lst field.
When there are multiple sort keys, later keys are compared only after all earlier keys
compare equal. Lines that otherwise compare equal are ordered with all bytes
significant.
EXAMPLES
Sort the contents of injile with the second field as the sort key:
sort +1-2 infile
Sort, in reverse order, the contents of injilel and injile2 , placing the output in outfile and
using the first character of the second field as the sort key:
sort -r -0 outfile + 1.0 -1.2 infile 1 infile2
Sort, in reverse order, the contents of injilel and injile2 using the first non-blank: character of the second field as the sort key:
sort -r + 1.0b -1.1 b infile 1 infile2
Print the password file (passwd(4» sorted by the numeric user ID (the third colonseparated field):
sort -t: +2n -3 /etc/passwd
Print the lines of the already sorted file injile, suppressing all but the first occurtence of
lines having the same third field (the options -urn with just one input file make the
choice of a unique representative from a set of equal lines predictable):
sort -urn +2 -3 infile
WARNINGS

Comments and exits with non-zero status for various trouble conditions (for example,
when input lines are too long), and for disorder discovered under the -c option. When
the last line of an input file is missing a new-line character, sort appends one, prints a
warning message, and continues.
sort does not guarantee preservation of relative line ordering on equal keys.
FILES

/usr/tmp/stm???
SEE ALSO

comm(l), join(1), uniq(I).

1-558

Commands

SPELL(l)

SysV

SPELL(l)

NAME
spell, hash make, spellin, hashcheck - find spelling errors
SYNOPSIS
spell [

-y ] [

-b ] [ -x ] [ -I ] [ +localJzle ] [files]

/usr/lib/spell/hashmake
/usr/lib/spell/spellin n
/usr/lib/spell/hashcheck spelling_list
DESCRIPTION
spell collects words from the named files and looks them up in a spelling list. Words
that neither occur among nor are derivable (by applying certain inflections, prefixes,
and/or suffixes) from words in the spelling list are printed on the standard output. If no
files are named, words are collected from the standard input.
spell ignores most troff(l), tbl(l), and eqn(l) constructions.
By default, spell follows chains of included files (.so and .nx troff(l) requests), unless
the names of such included files begin with /usr/lib. Under the -I option, spell will follow the chains of all included files.
The spelling list is based on many sources, and while more haphazard than an ordinary
dictionary, is also more effective with respect to proper names and popular technical
words. Coverage of the specialized vocabularies of biology, medicine, and chemistry is
light.
Pertinent auxiliary files may be specified by name arguments, indicated below with
their default settings (see FILES). Copies of all output are accumulated in the history
file. The stop list filters out misspellings (e.g., thier=thy-y+ier) that would otherwise
pass.
Three routines help maintain and check the hash lists used by spell:
hash make

Reads a list of words from the standard input and writes the corresponding nine-digit hash code on the standard output.

spellin

Reads n hash codes from the standard input and writes a compressed
spelling list on the standard output.

hashcheck

Reads a compressed spelling_list and recreates the nine-digit hash codes
for all the words in it; it writes these codes on the standard output.

OPTIONS
The following options apply to spell:
-y

Prints all words not literally in the spelling list, and indicate plausible
derivations from the words in the spelling list.

-b

Checks British spelling. Besides preferring centre, colour, programme,
speciality, travelled, etc., this option insists upon -ise in words like standardise, Fowler and the OED to the contrary notwithstanding.

Commands

1-559

SPELL(l)

-x
+localJile

SysV

SPELL(l)

Prints every plausible stem with = for each word.
Removes words found in local..Jile are removed from spell's output.
Local..Jile is the name of a user-provided file that contains a sorted list of
words, one per line. With this option, the user can specify a set of words
that are correct spellings (in addition to spell's own spelling list) for
each job.

FILES

D_SPELL=/usr/lib/spell/hlist[abj
Hashed spelling lists, American & British

S_SPELL=/usr/lib/spell/hstop
Hashed stop list
H_SPELL=/usr/lib/spelI!spellhist
History file
lusr/lib/spell/spellprog
Program
BUGS
The spelling list's coverage is uneven; new installations will probably wish to monitor
the output for several months to gather local additions; typically, these are kept in a
separate local file that is added to the hashed spelling_list via spellin.
SEE ALSO

sed(l), sort(l), tee(I).

1-560

Commands

SPELLIN(l)

SysV

SPELLIN(l)

NAME

spell, hash make, spelIin, hashcheck - find spelling errors
SYNOPSIS
spell [ -v ] [ -b ] [ -x ] [ -I ] [ +localJzle ] [files]
/usrllib/spell/hashmake
/usrllib/spell/spelIin n
/usr/lib/spell/hashcheck spelling_list
DESCRIPTION
spell collects words from the named files and looks them up in a spelling list. Words
that neither occur among nor are derivable (by applying certain inflections, prefixes,
and/or suffixes) from words in the spelling list are printed on the standard output. If no
files are named, words are collected from the standard input.
spell ignores most troff(I), tbl(l), and eqn(l) constructions.
By default, spell follows chains of included files (.so and .nx troff(I) requests), unless
the names of such included files begin with lusr/lib. Under the -I option, spell will follow the chains of all included files.
The spelling list is based on many sources, and while more haphazard than an ordinary
dictionary, is also more effective with respect to proper names and popular technical
words. Coverage of the specialized vocabularies of biology, medicine, and chemistry is
light.
Pertinent auxiliary files may be specified by name arguments, indicated below with
their default settings (see FILES). Copies of all output are accumulated in the history
file. The stop list filters out misspellings (e.g., thier=thy-y+ier) that would otherwise
pass.
Three routines help maintain and check the hash lists used by spell:
hash make

Reads a list of words from the standard input and writes the corresponding nine-digit hash code on the standard output.

spellin

Reads n hash codes from the standard input and writes a compressed
spelling list on the standard output.

hashcheck

Reads a compressed spelling_list and recreates the nine-digit hash codes
for all the words in it; it writes these codes on the standard output.

OPTIONS
The following options apply to spell:

-v

Prints all words not literally in the spelling list, and indicate plausible
derivations from the words in the spelling list.

-b

Checks British spelling. Besides preferring centre, colour, programme,
speciality, travelled, etc., this option insists upon -ise in words like standardise, Fowler and the OED to the contrary notwithstanding.

Commands

1-561

SysV

SPELLIN(I)

SPELLIN(I)

-x

Prints every plausible stem with = for each word.

+localJile

Removes words found in local../Ile are removed from spell's output.
Local..file is the name of a user-provided file that contains a sorted list of
words, one per line. With this option, the user can specify a set of words
that are correct spellings (in addition to spell's own spelling list) for
each job.

FILES

D_SPELL=/usr/lib/spell/hlist[ab1
Hashed spelling lists, American & British

S_SPELL=/usr/Iib/spelIlhstop
Hashed stop list
H_SPELL=/usrlIib/spell/spellhist
History file
lusrlIib/spell/spellprog
Program
BUGS
The spelling list's coverage is uneven; new installations will probably wish to monitor
the output for several months to gather local additions; typically, these are kept in a
separate local file that is added to the hashed spelling_list via spellin.
SEE ALSO

sed(I), sort(1), tee(I).

1-562

Commands

SysV

SPLINE(lG)

SPL1NE(lG)

NAME

spline - interpolate smooth curve
SYNOPSIS

spline [ options ]
DESCRIPTION

spline takes pairs of numbers from the standard input as abscissas and ordinates of a
function. It produces a similar set, which is approximately equally spaced and includes
the input set, on the standard output. The cubic spline output has two continuous
derivatives, and sufficiently many points to look smooth when plotted, for example by
graph(IG).
The following options are recognized, each as a separate argument:
-a

Supply abscissas automatically (they are missing from the input); spacing is
given by the next argument, or is assumed to be 1 if next argument is not a
number.

-k

The constant k used in the boundary value computation:

Yo =ky;', y;;= ky;;-l
is set by the next argument (default k

=0).

-n

Space output points so that approximately n intervals occur between the lower
and upper x limits (default n =100).

-p

Make output periodic, i.e., match derivatives at ends. First and last input values
should normally agree.

-x

Next 1 (or 2) arguments are lower (and upper) x limits. Normally, these limits
are calculated from the data Automatic abscissas start at lower limit (default
0).

DIAGNOSTICS

When data is not strictly monotone in x, spline reproduces the input without interpolating extra points.
BUGS
A limit of 1,000 input points is enforced silently.
SEE ALSO

graph(IG).

Commands

1-563

SysV

SPLIT(l)

SPLIT(l)

NAME
split - split a file into pieces
SYNOPSIS

split [ -n

1 [ file [ name 1 1

DESCRIPTION

split reads file and writes it in n-line pieces (default 1000 lines) onto a set of output
files. The name of the first output file is name with aa appended, and so on lexicographically, up to zz (a maximum of 676 files). Name cannot be longer than 12 characters. If no output name is given, x is default.
If no input file is given, or if - is given in its stead, then the standard input file is used.
SEE ALSO

bfs(l), csplit(l).

1-564

Commands

SysV

NAME
start_sh - start a log-in shell
SYNOPSIS
start_sh
start_csh
start ksh
start rsh
DESCRIPTION
When you log in, the first shell is a log-in shell, therefore, the first argument is preceded by a -. This first shell runs your .profile or .login file. There should only be a
single "log-in shell" created when you first log in. Other shells could be created with
the DM commands like:

cp Ibin/ksh - DENV=-I.kshrc.pad cp Ibin/sh - DENV=-I.shrc.pad cp Ibin/csh •
DNEWP AD=true
See csh( 1) for more information about the C shell.
NOTE

start_csh starts a log-in C shell (one that reads your .login file). start_csh is supported
for compatibility with previous releases, and is not the recommended command to use
atSRlO.
SEE ALSO
csh(l), sh(l), ksh(l)

Commands

1-565

SysV

STAT(IG)

STAT(IG)

NAME

stat - statistical network useful with graphical conunands
SYNOPSIS

node-name [options] [files]
DESCRIPTION
stat is a collection of conunand level functions (nodes) that can be interconnected using
sh(l) to form a statistical network. The nodes reside in /usr/bin/graf (see
graphics(lG». Data is passed through the network as sequences of numbers (vectors).
where a number is of the form:
[sign]( digits)( .digits)[e [sign]digits]
evaluated in the usual way. Brackets and parentheses surround fields. All fields are
optional. but at least one of the fields surrounded by parentheses must be present. Any
character input to a node that is not part of a number is taken as a delimiter.
stat nodes are divided into four classes.
Transformers

Map input vector elements into output vector elements

Summarizers

Calculate statistics of a vector

Translators

Convert among formats

Generators

Sources of definable vectors.

Below is a list of synopses for stat nodes. Most nodes accept options indicated by a
leading minus (-). In general. an option is specified by a character followed by a value.
such as cS. This is interpreted as c := 5 (c is assigned 5). The following keys are used
to designate the expected type of the value:

c

Characters
Integer

f

Floating point or integer

file

File name

string

String of characters. surrounded by quotes to include a shell argument
delimiter.

Options without keys are flags. All nodes except generators accept files as input, hence
it is not indicated in the synopses.
Transformers:

1-566

abs

[ -ci] - absolute value
columns (similarly for -c options that follow)

af

[ -ci tv] - arithmetic function
titled output. verbose

Conunands

SysV

STAT(lG)

ceil

[ -ei] - round up to next integer

cusum

[ -ei] - cumulative sum

exp

[ -ei] - exponential

STAT(lG)

floor

[ -ei] - round down to next integer

gamma

[ -ei] - gamma

list

[ -ei dstring] - list vector elements
delimiter(s)

log

[ -ei bf] - logarithm
base

mod

[ -ei mf] - modulus
modulus

pair

[ -ei Ffile xi] - pair elements
File containing base vector, x group size

power

[ -ei pf] - raise to a power
power

root

[ -ei rf] - take a root
root

round

[ -ei pi si ] - round to nearest integer, .5 rounds to 1
places after decimal point, significant digits

sHine

[ -ei ifnisf ] - generate a line given slope and intercept
intercept, number of positive integers, slope

sin

[-ei] - sine

subset

[-afbfci Ffile ii Ifni np pfsi til - generate a subset
above, below, File with master vector, interval, leave, master contains element numbers to leave, master contains element numbers to
pick, pick, start, terminate

Summarizers:

Commands

bucket

[ -ai ci Ffile hf ii If oi] - break into buckets
average size, File containing bucket boundaries, high, interval, low,
number
Input data should be sorted

cor

[ -Ffile] - correlation coefficient
File containing base vector

hilo

[ - h I 0 ox oy ]- find high and low values
high only, low only, option form, option form with x prepended,
option form with y prepended

1-567

SysV

STAT(lG)

STAT(lG)

Ireg

[ -Ffile i 0 s ] -linear regression
File containing base vector, intercept only, option form for siline,
slope only

mean

[ -fJ ni pf] - (trimmed) arithmetic mean
fraction, number, percent

point

[ -fJ ni pf s ] - point from empirical cumulative density functiori
fraction, number, percent, sorted input

prod

- internal product

qsort

[ -ci] - quick sort

rank

- vector rank

total

- sum total

var

- variance

Translators:

1-568

bar

[ -a b f g ri wi xf xa yf ya ylf yhf ] - build a bar chart
suppress axes, bold, suppress frame, suppress grid, region, width in
percent, x origin, suppress x-axis label, y origin, suppress y-axis
label, y-axis lower bound, y-axis high bound
Data is rounded off to integers.

hist

[ -a b f g ri xf xa yf ya ylf yhf ] - build a histogram
suppress axes, bold, suppress frame, suppress grid, region, x origin,
suppress x-axis label, y origin, suppress y-axis label, y-axis lower
bound, y-axis high bound

label

[ -b c Ffile h p ri x xu y yr ] -label the axis of a GPS file
bar chart input, retain case, label File, histogram input, plot input,
rotation, x-axis, upper x-axis, y-axis, right y-axis

pie

[ -b 0 P pni ppi ri v xi yi ] - build a pie chart
bold, values outside pie, value as percentage(:=100), value as
percentage(:=i), draw percent of pie, region, no values, x origin, y
origin
Unlike other nodes, input is lines of the form
[< i e fcc >] value [label]
ignore (do not draw) slice, explode slice, fill slice, color slice
c=( black, red, green, blue)

plot

[ -a b cstring d f Ffile g m ri xf xa xif xhf xlf xni xt yf ya yif yhf
ylf yni yt ] - plot a graph
suppress axes, bold, plotting characters, disconnected, suppress
frame, File containing x vector, suppress grid, mark points, region, x
origin, suppress x-axis label, x interval, x high bound, x low bound,
number of ticks on x-axis, suppress x-axis title, y origin, suppress yCommands

STAT(1G)

SysV

STAT(lG)

axis label, y interval, y high bound, y low bound, number of ticks on
y-axis, suppress y-axis title
title

[ -b c Istring vstring ustring ] - title a vector or a GPS
title bold, retain case, lower title, upper title, vector title

Generators:
gas

[ --1:.i if ni sf tf ] - generate additive sequence
interval, number, start, terminate

prime

[ -ci hi Ii ni 1- generate prime numbers
high, low, number

rand

[ --1:.i hf If mf ni si] - generate random sequence
high, low, multiplier, number, seed

RESTRICTIONS

Some nodes have a limit on the size of the input vector.
SEE ALSO

graphics(lG).
gps(4) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

Commands

1-569

STCODE(l)

Domain/OS SysY

STCODE(l)

NAME

stcode - translate status code value to text message
SYNOPSIS

stcode hex stat code
DESCRIPTION

stcode prints the text message associated with a hexadecimal status code. This command is useful when a user program produces a hexadecimal status code instead of the
textual message.
stcode processes predefined status codes. No provision is currently made to add userdefined status codes to the error text database.

hex_statJode (required)

Specifies hexadecimal status code to be translated.

EXAMPLES
$ stcode 80001
disk not ready (from as / disk manager)

1-570

Commands

SysV

STRINFO(l)

STRINFO(l)

NAME

strinfo - prints STREAMS-related information
SYNOPSIS

strinfo [-v] [-s] [-d attributes] [-m attributes]
[-q attributes] [-t attributes]
DESCRIPTION

strinfo prints information about configured STREAMS modules and drivers, currently
active queues and Streams, and cumulative usage statistics. getopt(2) standards are nol
followed; flags must appear separately in order to be recognized.
OPTIONS

-v

Verbose output.

-s

Print cumulative usage statistics.

-d attributes

Print information about configured drivers. attributes is a blank·
separated list of one or more of the following:
all

Print all attributes (default).

index

Index in the cdevsw or fmodsw table.

majdev

Major device number.

id

Id number.

name

Name.

stats

Statistics.

privstats

Private statistics.

type

Object type of device.

traits

Traits supported.

psz

Minimum and maximum packet size.

water

Low and high water marks.

write

Print write-side information.

-m attributes

Print information about configured modules. attributes is a blanl
separated list of one or more of the attributes listed above for -d.

-q attributes

Print information about active queues. attributes is a blanl
separated list of one or more of the following:
all

Commands

Print all attributes (default).

address

Address of the queue.

name

Name ofthe module.

next

Address of next queue.

1-5'

STRINFO(l)

-t attributes

SysV

count

Count of message blocks on queue.

flags

Queue state.

psz

Minimum and maximum packet size.

water

Low and high water mark.

msgs

Print contents of messages on queue.

STRINFO(l)

Print infonnation about active Streams. attributes is a blankseparated list of one or more of the following:
all

Print all attributes (default).

index

Index into the Stream table.

address

Address of the Stream.

wrq

Address of Stream head read and write queues.

iocblk

Return block for ioct!.

inode

Inode pointer.

strtab

Pointer to the streamtab structure for the Stream.

flag

State/flags.

iocid

ioctl id.

iocwait

Count of processes waiting to do ioctl.

pgrp

Process group, for signals.

wroff

Write offset.

error

Hangup or error to set u.u_error.

pushcnt

Number of pushes done on Stream.

list

Pointer to list of processes to receive SIGPOLL
and to wake up poll.

sigflags

Logical OR of all signal list events.

pollflags

Logical OR of all poll list events.

SEE ALSO

tnnon(1), trconf(l)

1-572

Commands

SysV

STRJP(l)

STRIP(l)

NAME

strip - strip symbol and line number information from a common object file
SYNOPSIS

strip [-1] [-x] [-b [-r] [-V] [ -Aa] filename • ••
DESCRIPTION

The strip command strips the symbol table and line number information from conunon
object files, including archives. Once this has been done, no symbolic debugging
access is available for that file; therefore, this command is nonnally run only on production modules that have been debugged and tested. By default, enough infonnation is
saved to allow traceback information to be obtained from stripped files.
The amount of information stripped from the symbol table can be controlled by using
any of the options listed below:
OPTIONS

-1

Strips line number information only; does not strip any symbol table
information.

-x

Does not strip static or external symbol information.

-b

Same as the -x option, but also does not strip scoping information (e.g.,
beginning and end of block delimiters).

-r

Does not strip static or external symbol information, or relocation information.

-V

Prints the version of the strip command executing on the standard error
output.

-Aa

Strips .blocks and .lines sections of common object files so that traceback information is no longer available.

IT there are any relocation entries in the object file and any symbol table infonnation i!
to be stripped, strip complains and terminates without stripping filename unless the -I
option is used.
IT you use strip on a common archive file [see ar(4)] the archive symbol table ane
module table are removed. You must restore the archive symbol table by executini
ar(l) with the s option before the archive can be link-edited by Id(I). strip produce:
appropriate warning messages when this situation arises.
strip is used to reduce the file storage overhead taken by the object file.
Fll..ES

TMPDlR/strp*

Temporary files

TMPDlR is usually /usr/tmp but can be redefined by setting the environment varlabll
TMPDlR [see tempnamO in tmpnam(3S)].

Commands

1-57

STRIP(1)

SysV

STRIP(l)

DIAGNOSTICS

strip: name: cannot open
If name cannot be read.
strip: name: bad magic
If name is not an appropriate common object file.
SEE ALSO

ar(l), cc(l),ld(l), ts(1), tmpnam(3S), a.out(4), ar(4).

1-574

Commands

SITY(l)

SysV

SITY(l)

NAME
stty - set the options for a terminal
SYNOPSIS
stty [ -a ] [ -g ] [ options ]
DESCRIPTION
stty sets certain terminal I/O options for the device that is the current standard input;
without arguments, it reports the settings of certain options.
In this report, if a character is preceded by a caret C), then the value of that option is the
corresponding CTRL character (e.g., "'H" is CTRL/H ; in this case, recall that

CTRL/H is the same as the "back-space" key.) The sequence "--,, means that an
option has a null value. This has no effect on Apollo transcript pads. It is useful on
dialup terminals or VT100 windows. stty-a
-a

Reports all of the option settings;

-g

Reports current settings in a form that can be used as an argument to another
stty command.

Options in the last group are implemented using options in the previous groups. Note
that many combinations of options make no sense, but no sanity checking is performed.
The options are selected from the following:
Control Modes
parenb (-parenb)
parodd (-parodd)
cs5 cs6 cs7 cs8

Enable (disable) parity generation and detection.
Select odd (even) parity.
Select character size (see termio(7».
o
Hang up phone line immediately.
no 300 600120018002400480096001920038400
Set terminal baud rate to the number given, if possible. (AI
speeds are not supported by all hardware interfaces.)
Hang up (do not hang up) Dataphone connection on last close.
hupcl (-hupcl)
hup (-hup)
Same as hupcl (-hupcl).
cstopb (-cstopb)
Use two (one) stop bits per character.
cread (-cread)
Enable (disable) the receiver.
clocal (-clocal)
n Assume a line without (with) modem control.
loblk (-Ioblk)
Block (do not block) output from a non-current layer.

Input Modes
ignbrk (-ignbrk)
brkint (-brkint)
ignpar (-ignpar)
parmrk (-parmrk)
inpck (-inpck)

Commands

Ignore (do not ignore) break on input.
Signal (do not signal) INTR on break.
Ignore (do not ignore) parity errors.
Mark (do not mark) parity errors (see termio(7».
Enable (disable) input parity checking.

1-57

SysV

STTY(l)

istrip (-istrip)
inler (-inler)
igner (-igner)
iernl (-icrnl)
iucle (-iucle)
ixon (-ixon)

ixany (-ixany)
ixoff (-ixoff)

Output Modes
opost (-opost)
oleue (-oleue)
onler (-onler)
oernl (-oernl)
onoer (-onoer)
onlret (-onlret)
ofill (-ofill)
ofdel (-ofdel)
erO ert er2 er3
nlO nil
tabO tab I tab2 tab3
bsO bsl
ffO fft
vtO vtl
Local Modes
isig (-isig)
ieanon (-ieanon)
xease (-xease)
eeho (-echo)
eehoe (-eehoe)

1-576

STTY(l)

Strip (do not strip) input characters to seven bits.
Map (do not map) NL to CR on input.
Ignore (do not ignore) CR on input.
Map (do not map) CR to NL on input.
Map (do not map) upper-case alphabetics to lower case on
input.
Enable (disable) START/STOP output control. Output is
stopped by sending an ASCII DC3 and started by sending an
ASCII DCl.
Allow any character (only DCl) to restart output.
Request that the system send (not send) START/STOP characters when the input queue is nearly empty/full.

Post-process output (do not post-process output; ignore all
other output modes).
Map (do not map) lower-case alphabetics to upper case on output.
Map (do not map) NL to CR-NL on output.
Map (do not map) CR to NL on output.
Do not (do) output CRs at column zero.
On tlte terminal NL performs (does not perform) the CR function.
Use fill characters (use timing) for delays.
Fill characters are DELs (NULs).
Select style of delay for carriage returns (see termio(7».
Select style of delay for line-feeds (see termio(7».
Select style of delay for horizontal tabs (see termio(7)).
Select style of delay for backspaces (see termio(7».
Select style of delay for form-feeds (see termio(7)).
Select style of delay for vertical tabs (see termio(7».

Enable (disable) the checking of characters against the special
control characters INTR, QUIT, and SWTCH.
Enable (disable) canonical input (ERASE and KILL processing).
Canonical (unprocessed) upper!lower-case presentation.
Echo back (do not echo back) every character typed.
Echo (do not echo) ERASE character as a backspace-spacebackspace string. Note: this mode will erase the ERASEed
character on many CRT terminals; however, it does not Keep
track of colunm position and, as a result, may be confusing on
escaped characters, tabs, and backspaces.
Commands

STTY(l)

SysV

eehok (-eehok)
Ifke (-Ifke)
echonl (-eehonl)
notlsh (-notlsh)
stwrap (-stwrap)
sttlush (-sttlush)
stappl (-stappl)
Control Assignments
control-character c

line

j

STTY(l)

Echo (do not echo) NL after KILL character.
The same as eehok (-eehok); Obsolete.
Echo (do not echo) NL.
Disable (enable) flush after INTR, QUIT, or SWTCH.
Disable (enable) truncation of lines longer than 79 characters
on a synchronous line.
Enable (disable) flush on a synchronous line after every
write(2).
Use application mode (use line mode) on a synchronous line.

Set control-character to c, where control-character is erase,
kill, intr, quit, swteh, eof, ctab, min, or time (etab is used
with -stappl; min and time are used with -icanon; see termio(7)). If c is preceded by an (escaped from the shell) caret
n, then the value used is the corresponding CTRL character
(e.g., "'D" is a CTRLID); "'?" is interpreted as DEL and
'"-" is interpreted as undefined.
Set line discipline to j (0 < j < 127 ).

Combination Modes
evenp or parity
Enable parenb and es7.
oddp
Enable parenb, es7, and parodd.
-parity, -even p, or -odd p
Disable parenb, and set es8.
raw (-raw or cooked) Enable (disable) raw input and output (no ERASE, KUL, INTR,
QUIT, SWTCH, EOT, or output post processing).
nl (-nl)
Unset (set) icml, onler. In addition -nl unsets inler, igner,
oeml, and onlret.
lease (-lease)
Set (unset) xease, iucle, and oleue.
LCASE (-LCASE)
Same as lease (-lease).
tabs (-tabs or tab3)
Preserve (expand to spaces) tabs when printing.
ek
Reset ERASE and KILL characters back to normal # and @.
sane
resets all modes to some reasonable values.
term
Set all modes suitable for the tenninal type term, where term
is one of tty33, tty37, vt05, tn300, moo, or tek.
SEE ALSO

tabs(I).
ioctl(2) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.
termio(7) in the Managing SysV System Software.

Commands

1-577

SU(l)

SysV

SU(l)

NAME

su - become super-user or another user
SYNOPSIS
su [ - ] [ name [ arg ... ] ]
DESCRIPTION

su allows you to be recognized as another user without logging off. The default user
name is root (i.e., super-user).
su requires that you supply the appropriate password (unless you are already root). If
the password is correct, su executes a new shell with the real and effective user ID set
to that of the specified user. The new shell is the optional program named in the shell
field of the specified user's password file entry, or /bin/sh if none is specified. See
passwd(4) and sh(l) for more information. To restore normal user ID privileges, type
an EOF (CfRLjD) to the new shell.
Any additional arguments given on the command line are passed to the program
invoked as the shell. When using programs like sh(l), an argument of the form -c
string executes string via the shell, and an argument such as -r gives you a restricted
shell.
The following statements are true only if the optional program named in the shell field
of the specified user's password file entry is like sh(I). If the first argument to su is a
dash (-), the environment is changed to what would be expected if you actually logged
in as the specified user. This is done by invoking the program used as the shell with an
argument value whose first character is -, thus causing first the system's profile
(/etc/profile) and then the specified user's profile (.profile in the new HOME directory)
to be executed. Otherwise, the environment is passed along with the possible exception
of$PATH, which is set to /bin:/etc:/usr/bin:/usr/apollo/bin for root.
Note that if the optional program used as the shell is /bin/sh, your .profile can check

argO for -sh or -su to determine if it was invoked by login( 1)
or su respectively. If your program is other than /bin/sh, then .profile is invoked with
an argO of -program by both login(l) and su.
All attempts to become another user using su are logged in the log file /usr/adm/sulog.
EXAMPLES

To become user bin while retaining your previously exported environment, execute the
following:
su bin
To become user bin but change the environment to what would be expected if bin had
originally logged in, execute:
su-bin

1-578

Commands

SU(1)

SysV

SUet)

To execute command with the temporary environment and permissions of user bin,
type:

su - bin -c command args
FILES

/etc/passwd

System's password file

Jete/profile

System's profile

$HOME.profile

User's profile

/usr/adm/sulog

Log file

SEE ALSO
env(l), login(l), sh(l), passwd(4), environ(5).

Commands

1-579

SUM(l)

SysV

SUM(l)

NAME

sum - print checksum and block count of a file
SYNOPSIS
~ 1m [ -r ] file
DESCRIPTION

sum calculates and prints a 16-bit checksum for the named file, and also prints the
number of blocks in the file. It is typically used to look for bad spots, or to validate a
file communicated over some transmission line. The option -r causes an alternate algorithm to be used in computing the checksum.
DIAGNOSTICS

"Read error" is indistinguishable from end of file on most devices; check the block
count.
SEE ALSO

wc(l).

1-580

Commands

SWAPUL(l)

SysV

SWAPUL(l)

NAME

swapu! - rearrange underlining
SYNOPSIS

swapu!
DESCRIPTION

swapu! reads lines from standard input, rearranges underlining so that underlines follow
a character in the output stream (instead of being preceded by them), and writes the
resulting text to standard output.

Commands

1-581

Domain/OS SysY

NAME

swedish_to)so - convert files to ISO fonnat
SYNOPSIS

swedish_to)so input..file output..file
DESCRIPTION

These utilities convert files written with the overloaded 7-bit national fonts to the Internation Standards Organization (ISO) 8-bit fonnat. The overloaded fonts include any
with a specific language suffix (for example, tixl3.french, or din_tixlI.german). If
you created and/or edited a file using one of the national fonts, that file is a candidate
for conversion.
You are not required to convert files, but probably will want to because
1.

The overloaded fonts replace certain ASCII characters with national ones, have that
subset of ASCn characters and the national characters in one file. The 8-bit fonts
available as of SRIO include all the ASCII characters and the national characters.

2.

The 8-bit fonts also include a wider range of national characters, so you can enter
any character in any western European language. This was not always possible
with the overloaded fonts. For example, there was not enough space in the overloaded font to include all the French characters, but they all exist in the 8-bit fonts.

There are two parameters to the conversion utilities. You must provide the name of the
file you want to convert (input..file) and your output..file. If output..file already exists,
the utilities abort.
The default location for the utilities is lusr/apollo/bin.
FILES
lusr/apollo/bin/french_to_iso

Converts overloaded French to ISO fonnat

lusr/apolJo/bin/german_ to)so

Converts overloaded Gennan to ISO fonnat

lusr/apollo/bin/nor.dan_to)so

Converts overloaded Norwegian/Danish to ISO format

lusr/apollo/bin/swedish_to_iso

Converts overloaded Swedish/Finnish to ISO format

lusr/apollo/bin/swiss_to_iso

Converts overloaded Swiss to ISO fonnat

lusr/apollo/bin/uk_to_iso

Converts overloaded U.K. English to ISO fonnat

DIAGNOSTICS

All messages are generally self-explanatory.

1-582

Commands

Domain/OS SysV

NAME
swiss to iso - convert files to ISO format
SYNOPSIS

swiss to iso

inputJzle outputJzle

DESCRIPTION

These utilities convert files written with the overloaded 7-bit national fonts to the Internation Standards Organization (ISO) 8-bit format. The overloaded fonts include any
with a specific language suffix (for example, f7x13.french, or din_f7xll.german). If
you created and/or edited a file using one of the national fonts, that file is a candidate
for conversion.
You are not required to convert files, but probably will want to because
1.

The overloaded fonts replace certain ASCII characters with national ones, have that
subset of ASCIl characters and the national characters in one file. The 8-bit fonts
available as of SRIO include all the ASCII characters and the national characters.

2.

The 8-bit fonts also include a wider range of national characters, so you can enter
any character in any western European language. This was not always possible
with the overloaded fonts. For example, there was not enough space in the overloaded font to include all the French characters, but they all exist in the 8-bit fonts.

There are two parameters to the conversion utilities. You must provide the name of the
file you want to convert (inputJzle) and your outputJzle. If outputJzle already exists,
the utilities abort.
The default location for the utilities is /usr/apollo/bin.
FILES

/usr/apollo/bin/french _to_iso

Converts overloaded French to ISO format

/usr/apollo/bin/german_ to_iso

Converts overloaded German to ISO format

/usr/apollo/bin/nor.dan_to_iso

Converts overloaded Norwegian/Danish to ISO format

/usr/apollo/bin/swedish_to_iso

Converts overloaded Swedish/Finnish to ISO format

/usr/apollo/bin/swiss_ to_iso

Converts overloaded Swiss to ISO format

/usr/apollo/bin/uk_to_iso

Converts overloaded U.K. English to ISO format

DIAGNOSTICS

All messages are generally self-explanatory.

Commands

1-583

SYNC(l)

SysV

SYNC(l)

NAME

sync - forces write to disk
SYNOPSIS

sync
DESCRIPTION

The sync corrunand executes the sync system prumtlve. It flushes all previously
unwritten system buffers out to disk, thus assuring that all file modifications up to that
point are saved.
The sync operation is not actually necessary on DOMAIN hardware, because the system buffers are automatically written to disk at shutdown. Nevertheless, we provide it
in the interest of ensuring compatibility.
SEE ALSO

sync(2)

1-584

Corrunands

SYSTYPE(l)

SysV

SYSTYPE(l)

NAME

systype - display version stamp
SYNOPSIS

/usr/apollo/bin/systype file
DESCRIPTION

systype displays the UNIX version stamp of the specified object file. Four columns are
displayed in the output. The first (OBITYPE) contains the object type, the second
(SYSTYPE) contains the systype (one of the following):
none
any

sys5
sys5.3
bsd4.2
bsd4.3

The third column (RUNTYPE) contains the runtype, which has the same set of possible
types as the systype; and the forth column (FILE) is the name of the file.
The fonnat is as follows:
OBITYPE
coff
obj

SYSTYPE
bsd4.3
bsd4.2

RUNTYPE
sys5.3

FILE
/bin/cc
//node_l/bsd4.2/bin/cc

Note that files of object type OBI, do not have runtypes.
EXAMPLES

$ systype /bin/cc
OBJTYPE
coff

SYSTYPE
bsd4.3

RUNTYPE
sys5.3

FILE
/bin/cc

RUNTYPE

FILE
/bsd4.2/bin/cc

$ systype /bsd4.2/bin/cc
OBJTYPE
obj

SYSTYPE
bsd4.2

SEE ALSO

ce(l),ld(I);
Using Your SysV Environment

Commands

1-585

TABS(l)

SysV

TABS(l)

NAME

tabs - set tabs on a tenninal
SYNOPSIS
tabs [tabspec] [-Ttype] [+mn]
DESCRIPTION
tabs sets the tab stops on the user's tenninal according to the tab specification tabspec,
after clearing any previous settings. The user's tenninal must have remotely-settable
hardware tabs. This has no effect on Apollo transcript pads. It is useful on connected
tenninals and VT100 windows.
tabspec Four types of tab specification are accepted for tabspec. They are described
below: canned (-code), repetitive (-n), arbitrary (n] ,n2, ... ), and file (-file).
If no tabspec is given, the default value is -8, i.e., UNIX system "standard"
tabs. The lowest column number is 1. Note that for tabs, column 1 always
refers to the leftmost column on a tenninal, even one whose column markers
begin at 0, e.g., the DASI 300, DASI 300s, and DASI 450.

-code

1-586

Use one of the codes listed below to select a canned set of tabs. The legal
codes and their meanings are as follows:
-a
1,10,16,36,72
Assembler, ffiM S/370, first fonnat
-a2
1,10,16,40,72
Assembler, ffiM S/370, second fonnat
-c
1,8,12,16,20,55
COBOL, nonnal fonnat
-c2
1,6,10,14,49
COBOL compact fonnat (columns 1-6 omitted). Using this code,
the first typed character corresponds to card column 7, one space
gets you to column 8, and a tab reaches column 12. Files using this
tab setup should include a fonnat specification as follows (see
fspec(4»:
<:t-c2 m6 s66 d:>
1,6,10,14,18,22,26,30,34,38,42,46,50,54,58,62,67
-c3
COBOL compact fonnat (columns 1-6 omitted), with more tabs than
-c2. This is the recommended fonnat for COBOL. The appropriate
fonnat specification is (see fspec(4»:
<:t-c3 m6 s66 d:>
-f
1,7,11,15,19,23
FORTRAN
1,5,9,13,17,21,25,29,33,37,41,45,49,53,57,61
-p
PL/I
1,10,55
-s
SNOBOL

Commands

SysV

TABS(l)

-u

-n

TABS(l)

1,12,20,44
UNlVAC 1100 Assembler

A repetitive specification requests tabs at columns l+n, 1+2*n, etc. Of particular importance is the value 8: this represents the UNIX system "standard" tab setting, and is the most likely tab setting to be found at a terminal.
Another special case is the value 0, implying no tabs at all.

nl ,112 ,... The arbitrary format permits the user to type any chosen set of numbers,
separated by commas, in ascending order. Up to 40 numbers are allowed. If
any number (except the first one) is preceded by a plus sign, it is taken as an
increment to be added to the previous value. Thus, the formats 1,10,20,30,
and 1,10,+10,+10 are considered identical.
-file

If the name of a file is given, tabs reads the first line of the file, searching for
a format specification (see fspec(4». If it finds one there, it sets the tab stops

according to it, otherwise it sets them as -8. This type of specification may
be used to make sure that a tabbed file is printed with correct tab settings, and
would be used with the pr(l) command:
tabs - file; pr file
Any of the following also may be used; if a given flag occurs more than once, the last
value given takes effect:

- Ttype

tabs usually needs to know the type of terminal in order to set tabs and
always needs to know the type to set margins. type is a name listed in
term(5). If no - T flag is supplied, tabs uses the value of the environment
variable TERM. If TERM is not defined in the environment (see environ(5»,
tabs tries a sequence that will work for many terminals.

+mn

The margin argument may be used for some terminals. It causes all tabs to be
moved over n columns by making column n+ 1 the left margin. If +m is
given without a value of n, the value assumed is 10. For a TermiNet, the first
value in the tab list should be 1, or the margin will move even further to the
right. The normal (leftmost) margin on most terminals is obtained by +mO.
The margin for most terminals is reset only when the +m flag is given explicitly.

Tab and margin setting is performed via the standard output.
EXAMPLES
tabs -a

Example using -code (canned specification) to set tabs to the settings
required by the llM assembler: columns 1, 10, 16,36,72.

tabs -8

Example of using -n (repetitive specification), where Il is 8, Causes
tabs to be set every eighth position:
1+(1*8),1+(2*8) .... which evaluate to columns 9,17, ...

tabs 1,8,36

Example of using nl ,1l2 ,... (arbitrary specification) to set tabs at
columns 1, 8, and 36.

Commands

1-587

SysV

TABS(l)

TABS(l)

tabs -$HOME/fspec.list/aU4425
Example of using -file (file specification) to indicate that tabs should
be set according to the first line of $HOME/fspec.list/att4425 (see
fspec(4».
NOTE

There is no consistency among different terminals regarding ways of clearing tabs and
setting the left margin. tabs clears only 20 tabs (on terminals requiring a long
sequence), but is willing to set 64.
WARNING

The tabspec used with the tabs command is different from the one used with the
newform(l) command. For example, tabs -8 sets every eighth position; whereas
newform -i-8 indicates that tabs are set every eighth position.
DIAGNOSTICS

When arbitrary tabs are ordered incorrectly.
When a zero or missing increment is found in an arbitrary
specification.
unknown tab code When a canned code caunot be found.
If -file option used, and file can't be opened.
can't open
If -file option used and the specification in that file points to yet
file indirection
another file. Indirection of this form is not permitted.
illegal tabs
illegal increment

SEE ALSO

newform(l), pr(l), tput(l).
fspec(4), terminfo(4), environ(5), term(5) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

1-588

Commands

SysV

TAIL(1)

TAIL(l)

NAME

tail - deliver the last part of a file
SYNOPSIS

tail [ ±[number][lbc[f] ] ] [file]
DESCRIPTION

tail copies the named file to the standard output beginning at a designated place. If no
file is named, the standard input is used.
Copying begins at distance +number from the beginning, or -number from the end of
the input (if number is null, the value 10 is assumed). Number is counted in units of
lines, blocks, or characters, according to the appended option I, b, or c. When no units
are specified, counting is by lines.
With the :"'f ("follow") option, if the input file is not a pipe, the program will not terminate after the line of the input file has been copied, but will enter an endless loop,
wherein it sleeps for a second and then attempts to read and copy further records from
the input file. Thus it may be used to monitor the growth of a file that is being written
by some other process. For example, the command:
tail -f fred
will print the last ten lines of the file fred, followed by any lines that are appended to
fred between the time tail is initiated and killed. As another example, the command:
tail -lScf fred
will print the last 15 characters of the file fred, followed by any lines that are appended
to fred between the time tail is initiated and killed.
BUGS

Tails relative to the end of the file are stored in a buffer, and thus are limited in length.
Various kinds of anomalous behavior may happen with character special files.
WARNING
The tail command will only tail the last 4096 bytes of a file regardless of its line count.
SEE ALSO

dd(lM)

Commands

1-589

SysV

TAR(1)

TAR(l)

NAME

tar - tape file archiver
SYNOPSIS

letc/tar
letc/tar
letc/tar
letc/tar
letc/tar

-c[vwfb[#s]] device block files .. .
-r[vwb[#s]] device block £files ... ]
-t[ vf[#s] device
-u[vwb[#s]] device block £files ... ]
-x[lmovwf[#s]] device £files ... ]

DESCRIPTION

tar saves and restores files on magnetic tape. Its actions are controlled by the key argument. The key is a string of characters containing one function letter (c, r, t, u, or x)
and possibly followed by one or more function modifiers (v, w, f, b, and #). Other
arguments to the command are files (or directory names) specifying which files are to
be dumped or restored. In all cases, appearance of a directory name refers to the files
and (recursively) subdirectories of that directory.
The function portion of the key is specified by one of the following letters:
r
x

U

c

Replace. The named files are written on the end of the tape. The c function
implies this function.
Extract. The named files are extracted from the tape. If a named file matches
a directory whose contents had been written onto the tape, this directory is
(recursively) extracted. Use the file or directory's relative path when
appropriate, or tar will not find a match. The owner, modification time, and
mode are restored (if possible). If no files argument is given, the entire content of the tape is extracted. Note that if several files with the same name are
on the tape, the last one overwrites all earlier ones.
Table. The names and other information for the specified files are listed each
time that they occur on the tape. The listing is similar to the format produced
by the Is -I command. If no files argument is given, all the names on the tape
are listed.
Update. The named files are added to the tape if they are not already there, or
have been modified since last written on that tape. This key implies the r key.
Create a new tape; writing begins at the beginning of the tape, instead of after
the last file. This key implies the r key.

The characters below may be used in addition to the letter that selects the desired func-

tion. Use them in the order shown in the synopsis.

#s

1-590

This modifier determines the drive on which the tape is mounted (replace #
with the drive number) and the speed of the drive (replace s with I, m, or h for
low, medium or high). The modifier tells tar to use a drive other than the
default drive, or the drive specified with the -f option. For example, with the
Sh modifier, tar would use Idev/mtlSh or Idev/mtO instead of the default
drives /dev/mt/Om or /dev/mtO, respectively. However, if for example, -f
Idev/rmtO Sh appeared on the command line, tar would use Idev/rmtSh or
Commands

SysV

TAR(l)

TAR(l)

/devmtO. The default entry is Om.
v

Verbose. Normally, tar does its work silently. The v (verbose) option causes
it to type the name of each file it treats, preceded by the function letter. With
the t function, v gives more information about the tape entries than just the
name.

w

What. This causes tar to print the action to be taken, followed by the name
of the file, and then wait for the user's confirmation. If a word beginning with
y is given, the action is performed. Any other input means "no". This is not
valid with the t key.

f

File. This causes tar to use the device argument as the name of the archive
instead of /dev/mt/Om or Idev/mtO. If the name of the file is -, tar writes to
the standard output or reads from the standard input, whichever is appropriate. Thus, tar can be used as the head or tail of a pipeline. tar can also be
used to move hierarchies with the command:

b

Blocking Factor. This causes tar to use the block argument as the blocking
factor for tape records. The default is I, the maximum is 20. This function
should not be supplied when operating on regular archives or block special
devices. It is mandatory however, when reading archives on raw magnetic
tape archives (see f above). The block size is determined automatically when
reading tapes created on block special devices (key letters x and t).
Link. This tells tar to complain if it cannot resolve all of the links to the files
being dumped. If I is not specified, no error messages are printed.
Modify. This tells tar to not restore the modification times. The
modification time of the file will be the time of extraction.
Ownership. This causes extracted files to take on the user and group identifier
of the user running the program, rather than those on tape. This is only valid
with the x key.
Include Apollo-specific information. Allows Domain/OS typed files.

cd fromdir; tar cf - .

m
o

A

BUGS
There is no way to ask for the n -th occurrence of a file.
Tape errors are handled ungracefully.
The u option can be slow.
The b option should not be used with archives that are going to be updated. The current
magnetic tape driver cannot backspace raw magnetic tape. If the archive is on a disk
file, the b option should not be used at all, because updating an archive stored on disk
can destroy it.
The current limit on file name length is 100 characters.
tar doesn't copy empty directories or special files.

Commands

1-591

TAR(1)

SysV

TAR(l)

FILES

Idev/mt/*
Idev/mt*
Itmp/tar*

Idev/mt/ctape
Idev/mt/Om
Idev/rmt/Om
DIAGNOSTICS

Complaints about bad key characters and tape read/write errors.
Complaints if enough memory is not available to hold the link tables.
SEE ALSO

ar(1). cpio(I).ls(I). mt(I).

1-592

Commands

Domain/OS SysV

TB(l)

TB(l)

NAME
tb - print process traceback
SYNOPSIS

tb [options] [process_spec]
DESCRIPTION

tb prints a process traceback, listing the name and current line number of each routine
on the call stack. There are two forms of traceback:
Active

Traces the current state of an executing process.

Diagnostic

Traces the state of an aborted process at the time of the fault which
killed it.

process_spec (optional)
UNIX process ID (PID), aegis process name, or aegis process
UID. Process names are not recorded in the process dump file, so
dead processes must be referenced by PID or UID. Since PID's
are reused multiple dump file entries for the same PID are possible, the command will select the most recent.
Default if omitted: perform a diagnostic traceback for the last
child of the invoking process
OPTIONS

-p[roc]

Traces exactly the specified process. If this option is absent, the
specified process or one of its children may be traced, as
described below.

-d[iagnostic]

Prints a diagnostic traceback of an aborted process.

-n[ode] node_spec

Uses the process dump file on the specified node. Implies -diagnostic.

-c[ommand] pathname
Prints diagnostic traceback( s) for processes running the specified
program. pathname must be reachable from the working directory; command search rules are not applied. Implies -diagnostic.
-s[ince] date Jime _spec
Prints diagnostic traceback(s) for processes which aborted after
the specified time. Implies -diagnostic. The format for
date_time_spec is [[[yyyyIlnun/dd] [.] [hh:mm[ :ss]].
-I[ast] [n]

Commands

Prints the n most recent entries in the process dump file (which
also satisfy other selection criteria if given). n defaults to 1. If
neither -last nor -all is specified tb prints only the most recent
entry. Implies -diagnostic.

1-593

Domain/OS SysV

TB(l)

TB(l)

-alII]

Prints all entries in the process dump file (which also satisfy
other selection criteria if given.) If neither -last or -all are
specified, tb prints only the most recent entry. Implies -diagnostic.

-f[ull]

Prints additional fault diagnostic information, such as register
values. Implies -diagnostic.

-b[rief]

Lists entries in the process dump file that satisfy selection criteria, but do not print trace backs. The listing shows the process,
parent, and group IDs, the time of the dump, the abort status, and
the program that was running.

-t[asks]

Traces all tasks in the process. By default only the currently
active task is shown. Ignored if tasking is not enabled. Applies
only to active process tracebacks.
Suppresses output of process 10, dump time, and program name
preceding diagnostic traceback, or of column headers in brief format. It has no effect on active process traceback.

Diagnostic Tracebacks
A diagnostic traceback shows the state of the call stack at the time of a fault which
causes a process to be aborted. Traceback information is written to
'node_data/system_Iogs/proc _dump at the time of the fault. This is a circular buffer
in which the oldest information is overwritten as needed to make room for new. There
is space for approximately 150-200 dumps. tb prints up to 128 call levels for diagnostic
tracebacks.
tb prints a diagnostic traceback if the command line specifies -diagnostic or any option
which implies it, or if the process specified is not active. If -diagnostic is specified
together with an active process, the most recent aborted child of that process is traced
(or most recent children if -last or -all is specified).
If no options are given (except possibly -f, -b or -h) tb prints a diagnostic traceback
for the most recent aborted child of the process which invoked tb.

Examples of Requesting Diagnostic Tracebacks
Assume process_5 is an active shell process, and process number 107 is not active.
Traceback process 107.
$ tb 107

Traceback last aborted command invoked from process_5.

Traceback last aborted command from this shell
1-594

Commands

Domain/OS SysV

TB(l)

TB(l)

$tb

Traceback last aborted process running test3
$tb -c test3

List all entries in the process dump file made today
$tb -s today -a -b

Active Process Tracebacks
An active process traceback shows the current state of an executing process, listing the
name and line number of each procedure in the call stack. The process is suspended
while the traceback is taken. tb prints an active process traceback if the command line
specifies 3l\ active process and does not include -diagnostic (or any option that implies
it). If the process is specified by name and has any active children, then the most recent
child is traced. (This allows a process to be specified by the name of its invoking shell
process.) This behavior may be overriden by the -proc switch, or by specifying the
process by pro or UID. Note that the only other option applicable to active process
tracebacks is -task.
Examples of Requesting Active Process Tracebacks
Assume process_7 is an active shell process, from which a command running in process 747 has been invoked.
$tb747

Traceback the invoked command
$tb process_7

same
$tb -p process_7

Traceback the shell process itself

Commands

1-595

SysV

TD(lG)

TD(lG)

NAME
gdev: hpd, erase, hardcopy, tekset, td - graphical device routines and filters
SYNOPSIS

hpd [ - options] [GPS file . ..]
erase
hardcopy
tekset
td [-ernn] [GPS file . .. ]
DESCRIPTION

All of the commands described below reside in /usr/bin/graf (see graphics(lG».
hpd

Translate a GPS (graphical primitive string; see gps( 4» to instructions for
the Hewlett-Packard 7221A Graphics Plotter. A viewing window is computed from the maximum and minimum points in file unless the -u or -r
option is provided. If no file is given, the standard input is assumed.
hpd Options
cn

Select character set n, n between 0 and 5.

pn

Select pen numbered n, n between 1 and 4 inclusive.

rn

Window on GPS region n, n between 1 and 25 inclusive.

sn

Slant characters n degrees clockwise from the vertical.

u

Window on the entire GPS universe.

xdn Set x displacement of the viewport's lower left corner to n inches.

1-596

xvn

Set width of viewport to n inches.

ydn

Set y displacement of the viewport's lower left corner to n inches.

yvn

Set height of viewport to n inches.

erase

Send characters to a Tektronix 4010 series storage terminal to erase the
screen.

hardcopy

When issued at a Tektronix display terminal with a hard copy unit, hardcopy generates a screen copy on the unit.

tekset

Send characters to a Tektronix terminal to clear the display screen, set the
display mode to alpha, and set characters to the smallest font.

Commands

TD(lG)

SysV

td

TD(1G)

Translate a GPS to scope code for a Tektronix 4010 series storage tenninal.
A viewing window is computed from the maximum and minimum points in
file unless the -u or -r option is provided. If no file is given, the standard
input is assumed.
td Options
e

Do not erase screen before initiating display.

rn

Display GPS region n, n between 1 and 25 inclusive.

u

Display the entire GPS universe.

SEE ALSO

graphics(l G).
gps(4) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

Commands

1-597

SysV

TEE(l)

TEE(l)

NAME

tee - pipe fitting
SYNOPSIS
tee [-i] [-a] [file] ...
DESCRIPTION
tee transcribes the standard input to the standard output and makes copies in the files.
OPTIONS

1-598

-i

Ignore interrupts;

-a

Causes the output to be appended to thefiles rather than overwriting them.

COnimands

TEKSET(lG)

SysV

TEKSET(lG)

NAME

gdev: hpd, erase, hardcopy, tekset, td - graphical device routines and filters
SYNOPSIS
hpd [ - options] [GPS file . ..]
erase
hardcopy
tekset
td [-ernn] [GPS file . ..]
DESCRIPTION
All of the connnands described below reside in /usr/bin/graf (see graphics(lG».
hpd

Translate a GPS (graphical primitive string; see gps(4» to instructions for
the Hewlett-Packard 7221A Graphics Plotter. A viewing window is computed from the maximum and minimum points in file unless the -u or -r
option is provided. If no file is given, the standard input is assumed.
hpd Options
cn

Select character set n, n between 0 and 5.

pn

Select pen numbered n, n between 1 and 4 inclusive.

rn

Window on GPS region n, n between 1 and 25 inclusive.

sn

Slant characters n degrees clockwise from the vertical.

u

Window on the entire GPS universe.

xdn Set x displacement of the viewport's lower left comer to n inches.
xvn

Set width of viewport to n inches.

ydn

Set y displacement of the viewport's lower left comer to n inches.

yvn

Set height of viewport to n inches.

erase

Send characters to a Tektronix 4010 series storage terminal to erase the
screen.

hardcopy

When issued at a Tektronix display terminal with a hard copy unit, hardcopy generates a screen copy on the unit.

tekset

Send characters to a Tektronix terminal to clear the display screen, set the
display mode to alpha, and set characters to the smallest font.

Connnands

1-599

SysV

TEKSET(lG)

td

TEKSET(lG)

Translate a GPS to scope code for a Tektronix 4010 series storage terminal.
A viewing window is computed from the maximum and minimum points in
file unless the -u or -r option is provided. If no file is given, the standard
input is assumed.
td Options

e

Do not erase screen before initiating display.

rn

Display GPS region n, n between 1 and 25 inclusive.

u

Display the entire GPS universe.

SEE ALSO

graphics( 1G).
gps( 4) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

1-600

Commands

TELNET(lC)

SysV

TELNET(lC)

NAME

telnet - user interface to the TELNET protocol
SYNOPSIS

tel net [ host [ port] ]
DESCRIPTION

telnet is used to communicate with another host using the TELNET protocol. If telnet
is invoked without arguments, it enters command mode, indicated by its prompt ("telnet>"). In this mode, it accepts and executes the commands listed below. If it is
invoked with arguments, it performs an open command (see below) with those arguments.
Once a connection has been opened, tel net enters an input mode. The input mode
entered will be either "character at a time" or "line by line" depending on what the
remote system supports.
In "character at a time" mode, most text typed is immediately sent to the remote host
for processing.
In "line by line" mode, all text is echoed locally, and (normally) only completed lines
are sent to the remote host. The "local echo character" (initially ""E") may be used to
tum off and on the local echo (this would mostly be used to enter passwords without the
password being echoed).
In either mode, if the localchars toggle is TRUE (the default in line mode; see below),
the user's quit, intr, and flush characters are trapped locally, and sent as TELNET protocol sequences to the remote side. There are options (see toggle autoflush and toggle
autosynch below) which cause this action to flush subsequent output to the terminal
(until the remote host acknowledges the TELNET sequence) and flush previous tenninal input (in the case of quit and intr).
While connected to a remote host, telnet command mode may be entered by typing the
telnet "escape character" (initially "T'). When in command mode, the normal tenninal editing conventions are available.
COMMANDS

The following commands are available. Only enough of each command to uniquely
identify it need be typed (this is also true for arguments to the mode, set, toggle, and
display commands).
open host [port]
Open a connection to the named host. If no port number is specified, telnet will attempt to contact a TEL NET server at the default port. The
host specification may be either a host name (see hosts(4)) or an Internet
address specified in "dot notation" (see inet(3N)).
close

Commands

Close a TELNET session and return to command mode.

1-601

SysV

TELNET(lC)

TELNET(lC)

quit

Close any open TEL NET session and exit tel net. An end of file (in
command mode) will also close a session and exit.

z

Suspend telnct. This command only works when the user is using the
csh(l).

mode type

Ask the remote host for permission to go into the requested mode. If the
remote host is capable of entering that mode, the requested mode will be
entered. Type is either line (for "line by line" mode) or character (for
"character at a time" mode).

status

Show the current status of telnet. This includes the peer one is connected to, as well as the current mode.

display [ argument... ]
Displays all, or some, of the set and toggle values (see below).

? [command]
Get help. With no arguments, telnet prints a help summary. If a command is specified, telnet prints the help information for just that command.
send arguments
Sends one or more special character sequences to the remote host. The
following are the arguments which may be specified (more than one
argument may be specified at a time):
escape Sends the current telnet escape character (initially' 'A]' ').

1-602

synch

Sends the TEL NET SYNCH sequence. This sequence causes
the remote system to discard all previously typed (but not yet
read) input. This sequence is sent as TCP urgent data (and may
not work if the remote system is a 4.2 BSD system - if it
doesn't work, a lower case "r" may be echoed on the terminal).

brk

Sends the TELNET BRK (Break) sequence, which may have
significance to the remote system.

ip

Sends the TELNET IP (Interrupt Process) sequence, which
should cause the remote system to abort the currently running
process.

ao

Sends the TELNET AO (Abort Output) sequence, which
should cause the remote system to flush all output from the
remote system to the user's terminal.

ayt

Sends the TELNET A YT (Are You There) sequence, to which
the remote system mayor may not choose to respond.

ec

Sends the TEL NET EC (Erase Character) sequence, which
should cause the remote system to erase the last character
entered.
Commands

SysV

TELNET(lC)

TELNET(lC)

el

Sends the TELNET EL (Erase Line) sequence, which should
cause the remote system to erase the line currently being
entered.

ga

Sends the TELNET GA (Go Ahead) sequence, which likely
has no significance to the remote system.

nop

Sends the TELNET NOP (No OPeration) sequence.

?

Prints out help information for the send command.

set argument value
Set anyone of a number of tel net variables to a specific value. The special value off turns off the function associated with the variable. The
values of variables may be interrogated with the display command. The
variables which may be specified are:
echo

This is the value (initially "'E") which, when in "line by line"
mode, toggles between doing local echoing of entered characters (for normal processing), and suppressing echoing of entered
characters (for entering, say, a password).

escape This is the telnet escape character (initially "T') which causes
entry into tel net command mode (when connected to a remote
system).
interrupt
If telnet is in localchars mode (see toggle localchars below)
and the interrupt character is typed, a TELNET IP sequence
(see send ip above) is sent to the remote host. The initial value
for the interrupt character is taken to be the terminal's intI
character.
quit

If telnet is in localchars mode (see toggle localchars below:
and the quit character is typed, a TELNET BRK sequence (set
send brk above) is sent to the remote host. The initial value fo]
the quit character is taken to be the terminal's quit character.

flushoutput
If telnet is in localchars mode (see toggle localchars below
and the f1ushoutput character is typed, a TELNET A(
sequence (see send ao above) is sent to the remote host. The
initial value for the flush character is taken to be the terminal':
flush character.
erase

Commands

If tel net is in localchars mode (see toggle localchars below)
and if telnet is operating in "character at a time" mode, the]
when this character is typed, a TELNET EC sequence (se,
send ec above) is sent to the remote system. The initial valu<
for the erase character is taken to be the terminal's eras

1-60

SysV

TELNET(lC)

TELNET(lC)

character.

kill

If tel net is in localchats mode (see toggle localchars below),
and if telnet is operating in "character at a time" mode, then

when this character is typed, a TEL NET EL sequence (see
send el above) is sent to the remote system. The initial value
for the kill character is taken to be the terminal's kill character.
eof

If telnet is operating in "line by line" mode, entering this char-

acter as the first character on a line will cause this character to
be sent to the remote system. The initial value of the eof character is taken to be the terminal's eof character.
toggle arguments ...
Toggle (between TRUE and FALSE) various flags that control how telnet responds to events. More than one argument may be specified. The
state of these flags may be interrogated with the display command.
Valid arguments are:
localchars
If this is TRUE, then the Hush, interrupt, quit, erase, and kill
characters (see set above) are recognized locally, and
transformed into (hopefully) appropriate TELNET control
sequences (respectively ao, ip, brk, ec, and el; see send above).
The initial value for this toggle is TRUE in "line by line"
mode, and FALSE in "character at a time" mode.
autonush
If autoHush and localchars are both TRUE, then when the ao,
intr, or quit characters are recognized (and transformed into
TELNET sequences; see set above for details), telnet refuses
to display any data on the user's terminal until the remote system acknowledges (via a TELNET Timing Mark option) that it
has processed those TEL NET sequences. The initial value for
this toggle is TRUE if the terminal user had not done an "stty
noHsh", otherwise FALSE (see stty(l).
autosynch
If autosynch and localchars are both TRUE, then when either

the intf or quit characters is typed (see set above for descriptions of the intf and quit characters), the resulting TELNET
sequence sent is followed by the TELNET SYNCH sequence.
This procedure should cause the remote system to begin throwing away all previously typed input until both of the TELNET
sequences have been read and acted upon. The initial value of
this toggle is FALSE.

1-604

Commands

SysV

TELNET(lC)

TELNET(1C)

crmod Toggle carriage return mode. When this mode is enabled, most
carriage return characters received from the remote host will be
mapped into a carriage return followed by a line feed. This
mode does not affect those characters typed by the user, only
those received from the remote host. This mode is not very useful unless the remote host only sends carriage return, but never
line feed. The initial value for this toggle is FALSE.
debug

Toggles socket level debugging (useful only to the super-user).
The initial value for this toggle is FALSE.

options Toggles the display of some internal telnet protocol processing
(having to do with TELNET options). The initial value for this
toggle is FALSE.
netdata Toggles the display of all network data (in hexadecimal format). The initial value for this toggle is FALSE.

?

Displays the legal toggle commands.

BUGS

There is no adequate way for dealing with flow control.
On some remote systems, echo has to be turned off manually when in "line by line"
mode.
There is enough settable state to justify a .telnetrc file.
No capability for a .telnetrc file is provided.
In "line by line" mode, the terminal's eof character is only recognized (and sent to the
remote system) when it is the first character on a line.
SEE ALSO
init(3N), hosts(4), stty(l)

Commands

1-60:

TEST(l)

SysV

TEST(l)

NAME

test - condition evaluation command
SYNOPSIS

test expr
[ expr ]
DESCRIPTION
test -evaluates the expression expr and, if its value is true, sets a zero (true) exit status;
otherwise, a non-zero (false) exit status is set; test also sets a non-zero exit status if
there are no arguments. When permissions are tested, the effective user ID of the process is used.
All operators, flags, and brackets (brackets used as shown in the second SYNOPSIS line)
must be separate arguments to the test command; normally these items are separated by
spaces.
The following primitives are used to construct expr:
-r file

1-606

True iffile exists and is readable.

-wfile

True iffile exists and is writable.

-x file

True if file exists and is executable.

-ffile

True if file exists and is a regular file.

-dfile

True iffile exists and is a directory.

-cfile

True if file exists and is a character special file.

-bfile

True if file exists and is a block special file.

-pfile

True iffile exists and is a named pipe (fifo).

-ufile

True iffile exists and its set-user-ID bit is set.

-gfile

True iffile exists and its set-group-ID bit is set.

-kfile

True if file exists and its sticky bit is set.

-sfile

True iffile exists and has a size greater than zero.

-t [fildes]

True if the open file whose file descriptor number is fildes (1 by default)
is associated with a terminal device.

-zsl

True if the length of string s1 is zero.

-ns1

True if the length of the string s1 is non-zero.

-L,-S

True if file exists and is a soft link.

s1 =s2

True if strings s1 and s2 are identical.

s1 != s2

True if strings s1 and s2 are not identical.

s1

True if s1 is not the null string.

Commands

SysV

TEST(l)

nl -eq n2

TEST(l)

True if the integers nl and n2 are algebraically equal. Any of the comparisons -ne, -gt, -ge, -It, and -Ie may be used in place of -eq.

These primaries may be combined with the following operators:
Unary negation operator.

-a

Binary and operator.

-0

Binary or operator (-a has higher precedence than -0).

( expr )

Parentheses for grouping. Notice also that parentheses are meaningful to
the shell and, therefore, must be quoted.

WARNING

If you test a file you own (the -r, -w, or -x tests), but the permission tested does not
have the owner bit set, a non-zero (false) exit status will be returned even though the
file may have the group or other bit set for that permission. The correct exit status will
be set if you are super-user.

The = and != operators have a higher precedence than the -r through -n operators, and
= and != always expect arguments; therefore, = and != cannot be used with the -r
through -0 operators.
If more than one argument follows the -r through -0 operators, only the first argument
is examined; the others are ignored, unless a -a or a -0 is the second argument.
SEE ALSO

find( l), sh( 1).

Commands

1-607

SysV

TFTP(lC)

TFfP(lC)

NAME
tftp - trivial file transfer protocol
SYNOPSIS
trtp [ -glg!lplrlw] loealname host foreignname [mode]
DESCRIPTION
trtp is the front-end to the Trivial File Transfer Protocol. It enables you to copy files
among internet hosts without remote user-level access. A minus sign (-) may be substituted for loealname in which case the standard input (or output) will be used.
tftp requires a switch to dictate the direction of the file transfer. The recognized
switches are:
put (-p, -w)

Write the local file (loealname) onto the foreign host's file system as
foreignname. Note that foreignname must be quoted if it contains
shell special characters. (The word put, the switch -p, and the switch
-w are all synonymous).

get (-g. -r)

Read the foreign host's file iforeignname) into the local file, loealname. If loealname already exists, trtp will fail with an appropriate
error message.

get! (-g!)

Perform a tftp get, overwriting the local file (if it exists). Note that
the exclamation point following the command indicates that the command will modify a data structure (in this case, it will overwrite an
existing file; the syntax is derived from the Yale!f and MIT/Scheme
naming conventions). Within a UNIX shell, the exclamation point
must be escaped (usually with a backslash) to avoid shell interpretation.

TRANSFER MODES
Mode may be netascii. or image. netascii, the default mode, transfers the file as stan-

dard ascii characters. Image mode transfers the file in binary, with no character conversion.
NOTES
The Domain/OS SysV versions of tftp and tftpd(IM) are adaptations of the MIT Project Athena implementations of the tftp protocol. Domain/OS SysV trtp will interface
with any RFC783 compliant implementation. Note, however, that the 4.3BSD distribution version of tftp does not meet these restrictions.

1-608

Commands

SysV

TFTP(lC)

TFrP(1C)

WARNINGS

tftp and tftpd(lM) comprise an implementation of the Trivial File Transfer Protocol
described in RFC783. They allow you to quickly copy files among hosts on an internet
without regard to ownership or access restrictions. Therefore, the desired security of a
system should be considered before allowing tftp transactions. In an inspired attempt
to prevent accidental destruction of important files, tftp requires that remote file names
be absolute patbnames (that is, beginning with /) containing the string" /tftp/", but not
containing the string" I.J".
EXAMPLES

Each of the following examples presumes that there is a host on the internet called carra ra, running a tft p server.
To copy the local file /tftp/foo to carrara, and deposit it in carrara's /tftp directory
under the name bar:
tftp -p /tftp/foo carrara /tftp/bar
To copy the remote file (on carrara) named /tftp/bar to the local file named Itftp/new:
tftp get /tftp/new carrara /tftp/bar
To coy the remote binary file (on carrara) named /tftp/zed to the local file named
Itftp/new, overwriting the old copy of Itftp/new:
tftp -g\! /tftp/new carrara Itftp/zed image
SEE ALSO

tftpd(lM)
Configuring and Managing TCPI/P.

Commands

1-609

SysV

TIME(l)

TIME(l)

NAME

time - time a command
SYNOPSIS

time command
DESCRIPTION

Once a command has executed, time prints the elapsed time during the command, the
time spent in the system, and the time spent in execution of the command. Times are
reported in seconds.
The times are printed on standard error.
SEE ALSO

times(2) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

1-610

Commands

SysV

TIMEX(l)

TIMEX(l)

NAME

timex - time a command; report process data and system activity
SYNOPSIS

timex [options] command
DESCRIPTION

The given command is executed; the elapsed time, user time and system time spent in
execution are reported in seconds. Optionally, process accounting data for the command and all its children can be listed or summarized, and total system activity during
the execution interval can be reported. The output of timex is written on standard error.
OPTIONS

-p

List process accounting records for command and all its children. Suboptions
h, k, m, r, and t modify the data items reported. The options are as follows:

r,

-f

Print the fork/exec flag and system exit status columns in the
output.

-h

Instead of mean memory size, show the fraction of total
available CPU time consumed by the process during its execution. This "hog factor" is computed as:
(total CPU time)/(elapsed time).

-k

Instead of memory size, show total kcore-minutes.

-m

Show mean core size (the default).

-r

Show CPU factor (user time/(system-time + user-time).

-t

Show separate system and user CPU times. The number of
blocks read or written and the number of characters
transferred are always reported.

-0

Report the total number of blocks read or written and total characters transferred
by command and all its children.

-s

Report total system activity (not just that due to command) that occurred during
the execution interval of command. All the data items listed in sar(l) are
reported.

WARNING

Process records associated with command are selected from the accounting file
/usr/admlpacct by inference, since process genealogy is not available. Background
processes having the same user-id, terrninal-id, and execution time window will be
spuriously included.

Commands

1-611

SysV

TIMEX(l)

TIMEX(l)

EXAMPLES

A simple example:

timex -ops sleep 60
A terminal session of arbitrary complexity can be measured by timing a sub-shell:

timex -opskmt sh

session commands
EOT
SEE ALSO

sar(l),

1-612

Commands

TOUCH(t)

SysV

TOUCH(t)

NAME

touch - update access and modification times of a file
SYNOPSIS

touch [ -amc ] [ mmddhhmm[yy] ] files
DESCRIPTION

touch causes the access and modification times of each argument to be updated. The
file name is created if it does not exist. If no time is specified (see date(1» the current
time is used. The -a and -m options cause touch to update only the access or
modification times respectively (default is -am). The -e option silently prevents touch
from creating the file if it did not previously exist.
The return code from touch is the number of files for which the times could not be successfully modified (including files that did not exist and were not created).
SEE ALSO

date(l).
utime(2) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

Commands

1-613

TfLOT(lG)

SysV

TPLOT(lG)

NAME

tplot - graphics filters

SYNOPSIS
tplot [ - Tterminal [ -e raster ] ]
DESCRIPTION
These commands read plotting instructions (see plot(4» from the standard input and in
general produce, on the standard output, plotting instructions suitable for a particular
terminal. If no terminal is specified, the environment parameter $TERM (see
environ(5» is used. Known terminals are:
300
300s
450
4014
ver

DASI 300.
DASI 300s.
DASI450.
Tektronix 4014.
Versatec D12ooA. This version of plot(4) places a scan-converted image in
lusr/tmp/raster$$ and sends the result directly to the plotter device, rather
than to the standard output. The -e option causes a previously scan-converted
file raster to be sent to the plotter.

FILES

lusrllib/t300
lusr/lib/t300s
lusr/lib/t450
lusr/lib/t4014
lusr/lib/vplot
lusr/tmp/raster$$
SEE ALSO
plot(3X), plot(4), tenn(5) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

1-614

Commands

Domain/OS SysV

TPM(l)

TPM(l)

NAME

tpm - set/display touchpad and mouse characteristics

SYNOPSIS
tpm [options]
DESCRIPTION
tpm allows you to define characteristics for the touchpad and mouse. The touchpad
operates in one of three modes: absolute, relative, and absolute/relative. The mode of
operation establishes how movements of your finger on the touchpad affect the position
of the cursor on the screen. The three modes differ primarily in how the cursor moves
when you lift your finger from the touchpad and then replace it. The mouse operates in
relative mode only, and -5 is the only valid option.
The subsections below describe the three operational modes, as well as the other
options.
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, tpm displays the current touchpad characteristics.

-a (default)

sSelect absolute mode.

-r

Selects relative mode.

-ar

Selects absolute/relative mode.

-rerange

Sets prescaling factors for touchpad data.

-s x y

Sets scaling factors for x and y. Values can range from -32768 to
32767. The default scaling factors are 799 for x and 1023 for y (portrait
displays); and 1023 for x and 799 for y (landscape displays).

xy

Sets x and y as the origin for absolute mode. Values must be in raster
units, and can range from 0 to 1023. The default origin is 0,0.

--0

-h n

Sets the hysteresis box size. The value must be in raster units, and can
range from 0 to 1023. The default is 5.

DESCRIPTION
Absolute Mode
In absolute mode, using the default scale and origin, the touchpad approximates the
screen, so that the top left edge of the touchpad represents cursor positions at the top
left edge of the screen. Absolute mode is the default setting. When you place your
finger on the touchpad, the cursor jumps to a corresponding position on the screen.
Moving your finger across the touchpad moves the cursor across the screen in the same
direction.
For example, moving your finger from the top of the touchpad to the bottom moves the
cursor from top to bottom on the screen. If you lift your finger from the touchpad, and
later touch the pad again, the cursor jumps to a new position on the screen corresponding to the new finger position.
Commands

1-615

TPM(l)

Domain/OS SysV

TPM(l)

Relative Mode
In relative mode, cursor movements correspond only to finger movements across the
touchpad. The cursor does not move when you first place your finger on the touchpad.
This differs from absolute mode, where the cursor jumps to a new position when you
lift your finger and then replace it. In effect, relative mode causes the touchpad to
correspond to different areas of the screen, relative to the current cursor position.
This is the only meaningful mode for a mouse: all movement begins from the current
cursor position.
Relative mode is typically used with scale factors less than the defaults. Smaller scale
factors mean that the touchpad maps to a smaller area of the screen. For example, scale
factors of 200 by 256 specify one-sixteenth of a portrait display's screen area. With
small scale factors, relative mode allows fine resolution of the cursor position within a
small area.
To reach distant areas on the screen, you can use several strokes on the touchpad or
mouse, each stroke moving the cursor closer to its final destination. To assist you in
making large movements in relative mode without having to use too many strokes, the
speed of cursor movement is artificially accelerated in relation to the speed of finger or
mouse movement. Thus, a quick motion moves the cursor farther than a slow, deliberate motion which covers the same distance.
AbsolutelRelative Mode
Absolute/relative mode is a combination of absolute and relative modes. It has no
meaning for the mouse. In this mode, the first position of your finger on the touchpad
establishes the first position of the cursor, as in absolute mode. Moving your finger
across the touchpad moves the cursor across the screen. As in relative mode, the scale
is typically smaller than the whole screen.
Unlike absolute and relative modes, however, the effect of lifting your finger from the
touchpad depends on how long you break contact. If you lift and replace your finger
quickly -- within a half second - the cursor does not move, and the effect is the same
as relative mode. If you break contact for more than a half second, however, the cursor
jumps to a new absolute position when you put your finger on the touchpad again.
Absolute/relative mode is useful for jumping the cursor from one place to another, then
carefully positioning it in the new area. For example, this mode is commonly used to
move the cursor in a jump from one window to another, and then point to a character in
the second window.

1-616

Commands

Domain/OS SysV

TPM(l)

TPM(l)

Prescaling the Touchpad
Raw touchpad data varies slightly from one touchpad to another. Prescaling is, in
essence, calibration of the touchpad. Every time you start the node, the touchpad
manager prescales the data to determine an exact range for the device.
To prescale, the touchpad manager observes the first thousand points of touchpad data
(about 30 seconds of use). During this time, you should try to touch all four edges of
the touchpad to ensure that the observed data constitutes an accurate sample. Based on
the observed data, the touchpad manager computes a pre scaling factor which, when
applied to the data, brings all points into the range from -.05 to 1.05. This range
corresponds to the edges of the screen, plus an overlap of 5%, when multiplied by the
default scaling factors. Because of the overlap, you need not touch the internal frame
(under the conductive material) to move the cursor to the edge of the screen.
The -rerange option invokes prescaling. This option is useful if the first 30 seconds of
use did not include the entire range of the touchpad. It is also handy if you change keyboards on a node, and therefore need to reset the prescaling factors without restarting
the node.
Scale Factors
The touchpad manager translates, or scales, the data into raster units, which the Display
Manager understands. Scale factors, specified with the -s option, are applied to the
pre scaled touchpad data to translate it to raster units for the Display Manager.
The scale factors are multiplied by the prescaled data. The default scale factors are 800
for x and 1024 for y (portrait displays); and 1024 for x and 800 for y (landscape
displays). Applying these factors to prescaled data results in numbers from approximately 0 to 799 (for x) and 0 to 1023 (for y) for portrait displays, and vice versa for
landscape displays. (Note that the pre scaled data allows a 5% overlap, as mentioned in
the preceding subsection.)
The default scale factors provide for touchpad data corresponding to the whole screen.
Smaller scale factors reduce the area to which the touchpad maps, thereby allowing you
to more finely tune the cursor position. This also applies to mouse movement, allowing
changes in the apparent motion sensitivity of the device.
Setting the Origin
The origin is the point denoted by the upper left comer of the touchpad, in absolute and
absolute/relative mode. In relative mode, the origin has no meaning. By default, the
touchpad origin corresponds to the upper left corner of the screen, that is, the point 0,0
in raster units. By changing the origin, you can use the touchpad (in absolute mode) to
correspond to a portion of the screen.
This feature is useful for applications that need to move the cursor within a fixed window, rather than across the whole screen. For example, a program that displays a menu
Commands

1-617

Domain/OS SysV

TPM(l)

TPM(l)

in one window might set the origin to the upper left comer of the menu window. Consequently, the touchpad maps onto the menu window instead of the entire screen.
Hysteresis
The hysteresis value defines the dimensions of a box around your finger position on the
touchpad or the current position of the mouse. Movement within the box does not
change the position of the cursor on the screen.
Specify the hysteresis value in raster units. The touchpad manager compares the value
to the difference between the current and previous finger positions on the touchpad or
the current and previous positions of the mouse. If the difference is less than the hysteresis value, the cursor does not move. If the difference is greater than the hysteresis
value, the hysteresis value is subtracted from the difference and the cursor moves the
resulting distance. The default hysteresis value is five.
EXAMPLES

Display current characteristics.
$ tpm
Mode: absolute
Xscale: 1024, Yscale: 800
Hysteresis: 5
Origin: 0, 0

Set characteristics to absolute/relative mode with half the default scaling sensitivity
(portrait display).
$ tpm -ar -s 400 512

1-618

Commands

SysV

TPUT(l)

TPUT(l)

NAME
tput - initialize a tenninal or query tenninfo database
SYNOPSIS

tput [-TtypeJ capname [parms ... J
tput [-TtypeJ init
tput [-TtypeJ reset
tput [-TtypeJ longname
DESCRIPTION

tput uses the terminfo(4) database to make the values of tenninal-dependent capabilities and infonnation available to the shell (see she I», to initialize or reset the tenninal,
or return the long name of the requested tenninal type. tput outputs a string if the attribute (capability name) is of type string, or an integer if the attribute is of type integer.
If the attribute is of type boolean, tput simply sets the exit code (0 for TRUE if the terminal has the capability, 1 for FALSE if it does not), and produces no output. Before
using a value returned on standard output, the user should test the exit code ($?, see
sh(l» to be sure it is O. (See EXIT CODES and DIAGNOSTICS below.) For a complete list of capabilities and the capname associated with each, see terminfo(4). This
has no effect on Apollo transcript pads. It is useful on connected tenninals and VT100
windows.
OPTIONS

-Ttype

indicates the type of tenninal. Nonnally this option is unnecessary;
because the default is taken from the environment variable TERM. If - T
is specified, then the shell variables LINES and COLUMNS and the layer
size will not be referenced.

capname

indicates the attribute from the terminfo( 4) database.

parms

If the attribute is a string that takes parameters, the arguments parms will
be instantiated into the string. An all numeric argument will be passed to
the attribute as a number.

init

If the terminfo(4) database is present and an entry for the user's tenninal
exists (see - Ttype, above), the following will occur: (1) if present, the
tenninal's initialization strings will be output (isl, is2, is3, if, iprog), (2)
any delays (e.g., newline) specified in the entry will be set in the tty
driver, (3) tabs expansion will be turned on or off according to the
specification in the entry, and (4) if tabs are not expanded, standard tabs
will be set (every 8 spaces). If an entry does not contain the infonnation
needed for any of the four above activities, that activity will silently be
skipped.

reset

Instead of putting out initialization strings, the tenninal's reset strings will
be output if present (rs1, rs2, rs3, rf). If the reset strings are not present,
but initialization strings are, the initialization strings will be output.

Commands

1-619

SysV

TPUT(l)

TPUT(l)

Otherwise, reset acts identically to init.
longname

If the terminfo(4} database is present and an entry for the user's terminal

exists (see -Ttype above), then the long name of the terminal will be put
out. The long name is the last name in the first line of the terminal's
description in the terminfo(4} database (see term(5».
EXAMPLES

tput init

Initialize the terminal according to the type of terminal in the
environmental variable TERM. This command should be
included in everyone's .pro6Ie after the environmental variable
TERM has been exported, as illustrated on the profile(4} manual
page.

tput -T5620 reset

Reset an AT&T 5620 terminal, overriding the type of terminal in
the environmental variable TERM.

tput cup 0 0

Send the sequence to move the cursor to row 0, column 0 (the
upper left comer of the screen, usually known as the "home" cursor position).

tput clear

Echo the clear-screen sequence for the current terminal.

tput cols

Print the number of columns for the current terminal.

tput -T 450 cols

Print the number of columns for the 450 terminal.

bold='tput srnso'
offbold='tput rmso' Set the shell variables bold, to begin stand-out mode sequence,
and offbold, to end standout mode sequence, for the current terminal. This might be followed by a prompt:
echo "${bold}Please type in your name: ${offbold}\c"
tput hc

Set exit code to indicate if the current terminal is a hardcopy terminal.

tput cup 23 4

Send the sequence to move the cursor to row 23, column 4.

tput longname

Print the long name from the terminfo(4} database for the type of
terminal specified in the environmental variable TERM.

EXIT CODES
If capname is of type boolean, a value of 0 is set for TRUE and 1 for FALSE. If capname is of type string, a value of 0 is set if the capname is defined for this terminal type
(the value of capname is returned on standard output); a value of 1 is set if capname is

not defined for this terminal type (a null value is returned on standard output).
If capname is of type integer, a value of 0 is always set, whether or not capname is
defined for this terminal type. To determine if capname is defined for this terminal

type, the user must test the value of standard output. A value of -1 means that capname is not defined for this terminal type. Any other exit code indicates an error, see
1-620

Commands

SysV

TPUT(l)

TPUT(l)

BR DIAGNOSTICS,
FILES

lusr/li b/terminfol? I*
lusr/include/curses.h
lusr/include/term.h
lusr/lib/tabset/*

Compiled tenninal description database
curses(3X) header file
terminfo(4) header file
Tab settings for some terminals, in a fonnat appropriate
to be output to the terminal (escape sequences that set
margins and tabs); for more infonnation, see terminfo(4).

DIAGNOSTICS

tput prints the following error messages and sets the corresponding exit codes.
Exit Code
Error Message

o

-1 (capname is a numeric variable that is not specified in the
terminfo(4) database for this tenninal type, e.g.,

tput - T450 lines and tput - T2621 xmc)
I
2
3
4

no error message is printed, see EXIT CODES, above.
usage error
unknown terminal type or no terminfo( 4) database
unknown terminfo(4) capability capname

SEE ALSO

stty (l), tabs (1).
profile( 4), tenninfo(4) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

Commands

1-621

SysV

TR(l)

TR(l)

NAME

tr - translate characters
SYNOPSIS

tr [ -cds ] [ string1 [ string2] ]
DESCRIPTION

tr copies the standard input to the standard output with substitution or deletion of
selected characters. Input characters found in string] are mapped into the corresponding characters of string2. Any combination of the options -cds may be used.
The following abbreviation conventions may be used to introduce ranges of characters
or repeated characters into the strings:
[a-z]

Stands for the string of characters whose ASCII codes run from character a to
character z, inclusive.

[a*n]

Stands for n repetitions of a. IT the first digit of n is 0, n is considered octal;
otherwise, n is taken to be decimal. A zero or missing n is taken to be huge;
this facility is useful for padding string2.

The escape character \ may be used as in the shell to remove special meaning from any
character in a string. In addition, \ followed by 1, 2, or 3 octal digits stands for the character whose ASCII code is given by those digits.
OPTIONS

-c

Complements the set of characters in string] with respect to the universe of
characters whose ASCII codes are 001 through 377 octal.

-d

Deletes all input characters in string] .

-s

Squeezes all strings of repeated output characters that are in string2 to single
characters.

EXAMPLE

The following example creates a list of all the words in file1 one perline in file2, where
a word is taken to be a maximal string of alphabetics. The strings are quoted to protect
the special characters from interpretation by the shell; 012 is the ASCII code for newline.

tr -cs "[A-Z][a-zJ" "[\012*]" <.file1 >file2
BUGS
Will not handle ASCII NUL in string] or string2; always deletes NUL from input.
SEE ALSO
ed(1), sh(I).

ascii(5) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

1-622

Commands

Domain/OS SysV

NAME
tr font - transliterate characters within a font
SYNOPSIS

trJont font_name hex_conversion_table
DESCRIPTION

The trJODt command allows you to change the order in which characters appear in
fonts. It rearranges the graphic images associated with the characters in font_name,
according to infonnation in the hex_conversion_table. Use it if you create a new font
file from two font files that have different character orders.
trJODt only worlc:s on fonts already fonnatted for SRIO. It works directly on the font,
without creating a backup. The format for the hex30nversion_table file is:
src ordinal dest ordinal comment
src ordinal dest ordinal comment
src_ordinal dest_ordinal comment

where src_ordinal is the hexidecimal ordinal value of the character whose graphic
image is to be used as the source, dest_ordinal is the ordinal value of the character
which gets the transliterated image, and comment is an optional remark (for the ASCII
character set, the hexidecmal ordinal value 41 represents the character 'A'). If the font
was created by concatenating two fonts with cvtJont, then the hexidecimal ordinal
value of the lowest possible character in the second font is 80.
EXAMPLE

The following example rearranges the characters in the SRI0 fonnat font file named
courier according to the infonnation in the hex_conversionJable theirs_to_ours.

This is a sample of a hex_conversion_table file.
Al
A2
A3
AS
A7
AS

!down
cent
sterling
yen
section
currency
AB AB guillemot left
86 86 paragraph

Commands

Al
A2
A3
AS
A7
A4

1-623

TR]ONT(l)

Domain/OS SysV

B7 B7 bullet
B8 B8 quitesinglebase
BB BB guill

SEE ALSO
cvtjont(l)

1-624

Commands

SysV

TRCONF(l)

TRCONF(l)

NAME
trconf - list active Streams or configure STREAMS trace modules
SYNOPSIS

trconf [-I] [-i streamid moduleno name]
[-r streamid moduleno]
[-c name mtype dir onoff timestamp verbiage]
[-a name trmon]
[-p name pattern]
DESCRIPTION

trconf is the trace module (tracem(7» configuration utility. It allows you to list
currently active Streams in the system, to insert trace module instances into any Stream,
remove trace module instances from any Stream, set parameters of any trace module
instance, associate a tracing instance of the trace module with a reporting instance
(created by a trmon invocation), or set a pattern for the pattern matching function of a
trace module instance.
The push functionality has been extended for the trace module to allow insertion into
Streams at any point below the Stream head and above the Stream tail (driver). The
exception is a lower multiplexed Stream, where insertion is only allowed below the
linked module and above the Stream tail. To overcome this limitation, push the nulm
module onto the lower Stream, prior to linking the Stream under the multiplexor. The
desired tracing configuration can then be achieved by inserting tracem under the nulm
module.
OPTIONS
-I

Lists queues in each active Stream.

-i streamid moduleno name
Insert a trace module instance into a Stream above a module. streamid is
a Stream index as returned by the -I option. moduleno is the index of
the module within the Stream. name is a string with the name for this
trace module instance.
-r streamid moduleno

Remove a trace module instance from a Stream. streamid is a Stream
index as returned by the -I option. moduleno is the index of the trace
module instance within the Stream.
-c name mtype dir onoff timestamp verbiage

Configure the attributes of a trace module instance. name is a string with
the name for this trace module instance. mtype is a vertical bar (I)
separated list of message types. (The vertical bar must be quoted to
prevent the shell from interpreting it as a pipe.) dir is a I separated list of
up or down. onoff is either on or off. timestamp is either accurate, inaccurate or off. verbiage is an integer from 0 to 7 (ignored).

Commands

1-625

SysV

TRCONF(l)

TRCONF(l)

-a name trmon
Associate a trace module instance with the trmon instance that is to output the messages being traced. name is a string with the name for this
trace module instance. trmon is a string with a name for the trmon
instance.
-p name pattern
Set a pattern for the pattern matching function of a trace module
instance. name is a string with the name for this trace module instance.
pattern is a string containing O's, l's and x's (x matches 0 or 1).
EXAMPLES

List the active Streams.

$ treonf-I
Stream index: 0
Queue 0: strwhead
Queue 1: LOG
Insert a traeem instance named traceml on top of the LOG module above.

$ treonf -i 0 1 traeeml
Set up parameters of this instance.

$ treonf -c traeeml m_data 'I'm_proto up on accurate 7
Enable pattern matching.

$ treonf -p traeemllOlOxxxx
Assign the trmon instance trmonl to the tracem instance traceml. This assumes the
trmon utility has already been used to create the trmon instance called trmonl. All
selected messages passing through traceml will be reported by trmonl .

$ treonf -a traeeml trmon 1
When done tracing, remove the traeem instance.

$ treonf -r 0 1
SEE ALSO
trmon(l), strinfo(l)

1-626

Commands

TRMON(l)

SysY

TRMON(l)

NAME

trmon - print messages collected by trace modules on active Streams
SYNOPSIS
trmon [-hI [-n name] [-f formatJlle ]
DESCRIPTION
trmon prints STREAMS messages collected by instances of tracem modules pushed
onto Streams with trconf. For each reported message, a header containing reporting
instance id, sequence id, message type, timing information, and message direction is
printed. The header is followed (if -f is used) by the contents of the data part of the
message.
OPTIONS

-h
-nname

Suppress printing of header output.
Give this trmon instance a name. name is an alpha-numeric string.
If no name is given, the trmon instance will have the name trmonn,

where n is its internal id.
-f format.file

Use formatJlle to specify the format to print the data part of the
reported messages. This file is in "modified C struct syntax." Customized output formats for any type of message can be formed by
taking structure definitions from the header file of a protocol and
making some minor modifications. The format file consists of a
number of lines for each data field to be recognized as follows:
string type [jieldname] [comment]

where:

Commands

string

is a string delimited by double-quotes ("") and
containing a printf format string, or a null string
("") meaning don't print this field.

type

is a C basic type, or dump, which produces a hexadecimal dump of the rest of the message (like
od(l) -h), or raw, which outputs the raw bytes.

fieldname

is a C field identifier and is optional and ignored.

comment

is a C comment and is optional and ignored.

1-627

SysV

TRMON(l)

TRMON(1)

EXAMPLES

The invocation:
trmon -f dump_file
where dump..file is:
dump a; /* to dump the entire message */
will cause trmon to choose its own name, and dump all messages it receives from all
tracem instances.
The invocation:
trmon -h -n trace ioctl -f ioc file

-

-

where ioc file is:
"cmd: %d,"
n uid: %u,"
"gid: %u,"
"id: %u/'
"count: %u,"
It error: %d,"

" rval: %d\n"

int
unsigned short
unsigned short
unsigned int
unsigned int
int
int
dump

ioc_cmd;
ioc_uid;
ioc~id;

ioc_id;
ioc_count;
ioc_error;
ioc_rval;
a;

/* ioctl command */
/* effective uid */
/* effective gid */
/* ioctl id */
/* # bytes of data */
/* error code */
/* return value */
/* dunip data */

will cause trmon to name itself trace ioctl and to format all messages it receives,
without header information. In this case, it is assumed that trconf will be used to
configure a tracem instance that reports only on M_IOClL messages, and to associate
that tracing instance with this trmon instance.
SEE ALSO

trconf( 1), tracem(7), strinfo( 1)

1-628

Commands

SysV

TRUE(l)

TRUE(l)

NAME
true, false - provide truth values
SYNOPSIS

true
false
DESCRIPTION

true does nothing, successfully. false does nothing, unsuccessfully. They are typically
used in input to sh(1) such as:
while true
do

command

done
DIAGNOSTICS

true has exit status zero; false has exit status nonzero.
SEE ALSO

sh(l).

Commands

1-629

TS(l)

Domain/OS SysV

TS(l)

NAME

ts - display the module name and time stamp
SYNOPSIS

ts [-nhd] object_module_name
DESCRIPTION

ts displays the time stamp and module name stored in an object module. Shown is the
time and date that the module was created by one of the linkers or compilers. The time
stamp is not affected by copying an object module, so it is a reliable indicator of
whether particular object modules are copies of one another.
OPTIONS

-nhd

1-630

Option does not print the table header. ts outputs in tabular format with
table header by default.

Commands

TSORT(1)

SysV

TSORT(l)

NAME

tsort - topological sort
SYNOPSIS

Isort [file]
DESCRIPTION

The tsort command produces on the standard output a totally ordered list of items consistent with a partial ordering of items mentioned in the input file. If no file is specified,
the standard input is understood.
The input consists of pairs of items (nonempty strings) separated by blanks. Pairs of
different items indicate ordering. Pairs of identical items indicate presence, but not ordering.
DIAGNOSTICS

Odd data: there is an odd number of fields in the input file.
SEE ALSO

lorder(l).

Commands

1-631

SysV

TIY(l)

TIY(l)

NAME
tty - get the name of the terminal
SYNOPSIS

tty [ -s ]
DESCRIPTION

Tty prints the pathname of your terminal.
OPTIONS

-s

Inhibit printing of the terminal pathname, allowing testing of the exit
code only.

-I

Not supported.

EXIT CODES
2

o
1
DIAGNOSTICS
not a tty

1-632

if invalid options were specified
if standard input is a terminal
otherwise
Standard input is not a terminal and -s is not specified.

Commands

Domain/OS SysV

TZ(l)

TZ(l)

NAME
tz - set or display system time zone
SYNOPSIS
tz [tz_name I ute_delta [new_tzll
DESCRIPTION
tz sets the system time zone to a known time zone or to an offset from Coordinate
Universal Time (ute). If no arguments are specified, tz displays the current setting.
tz_name (optional)

Specify new time zone. The following are valid names:
Name

Time Zone

EDT
Eastern Daylight Time
EST
Eastern Standard Time
Central Daylight Time
CDT
CST
Central Standard Time
MDT
Mountain Daylight Time
MST
Mountain Standard Time
PDT
Pacific Daylight Time
PST
Pacific Standard Time
GMT
Greenwich Mean Time
UTC
Coordinated Universal Time
TILDE ESCAPES.if 0=0 .nr e. 54565-0-14
Default if omitted: use ute_delta argument
ute_delta (optional)

Specify positive or negative offset from ute. The plus sign is
optional for positive offsets. Format for offset is hh:mm (for
example, -10:00 for ten hours earlier than, west of, Coordinated
Universal Time). Only whole or half hour offsets may be
specified. Other fractional offsets produce an error message.

new_tz (optional)

Specify new time zone name to be assigned to the zone indicated
by the ute_delta argument. Use this argument to create time
zones that are not included in the list above.

Default if omitted: use tz_name argument

Default if omitted: no name assigned

Commands

1-633

TZ(I)

Domain/OS SysV

TZ(I)

EXAMPLES

Display current time zone.
$tz

Timezone:
EST
Delta from UTe: -5:00

Set time zone to Pacific Daylight Time.
$ tz pdt

Create (and set) a time zone named GST that is four and a half hours later than (east of)
Coordinated Universal Time.
$ tz 4:30 gst

1-634

Commands

Domain/OS SysV

NAME

uk to iso - convert files to ISO fonnat
SYNOPSIS

uk_to_iso

inputJlle outputJlle

DESCRIPTION

These utilities convert files written with the overloaded 7-bit national fonts to the Internation Standards Organization (ISO) 8-bit fonnat. The overloaded fonts include any
with a specific language suffix (for example, tix13.french, or din _tixll.german). If
you created and/or edited a file using one of the national fonts, that file is a candidate
for conversion.
You are not required to convert files, but probably will want to because
1.

The overloaded fonts replace certain ASCII characters with national ones, have that
subset of ASCII characters and the national characters in one file. The 8-bit fonts
available as of SRlO include all the ASCII characters and the national characters.

2.

The 8-bit fonts also include a wider range of national characters, so you can enter
any character in any western European language. This was not always possible
with the overloaded fonts. For example, there was not enough space in the overloaded font to include all the French characters, but they all exist in the 8-bit fonts.

There are two parameters to the conversion utilities. You must provide the name of the
file you want to convert (inputJlle) and your outputJlle. If outputJlle already exists,
the utilities abort.
The default location for the utilities is /usr/apollo/bin.
FILES

/usr/apollo/bin/french_to_iso

Converts overloaded French to ISO fonnat

/usr/apollo/bin/german_to_iso

Converts overloaded Gennan to ISO fonnat

/usr/apollo/bin/nor.dan_to_iso

Converts overloaded Norwegian/Danish to ISO for·
mat

/usr/apollo/bin/swedish_to_iso

Converts overloaded Swedish/Finnish to ISO for·
mat

/usr/apollo/bin/swiss_to_iso

Converts overloaded Swiss to ISO fonnat

/usr/apollo/bin/uk_to_iso

Converts overloaded U.K. English to ISO fonnat

DIAGNOSTICS

All messages are generally self-explanatory.

Commands

1-63.

SysV

UMASK(l)

UMASK(l)

NAME

umask - set file-creation mode mask:
SYNOPSIS

umask

[000]

DESCRIPTION

The user file-creation mode mask: is set to 000. The three octal digits refer to
read/write/execute permissions for owner, group, and others, respectively (see
chmod(2) and umask(2». The value of each specified digit is subtracted from the
corresponding "digit" specified by the system for the creation of a file (see creat(2».
For example, umask 022 removes group and others write permission (files normally
created with mode 777 become mode 755; files created with mode 666 become mode
644).
If 000 is omitted, the current value of the mask: is printed.

umask is recognized and executed by the shell.
umask can be included in your .profile (see profile(4» and invoked at login to
automatically set your permissions on files or directories created.
SEE ALSO

ciunod(I), sh(I).
ciunod(2), creat(2), umask:(2), proiile(4) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

1--636

Commands

SysV

UNAME(l)

UNAME(l)

NAME

uname - print name of current UNIX system
SYNOPSIS

uname [ -snrvma ]
uname [ -S system name ]
DESCRlPTION

uname prints the current system name of the UNIX system on the standard output file.
It is mainly useful to detennine which system one is using.
OPTIONS

-s

prints the system name (default).

-n

Prints the nodename (the nodename is the name by which the system is
known to a communications network).

-r

Prints the operating system release.

-v
-m

Prints the operating system version.
Prints the machine hardware name.

-a

Prints all the above information.

SEE ALSO

uname(2) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

Commands

1-63"

SysV

UNGET(l)

UNGET(l)

NAME

unget - undo a previous get of an sees file
SYNOPSIS

unget [-rSID] [-s] [-n] files
DESCRIPTION

unget undoes the effect of a get -e done prior to creating the intended new delta. If a
directory is named, unget behaves as though each file in the directory were specified as
a named file, except that non-SeeS files and unreadable files are silently ignored. If a
name of - is given, the standard input is read with each line being taken as the name of
an sees file to be processed.
OPTIONS
-rSID

-s

Uniquely identifies which delta is no longer intended. (This would have
been specified by get(l) as the "new delta"). The use of this keyletter is
necessary only if two or more outstanding gets for editing on the same
sees file were done by the same person (login name). A diagnostic
results if the specified SID is ambiguous, or if it is necessary and omitted
on the command line.
Suppresses the printout, on the standard output, of the intended delta's
SID.

-n

Causes the retention of the gotten file which would normally be removed
from the current directory.

SEE ALSO

delta(1), get(l), sact(l).

1-638

Commands

SysV

UNIQ(l)

UNIQ(l)

NAME

uniq - report repeated lines in a file
SYNOPSIS

uniq [ -ude [ +n ] [ -n ]

1 [ input

[ output

1]

DESCRIPTION

uniq reads the input file comparing adjacent lines. In the normal case, the second and
succeeding copies of repeated lines are removed; the remainder is written on the output
file. Input and output should always be different. Note that repeated lines must be
adjacent in order to be found; see sort(l). If the -u flag is used, just the lines that are
not repeated in the original file are output. The -d option specifies that one copy of just
the repeated lines is to be written. The normal mode output is the union of the -u and
-d mode outputs.
The -e option supersedes -u and -d and generates an output report in default style but
with each line preceded by a count of the number of times it occurred.
The n arguments specify skipping an initial portion of each line in the comparison:

-n

The first n fields together with any blanks before each are ignored. A field is
defined as a string of non-space, non-tab characters separated by tabs and
spaces from its neighbors.

+n

The first n characters are ignored. Fields are skipped before characters.

SEE ALSO

comm(l), sort(l).

Commands

1-639

SysV

UNITS(l)

UNITS(l)

NAME
units - conversion program
SYNOPSIS

units
DESCRIPTION

units converts quantities expressed in various standard scales to their equivalents in
other scales. It works interactively in this fashion:
You have: inch
You want: em
* 2.540000e+00
/3.937008e-Ol
A quantity is specified as a multiplicative combination of units optionally preceded by a
numeric multiplier. Powers are indicated by suffixed positive integers, division by the
usual sign:
You have: lSlbs force/in2
You want: atm
* 1.02068ge+00
/ 9.79729ge-Ol
units only does multiplicative scale changes; thus it can convert Kelvin to Rankine, but
not Celsius to Fahrenheit. Most familiar units, abbreviations, and metric prefixes are
recognized, together with a generous leavening of exotica and a few constants of nature
including:
pi
Ratio of circumference to diameter,
c
Speed oflight,
Charge on an electron,
e
Acceleration of gravity,
g
force Same as g,
mole Avogadro's number,
water Pressure head per unit height of water,
Astronomical unit.
au
Pound is not recognized as a unit of mass; Ib is. Compound names are run together,
(e.g., light year). British units that differ from their U.S. counterparts are prefixed thus:
brgallon. For a complete list of units, type:
cat lusr/lib/unittab
FILES

lusrlli b/unitta b

1-640

Commands

SysV

UNPACK(l)

UNPACK(1)

NAME

pack, pcat, unpack - compress and expand files
SYNOPSIS
pack [ - ] [ -f ] name ...
pcat name ...
unpack name ...
DESCRIPTION
Pack attempts to store the specified files in a compressed form. Wherever possible and
useful, it replaces each input file name by a packed file name.z with the same access
modes, access and modified dates, and owner as those of name.
If pack is successful, it removes name. Packed files can be restored to their original
form using unpack or pcat.
Pack uses Huffman (minimum redundancy) codes on a byte-by-byte basis.
The amount of compression obtained depends on the size of the input file and the character frequency distribution. Because a decoding tree forms the first part of each .z file,
it is usually not worthwhile to pack files smaller than three blocks, unless the character
frequency distribution is very skewed, which may occur with printer plots or pictures.
Typically, text files are reduced to 60-75 percent oftheir original size. Load modules,
which use a larger character set and have a more uniform distribution of characters,
show little compression, the packed versions being about 90 percent of the original size.
Pack returns a value equaling the number of files not compressed.
No packing occurs if one or more of the following conditions exists:
the file appears to be already packed
the filename has more than 12 characters
the file has links
the file is a directory
the file cannot be opened
no disk storage blocks will be saved by packing
a file called name.z already exists
the .z file cannot be created
an I/O error occurred during processing.
The last segment of the filename must contain no more than 12 characters to allow
space for the appended .z extension. Directories cannot be compressed.
Pcat does for packed files what cat(l) does for ordinary files, except that peat cannot
be used as a filter. The specified files are unpacked and written to the standard output.
To view a packed file named name.z use:
pcat name.z
or just:
pcat name
Commands

1-641

UNPACK(I)

SysV

UNPACK(l)

To make an unpacked copy, say nnn, of a packed file named name.z (without destroying name.z) use the command:
pcat name> nnn
Pcat returns the number of files it was unable to unpack, but will fail if one of the following conditions exist:
the filename (exclusive of the .z) has more than 12 characters
the file cannot be opened
the file does not appear to be the output of pack.
Unpack expands files created by pack. For each file name specified in the command, a
search is made for a file called name.z (or just name, if name ends in .z). If this file
appears to be a packed file, it is replaced by its expanded version. The new file has the
.z suffix stripped from its name. It also has the same access modes, access and
modification dates, and owner as those of the packed file.
Unpack returns a value that is the number of files it was unable to unpack. It will fail
for the same reasons as those listed for peat, as well as for the following additional reasons:
a file with the "unpacked" name already exists
the unpacked file cannot be created.
OPTIONS

(Note that these options are only for use with pack.)
Set an internal flag that causes the number of times each byte is used, its
relative frequency, and the code for the byte to be printed on the standard output. Additional occurrences of - in place of name cause the
internal flag to be set and reset.
-f

Force packing of name. Useful for causing an entire directory to be
packed even if some of the files will not benefit.

NOTES TO SysV USERS

The Apollo version of the pack command creates packed files that have an Apollo file
type of "uasc". The original file type information is not carried over to the packed file.
The unpack command checks the magic number of the unpacked file. If it matches one
of the Apollo object types or archive type, the file type of the unpacked file is changed
from "uasc" to "obj". If the file type of the original file is other than "uasc" or one
of the "obj" types checked for by unpack, the file type must be manually changed
after the file is unpacked.
SEE ALSO

cat(l).

1-642

Commands

SysV

UUCP(lC)

UUCP(lC)

NAME

uucp, uulog, uuname - UNIX-to-UNIX system copy
SYNOPSIS
uucp [ options] source-files destination-file
uulog [ options] -ssystem
uulog [ options ] system
uulog [ options] -fsystem
uuname [ -I ] [ -c ]
DESCRIPTION
uucp copies files named by the source-file arguments to the destination-file argument.
A filename may be a patlmame on a machine, or may have the following fonn:
system name!pathname

where system name is taken from a list of system names that uucp knows about. The
system name may also be a list of names such as:
system name!system name!".!system name!pathname

in which case an attempt is made to send the file via the specified route, to the destination. See NOTES and BUGS below for restrictions. Care should be taken to ensure that
intennediate nodes in the route are willing to forward infonnation.
The question mark (?), asterisk (*), and bracketed ellipsis ([ ... ]) Shell metacharacters
appearing in pathname are expanded on the appropriate system.
Patlmames may be one of the following (anything else is prefixed by the current directory): A full pathname A patlmame preceded by -user where user is a log-in name on
the specified system and is replaced by that user's log-in directory A path name preceded by -Idestination where destination is appended to lusr/spool/uucppublic. This
destination will be treated as a file name unless more than one file is being transferred
by this request or the destination is already a directory. To ensure that it is a directory,
follow the destination with a slash mark (/). For example, -/dan! as the destination will
make the directory lusrlspooIluucppublic/dan if it does not exist and put the requested
file(s) in that directory). <.PP If the result is an erroneous pathname for the remote system, the copy will fail. If the destination-file is a directory, the last part of the sourcefile name is used.
uucp preserves execute pennissions across the transmission and gives 0666 read and
write pennissions. See chmod(2) for more information about permissions. All files
received by uucp will be owned by uucp.
uulog queries a summary log of uucp or uuxqt transactions in the files
lusrlspool/uucp/.Log/uucico/system, or lusrlspool/uucp/.Log/uuxqt/system.
uuname lists the names of systems known to uucp.

Commands

1-64~

UUCP(lC)

SysV

UUCP(lC)

The DOMAIN/OS version ofuucp supports the Vadic Autodialer.

OPTIONS
uucp options
The following options are interpreted by uucp only:
Does not copy the local file to the spool directory for transfer to the
remote machine (default).

-C

Forces the copy of local files to the spool directory for transfer.

-d

Makes all necessary directories for the file copy (default).

-f

Does not make intennediate directories for the file copy.

-ggrade

Grade is a single letter/number; lower ascii sequence characters cause
the job to be transmitted earlier during a particular conversation.

-j

Output the job identification ASCII string on the standard output. This
job identification can be used by uustat to obtain the status or terminate
a job.

-m

Send mail to the requester when the copy is completed. The -m option
only works sending files or receiving a single file. Receiving multiple
files specified by special shell characters ? * [ ... J will not activate the
-m option.

-nuser

Notifies you on the remote system that a file was sent.

-r

Does not start the file transfer. just queuse the job.

-sfile

Reports status of the transfer to file. Notes that the file must be a full path

name.
-xdebug_level
Produces debugging output on standard output. The debug level is a
number between 0 and 9; higher numbers give more detailed infonnation. (Debugging will not be available if uucp was compiled with
-DSMALL.)
uulog options
The following options are used by uulog only; they cause uulog to print logging information:

1-644

-ssys

Prints infonnation about file transfer work involving system sys.

-fsystem

Does a tail -f of the file transfer log for system. (You must hit BREAK
to exit this function.)

Commands

UUCP(lC)

SysV

UUCP(lC)

Other options used in conjunction with the above uulog options:
-x

Looks in the uuxqt log file for the given system.

-number

Indicates that a tail command of number lines should be executed.

uunarne options
The following options are used by uuname only:

-c

Returns the names of systems known to cU(l). This list should be the
same as the list of systems known to uucp, unless your machine is using
different Systems files for cu and uucp. See the Sysfiles file.

-I

Return the local system name.

NOTES
The domain of remotely accessible files may (and for obvious security reasons, usually
should) be severely restricted. You will very likely not be able to fetch files by pathname. Ask a responsible person on the remote system to send them to you. For the
same reasons, you will probably not be able to send files to arbitrary pathnarnes. As
distributed, the remotely accessible files are those whose names begin with
lusrlspool/uucppublic (equivalent to -/).
The forwarding of files through other systems may not be compatible with the previous
version of uucp. If forwarding is used, all systems in the route must have the same version of uucp.

BUGS
Protected files and files in protected directories that are owned by the requestor can be
sent by uucp. However, if the requestor is root, and the directory is not searchable by
"other" or the file is not readable by "other", the request will fail.
FILES
lusrlspool/uucp
Spool directory
lusrlspool/uucppublic Public directory for receiving and sending (PUBDIR)
lusrllib/uucp/*
Other data and program files
SEE ALSO

mail (1), uustat (1C), uux (1C), uuxqt (1M), chrnod (2).

Commands

1-645

SysV

UUDECODE(1C)

UUDECODE(lC)

NAME

uuencode,uudecode - encode/decode a binary file for transmission via mail
SYNOPSIS

uuencode [ source
uudecode [file 1

1 remotedest I mail sysl !sys2! .. !decode

DESCRIPTION

uuencode and uudecode are used to send a binary file via uucp(lC) or other methods
of sending mail. This combination can be used over indirect mail links even when
uusend(lC) is not available.
uuencode takes the named source file (the default is standard input) and produces an
encoded version on the standard output. The encoding uses only printing ASCII characters, and includes the mode of the file and the remotedest for re-creation on the
remote system.
uudecode reads an encoded file, strips off any leading and trailing lines added by
mailers, and recreates the original file with the specified mode and name.
The intent is that all mail to the user decode should be filtered through the uudecode
program. This way the file is created automatically without human intervention. This
is possible on the uucp network by either using sendmail(8) or by making rmail(l) be a
link to /usr/ucb/mail instead of /bin/mail. In each case, an alias must be created in a
master file to get the automatic invocation of uudecode.
If these facilities are not available, the file can be sent to a user on the remote machine
who can uudecode it manually.

The encode file has an ordinary text form and can be edited by any text editor to change
the mode or remote name.
EXAMPLE

The remotedest is the patbname of the file to create on the remote system, for example,
$ uuencode /katelbin/progl/tmplkate.progl.
BUGS

The file is expanded by 35% (three bytes become four plus control information),
increasing the transmission time.
The user on the remote system who is invoking uudecode (often uucp) must have write
permission on the specified file.
SEE ALSO

binmail(l), mail(l), uusend(IC), uucp(lC), uux(lC), uuencode(5);
Managing SysV System Software.

1-646

Commands

SysV

UUENCODE(lC)

UUENCODE(lC)

NAME
uuencode,uudecode - encode/decode a binary file for transmission via mail
SYNOPSIS

uuencod.e [ source] remotedest I mail sysl !sys2! .. !decode
uudecode [file ]
DESCRIPTION

uuencode and uudecode are used to send a binary file via uucp(lC) or other methods
of sending mail. This combination can be used over indirect mail links even when
uusend(lC) is not available.
uuencode takes the named source file (the default is standard input) and produces an
encoded version on the standard output. The encoding uses only printing ASCII characters, and includes the mode of the file and the remotedest for re-creation on the
remote system.
uudecode reads an encoded file, strips off any leading and trailing lines added by
mailers, and recreates the original file with the specified mode and name.
The intent is that all mail to the user decode should be filtered through the uudecode
program. This way the file is created automatically without human intervention. This
is possible on the uucp network by either using sendmail(8) or by making rmail(l) be a
link to lusr/ucb/mail instead of Ibin/mail. In each case, an alias must be created in a
master file to get the automatic invocation of uudecode.
If these facilities are not available, the file can be sent to a user on the remote machine

who can uudecode it manually.
The encode file has an ordinary text form and can be edited by any text editor to change
the mode or remote name.
EXAMPLE

The remotedest is the pathname of the file to create on the remote system, for example,
$ uuencode Ikatelbinlprogl/tmplkate.progl.

BUGS

The file is expanded by 35% (three bytes become four plus control information),
increasing the transmission time.
The user on the remote system who is invoking uudecode (often uucp) must have write
permission on the specified file.
SEE ALSO

binmail(l), mail(l), uusend(1C), uucp(1C), uux(lC), uuencode(5);
Managing SysV System Sojtv.!are.

Commands

1-647

UULOG(1C)

SysV

UULOG(lC)

NAME
uucp, uulog, uuname - UNIX-to-UNIX system copy
SYNOPSIS
uucp [ options] source-files destination-file
uulog [ options] -ssystem
uulog [ options ] system
uulog [ options ] -f system
uuname [ -I ] [ -c ]
DESCRIPTION
uucp copies files named by the source-file arguments to the destination-file argument.
A filename may be a pathname on a machine, or may have the following form:
system name!pathname

where system name is taken from a list of system names that uucp knows about. The
system name may also be a list of names such as:
system name!system name!".!system name!pathname

in which case an attempt is made to send the file via the specified route, to the destination. See NOTES and BUGS below for restrictions. Care should be taken to ensure that
intermediate nodes in the route are willing to forward information.
The question mark (1), asterisk (*), and bracketed ellipsis ([ ... ]) Shell metacharacters
appearing in pathname are expanded on the appropriate system.
Pathnames may be one of the following (anything else is prefixed by the current directory): A full pathname A pathname preceded by -user where user is a log-in name on
the specified system and is replaced by that user's log-in directory A pathname preceded by -/destination where destination is appended to /usr/spool/uucppublic. This
destination will be treated as a filename unless more than one file is being transferred by
this request or the destination is already a directory. To ensure that it is a directory, follow the destination with a slash mark (/). For example, -/ dan/ as the destination will
make the directory /usr/spool/uucppublic/dan if it does not exist and put the requested
file(s) in that directory). <.PP If the result is an erroneous pathname for the remote system, the copy will fail. If the destination-file is a directory, the last part of the sourcefile name is used.
uucp preserves execute permissions across the transmission and gives 0666 read and
write permissions. See chmod(2) for more information about permissions. All files
received by uucp will be owned by uucp.
uulog queries a summary log of uucp or uuxqt transactions in the files
/usr/spool/uucp/.Log/uucico/system, or /usr/spool/uucp/.Logluuxqt/system.
uuname lists the names of systems known to uucp.

1-648

Commands

UULOG(IC)

SysV

UULOG(IC)

The DOMAIN/IX version of uucp supports the Vadic Autodialer.
OPTIONS
uucp options
The following options are interpreted by uucp only:

-c

Does not copy the local file to the spool directory for transfer to the
remote machine (default).

-c

Forces the copy of local files to the spool directory for transfer.

-d

Makes all necessary directories for the file copy (default).

-f

Does not make intermediate directories for the file copy.

-ggrade

Grade is a single letter/number; lower ascii sequence characters cause
the job to be transmitted earlier during a particular conversation.

-j

Output the job identification ASCII string on the standard output. This
job identification can be used by uustat to obtain the status or terminate
a job.

-m

Send mail to the requester when the copy is completed. The -m option
only works sending files or receiving a single file. Receiving multiple
files specified by special shell characters ? * [ ... J will not activate the
-moption.

-nuser

Notifies you on the remote system that a file was sent.

-r

Does not start the file transfer, just queuse the job.

-sfile

Reports status of the transfer to file. Notes that the file must be a full path
name.

-xdebug_level
Produces debugging output on standard output. The debug_level is a
number between 0 and 9; higher numbers give more detailed information. (Debugging will not be available if uucp was compiled with
-DSMALL.)
uulog options
The following options are used by uulog only; they cause uulog to print logging information:

-ssys

Prints information about file transfer work involving system sys.

-fsystem

Does a tail -f of the file transfer log for system. (You must hit BREAK to
exit this function.)

Commands

1-649

UULOG(lC)

SysV

UULOG(lC)

Other options used in conjunction with the above uulog options:
-x

Looks in the uuxqt log file for the given system.

-number

Indicates that a tail command of number lines should be executed.

uuname options
The following options are used by uuname only:

-c

Returns the names of systems known to cu(l). This list should be the
same as the list of systems known to uucp, unless your machine is using
different Systems files for cu and uucp. See the Sysfiles file.

-I

Return the local system name.

NOTES
The domain of remotely accessible files may (and for obvious security reasons, usually
should) be severely restricted. You will very likely not be able to fetch files by pathname. Ask a responsible person on the remote system to send them to you. For the
same reasons, you will probably not be able to send files to arbitrary pathnames. As
distributed, the remotely accessible files are those whose names begin with
/usr/spoolluucppublic (equivalent to -/).
The forwarding of files through other systems may not be compatible with the previous
version of uucp. If forwarding is used, all systems in the route must have the same version of uucp.

BUGS
Protected files and files in protected directories that are owned by the requestor can be
sent by uucp. However, if the requestor is root, and the directory is not searchable by
"other" or the file is not readable by "other", the request will fail.
FILES
/usr/spoolluucp
Spool directory
/usr/spool/uucppublic
Public directory for receiving and sending (PUBDIR)
/usr/lib/uucp/*
Other data and program files
SEE ALSO
mail (1), uustat (IC), uux (lC), uuxqt (1M), chmod (2).

Also refer to the discussion of uucp in Using Your SysV Environment.

1-650

Commands

UUCP(lC)

SysV

UUCP(lC)

NAME

UUCp, uulog, uuname - UNIX-to-UNIX system copy
SYNOPSIS
uucp [ options] source-files destination-file
uulog [ options] -ssystem
uulog [ options] system
uulog [ options ] -f system
uuname [ -I ] [ -c ]
DESCRIPTION
uucp copies files named by the source-file arguments to the destination-file argument.
A filename may be a pathname on a machine, or may have the following form:
system name !pathname
where system name is taken from a list of system names that uucp knows about. The
system name may also be a list of names such as:
system name!system name !. .. !system name!pathname
in which case an attempt is made to send the file via the specified route, to the destination. See NOTES and BUGS below for restrictions. Care should be taken to ensure that
intermediate nodes in the route are willing to forward information.
The question mark (?), asterisk (*), and bracketed ellipsis ([ ... ]) Shell metacharacters
appearing in pathname are expanded on the appropriate system.
Pathnames may be one of the following (anything else is prefixed by the current directory):
•

a full pathname

•

a pathname preceded by -user where user is a log-in name on the specified system
and is replaced by that user's log-in directory

•

a path name preceded by -Idestination where destination is appended to
lusrlspool/uucppubIic. This destination will be treated as a file name unless more
than one file is being transferred by this request or the destination is already a directory. To ensure that it is a directory, follow the destination with a slash mark (/).
For example, -/dan/ as the destination will make the directory
/usr/spool/uucppubIic/dan if it does not exist and put the requested file(s) in that
directory) .

If the result is an erroneous pathname for the remote system, the copy will fail. If the
destination-file is a directory, the last pan of the source-file name is used.
uucp preserves execute permissions across the transmission and gives 0666 read and
write permissions. See chmod(2) for more information about permissions. All files
received by uucp will be owned by uucp.
Commands

1-651

UUCP(lC)

SysV

UUCP(lC)

uulog queries a summary log of uucp or uuxqt transactions in the files
/usr/spool/uucp/.Log/uucico/system. or /usr/spool/uucp/.Log/uuxqt/system.
uuname lists the names of systems known to uucp.
The DOMAIN/IX version of uucp supports the Vadic Autodialer.
OPTIONS
The following options are interpreted by uucp only:

-c

Does not copy the local file to the spool directory for transfer to the
remote machine (default).

-c

Forces the copy of local files to the spool directory for transfer.

-d

Makes all necessary directories for the file copy (default).

-f

Does not make intennediate directories for the file copy.

-ggrade

Grade is a single letter/number; lower ascii sequence characters cause
the job to be transmitted earlier during a particular conversation.

-j

Output the job identification ASCII string on the standard output. This
job identification can be used by uustat to obtain the status or tenninate
a job.

-m

Send mail to the requester when the copy is completed. The -m option
only works sending files or receiving a single file. Receiving multiple
files specified by special shell characters ? * [ ... j will not activate the
-m option.

-nuser

Notifies you on the remote system that a file was sent.

-r

Does not start the file transfer. just queuse the job.

-sftle

Reports status of the transfer to file. Notes that the file must be a full path
name.

-xdebug_level
Produces debugging output on standard output. The debug_level is a
number between 0 and 9; higher numbers give more detailed infonnation. (Debugging will not be available if uucp was compiled with
-DSMALL.)
uulog options
The following options are used by uulog only; they cause uulog to print logging information:

-ssys

Prints infonnation about file transfer work involving system sys.

-fsystem

Does a tail -f of the file transfer log for system. (You must hit BREAK to
exit this function.)

Other options used in conjunction with the above uulog options:

1-652

Commands

UUCP(lC)

-x
-number

SysV

UUCP(lC)

Looks in the uuxqt log file for the given system.

Indicates that a tail command of number lines should be executed.

uuname options
The following options are used by uuname only:

-c

Returns the names of systems known to cu. This list should be the same
as the list of systems known to uucp, unless your machine is using different Systems files for cu and uucp. See the Sysfiles file.

-I

Return the local system name.

NOTES

The domain of remotely accessible files may (and for obvious security reasons, usually
should) be severely restricted. You will very likely not be able to fetch files by pathname. Ask a responsible person on the remote system to send them to you. For the
same reasons, you will probably not be able to send files to arbitrary pathnames. As
distributed, the remotely accessible files are those whose names begin with
lusrlspoolluucppublic (equivalent to -/).
The forwarding of files through other systems may not be compatible with the previous

version of uucp. IT forwarding is used, all systems in the route must have the same version of uucp.
BUGS

Protected files and files in protected directories that are owned by the requestor can be
sent by uucp. However, if the requestor is root, and the directory is not searchable by
"other" or the file is not readable by "other", the request will fail.
FILES
lusrlspool/uucp
spool directory
lusrlspooIluucPPublic
public directory for receiving and sending (PUBDIR)
lusr/lib/uucp/*
other data and program files
SEE ALSO
mail (I), uustat (IC), uux (IC), uuxqt (1M), chmod (2).

Also refer to the discussion of uucp in Using Your SysV Environment.

Commands

1-653

UUPICK(lC)

SysV

UUPICK(lC)

NAME

uulo, uupick - public UNIX-to-UNIX system file copy
SYNOPSIS

uulo [ options ] source-files destination
uupick [ -s system ]
DESCRIPTION

uulo sends source-files to destination. uuto uses the uucp( 1C) facility to send files,
while it allows the local system to control the file access. A source-file name is a pathname on your machine. Destination has the fonn

system!user
where system is taken from a list of system names that uucp knows about (see
uuname(l»; user is the log-in name of someone on the specified system.
The files (or sub-trees if directories are specified) are sent to PUBOIR on system, where

PUBOIR is a public directory defined in the uucp source. By default this directory is
lusrlspooI/uucppublic. Specifically the files are sent to

PUBDIRIreceiveluserlmysystemlfiles.
The destined recipient is notified by mail( 1) of the arrival of files.

Two uulo options are available:

-p
-m

Copy the source file into the spool directory before transmission.
Send mail to the sender when the copy is complete.

uupick accepts or rejects the files transmitted to the user. Specifically, uupick
searches PUBOIR for files destined for the user. For each entry (file or directory) found,
the following message is printed on the standard output:
from system:

[file file-namel

[dir dirnamel ?

uupick then reads a line from the standard input to determine the disposition of the file:

1-654



Go on to the next entry.

d

Delete the entry.

m [dir]

Move the entry to named directory dir. If dir is not specified as a
complete pathname (in which $HOME is legitimate), a destination
relative to the current directory is assumed. If no destination is
given, the default is the current directory.

a [dir ]

The same as m except that it moves all the files sent from system.

p

Print the content of the file.

q

Stop.

Commands

UUPICK(lC)

SysV

EOT (crRL/D)

Same as q.

!command

Escape to the shell to do command.

*

Print a command summary.

UUPICK(lC)

uupick invoked with the -ssystem option will only search the PUBDIR for files sent
from system.
WARNINGS

To send files that begin with a dot (for example, .profile) the files must by qualified
with a dot. For example: .profile, .prof*, .profil'! are correct; whereas *prof*, ?profile
are incorrect.
FILES

PUBDIR/usr/spool/uucppublic

Public directory

SEE ALSO

mail(l), uucp(IC), uustat(1C), uux(lC);
uucleanup(lM),
Managing SysV System Software.

Commands

1-655

SysV

UUSTAT(lC)

UUSTAT(lC)

NAME

uustat - uucp status inquiry and job control
SYNOPSIS

uustat
uustat
uustat
uustat
uustat
uustat
uustat

[-a]
[-m]
[-p]
[-q]
[ -kjobid ]
[ -r jobid ]
[ -ssystem ] [ -uuser ]

DESCRIPTION

uustat will display the status of, or cancel, previously specified uucp commands, or
provide general status on uucp connections to other systems.
OPTIONS

Only one of the following options can be specified with uustat per command execution.
-a

Output all jobs in the queue.

-m

Report the status of accessibility of all machines.

-p

Execute a ps -Up for all the process-ids that are in the lock files.

-q

List the jobs queued for each machine. If a status file exists for the
machine, its date, time and status information are reported. In addition,
if a number appears in 0 next to the number of C or X files, it is the age
in days of the oldest C./X. file for that system. The "Retry" field
represents the number of hours until the next possible call. The
"Count" is the number of failure attempts. NOTE: for systems with a
moderate number of outstanding jobs, this could take 30 seconds or more
ofreal-time to execute.

-kjobid

Kill the uucp request whose job identification is jobid. The killed uucp
request must belong to the person issuing the uustat command unless
one is the super-user.

-rjobid

Rejuvenate jobid. The files associated with jobid are touched so that
their modification time is set to the current time. This prevents the
cleanup daemon from deleting the job until the jobs modification time
reaches the limit imposed by the deamon.

Either or both of the following options can be specified with uustat.

1-656

-ssys

Report the status of all uucp requests for remote system sys.

-uuser

Report the status of all uucp requests issued by user.

Commands

UUSTAT(lC)

SysV

UUSTAT(lC)

EXAMPLES

The following example shows the output produced by the -q option.
eagle
mh3bs3

3C
2C

04/07-11:07
07/07-10:42

NO DEVICES AVAILABLE
SUCCESSFUL

The above output tells how many command files are waiting for each system. Each
command file may have zero or more files to be sent (zero means to call the system and
see if work is to be done). The date and time refer to the previous interaction with the
system, and are followed by the status of the interaction.
Output for both the -s and -u options has the following format:
eaglenOOOO
eagleNlbd7
eagleClbd8

4/07-11:01:03
4/07-11:07
4/07-11:07
4/07-11:07

(POLL)

S
S
S

eagle dan
eagle dan
eagle dan

522 /usr/dan/A
59 D.3b2a12ce4924
rmail mike

With the -s and -u options, the first field is the jobid of the job. This is followed by the
date/time. The next field is either an "S" or "R" depending on whether the job is to
send or request a file. This is followed by the user-id of the user who queued the job.
The next field contains the size of the file, or in the case of a remote execution (rmail the command used for remote mail), the name of the command. When the size appears
in this field, the filename is also given. This can either be the name given by the user or
an internal name (e.g., D.3b2alce4924) that is created for data files associated with
remote executions (rmail in this example).
When no options are given, uustat outputs the status of all uucp requests issued by the
current user.
FILES

/usr/spool/uucp/*

Spool directories

SEE ALSO

uucp(lC);
Managing SysV System Software.

Commands

1-657

SysV

UUTO(lC)

UUTO(lC)

NAME

uuto, uupick - public UNIX-to-UNIX system file copy
SYNOPSIS

uuto [ options ] source-files destination
uupick [ -s system 1
DESCRIPTION

uuto sends source-files to destination. uuto uses the uucp(IC) facility to send files,
while it allows the local system to control the file access. A source-file name is a pathname on your machine. Destination has the fonn

system! user
where system is taken from a list of system names that uucp knows about (see
uuname(l)); user is the log-in name of someone on the specified system.
The files (or sub-trees if directories are specified) are sent to PUBDIR on system, where
PUBDIR is a public directory defined in the uucp source. By default this directory is
lusrlspool/uucppublic. Specifically the files are sent to
PUBDIRIreceivel userlmysystemlfiles.
The destined recipient is notified by mail( 1) of the arrival of files.

Two uuto options are available:

-p
-m

Copy the source file into the spool directory before transmission.
Send mail to the sender when the copy is complete.

uupick accepts or rejects the files transmitted to the user. Specifically, uupick
searches PUBDIR for files destined for the user. For each entry (file or directory) found,
the following message is printed on the standard output:
from system:

[file file-name]

[dir dirname] ?

uupick then reads a line from the standard input to detennine the disposition of the file:

1-658



Go on to the next entry.

d

Delete the entry.

m [dir]

Move the entry to named directory dir. If dir is not specified as a
complete pathnarne (in which $HOME is legitimate), a destination
relative to the current directory is assumed. If no destination is
given, the default is the current directory.

a [dir]

The same as m except that it moves all the files sent from system.

p

Print the content of the file.

q

Stop.

Commands

SysV

UUTO(lC)

EOT (CTRL/D)

Same as q.

!command

Escape to the shell to do command.

*

Print a command sununary.

UUTO(lC)

uupick invoked with the -ssystem option will only search the PUBDIR for files sent
from system.
FILES
PUBDIR/usr/spool/uucppublic

Public directory

WARNINGS

To send files that begin with a dot (for example, .profile) the files must by qualified
with a dot. For example: .profile, .prof*, .profil? are correct; whereas *prof*, ?profile
are incorrect.
SEE ALSO

mail(I), uucp(IC), uustat(IC), uux(IC);
uucleanup(IM),
Managing SysV System Software.

Commands

1-659

UUX(lC)

SysV

UUX(lC)

NAME

uux - UNIX-to-UNIX system command execution
SYNOPSIS
uux [ options ] command-string
DESCRIPTION
uux gathers zero or more files from various systems, executes a command on a
specified system, and then sends standard output to a file on a specified system.

The command-string is made up of one or more arguments that look like a shell command line, except that the command and filenames may be prefixed by system-name!.
A null system-name is interpreted as the local system.
Filenames may be one of the following: a full path name a path name preceded by -xxx
where xxx is a login name on the specified system and is replaced by that user's login
directory; anything else is prefixed by the current directory. <.PP Any special shell
characters such as <>;1 should be quoted, either by quoting the entire command-string,
or by quoting the special characters as individual arguments.
uux attempts to get all files to the execution system. For output files, the filename must
be escaped using parentheses. uux notifies you if the requested command on the
remote system was disallowed. This notification can be turned off by the -0 option.
The response comes by remote mail from the remote machine.
OPTIONS
The following options are interpreted by uux:

The standard input to uux is made the standard input to the command-

string.
-aname

Use name as the user identification replacing the initiator user-id.
(Notification will be returned to the user.)

-b

Return whatever standard input was provided to the uux command if the
exit status is non-zero.

-c

Do not copy local file to the spool directory for transfer to the remote
machine (default).

-c

Force the copy of local files to the spool directory for transfer.

-ggrade

Grade is a single letter/number; lower ASCn sequence characters will

-j

Output the jobid ASCII string on the standard output which is the job
identification. This job identification can be used by uustat( 1) to obtain
the status or terminate a job.

-0

Do not notify the user if the command fails.

-p

Same as -: The standard input to uux is made the standard input to the

cause the job to be transmitted earlier during a particular conversation.

command-string.
1-660

Commands

UUX(lC)

SysV

-r

Do not start the file transfer, just queue the job.

-sfile

Report status of the transfer in file.

UUX(lC)

-xdebug_level
Produce debugging output on the standard output. The debug_level is a
number between 0 and 9; higher numbers give more detailed information.

-z

Send success notification to the user.

NOlES
For security reasons, most installations limit the list of commands executable on behalf
of an incoming request from uux, permitting only the receipt of mail (see maiJ(l».
(Remote execution permissions are defined in /usrllib/uucp/Permissions.)

EXAMPLES
The command
uux a!cut -fl b!/usr/file \(c!/usr/file\)
gets /usr/file from system b and sends it to system a, performs a cut(l) command on
that file and sends the result of the cut command to system c.
The command
uux "!diff usg!/usr/dan/filel pwba!/a4/danlfile2 > rldan/file.diff"
will get the filel and file2 files from the machines usg and pwba, execute a diff(l) command, and put the results in file.diff in the local PUBDIR/dan/ directory.
BUGS
Only the first command of a shell pipeline may have a system-name!. All otber commands are executed on the system of the first command.
The use of the shell metacharacter * will probably not do what you want it to do. The
shell tokens « and » are not implemented.
The execution of commands on remote systems takes place in an execution directory
known to the uucp system. All files required for the execution will be put into this
directory unless they already reside on that machine. Therefore, the simple filename
(without path or machine reference) must be unique within the uux request. The following command will NOT work:
uux "a!diff b!/usr/dan/xyz c!/usr/dan/xyz > !xyz.diff"
but the command
uux "a!diff a!/usr/dan/xyz c!/usr/dan/xyz > !xyz.diff'
will work. (If diff(l) is a permitted command.)
Protected files and files that are in protected directories that are owned by the requestor
can be sent in commands using uux. However, if the requestor is root, and the directory is not searchable by "other", the request will fail.
Commands

1-661

UUX(lC)

SysV

UUX(1C)

FILES

lusrllib/uucp/spool
lusr/Iib/uucp/Permissions
lusr/lib/uucp/*

Spool directories
Remote execution permissions
Other data and programs

SEE ALSO
cut(l), mail(l), uucp(lC), uustat(IC),
Managing SysV System Software.

1-662

Commands

SysV

VAL(l)

VAL(l)

NAME
val - validate sees file
SYNOPSIS

val val [-s] [-rSID] [-mname] [-ytype] files
DESCRIPTION

val detennines if the specified file is an
by the option used.

sees

file meeting the characteristics specified

val has a special argument, -, which reads standard input until it reaches an end-of-file
(EOF) condition. Each line read is independently processed as if it were a command
line argument list.
val generates diagnostic messages on the standard output for each command line and
file processed, and also returns a single 8-bit code on exit as described below.
The 8-bit code returned by val is a disjunction of the possible errors, i. e., can be interpreted as a bit string where (moving from left to right) set bits are interpreted as follows:
bit 0 =missing file argument;
bit 1 =unknown or duplicate keyletter argument;
bit 2 = corrupted sees file;
bit 3 =cannot open file or file not sees;
bit 4 =SID is invalid or ambiguous;
bit 5 = SID does not exist;
bit 6 = %Y%, -y mismatch;
bit 7 = %M%, -m mismatch;
OPTIONS

-s

Silences the diagnostic message nonnally generated on the standard output for any error detected while processing each named file on a given
command line.

-rSID

The argument value SID (SeeS IDentification String) is an sees delta
number. val with this option checks to detennine if the SID is ambiguous (for example, rl is ambiguous because it physically does not exist
but implies 1.1, 1.2, etc., which may exist) or invalid (for example, rl.O
or r l.l.O are invalid because neither case can exist as a valid delta
number). If the SID is valid and not ambiguous, val with this option
checks to detennine if it actually exists.

-mname

Compares the argument value name with the
file.

-ytype

Compares the argument value type with the

Commands

sees

%M% keyword in

sees %Y% keyword infile.

1-663

VAL(l)

SysV

VAL(l)

NOTE

val can process two or more files on a given command line and in tum can process multiple command lines (when reading the standatd input). In these cases an aggregate
code is returned - a logical OR of the codes generated for each command line and file
processed.
DIAGNOSTICS

Use help(l) for explanations.
BUGS

val can process up to 50 files on a single command line. Any number above 50 will
fail.
SEE ALSO

admin(l), delta(l), get(l), help(I), prs(I), sccs(I).

1-664

Commands

SysV

VC(l)

VC(l)

NAME

vc - version control
SYNOPSIS

vc [-a] [-t] [-echar] [-s] [keyword=value ... keyword=value]
DESCRIPTION

vc copies lines from the standard input to the standard output under control of its arguments and control statements encountered in the standard input. In the process of performing the copy operation, user declared keywords may be replaced by their string
value when they appear in plain text and/or control statements.
The copying of lines from the standard input to the standard output is conditional, based
on tests (in control statements) of keyword values specified in control statements or as
vc command arguments.
A control statement is a single line beginning with a control character, except as
modified by the -t keyletter (see below). The default control character is colon (:),
except as modified by the -e keyletter (see below). Input lines beginning with a
backslash (\) followed by a control character are not control lines and are copied to the
standard output with the backslash removed. Lines beginning with a backslash followed by a non-control character are copied in their entirety.
A keyword is composed of 9 or less alphanumerics; the first must be alphabetic. A
value is any ASCII string that can be created with ed( 1); a numeric value is an unsigned
string of digits. Keyword values may not contain blanks or tabs.

Replacement of keywords by values is done whenever a keyword surrounded by control
characters is encountered on a version control statement. The -a keyletter (see below)
forces replacement of keywords in all lines of text. An uninterpreted control character
may be included in a value by preceding it with \. If a literal \ is desired, then it too
must be preceded by \.
Keyletter Arguments

-a
-t

Forces replacement of keywords surrounded by control characters with
their assigned value in all text lines and not just in vc statements.
All characters from the beginning of a line up to and including the first

ta b character are ignored for the purpose of detecting a control statement. If one is found, all characters up to and including the tab are discarded.

-echar

Specifies a control character to be used in place of :.

-s

Silences warning messages (not error) that are normally printed on the
diagnostic output.

Commands

1-665

SysV

VC(l)

VC(I)

Version Control Statements
:dcl keyword{, ••.• keyword]
Used to declare keywords. All keywords must be declared.
:asg keyword=value
Used to assign values to keywords. An asg statement overrides the assignment for the
corresponding keyword on the vc command line and all previous asg's for that keyword. Keywords declared, but not assigned values have null values.
:if condition
:end
Used to skip lines of the standard input. If the condition is true all lines between
the if statement and the matching end statement are copied to the standard output. If the condition is false, all intervening lines are discarded, including control
statements. Note that intervening if statements and matching end statements are
recognized solely for the purpose of maintaining the proper if-end matching.
The syntax of a condition is:







::= ["not" 1
::=  I  "I" 
::=  I  "&" 
::= "("  ")" I   
::= "=" I "!=" I "<" I tI>"
::=  I 

The available operators and their meanings are:

!=
&
I

>

<
()
not

1-666

equal
not equal
and
or
greater than
less than
used for logical groupings
may only occur immediately after the
when present, inverts the value of the
entire condition

if, and

Commands

SysV

VC(l)

VC(l)

The > and < operate only on unsigned integer values (e.g., : 012> 12 is false).
All other operators take strings as arguments (e.g., : 012 != 12 is true). The precedence of the operators (from highest to lowest) is:
= != > <
all of equal precedence
&
I

Parentheses may be used to alter the order of precedence. Values must be
separated from operators or parentheses by at least one blank or tab.
::text
Used for keyword replacement on lines that are copied to the standard output.
The two leading control characters are removed, and keywords surrounded by
control characters in text are replaced by their value before the line is copied to
the output file. This action is independent of the -a keyletter.
:on
:off
Tum on or off keyword replacement on all lines.
:ctl char
Change the control character to char.
:msg message
Prints the given message on the diagnostic output.
:err message
Prints the given message followed by:
ERROR: err statement on line ... (915)
on the diagnostic output. vc halts execution, and returns an exit code of 1.
EXIT CODES
O-normal
1- any error

Commands

1-66~

VI(I)

VI(I)

SysV

NAME
vi - screen-oriented (visual) display editor based on ex
SYNOPSIS

vi [ -t tag 1 [ -r file 1 [ -wn 1 [ -R 1 [ +command 1 name ...
view [ -t tag 1 [ -r file 1 [ -wn 1 [ -R 1 [ +command 1 name
vedit [ -t tag 1 [ -r file 1 [ -wn 1 [ -R 1 [ +command 1 name
DESCRIPTION

vi (visual) is a display-oriented text editor based on an underlying line editor ex(l). It is
possible to use the command mode of ex from within vi and vice-versa.
When using vi, changes you make to the file are reflected in what you see on your terminal screen. The position of the cursor on the screen indicates the position within the
file.

The name argument indicates files to be edited.
The view invocation is the same as vi except that the readonly flag is set.
The vedit invocation is intended for beginners. The report flag is set to 1, and the
show mode and novice flags are set. These defaults make it easier to get started learning the editor.
OPTIONS

-t tag

Edits the file containing the tag and positions the editor at its definition.

-rfile

Recoversfile after an editor or system crash. Iffile is not specified, a list
of all saved files is printed.

-wn

Sets the default window size to n. This is useful when using the editor
over a slow-speed line.

-R

Reads only mode; the readonly flag is set, preventing accidental
overwriting of the file.

+command

The specified ex command is interpreted before editing begins.

VI MODES

Command

Normal and initial mode. Other modes return to command mode upon
completion. ESC (escape) is used to cancel a partial command.

Input

Entered by the following options a i A I 0 0 c C s S R. Arbitrary text
may then be entered. Input mode is normally terminated with ESC character, or abnormally with interrupt.

Last line

Reading input for : / .? or !; terminate with a carriage return to execute,
interrupt to cancel.

COMMAND SUMMARY

Sample commands
~!i -4
hjkl

1-668

Arrow keys move the cursor
Same as arrow keys
Commands

VI(l)

SysV

itextESC
cwnewESC
easESC
x

dw
dd
3dd
u

ZZ
:q!CR
ltextCR
CTRLlU CTRLlD
:excmdCR

VI(l)

Insert text abc
Change word to new
Pluralize word
Delete a character
Delete a word
Delete a line
... 3Iines
Undo previous change
Exit vi, saving changes
Quit, discarding changes
Search for text
Scroll up or down
Any ex or ed command

Counts before vi commands
Numbers may be typed as a prefix to some commands. They are interpreted in one of
these ways:
line/column number
z G I
scroll amount
CTRLlD CTRLlU
repeat effect
Most of the rest
Interrupting, canceling
ESC
DEL
CTRLlL
CTRLlR
File manipulation
:wCR
:qCR
:q!CR
:e nameCR
:e!CR
:e + nameCR
:e +nCR
:e#CR
:w nameCR
:w! nameCR
:shCR
:!cmdCR
:nCR
:n argsCR
Commands

End insert or incomplete ctnd
(Delete or rubout) interrupts
Reprint screen if DEL scrambles it
Reprint screen if CTRL/L is ~ key

Write back changes
Quit
Quit, discard changes
Edit file name
Reedit, discard changes
Edit, starting at end
Edit starting at line n
Edit alternate file
Synonym for :e #
Write file name
Overwrite file name
Run shell, then return
Run cmd, then return
Edit next file in arglist
Specify new arglist

1-66'

SysV

VI(I)

CTRL/G
:ta tagCR
CTRLI]

VI(I)

Show current file and line
To tag file entry tag
:ta, following word is tag

In general, any ex or ed command (such as substitute or global) may be typed, preceded by a colon and followed by a carriage return.
Positioning within file

CTRL/F
CTRL/B
CTRL/D
CTRL/U
G
lpat
?pat
n

N
lpatl+n
?pat?-n
]]
[(
(
)
{
}

%
Adjus~g

Forward screen
Backward screen
Scroll down half screen
Scroll up half screen
Go to specified line (end default)
Next line matching pat
Prev line matching pat
Repeat last I or ? .
Reverse last I or ?
nth line after pat
nth line before pat
Next section/function
Previous section/function
Beginning of sentence
End of sentence
Beginning of paragraph
End of paragraph
Find matching ( ) { or }

the screen

CTRL/L
CTRL/R
zCR
z-CR
z.CR
lpatlz-CR
:m.CR
CTRL/E
CTRL/Y

Clear and redraw
Retype, eliminate @ lines
Redraw, current at window top
... at bottom
... at center
pat line at bottom
Use n line window
Scroll window down I line
Scroll window up 1 line

Marlcing and returning

mx
'x
'x

1-670

Move cursor to previous context
... at first non-white in line
Mark current position with letter x
Move cursor to mark x
... at first non-white in line
Commands

SysV

VI(l)

VI(l)

Line positioning

H
L
M
+
CR

J, or j

i

or k

Top line on screen
Last line on screen
Middle line on screen
Next line, at first non-white
Previous line, at first non-white
Return, same as +
Next line, same colurrm
Previous line, same colurrm

Character positioning

o
$
hor~

lor~

CTRLlH
space
fx
Fx

tT
Tx

%

First non white
Beginning of line
End of line
Forward
Backwards
Same as ~
Same as ~
Find x forward
fbackward
Up to x forward
Back uptox
Repeat last f F t or T
Inverse of;
To specified colurrm
Find matching ( { ) or}

Words, sentences, paragraphs
w
Word forward
b
Back word
e
End of word
)
To next sentence
}
To next paragraph
(
Back sentence
{
Back paragraph
W
Blank delimited word
B
BackW
E
To end ofW

Commands

1-671

VI(l)

SysV

Corrections during insert
CTRLlH
CTRLIW
erase
kill
\
ESC
DEL
CTRLlD
tCTRLlD
OCTRLlD
CTRLlV
Insert and replace
a
A
[
0

0
rx
RtextESC

VI(l)

Erase last character
Erase last word
Your erase, same as CTRL/H
Your kill, erase input this line
Quotes CTRL/H, your erase and kill
Ends insertion, back to command
Interrupt, terminates insert
Backtab over autoindent
Kill auto indent, save for next
... but at margin next also
Quote non-printing character

Append after cursor
Insert before cursor
Append at end of line
Insert before first non-blank
Open line below
Open above
Replace single char with x
Replace characters

Operators
Operators are followed by a cursor motion, and affect all text that would have been
moved over. For example, since w moves over a word, dw deletes the word that would
be moved over. Double the operator, e.g., dd to affect whole lines.
d

c
y
<
>

1-672

Delete
Change
Yank lines to buffer
Left shift
Right shift
Filter through command
Indent for LISP

Commands

SysV

VI(l)

VI(l)

Miscellaneous Operations

C
D

s
S

J
x

X
Y

Change rest ofline (c$)
Delete rest of line (d$)
Substitute chars (cl)
Substitute lines (cc)
Join lines
Delete characters (dl)
... before cursor (dh)
Yank lines (yy)

Yank: and Put
Put inserts the text most recently deleted or yanked. However, if a buffer is named, the
text in that buffer is put instead.
p
p

"xp
"xy
"xd
Undo, Redo, Retrieve
u
U

"dp

Put back text after cursor
Put before cursor
Put from buffer x
Yank to buffer x
Delete into buffer x

Undo last change
Restore current line
Repeat last change
Retrieve d'th last delete

NOTES
In the Domain/OS SysV implementation of vi, the w (word) and CTRLI] (tag) commands both recognize a $ as part of the word. The w command also recognizes a dash
(-) as part of a word, if liSP mode is on.

BUGS
Software tabs using CTRLlT work only immediately after the autoindent.
Left and right s4ifts on intelligent terminals do not make use of insert and delete character operations in the terminal.
Fn..ES

lusrllib/terminfol?l* Compiled terminal description database
SEE ALSO

ed(l), edit(l), ex(l).

Commands

1-673

VSIZE(l)

Domain/OS SysV

VSIZE(l)

NAME

vsize - set/display VT100 window settings
SYNOPSIS

vsize [options]
DESCRIPTION

The vsize command allows you to set the dimensions of the VT100 emulator window
pane. This command is valid only from within the VT100 emulator (which is invoked
with the VT100 command); attempting to use it directly from the shell causes an error.
OPTIONS

IT no options are specified, vsize displays the current window pane settings.
-I n

Specifies the height of the window pane in lines. IT this option is omitted, the
height remains unchanged.

-c n

Specifies the width of the window in columns. IT this option is omitted, the
width remains unchanged.

-std

Sets the height of the window to 24 lines and the width to 80 columns. This is
the same as saying -I 24 -c 80.

EXAMPLES

Invoke VT100 emulator and Display current settings.
$ vt100
$ vsize
Screen size is 18 lines by 70 columns.

Change the width. Exit the emulator and return to the shell.
$ vsize -c 60
Old screen size is 18 lines by 70 columns.
New screen size is 18 lines by 60 columns.

$
$

1-674

***

EOF

***

Commands

VT100(l)

Domain/OS SysV

VT100(l)

NAME

vt100 - VT100 terminal emulator
SYNOPSIS

vt100 [options] fpathname [argl arg2 ...]]
DESCRIPTION

The vt100 command creates a window running the VT100 terminal emulator and starts
up a shell within the window.
The VT 100 terminal emulation package is intended for use with two types of programs.
When used in conjunction with remote communications packages such as Domain
TCP/IP or X.25, the VT100 terminal emulator allows you to interact with the remote
system as if you were logged into a VT100 connected to that system. Using the VT100
terminal emulator with programs that take advantage of VT100 special features allows
you to run these programs on a Domain node without having to tailor them to the
Domain environment.

pathname [argl arg2 ...] (optional)
Specify the name of a command or program for the shell in the VT100
window to invoke. You must give the full pathname; for example,
Icomlld. argl. arg2, ... are valid arguments to the selected command (or
program): for example, Icomlld lImy_node/my_home _dir. The default
is to invoke the value of the variable $SHELL, or if $SHELL is not set,
invoke Icomlsh.
OPTIONS

If any options are specified, they must precede the argument(s). Once vt100 is running,
you may change the window size with the vsize command.
-std

Set up a VT100 window that is 24 lines by 80 columns (the standard size
of a VT100 screen).

-lines n

Set up a VT100 window with the number of lines specified by n. The
number of lines cannot exceed the number of lines in the DM window
running the VT100 emulator.

-columns n

Set up a VT100 window with the number of columns specified by n.
The number of columns cannot exceed the number of columns of the
DM window running the VT100 emulator.

The VT 100 terminal emulation package consists of the following:
•

Commands

The terminal emulation software, which performs the functions of a VT100 temtinal, such as handling VT100-type escape sequences. The terminal emulator
redirects the handling of keyboard input and screen output to stream manager operations. The terminal emulator is invoked within a DM window by the vt100 shell
command.

1-675

VT100(l)

•

Domain/OS SysV

VT100(l)

The terminal emulator driver, which performs keyboard input functions such as
erasing or echoing characters.

EXAMPLES

1.

Create a window running the VT100 emulator and start a shell running within the
window.

$ vt100
2.

Open a connection to the remote system specified by hostname and create a window running the VT100 emulator.
$ vt100 login hostname

KEYBOARD LAYOUT

The table below shows how the keys on a Domain low-profile keyboard map to the
keys of a VT100. This assumes that you are running the VT100 Keyboard Emulation
package on your node. Note that the VT100 definitions for the F2, F3, and F7 keys
supersede the usual emt definitions for these keys.
Domain key






SHIFT/
SHIFT/
SHIFT/
SHIFT/
CTRU

CTRL/
CTRU

CTRL/


SHIFT/
SHIFT/
CTRU
CTRU

1-676

Vt100 keypad






<7>
<8>
<9>
<->
<4>
<5>
<6>
<,>
<1>
<2>
<3>

<0>
<.>

Commands

WAIT(l)

SysV

WAIT(l)

NAME

wait - await completion of process
SYNOPSIS
wait [ n

1

DESCRIPTION
wait awaits a background process whose process id is n, and reports its termination
status. If n is omitted, all the shell's currently active background processes are waited
for, and the return code is zero.

1be shell itself executes wait, without creating a new process.
CAVEAT
If you get the error message cannot fork, too many processes, try using wait to clean up
your background processes. If this doesn't help, the system process table is probably
full or you have too many active foreground processes. (There is a limit to the number
of process ids associated with your login, and to the number the system can keep track
of.)
CAUTIONS
Not all the processes of a 3- or more-stage pipeline are children of the shell, and thus
cannot be waited for.

If n is not an active process id, all your shell's currently active background processes
are waited for and the return code will be zero.
SEE ALSO
sh(1).

Commands

1-677

SysV

WALL(l)

WALL(l)

NAME

wall - write to all users
SYNOPSIS

/etc/wall
DESCRIPTION

wall reads its standard input until an end-of-file. It then sends this message to all
currently logged-in users preceded by:
Broadcast Message from •..
It is used to warn all users, typically prior to shutting down the system.
The sender must be super-user to override any protections the users may have invoked
(see mesg(I».
FILES

/dev/tty.
DIAGNOSTICS

Cannot send to ... when the open on a user's tty file fails.
SEE ALSO

mesg(I), write(l)

1-678

Commands

WBAK(l)

Domain/OS SysV

WBAK(l)

NAME

wbak - create a magnetic media backup file
SYNOPSIS
wbak -f fileno [-de v I m[unitl I f I ctl
[-fulll-incri-af dtml-bef dtm]
[-tid id] [-own id] [-vid vol id]
[-slal-nsla] [-wlal-nwla] [-nhi] [-pdtu]
[-reo] [-retenl-nreten] [-no_eot]
[-sysboot] HI-ldl-lfl-lI] [-to filename]
[-type uasclunstructlhdru]
[-r] [-stdout] [-presrlO] pathname ...
DESCRIPTION
wbak writes one or more objects to either a removable media, disk file or standard
output. These objects may be directory trees, files, or links. For each object, the information saved includes the name, object data, and attributes associated with the object,
such as the access control list. This lets you reconstruct files, the directory tree, or any
portion of the tree using the rbak command.
The wbak and rbak commands are intended both for disk backup and for interchanging
information between separate Apollo installations. Use the rwmt command to read and
write magnetic media that are used for interchanging information with non-Apollo installations.
pathllame (required) Specify the name of the object to be written to backup media.
This may be a directory, file, or link. If it is a file, then the file is
written as specified. If it is a link, then the link is resolved and
the resolution object is written to backup media. If it is a directory, all subordinate files and subdirectories in the tree are written. Note that the pathname specified reflects the way the directory is stored on the backup media, and that the same name must
be used when reading files using pathnames in rbak. Multiple
pathnames and wildcarding are permitted. If you omit this argument, wbak will prompt you for it. ¥ou may specify a hyphen
(-) as an argument to direct wbak to standard input for further
arguments and options.

OPTIONS
The -f option is required, as it specifies where on the backup media the new file is to be
written. If you omit it, wbak will prompt you for it.
Tape File Identifiers
-fid file _id

Commands

Specify a 1-17 character file ID to be written in the file header
label for use when writing a file to a labeled volume. If this
option is omitted, the file is not named and can only be restored
by the file number.

1-679

Domain/OS SysY

WBAK(J)

-f [position 1

WBAK(J)

Specify the file position for the write operation. Valid values for
position are cur, end, or a nonzero integer. A position of cur
specifies that the file should be written at the current position on
the backup media; the media must have been previously written
by wbak and its position must not have been disturbed.
A position of end specifies that the file should be written at the
end of the backup media file set. This causes wbak to append the
specified disk file (pathname argument) to the very end of the file
set.
A position specified by a nonzero integer value causes the file to
be written at that absolute position in the backup media volume.
If multiple pathname arguments are supplied, the value of position is incremented by one after each file has been written.

The default value for position is 1.
Mode Control
The object specified by the pathname argument must be a directory for either -full or
-incr to have meaning.
-full (default)

Specify a full backup; save all files in specified trees.

-incr

Specify an incremental backup; save files that were modified
since the last backup recorded in the backup_history file stored
in the pathname directory.

-afdtm

Save all files modified after the given date and time; dtm is in the
form yylmmldd.hh:mm. The date defaults to today, and the time
to midnight if either of those are omitted from dtm.

-bef dtm

Save all files last modified before the given date and time.

Label Control
-\VIa (default)

Write the backup media volume label if the backup file number is
1.

1-680

-nwla

Suppress writing of the backup media volume label.

-own id

Specify backup media volume owner (1-14 character name).
This option is only meaningful when used with the -\VIa option.

-vid vol id

Specify a 1-6 character volume ID for use when labeling a
volume. This option is only meaningful when the backup file
number is 1. The default volume 1D is ' , (blank).

Commands

WBAK(l)

Domain/OS SysV

WBAK(1)

-sla (default)

Display the label infonnation written for this backup file on standard output.

-nsla

Suppress output of label infonnation.

Listing Control
You may include the -I option, or any combination of -Id, -If, and -II.
-I

Write the names of all files, directories, and links saved to standard output.

-If

Write the names of all files saved to standard output.

-Id

Write the names of all directories saved to standard output.

-II

Write the names of all links saved to standard output.

Backup Device Control
-dev d[unitj

Specify device type and unit number. d must be either m (for
reel-to-reel magnetic tape), ct (for cartridge tape), or f (for
floppy), depending on which drive is being used. unit is an
integer (0-3). Both are required for reel-to-reel tapes (that is,
-dev m2). A unit number is not required for floppy disks and
cartridge tapes (that is, -dev f). If this option is omitted, rbak
assumes device mO.
CAUTION:

-to filename

Floppy disk support for this command is
limited. In particular, error detection during reads and writes is poor. do not use
this command with floppy disks when the
data being placed on the floppy disks are
critical and unrecoverable.

Backup output is written to the specified streams object rather
than removable media. TIris can then be restored using the -from
option in rbak. If the file already exists, use the -r option to
replace it. If -type option is not specified the file will be
assigned the default type. You cannot use the -file n option with
streams.

-type [uasc I unstruct I hdruj
Specify the type of the object filename. It can be one of ASCII
(uasc), Unstructured (unstruct) or Streams header-undefined
(hdru) type.
-r

If the object specified with the -to option already exists, this
option allows it to be replaced. The type of filename is however

left unchanged.

Commands

1-681

WBAK(I)

Domain/OS SysV

WBAK(I)

-stdout

The backup output is written to standard output.

-reo

Force previous backup media volume to be reopened, and
suppress reading of backup media volume label. Use only when
backup media has not been repositioned since last wbak or rbak.

Special Cartridge Tape Control Options
-reten
Retension the cartridge tape (unwind to the end, then rewind).
This can be helpful if you have encountered cartridge tape reading errors. Retensioning requires about 1.5 minutes to complete.
-nreten (default)

Do not retension the cartridge tape.
Suppress the writing of two tape marks at the end of the tape file,
which are the standard signal for end of tape. The cartridge can't
position between the two tape marks to be ready for a successive
call to wbak (as it does on magtape), without rewinding the tape
and searching forward, so this option speeds up multiple invocations of wbak. It should not be used on the last invocation of
wbak. Also, -f cur should be used on all wbak invocations in a
series except the first one.

-sysboot

Permit use of a bootable tape that has a special boot program at
the beginning. This option causes wbak to skip over the first file
on the tape. This option is only necessary when the first file on
the tape is being written (-f 1).

Miscellaneous Control Options
-nhi
Suppress update of the backup history file.

1-682

- (hyphen)

Read standard input for further arguments or options; input is
accepted until wbak receives an EOF.

-pdtu

Preserves the last date/time-used information on objects. After
each object is backed up on tape, the date/time-used information
is reset to the value it had before the backup.

-presrlO

Allows you to make a tape with pre-SRI0 format from an SRlO
node. This tape will have no ACLs by default. You can restore it
to a pre-SRI0 volume by means of the pre-SRlO rbak. If you
make a tape without this option it will not be readable on a preSR 10 system.

Commands

Domain/OS SysV

WBAK(1)

WBAK(1)

EXAMPLES
$ wbak //maskiwby -f l-af 87/11/19.12.00 -lid wby-L

This command writes the directory //mask/wby to tape. The directory is written out to
tape file one, and the file ID wby is written to the file's label. Disk files from directory
wby are written to the tape only if they have been modified since noon on November
19, 1987. The label and the names of the files written to tape are printed to standard
output.
When this command is executed, wbak writes the following information to standard
output:
Label:
File
File
File
Date

number:
section:
id:
written:

1
1

wby
1987/11/20 10:47:58 EST

Starting write:
(file)
(file)
(file)
(file)
(dir)

"//mask/wby/among" written
"//mask/wby/school" written
"//mask/wby/children" written
"/ /mask/wby /backup _history" written
"//mask/wby/" written.

Write complete.

This command backs up the entire contents of the node whose entry directory name is
gooey. Note that the file ID is specified as "node 27 backup" to make it easy to identify when you want to reload it, and that the command assigns volume and owner IDs.
$ wbak -f I-oWD "john doe" -vid "volbk2" -lid "node 27 backup" //gooey

Commands

1-683

Domain/OS SysV

WBAK(l)

WBAK(l)

When this command is executed, wbak writes the following information to standard
output:
Label:
Volume id:
Owner id:
File number:
File section:
File id:
File written:

VOLBK2
john doe
1
1

n 27 backup
1987/02/17 18:00:39 EST

Starting write:
Write complete.

This command uses wildcards to match only those files in the ug subdirectory of the
current working directory whose names begin with the letters a through f and end with
_example.
$ wbak -f l--own "john doe" -vid "volbkl" ug![a-f*Lexample-1

When this command is executed, wbak writes the following information to standard
output:
Label:
Volume id:
Owner id:
File number:
File section:
File id:
File written:

VOLBK1
john doe
1
1

(no id specified)
1988/02/17 17:58:52 EST

Starting write:
(file)
(file)
(file)
(file)
(file)
(file)
(file)
(file)

"ug/cmf_example" written.
"ug/cmt_examp1e" written.
"ug/cpboot_example" written.
"ug/cpf_example" written.
"ug/cpt_example" written.
"ug/fpat_example" written.
"ug!fppmask_example" written.
"ug/fst_example" written.

Write complete.

1-684

Commands

WBAK(l)

Domain/OS SysV

WBAK(l)

$ wbak src -to Ibackup/bck _out.file
This command writes the backup output for the directory src to the file
Ifredlbck_out.file. The directory can be restored in either of the following two ways:
rbak src -from Ibackup/bck_out.file
or
cat Ifred/bck_ out.file I rbak src -stdin
Using streams as a backup output media, it is possible to stage the backup output to
intennediate disks and then use rwmt to write the intennediate file to the magnetic
tape. The sequence to use is as follows
$ wbak Ilotter -to Ilbackup/ot wbak Ilotter -to Ilbackup/tmpi
This writes the backup output to an intennediate file //backup/tmpl followed by
rwmt -f 2 -w Ilbackup/tmpi-raw -r18192 -nobs -ansi
When the magtape unit is available at a later time the intennediate file is written to the
magtape. Note that it is ESSENTIAL to use the -raw, -rl 8192 and the -nobs options
of rwmt, for rbak to be able to read the backup from tape. All tapes used for this must
must have the ANSI speified volume label. You can only use this sequence for magnetic tapes. rbak will not be able to restore data written using the above sequence for
cartridge tapes instead of magnetic tapes. This sequence has exactly the same effect as
using
wbak Ilotter -de v mt -f 2
You can then use rbak as follows to retrieve the data
rbak Ilotter -f 2 -dev mt
SEE ALSO

rbak(l), rwmt(l)

Commands

1-685

WC(l)

SysV

WC(l)

NAME

we - word count
SYNOPSIS

we [ -Iwe ] [ names ]
DESCRIPTION

we counts lines, words, and characters in the named files, or in the standard input if no

names appear. It also keeps a total count for all named files. A word is a maximal
string of characters delimited by spaces, tabs, or newlines.
The options I, w, and e may be used in any combination to specify that a subset of lines,
words, and characters are to be reported. The default is -Iwe.
When names are specified on the command line, they will be printed along with the
counts.

1-686

CommandS

SysV

WHAT(l)

WHAT(l)

NAME

what - identify SCCS files
SYNOPSIS
what [-s] files
DESCRIPTION
whatfl searches the given files for all occurrences of the pattern that get(l) substitutes for %Z% (this is @(#) at this printing) and prints out what follows until the first -,
>, newline, \, or null character. For example, if the C program in file f.c contains
char identD

="@(#)identification infonnation ";

and f.c is compiled to yield f.o and a.out, then the command
what f. c f. 0 a • out
will print
f.c:

identification information

f.o:

identification information

a.out:

identification information

get(l), which automatically inserts identifying infonnation, can also be used where the
information is inserted manually.
OPTIONS

-s

Quit after finding the first occurrence of pattern in each file.

DIAGNOSTICS
Exit status is 0 if any matches are found, otherwise 1. Use help(l) for explanations.
BUGS
It is possible that an unintended occurrence of the pattern @(#) could be found just by
chance, but this causes no harm in nearly all cases.
SEE ALSO
get(l).

Commands

1-687

SysV

WHO(l)

WHO(l)

NAME

who - who is on the system
SYNOPSIS

who [ -bdHlpqrstTu ] [file]
who [ -bdHlpqstTu ] [ -a I -d I -n arg ]
who am i
who am I
DESCRIPTION

who lists the name, terminal line, login time, elapsed time since activity occurred on the
line, and the process-ID for each current UNIX system user. It examines the /etc/utmp
file at login time to obtain its information. If file is given, that file (which must be in
utmp(4) format) is examined. file is usually /etc/wtmp, which contains a history of all
the logins since the file was last created.
who with either the am i or am I option identifies the invoking user.
The general format for output is:

name [state JUne time [idle] [Pid] [comment] [exit]
With options, who can list logins, logoffs, reboots, and changes to the system clock, as
well as other processes spawned by the init process.
OPTIONS

-a

Processes /etc/utmp or the named file with all options turned on.

-b

Indicates the time and date of the last reboot.

-d

Displays all processes that have expired and not been respawned by init.
The exit field appears for dead processes and contains the termination
and exit values (as returned by wait(2», of the dead process. This can
be useful in determining why a process terminated.

-fnodefile

Specifies nodes for which /etc/utmp are processed. nodefile should contain lines in the form: IInodename or [net.]nodeid, one per line. A
pound sign (#) in the first column causes that line to be treated as a comment.

-H

Prints column headings above the regular output.

-I

Lists only those lines on which the system is waiting for someone to'
login. The name field is LOGIN in such cases. Other fields are the same
as for user entries except that the state field does not exist.

-nargl [ ,arg2 ]
Specificies nodes for which /etc/utmp are processed. arg lists the nodes
to be processed, and should be in the form: IInodename or [net.]nodeid.
If more than one node is specified they should be either separated by
commas or separated by whitespace and the entire argument in quotes.

1-688

Commands

SysV

WHO(l)

WHO(l)

-p

Lists any other process which is currently active and has been previously
spawned by init. The name field is the name of the program executed by
init as found in /etc/inittab. The state, line, and idle fields have no
meaning. The comment field shows the id field of the line from
/etc/inittab that spawned this process. See inittab(4).

-q

Displays only the names and the number of users currently logged on.
When this option is used, all other options are ignored.

-r

Indicates the current run-level of the init process. In addition, it produces the process termination status, process id, and process exit status
(see utmp( 4» under the idle, pid, and comment headings, respectively.

-s

Lists only the name, line, and time fields. This is the default option.

-t

Indicates the last change to the system clock (via date(l» by root. See
sue!).

-T

The same as -s except that the state of the terminal line is printed. The
state describes whether someone else can write to that terminal. A +
appears if the terminal is writable by anyone; a - appears if it is not.
root can write to all lines having a + or a - in the state field. If a bad
line is encountered, a ? is printed.

-u

Lists only those users who are currently logged in. name is the user's
login name. line is the name of the line as found in the directory /dev.
time is the time that the user logged in. idle column contains the number
of hours and minutes since activity last occurred on that particular line.
A dot (.) indicates that the terminal has seen activity in the last minute
and is therefore "current". If more than twenty-four hours have elapsed
or the line has not been used since boot time, the entry is marked old.
This field is useful when trying to determine whether a person is working
at the terminal or not. The comment is the comment field associated
with this line as found in /etc/inittab (see inittab( 4». This can contain
information about where the terminal is located, the telephone number of
the dataset, type of terminal if hard-wired, etc.

NOTES

All options produce name, line, and time information except -q; only - T produces
state information:
After a shutdown to the single-user state, who returns a prompt; the reason is that since
/etc/utmp is updated at login time and there is no login in single-user state, who cannot
report accurately on this state. who am i, however, returns the correct information.
FILES

/etc/utmp
/etc/wtmp

Commands

1-689

WHO(l)

SysV

WHO(l)

SEE ALSO

date(l),login(l), mesg(l), su(lM).
init(lM) in the Managing SysV System Software.
wait(2), inittab(4), utmp(4) in the SysV Programmer's Reference.

1-690

Commands

WHOIS(l)

SysV

WHOIS(l)

NAME

whois - DARPA Internet usemame directory service
SYNOPSIS

whois name
DESCRIPTION

Entering the command whois help produces a helpful message similar to the following:
Please enter a name or a handle ("ident") such as "Smith" or "SRI-NIC". Starting
with a period forces a name-only search; starting with an exclamation point forces
handle-only. Examples:
Smith
[looks for name or handle SMITH 1
!SRI-NIC
[looks for handle SRI-NIC only
1
.Smith, John
[looks for name JOHN SMITH only
Adding" ... " to the argument matches anything from that point, e.g. "ZU... " matches
ZUL, ZUM, etc.
To have the entire membership list of a group or organization, shown with the record,
use an asterisk (*) directly preceding the given argument. You can, of course, use an
exclamation point and asterisk, or a period and asterisk together.

Commands

1-691

SysV

WRITE(t)

WRlTE(t)

NAME
write - write to another user
SYNOPSIS

write user [ line]
DESCRIPTION

write copies lines from your termiual to that of another user. When first called, it sends
the message:
Message from yourname (tty??) [date] •••
to the person you want to talk to. When it has successfully completed the connection, it
also sends two bells to your own termiual to iudicate that what you are typiug is beiug
sent.
The recipient of the message should write back at this poiut. Communication contiuues
until an end of file is read from the termiual, an iuterrupt is sent, or the recipient has
executed mesg n. At that poiut write writes EOT on the other termiual and exits.
If you want to write to a user who is logged iu more than once, the line argument may

be used to iudicate which liue or termiual to send to (e.g., ttyOO); otherwise, the first
writable iustance of the user found iu /etc/utmp is assumed and the followiug message
posted:
user is logged on more than one place.
You are connected to "terminal".
Other locations are:
terminal

Permission to write may be denied or granted by use of the mesg( 1) command. Writiug
to others is normally allowed by default. Certaiu commands, such as pr(l) disallow
messages iu order to prevent iuterference with their output. However, if the user has
super-user permissions, messages can be forced onto a write-inhibited termiual.
If the character! is found at the begiuning of a liue, write calls the shell to execute the

rest of the liue as a command.
The followiug protocol is suggested for usiug write: when you first write to another
user, wait for them to write back before startiug to send. Each person should end a
message with a distiuctive signal (Le., (0) for "over") so that the other person knows
when to reply. The signal (00) (for "over and out") is suggested when conversation is
to be termiuated.
FILES

1-692

/etc/utmp

To find user

/bin/sh

To execute!

Commands

WRITE(l)

SysV

WRITE(l)

DIAGNOSTICS

user is not logged on
If the person you are trying to write to is not logged on.
Permission denied
If the person you are trying to write to denies that pennission (with
mesg).
Warning: cannot respond, set mesg-y
If your terminal is set to mesg n and the recipient cannot respond to you.
Can no longer write to user
If the recipient has denied pennission (by using mesg n) after you had
started writing.
SEE ALSO

mail(I), mesg(I), pr(l), sh(l), who(I).

Commands

1-693

XARGS(l)

SysV

XARGS(l)

NAME
xargs - construct argument list(s) and execute command
SYNOPSIS

xargs [flags] [ command [initial-arguments] ]
DESCRIPTION

xargs combines the fixed initial-arguments with arguments read from standard input to
execute the specified command one or more times. The number of arguments read for
each command invocation and the manner in which they are combined are determined
by the flags specified.
command, which may be a shell file, is searched for, using one's $PATH. If command
is omitted, /bin/echo is used.

Arguments read in from standard input are defined to be contiguous strings of characters delimited by one or more blanks, tabs, or newlines; empty lines are always discarded. Blanks and tabs may be embedded as part of an argument if escaped or quoted.
Characters enclosed in quotes (single or double) are taken literally, and the delimiting
quotes are removed. Outside of quoted strings a backslash (\) will escape the next character.
Each argument list is constructed starting with the initial-arguments, followed by some
number of arguments read from standard input (Exception: see -i flag). Flags -i, -I,
and -n determine how arguments are selected for each command invocation. When
none of these flags are coded, the initial-arguments are followed by arguments read
continuously from standard input until an internal buffer is full, and then command is
executed with the accumulated args. This process is repeated until there are no more
args. When there are flag conflicts (e.g., -I vs. -n), the last flag has precedence.
Flag Values
-Inumber

-ireplstr

1-694

The specified command is executed for each non-empty
number lines of arguments from standard input. The last invocation of command will be with fewer lines of arguments if
fewer than number remain. A line is considered to end with
the first new-line unless the last character of the line is a blank
or a tab; a trailing blank/tab signals continuation through the
next non-empty line. If number is omitted, 1 is assumed.
Option -x is forced.
Insert mode: command is executed for each line from standard
input, taking the entire line as a single arg, inserting it in
initial-arguments for each occurrence of replstr. A maximum
of 5 arguments in initial-arguments may each contain one or
more instances of replstr. Blanks and tabs at the beginning of
each line are thrown away. Constructed arguments may not
grow larger than 255 characters, and option -x is also forced.
{ } is assumed for replstr if not specified.
Commands

SysV

XARGS(l)

XARGS(l)

-nnumber

Execute command using as many standard input arguments as
possible, up to number arguments maximum. Fewer arguments will be used if their total size is greater than size characters, and for the last invocation if there are fewer than number
arguments remaining. If option -x is also coded, each number
arguments must fit in the size limitation, else xargs tenninates
execution.

-t

Trace mode: The command and each constructed argument list
are echoed to file descriptor 2 just prior to their execution.

-p

Prompt mode: The user is asked whether to execute command
each invocation. Trace mode (-t) is turned on to print the command instance to be executed, followed by a ? •• prompt. A
reply of y (optionally followed by anything) will execute the
command; anything else, including just a carriage return, skips
that particular invocation of command .

-x

Causes xargs to tenninate if any argument list would be
greater than size characters; -x is forced by the options -i and
-1. When neither of the options -i, -I, or -n are coded, the
total length of all arguments must be within the size limit.

-ssize

The maximum total size of each argument list is set to size
characters; size must be a positive integer less than or equal to
470. If -s is not coded, 470 is taken as the default. Note that
the character count for size includes one extra character for
each argument and the count of characters in the command
name.

-eeo/str

The specified eo/str is taken as the logical end-of-file string.
Underbar (_) is assumed for the logical EOF string if -e is not
coded. The value -e with no eo/str coded turns off the logical
EOF string capability (underbar is taken literally). xargs reads
standard input until either end-of-file or the logical EOF string
is encountered.

xargs will terminate if either it receives a return code of -I from, or if it cannot execute, command. When command is a shell program, it should explicitly exit (see sh(l»
with an appropriate value to avoid accidentally returning with-I.
EXAMPLES

The following will move all files from directory $1 to directory $2, and echo each move
command just before doing it:
Is $1

Commands

I xargs

-i -t

1-695

SysV

XARGS(l)

XARGS(l)

The following will combine the output of the parenthesized commands onto one line,
which is then echoed to the end of file log:
(Iogname; date; echo $0 $*)

I

The user is asked which files in the current directory are to be archived and archives
them into arch one at a time,
Is

I xargs

-p -I ar

or many at a time:
Is I xargs -p -I

I

The following will execute diff( I) with successive pairs of arguments originally typed
as shell arguments:
echo $* I xargs -n2 diff
SEE ALSO

sh(l).

1-696

Commands

XDMC(1)

Domain/OS SysV

XDMC(1)

NAME

xdmc - execute a DM command from the shell
SYNOPSIS

xdmc dmJommand [args ... ]
DESCRIPTION

xdmc allows you to invoke Display Manager commands from the command shell or
from within a shell script. This is similar to pressing  on the keyboard and then
typing the DM command in the DM input window, which is the usual way to perfonn
DM operations.
dm_command (required)

Specifies the Display Manager command to be executed.

args ... (optional)

Specifies any arguments to be passed to the DM command.These are sent directly to the DM without further
processing by the command shell.
Default if omitted: no arguments passed

EXAMPLES
$ xdmcdq

Cause the DM to send a quit fault to the current process.
$ xdmc cp Icomlsh

Cause the DM to create a new process and invoke the shell. This is the same as pressing .

Commands

1-697

SysY

YACC(l)

YACC(l)

NAME

yacc - yet another compiler-compiler
SYNOPSIS

yacc [ -vdlt ] grammar
DESCRIPTION

The yacc command converts a context-free grammar into a set of tables for a simple
automaton which executes an LR(l) parsing algorithm. The grammar may be ambiguous; specified precedence rules are used to break ambiguities.
The output file, y.tab.c, must be compiled by the C compiler to produce a program
yyparse. This program must be loaded with the lexical analyzer program, yylex, as
well as main and yyerror, an error handling routine. These routines must be supplied
by the user; lex(l) is useful for creating lexical analyzers usable by yacc
If the -v flag is given, the file y.output is prepared, which contains a description of the
parsing tables and a report on conflicts generated by ambiguities in the grammar.
If the -d flag is used, the file y.tab.h is generated with the #define statements that associate the yacc -assigned "token codes" with the user-declared "token names". This
allows source files other than y.tab.c to access the token codes.
If the -I flag is given, the code produced in y.tab.c will not contain any #line constructs. This should only be used after the grammar and the associated actions are fully
debugged.

Runtime debugging code is always generated in y.tab.c under conditional compilation
control. By default, this code is not included when y.tab.c is compiled. However,
when yacc's -t option is used, this debugging code will be compiled by default.
Independent of whether the -t option was used, the runtime debugging code is under
the control of YYDEBUG, a preprocessor symbol. If YYDEBUG has a non-zero value,
then the debugging code is included. If its value is zero, then the code will not be
included. The size and execution time of a program produced without the runtime
debugging code will be smaller and slightly faster.
CAVEAT

Because filenames are fixed, at most one yacc process can be active in a given directory
at a given time.
Fll..ES

y.output
y.tab.c
y.tab.h

Defines for token names

yacc.tmp
yacc.debug, yacc.acts
Temporary files

1-698

Commands

YACC(l)

SysV

YACC(l)

usr/Iib/yaccpar
Parser prototype for C programs
DIAGNOSTICS

The number of reduce-reduce and shift-reduce conflicts is reported on the standard error
output; a more detailed report is found in the y.output file. Similarly, if some rules are
not reachable from the start symbol, this is also reported.
SEE ALSO

lex(l).

Commands

---8B---

1-69

INTRO(6)

SysV

INTRO(6)

NAME

intro - introduction to games
DESCRIPTION

This section describes the recreational and educational programs found in the directory
lusr/games.
SEE ALSO

domain(6)

Games

6-

DOMAIN(6)

Domain/OS SysV

DOMAIN(6)

NAME

domain - Domain/OS-specific games
DESCRIPTION
While providing all of the significant functionality of System V Release 3, Domain/OS
SysV actually represents only a subset of the greater functionality of Domain/OS.
Furthermore, Domain/OS SysVomits some features of Sy.stem V Release 3, that are
irrelevant to Apollo® workstations. The following paragraphs list additional games
available in the Domain/OS lusr/gam~ directory.
Domain/OS Additions to the SysV Environment
The lusr/games directory includes standard 4.3BSD games, System V games, and
Domain/OS-specific games Pages that describe Domain/OS-specific games have the
heading, "Domain/OS SysV"; pages documenting standard UNIX games are identified
with the heading "SysV".
bgcolor
bj
btlfortune
btlgammon
btl hangman
craps
dmoire
factor
flake
mastermind
maze
melt
moo
primes
puzzle
random
revscr
scramble
teachgammon
ttt
vine

Make interesting background colors
The game of blackjack
Bell Telephone Labs' version of fortune
Bell Telephone Labs' version offortune
Bell Telephone Labs' version of hangman
The game of craps
Domain/Dialogue-based moire generator
Factoring program
Induce tenninal dandruff
Mastermind guessing game
Generate a maze
"Melt" the screen
Guessing game
Print prime numbers
A puzzle game
Random number generator
Reverse screen
Turn your screen into a scramble puzzle
Teach the game of backgammon
The game of tic-tac-toe
Grow vines

SEE ALSO

domain(l), intro(6), domain(lM)

6-2

Games

ARlTHMETIC(6)

SysV

ARITHMETIC(6)

NAME

arithmetic - provide drill in number facts
SYNOPSIS
/usr/games/arithmetic [ +-x/ ] [ range]
DESCRIPTION

arithmetic presents simple arithmetic problems, and waits for you to type an answer.
If the answer is correct, it replies "Right!", and supplies a new problem. If the answer
is wrong, it replies "What?", until you respond correctly.
The first optional argument determines the kind of problem to be generated. A plus sign
(+), minus sign (-), lowercase x, and a slash (j) produce addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division problems respectively. Specifying more than one of these characters on a command line generates a variety of problem types, all mixed in random
order. Specifying any characters other than the four mentioned here also produces a
random mix of problem types. If you specify no argument to arithmetic, subtraction
problems appear by default.
The second optional argument is range, a decimal number. If used, all addends, subtrahends, differences, multiplicands, divisors, and quotients will be less than or equal to
this number. The default range is 10.
At the start, all numbers less than or equal to range are equally likely to appear. If the
respondent makes a mistake, the numbers in the problem which was missed become
more likely to reappear.
Every twenty problems, it publishes statistics on correctness and the time required to
answer. Specifically, the program tells you the number of correct and incorrect answers
that you have given, as well as the total percentage of those correct. It also tells you
how much time (in seconds) has elapsed, and the average number of seconds it took you
to answer each problem. For example, the program may output something like this:
Rights 20; Wrongs 1; Score 95%
Total time 50 seconds; 2.5 seconds per problem

To quit the program, type an interrupt (usually CIRL/C).
NOTES

As a matter of educational philosophy, arithmetic does not supply correct answers,
since the learner should be able to calculate them. Thus, it does not try to teach number
facts, but instead serves as a drill program for those just past the first learning stage of
arithmetic. Usually, the most relevant statistic it provides is time per problem, not percent correct.

Games

6-3

SysV

BACKGAMMON(6)

BACKGAMMON(6)

NAME

backgammon - the game of backgammon
SYNOPSIS

iusrigamesibackgammon [options] (file]
DESCRIPTION

This program lets you play backgammon against the computer or against a friend. All
commands consist of only one letter, so you don't need to type a carriage return except
at the end of a move. The program is mostly self documenting; typing a question mark
(?) will usually get some help. If you answer y when the program asks if you want the
rules, you will get text explaining the rules of the game, some hints on strategy, instructions on how to use the program, and a tutorial consisting of a practice game against the
computer.
OPTIONS

-n

Don't ask for rules or instructions.

-r

Player is red (implies n).

-w

Player is white (implies n).

-b

Two players, red and white (implies n).

-pr

Print the board before red's turn.

-pw

Print the board before white's turn.

-pb

Print the board before both players' turns.

Several arguments may be concatenated together. If your terminal has capabilities for
direct cursor movement, backgammon "fixes" the board after each move so that you
need not reprint the board each time. (In this case, all -pr, -pw, and -pb options are
ignored.)
COMMANDS

When the program prompts by typing only your color, type a space or carriage return to
roll, or
d

Double

p

Print the board

q

Quit

s

Save the game for later

When the program prompts with "Move:", type

6--4

p

Print the board

q

Quit

s

Save the game

Games

SysV

BACKGAMMON(6)

BACKGAMMON(6)

or a move, which is a sequence of
s-f

Move from s to f

sir

Move one man on s the roll r

separated by commas or spaces and ending with a newline. Available abbreviations are

s-fl-f2 means s-n,n-f2
slrlr2

means s/rl,s/r2

Use b for bar and h for home, or 0 or 25 as appropriate.
FILES

Games

/etc/termcap

Terminal capability database

/usr/gameslteachgammon

Rules and tutorial

6-5

BANNER(6)

SysV

BANNER(6)

NAME

banner - print large banner on printer
SYNOPSIS

/usr/gameslbanner [ -wn ] [ message]
DESCRIPTION

banner prints a large, high quality banner on the standard output. If message is omitted, banner prompts for and reads one line of its standard input. The output should be
printed on a hardcopy device up to 132 columns wide, with no breaks between the
pages.
OPTIONS

-wn

Size output for device of width n. If n is omitted, a value of 80 is assumed.

BUGS
Several ASCII characters are not defined, notably <, >, [, ], \ -, _, (. }, I, and -. Also,
the characters", " and & are funny looking (but in a useful way.)
The -w option is implemented by skipping some rows and columns. The smaller it
gets, the grainier the output. Sometimes it runs letters together.

6-6

Games

SysV

BA'ITLESTAR(6)

BA'ITLESTAR(6)

NAME

baUlestar - a tropical adventure game
SYNOPSIS

battlestar [ -r ]
DESCRIPTION

battlestar is an adventure game in the classic style. However, it's slightly less of a
puzzle and more a game of exploration. There are a few magical words in the game,
but on the whole, simple English should suffice to make one's desires understandable to
the parser.
THE SETTING
In the days before the darkness came, when battlestars ruled the heavens ...
Three He made and gave them to His daughters,
Beautiful nymphs, the goddesses of the waters.
One to bring good luck and simple feats of wonder,
Two to wash the lands and chum the waves asunder,
Three to rule the world and purge the skies with thunder.
In those times great wizards were known and their powers were beyond belief. They
could take any object from thin air, and, uttering the word 'su' could disappear.
In those times men were known for their lust of gold and desire to wear fine weapons.
Swords and coats of mail were fashioned that could withstand a laser blast.
But when the darkness fell, the rightful reigns were toppled. Swords and helms and
heads of state went rolling across the grass. The entire fleet of battlestars was reduced
to a single ship.
COMMANDS

For commands which manipulate objects, the "shadow" of the next word stays around
if you want to take advantage of it: that is, saying take knife and then drop will drop
the knife you just took.
take

Take an object

drop

Drop an object

wear

Wear an object you are holding

draw

Carry an object you are wearing

puton

Take an object and wear it

take off

Draw an object and drop it

throw object direction
Throw an object in the specified direction

Games

6--7

SysV

BATILESTAR(6)

BATTLESTAR(6)

N SEW

Move in one of the four compass directions. You may use these commands
only if you have a compass.

R LAB

Move right/left/ahead/back. Directions printed in room descriptions are
always printed using these relative directions.

inven

Display inventory

save

Save the game in a file named Bstar. Saved games can be restarted using
the -r option.
Escape to a shell

score

Display current score

BUGS
Countless.

6-8

Games

SysV

BCD(6)

BCD(6)

NAME

bcd - convert to antique media
SYNOPSIS

/usr/gamesJbcd text
DESCRIPTION

bcd converts the literal text into a form familiar to old-timers.
SEE ALSO

dd(l)

Games

6-9

BGCOLOR(6)

Domain/OS SysV

BGCOLOR(6)

NAME

bgcolor - make interesting background colors
SYNOPSIS

/usr/games/bgcolor [options]
DESCRIPTION

bgcolor changes the display's background colors.
OPTIONS

-s[lot] num

Specify the color as value from the color table. The default value is 4.

-c[olor] rgbva/ Specify the color as an RGB value.
-f[ade]

Change color continuously, cycling through RGB values.

-i[ncrement] num
Change RGB value by num for each color update induced by the
-fade option. Higher values cause the background color to cycle
more quickly. Default value is 1.
-d[evice] name Set the device to be used by bgcolor. Possible values for name are
borrow (use entire display), borrow_nc (same as borrow but doesn't
clear screen first), direct (in current window only), and bg (use
display background).
-nb

Display no borders around target window.

BUGS

bgcolor produces unpredictable results on monochrome displays.

6-10

Games

SysV

BJ(6)

BJ(6)

NAME

bj - the game of blackjack
SYNOPSIS

/usr/games/bj
DESCRIPTION
bj is a serious attempt at simulating the dealer in the game of blackjack (or twenty-one)

as might be found in Reno. The following rules apply:
The bet is $2 every hand.
A player "natural" (black jack) pays $3. A dealer natural loses $2. Simultaneous dealer and player naturals is a "push" (no money exchange).
If the dealer has an ace up, you can make an "insurance" bet against the
chance of a dealer natural. If this bet is not taken, play resumes as normal. If
the bet is taken, it is a side bet where you win $2 if the dealer has a natural,
and lose $1 if the dealer does not.
If dealt two cards of the same value, you can "double", that is, play two

hands, each with one of these cards. The bet also doubles ($2 on each hand).
If a dealt hand totals 10 or 11, you may "double down". This means that you

may double the bet ($2 to $4) and receive exactly one more card on that hand.
Under normal play, you may "hit" (draw a card) as long as your total isn't
over twenty-one. If you "bust" (go over twenty-one), the dealer wins the bet.
When you "stand" (decide not to hit), the dealer hits until attaining a total of
seventeen or more. If the dealer busts, you win the bet.
If both you and the dealer stand, the one with the largest total wins. A tie is a

push.
The machine deals and keeps score. The following questions are asked at appropriate
times. You must answer each question by a y and a carriage return for "yes", or just a
carriage return for "no".
?
Insurance?
Double down?

(This means "do you want a hit?")

Every time the deck is shuffled, the dealer so states and the "action" (total bet) and
"standing" (total won or lost) is printed. To exit, type an interrupt and the action and
standing are printed.

Games

6-11

BOGGLE(6)

SysV

BOGGLE(6)

NAME

boggle - play the game of boggle
SYNOPSIS

lusr/games/boggle [+[+]]
DESCRIPTION

This program is intended for people wishing to sharpen their skills at Boggle (TM
Parker Bros.). If you invoke the program with 4 arguments of 4 letters each (e.g.,
"boggle appl epie moth erhd"), the program forms the obvious Boggle grid and lists
all the words from lusr/dict/words found therein. If you invoke the program without
arguments, it will generate a board for you, let you enter words for 3 minutes, and then
tell you how well you did relative to lusr/dict/words.
The object of Boggle is to find, within 3 minutes, as many words as possible in a 4 by 4
grid of letters. Words may be formed from any sequence of 3 or more adjacent letters in
the grid. The letters may join horizontally, vertically, or diagonally. However, no position in the grid may be used more than once within anyone word. In competitive play
amongst humans, each player is given credit for those of his words which no other
player has found .•
In interactive play, enter your words separated by spaces, tabs, or newlines. A bell will

ring when there is 2:00, 1:00,0:10,0:02,0:01, and 0:00 time left. You may complete
any word started before the expiration of time. You can surrender before time is up by
hitting an interrupt key. While entering words, your erase character is only effective
within the current word and your line kill character is ignored.
Advanced players may wish to invoke the program with one or two plus signs (+) as the
argument. The first + removes the restriction that positions can only be used once in
each word. The second + causes a position to be considered adjacent to itself as well as
its (up to) 8 neighbors.
FILES

lusr/dict/words

6-12

Games

BlLFORTUNE(6)

SysV

BlLFORTUNE(6)

NAME
btlfortune - print a random comment
SYNOPSIS

/usr/games/btlfortune
DESCRIPTION

This is Bell Telephone Labs' version of fortune. btlfortune prints a fortune, anecdote,
saying, or other random comment. All lines are derived from the default fortune database in /usr/gamesllib/btlfortunes.

Games

6-13

BlLGAMMON(6)

SysV

BlLGAMMON(6)

NAME

btJgammon - the game of backgammon
SYNOPSIS

/usr/games/btJgammon
DESCRIPTION

This is Bell Telephone Labs' version of backgammon. It will ask whether you need
instructions.

6-14

Games

BTLHANGMAN(6)

SysV

BTI...HANGMAN(6)

NAME

btlhangman - guess the word
SYNOPSIS

/usr/games/btlhangman [ arg 1
DESCRIPTION

This is Bell Telephone Labs' version of hangman. btl hangman chooses a word at
least seven letters long from a dictionary. You must guess letters, one at a time, until
you guess the word.
The optional argument arg names an alternate dictionary.
FILES

/usr/games/lib/w2006

Dictionary

NOTES

Hyphenated compounds are run together.

Games

6-15

SysV

CANFIELD(6)

CANFIELD(6)

NAME
canfield, cfscores - the solitaire card game canfield
SYNOPSIS
/usr/games/canfield
/usr/games/cfscores [ -a ] [ user]
DESCRIPTION
If you have never played solitaire before, it is recommended that you consult a solitaire
instruction book. In Canfield, tableau cards may be built on each other downward in
alternate colors. An entire pile must be moved as a unit in building. Top cards of the
piles are available to be played on foundations, but never into empty spaces.
Spaces must be filled from the stock. The top card of the stock also is available to be
played on foundations or built on tableau piles. After the stock is exhausted, tableau
spaces may be filled from the talon and the player may keep them open until he wishes
to use them.
Cards are dealt from the hand to the talon by threes and this repeats until there are no
more cards in the hand or the player quits. To have cards dealt onto the talon the player
types ht for his move. Foundation base cards are also automatically moved to the foundation when they become available.
The command c causes canfield to maintain card counting statistics on the bottom of
the screen. When properly used this can greatly increase one's chances of winning.
The rules for betting are somewhat less strict than those used in the official version of
the game. The initial deal costs $13. You may quit at this point or inspect the game.
Inspection costs $13 and allows you to make as many moves as possible without moving any cards from your hand to the talon. (The initial deal places three cards on the
talon; if all these cards are used, three more are made available.) Finally, if the game
seems interesting, you must pay the final installment of $26. At this point you are
credited at the rate of $5 for each card on the foundation; as the game progresses you
are credited with $5 for each card that is moved to the foundation. Each run through
the hand after the first costs $5. The card counting feature costs $1 for each unknown
card that is identified. If the information is toggled on, you are only charged for cards
that became visible since it was last turned on. Thus the maximum cost of information
is $34. Playing time is charged at a rate of $1 per minute.
With no arguments, the program cfscores prints out the current status of your canfield
account. If a user name is specified, it ptints out the status of their canfield account. If
the -a flag is specified, it prints out the canfield accounts for all users that have played
the game since the database was set up.
FILES
/usr/games/canfield
usr/games/cfscores
of scores

6-16

The game itself
The database printer /usr/games/Iib/cfscores

The database

Games

SysV

CRAPS(6)

CRAPS(6)

NAME

craps - the game of craps
SYNOPSIS

/usr/gameslcraps
DESCRIPTION

craps is a fonn of the game of craps that is played in Las Vegas. The program simulates the roller, while you place bets. At any time, you may choose to bet with the roller
or with the House. A bet of a negative amount is taken as a bet with the House; any
other bet is a bet with the roller.
At the start of the game, you have a "bankroll" of $2,000. The program begins promptingwith:
"bet?"
The bet can be all or part of your bankroll. Any bet over the total bankroll is rejected
and the program continues prompting until a proper bet is made.
Once the bet is accepted, the roller throws the dice. The following rules apply (you win
or lose, depending on whether the bet is placed with the roller or with the House; the
odds are even). The first roll is the roll immediately following a bet:

1. On the first roll:
7 or 11 -- wins for the roller;
2,3, or 12 -- wins for the House;
any other number is the point, so roll again (Rule 2 applies)
2. On subsequent rolls:
point -- roller wins;
7 -- House wins;
any other number -- roll again.
If you lose your entire bankroll, the House offers to lend you an additional $2,000. The
program prompts as follows:
"marker?"

A yes (or y) consummates the loan. Any other reply terminates the game.
If you owe the House money, the House reminds you, before you can place a bet, how
many markers are outstanding.
If, at any time, you have outstanding markers and your bankroll exceeds $2,000, the
House asks:
"Repay marker?"

Games

6-17

SysV

CRAPS(6)

CRAPS(6)

A reply of yes (or y) indicates your willingness to repay the loan. If only 1 marker is
outstanding, the debt is immediately repaid. However, if more than 1 marker is outstanding, the House asks:
"How many?"
matkers you want to repay. If you enter an invalid number or just a carriage return, the
program prints an appropriate message and prompts with
"How many?"
until you provide a valid number.

If you accumulate 10 markers (a total of $20,000 borrowed from the House), the program tells you and then exits.
Should your bankroll exceed $50,000, the House automatically deducts from it the total
amount of money needed to payoff all outstanding markers.

If you accumulate $100,000 or more, you break the bank. The program then prompts:
"New game?"
to give the House a chance to win back its money.

The program usually considers any reply other than a yes to be a no. Exceptions to this
are when the program asks you if you want to place a bet (i.e., bet?) and when it asks
how many markers you want to payoff (i.e., How many?).
To exit, send an interrupt (CTRL/I). Before exiting, the program tells you whether you
won, lost, or broke even.
MISCELLANEOUS
The random number generator for the die numbers uses the seconds from the time of
day. Depending on system usage, these numbers, at times, may seem strange but
occurrences of this type in a real dice situation are not uncommon.

6-18

Games

SysV

CRIBBAGE(6)

CRffiBAGE(6)

NAME

cribbage - the card game cribbage
SYNOPSIS
lusrlgames/cribbage [ -req ] name ...
DESCRIPTION

cribbage allows you to play the card game cribbage. The program plays one hand and
you play the other. At the beginning of the game, the program asks if you need to see
the rules of the game. If so, it will print out the appropriate section from According to
Hoyle with more(l).
cribbage first asks you whether you wish to playa short game ("once around", to 61)
or a long game ("twice around", to 121). A response of's' results in a short game; any
other response results in a long game.
At the start of the first game, the program asks you to cut the deck to determine who
gets the first crib. You should respond with a number between 0 and 51, indicating how
many cards down the deck is to be cut. Whoever cuts the lower ranked card gets the
first crib. If more than one game is played, the loser of the previous game gets the first
crib in the current game.
For each hand, the program first prints your hand, whose crib it is, and then asks you to
discard two cards into the crib. The cards are prompted for one per line, and are typed
as explained below.
After discarding, the program cuts the deck (if it is your crib) or asks you to cut the
deck (if it's the program's crib). In the latter case, the appropriate response is a number
from 0 to 39 indicating how far down the remaining 40 cards are to be cut.
After cutting the deck, play starts with the non-dealer (the player who doesn't have the
crib) leading the first card. Play continues until all cards are exhausted. The program
keeps track of the scoring of all points and the total of the cards on the table.
After play, the hands are scored. The program asks you to score your hand (and the
crib, if yours) by printing out the appropriate cards (and the cut card enclosed in brackets). Play continues until one player reaches the game limit (61 or 121).
A carriage return when a numeric input is expected is equivalent to typing the lowest
legal value; when cutting the deck, this is equivalent to choosing the top card.
Cards are specified as rank followed by suit. You may specify ranks by typing a onecharacter identifier, or by spelling out the rank as a word. Following are valid entries:
a
2
3
4

ace

two
three
four
5 five
6 six
7 seven

Games

6-19

SysV

CRIBBAGE(6)

CRIBBAGE(6)

8 eight
9 nine
ten
j jack
q queen
k king
Suits may be specified as:
s spaces
h hearts
d diamonds
c clubs
A card may be specified as:  " "  or  " of" . If the single
letter rank and suit designations are used, the space separating the suit and rank may be
left out. Also, if only one card of the desired rank is playable, typing the rank is
sufficient. For example, if your hand is "2H, 4D, 5C, 6H, IC, KD" and you want to
discard the king gf diamonds, any of the following could be typed: "k", "king",
"kd", "k d", "k of d", "king d", "king of d", "k diamonds", "k of diamonds",
"king diamonds", or "king of diamonds".
OPTIONS

-e

If you make a mistake scoring your hand or crib, provide an explanation of the

correct score. (This is especially useful for beginning players.)

6-20

-q

Print a shorter fonn of all messages. (This is only recommended for users who
have already played the game without specifying this option.)

-r

Instead of asking the player to cut the deck, randomly cut the deck.

Games

DMOIRE(6)

Domain/OS SysV

DMOIRE(6)

NAME
dmoire - Domain/Dialogue-based moire generator
SYNOPSIS

/usr/games/dmoire [-w I -b I -i] [-inv -nb -nd] [-fg color] [-bg color]
DESCRIPTION

dmoire creates moire patterns by moving simple geometric shapes across the display
and allowing these shapes to overlap. By default, dmoire draws in the background of
the screen, but will also use a separate window, borrow the display, or even the window
its own menus are in.
This program was adapted from a public domain desk accessory.
OPTIONS

-w[indow]

Draw moires in a new window.

-b[orrow]

Borrow the display and draw a simple moire.

-i[ndialog]

Draw inside the menu interface.

-inv[erse]

Invert the background and foreground colors.

-nb[order]

Use with -w to remove the window border.

-nd[ialog]

Do not supply dialog menus.

-fg

Specify a foreground color as an index into your color map (0255).

-bg

Specify a background color.

BUGS

The -i option is a hack which doesn't work very well.

Games

6-21

FACTOR(6)

SysV

FACTOR(6)

NAME

factor - factoring program
SYNOPSIS

/usr/games/factor [number]
DESCRIPTION

factor prints the prime factors of the integer number and then exits. If you run factor
without an argument, it reads lines from the standard input, factoring each number
given. Entering a blank line or a non-numeric character causes factor to exit.

6-22

Games

SysV

FISH(6)

FISH(6)

NAME
&h - play "Go Fish"
SYNOPSIS

lusr/gameslfish
DESCRIPTION

&h plays the game of "Go Fish," a childrens' card game. The object is to accumulate
"books" of 4 cards with the same face value. The players alternate turns; each turn
begins with one player selecting a card from his hand, and asking the other player for
all cards of that face value. If the other player has one or more cards of that face value
in his hand, he gives them to the first player, and the first player makes another request.
Eventually, the first player asks for a card which is not in the hand of the second player,
who replies "GO FISH!" The first player then draws a card from the pool of undealt
cards. If this is the card he had last requested, he draws again. When a book is made,
either through drawing or requesting, the cards are laid down and no further action
takes place with that face value.
To play the computer, simply make guesses by typing a, 2, 3, 4, S, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, j, q, or
k when asked. Pressing  gives you information about the size of your
opponent's hand and the pool, and tells you about your opponent's books. Entering the
command p in place of your first guess puts you into the "pro" level. The default is not
very difficult.

Games

6-23

FLAKE(6)

Domain/OS SysV

FLAKE(6)

NAME

flake - induce tenninal dandruff
SYNOPSIS
/usr/games/flake
DESCRIPTION
flake causes bits of the screen display io fall off. Type CTRL/Q to put a stop to it.

6-24

Games

SysV

FORTUNE(6)

FORTUNE(6)

NAME

fortune - print a random, hopefully interesting, adage
SYNOPSIS

lusr/games/fortune [ - ] [ -wslao 1 [ -m pattern 1 [file 1
DESCRIPTION

fortune with no arguments prints out a random adage. You may specify an alternate file
of adages from which to read. This file must be created by strfile(6). Only one such
file may be named in a single command line; subsequent ones are ignored.
OPTIONS

-w

Wait before termination for an amount of time calculated from the
number of characters in the message. This is useful if fortune is executed as part of the logout procedure to guarantee that the message can
be read before the screen is cleared.

-s

Short apothegms only.

-I

Long dicta only.

-0

Choose from an alternate list of aphorisms, often used for potentially
offensive ones.

-a

Choose from either list of maxims.

-m pattern

Print all fortunes which match the regular expression pattern. See
regexp(3).

FILES

/usr/gamesllib/fortunes.dat
SEE ALSO

regexp(3), strfile(6)

Games

6-25

SysY

HANGMAN(6)

HANGMAN(6)

NAME

hangman - Computer version of the game hangman
SYNOPSIS

lusr/games/hangman
DESCRIPTION
In hangman, the computer picks a word from the online word list and you must try to

guess it. The computer keeps track of which letters have been guessed and how many
wrong guesses you have made on the screen in a graphic fashion.
FILES

lusr/dict/words

6-26

Online word list

Games

SysV

HUNT(6)

HUNT(6)

NAME
hunt - a multi-player multi-terminal game
SYNOPSIS

/usr/games/hunt [-q] [-m] [hostname] [-I name]
DESCRIPTION

The object of the game hunt is to kill off the other players. There are no rooms, no
treasures, and no monsters. Instead, you wander around a maze, find grenades, trip
mines, and shoot down walls and players. The more players you kill before you die, the
better your score is.
hunt normally looks for an active game on the local network; if none is found, it starts
one up on the local host. You may specify the location of the game by providing a
hostname argument.
hunt only works on screens with at least 24 lines, 80 columns, and cursor addressing.
The screen is divided into 3 areas. On the right hand side is the status area. It shows
you how much damage you've sustained, how many charges you have left, who's in the
game, who's scarming (shown by an asterisk in front of the name), who's cloaked
(shown by a plus sign in front of the name), and other players' scores. The rest of the
screen is taken up by your map of the maze, except for the 24th line, which is used for
longer messages that don't fit in the status area.
The screen symbols used in hunt are as follows:

-1+

walls
diagonal (deflecting) walls
doors (dispersion walls)
#
small mine
large mine
g
shot
grenade
a
satchel charge
o
@
bomb
small slime bomb
s
big slime bomb
$
> or . The  is required to allow
recovery from typos which can be very expensive, like discarding safeties.

U

Use a card. The card is again indicated by its number, followed by a
 or .

o

Toggle ordering the hand. By default off, if turned on it will sort the cards in
your hand appropriately. This is not recommended for the impatient on slow
terminals.

Q

Quit the game. This will ask for confirmation, just to be sure. Hitting
 (or 
without a name, the save will be terminated and the game resumed.

R

Redraw the screen from scratch. The command CTRL/L will also work.

W

Toggle window type. This switches the score window between the startup
window (with all the command names) and the end-of-game window. Using
the end-of-game window saves time by eliminating the switch at the end of the
game to show the final score. Recommended for hackers and other miscreants.

If you make a mistake, an error message will be printed on the last line of the score
window, and a bell will beep.
At the end of each hand or game, you will be asked if you wish to play another. If not
it will ask you if you want to save the game. If you do, and the save is unsuccessful
play will be resumed as if you had said you wanted to play another hand/game. Thi!
allows you to use the "S" command to reattempt the save.

Games

6-3:

SysV

MILLE(6)

MILLE(6)

CARDS
Here is some useful information. The number in parentheses after the card name is the
number of that card in the deck:
Hazard

Repair

Safety

Out of Gas (2)
Flat Tire (2)
Accident (2)
Stop (4)
Speed Limit (3)

Gasoline (6)
Spare Tire (6)
Repairs (6)
Go (14)
End of Limit (6)

Extra Tank (I)
Puncture Proof (1)
Driving Ace (1)
Right of Way (1)

25 - (10), 50 - (10), 75 - (10),100 - (12), 200 - (4)
RULES
Object: The point of this game is to get a total of 5000 points in several hands. Each
hand is a race to put down exactly 700 miles before your opponent does. Beyond the
points gained by putting down milestones, there are several other ways of making
points.
Overview: The game is played with a deck of 101 cards. Distance cards represent a
number of miles traveled. They come in denominations of 25, 50, 75, 100, and 200.
When one is played, it adds that many miles to the player's trip so far this hand.
Hazard cards are used to prevent your opponent from putting down Distance cards.
They can only be played if your opponent has a Go card on top of the Battle pile. The
cards are Out of Gas, Accident, Flat Tire, Speed Limit, and Stop. Remedy cards fix
problems caused by Hazard cards played on you by your opponent. The cards are
Gasoline, Repairs, Spare Tire, End of Limit, and Go. Safety cards prevent your
opponent from putting specific Hazard cards on you in the first place. They are Extra
Tank, Driving Ace, Puncture Proof, and Right of Way, and there are only one of
each in the deck.
Board Layout: The board is split into several areas. From top to bottom, they are:
SAFETY AREA (unlabeled): This is where the safeties will be placed as they are
played. HAND: These are the cards in your hand. BATTLE: This is the Battle pile.
All the Hazard and Remedy Cards are played here, except the Speed Limit and End of
Limit cards. Only the top card is displayed, as it is the only effective one. SPEED:
The Speed pile. The Speed Limit and End of Limit cards are played here to control
the speed at which the player is allowed to put down miles. MILEAGE: Miles are
placed here. The total of the numbers shown here is the distance traveled so far.
Play: The first pick alternates between the two players. Each turn usually starts with a
pick from the deck. The player then plays a card, or if this is not pos3ible or desirable,
discards one. Normally, a play or discard of a single card constitutes a turn. If the card
played is a safety, however, the same player takes another tum immediately.
6-34

Games

MILLE(6)

SysV

Mll..LE(6)

This repeats until one of the players reaches 700 points or the deck runs out. If someone reaches 700, they have the option of going for an Extension, which means that the
play continues until someone reaches 1000 miles.
Hazard and Remedy Cards: Hazard Cards are played on your opponent's Battle and
Speed piles. Remedy Cards are used for undoing the effects of your opponent's nastiness.
Go (Green Light) must be the top card on your Battle pile for you to play any
mileage, unless you have played the Right of Way card (see below).
Stop is played on your opponent's Go card to prevent them from playing mileage
until they playa Go card.
Speed Limit is played on your opponent's Speed pile. Until they play an End of
Limit they can only play 25 or 50 mile cards, presuming their Go card allows
them to do even that.
End of Limit is played on your Speed pile to nullify a Speed Limit played by
your opponent.
Out of Gas is played on your opponent's Go card. They must then playa Gasoline card, and then a Go card before they can play any more mileage.
Flat Tire is played on your opponent's Go card. They must then playa Spare
Tire card, and then a Go card before they can play any more mileage.
Accident is played on your opponent's Go card. They must then playa Repairs
card, and then a Go card before they can play any more mileage.
Safety Cards: Safety cards prevent your opponent from playing the corresponding
Hazard cards on you for the rest of the hand. It cancels an attack in progress, and
always entitles the player to an extra turn.
Right of Way prevents your opponent from playing both Stop and Speed Limit
cards on you. It also acts as a permanent Go card for the rest of the hand, so you
can play mileage as long as there is not a Hazard card on top of your Battle pile.
In this case only, your opponent can play Hazard cards directly on a Remedy card
other than a Go card.
Extra Tank When played, your opponent cannot play an Out of Gas on your
Battle Pile.
Puncture Proof When played, your opponent cannot playa Flat Tire on your
Battle Pile.
Driving Ace When played, your opponent cannot play an Accident on your Battle Pile.
Distance Cards: Distance cards are played when you have a Go card on your Battle
pile, or a Right of Way in your Safety area and are not stopped by a Hazard Card. They
can be played in any combination that totals exactly 700 miles, except that you cannot
play more than two 200 mile cards in one hand. A hand ends whenever one player gets
exactly 700 miles or the deck runs out. In that case, play continues until neither someone reaches 700, or neither player can use any cards in their hand. If the trip is completed after the deck runs out, this is called Delayed Action.
Games

6-35

MILLE(6)

SysV

M1LLE(6)

Coup Fourre: This is a French fencing tenn for a counter-thrust move as part of a
parry to an opponents attack. In Mille Bournes, it is used as follows: If an opponent
plays a Hazard card, and you have the corresponding Safety in your hand, you play it
immediately, even before you draw. This immediately removes the Hazard card from
your Battle pile, and protects you from that card for the rest of the game. This gives
you more points (see "Scoring" below).
Scoring: Scores are totaled at the end of each hand, whether or not anyone completed
the trip. The tenns used in the Score window have the following meanings:
Milestones Played: Each player scores as many miles as they played before the
trip ended.
Each Safety: 100 points for each safety in the Safety area.
All 4 Safeties: 300 points if all four safetie~ are played.
Each Coup Fourre : 300 points for each Coup Fourre accomplished.
The following bonus scores can apply only to the winning player.
Trip Completed: 400 points bonus for completing the trip to 700 or 1000.
Safe Trip :.300 points bonus for completing the trip without using any 200 mile
cards.
Delayed Action : 300 points bonus for finishing after the deck was exhausted.
Extension: 200 points bonus for completing a 1000 mile trip.
Shut-Out: 500 points bonus for completing the trip before your opponent played
any mileage cards.
Running totals are also kept for the current score for each player for the hand (Hand
Total), the game (Overall Total), and number of games won (Games).

6-36

Games

SysV

MONOP(6)

MONOP(6)

NAME
monop - Monopoly game
SYNOPSIS

lusr/games/monop
DESCRIPTION

monop is reminiscent of the Parker Brothers game Monopoly for 1 to 9 players. The
program assumes that the rules of Monopoly are known. It follows the standard rules,
with the exception that if a property goes up for auction and there are only two solvent
players, no auction is held and the property remains unowned.
The game, in effect, lends the player money, so it is possible to buy something which
you carmot afford. However, as soon as a person goes into debt, he must "fix the problem", (i.e., make himself solvent) before play can continue. If this is not possible, the
player's property reverts to his debtee (either a player or the bank). A player can resign
at any time to any person or the bank, which puts the property back on the board
unowned.
Any time that the expected response to a question is a string, (for instance, a name,
place or person) you can type a question mark (?) to get a list of valid answers. It is not
possible to input a negative number, nor is it ever necessary.
COMMANDS
quit
print

Quit the game. Asks for confirmation.
Print out the current board. The columns have the following meanings:
Name The first ten characters of the name of the square
Own The player number of the owner of the property
Price The cost of the property (if any)

where

Mg

This field has an asterisk (*) in it if the property is mortgaged

#

If the property is a Utility or Railroad, this is the number of such
owned by the owner. If the property is land, this is the number of
houses on it.

Rent

Current rent on the property. If it is not owned, there is no rent.

Tell where all the players are. An asterisk (*) indicates the current player.

own holdings
List your own holdings (money, "get out of jail free" cards, and property).
holdings Look at anyone's holdings. The program will ask you whose holdings you
wish to look at. When you are finished, type "done".
shell

Games

Escape to a shell. When the shell dies, the program continues where you left
off.

6-37

SysV

MONOP(6)

MONOP(6)

mortgage
Display a list of mortgageable property. Asks which you wish to mortgage.
unmortgage
Unmortgage mortgaged property.
buy

Display a list of monopolies on which you can buy houses. If there is more
than one, asks you which you want to buy for, and then asks you how many
for each piece of property, giving the current amount in parentheses after the
property name. If you build in an unbalanced manner (a disparity of more
than one house within the same monopoly), asks you to re-enter values.

sell

Display a list of monopolies from which you can sell houses. It operates in a
manner analogous to buy.

card

Use a "get out of jail free" card. Informs you if you're not in jail, or you
don't have such a card.

pay

Pay $50 to get out of jail, whence you are put on the Just Visiting space.

trade

Trade with another player. Asks you whom you wish to trade with, and then
asks you what each wishes to give up. You can get a summary at the end,
and, in all cases, it asks for confirmation of the trade before completing it.

resign

Resign to another player or the bank. If you resign to the bank, all property
reverts to its virgin state, and "get out of jail free" cards revert to the deck.

save

Save the current game in a file for later play. You can continue play later on
either by giving the save file's name as an argument to the monop command,
or by using the restore command (see below). Asks you which file you wish
to save to; if the file exists, asks you to confirm that you wish to overwrite it.

restore

Read in a previously saved game from a file. Leaves the file intact.

roll

Roll the dice and move forward to your new location. If you simply press
 without entering a command, a roll is performed.

FILES

/usr/games/lib/cards.pck

Chance and Community Chest cards

BUGS

No command can be given an argument instead of a response to a query.

6-38

Games

SysV

MOO(6)

MOO(6)

NAME

moo - guessing game
SYNOPSIS

lusr/games/moo
DESCRIPTION

moo is a guessing game imported from England. The computer picks a four-digit
number which you try to guess; moo scores you on each guess. A "cow" is a correct
digit in an incorrect position. A' 'bull" is a correct digit in a correct position. The
game continues until you guess the number (a score of four bulls).

Games

6-39

NUMBER(6)

SysV

NUMBER(6)

NAME
number - convert Arabic numerals to English
SYNOPSIS

lusr/games/number
DESCRIPTION

number copies the standard input to the standard output, changing each decimal
number to a fully spelled-out version.

6-40

Games

PRIMES (6)

SysV

PRIMES(6)

NAME

primes - print prime numbers
SYNOPSIS

/usr/games/primes [number 1
DESCRIPTION

primes displays the prime numbers equal to or greater than the input number. If you do
not provide an argument, primes reads a line from the standard input. To exit the program, type an interrupt.

Games

6-41

Domain/OS SysV

PUZZLE(6)

PUZZLB(6)

NAME

puzzle - puzzle game
SYNOPSIS
/usr/games/puzzle
DESCRIPTION
puzzle lets you play the familiar IS-tile game. To obtain online help, position the cursor over the puzzle border and press the HELP key.

COMMANDS
Each of the mouse buttons has a particular function:
Left

Use to select items from the menu, and to move individual tiles.

Middle

Back up one move.

Right

Move one step forward in solving the puzzle.

SEE ALSO
scramble(6)

6-42

Games

SysV

QUIZ(6)

QUIZ(6)

NAME

quiz - test your knowledge
SYNOPSIS

/usr/games/quiz [ -i file] [ -t ] [ category1 category2 ]
DESCRIPTION

quiz gives associative knowledge tests on various subjects. It asks items chosen from
category1 and expects answers from category2. If no categories are specified, quiz
gives instructions and lists the available categories.
quiz tells a correct answer whenever you type a bare newline. At the end of input, upon
interrupt, or when questions run out, quiz reports a score and terminates.
The lines of the index file have the following syntax:
line
= category newline I category ':'line
category = alternate I category 'I' alternate
alternate =empty I alternate primary
primary = character I '[' category T I option
option =' ( , category ')'
The first category on each line of an index file names an information file. The remaining categories specify the order and contents of the data in each line of the information
file. Information files have the same syntax. Use a backslash (\) as with sh( 1) to quote
syntactically significant characters or to insert transparent newlines into a line. When
either a question or its answer is empty, quiz will refrain from asking it.
OPTIONS
-t

-ifile

Enable tutorial mode, where missed questions are repeated later, and
material is gradually introduced as you learn.
Substitute the named file for the default index file.

FILES

/usr/gameslquiz.k/*
BUGS
The construct 'al ab' doesn't work in an information file. Use 'alb)'.

Games

6-43

SysV

RAIN(6)

RAIN(6)

NAME

rain - animated raindrops display
SYNOPSIS

lusr/games/rain
DESCRIPTION

rain simulates the pitter-patter of raindrops falling on your tty. It looks best at 9600
baud or faster. As with all programs that use termcap(3), the TERM environment variable must be set (and exported) to the type of the terminal being used.
rain can only be halted with an interrupt.
FILES

letc/termcap

6-44

Garnes

SysV

RANDOM(6)

RANDOM(6)

NAME

random - random number generator
SYNOPSIS

/usr/games/random [numbers] [characters]
DESCRIPTION

random is a random number generator that accepts input of numbers or characters.
There is about a 50% probability that the program will match and output the lines that
you use as input. You can also perform a particular task (e.g., combining lines in a file,
listing a directory, etc.) and then use random in a pipeline to produce a random sampling of the output. The random comand is a likely candidate for use in other games
that require the use of a random number generator.
EXAMPLE

The following command line lists a random percentage (about 50%) of the contents of
mydir:
$ Is mydir I random

Games

6-45

REVSCR(6)

Domain/OS SysV

REVSCR(6)

NAME

revscr - reverse screen
SYNOPSIS

lusr/gameslrevscr
DESCRIPTION

revscr reflects the display image twice, first about the horizontal axis and then about
the vertical axis. The effect is to tum the image upside down. Press any key to restore
the display to its nonnal state.
OPTIONS

-short

6-46

Reflect about the horizontal axis only. Useful on machines which perfonn the
second reflection slowly.

Games

SysV

ROBOTS(6)

ROBOTS(6)

NAME

robots - fight off villainous robots
SYNOPSIS

/usr/garnesl robots [ -sjta ] [ scorefile ]
DESCRIPTION

robots pits you against evil robots who are trying to kill you (which is why they are
evil). Fortunately for you, although they are evil they are not very bright. The robots
have a habit of bumping into each other, thus turning themselves into junkpiles. In
order to survive, you must get them to kill each other off, since you have no offensive
weaponry. You are endowed with one defensive measure: a teleportation device.
When two robots run into each other or a junk pile, they die. If a robot runs into you,
you die. When a robot dies, you get 10 points, and when all the robots die, you start on
the next field. This keeps up until they finally get you.
Robots are represented on the screen by plus signs (+), the junk heaps resulting from
their collisions by asterisks (*), and you (the good guy) by an at sign (@).
Only five scores are allowed per user on the score file. If you make it into the score file,
you will be shown the list at the end of the game. If an alternate score file is specified,
that will be used instead of the standard file for scores.
COMMANDS

All commands can be preceded by a count. For all commands except w, the program
saves you from typos by stopping you short of being eaten. However, with w you take
the risk of dying by miscalculation.
h

Move one square left
Move one square right

k

Move one square up

j

Move one square down

Y

Move one square up and left

u

Move one square up and right

b

Move one square down and left

n

Move one square down and right

• or  Do nothing for one turn
HJKLBNYU
>

Run as far as possible in the given direction
Do nothing for as long as possible
Teleport to a random location

Games

6-47

SysV

ROBOTS(6)

w

ROBOTS(6)

Wait until they all die (or you do). If you use the w command and survive to the next level, you will get a bonus of 10% for each robot which
died after you decided to wait. If you die, however, you get nothing.

q

Quit

"L

Redraw the screen

OPTIONS

-s

Don't play, just show the score file

-j

Jump, i.e., when you run, don't show any intermediate positions; only show
things at the end. This is useful on slow terminals.

-t

Teleport automatically when you have no other option. This is a little disconcerting until you get used to it, and then it is very nice.

-a

Advance into the higher levels directly, skipping the lower, easier levels. You
receive a 600-point bonus for successful completion of the first field.

FILES

/usr/gameslIib/ robots_roll

6-48

Score file

Games

SysV

SAIL(6)

SAIL(6)

NAME
sail - multi-user wooden ships and iron men
SYNOPSIS

sail [ -s [ -I

1 1 [ -x 1 [ -b 1 [ num 1

DESCRIPTION

sail is a computer version of Avalon Hill's game of fighting sail originally developed
by S. Craig Taylor.
Players of sail take command of an old fashioned Man of War and fight other players or
the computer. They may re-enact one of the many historical sea battles recorded in the
game, or they can choose a fictional battle.
As a sea captain in the sail Navy, the player has complete control over the workings of
his ship. He must order every maneuver, change the set of his sails, and judge the right
moment to let loose the terrible destruction of his broadsides. In addition to fighting the
enemy, he must hamess the powers of the wind and sea to make them work for him.
The outcome of many battles during the age of sail was decided by the ability of one
captain to hold the "weather gauge."
OPTIONS

-s

Print the names and ships of the top ten sailors.

-I

Show the login name. Only effective with -so

-x

Play the first available ship instead of prompting for a choice.

-b

No bells.

mSTORICAL INFO

Old Square Riggers were very maneuverable ships capable of intricate sailing. Their
only disadvantage was an inability to sail very close to the wind. The design of a
wooden ship allowed only for the guns to bear to the left and right sides. A few guns of
small aspect (usually 6 or 9 pounders) could point forward, but their effect was small
compared to a 68 gun broadside of 24 or 32 pounders. The guns bear approximately
like so:

\
---0

b---------------\
\
\

up to a range of ten (for round shot)

\
\
\

Games

6-49

SysV

SAIL(6)

SAIL(6)

An interesting phenomenon occurred when a broadside was fired down the length of an
enemy ship. The shot tended to bounce along the deck and did several times more damage. This phenomenon was called a rake. Because the bows of a ship are very strong
and present a smaller target than the stem, a stem rake (firing from the stem to the bow)
causes more damage than a bow rake.

b

Stern rake!

00

a

Most ships were equipped with carronades, which were very large, close range cannons.
American ships from the revolution until the War of 1812 were almost entirely armed
with carronades. The period of history covered in sail runs approximately from the
1770's until the end of Napoleonic France in 1815.
Fighting ships came in several sizes classed by armament. The mainstays of any fleet
were its "Ships of the Line", or "Line of Battle Ships". They were so named because
these ships fought together in great lines. They were close enough for mutual support,
yet every ship could fire both its broadsides. We get the modem words "ocean liner," or
"liner," and "battleship" from "ship of the line." The most common size was the the 74
gun two decked ship of the line. The two gun decks usually mounted 18 and 24
pounder guns.
The pride of the fleet were the first rates. These were huge three decked ships of the
line mounting 80 to 136 guns. The guns in the three tiers were usually 18,24, and 32
pounders in that order from top to bottom.
Various other ships came next. They were almost all "razees," or ships of the line with
one deck sawed off. They mounted 40-64 guns and were a poor cross between a frigate
and a line of battle ship. They neither had the speed of the former nor the firepower of
the latter.
Next came the "eyes of the fleet." Frigates came in many sizes mounting anywhere
from 32 to 44 guns. They were very handy vessels. They could outsail anything bigger
and outshoot anything smaller. Frigates didn't fight in lines of battle as the much
bigger 74's did. Instead, they harassed the enemy's rear or captured crippled ships.
They were much more useful in missions away from the fleet, such as cutting out
expeditions or boat actions. They could hit hard and get away fast.
Lastly, there were the corvettes, sloops, and brigs. These were smaller ships mounting
typically fewer than 20 guns. A corvette was only slightly smaller than a frigate, so one
might have up to 30 guns. Sloops were used for carrying dispatches or passengers.
Brigs were something you built for land-locked lakes.

6-50

Games

SAIL(6)

SysV

SAIL(6)

SAIL PARTICULARS

Ships in sail are represented by two characters. One character represents the bow of the
ship, and the other represents the stem. Ships have nationalities and numbers. The first
ship of a nationality is number 0, the second number I, etc. Therefore, the first British
ship in a game would be printed as "bO". The second Brit would be "bl", and the fifth
Don would be "s4".
Ships can set normal sails, called Battle Sails, or bend on extra canvas called Full Sails.
A ship under full sail is a beautiful sight indeed, and it can move much faster than a
ship under Battle Sails. The only trouble is, with full sails set, there is so much tension
on sail and rigging that a well aimed round shot can burst a sail into ribbons where it
would only cause a little hole in a loose sail. For this reason, rigging damage is doubled
on a ship with full sails set.
A ship with full sails set has a capital letter for its nationality. For example, a French
ship, normally "fO", with full sails set would be printed as "FO".
When a ship is battered into a listing hulk, the last man aboard "strikes the colors."
This ceremony is the ship's formal surrender. The nationality character of a surrendered ship is printed as "!". Thus, the French ship of the last example would soon be
n!o".
A ship has a random chance of catching fire or sinking when it reaches the stage of listing hulk. A sinking ship has a tilde
printed for its nationality, and a ship on fire and
about to explode has a pound sign (#) printed.

n

Captured ships become the nationality of the prize crew. Therefore, if an American
ship captures a British ship, the British ship will have an "a" printed for its nationality.
In addition, the ship number is changed to "&","''', "(", ,")", "*", or "+" depending upon
the original number, be it 0,1,2,3,4, or 5. E.g., the "bO" captured by an American
becomes the "a&". The "s4" captured by the French becomes the "f*".
MOVEMENT

Movement is the most confusing part of sail to many. Ships can head in 8 directions:

o
b

o

bO

b

o

b

o
b

o
b

Ob

b

o

The stem of a ship moves when it turns. The bow remains stationary. Ships can always
tum, regardless of the wind (unless they are becalmed). All ships drift when they lose
headway. If a ship doesn't move forward at all for two turns, it will begin to drift. If a
ship has begun to drift, then it must move forward before it turns, if it plans to do more
than make a right or left tum, which is always possible.

Games

6-51

SysV

SAIL(6)

SAIL(6)

Movement commands to sail are a string of forward moves and turns. An example is
"13". It will tum a ship left and then move it ahead 3 spaces. In the drawing above, the
"bO" made 7 successive left turns. When sail prompts you for a move, it prints three
characters of import, e.g.,
move (7,4):
The first number is the maximum number of moves you can make, including turns. The
second number is the maximum number of turns you can make. Between the numbers
is sometimes printed a single quote ('). If the quote is present, it means that your ship
has been drifting, and you must move ahead to regain headway before you tum (see
note above). Some of the possible moves for the example above are as follows:
move
move
move
move
move
move

(7, 4):
(7, 4):
(7,4):
(7, 4):
(7,4):
(7, 4):

7
1
d
6r
Sri
Ilrlr2

/* drift, or do nothing */

Because square riggers performed so poorly sailing into the wind, if at any point in a
movement command you tum into the wind, the movement stops there:
move (7, 4): 1114
Movement Error;
Helm: 111
Moreover, whenever you make a tum, your movement allowance drops to the lesser of
a) what's left and b) what you would have at the new attitude. In short, if you tum
closer to the wind, you most likely won't be able to sail the full allowance printed in the
"move" prompt.
Old sailing captains had to keep an eye constantly on the wind. Captains in sail are no
different. A ship's ability to move depends on its attitide to the wind. The best angle
possible is to have the wind off your quarter, that is, just off the stem. The direction
rose on the side of the screen gives the possible movements for your ship at all positions
to the wind. Battle sail speeds are given first, and full sail speeds are given in
parenthesis.

o

1 (2)

\11
-"-3(6)

11\
I 4

(7)

3 (6)

6-52

Games

SysV

SAIL(6)

SAIL(6)

Pretend the bow of your ship (the "''') is pointing upward and the wind is blowing from
the bottom to the top of the page. The numbers at the bottom "3(6)" will be your speed
under battle or full sails in such a situation. If the wind is off your quarter, then you can
move "4(7)". If the wind is off your beam, "3(6)". If the wind is off your bow, then
you can only move "1(2)". Facing into the wind, you can't move at all. Ships facing
into the wind were said to be "in irons" .
WINDSPEED AND DIRECITON

The windspeed and direction is displayed as a little weather vane on the side of the
screen. The number in the middle of the vane indicates the wind speed, and the + to indicates the wind direction. The wind blows from the + sign (high pressure) to the sign (low pressure). E.g.,
I
3

+
The wind speeds are 0 = becalmed, 1 = light breeze, 2 = moderate breeze, 3 = fresh
breeze, 4 =strong breeze, 5 = gale, 6 = full gale, 7 = hurricane. If a hurricane shows
up, all ships are destroyed.
GRAPPLING AND FOULING
If two ships collide, they run the risk of becoming tangled together. This is called

"fouling." Fouled ships are stuck together, and neither can move. They can unfoul
each other if they want to. Boarding parties can only be sent across to ships when the
antagonists are either fouled or grappled.
Ships can grapple each other by throwing grapnels into the rigging of the other.
The number of fouls and grapples you have are displayed on the upper right of the
screen.
BOARDING

Boarding was a very costly venture in terms of human life. Boarding parties may be
formed in sail to either board an enemy ship or to defend your own ship against attack.
Men organized as Defensive Boarding Parties fight twice as hard to save their ship as
men left unorganized.
The boarding strength of a crew depends upon its quality and upon the number of men
sent.
CREW QUALITY

The British seaman was world renowned for his sailing abilities. American sailors,
however, were actually the best seamen in the world. Because the American Navy
offered twice the wages of the Royal Navy, British seamen who liked the sea defected
to America by the thousands.

Games

6-53

SysV

SAIL(6)

SAIL(6)

In sail, crew quality is quantized into 5 energy levels. "Elite" crews can outshoot and

outfight all,other sailors. "Crack" crews are next. "Mundane" crews are average, and
"Green" and "Mutinous" crews are below average. A good rule of thumb is that
"Crack" or "Elite" crews get one extra hit per broadside compared to "Mundane" crews.
Don't expect too much from "Green" crews.
BROADSIDES

Your two broadsides may be loaded with four kinds of shot: grape, chain, round, and
double. You have guns and carronades in both the port and starboard batteries. Carronades only have a range of two, so you have to get in close to be able to fire them.
You have the choice of firing at the hull or rigging of another ship. If the range of the
ship is greater than 6, then you may only shoot at the rigging.
The types of shot and their advantages are:
Round

Range of 10. Good for hull or rigging hits.

Double

Range of 1. Extra good for hull or rigging hits. Double takes two turns
to load.

Chain

Range of 3. Excellent for tearing down rigging. Cannot damage hull or
guns, though.

Grape

Range of 1. Sometimes devastating against enemy crews.

On the side of the screen is displayed some vital infonnation about your ship:
Load D! R!
Hull 9
Crew442
Guns 4 4
Carr 2 2
Rigg 5555
"Load" shows what your port (left) and starboard (right) broadsides are loaded with. A
"!" after the type of shot indicates that it is an initial broadside. Initial broadside were
loaded with care before battle and before the decks ran red with blood. As a consequence, initial broadsides are a little more effective than broadsides loaded later. A "*"
after the type of shot indicates that the gun crews are still loading it, and you cannot fire
yet. "Hull" shows how much hull you have left. "Crew" shows your three sections of
crew. As your crew dies off, your ability to fire decreases. "Guns" and "Carr" show
your port and starboard guns. As you lose guns, your ability to fire decreases. "Rigg"
shows how much rigging you have on your 3 or 4 masts. As rigging is shot away, you
lose mobility.
EFFECTIVENESS OF FIRE

It is very dramatic when a ship fires its thunderous broadsides, but the mere opportunity
to fire them does not guarantee any hits. Many factors influence the destructive force of
a broadside. First of all, and the chief factor, is distance. It is harder to hit a ship at

6-54

Games

SysV

SAIL(6)

SAIL(6)

range ten than it is to hit one sloshing alongside. Next is raking. Raking fire, as mentioned before, can sometimes dismast a ship at range ten. Next, crew size and quality
affects the damage done by a broadside. The number of guns firing also bears on the
point, so to speak. Lastly, weather affects the accuracy of a broadside. If the seas are
high (5 or 6), then the lower gunports of ships of the line can't even be opened to run
out the guns. This gives frigates and other flush decked vessels an advantage in a
storm. The scenario Pellew vs. The Droits de L' Homme takes advantage of this peculiar
circumstance.
REPAIRS
Repairs may be made to your Hull, Guns, and Rigging at the slow rate of two points per
three turns. The message "Repairs Completed" will be printed if no more repairs can be
made.
PECULIARITIES OF COMPUTER SHIPS
Computer ships in sail follow all the rules above with a few exceptions. Computer
ships never repair damage. If they did, the players could never beat them. They play
well enough as it is. As a consolation, the computer ships can fire double shot every
turn. That fluke is a good reason to keep your distance. The driver figures out the
moves of the computer ships. It computes them with a typical distance function and a
depth-first search to find the maximum "score."

COMMANDS
Commands are given to sail by typing a single character. You will then be prompted
for further input.

Games

f

Fire broadsides if they bear

I

Reload

L

Unload broadsides (to change ammo)

m

Move

i

Print the closest ship

I

Print all ships

F

Find a particular ship or ships (e.g. "a?" for all Americans)

s

Send a message around the fleet

b

Attempt to board an enemy ship

B

Recall boarding parties

c

Change set of sail

r

Repair

u

Attempt to unfoul

g

Grapple/ungrapple

6-55

SAIL(6)

SysV

v

SAIL(6)

Print version number of game

CTRLlL Redraw screen

Q

Quit

C

Center your ship in the window

U

Move window up

D, N

Move window down

H

Move window left

J

Move window right

S

Toggle window to follow your ship or stay where it is

SCENARIOS
Here is a summary of the scenarios in sail:

Ranger vs. Drake:
Wind from the N, blowing a fresh breeze.
(a) Ranger
(b) Drake

19 gun Sloop (crack crew) (7 pts)
17 gun Sloop (crack crew) (6 pts)

The Battle of F1amborough Head:
Wind from the S, blowing a fresh breeze.
This is John Paul Jones' first famous battle. Aboard the Bonhomme Richard, he was
able to overcome the Serapis's greater firepower by quickly boarding her.
(a) Bonhomme Rich
(b) Serapis

42 gun Corvette (crack crew) (11 pts)
44 gun Frigate (crack crew) (12 pts)

Arbuthnot and Des Touches:
Wind from the N, blowing a gale.
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)

America
Befford
Adamant
London
Royal Oak
(f) Neptune
(f) Duc Bougogne
(f) Conquerant
(f) Provence
(f) Romulus

6-56

64 gun Ship of the Line (crack crew) (20 pts)
74 gun Ship of the Line (crack crew) (26 pts)
50 gun Ship of the Line (crack crew) (17 pts)
98 gun 3 Decker SOL (crack crew) (28 pts)
74 gun Ship of the Line (crack crew) (26 pts)
74 gun Ship of the Line (average crew) (24 pts)
80 gun 3 Decker SOL (average crew) (27 pts)
74 gun Ship of the Line (average crew) (24 pts)
64 gun Ship of the Line (average crew) (18 pts)
44 gun Ship of the Line (average crew) (10 pts)
Games

SysV

SAIL(6)

SAIL(6)

Suffren and Hughes:
Wind from the S, blowing a fresh breeze.
(b) Monmouth
(b) Hero
(b) Isis
(b) Superb
(b) Burford
(f) Flamband
(f) Annibal
(f) Severe
(f) Brilliant
(f) Sphinx

74 gun Ship of the
74 gun Ship of the
50 gun Ship of the
74 gun Ship of the
74 gun Ship of the
50 gun Ship of the
74 gun Ship of the
64 gun Ship of the
80 gun Ship of the
80 gun Ship of the

Line (average crew) (24 pts)
Line (crack crew) (26 pts)
Line (crack crew) (17 pts)
Line (crack crew) (27 pts)
Line (average crew) (24 pts)
Line (average crew) (14 pts)
Line (average crew) (24 pts)
Line (average crew) (18 pts)
Line (crack crew) (31 pts)
Line (average crew) (27 pts)

Nymphe vs. Cleopatre:
Wind from the S, blowing a fresh breeze.
(b) Nymphe
(f) Cleopatre

36 gun Frigate (crack crew) (11 pts)
36 gun Frigate (average crew) (10 pts)

Mars vs. Hercule:
Wind from the S, blowing a fresh breeze.
(b) Mars
74 gun Ship of the Line (crack crew) (26 pts)
(f) Hercule
74 gun Ship of the Line (average crew) (23 pts)
Ambuscade vs. Baionnaise:
Wind from the N, blowing a fresh breeze.
(b) Ambuscade
(f) Baionnaise

32 gun Frigate (average crew) (9 pts)
24 gun Corvette (average crew) (9 pts)

Constellation vs. Insurgent:
Wind from the S, blowing a gale.
(a) Constellation
(f) Insurgent

38 gun Corvette (elite crew) (17 pts)
36 gun Corvette (average crew) (11 pts)

Constellation vs. Vengeance:
Wind from the S, blowing a fresh breeze.
(a) Constellation
(f) Vengeance

38 gun Corvette (elite crew) (17 pts)
40 gun Frigate (average crew) (15 pts)

The Battle of Lissa:
Wind from the S, blowing a fresh breeze.
(b) Amphion
(b) Active
Games

32 gun Frigate (elite crew) (13 pts)
38 gun Frigate (elite crew) (18 pts)

6-57

SysV

SAIL(6)

(b) Volage
(b) Cerberus
(1) Favorite
(1) Flore
(1) Danae
(1) Bellona
(1) Corona
(1) Carolina

SAIL(6)

22 gun Frigate (elite crew) (11 pts)
32 gun Frigate (elite crew) (13 pts)
40 gun Frigate (average crew) (IS pts)
40 gun Frigate (average crew) (15 pts)
40 gun Frigate (crack crew) (17 pts)
32 gun Frigate (green crew) (9 pts)
40 gun Frigate (green crew) (12 pts)
32 gun Frigate (green crew) (7 pts)

Constitution vs. Guerriere:
Wind from the SW, blowing a gale.
(a) Constitution
(b) Guerriere

44 gun Corvette (elite crew) (24 pts)
38 gun Frigate (crack crew) (15 pts)

United States vs. Macedonian:
Wind from the S, blowing a fresh breeze.
(a) United States
(b) Macedonian

44 gun Frigate (elite crew) (24 pts)
38 gun Frigate (crack crew) (16 pts)

Constitution vs. Java:
Wind from the S, blowing a fresh breeze.
(a) Constitution
(b) Java

44 gun Corvette (elite crew) (24 pts)
38 gun Corvette (crack crew) (19pts)

Chesapeake vs. Shannon:
Wind from the S, blowing a fresh breeze.
(a) Chesapeake
(b) Shannon

38 gun Frigate (average crew) (14 pts)
38 gun Frigate (elite crew) (17 pts)

The Battle of Lake Erie:
Wind from the S, blowing a light breeze.
(a) Lawrence
(a) Niagara
(b) Lady Prevost
(b) Detroit
(b) Q. Charlotte

20 gun Sloop (crack crew) (9 pts)
20 gun Sloop (elite crew) (12 pts)
13 gun Brig (crack crew) (5 pts)
19 gun Sloop (crack crew) (7 pts)
17 gun Sloop (crack crew) (6 pts)

Wasp vs. Reindeer:
Wind from the S, blowing a light breeze.
(a) Wasp

(b) Reindeer
6-58

20 gun Sloop (elite crew) (12 pts)
18 gun Sloop (elite crew) (9 pts)
Games

SAIL(6)

SysV

SAIL(6)

Constitution vs. Cyane and Levant:
Wind from the S, blowing a moderate breeze.
(a) Constitution
(b) Cyane
(b) Levant

44 gun Corvette (elite crew) (24 pts)
24 gun Sloop (crack crew) (11 pts)
20 gun Sloop (crack crew) (10 pts)

Pellew vs. Droits de L'Homme:
Wind from the N, blowing a gale.
(b) Indefatigable
(b) Amazon
(0 Droits L'Hom

44 gun Frigate (elite crew) (14 pts)
36 gun Frigate (crack crew) (14 pts)
74 gun Ship of the Line (average crew) (24 pts)

Aigeciras:
Wind from the SW, blowing a moderate breeze.
(b) Caesar
(b) Pompee
(b) Spencer
(b) Hannibal
(s) Real-Carlos
(s) San Fernando
(s) Argonauta
(s) San Augustine
(OIndomptable
(0 Desaix

80 gun Ship of the Line (crack crew) (31 pts)
74 gun Ship of the Line (crack crew) (27 pts)
74 gun Ship of the Line (crack crew) (26 pts)
98 gun 3 Decker SOL (crack crew) (28 pts)
112 gun 3 Decker SOL (green crew) (27 pts)
96 gun 3 Decker SOL (green crew) (24 pts)
80 gun Ship of the Line (green crew) (23 pts)
74 gun Ship of the Line (green crew) (20 pts)
80 gun Ship of the Line (average crew) (27 pts)
74 gun Ship of the Line (average crew) (24 pts)

Lake Champlain:
Wind from the N, blowing a fresh breeze.
(a) Saratoga
(a) Eagle
(a) Ticonderoga
(a) Preble
(b) Confiance
(b) Linnet
(b) Chubb

26 gun Sloop (crack crew) (12 pts)
20 gun Sloop (crack crew) (11 pts)
17 gun Sloop (crack crew) (9 pts)
7 gun Brig (crack crew) (4 pts)
37 gun Frigate (crack crew) (14 pts)
16 gun Sloop (elite crew) (10 pts)
11 gun Brig (crack crew) (5 pts)

Last Voyage of the USS President:
Wind from the N, blowing a fresh breeze.
(a) President
(b) Endymion
(b) Pomone
(b) Tenedos
Games

44 gun Frigate
40 gun Frigate
44 gun Frigate
38 gun Frigate

(elite crew) (24 pts)
(crack crew) (17 pts)
(crack crew) (20 pts)
(crack crew) (15 pts)

6-59

SAIL(6)

SysV

SAIL(6)

Hornblower and the Natividad:
Wind from the E, blowing a gale.
A scenario for you Horny fans. Remember, he sank the Natividad against heavy odds
and winds. Hint: don't try to board the Natividad, her crew is much bigger, albeit
green.
(b) Lydia
(s ) Natividad

36 gun Frigate (elite crew) (13 pts)
50 gun Ship of the Line (green crew) (14 pts)

Curse of the Flying Dutchman:
Wind from the S, blowing a fresh breeze.
Just for fun, take the Piece of cake.
(s) Piece of Cake
(f) Flying Dutchy

24 gun Corvette (average crew) (9 pts)
120 gun 3 Decker SOL (elite crew) (43 pts)

The South Pacific:
Wind from the S, blowing a strong breeze.
(a) USS Scurvy
(b) HMS Tahiti
(s) Australian
(f) Bikini Atoll

136 gun 3 Decker SOL (mutinous crew) (27 pts)
120 gun 3 Decker SOL (elite crew) (43 pts)
32 gun Frigate (average crew) (9 pts)
7 gun Brig (crack crew) (4 pts)

Hornblower and the battIe of Rosas
Wind from the E, blowing a fresh breeze.
The only battle Hornblower ever lost. He was able to dismast one
ship and stem rake the others though. See if you can do as well.
(b) Sutherland
Turenne
Nightmare
Paris
Napolean

(f)
(f)
(f)
(f)

74 gun Ship of the Line (crack crew) (26 pts)
80 gun 3 Decker SOL (average crew) (27 pts)
74 gun Ship of the Line (average crew) (24 pts)
112 gun 3 Decker SOL (green crew) (27 pts)
74 gun Ship of the Line (green crew) (20 pts)

Cape Hom:
Wind from the NE, blowing a strong breeze.
(a) Concord
(a) Berkeley
(b) Thames
(s) Madrid
(f) Musket

6-60

80 gun Ship of the Line (average crew) (27 pts)
98 gun 3 Decker SOL (crack crew) (28 pIS)
120 gun 3 Decker SOL (elite crew) (43 pIS)
112 gun 3 Decker SOL (green crew) (27 pts)
80 gun 3 Decker SOL (average crew) (27 pts)
Games

SAIL(6)

SysV

SAIL(6)

New Orleans:
Wind from the SE, blowing a fresh breeze.
Watch that little Cypress go!
(a) Alligator
(b) Firefly
(b) Cypress

120 gun 3 Decker SOL (elite crew) (43 pts)
74 gun Ship of the Line (crack crew) (27 pts)
44 gun Frigate (elite crew) (14 pts)

Botany Bay:
Wind from the N, blowing a fresh breeze.
(b) Shark
(f) Coral Snake
(f) Sea Lion

64 gun Ship of the Line (average crew) (18 pts)
44 gun Corvette (elite crew) (24 pts)
44 gun Frigate (elite crew) (24 pts)

Voyage to the Bottom of the
Wind from the NW, blowing a fresh breeze.
This one is dedicated to Richard Basehart and David Hedison.
(a) Seaview
(a) Flying Sub
(b) Mermaid
(s) Giant Squid

120 gun 3 Decker SOL (elite crew) (43 pts)
40 gun Frigate (crack crew) (17 pts)
136 gun 3 Decker SOL (mutinous crew) (27 pts)
112 gun 3 Decker SOL (green crew) (27 pts)

Frigate Action:
Wind from the E, blowing a fresh breeze.
(a) Killdeer
(b) Sandpiper
(s) Curlew

40 gun Frigate (average crew) (15 pts)
40 gun Frigate (average crew) (15 pts)
38 gun Frigate (crack crew) (16 pts)

The Battle of Midway:
Wind from the E, blowing a moderate breeze.
(a) Enterprise
(a) Yorktown
(a) Hornet
(j) Akagi
(j) Kaga
(j) Soryu

Games

80 gun Ship of the Line (crack crew) (31 pts)
80 gun Ship of the Line (average crew) (27 pts)
74 gun Ship of the Line (average crew) (24 pts)
112 gun 3 Decker SOL (green crew) (27 pts)
96 gun 3 Decker SOL (green crew) (24 pts)
80 gun Ship of the Line (green crew) (23 pts)

6-6

SysV

SAIL(6)

SAIL(6)

Star Trek:
Wind from the S, blowing a fresh breeze.
(a) Entetprise
(a) Yorktown
(a) Reliant
(a) Galileo
(k) Kobayashi Maru
(k) Klingon II
(0) Red Orion
(0) Blue Orion

450 gun Ship of the Line (elite crew) (75 pts)
450 gun Ship of the Line (elite crew) (75 pts)
450 gun Ship of the Line (elite crew) (75 pts)
450 gun Ship of the Line (elite crew) (75 pts)
450 gun Ship of the Line (elite crew) (75 pts)
450 gun Ship of the Line (elite crew) (75 pts)
450 gun Ship of the Line (elite crew) (75 pts)
450 gun Ship of the Line (elite crew) (75 pts)

IMPLEMENTATION

sail is really two programs in one. Each player starts up a process which runs his own
ship. In addition, a driver process is forked (by the first player) to run the computer
ships and take care of global bookkeeping.
Because the driver must calculate moves for each ship it controls, the more ships the
computer is playing, the slower the game will appear.
If a player joins a game in progress, he will synchronize with the other players (a rather
slow process for everyone), and then he may play along with the rest.
To implement a multi-user game, the communicating processes must use a common
temporary file as a place to read and write messages. In addition, a locking mechanism
must be provided to ensure exclusive access to the shared file. For example, sail uses a
temporary file named /tmp/#sailsink.21 for scenario 21, and corresponding file names
for the other scenarios. To provide exclusive access to the temporary file, sail uses a
technique stolen from an old game called "pubcaves" by Jeff Cohen. Processes do a
busy wait in the loop
for (n = 0; link(sync_file, sync_lock) < 0 && n < 30; n++)
sleep(2);
until they are able to create a link to a file named /tmp/#SaiIIock.?? The "??"
correspond to the scenario number of the game. Since UNIX guarantees that a link will
point to only one. file, the process that succeeds in linking will have exclusive access to
the temporary file.
CONSEQUENCES OF SEPARATE PLAYER AND DRIVER

When players do something of global interest, such as moving or firing, the driver must
coordinate the action with the other ships in the game. For example, if a player wants
to move in a certain direction, he writes a message into the temporary file requesting the
driver to move his ship. Each' 'tum," the driver reads all the messages sent from the
players and decides what happened. It then writes back into the temporary file new
values of variables, etc.

6-62

Games

SAIL(6)

SysV

SAIL(6)

The most noticeable effect this communication has on the game is the delay in moving.
Suppose a player types a move for his ship and hits return. What happens then? The
player process saves up messages to be written to the temporary file in a buffer. Every
7 seconds or so, the player process gets exclusive access to the temporary file and writes
out its buffer to the file. The driver, running asynchronously, must read in the movement command, process it, and write out the results. This takes two exclusive accesses
to the temporary file. Finally, when the player process gets around to doing another 7
second update, the results of the move are displayed on the screen. Hence, every movement requires four exclusive accesses to the temporary file (anywhere from 7 to 21
seconds depending upon asynchrony) before the player sees the results of his moves.
In practice, the delays are not as annoying as they would appear. There is room for
"pipelining" in the movement. After the player writes out a first movement message, a
second movement command can then be issued. The first message will be in the temporary file waiting for the driver, and the second will be in the file buffer waiting to be
written to the file. Thus, by always typing moves a turn ahead of the time, the player
can sail around quite quickly.

IT the player types several movement commands between two 7 second updates, only
the last movement command typed will be seen by the driver. Movement commands
within the same update "overwrite" each other, in a sense.

Games

6-63

Domain/OS SysV

SCRAMBLE(6)

SCRAMBLE(6)

NAME
scramble - tum your screen into a scramble puzzle
SYNOPSIS
scramble [-den] [ -c num ] [ -i num ] [ -p sec] [ -x size] [ -y size]
[ message-line ... ]
DESCRIPTION
scramble turns your bitmap screen into a scrambling puzzle. If you solve the puzzle,
you reclaim control of the screen. You can also quit by typing  or CTRL/Q.
If you specify any message-line arguments, scramble displays the text in the empty
square, one line per message-line. To include spaces in a single message-line, use
backslash (\) or double-quote (") in the conventional manner.
Note: It is not nice to crp(l) or rlogin(l) onto other people's nodes and run this, since
it scrambles their screens while they're trying to do important work (wink, wink).
OPTIONS

-d

Run in the current DM window, not on the entire screen.

-e

If the scrambling is to stop, just exit when done; don't give the player a

chance to solve it.

-n

Don't number the pieces.

-cnum

Scramble num times, then stop.

-inum

Keep scrambling the puzzle until you hit a recognized key (see below),
but scramble a minimum of num times (default 0).

-psec

After you solve the puzzle, pause for sec seconds before exiting so you
can admire your skill (default 0).

-x size

Make the puzzle size squares across (default 5).

-y size

Make the puzzle size squares high (default 4).

COMMANDS

t-, -7,
~,

6-64

i, !

-7/

Quit scramble.
Move a square into the empty box from the right, the left, above,
or below, respectively.
Move the entire row into the empty box from the right or left,
respectively.

Boxed arrow keys

Move the empty box to the left, to the right, up, or down.

Mouse buttons

Clicking any mouse button with the cursor in a square shifts the
entire row from that piece onward towards the empty square. If
the cursor is in neither the row nor the column of the empty square,
this has no effect.

Games

SysV

SNAKE(6)

SNAKE(6)

NAME

snake, snscore - display chase game
SYNOPSIS

lusr/games/snake [ -wn ] [ -In]
lusr/games/snscore
DESCRIPTION

snake is a display-based game which must be played on a termcap(5) supported
screen. The object of the game is to make as much money as possible without getting
eaten by the snake. The -I and -w options allow you to specify the length and width of
the field. By default the entire screen (except for the last column) is used.
You are represented on the screen by an I. The snake is 6 squares long and is
represented by S's. The money is $, and an exit is #. Your score is posted in the upper
left hand comer.
You can move around using the same conventions as vi(l), the h, j, k, and I keys work,
as do the arrow keys. Other possibilities include:
sefe

These keys are like hjkl but form a directed pad around the d key.

HJKL These keys move you all the way in the indicated direction to the same row or
column as the money. This does not let you jump away from the snake, but
rather saves you from having to type a key repeatedly. The snake still gets all
histums.
SEFC

Likewise for the upper case versions on the left.

ATPB These keys move you to the four edges of the screen. Their position on the
keyboard is the mnemonic, e.g. P is at the far right of the keyboard.

x

This lets you quit the game at any time.

p

Points in a direction you might want to go.

w

Space warp to get out of tight squeezes, at a price.
Shell escape

CTRLlZ
Suspend the snake game, on systems which support it. Otherwise an interactive shell is started up.
To earn money, move to the same square the money is on. A new $ will appear when
you earn the current one. As you get richer, the snake gets hungrier. To leave the
game, move to the exit (#).
A record is kept of the personal best score of each player. Scores are only counted if
you leave at the exit, getting eaten by the snake is worth nothing.

Games

6-65

SNAKE(6)

SysV

SNAKE(6)

As in pinball, matching the last digit of your score to the number which appears after
the game is worth a bonus.
To see who wastes time playing snake, run lusr/games/snscore.
FILES

/usr/games/lib/snakerawscores
lusr/games/lib/snake.log
lusr/games/busy

Database of personal bests
Log of games played
Program to detennine if system too busy

BUGS
When playing on a small screen, it's hard to tell when you hit the edge of the screen.
The scoring function takes into account the size of the screen. A perfect function to do
this equitably has not been devised.

6-66

Games

SysV

STRFILE(6)

STRFILE(6)

NAME

strfile, unstr - create a random access file for storing strings
SYNOPSIS

strfile [options] sourcefile [datafile]
unstr [ -0

] [

--ex ] datafile [outjile]

DESCRIPTION

strfile converts a file containing a set of strings into a data file which contains those
strings along with a seek pointer table to the beginning of each. This allows random
access to the strings. strfile's main use is to add entries to the fortune(6) database.
strfile creates datafile from a sourcefile that consists of strings separated by lines starting with "%%" or "%-". Anything following these characters on the line will be
ignored, so comments can be placed on these lines. A "%%" simply separates strings;
a "%-" separates not only strings but sections. A file can have up to four sections (in
other words, up to three delimiters). This can be used in a program-defined way.
If you do not specify a datafile on the command line, strfile creates a file named

sourcefile .dat. The datafile contains a header describing its contents, the seek pointers
to the beginning of each string, and the strings themselves (terminated by null bytes).
The format of the header is
# define MAXDELIMS 3

# define STR_RANDOM
# define STR_ORDERED

typedef struct {
unsigned long
unsigned long
unsigned long
long
ofCt
short
} STRFILE;

Oxl
Ox2

str_numstr;
/* # of strings in the file */
str_Ionglen;
/* length of longest string */
str_shortIen;
/* length of shortest string */
str_delims[MAXDELIMS]; /* delimiter markings */
str_dpos[MAXDELIMS]; /* delimiter positions */
str_flags;
/* bit field for flags */

The values in str_ delirns are the indices of the first string which follows each "%-" in
the file. The field str_Hags has the bit stcrandom set if the -r flag was specified, or
str_ordered if the --0 flag was specified.
unstr undoes the work of strfile. It serves primarily as an emergency backup in case
you accidentally delete your source file but still have your data file. unstr reads a data
file and creates a corresponding output file of raw strings and delimiters.
You can invoke unstr with the name of the data file, the name of the output file, or
both. If you specify both, unstr treats them literally as the input and output files. If
Games

6-67

SysV

STRFILE(6)

STRFILE(6)

you provide a single argument ending in ".dat," unstr assumes this to be the data file,
and writes its output to that filename stripped of the" .dat" suffix. If the single argument doesn't end in ".dat," the program treats this as the name of the output file, and
consequently reads its input from outputfile .dat.
If you want a character other than "%" as your delimiter, use the -c option to change
it.
unstr normally prints out the strings in the order they occur in the data file. If you give
it the -0 option, it will write them out in the seek pointer order, which is different if the
file was randomized or alphabetized when created. Using this option, you can created
sorted versions of your input file by using strfile -0, and then using unstr -0 to dump
them out in the table order.
OPTIONS
Following are the options for strfile. Only the
unstr.

-0

and -c options may be used with

Print a usage summary.

-ex
-s
-v

Use character x as the delimiter instead of %.
Run silently; do not summarize processing at the end of the run.
Use verbose mode; summarize processing at the end of the run (default).

-0

Order the strings alphabetically. strfile stores the strings in the same
order in the data file as in the source, but the seek pointer table will be
sorted in alphabetical order of the strings pointed to. Any initial nonalphanumeric characters are ignored. This sets the str_ordered bit in the
str_flags field of the header.

-i

Ignore case when ordering.

-r

Randomize the order of the seek pointers in the table. The strings will
be stored in the same order in datafile as in sourcefile , but the seek
pointer table will be randomized. This sets the str_random bit in the
str_flags field of the header.

EXAMPLES

To convert a file called scene which consists of lines like

%%
Hofstadter's Law:
It always takes longer than you expect, even when you take
Hofstadter's Law into account.
%%
"It is bad luck to be superstitious."
-- Andrew W. Mathis

%%

If A =B and B =C, then A =C, except where void or prohibited by law.
-- Roy Santoro

6-68

Games

SysV

STRFILE(6)

STRFILE(6)

use the following command:
$ strfile scene
"scene" converted to "scene.dat"
There were 1168 strings
Longest string: 1156 bytes
Shortest string: 0 bytes
FILES

strfile.h

Header file

SEE ALSO

fortune(6)

Games

6-69

SysV

TEACHGAMMON(6)

TEACHGAMMON(6)

NAME

teachgammon - teach the game of backgammon
SYNOPSIS

/usr/games/teachgammon
DESCRIPTION

This program teaches you the rules for backgammon, supplies hints on strategy, and
provides a tutorial consisting of a practice game against the computer.
FILES

/etc/termcap

Terminal capability database

SEE ALSO

backgammon( 6)

6-70

Games

SysV

TREK(6)

TREK(6)

NAME

trek - trekkie game
SYNOPSIS

lusr/games/trek [ [ -a ] file]
DESCRIPTION

trek is a game of space glory and war.
If a filename is given, a log of the game is written into that file. If the -a flag is given
before the filename, that file is appended to, not truncated.

trek asks what length game you would like. Valid responses are "short", "medium",
and "long". You may also type "restart", which restarts a previously saved game.
The program then prompts for the skill level, to which you must respond "novice",
"fair", "good", "expert", "commodore", or "impossible". You should nonnally
start out with "novice" and work up.
In general throughout the game, if you forget what is appropriate the game will tell you
what it expects if you type a question mark.
COMMAND SUMMARY

abandon
cloak up/down
computer request; ...
destruct
help
lrscan
phasers automatic amount
phasers manual amtl coursel spreadl ...
torpedo course [yes] angle/no
ram course distance
shell
srscan [yes/no]
status
undock
warp warpjactor

Games

capture
damages
dock
impulse course distance
move course distance

rest time
shields up/down
terminate yes/no
visual course

6-71

SysV

TIT(6)

TIT(6)

NAME

ttt - tic-tac-toe
SYNOPSIS

lusr/gameslttt
DESCRIPTION
ttl is the popular X and 0 game, but it is also a learning program that never makes the

same mistake twice.
When you begin, the program prompts you with
Accumulated knowledge? ( Yes or No )
You must respond with a yes or no. The program tells you how many "words" of
knowledge it currently has in its learning file. Then ttt states whether or not this is a
new game, prints a three-by-three grid of numbers 1-9, and prompts with "Your
move?" as shown below:
new game

123
456
789
Your move?

As you specify numbers in the grid, the program places an "X" in the location where
the number once was. After you move, the program takes a tum, placing an "0" in an
available spot. This continues until either you or the program wins by creating a vertical, horizontal, or diagonal line of three of the same characters in a row on the grid. To
exit the game, type an interrupt.
Although it learns, ttt learns slowly. It must lose nearly 80 games to completely know
the game.
Fll..ES

lusr/gamesilib/ttt.a

6-72

Learning file

Games

VINE(6)

Domain/OS SysV

VINE(6)

NAME

vine - grow vines
SYNOPSIS

/usr/games/vine [options]
DESCRIPTION

vine creates interesting growing things on your screen. To halt the kudzu-like
onslaught, type an interrupt.
OPTIONS

-e

Grow vines along the edge of the window.

-c

Grow vines from the center of the window.

-h

Exit if the RETURN key is pressed.

-r

Display in reverse video.

-i[num]

Interleave black/white leaves, one black for every num white ones. If
num is negative, perform white/black interleaving.

-s[size]

Set maximum size of/eaves (default is 2).

-d device

Use alternate device. Possible values for device are borrow (use entire
display), borrow_ne (same as borrow but doesn't clear screen first),
direct (in current window only), and bg (use display background).

-v[num]

Grow num vines from the top of the window.

-bnum

Specify num as probability of branching (default 5).

-Inum

As num increases (to maximum 35), more leaves grow from each stem.

-Rnum

Specify num different leaf directions; rotate num degrees for each leaf.

-q

Display usage information.

EXAMPLE

An especially pretty liana can be generated with
vine -e-i2
CAUTION

The -c option creates immense numbers of forks, perhaps taking over your machine for
lengthy periods.

Games

6-73

WORM(6)

SysV

WORM(6)

NAME

worm - play the growing wonn game
SYNOPSIS

lusr/gameslworm [ size]
DESCRIPTION
In worm, you are a little wonn; your body is the string of "o"s on the screen and your

head is the "@". You move with the "hjkl" keys as in the game snake(6). If you
don't press any keys, you continue in the direction you last moved. The uppercase
"HJKL" keys move you as if you had pressed the corresponding lowercase key several
times (9 for HL and 5 for JK) unless you run into a digit, in which case you stop.
On the screen you will see a digit. If your wonn eats the digit, it will grow longer; the
actual atnount depends on the digit eaten. The object of the game is to see how long
you can make the wonn grow.
The gatne ends when the wonn runs into the sides of the screen or itself. The current
score (how much the wonn has grown) is shown in the upper left comer of the screen.
The optional argument, if present, sets the initial length of the worm.
BUGS
If the initial length of the wonn is set to less than 1 or more than 75, various strange
things happen.

6-74

Gatnes

WORMS(6)

SysY

WORMS (6)

NAME
worms - animate wonns on a display terminal
SYNOPSIS

/usr/games/worms [ optiolls

1

DESCRIPTION

worms generates squinning annelid-like creatures on your display. This is an adaptation of an older program called WORM.
OPTIONS

-field

Make a "field" for the wonn(s) to eat.

-trail

Make each wonn leave a trail behind it.

-length I

Make each wonn I characters long.

-number II

Create II wonns.

FILES

/etc/termcap
BUGS

The lower right-hand character position will not be updated properly on a tenninal that
wraps at the right margin.
Tenninal initialization is not perfo~ed.

Games

6-75

WUMP(6)

SysV

WUMP(6)

NAME

wump - the game of hunt-the-wumpus
SYNOPSIS

/usr/games/wump
DESCRIPTION

wump plays the game of 'Hunt the Wumpus.' A Wumpus is a creature that lives in a
cave with several rooms connected by tunnels. You wander among the rooms, trying to
shoot the Wumpus with an arrow, meanwhile avoiding being eaten by the Wumpus and
falling into Bottomless Pits. There are also Super Bats which are likely to pick you up
and drop you in some random room.

The program asks various questions which you answer one per line; it will give a more
detailed description if you want.
This program is based on one described in People's Computer Company, 2, 2
(November 1973).

6-76

---88---

Games

Reader's Response
Please take a few minutes to send us the information we need to revise and improve our manuals from
your point of view.
Document Title: SysV Command Reference
Order No.: OOS798-AOO
Date of Publication: July, 1988
What type of user are you?
_ _ System programmer; language
_ _ Applications programmer; language __________
_ _ System maintenance person
_ _ Manager/Professional
_ _ System Administrator
Technical Professional
_ _ Student Programmer
Novice
Other
How often do you use the Apollo system? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

What pans of the manual are especially useful for the job you are doing? ____________

What additional information would you like the manual to incJude? _______________

Please list any errors, omissions, or problem areas in the manual. (Identify errors by page, section, figure,
or table number wherever possible. Specify additional index entries.) ______________

Your Name

Date

Organization
Street Address
City
No postage necessary if mailed in the U. S.

State

Zip

fold

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS

PERMIT NO. 78

CHELMSFORD, MA 01824

POST AGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

APOLLO COMPUTER INC.
Technical Publications
P.O. Box 451
Chelmsford, MA 01824

fold

Reader's Response
Please take a few minutes to send us the information we need to revise and improve our manuals from
your point of view.
Document Title: SysV Command Reference
Order No.: 005798-AOO
Date of Publication: July, 1988
What type of user are you?
_ _ System programmer; language
_ _ Applications programmer; language _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
_ _ System maintenance person
_ _ Manager/Professional
_ _ System Administrator
Technical Professional
_ _ Student Programmer
Novice
Other
How often do you use the Apollo system? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

What parts of the manual are especially useful for the job you are doing? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

What additional information would you like the manual to indude? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Please list any errors, omissions, or problem areas in the manual. (Identify errors by page, section, figure,
or table number wherever possible. Specify additional index entries.} _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Your Name

Date

Organization
Street Address
City
No postage necessary if mailed in the U. S.

State

Zip

fold

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS

PERMIT NO. 78

CHELMSFORD, MA 01824

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

APOLLO COMPUTER INC.
Technical Publications
P.O. Box 451
Chelmsford, MA 01824

fold

1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111II



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19
Create Date                     : 2015:11:12 12:22:22-08:00
Modify Date                     : 2015:11:12 11:52:51-08:00
Metadata Date                   : 2015:11:12 11:52:51-08:00
Producer                        : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:2a2f3bd2-69ab-d74a-b682-fd33e7700bc8
Instance ID                     : uuid:39621da2-20fb-0340-88d3-0cb62063db99
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseNone
Page Count                      : 826

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools